2025 Windrose Technology Inc Maintenance Manual

This maintenance manual provides Windrose information on the specifications, diagnostics, circuits, repairs, and maintenance services.

2025Windrose Technology Inc. Copyright The deadline for the information is2025,5.
Sections are collapsed — click a title to read it
1Introduction

1.1 How to Use This Manual 1.1.1 General Description

1.1.1.1 Overview

The Service Manual for WH12 Series Vehicles is developed to ensure that the maintenance technicians can gain a comprehensive understanding of Windrose commercial vehicles, and maintenance technicians' vehicle identification and maintenance abilities can be enhanced. This manual introduces the maintenance and repair of Windrose commercial vehicles in a systematic manner, especially the common fault phenomena, fault detection methods, removal and installation steps, technical requirements of maintenance, etc. of the powertrain, chassis, frame and body interiors and exteriors. Please carefully read this manual when maintaining the Windrose commercial vehicles. You should be familiar with the performance and principles of the vehicles, and perform maintenance following the steps and standards described in this manual to ensure the safety and effectiveness of the maintenance. Windrose will provide updates and revisions to this manual as needed.Your suggestions and corrections would be appreciated. Keep in mind that the information in this manual may differ from the actual situation as Windrose commercial vehicles have been improved continuously.

English abbreviationDescription
IPInstrument panel
BTMSBattery thermal management system
CMSCamera monitor system
VTDRVehicle traveling data recorder
T-GWTBOX and gateway
SSMSleeper switch module
GSMGear shift module
DCMDoor control module
AVASAcoustic vehicle alerting system
UDSUnified diagnostic service
TPMSTire pressure monitoring system
TESDTire emergency safety device
TWITire wear indicator
ACCAdaptive cruise control
AEBAutomatic emergency braking
LKALane keeping assist
LCCLane centering control
LDWLane departure warning
BSDBlind spot detection
DOWDoor open warning
TSRTraffic sign recognition
CSWCurve speed warning
IHBCIntelligent high beam control
EHPSElectro-hydraulic power steering
ABSAnti-lock braking system
EBDElectronic brake force distribution
ESCElectronic stability control
EBSElectronic braking system
HSAHill-start assist
ASRAcceleration slip regulation
EPBElectronic parking brake
ECASElectronically controlled air suspension
CDCCockpit domain control unit
BDCUBody domain control unit
NFCNFC antenna (card swipe)
AR-HUDAugmented reality head-up display

1.1.2 Maintenance Information Instructions 1.1.2.1 Definition of Abbreviations Used in the Manual

Figure p5
English abbreviationDescription
IVIIn-vehicle infotainment
CARCar control screen
IPCInstrument panel cluster
PWCPhone wireless charging
DMSDriver monitoring system
ESCLElectronic steering column lock
SJB_UPBody Intelligent Power Distribution Box
SJB_UNChassis Intelligent Power Distribution Box
IBSIntelligent battery sensor
NCMTernary lithium battery
LFPLithium iron phosphate battery
VDCPower Domain Controller
MCUElectric Drive Axle Control Unit
TCUTransmission Control Unit

1.1.2.2 Description of Arrow Symbols Used in This Manual

Legend 1. Indication arrow 4. Part number notation 2. Moving direction arrow 5. Partial enlargement frame 3. Rotation direction arrow 6. Fastener removal and installation sequence notation

Figure p7
PositionDefinitionCharacterExplain
1-3World Manufacturer Identifier1W9Windrose Technology Inc
4-8Vehicle Description Section4RBCDVehicle Configuration
9Check Digit8Check Digit
10Model YearRThe Year 2024
11Plant of ManufactureRWindrose Technology Inc
12-14WMI698Assigned by SAE
15-17Sequentially Assigned001Serial Number
Positions 4 -84RBCD4RBCF4RACC
MakeWindrose TechnologyWindrose TechnologyWindrose Technology
Line or modelTractorTractorTractor

1.2 Identification Information

1.2.1 Vehicle Identification Number 1.2.1.1 Vehicle Identification

Printing position of vehicle identification number (VIN) The vehicle identification number (VIN) is engraved near the centerline of the front axle at the outer side of the frame right side member.

1.2.1.2 VIN Deciphering

Composition of Vehicle VIN Deciphering: The VIN deciphering is made up of World Manufacturer Identifier ( WMI ) 、 Vehicle Description Section ( VDS ) 、 Check Digit ( CD ) and the Vehicle Indicator Section ( VIS ) is composed of four parts (17 digits in total). Taking the Vehicle Identification Number 1W94RBCD8RR698001 as an example, the meaning represented by each digit is shown in the following table:

1st~3rd Digit- World Manufacturer Identifier ( WMI )

The first section (1st-3rd digit) of the vehicle identification number, where: 1W9 —— Windrose Technology Inc.

4st~8rd Digit- Vehicle Description Section

There are three types in total,Respectively4RBCD 、 4RBCF 、 4RACC,The explanations are as shown in the following table:

Positions 4 -84RBCD4RBCF4RACC
series532553255325
Engine Type780kW,peak power1040kW,peak power520kW,peak power
GVWR Class888
8=Greater than 14968 kg. (33,001 lbs. and over)
Chassis3 Axles3 Axles2 Axles
Cab TypeSleeper CabSleeper CabSleeper Cab
Brake SystemAir braking systemAir braking systemAir braking system
YearCodeYearCodeYearCodeYearCode
200552014E2023P20322
200662015F2024R20333
200772016G2025S20344
200882017H2026T20355
200992018J2027V20366
2010A2019K2028W20377
2011B2020L2029X20388
2012C2021M2030Y20399
2013D2022N20311
CodeAssembly Plant
RWindrose Technology Inc
9th Digit - Check Digit

This digit is calculated by the manufacturer based on the remaining 16-digit code via a certain formula; It may be a number from 0 to 9 or letter "X",to verify the authenticity of the VIN, so as to ensure the uniqueness and validity of the VIN.

10th Digit- Model Year

Indicate the year.

11th Digit- Plant of Manufacture

Indicate the assembly plant.

12st~14rd Digit- WMI

698,Assigned by SAE 。

15st~17rd Digit- Sequentially Assigned

A 3-digit number to indicate the production sequence number of the vehicle. 1.2.1.3 Motor Nameplate Identification

Nameplate Location and Content

1. Location of motor nameplate 2. Location of motor SN

Figure p9
Figure p9
Figure p9
Figure p9

1.2.1.4 Vehicle Environmental Sign, Nameplate and VIN

Vehicle Nameplate 1. The nameplate is located on the right sliding door frame (C- pillar) of the vehicle. 2. The nameplate bears the full name of the manufacturer, the date of manufacture, the vehicle identification number (VIN), the maximum allowable gross mass of the fully loaded vehicle, the vehicle type, the axle load, the tire model, the rim size, the tire pressure, and the statement. Vehicle Emission Control Information (VECI) Label 1. The vehicle emission control information (VECI) label is affixed to the right sliding door frame (C-pillar) of the vehicle. 2. The vehicle emission control information (VECI) label contains the title, full name of the manufacturer, trademark, date of manufacture, emission control system, maximum allowable gross mass of the fully loaded vehicle, vehicle family name, vehicle category and statement. Zero-emission Power label 1. The zero-emission power label is located on the right sliding door frame (C-pillar) of the vehicle. 2. The zero-emission power label includes the title, name of manufacturer, trademark, date of manufacture, powertrain family name, model code and statement.

Figure p10
Parameter Name/ModelParameter
Mass of vehicle with NCM 3 motor (lbs)23,700
Mass of vehicle with LFP 3 motor (lbs)26,092
Gross mass of NCM 3 motor (lbs)55,116
Gross mass of LFP 3 motor (lbs)55,116
Axle load distributionNo loadNCM 3 motor front/ intermediate and rear axle (lbs)11,244/12,456
LFP 3 motor front/ intermediate and rear axle (lbs)12,236/13,856

1.3 Vehicle Specifications

1.3.1 Specifications

1.3.1.1 Vehicle Appearance Dimension and Information

Vehicle Appearance Diagram

Parameter Name/ModelParameter
Full loadNCM 3 motor front/ intermediate and rear axle (lbs)15,432/39,683
LFP 3 motor front/ intermediate and rear axle (lbs)15,432/39,683
Seating capacity (person)2
Outline dimensionLength (in)318.9
Width (in)88.39
Height (in)154.9
Wheelbase (in)183+51
TreadWheel (in)80/74/74
Minimum ground clearance (full load) (in)9.25
Minimum turning diameter (by center of front outer wheel trajectory) (ft)64
Vehicle passing angle (full load)Approach angle (°)18
Departure angle (°)26
Maximum speed (full load, on level, well-maintained road) (mph)75
Maximum gradeability (driving at constant speed on fully loaded, dry, hard road) (%)3 motor 25; 4 motor 30
Parking slope (full load, forward & reverse directions) (%)12
Maximum driving range (miles)416
Exterior noise of accelerating vehicle (dB(A))20 mph 73.9dBA, 25 mph 73.3dBA, 30 mph 75.5dBA

1.4 Lift the Vehicle

1.4.1 Description and Operation

1.4.1.1 Vehicle Lifting and Jacking

Note the Condition of Vehicle When jacking

1. Principle: Be sure to jack the vehicle in no-load state; Never jack the vehicle in loaded state. 2. The center of gravity of the vehicle will shift after removal of drive motor, high voltage battery box and other heavier parts. Make sure the vehicle supported properly to prevent the vehicle from overturning.

Precautions for Using Jack and Jack Stands

1. Be sure to follow the instructions in this manual for safe operation. 2. Never attempt to lift the tire with a crowbar so as to avoid damaging the wheels and tires. 3. Park the vehicle on level road surface and pull the parking brake. 4. Be sure to block the wheel on the other end of the diagonal that connects this wheel with the jacking position. 5. Use a jack with a rubber pad to jack the vehicle.

caution
If required, after jacking the vehicle with a jack, support the vehicle using a jack stands with rubber pad.

1.5 Warning and Precautions

1.5.1 Warning and Precautions

1.5.1.1 Warnings and Precautions

Definitions of "Warning", "Caution" and "Tip"

"Warning", "Caution" and "Tip", both general and specific, are used for the diagnosis and repair procedures in this service manual. This manual, developed by Windrose, aims to provide repair information to help after-sales service technicians in diagnosis and repair of the systems so as to ensure normal operation of the vehicle. However, certain procedures may pose danger to technicians if they do not operate using the methods recommended herein. "Warning", "Caution", and "Tip" are given to prevent the above-mentioned dangers from happening, but not all dangers are foreseeable. This kind of information is prominently displayed in the service manual. This kind of information is prepared to avoid the following conditions: – Serious injury to personnel. – Vehicle damage. – Unnecessary vehicle repairs. – Unnecessary replacement of parts. – Improper repair or replacement of vehicle components.

Definition of "Warning"

"Warning" indicates that you must or you are prohibited to take measures as necessary. If the "Warning" is ignored, the following consequences may occur: – Serious injury to personnel. – Serious personal injury to the driver and/or passengers in the vehicle, in case the vehicle is not repaired properly.

Definition of "Caution"

"Caution" indicates that you must pay special attention to necessary or prohibited measures. If "Caution" is ignored, the following consequences may occur: – Vehicle damage. – Unnecessary vehicle repairs. – Unnecessary replacement of parts. – Abnormal operation or performance of the maintained systems or components. – Damage to related systems or parts. – Damage to fasteners, basic tools or special tools. – Leakage of coolant, lubricant or other major fluids.

Definition of "Tip"

"Tip" states or emphasizes the necessity of employing diagnosis or repair procedures, aiming to: – Define procedures. – Provide additional information for completing a procedure. – Describe the reason for operation as per the recommended procedures. – Provide information that facilitate the completion of the procedures in a more efficient manner. – Provide technicians with previous experiences to make the procedure easier.

Precautions for Charging
warning !

1. High voltage and large current may be induced in the high voltage system during charging. Please strictly follow the operation procedures, otherwise there may be risk of electric shock. Read throughout the charging section carefully before charging. 2. If you have been implanted with a pacemaker or cardiovascular defibrillator, note the following while charging: – Do not stay in the vehicle; – Do not enter the vehicle. 3. Before charging, check the skin and shell of the charging cable are damaged; If so, please contact the authorized dealer of the vehicle for repair or replacement. use damaged charging cables. 4. minors are prohibited to use the charging plug because it is a high voltage electrical device. minors are prohibited to operate during charging. 5. Make sure the charging port and charging plug are free of water, other debris, rust or corrosion. If there is water or rust on the charging port or charging plug, do not charge avoid short circuit or electric shock, or even death. 6. Keep the power supply equipment, the vehicle to be charged, the charging cable and the charging plug away from rain, snow and water. Do not place them close to the fire source. 7. If there is moisture near the charging port during charging, disconnect the power supply and then the plug at the power supply end while ensuring safety (do not touch the metal sheet of the charging plug with your hands or other body parts, so as not to cause safety accidents in case the charging system is faulty),unplug charging plug at the vehicle end. Wear insulating gloves if necessary, and contact the authorized dealer of the vehicle as soon as possible for testing and confirmation. 8. If the vehicle has been exposed to wet conditions before charging, please dry the body near the charging port before opening the charging port for charging. Make sure there is no residual moisture in the charging socket and its vicinity. 9. When the charging system is working, do not use the charging device in an environment where gasoline, coatings and flammable items are used or stored, as sparks may be generated in the charging system. 10. Please keep the charging port dry and clean during charging, and take corresponding measures if necessary. 11. In case the weather changes (strong wind, rain or snow) abruptly during charging, check the charging plug is secure and dry; do not touch the charging cable and the body when encountering lightning. 12. Corresponding protective measures should be taken during minors. Children and other non-related personnel should be prevented from approaching the charging vehicle and charging cable as much as possible. 13. When charging, do not squeeze the charging cable to avoid electric shock or fire. 14. When charging, do not place the charging cable in the vehicle. 15. When charging, the charging cable must be kept away from fire source. 16. Note the following when charging: – Do not touch the metal part of the charging port and charging plug; – Do not touch the electric vehicle and any devices if electric sparks appear in an electric vehicle or on-board charger. Failure to do so will result in an electric shock, or even cause death or injury. 17. The ambient temperature of the vehicle is recommended to be 32*F - 95*F during charging of the vehicle. Do not charge the vehicle under low or high temperatures(it is not recommended to charge the vehicle out these parameters). 18. Do not charge the vehicle under direct sunlight and other high temperature environment in summer. 19. During charging, make sure the charging cable extends in a natural manner and do not hang the charging cable in the air. 20. When any unusual smell or smoke is detected on the vehicle, immediately disconnect the power supply in a safe manner. 21. Do not plug and unplug the charging plug with wet hands or standing in places with water, liquid, and snow. This may result in serious injury or death. 22. When removing the charging plug, you should hold the insulating part of the plug, Do not drag or pull the charging cable. 23. Do not remove or modify the charging port without permission. 24. Please read the operation manual on the charging equipment carefully before fast charging, and make sure

the fast charging plug is connected and locked. Failure to do so will cause malfunction of the vehicle or charging equipment. 25. Minors are prohibited from charging the vehicle. 26. Do not plug and unplug the fast charging plug without permission during charging. 27. Charging or stop of charging should be performed in strict accordance with the operating procedures indicated on the DC charging instructions. 28. If smoke or unusual odors are detected at the charging port or abnormality is found inside of the vehicle, you should press the emergency stop button on the DC charging pile in time to stop charging, evacuate the personnel around the vehicle and follow the on-site procedures. 29. Before fast charging, check for any debris, dust, water, etc. inside the fast charging socket (including the jack). If any, do not charge. Remove debris and dust inside the fast charging socket (including the jack) and dry the socket. The charging cannot proceed until the charging socket is made clean and dry. 30. Before fast charging, check the fast charging socket jack is damaged, ablated or discolored. In case any of the above phenomena is found, do not charge and contact an authorized dealer. 31. To prevent the charging system from malfunctioning, please note the following: – Close the protective cover of the vehicle charging socket and then the charging port cover; – Avoid collisions with the charging plug; – Avoid crushing the charging cable; – Do not pull or entangle the charging cable; – Do not place the charging cable near a heat sources. 32. After charging is completed, close the charging socket protective cover and the charging port cover. 33. Before starting the vehicle, make sure the charging plug is removed from the charging port. 34. As the fast charging plug is heavy, you should plug and unplug vertically as carefully as possible to prevent damage to the vehicle or the charging equipment. 35. The charging may stop if you accidentally touch the fast charging plug button during fast charging. When this occurs, you need to pull out the charging plug and recharge.

Precautions for Maintenance Safety
warning !

1. The maintenance personnel should have received training on high voltage safety and passed relevant Courses by Windrose or an authorized partner. 2. The maintenance operator should not wear metal jewelry, such as watches and rings, and should not have metal objects in the pockets of work clothes, such as keys, metal shell pens, mobile phones, and coins. 3. The maintenance should be carried out in a dry environment by personnel who are kept dry as well. 4. The maintenance technician should ensure facilities and tools are in good condition, prior to starting work. 5. At least two people should be present when carrying out maintenance on the high voltage system of the vehicle. They can provide proper safety procedures and provide first aid and contact authorities if an incedent occurs. 6. Random access to high voltage components on the vehicle is not allowed in non-assembly or non-repair period. 7. Do not carry out maintenance in an environment with explosive, flammable, corrosive gases, steam, etc. Otherwise, it may cause fire, explosion and other accidents. 8. When maintaining the all-in-one controller, it must stop running, the low voltage power supply must be disconnected, and the high voltage must be cut off after 10 minutes (when the capacitor discharge of the MCU and between the positive and negative power supplies of other high voltage load end finishes). Otherwise it may cause personal injury. 9. The mounting bolts and lead connecting bolts must be tightened to appropriate torque. Otherwise, the MCU may face abnormality in use, causing personal injury and equipment damage. 10. If an abnormality is found in the vehicle when it is re- inspected after maintenance, stop operation in time and check the equipment. Otherwise, it may impose a risk of personnel injury or equipment damage. 11. When parking or storing the vehicle is to be maintained and under maintenance, keep away from environments.

Warning for Vehicle Lifting

warning !

To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury, and even death, when disassembling main components from the vehicle and supporting the vehicle with a lift, a jack stand shall be used to support the vehicle at the position where the component is to be removed. Warning for Handling Anti-lock Braking System Components

warning !

Certain parts of the ABS cannot be repaired alone, and attempting to remove or disconnect certain system parts may result in personal injury and/or improper system operation. Therefore, only components that are approved for removal and installation can be repaired. Warning for Equipment Permitted for Repair After Collision

warning !

To avoid personal injury from exposure to toxic fumes generated in (zinc oxide) metal arc welding or plating when grinding/cutting any type of metal or sheet moulded parts, it is essential to work in a well-ventilated area and wear approved respirators, goggles, earplugs, welder gloves and protective clothing. Lock Out Tag Out

warning !

When a technician is inspecting the reported faulty condition, the vehicle shall be locked out and tagged out by the repairing technician and may not be operated. Warning for Disconnecting Battery

warning !
Before repairing any electrical components, confirm that the power supply of the start switch is in "OFF" mode, and all electrical loads are "OFF (turned off)" unless otherwise stated in the operating procedures. If tools or equipment can easily contact exposed live electrical terminals, disconnect the battery negative cable. Failure to follow of these safety instructions may result in personal injury and/or damage to the vehicle and vehicle components.

Warning for Brake Dust

warning !
The following operations are not permitted when the wheel brake components are repaired:
– Cleaning of the wheel brake components with dry brush or compressed air.
warning !

Certain models or after-sales brake components added may contain fibers which may be mixed in the dust and once inhaled will seriously damage human body. The dust accumulated on the brake components must be removed using a damp cloth. Warning for Replacement of Brake Air Pipe

warning !

Install and fix the brake air pipe with care during replacement, and be sure to use the correct fasteners, otherwise the brake air pipe and the brake system may be damaged and thus cause personal injury. Warning for Inhalation of R-134a

warning !
Do not inhale A/C refrigerant R-134a and lubricating oil vapour or mist, because they can irritate your eyes, nose and pharynx when exposed to them. Work in a well-ventilated area. When discharging R-134a from the A/C system, use repair equipment (R-134a recovery equipment) certified to meet the requirements of SAEJ2210. In the event of accidental fluid discharge in the system, the work area must be ventilated before repair works are continued. For additional information on health and safety, please contact the refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.

Warning for Cracks on Windows

warning !
Follow the state and federal DOT guidelines for window damage and replacement.

Warning for Handling of Window and Metal Plate

warning !
When disposing any glass or metal plate with sharp edges or burrs, wear approved goggles and gloves so as to reduce the risk of personal injury.

Warning for Road Test

warning !

Test the vehicle on the road in accordance with traffic regulations while ensuring safety. Never try any operation that may endanger vehicle control. Violating the above safety instructions will cause serious personal injury and damage to the vehicle. Precautions Regarding Removal of Exterior Label

caution

When removing labels/nameplates, use plastic flat- edged tools to avoid damage to paints. Precautions Regarding Fasteners

caution
Please use appropriate fasteners at the correct position. The number of the component to replace the fastener must be correct. For fasteners that need to be replaced or the fasteners that require the use of thread- locking adhesives or sealant, it is particularly specified in the repair procedures that, paints, lubricants, or corrosion inhibitors shall not be applied on fasteners or fastener attachment surfaces, unless otherwise noted. The coatings may affect the torque and clamping force of the fastener, thus damaging the fastener. When installing fasteners, you must follow the correct tightening sequence and tightening torque to avoid damage to parts and systems.

Precautions Regarding Disposing Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive Components

caution
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can damage many solid- state electrical components. Components that are susceptible to electrostatic discharge are not always marked with an electrostatic discharge symbol, hence you must take care when disposing electrical components. Please observe the following safety instructions to avoid damage from electrostatic discharge:
• Before repairing any electronic components, disconnect the power line, and touch a metal ground point to discharge static electricity in your body (especially after sliding on a vehicle seat).
• Do not touch the exposed terminals which may be connected to a circuit that can be easily damaged by electrostatic discharge.
• When repairing the connector, do not touch the exposed terminals with tools.
• Do not remove components from the protective casing unless required.
• The following operations are not allowed unless specifically required by diagnostic procedures:

– axle or ground components or connectors. – Connect the test equipment probe to the component or the connector. When using the test probe, connect the ground lead at first.

Before opening the protective casing of the component, ground it first. Do not place solid components on a metal workbench or on top of a radio and other electrical equipment. Precautions Regarding Avoiding Twist or Bend When Installing Hoses

caution

The inlet and outlet hoses shall not be twisted during the installation process, and the hoses shall not be bent or deformed to facilitate installation, otherwise components may be damaged. Precautions Regarding Damage to Machined Surfaces

caution
Do not cut, scratch or damage the sealing surface. If the sealing surface is a machined surface, it may be damaged, resulting in leakage.

Precautions Regarding Power System Control Module and Electrostatic Discharge

caution
Do not touch the connector pins or welded components on the circuit board to prevent damage to the electronic control module on the vehicle as a result of electrostatic discharge.

Precautions Regarding Use of Scan Tool

caution
Before diagnosing the vehicle, you must pay attention to the following conditions, otherwise the control module may be damaged.
– The software version of the scan tool and terminals must be up to date.
– The vehicle battery must be fully charged with a voltage of 12-14V.
– The scan tool and terminal cables must be securely connected.
– When programming the control module, the battery charger must not be connected to the battery.

Precautions Regarding Steering Wheel in Steering Limit Position

caution
The steering wheel shall not be set to the steering limit position for more than 5s, otherwise the steering motor may be damaged.

Precautions Regarding Test Probe

caution
Do not insert test equipment probes (digital multimeter, etc.) into the harness connector or fuse box terminals. A majority of the terminals will be deformed as a result of the diameter of the test probes, leading to poor contact and system failure. Thus, special tools must be used to detect the terminals from the front. Never use a paper clip or other substitutes to detect the terminals.
caution
When using special tools to test the components, make sure that the selected terminal test adapter matches the size of the connector terminal. Do not choose the terminal test adapter visually, since the hole of certain connector terminals may be larger than the actual terminal in the hole. The use of large terminal test adapter can damage the terminals.

Precautions Regarding Damage to Edges of Windows

caution
To avoid damage to vehicle window due to impact of exposed edges, the window must be 1 mm (0.025 in.) lower than the sheet metal surface.

1.6 Health and Safety

1.6.1 Description and Operation

1.6.1.1 Note

A number of operations related to vehicle maintenance and repair are dangerous, and can affect personal safety or health. This section specifies partial of the relevant hazardous operations, materials and equipment, and corresponding safety regulations to avoid these hazards. However, this section does not include all matters related to health and safety, therefore all operations and procedures as well as the disposing of materials shall be executed on the basis of ensuring safety and health. Before using any product, you should read the instructions for use of products provided by the manufacturer or supplier.

1.6.1.2 Acid and Alkali

The acid and alkali include corrosive sodium carbonate and sulfuric acid. They are used for cleaning of batteries and other materials. They can irritate or erode eyes, skin, sense of smell and throat, or burn human body and damage ordinary protective clothing. In order to prevent acid or alkali from splashing onto your eyes, skin and clothing, you should wear suitable protective clothing, gloves and goggles. Also, you should not inhale relevant sprays. Washing equipment, such as eye wash bottles, shower heads, and soap, shall be provided in the vicinity, so that you can use them immediately whenever a spill occurs. Warning marks indicating eye damage shall be placed at a conspicuous location.

1.6.1.3 A/C Refrigerant

If A/C refrigerant gets in your skin, it may cause frostbite. The instructions provided by the manufacturer must be followed. Avoid exposed skin from directly contacting the refrigerant. You must wear appropriate goggles and protective gloves when operating. If the refrigerant gets in your skin or eyes, immediately wash the affected area with water. Use suitable rinsing solution to wash your eyes. Do not rub, and seek medical assistance as needed.

A/C Refrigerant — Operations to be Avoided

Do not store refrigerant in a place exposed to sunlight or heat sources. – When filling refrigerant, do not place the refrigerant bottles upright, and their valves shall be facing downward. – Do not expose refrigerant bottles to frost and snow. – Do not drop the refrigerant bottle. – Under no circumstances should the refrigerant be discharged directly into the atmosphere. – Do not mix refrigerants, such as R12 (dichlorodifluoromethane) and R-134a (tetrafluoroethane).

1.6.1.4 Adhesives and Sealants

Cautions Regarding the Use of Adhesive/Sealant

Before using the adhesive/sealant, you must clean the surface of the position to be applied with adhesive/sealant and wipe it with a special cleaning agent to ensure the bonding effect. Do not allow room temperature curing sealant to enter the blind threaded hole, otherwise a hydraulic locking effect will be generated from the fastener during tightening, causing damage to the fastener and other components and making it impossible to obtain the correct clamping force when the fastener is used for tightening. Under such circumstance, the sealing effect may be weakened, making it impossible for the fastener to play the role of tightening correctly. Then the components will be loosened or separated, which will cause serious damage to the parts.

Health & safety

The materials used in adhesives/sealants contain harmful substances. Long-term exposure to them can cause acute and chronic poisoning, occupational and skin diseases and other diseases. When applying adhesive/sealant, use a ventilation device to maintain ventilation in the workplace; Wear protective gloves, masks, protective clothing, etc. during operation. Wash your hands carefully after work, and keep the workplace clean, tidy, and sanitary. – Waste adhesive/sealant or solvent-contaminated waste shall be removed in a timely manner and shall not be accumulated for a long time. – Generally, the products shall be stored in a non-smoking area, and care shall be taken when using them. Use an applicator or container for construction as much as possible.

Repair by Adhesives/Sealants

Generally, in the event of a failure or accident, the vehicle body will be deformed, the steel plate will be cracked, and welding spots will be falling off. Sometimes, the chassis and other assembly components may be damaged locally, resulting in the falling off and destruction of certain adhesive/

sealant products. In the process of vehicle repair, adhesives with same performance shall be selected according to the material and functional requirements of the components. The adhesives/sealants that can be used in the process of vehicle repair are listed below.

Body Repair

If adhesives applied on the vehicle body fall off or are cracked as a result of deformation or cracking of body interior trims and steel plates, during the repair process, the positions applied with adhesives shall be made up with new adhesives. – First you should remove the adhesives on the surface of the body using a knife, and the remaining adhesives can be wiped with alcohol; – Use a special cleaning agent to wipe the area applied with adhesives so that no impurities such as residual adhesive is kept on the surface applied with adhesives. – Then apply repair adhesive on the original position that is applied with adhesives to ensure the effect of bonding and sealing.

Parts Repair

If certain interior trim parts and other positions are damaged, repair shall be carried out through bonding and sealing. Before applying the sealant, clean the bonding surface so that the bonding effect will not be affected by burrs and cracks.

1.6.1.5 Asbestos

Inhaling asbestos dust can cause lung damage and eventually lead to cancer. Wet the asbestos dust waste during disposal, place it in a sealed container and mark clearly on the surface of the container for convenient and safe disposal. If you want to try cutting or drilling on materials containing asbestos, you should wet the materials and then use only hand tools or low-speed power tools.

1.6.1.6 Battery Acid

The gas released during charging is explosive. Never use open fire near the charged battery or the battery that has recently been charged. Good ventilation must be maintained.

1.6.1.7 Chemical Materials

Solvents, sealants, adhesives, coatings, resin foams, battery acid fluids, coolant, lubricants, greases and other chemical materials should be used, stored and handled with great care. They may be toxic, harmful, corrosive, irritating or highly flammable, and may produce peculiar smell and dust with high level of danger. The effects of long-term overexposure to the chemical environment may be immediate or chronic, transient or permanent, cumulative, superficial, life-threatening, or the lifespan may be affected.

Chemical Materials — Operations to be Executed

– Carefully read and follow the warnings and cautions specified on the raw material container, as well as any accompanying leaflets, posters, or other instructions for use. The health and safety information form for the raw material can be obtained from the manufacturer. – In case of contact with the chemical material, refer to the MSDS sheet for proper safety instructions and procedures. – Strictly follow the working procedure instructions and wear protective clothing to avoid direct contact with skin and eyes. – During the process of handling chemical materials, you must wash yourself before taking a break, eating, smoking, or using toilet facilities. – Keep the work area clean and tidy and do not spill chemical materials.

Chemical Materials — Operations to be Avoided

– Unless specified by the manufacturer, the chemical materials shall not be mixed at will; Certain chemicals will form other toxic or harmful chemicals, or release other toxic and harmful gases when mixed and may lead to other accidents such as explosions. – Do not spray chemical materials in an enclosed environment. – Unless specified by the manufacturer, the chemicals materials should not be heated, as certain chemical materials are highly flammable, and others may release toxic and harmful gases. – Do not leave the container of chemical materials open, because emitted gases from the container may accumulate to such an extent that toxicity, harm or explosion may occur. Some gases are heavier than air and thus they can accumulate in an enclosed space. – Do not put chemical materials in unlabeled containers. – Do not use chemical materials to clean your hands and clothing. Chemicals, especially solvents and fuels, can make the skin dry, cause allergies, skin inflammation or directly absorb toxic and harmful substances through the skin, affecting health. – Do not use empty containers to store other chemical materials at will, unless the containers have been cleaned under supervision. – Do not sniff or smell chemical materials at will. Short- term exposure to high concentrations of gas may still cause poisoning or injury.

1.6.1.8 Dust

Powder, ash and dust may be irritating, harmful or toxic. Do not inhale powdered chemical materials and raising dust

resulted from dry friction operations. In the condition of poor ventilation, wear protective equipment such as breathing mask to prevent inhalation of dust. Fine dust of flammable substances may lead to hazards such as explosion. Avoid explosions and fire sources.

1.6.1.9 Electric Shock

Improper use of electrical equipment without conforming to the instructions for use or misuse of equipment in good condition can both cause electric shock. Electrical equipment must be maintained within the specified time and tested frequently. Faulty equipment should be marked and preferably moved outside the work area. Wires, cables, plugs, and sockets shall not be worn, twisted, cut, cracked, or damaged in other ways. The electrical equipment and wires shall not come into contact with water. Ensure that electrical equipment is protected by appropriate fuse. It is forbidden to misuse electrical equipment, and do not use equipment with any hazard that may lead to a fault, otherwise personal safety may be affected. Ensure that the cables of mobile electrical equipment will not be pinched and damaged. Basic first aid training must be performed for specialized electrical operators. In the event of an electric shock: – Turn off the power supply before touching the victim. – If the power supply cannot be turned off, disconnect the power of the victim with dry insulator material. – If you have received specialized first aid training, perform on-site first aid immediately. – Seek medical assistance.

1.6.1.10 Fiber Isolation

It refers to isolation of noise and sound. The fibrous nature of the surface and sharp edges can cause skin allergy. During the operation, the operating procedure instructions shall be followed and you must wear gloves to avoid excessive skin contact with the fibers.

1.6.1.11 Fire

A large number of materials related to vehicle repair are extremely flammable. Some materials can produce toxic and harmful gases after ignition. Follow fire safety regulations when storing and handling flammable materials or solvents, especially near electrical equipment or welding operations. Before using electrical and welding equipment, confirm that there are no hazards of fire. When welding or using heating equipment, a suitable fire extinguisher should be prepared around the work area.

1.6.1.12 First Aid

Legal requirements shall be complied with, and it's better to provide personnel who have received specialized training in first aid in the workplace. If something splashes into your eyes, wash with water for at least 10 minutes. If your skin is contaminated, wash the contaminated area with soap and water. If you have frostbite, immerse the affected area in ice or cold water. Persons who inhale toxic gases should be immediately transferred to a place with fresh air. If adverse reactions continue to occur, they should be immediately sent to the hospital for medical assistance. If you accidentally swallow certain liquids, inform the physician of the information on the container or label. Do not induce vomiting unless instructed to do so by the label.

1.6.1.13 Polyurethane Foam

Cured foam is used as cushion pad material for seats and trims. Follow the manufacturer's instructions. Assemblies that have not gone through chemical actions are irritating and may be harmful to the skin and eyes. Thus, you should wear gloves and goggles during operation. People with chronic respiratory diseases, asthma, bronchial problems, etc., or those with hereditary allergies should not handle or approach uncured substances. The spare part, vapor or spray mist of uncured assemblies can cause direct irritation and allergic reactions and can be toxic and harmful. Do not breathe vapor or spray mist. These materials must be used in a well-ventilated area with breathing protections. Do not remove the mask immediately after spraying, which means you should wait for the vapor and spray mist to completely dissipate before you remove the mask.

The burning of uncured assemblies and cured foam will produce toxic and harmful gases. During foam operations, it is prohibited to smoke and use open flames and electrical equipment unless the vapor and the spray mist are completely removed. Thermal cutting of foam materials or other special foam materials should be performed in a well-ventilated environment.

1.6.1.14 General Tools and Equipment Used in Workshop

It is importance to always keep all tools and equipment in good working condition and operate them correctly in use. Only use tools for the intended use. The load on cranes, jacks, axle, chassis bracket, or slings and other equipment should not exceed the maximum limit load they can withstand. Damages caused by overloading may not emerge immediately and but they can cause serious accidents when they are used for the next time. Do not use tools or equipment that have been damaged or in poor working condition, especially some high speed equipment such as grinding wheels. Damaged grinding wheel can shatter without warning and cause serious injury. Wear appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) when grinding wheels, chisels or blasting equipment. Wear an appropriatepersonal protective equipment (PPE) when using sandblasting equipment, handling asbestos- containing materials, or using spraying equipment. A ventilation equipment that is capable to control the content of dust, spray and soot in the environment should be provided.

1.6.1.15 Noises

Extremely high level noises may be heard when performing certain operations, which may result in hearing damage. In this case, you should wear appropriate hearing protection device.

1.7 Noise, Vibration and Abnormal Noise

1.7.1 Description and Operation

1.7.1.1 Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Wind/Air Noise
Note
When the technician checks the faulty position, the assistant should drive the vehicle, otherwise, it may cause personal injury.

To accurately determine the location of wind noise, it is necessary to test drive in the vehicle. Generally speaking, wind noise comes from major and minor leakages, and if the leakage is not eliminated during repair process, the only way is to reduce rather than eliminate the wind noise. During test drive, the maintenance personnel should carry the following tools to help diagnose the exact location of wind noise: • Echometer • Masking tape • Caulking strip • Marker pen • Screwdriver Carry out road test in accordance with the following procedures: • Select a route in which straight streets run in east, south, west, and north directions. • Select a street with less traffic or reduced noise to avoid affecting the test. • Conduct road tests under a speed at which the customer thinks the noise is the most obvious or the noise is heard. It is strictly forbidden to exceed the legal speed limit. • Wind noise heard in the following situations is deemed as exterior wind noise. – Wind noise can be heard when driving immediately after lowering the window. – The wind noise disappears immediately when pasting the tape to individual trim sealing strips and gaps. • Interior wind noise is attributable to air escaping from the vehicle. Adopt the following methods to eliminate the noise: – Paste tape to the pressure relief valve on the body door lock post once the location of leakage is detected. Air pressure can immediately establish in the vehicle, intensifying the wind noise. – Confirm the location of leakage using a echometer. – Paste masking tape to temporarily repair the leakage. – Keep performing the road test to check if the wind noise is completely eliminated or check for other locations of leakage. – After confirming all locations of leakage through road test, return to the repair workshop to carry out permanent repair using professional, reasonable positioning methods and sealing materials.

Vibration

Most of the high speed vibrations are caused by the loss of wheel dynamic balance. If vibrations maintain after dynamic balance, possible causes include: – The tire is out of round – The rim is out of round – There is hardness deviation in tires All causes of vibrations cannot be detected by measuring the free runout of tires and wheels. The three causes as mentioned above are called load radial runout. The faulty vehicle must be repaired by replacing the original tire and wheel assemblies with known tire and wheel assemblies in good condition. Low speed vibrations that occur at a speed below 64 km/h are usually caused by runout. High speed vibrations that occur at a speed above 64 km/h are usually caused by unbalance or runout.

Correction of Uneven Tires

Generally two ways can be used to correct tires that has been properly balanced but still vibrate. One way is to use an automatic machine tool to mount the tires on the machine tool and remove a small amount of rubber from the high points on the tread on the left and right sides of the tire by means of grinding. Corrections of tires in this way are usually permanent. Standardized operations will not have a noticeable impact on the appearance of the tire and the service life of the tire tread. It is not advisable to repair tires using edged machine tools during corrections of tires, as this will shorten the service life of the tires and cannot tackle the root of the problem. Another way is to remove the tire and rotate the tire 180° on the rim. This method can be used only when the cause of vibration is determined, i.e., the tire and wheel assembly through diagnosis and confirmation. Vibrations can occur in intact wheel assembly when using this method.

Abnormal Sound

The door squeaks in use Check whether the door hinge lacks lubrication. – Operate the door back and forth and listen carefully whether the door squeaks – Lubricate the door hinge with rust remover and apply grease.

1.7.1.2 Repair Guidance

Wind/Air Noise

Exterior wind noise Seal the clearance (if any) on the vehicle with special sealing strip.

Vibration

On-board balancing of wheels and tires On-board balancing can correct vibrations caused by unbalanced brake disc. 1. When performing dynamic balancing on the vehicle, it is forbidden to remove the balance weight installed during wheel dynamic balancing under the vehicle. 2. If the balance weight to be added for dynamic balancing weighs above 25 g (1 lb), two balance weights can be installed on the inner rim and the outer rim respectively. Under-car balancing of wheels and tires Carry out wheel dynamic balancing using an electronic under- car balancing machine. The dynamic balancing machine is easy to use and can be use for both static balancing and dynamic balancing. Unlike on-board balancing, the under-car balancing machine cannot be used for correction of unbalanced brake discs. The under-car balancing can overcome this weakness by fixing the wheels to the balancing machine and passing a cone through the back of the center hole rather than through the wheel nut hole. Directional assembly of wheels and tires Wheels and tires are assembled in the factory by matching the radially thick position of the tire (also known as the high point) to the position on wheel with minimum radius (also known as the low point). The high point of the tire is initially marked with red paint or a label is attached to the outer wall of the tire when leaving the factory. The low point of the wheel is at the position the valve core. Before removing the tire from the wheel, mark the position of the valve core on the tire to restore the tire to its original position.

Abnormal Sound

Repair of Abnormal Sounds Abnormal sounds mainly arise from relative movement between vehicle parts which actually should not exist. Three ways can be adopted to repair abnormal sounds: – Securely fasten the parts to eliminate relative movement during driving. – Separate the parts so that the parts do not contact each other while working. – Isolate the parts so that they do not make abnormal sounds during movement. Uniform, low-friction surfaces can eliminate viscous sliding between parts.

1.8 Water Leakage

1.8.1 Description and Operation

1.8.1.1 Diagnostic Information and Procedures

Diagnosis of Water Leakage
caution
Repair cannot proceed until all positions with water leakage are detected. Random repair can only temporarily plug the leakage position, possibly increasing the difficulty in future repairs. Continue to carry out local tests within overall range to detect all positions with water leakage.

The repair of body water leakage should be performed through proper tests and diagnosis. Repair water leakage by adjusting incorrectly positioned parts and using appropriate repair materials. In the first place, determine the circumstances in which the water leakage may occur. For example, water leakage only occurs when the vehicle is parked on a slope. Second, if an approximate leakage position is found, use a water hose or breather hose to determine the exact leakage point. If the leakage position is not obvious, use a rain test bench to determine the exact leakage position. This may involve the removal of partial interior trim panels or partial parts.

Preparation for Water Leakage Test

– The vehicle is designed to operate under normal environmental conditions. – The design criteria for the sealing materials and parts have taken into account the sealing strength required for natural environmental factors. However, these specifications cannot take into account all human conditions. – The water leakage test procedures are related to natural environment and can determine the driving performance of the vehicle under normal conditions. – The first step of diagnosing leakage is to determine the conditions under which leakage occurs. If the approximate leakage position can be identified, isolate the exact water inlet using a water hose or breather hose. The repair of leakage may involve the removal of partial trim panels or parts. – Leakage in doors or windows may not be necessarily attributable to poor sealing of the sealing strip. Perhaps the water leakage in these positions can be repaired through adjustment at these positions.

Water Hose Test
Note
Do not use a water hose with a nozzle.

1. Arrange an assistant and let it enter the vehicle to determine the exact leakage position. 2. Carry out detection beginning from the bottom of the window. 3. Slowly move the hose upwards until it passes through the entire roof.

Breather Pipe Test
Note
Breather hose test is only applicable to fully cured adhesives. The adhesive layer may be damaged, increasing leakage points when applying this method.

1. Dilute the liquid cleaner in a certain percentage and fill it in a spray bottle to spray it onto the edge of the window. Spray at the bottom in the first place, and then gradually spray the entire roof in a bottom-up manner.

Note
The pressure of compressed air should not exceed 205 kPa (29.75 psi).

2. Let an assistant enter the vehicle while carrying an air hose. 3. Ask the assistant to aim the compressed air at the suspicious leakage position. If leakage is detected at a position, the liquid cleaner will turn to bubbles at the leakage position.

1.8.1.2 Repair Guidance

Repair of Water Leakage in Body

The repair of leakage may involve the removal of certain trim panels or parts depending on the leakage position. 1. Cut the adhesive applied to the seam in the leakage position from inside or outside the vehicle. 2. Clear and remove all old adhesive residues from the leakage position. 3. Apply sealant to the body and seams at the leakage position that have been cleaned. 4. Wait a few hours for the seam adhesive to fully cure. 5. Detect if the leakage persists. 6. Install the removed trim parts.

Repair of Water Leakage in Fixed Windows

The repair of leakage may involve the removal of certain trim panels or parts depending on the leakage position.

1. Determine the exact position of water leakage 2. If leakage is found on the edge of the front windshield, apply special seam adhesive to repair the leakage or replace the front windshield with new one that has been sealed. 3. If leakage is found on the side of a fixed window, apply special adhesive or replace the window with a new one that has been sealed.

Figure p27
Figure p27

1.9 Power Down of the High-Voltage System

1.9.1 Power Down of the High-Voltage System

1.9.1.1 High Voltage Removal from Inside the Vehicle

warning !
1. Be sure to wear appropriate personal protective equipment when touching any high voltage components;
2. Do not touch the high voltage battery components even though the high voltage system has been deactivated. Be sure to wear appropriate personal protective equipment if it is necessary to operate the high voltage battery components;
3. If any damage is found in the high voltage components, be sure to wrap the damaged parts with the insulation tapes.

1. Park the vehicle, apply the EPB. 2. Open the trim cover plate on the lower left of the instrument panel, find and disconnect the low voltage maintenance disconnection connector, and the vehicle will automatically cut off the high voltage system.

1.9.1.2 High Voltage Removal from Outside the Vehicle

warning !
1. Be sure to wear appropriate personal protective equipment when touching any high voltage components;
2.Do not touch the high voltage battery components even though the high voltage system has been deactivated. Be sure to wear appropriate personal protective equipment if it is necessary to operate the high voltage battery components;
3. If any damage is found in the high voltage components, be sure to wrap the damaged parts with the insulation tapes.

1. Park the vehicle, apply the EPB. 2. Open the door. 3. Open the front flip cover plate. 4. Find the low voltage MSD in the engine compartment and remove it, and the vehicle will deactivate the high voltage system automatically.

CategoryInformation
Windrose Service Hotline+1(586) 604 5918
Windrose Service Contact UnitWindrose Technology Inc.
Windrose Service Contact Address415 S Murphy Sunnyvale, CA, 94086
Windrose Service Official Website URLhttps://windrose.tech/
Display nameFirstRespondingSafety@windrose.tech

1.10 After-sales Service Information 1.10.1 After-sales Service Information 1.10.1.1 After-sales Service Information

Figure p29

1.11 Calibration Procedure 1.11.1 Calibration Procedure 1.11.1.1 Front View Intelligent Camera Calibration Procedure

Objective

• After the vehicle leaves the factory, if it is necessary to perform calibration on the front view intelligent camera again, such as when the windshield is replaced or the front view intelligent camera is replaced, it is recommended to use the ONL after-sales calibration procedure. • The ONL after-sales calibration of the front view intelligent camera is carried out through dynamic driving on the road. The front view intelligent camera recognizes the lane markings and takes them as a reference to achieve the calibration of the installation tolerance of the front view intelligent camera. • If the calibration is not performed after the front view intelligent camera is reinstalled, it will affect the accuracy of image recognition.

The Following Principles Should Be Followed While Driving

• The vehicle speed should be no less than 22 mph (the recommended vehicle speed is between 22 mph and 35 mph). • Don't turn the steering wheel by a large margin (||yaw rate|| < 0.008 rad/s). • Keep driving smoothly before and after changing lanes. • Don't change lanes frequently.

Requirements For Lanes And Driving Environments

1. The lane on which the vehicle is traveling should be straight and flat, without slopes or turns. 2. Avoid performing calibration in traffic-congested areas and make sure that the lane markings are not blocked by adjacent vehicles. 3. Avoid performing calibration under adverse weather conditions (such as rain, snow, fog, etc.).

Requirements For The ONL After-Sales Calibration Scenarios Of The front view intelligent camera

1. The calibration test scenario must include two adjacent lanes of equal width. The lane markings can be either solid lines or dashed lines, but they should be clearly visible, as shown in the following figure. 2. Try to avoid the types of lanes shown in the following figure as much as possible.

The ONL After-sales Calibration Process for the front view intelligent camera.

The ONL after-sales calibration can be achieved through the UDS diagnostic service (RoutineControl $31). The host computer sends diagnostic instructions to the ECU of the front view intelligent camera to trigger the calibration mode. After the calibration is completed, the parameters will be written into the ECU and will be used after the next power-on. After the calibration is completed, obtain the calibration results and parameters through diagnostic service instructions as follows: – The online calibration time of ONL is 1 to 5 minutes, depending on the road conditions. – It is impossible to exit the ONL mode before the ONL calibration is completed. If the power is turned off during the process, it will be regarded as a failed end of the ONL calibration, and no new calibration parameters will be written into the ECU. – There are the following diagnostic service instructions: 1. RoutineControl $31: Send the calibration command (ONL/EOL) under 3212. 2. RoutineControl $31: 3213 Report the current working status (INIT/NORMAL/ONLING/EOLING). 3. RoutineControl $31: 3214 Report the currently used parameters. 4. RoutineControl $31: 3215 Report the new parameters after calibration is completed. Step 1: Ensure the correct installation of the front view intelligent camera and its covering parts, and check the condition of the vehicle. Step 2: Establish communication between the diagnostic device (or calibration computer) and the vehicle. Open the calibration service through the diagnostic equipment. Click "ONL Calibration" in the diagnostic device and send the calibration instruction to start the calibration. Step 3: Drive the vehicle according to the above requirements and complete the automatic calibration function according to the prompts on the diagnostic device. Step 4: The diagnostic device prompts "Calibration completed". Step 5: Return to the ONL mode. Step 6: The system will automatically write the new calibration parameters into the ECU. Step 7: Are there any new calibration parameters? – Yes : Next step – No : The ONL calibration fails. Step 8: The ONL calibration is successful.

Figure p30
Figure p30
Figure p30

1.11.1.2 Side MMW Radar Calibration Procedure

Notice

The reinstalled left and right radars should be calibrated before they can be used normally.

Calibration Description

Recalibration should be performed in the event of radar replacement, vehicle collision, etc. in the aftermarket. The recalibration is generally performed through dynamic calibration so that the radar can detect real surrounding environment during driving, determine the horizontal deviation between radar normal and vehicle driving axis by means of self-learning, and keep the deviation within the permissible range via algorithm compensation, thereby ensuring the calibrated radar is in compliance with relevant functional requirements.

Calibration Platform

• Radar to be calibrated. • Scan tool. • Calibrated vehicle. • Specially designed, dedicated calibration runway.

Calibration Error

The dynamic calibration error of radar includes measurement error, radar installation error, and error due to left and right skirt installation: • Prior to calibration after the radar is installed on the bracket, the angle of the radar antenna axis relative to the calibrated vehicle axis should be within the allowable error range of the design installation angle (±3°); • Both the horizontal and vertical installation errors of the radar relative to the body should be less than ±1mm; • The horizontal inaccuracy of active calibration should be less than ±0.5°.

Vehicle Requirements

The vehicle should meet the following requirements when carrying out radar calibration: • Four-wheel alignment has been completed before radar calibration; • The tire pressure on the vehicle is correct; • The vehicle is unloaded when performing calibration; • The radar and covering parts or left and right side skirts are installed correctly, check the oil, tire pressure, seat, etc. and ensure the safety of driving; • After the calibration is completed, no significant changes in body weight are allowed, as this will cause the deflection of the vehicle's driving axis (for example, the modification of the vehicle, the installation of liquefier tank, etc. after calibration will result in angle changes in vertical direction of the driving axis).

Environmental Requirements

When performing radar calibration, the environmental requirements are as follows: • The surface of the radar is clean, and free of covering such as snow or mud; • Do not calibrate in extreme rain and snow weather; • The metal guardrail should be mounted on the left side in the driving direction, and it should be 150m long and straight, to avoid the interference of other moving targets; • The surface of the driving road should be smooth without unevenness, snow, ice, mud and other road conditions that affect driving stability.

Vehicle Driving Behavior Requirements

When the dynamic driving calibration begins, the vehicle must be driven under the conditions specified in the following table to ensure the completion of the dynamic driving calibration;

RestrictionsRecommended ValueAllowable ToleranceRemark
Radar lateral guardrail6 ft+/-1.5 ft/
Guardrail height27 in+/- .39 inIt is recommended to be at the same height as the radar installation
Constant linear movement speed25 mph/18-37 mph
Longitudinal acceleration0m/s²±0.5m/s²/
Yaw rate0rad/s±0.01rad/s/
Calibration Procedure

Step 1: Make sure the radar and covering parts or the left and right side skirts are properly installed and check the condition of the vehicle. Step 2: Establish communication between the scan tool (or calibration computer) and the vehicle, start the calibration beginning with diagnosis of the diagnostic equipment, and click "Start Dynamic Driving Calibration" in the scan tool to issue a calibration instruction for start of calibration. The ADU should be used for relevant conversions after the scan tool issues check commands. Step 3: Maintain communication between the scan tool and the vehicle, and drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving behavior requirements, within a single power-on/ignition cycle of the radar, until the calibration progress bar displays 100% in the scan tool. Step 4: Generally, the calibration progress should show 100% within 3 minutes. Step 5: If the calibration fails, Check the calibration environment, installation location, and driving behavior are in compliance with relevant requirements. If compliance with relevant requirements are confirmed, repeat the above steps. Step 6: The calibration ends when the calibrations on radars on both sides are successful.

1.11.1.3 Forward MMW Radar Calibration Procedure

Notice

The reinstalled front radars should be calibrated before they can be used normally.

Calibration Description

The forward millimeter-wave MMW radar after-sales service is generally performed through dynamic calibration. The automatic calibration is to measure the deviation angle between the radar axis and the body driving axis in horizontal and vertical directions based on the static object in the area around the vehicle (correction area) during straight driving of the vehicle, for the purpose of software compensation, thereby allowing the radar detection deviation to stay within the allowable range.

Correction Configuration

• Vehicle equipped with millimeter-wave radar. • The radar can obtain yaw rate information. • The radar can obtain acceleration information. • The vehicle keeps driving in a straight line. • The vehicle driving speed must be above 25 mph. • The radar installation deviation should be ≦ ±3° (horizontal) or ≦ ±2.4° (vertical).

Calibration Procedure

Step 1: Make sure the radar and covering parts or bumpers are properly installed and check the condition of the vehicle. Step 2: Establish communication between the scan tool (or calibration computer) and the vehicle, start the calibration beginning with diagnosis of the diagnostic equipment, and click "Start Dynamic Driving Calibration" in the scan tool to issue a calibration instruction for start of calibration. Step 3: Maintain communication between the scan tool and the vehicle, and drive the vehicle in accordance with the driving behavior requirements, within a single power-on/ignition cycle of the radar, until the calibration progress bar displays 100% in the scan tool. Step 4: Generally, the calibration progress should show 100% within 3 minutes. Step 5: If the calibration fails, Check the calibration environment, installation location, and driving behavior are in compliance with relevant requirements. If compliance with relevant requirements are confirmed, repeat the above steps. Step 6: The calibration ends when the radar calibration is successful.

1.11.1.4 AVM Calibration Procedure

Preparation for Equipment and Site

• Calibration cloth (3 in front, left, and right). • Level ground. • There is no light source that can cause the camera to be exposed by reflection or direct light

Arrangement of Vehicles and Calibration Equipment

Park the vehicle on calibration site and adjust the calibration cloth as required. 6 7 1 8 5 4 9 3 • ① Distance between front calibration cloth and vehicle: 1.5 ft • ⑥ Lateral distance of front calibration cloth: 21.5 ft • ⑦ Longitudinal distance of front calibration cloth: 6 ft • ⑤ Distance between front calibration cloth and left/right calibration cloth: 5 ft • ⑧ Width of left/right calibration cloth: 6 ft • ⑨ Length of left/right calibration cloth: 8 ft • ④ Distance from left/right calibration cloth: 10 ft

Note
The black grid on the three pieces of cloth is a square of edge length 1 ft. Align the edges (or the white edges of equal width) of the outermost black grids when aligning the cloth; A white edge of width 0.5 ft should be reserved at the edge of the three calibration cloths.
Precautions

1. Make sure the calibration patterns are visible through the camera and the position requirements stipulated in the calibration scheme are met; 2. The site should be free of reflections. If the photo is not clear due to reflection, use shielding cloth or shade to ensure that the black and white grids are clear; 3. If the calibration fails, export the corresponding photos and logs and send them to the manufacturer for analysis;

Calibration Procedure

1. "IVI Screen Menu" > "Factory Settings" > "AVM Function Debugging" > "270° AVM Debugging Interface" to select Open; 2. Click AVM icon on the main interface of the CAR screen to activate AVM; 3. When clicking "Calibration" button, the automatic calibration will start. You can wait for the automatic calibration to end, or manually click "End Calibration" to stop the current calibration; 4. When the calibration process (including calibration succeeded, calibration failed, and manual stop of calibration) ends, you should operate "Turn Off AVM", "Turn On AVM", and "Initialize AVM" to display the screen again. Then you can operate "Calibration" again according to the process same as step 1; 5. It is determined that the calibration is successfully if the 2D/3D function can be used normally, the splicing accuracy meets the requirements, and the calibration cloth is not misplaced from the perspective of the screen; 6. Click "Hide Debug" button to collapse the control bar, and click this button again to expand it. Prevent the debug button from blocking the picture and affecting the observation; 7. Click "Close Debug Interface" to exit the calibration interface, or re-enter the factory settings interface to open it; 8. Click "Collect Fusion Image" to collect the AVM fusion image (including the car model); 9. Click "Collect Left Image" to collect the left image, save it to path /sdcard/AvmDataCollect/LeftImage, and name it "cameraId" + "_id_Image_" + "Current System Boot Timestamp" + "Serial Number". 10. Click "Collect Front Image" to collect the front image, save it to path /sdcard/AvmDataCollect/FrontImage, and name it "cameraId" + "_id_Image_" + "Current System Boot Timestamp" + "Serial Number". 11. Click "Collect Right Image" to collect the right image, save it to path /sdcard/AvmDataCollect/RightImage, and name it "cameraId" + "_id_Image_" + "Current System Boot Timestamp" + "Serial Number". 12. Click "Collect Back Image" to collect the back image, save it to path /sdcard/AvmDataCollect/BackImage, and name it "cameraId" + "_id_Image_" + "Current System Boot Timestamp" + "Serial Number". 13. Click "Collect Four-way Image" to collect the left, front, right, and back images simultaneously, save them in respective directory, and name them "special_" + "cameraId" + "_id_Image_frame_" + "Serial Number" beginning with "special_"; For example: • Rear view: special_0_id_Image_frame_1.yuyv • Right view: special_5_id_Image_frame_1.yuyv • Front view: special_7_id_Image_frame_1.yuyv • Left view: special_8_id_Image_frame_1.yuyv cameraId mapping rules:

• cameraId =0 refers to AVM back image • cameraId =5 refers to AVM right image • cameraId =7 refers to AVM front image • cameraId =8 refers to AVM left image

Exporting Image Collection Footage

You can export or clear the footage by unzipping the "Attachment Script" file and executing the corresponding script.

Note
Select a practical dual male USB cable, and insert one end into the USB flash drive socket of the device host, and the other end into the computer. Concurrently, switch the current mode to ADB. Otherwise, the script cannot be executed normally.

Exporting steps: Click "Export AVM Collection Footage" in "AVM Image Collection Export Script" to export the file.

Click "Clear AVM Collection Footage" in "AVM Image Collection Export Script" to clear the export file. 1.11.1.5 Headlamp Light Adjustment

Preparation for Equipment and Site

– Tools: 10# hexagon socket and 8# hexagon socket, with a total length not exceeding 150mm. – Tape measure or laser rangefinder (electronic ruler). – Site: Dark site where the ground is level and flat, vehicles can enter, and the reference center of the headlamp is be at least 10m away from the screen. – Test screen: Thick white paper or white wall (in order to facilitate the observation of light shape, the test screen shall be more than 2m wider than the vehicle).

Vehicle Preparation

– Inflate the tire in accordance with the full load pressure specified in the technical conditions of the vehicle. – Replenish sufficient water and lubricating oil on the vehicle, and prepare all accessories and tools (spare tires, tools, etc.) for vehicle test. – Place a 75kg load on driver seat to simulate driver seat occupation. – Before measuring, make sure the vehicle is at natural standstill state, drive the vehicle to travel backwards for at least one wheel circumference and then forward over the same distance. – Make sure the outer cover of the lamps is clean. – Start the vehicle.

Light Measurement

1. Park the vehicle as shown in the figure with the distance L between the reference center of the headlamp and the screen being 10m.

h 1 L h 2 2. Adjust the low beam to the maximum highest on CAR screen. 3. Remove the wheel housing plug. 4. Draw O-line, A-line, and B-line on the screen. 90° B O A L 1 L 1 – A and B lines: Parallel to O line, where L1 is 39.5 in (low beam) or 40.25 in (high beam). 5. Draw A1, A2, B1, B2, h1, and h2 lines on the screen to form a green box as shown in the figure after completing drawing of all lines.

Figure p36
Figure p36
Figure p36
Figure p37
L1L2L3L4
h 2

a 1 A O B a 2 b 1 b 2 • A1 and A2 lines: Parallel to line A, where L2 is 6.69 in and L3 is 13.75 in; • B1 and B2 lines: Parallel to line B, where L4 is 6.69 in and L5 is 13.75 in; • H1 and H2 lines: Horizontal lines parallel to the ground, where H1 is 33.7 in (low beam) or 35.55 in (high beam), and H2 is 23.86 in (low beam) or 25.28 in (high beam).

Light Adjustment
caution
To make it easier to observe the effect of light adjustment, you can block the light from one side side when adjusting the light on the other side. The light adjustment method on the left and right sides is the same. After the debugging is completed, the height of the left and right lights should be consistent.
Note
The left headlamp is taken as an example hereby. The light adjustment method of the left headlamp is the same as that of the right headlamp.

1. Low beam adjustment 1. Turn on the low beam. 2. Insert the 10# hexagon socket into the low beam dimming port ① , rotate the handle ① clockwise to adjust the light to the upper left, and turn the handle ① counterclockwise to adjust the light to the lower right; Insert the 8# hexagon socket into the low beam dimming port ② , rotate the handle ② clockwise to adjust the light downward, and turn the handle ② counterclockwise to adjust the light upward; 1 2 3. If the turning point of the low beam cut-off line is in the frame, it indicates the completion of dimming.

2. High beam adjustment 1. Turn on the high beam; 2. Insert the 10# hexagon socket into the high beam dimming port ③ , rotate the handle ③ clockwise to adjust the light to the upper left, and turn the handle ③ counterclockwise to adjust the light to the lower right; Insert the 10# hexagon socket into the higih beam dimming port ④ , rotate the handle ④ clockwise to adjust the light downward, and turn the handle ④ counterclockwise to adjust the light upward; 3 4 3. If the brightest point of the high beam is in the frame, it indicates the completion of dimming.

caution
After the adjustment of the high and low beams is completed, the brightest point of the high beam should be higher than the turning point of the low beam cut-off line.
Figure p38
Figure p38
Figure p39

1.11.1.6 TCU Self-Learning Program

Operation Process

Step 1: Check if the vehicle meets the following conditions? – Vehicle status is READY – Brake opening is 0 – Throttle opening is 0 – Handbrake pulled up -Yes: Next step -No: Adjust vehicle status. Step 2: Connect the diagnostic instrument and click on the "TCU self-learning instruction". Step 3: axle self-learning in TCU1. Step 4: 1-file self-learning. Step 5: Is the target gear met? -Yes: Next step -No: After restarting the vehicle power-on operation, perform the self-learning process again. If it fails after three attempts, report the fault and exit the self-learning program. Step 6: Explore the tolerance position and record the actual position. Step 7: 2-file self-learning. Step 8: Is the target gear met? -Yes: Next step -No: After restarting the vehicle power-on operation, perform the self-learning process again. If it fails after three attempts, report the fault and exit the self-learning program. Step 9: Explore the tolerance position and record the actual position. Step 10: Gear position check. Step 11: Parameters are written to EEPROM. Step 12: Send the self-learning completion flag. Step 13: End of self-learning. Step 14: TCU2 rear axle self-learning.

Step 15: 1 file self-learning. Step 16: Is the target gear satisfied? -Yes: Next step -No: After restarting the vehicle power-on operation, perform the self-learning process again. If it fails after three attempts, report the fault and exit the self-learning program. Step 17: Explore the tolerance position and record the actual position. Step 18: 2-file self-learning. Step 19: Is the target gear met? -Yes: Next step -No: After restarting the vehicle power-on operation, perform the self-learning process again. If it fails after three attempts, report the fault and exit the self-learning program. Step 20: Explore the tolerance position and record the actual position. Step 21: Gear position check. Step 22: Parameters are written to the EEPROM. Step 23: Send the self-learning completion flag. Step 24: End of self-learning.

Figure p40

1.11.1.7 Tire Pressure Calibration Procedure

Introduction to Preparation of Calibration Tools and Related Functions

1 6 7 2 3 4 5 – ① : Indicator – ② : Select tires – ③ : Upload function button – ④ : Select tires – ⑤ : Activate the sensor – ⑥ : Power switch – ⑦ : 12 – 24V charging interface

Description of Buttons on Calibration Tool

On/off: Turn the switch on the left to turn on the tool. The calibration tool goes into screen off and sleeping state if there is no operation within 3 minutes after power-on. Press any button to wake up the calibration tool.

Figure p41
Corresponding numberVehicle location
1 (driver seat)Left side of input shaft
2Right side of input shaft
3Left outside of output shaft
4Left inside of output shaft
Setting Standard Pressure (Note: Confirm Standard Tire Pressure Before Individual Operations)

1. Press and hold the LINK button on the left, press upward the power button on the left to turn on the tool, go into the interface for adjusting the standard pressure value, and press the "+" or "-" button according to the actual pressure standard to adjust. After the adjustment is completed, press and hold the LINK button for 3 seconds to save and return to the main interface. 2. After setting of the calibration tool is completed, power on the vehicle, walk to the right rear tire position of the vehicle (near the installation position of the tire pressure CAN module host), press and hold the SET button in the middle of the device for two seconds and upload information to the tire pressure CAN module host.

Sensor Detection Operation

1. Walk to the tire and press the "CODE" button on the rightmost of the calibration tool to enter the detection mode, and the display will show "Id LF"; Place the display of the calibration tool close to the tire sensor (generally near the valve, with the calibration tool be kept no more than 7.87 in from the tire); After reading the code, a long "Be" sound will be heard and the tire data will be shown: The six-digit ID code, temperature and pressure display in turn. 2. When the code reading fails, a short "Be-Be" sound will be heard with "Id Err" displayed, and then the screen will automatically return to standby state. In this case, you can readjust the position and reactivate.

Instructions for Calibration

1. Walk to the tire and press "+" button on the calibration tool to select the corresponding tire position. Concurrently, press the "CODE" button on the rightmost of the calibration tool to enter the code matching mode with "Id LF" displayed on the screen; Place the display of the calibration tool close to the tire sensor (generally near the valve, with the calibration tool be kept no more than 7.87 in from the tire); After reading the code, a long "Be" sound will be heard and the tire data will be shown: ID code, pressure and temperature under normal conditions, with black dots appeared on the corresponding position of the tire. If code reading is successful, continue to press the "+" button to select the corresponding tire position for the purpose of activating the sensor.

caution
There are 10 tires in total. Thus you should make sure data showing black dots on 10 tires is shown on the calibration tool. Considering that crosstalk is easy to occur in side-by-side tires after the sensor is activated, you should manually insert the equipment into the inner tube as far as possible when activating the inside tire and keep as far away as possible from the outer valve (7.87 in - 15.74 in) when activating the outside tire.
Corresponding numberVehicle location
5Right inside of output shaft
6Right outside of third shaft
7Left outside of third shaft
8Left inside of third shaft
9Right inside of third shaft
10Right outside of third shaft

2. When the code reading fails, a short "Be-Be" sound will be heard with "Id Err" displayed, and then the screen will automatically return to standby state.

Uploading Data Read by Calibration Tool to CAN-based Tire Pressure Host

Locate the tire pressure CAN receiver installed on the vehicle (the host is near the inside of the right rear tire), stand on the right rear tire and press the middle upload button "SET" (about 1 second), and the calibration tool will upload the entire set of tire data to CAN receiver. The LCD flashes during the upload process, and after the uploading is completed, the calibration tool will display FINISH, and you can Check the tire pressure data on the instrument panel is updated.

caution
Make sure the data showing black dots on 10 tires is shown on the calibration tool. 8.3BAR=120 psi means that the current standard pressure is set to 120 psi.

1.11.1.8 Yaw Rate Sensor Calibration Procedure

Yaw Rate Sensor Calibration Scene

• Replace the slew rate sensor. • Replace the EBS ECU.

Vehicle Calibration Requirements

• Keep the wheels straight.

Calibration Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Automatically identify or select Windrose - Select corresponding model - Click the special function - Calibrate yaw rate on the scan tool. Step 4: Operate following the prompts on the scan tool interface. Step 5: Calibration is completed.

1.11.1.9 Steering Angle Sensor Calibration Procedure

Steering Angle Sensor Calibration Scene

• Replace the steering angle sensor. • Replace the EBS ECU.

Vehicle Calibration Requirements

• Keep the wheels straight.

Calibration Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC.

Step 3: Automatically identify or select Windrose - Select corresponding model - Click the special function - Calibrate steering angle on the scan tool. Step 4: Operate following the prompts on the scan tool interface. Step 5: Calibration is completed.

1.11.1.10 EPB Angle Zeroing Procedure

EPB Angle Zeroing Scene

• Replace the parking solenoid valve.

Vehicle Calibration Requirements

• The vehicle should be parked on level road.

Calibration Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Automatically identify or select Windrose on the scan tool - Select corresponding model - Click the special function - Angle zeroing. Step 4: Operate following the prompts on the scan tool interface. Step 5: Calibration is completed.

1.11.1.11 ECAS Calibration Procedure

Calibration Device

– Computer: Laptop running with WIN7 or higher operating system; – CAN adapter: Special USB-CAN adapter Connect the USB port of the computer and the OBD port of the vehicle through the adapter and adapter cable to communicate with ECAS ECU. The adapter cable is designed with three DB9 adapters that are compatible with CAN cables. Select appropriate adapters with adapter 9-pin interfaces according to the CAN pin definition of the OBD on real vehicles.

Function of ECAS Calibration Software

– Upon completion of installation of the ECAS, calibrate its initial height, including the normal height, the height upper limit and the height lower limit; – Diagnose faults; Modify ECU parameter configuration; – The auxiliary detection of ECAS EOL covers detection of ECAS solenoid valve movement, detection of height sensor installation and detection of signal, etc.

Software Startup

Connect the computer to ECU via a diagnostic cable, turn on the main power and key power, and then run the calibration software.

Software Main Interface

After the software is successfully connected to the ECAS ECU, you can read the power supply voltage, software version, fault information, etc. on the interface.

Parameter Configuration

Options: Modify Individual Parameters or Modify All Parameters are available as needed. The parameter value determines the structure configuration and function settings of ECAS. The parameters can be exported from the prototype or pre-documented and imported into a new ECU during configuration. Parameter configuration should be completed by specially trained calibrators.

Modification of Individual Parameters

1. Click "System" menu to select "Parameters", or directly click the button icon in the shortcut bar to enter the parameter configuration interface. 2. Click "Read From ECU" button to read current parameters in ECU and check the current value of the specified parameter. To modify the value of the specified parameter, you can directly enter the value in the blank of "Parameter Value", and then click "Write Into ECU" button. You will be prompted to enter a verification code during writing (the last four characters of ROOT code when registering the license).

Modification of All Parameters

You can import or export all ECU parameters via "ECU Replacement" function. In addition to the general parameters displayed on "Parameter Interface", CAN bus configuration, axle load information, default height characteristic parameters, etc. are included. Data bulk load or exporting calibration data for backup can be achieved through "ECU Replacement". After importing, click "ECU Reset" on the shortcut button bar to allow parameters to come into effect. You will be prompted to enter a verification code during importing.

Fault Inspection

Upon completion of parameter configuration and ECU reset, wait for more than 8 seconds to observe the calibration software interface and check if there is a fault prompt. If a fault occurs, determine the type of fault according to the current fault information read through the calibration software, and eliminate the fault step by step. After troubleshooting, click "ECU Reset", wait for more than 8 seconds again, and confirm that there is no DTC before proceeding to the next step for detection of solenoid valve and height sensor as well as height calibration.

Solenoid Valve and Sensor Control Detection
caution
The chassis may suddenly go up and down during lifting test and calibration. Thus, in this process, make sure the installation personnel is in a safe position!!!

Run the ECAS calibration software, click the "System" menu after successful connection, and select "Inflate/Deflate Solenoid Valve" to enter the detection interface. Select the installed airbag for testing. Operation method: Select the front axle airbag, left rear airbag, right rear airbag and other airbags separately on the interface, and click Inflate or Deflate to observe the shape and pressure change of the corresponding airbag are correct, and Check the solenoid valve channels are normal and whether the left and right pipelines are falsely connected. Check the air pressure value is normal and whether the connectors of the air pressure sensor (if any) are connected correctly. During inflation or deflation of the solenoid valve, observe the value of height sensor changes towards the correct direction and Check the height sensor is reversed while the chassis is rising or lowering;

caution
Calibrate "Lifting test" function of software. It disables the solenoid valve automatically when failed to prevent damages to the circuit as a result of short circuit.
Height Sensor Misconnection Detection
caution
The chassis may suddenly go up and down during lifting test and calibration. Thus, in this process, make sure the installation personnel is in a safe position!!!

Unplug the height sensor and observe the fault information on the main interface of the calibration software is correct. For example, after unplugging the left rear height sensor, refresh the main interface to see if the corresponding DTC appears in "Current Fault" window. (For ECAS with height sensors mounted on the left and right sides of the rear axle)

caution
Lock the vehicle during diagnosis of ECAS!
Automatic control and regulation may occur in ECAS during the diagnosis, causing sudden movement of the vehicle.
Height Calibration
caution
The chassis may suddenly go up and down during lifting test and calibration. Thus, in this process, make sure the installation personnel is in a safe position!!!

Principle of height calibration: – Before calibration, park the vehicle with normal tire pressure on level ground. – The calibration is generally performed on unloaded vehicle, making it difficult to descend during calibration. For this reason, it is necessary to release the handbrake once, or calibrate with the vehicle loaded. – After the calibration is completed, difference in the air pressure of the left and right airbags may be detected or even the unilateral airbag may be collapsed on the unloaded vehicle following road test and movement. This is generally attributed to the distribution error of left and right weight on the suspension. It returns to normal if the air pressure in left and right airbags is close after vehicle loading. – In addition, the difference in left and right air pressure may be present after the running-in of the vehicle. If the difference remains significant after loading, re-correct the zero point of the swing rod, or re-calibrate as necessary. Height calibration process: 1. Select "Calibrate Height Sensor" option: In the shortcut menu bar on the main interface, click shortcut button of "Calibrate Height Sensor" to enter the calibration. Two calibration methods are available: three-point height calibration (normal height, upper limit height and lower limit height calibration) and single-point height calibration (limited to normal height calibration; upper limit height and lower limit height are automatically calculated and written by calibration software on the basis of a new normal height according to the default upper and lower limit offset in ECU). 2. : Select the airbag to be adjusted, inflate and deflate it to normal height: After adjusting the airbag to normal position, visually check that the swing rod is level, and confirm the height value (2nd generation sensor: 270-330TT; 1st generation sensor 190- 240TT). No specific requirements are imposed on the difference in left and right height values. Make sure the difference is not more than 20TTwhen the swing rod maintains level through visual inspection.

caution
When two height sensors are available, the height adjustment on left and right must be selected simultaneously.
After the swing rod is leveled, fix it, and click to save the normal height. (When single-point calibration is selected, the upper limit and lower limit calibration will be automatically completed; When three-point calibration is selected, after the normal height is saved, you should raise the suspension to maximum height and save the upper limit height, and then lower the suspension to the minimum height and save the upper limit and lower limit height)

3. Fill in the real height value of chassis or airbag: If the automobile factory makes a request for writing the real current normal height, upper limit height, and lower limit height simultaneously when saving the height, you should fill in the corresponding height value (mm) in the pop-up window for filling. This function is only available in V1.3.2.5 and above version calibration software. 4. Click "End Calibration" to exit the calibration process. Click "ECU Reset" button in the shortcut menu bar to allow the new

height to come into effect. 1.11.1.12 BDCU Software Diagnosis Procedure

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC.

Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "BDCU" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "BDCU" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.13 CDC Software Diagnosis Procedure

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CDC" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CDC" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.14 CMU1 Software Diagnosis Procedures

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN

Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CMU1" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CMU1" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.15 CMU2 Software Diagnosis Procedures

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CMU2" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CMU2" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.16 CMU3 Software Diagnosis Procedures

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CMU3" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool.

Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CMU3" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.17 CMU4 Software Diagnosis Procedures

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "CMU4" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "CMU4" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.18 HUD Software Diagnosis Procedure

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "HUD" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "HUD" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.19 IPC Software Diagnosis Procedure

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "IPC" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "IPC" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.20 SSM Software Diagnosis Procedure

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "SSM" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "SSM" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.21 TPMS Software Diagnosis Procedure

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool.

Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "TPMS" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "TPMS" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.22 AC Software Diagnosis Procedure

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "AC" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "AC" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

1.11.1.23 VDC Software Diagnosis Procedure

Diagnosis Procedure

Step 1: Perform vehicle power-on operations. Step 2: Connect the scan tool to the DLC. Step 3: Click "Traditional Diagnosis" in scan tool. Step 4: Select the corresponding Windrose vehicle in scan tool. Step 5: Check the VIN identified by the scan tool in the interface is consistent with the vehicle model? — Yes: Next step — No: Manually enter the VIN

Step 6: Click OK following the prompts on the interface of the scan tool. Step 7: Select "System Topology" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 8: Click "VDC" on the interface of the scan tool. Step 9: Select "Special Function". Step 10: Codes, reset, relearning and other special options will be displayed on the interface of the scan tool. Step 11: Learn from the actual scenes of "VDC" repair or replacement. Step 12: End.

2Maintenance and Service

2.1 Vehicle Inspection

2.1.1 Description and Operation

2.1.1.1 Inspections Items During Vehicle Operation

Operation of Horn

The horn shall be pressed occasionally to ensure that the horn is working properly, and all button positions shall be checked.

Operation of Braking System

When braking, pay attention to abnormal noises from the braking system, increased brake pedal stroke, or repetitive braking deviations. In addition, if the brake warning lamp is illuminated or flashing, it indicates that certain parts of the braking system may be failed.

Alignment of Tires and Vehicle

Pay attention to vibrations of steering wheel or seats when driving at normal road speeds. If the steering wheel or seats vibrate, it indicates that a wheel shall be balanced. In addition, if off-tracking is found of the vehicle running on a straight road, it indicates that the tire pressure shall be adjusted or the wheel alignment should be performed.

Operation of Steering System

Pay attention to changes in steering operations. If it is difficult to turn the steering wheel or there is a larger free travel, or abnormal sounds are heard when turning or parking, inspection shall be carried out. It is necessary to occasionally observe the light pattern of the headlamp in the event of focusing, and make adjustment if the beam focusing of the headlamp is incorrect.

2.1.1.2 Inspections Items During Refueling

If a system (except for the windshield washer) loses fuel, it indicates that the system fails, and it shall be inspected and repaired immediately.

Inspection of Coolant Level and Condition

Check the coolant level in the expansion tank, add coolant if necessary, check the coolant, and replace dirty coolant.

Inspection of Washer Fluid Level

Check the washer fluid level in the tank and add washer fluid if necessary.

2.1.1.3 Inspection Items At Least Once a Week

Tyre Inspection

Maintenance instructions: Check the tires for abnormal wear or damage and the wheels for damage, check the pressure of cold tires and the spare tires for vehicles equipped with spare tires, and maintain the recommended pressure indicated on the tire label. Maintenance interval: Check at least once a week, and increase the frequency of inspection according to the actual situation.

2.1.1.4 Inspection Items At Least Once a Month

Air Pressure Inspection of Tires and Wheels

Check the tires for abnormal wear or damage and the wheels for damage, check the pressure of cold tires and the spare tires for vehicles equipped with spare tires, and maintain the recommended pressure indicated on the tire label.

Operation of Lamps

Check the operations of license plate lamps,headlamps (including high and low beams), tail lamps,stop lamps, turn signal lamps, backup lamps, and hazard warning lamps.

Inspection of Oil Leakage

After the vehicle has been parked for a certain period of time, check whether there is water, oil or other liquids on the ground under the vehicle. It is normal for the A/C system to drip after use. If leakage of other liquids is found, investigate the cause and troubleshoot immediately.

2.1.1.5 Inspection Items At Least Twice a Year

Lubrication of Door and Window Sealing Strip

Apply a thin layer of silicone-based grease to the sealing strip with a clean rag.

2.1.1.6 Inspection Items At Least Once a Year

Condition and Operation of Seat Belt

Check the harness system, including braided straps, latches, lock plates, retractors, guide rings and fixtures.

Body Lubrication and Maintenance

Lubricate all door hinges and hydraulic locks.

Cooling System

Check the coolant. If the coolant is too dirty or rusty, you should drain and flush the cooling system and refill with new coolant. Maintain proper coolant concentration to ensure proper freezing, boiling and corrosion performances and operating temperatures. Check the hoses and replace hoses

that are cracked, swollen, or aged. Tighten the clamps, and clean the outside of the radiator and the A/C system condenser as well as the filler cap. Carry out pressure test the cooling system to ensure that the system is functioning properly.

2.2 Maintenance and Service

2.2.1 Contents of Maintenance and Service

2.2.1.1 Maintenance Provisions

caution
If you have any questions about how to maintain your vehicle, please contact a Windrose authorized service station directly for help.

It is necessary to carry out routine maintenance and regular maintenance on the vehicle, which can ensure the normal use, efficiency, reliability of the vehicle and a good ride experience, and reduce the possible maintenance costs incurred. For the routine maintenance items that can be completed by the user himself according to the manual, the user can complete the routine maintenances in accordance with the relevant instructions of this manual. The systems installed on the vehicle are sophisticated and there are strict after-sales service requirements for new energy vehicles in accordance with national laws and regulations. Therefore, Windrose recommends that you should complete the regular maintenance of the vehicle at Windrose authorized service station.

caution
Please keep regular maintenance records as the basis for the "warranty".

2.2.1.2 First Maintenance

The first maintenance should be completed at an authorized maintenance service station after 6 months or 5,000km based on the vehicle model, and the users are requested to supervise the operation of the service station. The specific maintenance contents and technical requirements are as follows:

Vehicle Inspection

1. Check according to the Windrose Service Manual. 2. Check the date of sales and driving mileage of the vehicle are within the specified range.

High Voltage Battery System

1. Check the high voltage battery box and clean the box body to ensure that there is no obvious dust and the connector is not blocked. 2. Check that the high voltage battery connecting wire connector is firmly connected, and the skin insulation layer is not damaged. 3. Check that the fixing bolts of the high voltage battery box are free of looseness and falling off, and the box body is not deformed. 4. The surface and inside of the charging socket/charging gun are dry and free of dust and other foreign matters, and the cover plate is sealed reliably. 5. Check the terminals of the charging socket are yellow, blackened or ablated. 6. Check the SOC of battery packs is abnormal and confirm the battery fault feedback. 7. Check the maximum voltage, minimum voltage, average voltage, maximum differential voltage, maximum temperature, minimum temperature, average temperature and maximum temperature difference of the high voltage battery pack. 8. Carry out charging test on the vehicle in locked and sleeping state. After the vehicle is powered off and fall into sleeping state, insert the charging gun into the charging port to wake up the vehicle and read the charging current and charging power on the charging pile.

Electric Drive Axle System

1. Check the lubricating oil in electric drive axle. 2. Check the high voltage cables of the electric drive axle MCU, the low voltage harness of MCU and TCU and the harness of sensors are firm, whether the harness is damaged, and whether the fixing is protected in place. 3. Check the cooling water pipe and interface of the electric drive axle are leaking, bending, and whether the clamp is loose. 4. Check the insulation, ground wire, and low voltage connectors of the electric drive axle motor and MCU are normal. 5. Check the fastening bolts of the electric drive axle reducer, controller, motor and other axle parts for looseness, the filling and drain plugs for looseness and oil leakage, and the wheel side and reducer for oil leakage. 6. Connect the diagnostic device to read and record the operating parameters of the electric drive axle.

Motor Control System

1. Check the low voltage harness and connector terminals of the controller are loose and whether they are properly sealed.

2. Disconnect the high voltage and check whether the insulation resistance, harness, and ground of the MCU are normal. 3. Check the heat dissipation of the MCU is normal. 4. Connect the diagnostic device to read and record the operating parameters of the MCU.

PDU All-in-one System

1. Check the high voltage harnesses and aviation connectors are firmly connected, and whether the fixing protection is in place. 2. Check the low voltage harness and connector are firmly connected and fix the harness. 3. Check the insulation resistance value is normal. 4. Check the cooling water line and interface are leaking, bending, and whether the clamp is loose. 5. Check the ground cable is secure.

Electro-hydraulic Steering System

1. Check the clearance of the steering tie rod ball joint and cotter pins and tighten the fixing bolts of each component. 2. Check the electric steering pump is working properly, and the connecting wire and connector should be firmly connected. 3. Check the steering wheel locking bolts and steering shaft locking bolts are tightened reliably. 4. Check the steering fluid level or change the steering fluid and clean the filter element. 5. Check and lubricate the steering tie rod ball joint. 6. Check the steering free clearance is normal. 7. Check the oil pipe clamp is loose, and whether there is oil leakage. 8. Read and record the operating parameters of the electric power steering motor controller.

Electric Air Compressor System

1. Check the air filter element of the electric air compressor and purge and clean the air filter element. 2. Check the high voltage harness is damaged or falsely connected, and tighten the screws of the fixing bracket of the electric air compressor. 3. Check the insulation resistance of the air compressor and the high voltage harness is normal. 4. Check the dryer, condenser, four-circuit protection valve, and serpentine pipe for air leakage. 5. Read and record the operating parameters of the electric air compressor.

Battery Cooling System

1. Check the liquid level of the expanding tank for abnormalities. 2. Turn on "Left Battery Compressor" and "Right Battery Compressor" on the maintenance switch interface, read the data of battery and battery thermal management system, and check whether the refrigeration function is normal. 3. Check that the battery cooling system is filled up to standard without leakage or missing. 4. Check the battery cooling system, pipelines and control systems, connecting wires and connectors are firmly connected, whether the skin insulation layer is not damaged, and check related pipelines for faults and interferences. 5. Check the battery cooling water pump is working properly and whether the coolant filter is clogged with impurities.

Brake system

1. Check the effectiveness of the parking brake system. 2. Check the free travel of brake pedal. 3. Check the brake pipeline, front and rear axle modules, and electronic parking modules for air leakage. 4. Check the wear of the brake linings. 5. Check the tightening of the brake system bolts. 6. Drain the air reservoir (replace the drying tank if a large amount of water is detected in the air reservoir twice).

Chassis System

1. Check the airbag installation and tightening and check for wear. 2. Check the suspension height and the airbag for air leakage. 3. Check the shock absorber for oil leakage. 4. Check and fasten the bolts of the shock absorber fixing bracket and the shock absorber. 5. Check and fasten the bolts of the fastening limit block bracket. 6. Check and fasten the bolts of the X-shaped control arm, longitudinal thrust rod assembly, and thrust rod bracket. 7. Check and fasten the nuts of U-bolts.

8. Check and fasten the fixing bolts of height valve. 9. Check the brake air circuit for air leakage. 10. Check the air reservoir for air leakage. 11. Check the air pipe connected to the trailer for air leakage. 12. Read and record the EBS\ECAS\EPB DTCs.

Cab System

1. Check the front cover opens properly and smoothly. 2. Check the wipers, washers, rearview mirrors, window regulators, awning sunshade, front windshield shades, etc. are working properly. 3. Check the steering wheel, IVI, seat, etc. are working properly. 4. Check the door can open and close normally. 5. Check the left and right side wall trim panels, boarding steps, fenders, etc. are loose.

Electrical System

1. Check the fastening of the battery power line and ground wire. 2. Check the low voltage battery capacity. 3. Check the working condition of DC/DC and whether it can charge the low voltage battery normally. 4. Check various lamps, indicators, instrument and IVI systems are working properly. 5. Read and record vehicle DTCs and operating data. 6. Check the harness for scratches, interferences, open circuit and short circuit, and the harness should be kept away from the heat source. 7. Check the connection of the harnesses and the connectors of the electrical appliances. 8. Check the fuses, relays, lamps, and other electrical components are working properly. 9. Check the self-test of the electronic control system is normal and whether the system is faulty. 10. Check the modules are loose, and whether the connectors and pole ares tightly fastened.

A/C System

1. Check the A/C system is working properly. 2. Blow the A/C filter element.

Fifth Wheel System

1. Check the fifth wheel for damage, bending, omission, or cracks, etc. 2. Check the fifth wheel is functioning properly. 3. Check the mounting bolts that fix the fifth wheel. 4. Check the wear of the fifth wheel wear ring, lock hook, fifth wheel panel and trailer traction pin, and replace it if the wear is out of tolerance in a timely manner. 5. Check the filling of the grease.

2.2.1.3 Regular Maintenance

The regular inspection should be completed at an authorized maintenance service station based on the vehicle model, and the users are requested to supervise the operation of the service station. The specific maintenance contents and technical requirements are as follows:

Vehicle Inspection

1. Check according to the Windrose Service Manual. 2. Check the date of sales and driving mileage of the vehicle are within the specified range.

High Voltage Battery System

1. Check the high voltage battery box and clean the box body to ensure that there is no obvious dust and the connector is not blocked. 2. Check that the high voltage battery connecting wire connector is firmly connected, and the skin insulation layer is not damaged. 3. Check that the fixing bolts of the high voltage battery box are free of looseness and falling off, and the box body is not deformed. 4. The surface and inside of the charging socket/charging gun are dry and free of dust and other foreign matters, and the cover plate is sealed reliably. 5. Check the terminals of the charging socket are yellow, blackened or ablated. 6. Check the SOC of battery packs is abnormal and confirm the battery fault feedback. 7. Check the maximum voltage, minimum voltage, average voltage, maximum differential voltage, maximum temperature, minimum temperature, average temperature and maximum temperature difference of the high voltage battery pack.

8. Carry out charging test on the vehicle in locked and sleeping state. After the vehicle is powered off and fall into sleeping state, insert the charging gun into the charging port to wake up the vehicle and read the charging current and charging power on the charging pile. 9. The SOC of high voltage battery should be calibrated once per month; In case the vehicle has been parked for more than 3 weeks, SOC calibration should be performed at least once. 10. High voltage battery calibration method: Use the high voltage battery until its SOC becomes 20% – 25%; Fully charge the high voltage battery; Use the high voltage battery until its SOC becomes 40% – 60%.

Electric Drive Axle System

1. Change the lubricating oil in electric drive axle. 2. Check the high voltage cables of the electric drive axle MCU, the low voltage harness of MCU and TCU and the harness of sensors are firm, whether the harness is damaged, and the fixing is protected in place. 3. Check the cooling water pipe and interface of the electric drive axle are leaking, bending, and whether the clamp is loose. 4. Check the insulation, ground wire, and low voltage connectors of the electric drive axle motor and MCU are normal. 5. Check the fastening bolts of the electric drive axle reducer, controller, motor and other axle parts for looseness, the filling and drain plugs for looseness and oil leakage, and the wheel side and reducer for oil leakage. 6. Connect the diagnostic device to read and record the operating parameters of the electric drive axle.

Motor Control System

1. Check the low voltage harness and connector terminals of the controller are loose and whether they are properly sealed. 2. Disconnect the high voltage and check whether the insulation resistance, harness, and ground of the MCU are normal. 3. Check the heat dissipation of the MCU is normal. 4. Connect the diagnostic device to read and record the operating parameters of the MCU.

PDU All-in-one System

1. Check the high voltage harnesses and aviation connectors are firmly connected, and whether the fixing protection is in place. 2. Check the low voltage harness and connector are firmly connected and fix the harness. 3. Check the insulation resistance value is normal. 4. Check the cooling water line and interface are leaking, bending, and whether the clamp is loose. 5. Check the ground cable is secure.

Electro-hydraulic Steering System

1. Check the clearance of the steering tie rod ball joint and cotter pins and tighten the fixing bolts of each component. 2. Check the electric steering pump is working properly, and the connecting wire and connector should be firmly connected. 3. Check the steering wheel locking bolts and steering shaft locking bolts are tightened reliably. 4. Change the steering fluid level or the steering fluid and clean the filter element. 5. Check and lubricate the steering tie rod ball joint. 6. Check the steering free clearance is normal. 7. Check the oil pipe clamp is loose, and whether there is oil leakage. 8. Read and record the operating parameters of the electric power steering motor controller.

Electric Air Compressor System

1. Replace the air filter element of the electric air compressor. 2. Check the high voltage harness is damaged or falsely connected, and tighten the screws of the fixing bracket of the electric air compressor. 3. Check the insulation resistance of the air compressor and the high voltage harness is normal. 4. Check the dryer, condenser, four-circuit protection valve, and serpentine pipe for air leakage. 5. Read and record the operating parameters of the electric air compressor.

Battery Cooling System

1. Check the liquid level of the expanding tank for abnormalities.

2. Turn on "Left Battery Compressor" and "Right Battery Compressor" on the maintenance switch interface, read the data of battery and battery thermal management system, and check whether the refrigeration function is normal. 3. Change the battery cooling system coolant. 4. Check the battery cooling system, pipelines and control systems, connecting wires and connectors are firmly connected, the skin insulation layer is not damaged, and check related pipelines for faults and interferences. 5. Check the battery cooling water pump is working properly and the coolant filter is clogged with impurities.

Brake system

1. Check the effectiveness of the parking brake system. 2. Check the free travel of brake pedal. 3. Check the brake pipeline, front and rear axle modules, and electronic parking modules for air leakage. 4. Replace the brake lining. 5. Check the tightening of the brake system bolts. 6. Drain the air reservoir (replace the drying tank if a large amount of water is detected in the air reservoir twice).

Chassis System

1. Check the airbag installation and tightening and check for wear. 2. Check the suspension height and the airbag for air leakage. 3. Check the shock absorber for oil leakage. 4. Check and fasten the bolts of the shock absorber fixing bracket and the shock absorber. 5. Check and fasten the bolts of the fastening limit block bracket. 6. Check and fasten the bolts of the X-shaped control arm, longitudinal thrust rod assembly, and thrust rod bracket. 7. Check and fasten the nuts of U-bolts. 8. Check and fasten the fixing bolts of height valve. 9. Check the brake air circuit for air leakage. 10. Check the air reservoir for air leakage. 11. Check the air pipe connected to the trailer for air leakage. 12. Read and record the EBS\ECAS\EPB DTCs.

Cab System

1. Check the front cover opens properly and smoothly. 2. Check the wipers, washers, rearview mirrors, window regulators, awning sunshade, front windshield shades, etc. are working properly. 3. Check the steering wheel, IVI, seat, etc. are working properly. 4. Check the door can open and close normally. 5. Check the left and right side wall trim panels, boarding steps, fenders, etc. are loose.

Electrical System

1. Check the fastening of the battery power line and ground wire. 2. Check the low voltage battery capacity. 3. Check the working condition of DC/DC and whether it can charge the low voltage battery normally. 4. Check various lamps, indicators, instrument and IVI systems are working properly. 5. Read and record vehicle DTCs and operating data. 6. Check the harness for scratches, interferences, open circuit and short circuit, and the harness should be kept away from the heat source. 7. Check the connection of the harnesses and the connectors of the electrical appliances. 8. Check the fuses, relays, lamps, and other electrical components are working properly. 9. Check the self-test of the electronic control system is normal and whether the system is faulty. 10. Check the modules are loose, and whether the connectors and pole ares tightly fastened.

A/C System

1. Check the A/C system is working properly. 2. Replace the A/C filter element.

Fifth Wheel System

1. Check the fifth wheel for damage, bending, omission, or cracks, etc. 2. Check the fifth wheel is functioning properly. 3. Check the mounting bolts that fix the fifth wheel. 4. Check the wear of the fifth wheel wear ring, lock hook, fifth wheel panel and trailer traction pin, and replace it if the wear is out of tolerance in a timely manner. 5. Change the grease.

ApplicationSpecificationCapacity
Final drive fluid (3 motor)GL-5 (75W/90), Extended Life16.5L (intermediate axle) + 11.5L (rear axle)
Final drive fluid (4 motor)GL-5 (75W/90), Extended Life16.5L (intermediate axle) + 16.5L (rear axle)
Motor electronically controlled antifreeze (3 motor)Ethylene glycol antifreeze -45°C30L (reference value, add on request)
Motor electronically controlled antifreeze (four motors)Ethylene glycol antifreeze -45°C35L (reference value, add on request)
Battery antifreeze (NCM lithium)Ethylene glycol antifreeze -45°C37L (reference value, add on request)
Battery antifreeze (LFP)Ethylene glycol antifreeze -45°C27L (reference value, add on request)
Steering gear hydraulic oilATF34L
A/C RefrigerantHFC-134a850g±50g

2.2.2 Specifications

2.2.2.1 Fluid Capacity

Mainte- nance ItemMaintenance Interval
Every 15,000k- m/12 MonthsEvery 50000km/ 6 MonthsEvery 60000km/ 6 MonthsEvery 60000km/ 24 MonthsEvery 80000km/ 12 MonthsEvery 300000k- m/12 MonthsEvery 40,000kmEvery 500000k- m
Dryer
Air filter element
Steering fluid reservoir filter element
Power steering fluid
Gear oil
A/C filter element
Coolant
Electric drive axle final drive
Air compressor air filter element
Drying tank

2.2.3 Maintenance Cycle

2.2.3.1 Maintenance Schedule

Normal Use of Vehicle

The maintenance items given in the maintenance schedule are conducive to: – The delivery of goods under the restrictions indicated on the tire label attached to the edge of the driver door. – The driving on appropriate roads and under legal operating restrictions.

Regular Maintenance Schedule (Tractor)
caution
The maintenance interval or mileage given, whichever comes first in the regular maintenance schedule shall prevail.
warning !
The user should use special after-sales fluids and accessories designated by the OEM. Otherwise, paid services will be provided by OEM as to damages caused by violating the rules.

2.2.4 Quality Warranty Statement

2.2.4.1 Quality Warranty Statement

Windrose will warrant to the ultimate purchaser and each subsequent purchaser that the new vehicle, including all parts of its emission control system, meets three conditions: 1.It is designed, built, and equipped so it conforms at the time of sale to the ultimate purchaser with the requirements of 40CFR Part 1037.120 as well as with all applicable regulations adopted by the California Air Resourcers Board pursuant to its authority in chapters 1 and 2, Part 5, division 26 of the Health and Safety Code. 2.It is free from defects in materials and workmanship that could cause the vehicle to fail to conform to the regulated requirements or could cause failure of a warranted part during the applicable warranty period. 3.The powertrain is identical in all material respects to the zero-emission powertrain as described in the related powertrain application for certification. Additional items: – For emissions-related warranty (5 years or 100,000 miles) under “ powertrain ” list main components that need to be covered – motor, inverter, HV battery charging system, batteries and thermal management. – The emission-related warranty covers all components whose failure would increase a vehicle's emissions of air conditioning refrigerants. – Windrose warrants that its vehicles are (1) designed, built and equipped with tires that conform, at the time of sale, with requirements of vehicle manufacturers whose vehicles are designed to meet applicable 2014 and later, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and National Highway Traffic and Safety Administration greenhouse gas and fuel efficiency standards, and (2) those tires are free from defects in material and workmanship which cause the vehicle to fail to conform with the vehicle manufacturer ’ s requirements for a period of 2 years or 24,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

3Diagnosis

3.1 Mechanical Fault Diagnosis

3.1.1 Mechanical Fault Diagnosis Overview

3.1.1.1 Overview

Mechanical diagnosis is to troubleshoot faults in vehicle, analyze and make judgments in accordance with relevant technical standards with the use of special tools, instrument, equipment and software for the purpose of investigating the cause of the fault and confirming the location of the fault. In general, the fault diagnosis of vehicles is performed through intuitive experience and instrument and equipment. With the development of vehicle technology, especially the application of electronic technology and computer technology in vehicles, the fault diagnosis methods of vehicles have been developed from observation, hearing, smelling, touching, isolation, testing, comparison and other traditional experiences to the use of information technology-based complete, modern fault diagnosis technology systems for vehicles with the digital, integrated and intelligent diagnostic equipment as the auxiliary means. This section aims to analyze and eliminate common faults found during driving so as to make it easier for maintenance personnel to quickly find and eliminate the source of the fault.

3.1.1.2 Precautions

Cautions Regarding Mechanical Fault Diagnosis
warning !

1. Park the vehicle on level ground or in a well-ventilated operation room. 2. Apply the parking brake and turn off the ignition switch to prevent the vehicle from slipping during maintenance. 3. Do not operate under the vehicle when it is lifted only with a jack or lift. Unless the vehicle is parked on a sturdy tripod or bracket suitable for lifting the vehicle. Place wedges at the wheels to prevent the wheels from rolling when the tires are not off the ground. 4. During maintenance, ensure safety and do not damage parts or operate in violation of regulations.

StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1Abnormal noise in steering systemRefer to Diagnosis of Abnormal Sounds in Steering System - Abnormal Sounds in Steering System
2Abnormal sound in brakeRefer to Diagnosis of Abnormal Sounds in Brake - Abnormal Sounds in Brake
StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1Axle steering occurs when the left and right wheelbases of the vehicle are not the same, which aggravates the tire wear and even leads to tire eating.Check the dimensional error of the frame, air spring, front axle, rear axle and other parts on regular basis. When the dimensional errors reaches a certain level, the left and right wheelbase will not be equal.
2Tire wear caused by changes in wheel alignment angle as a result of overloadingIncrease the tightness of the front hub bearing
3Significant fluctuations in toe-in of the wheels also result in wearIn the event of tire eating caused by wheel camber and kingpin inclination that are out of tolerance, the front axle assembly should be replaced
4Abnormal tire friction caused by steerable wheel oscillationStrictly control the toe-in of steering wheels
5The unevenness of steel rim end face is out of toleranceReplace the steel rim with qualified flatness or process the plane of the steel rim to make it qualified
6Overloaded tiresAvoid severe overloading of the vehicle
7The tire pressure is too high, resulting in crown wearDeflate tires with high air pressure to keep the air pressure within the specified range
8Tire rotation is not performed in timeReplace the tires in a timely manner
9Overloaded tires lead to deformation or runout of steel rim end face, and the runout of steel rim end face also causes runout of tire end faceReduce wheel radial runout, end face runout, imbalance of mass distribution, etc.
10Severe overloading of front axle leads to great deformation of front axleIn the event of rigid deformation of front axle, the front axle should be replaced

3.1.2 Integrated Vehicle Faults

3.1.2.1 Noises and Abnormal Sounds in Vehicle

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

3.1.2.2 Tire Wear

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
11Frequent and violent starts, braking, high-torque drive, and stopsDevelop correct driving habits and avoid frequent and violent starts, braking, high-torque drive and stops
12Insufficient tire inflation pressure or severe overloadAvoid severe overloading of the vehicle
13Inferior quality of parts, such as steering knuckle bushing deformation, serious wear, excessive clearance between kingpin and steering knuckle bushing, loose front axle hub bearing, loose rear axle hub bearing, etc.Replace inferior parts
14The steel rim is out of round or eccentric, and the outer tire is repaired due to damageReplace the reinforced rim
StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1The inflation pump connecting pipe is brokenWeld or replace the inflation pump connecting pipe
2The inflation pump is faultyRepair or replace the inflation pump
StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1The front wheel alignment angle is inaccurate and the toe-in is excessiveCheck whether the front wheel alignment angle and toe-in meet the requirements; If not, adjust them
2Deformed front spokes, unequal number of tire bolts, too low front tire pressure or tire repair, etc. result in unbalanceJack the front axle to test the wheels and check the dynamic balance of the wheels and whether the tires are deformed to a large extent. If necessary, replace the wheel with a one with good quality for comparative test
3The drive system parts are loosely installedTighten drive system components

3.1.2.3 Insufficient Air Pressure Throughout the Vehicle

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

3.1.2.4 Steering Wheel Shaking at High Speeds

Fault Description:

The vehicle is unstable or swings, or even the steering wheel shakes at high speeds or at a certain high speed.

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
4The steering drive shaft is bent, dynamic unbalance occurs and the front axle is deformedCheck whether the front axle and frame are deformed and whether the steering drive shaft is bent, and perform dynamic balance on the drive shaft when possible
5Shock absorber faultReplace the shock absorber
StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1Inconsistent left and right tire pressuresInflate under-inflated tires
2Inaccurate alignment of the front wheels. The front wheel camber, kingpin angles or kingpin inclination are not equalBoth small toe-in or negative toe-in can cause driving deviation. When this occurs, go to a professional maintenance station for testing

3.1.2.5 Driving Deviation

Fault Description:

Check for driving deviation as follows: Generally during driving, center the steering wheel, and then take your hands off the steering wheel to see if the vehicle is driving in a straight line. If not, it can be determined that the vehicle is deviating from the road.

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1Suspension components are damagedCheck the suspension components for damage
2The air spring is faultyCheck the dynamic suspension
StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1Front and rear suspension componentsCheck the front and rear suspensions
2The air spring is faultyCheck the air spring

3.1.3 Frame and Suspension Faults

3.1.3.1 Diagnosis of Faults in Frame and Suspension

Fault Description 1:

The front bottom contacts the ground or the riding height is low.

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

Fault Description 2:

The vehicle leans to one side.

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1Unqualified or worn tires are used, or the tires on both sides are of different sizes; The air pressure in tires on both sides is not equal, or the tire one side is severely wornRotate tires to ensure consistent tire pressure
2The front hub bearing is not properly adjusted, causing it to be too tight or too loose. The front wheel alignment angle on both sides is different or changes; The front axle is bent and deformedAdjust the front hub bearing; Correct the front axle to restore to correct front wheel alignment angle; Adjust the toe-in to correct value
3One side of the frame is broken; The frame is deformedRepair the frame and correct the deformation
4The rear axle housing is bent and deformed or brokenCorrect or replace the rear axle housing
5The rear axle is misaligned with the frameCheck and adjust the position of the rear axle relative to the frame
6Extreme eccentricityNote eccentric load and load deflection during driving
StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1Tire pressure is inconsistent; Tires are not of the same size; Severe wearCheck and adjust the tire pressure; Replace the tires with new ones
2Wheel dynamic unbalanceCarry out dynamic balance test on the wheel assembly to control the unbalance within the allowable range

3.1.4 Wheel and Tire Faults 3.1.4.1 Diagnosis of Driving Deviation

Fault Description:

When the vehicle is deviating to one side, the driver should hold the steering wheel with both hands or apply force on other side of the steering wheel to ensure normal driving. Otherwise it is easy for the vehicle to deviate from the driving direction.

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

3.1.4.2 Diagnosis of Front Wheel Vibrations

Fault Description:

The front wheels vibrate to left and right or bump vertically during driving. This will have a great impact on the vehicle speed, making it uncomfortable to sit in the vehicle.

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
3The front wheel hub bearing is damaged or looseCheck and adjust the tightness of the front wheel hub bearing of the vehicle, and replace the damaged hub bearing
4Incorrect front wheel alignmentAdjust the front wheel alignment and toe-in
StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1There is air in steering hydraulic systemDischarge air from the hydraulic system
2Dirt is clogged in the hydraulic pipelineRemove dirt from the hydraulic pipeline system
3Mechanical system is faultyCheck and eliminate mechanical faults in power steering system
StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1There is air in steering hydraulic systemDischarge air from the steering hydraulic system
2The electric steering pump is damagedCheck and repair the electric steering pump
3The steering control mechanism is damagedClean or repair the steering gear
4Mechanical collision sounds in steering systemAdjust or repair the steering transmission mechanism

3.1.5 Steering System Faults

3.1.5.1 Diagnosis of Steering Wheel Shaking

Fault Description:

The shaking steering wheel and vibrating front wheels can cause the car front end to shake while driving, and the driver has to slow down in serious condition.

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

3.1.5.2 Diagnosis of Abnormal Sounds in Steering System

Fault Description:

The abnormal sounds heard in the steering system while driving or high speed driving mainly come from the steering gear, electric steering pump, etc.

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1Uneven braking force of wheel brakesAdjust the wheel brakes uniformly as far as possible
2Unequal exposure of left and right brake chamber push rodsAdjust the brake chamber push rod to ensure consistency between the left and right brake chamber push rods
3Inconsistent left and right tire pressuresInflate the tires to ensure consistent tire pressure
4A wheel friction plate is contaminated by oil or the friction plates are of inconsistent modelReplace the inconsistent friction plates and remove the oil
5The frame is deformed or the vehicle is heavily eccentricCorrect the frame to keep the vehicle load balanced
StepDiagnostic ContentMeasure
1The brake pedal free travel is too largeAdjust the free stroke of the brake pedal to the specified value
2The air pressure of the air reservoir is insufficientAdjust the air pressure of the brake pipeline to the specified value
3The brake system is leaking or the pipeline is cloggedCheck whether the pipeline between the brake valve and the brake air pump is subject to air leakage, and replace the air pressure pipe if necessary
4The brake valve is improperly adjusted or working poorlyAdjust or replace the brake valve
5The wheel brake is improperly adjusted or poorly workingAdjust or replace the wheel brake

3.1.6 Brake System Faults

3.1.6.1 Diagnosis of Braking Deviation

Fault Description:

Braking deviation is a phenomenon that the vehicle deviates to one side while driving as the left and right braking effects on the same axle are not uniform. Braking deviation occurs when applying brake or emergency brake; When the car brakes, it may drift. Minor deviation is allowed, but serious deviation may cause accidents.

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

3.1.6.2 Diagnosis of Brake Failure

Fault Description:

Obvious insufficient deceleration is found when depressing the brake pedal to slow down or stop. The vehicle cannot stop quickly when applying emergency brake, and the braking time and braking distance are extended. No tire drag traces are found or the tire drag traces are extremely short during inspection on a parked vehicle

Fault Diagnosis and Troubleshooting

Check for possible causes of the fault one by one according to the following steps. Diagnose in a simple-to-complex progressive manner to effectively save time. Directly skip specific steps concerning the causes that are obviously impossible through analysis. This diagnostic step is used for reference only.

3.1.7 Vehicle Body Faults

3.1.7.1 Note

In the process of body repair, professional and technical personnel may use sheet metal repair machines, welding machines and various grinding and cutting tools to ensure that the vehicle can be restored to the original level in terms of geometric dimensions and usability. However, sometimes, you may not be able to find the faults in the driving system and assembly mounts that can lead to serious consequences when repairing an accident vehicle. Therefore, in addition to the necessary inspections of geometrical dimensions, special attention must be paid to the following components.

3.1.7.2 Fault Inspection

1. Check that the steering mechanism and steering rod system can be operated correctly within the number of turns of the steering wheel, and visually check for bent or cracked parts. 2. Check the wheels and tires for damage, concentric rotation and imbalance. Check the tire pattern and sidewall for cuts/ check the tire pressure. 3. After body repair, carry out a road test to ensure the driving ability of the vehicle, and finally hand over the vehicle to users.

3.1.7.3 Body Fault Assessment

Figure p323
Figure p323
Figure p322
Figure p322
Figure p319
Figure p317
Figure p317
Figure p317
Figure p316
Figure p316
Figure p316
Figure p315
Figure p315
Figure p315
Figure p314
Figure p259
Figure p259
Figure p259
Figure p258
Figure p258
Figure p258
Figure p257
Figure p257
Figure p257
Figure p256
Figure p256
Figure p256
Figure p244
Figure p244
Figure p244
Figure p241
Figure p241
Figure p240
Figure p240
Figure p240
Figure p239
Figure p239
Figure p235
Figure p235
Figure p233
Figure p233
Figure p219
Figure p219
Figure p218
Figure p218
Figure p218
Figure p214
Figure p213
Figure p213
Figure p213
Figure p212
Figure p208
Figure p208
Figure p208
Figure p207
Figure p207
Figure p203
Figure p203
Figure p202
Figure p202
Figure p202
Figure p150
Figure p150
Figure p149
Figure p144
Figure p144
Figure p144
Figure p143
Figure p143
Figure p143
Figure p142
Figure p142
Figure p142
Figure p141
Figure p141
Figure p135
Figure p135
Figure p134
Figure p134
Figure p133
Figure p133
Figure p132
Figure p132
Figure p131
Figure p131
Figure p130
Figure p130
Figure p129

Slight pits can be repaired without damaging the paint finish. It can be removed from inside the pit using a special lever tool (pressure tool). When performing this kind of repair, it requires that the technician has extensive experience in using special tools and sufficient knowledge about the materials, and is capable to identify faults and use correct repair methods. The pit should meet the following requirements: The pits should be limited to body positions that are easily accessible from both sides, as this repair method is rarely used for double-skinned parts or enclosed sections. Satisfactory repair results can be achieved for slight shallow pits with small deformation radius. This method is particularly applicable to damages caused by hail, or during parking or transportation. In case the diameter of the pit is less than 50mm, and the extent of damage can be assessed according to the size of the pit.

caution
The deformation of material in the center of the pit must not exceed the deformation limit.
4New Energy Vehicle Components

4.1 Integrated E-axle Device2400· 4g

4.1.1 Quality Warranty Statement

4.1.1.1 Emission Quality Warranty Statement

– For emissions-related warranty (5 years or 100,000 miles) under “ powertrain ” list main components that need to be covered – motor, inverter, HV battery charging system, batteries and thermal management. – The emission-related warranty covers all components whose failure would increase a vehicle's emissions of air conditioning refrigerants.

Fastener nameSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The grounding wire fixing bolt connecting the integrated axle and the frame assemblyM8(11 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb
ItemGeneral Parameters
ManufacturerJiangsu Maxwell Industries Co., Ltd.
TypePermanent magnetic synchronous motor
Continuous power170kW
Peak power260kW
Continuous torque184 lb·ft
Peak torque405lb·ft
Speed range0-11,000 r/min
Insulation gradeH
Cooling methodWater cooling
Protection ratingIP67
Weight60 kg
System efficiency97.4%

4.1.2 specifications

4.1.2.1 Fastener Specifications

4.1.2.2 Technical Parameters

Drive Motor
Figure p75

4.1.3 Decomposition Diagram

4.1.3.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Axle Electric Drive Assy 2. Axle Electric Drive Assy

4.1.4 Inspect

4.1.4.1 Inspection of Electric Drive System

Before starting the vehicle, check whether the relevant data displayed on the instrument cluster is normal. If the data is abnormal, do not drive the vehicle. Instead, record the system fault type and related data, and report the information to the Windrose authorized service station.

caution
If the high voltage battery or motor system fails, please contact a Windrose authorized service station for repair in time.

4.1.5 System Schematic Diagram

4.1.5.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

ResultTo Step
22 V - 27.4 VYes
Less than 22 VNo

4.1.6 Diagnostic Information and Steps

4.1.6.1 Diagnosis Description

Before diagnosing faults in the integrated axle device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the integrated axle device, and then begin system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine whether the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of integrated axle devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten

the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 4.1.6.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket installation devices that may affect the operation of the integrated axle device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the integrated axle device system.

• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 4.1.6.3 DTC Confirmation

1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 4.1.6.4 Inspection Of Intermittent Faults

caution
• Clear DTC.
• Conduct mock tests.
• Check and shake the wiring harness, connector box terminals.

When the fault cannot be confirmed by DTC inspection, the fault phenomenon only occasionally occurs in use. This should confirm all circuits and components that may cause the failure. In many cases, the fault location can be quickly and efficiently identified by performing the basic checks shown in the flowchart below. Especially for faults such as poor contact of wiring harness connectors. Fault Definition: This fault is not currently occurring, but historical DTC records indicate that this fault has occurred. Or the customer has reported the fault to be repaired, but because the fault is not related to the DTC, the fault symptoms cannot be reproduced at this time. Diagnostic Steps: Step 1 Check the battery voltage. A. Perform vehicle power-up operation. B. Measure the voltage of the battery. C. According to the measured values, the corresponding diagnostic step is entered.

Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of Main Battery Step 2 Visual physical inspection. Performing this step is an important means to preliminarily determine the location of the fault: • Check the wiring harness is damaged, whether there are wear, broken skin and other faults. • Check the wiring harness is improperly arranged. It is strictly forbidden to close the wiring harness to high voltage or high current devices. • Check the positive and negative cables of the battery are connected reliably and whether there are any phenomena such as looseness, oxidation and corrosion. Step 3 Check the wiring harness, connectors. A. Many intermittent failures are caused by wire harness and connector movement caused by vibration, twisting, uneven road or component operation. B. If the circuit resistance is too high, the component may not work properly. Use the diagnostic instrument to force the actuator to drive. If it can't work normally, Check the relevant circuit has line faults such as excessive resistance. Step 4 Reproduce the fault and record the data of the control unit with the instrument. A. Connect the vehicle fault diagnosis instrument, and use the data recording function of the fault diagnosis instrument to record the data when intermittent faults occur on the road test vehicle. After pressing the button of the vehicle data logger, the control module data can be recorded in the event of intermittent failure, which can be used to identify the failure location. B. Another diagnostic method is to connect the digital multimeter to the suspicious circuit while the vehicle is running. The abnormal reading value of the digital multimeter may indicate the fault location. Step 5 The fault LED illuminates intermittently, but the system has no fault code set. No Yes Next Step Next Step Next Step

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P22040024V undervoltage faultRefer to MCU1 Power Fault
B111717High battery voltage
B111716Low battery voltage
U012287Communication with the VCU is lostRefer to MCU1 Communication Fault
U015687missing CDCU
U019887VCAN bus-off
U008E88PCAN4 BusOff
P220500The hardware overvoltage is faultyRefer to MCU1 Internal Fault
P220600Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault
P220700Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation
P220800The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault
P220900The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault
P220A00The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three

The following conditions may cause the fault LED to illuminate intermittently, but the system will not set a DTC: • Electromagnetic interference caused by abnormally working relays, solenoid valves or switches controlled by the control module. • Accessories that are not original or after-market, such as car phones, alarms, lights or radios, are not installed correctly. • The fault indicator control circuit is intermittently shorted to ground. • The control module ground point is loose. Step 6 Other checks. Check the charging system for the following conditions: • Is the output voltage of the high and low voltage charging system correct? If the DCDC1 output voltage is not around 27.5 V and the DCDC2 output voltage is not around 30.5 V, repair the charging system. Step 7 Go to the fault symptom table.

4.1.6.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

MCU1 Next Step Next Step

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P221800The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P221900Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault
P221A00Rotatory fault
P221B00Motor overspeed 2 alarm
P221C00Motor overspeed 3 alarm
P221D00Motor stall fault
P221E00EEPROM read and write failure
P221F00Total hardware failure
P221400Motor controller overtemperature level 2 faultRefer to MCU1 Overheating Fault
P221500Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault
P221600Motor overtemperature level 2 fault
P221700Motor overtemperature level 3 fault
P220000Bus Overvoltage Level 2 FaultRefer to MCU1 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P220100Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault
P220200Bus level 2 undervoltage fault
P220300Bus level 3 undervoltage fault
P220B00The U-phase current sensor is faulty
P220C00The V-phase current sensor is faulty
P220D00W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved)
P220E00U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault
P220F00V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault
P221000W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved)
P221100U-phase fault
P221200V-phase fault
P221300W-phase fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P23040024V undervoltage faultRefer to MCU2 Power Fault
B111717High battery voltage
B111716Low battery voltage

MCU2

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U012287Communication with the VCU is lostRefer to MCU2 Communication Fault
U015687missing CDCU
U019887VCAN bus-off
U008E88PCAN4 BusOff
P230500The hardware overvoltage is faultyRefer to MCU2 Internal Fault
P230600Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault
P230700Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation
P230800The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault
P230900The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault
P230A00The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three
P231800The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P231900Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault
P231A00Rotatory fault
P231B00Motor overspeed 2 alarm
P231C00Motor overspeed 3 alarm
P231D00Motor stall fault
P231E00EEPROM read and write failure
P231F00Total hardware failure
P231400Motor controller overtemperature level 2 faultRefer to MCU2 Overheating Fault
P231500Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault
P231600Motor overtemperature level 2 fault
P231700Motor overtemperature level 3 fault
P230000Bus Overvoltage Level 2 FaultRefer to MCU2 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P230100Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault
P230200Bus level 2 undervoltage fault
P230300Bus level 3 undervoltage fault
P230B00The U-phase current sensor is faulty
P230C00The V-phase current sensor is faulty
P230D00W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved)
P230E00U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P230F00V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault
P231000W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved)
P231100U-phase fault
P231200V-phase fault
P231300W-phase fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P24040024V undervoltage faultRefer to MCU3 Power Fault
B111717High battery voltage
B111716Low battery voltage
U012287Communication with the VCU is lostRefer to MCU3 Communication Fault
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU
U019887VCAN bus-off
U008E88PCAN4 BusOff
P240500The hardware overvoltage is faultyRefer to MCU3 Internal Fault
P240600Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault
P240700Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation
P240800The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault
P240900The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault
P240A00The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three
P241800The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P241900Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault
P241A00Rotatory fault
P241B00Motor overspeed 2 alarm
P241C00Motor overspeed 3 alarm
P241D00Motor stall fault
P241E00EEPROM read and write failure
P241F00Total hardware failure
P241400Motor controller overtemperature level 2 faultRefer to MCU3 Overheating Fault

MCU3

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P241500Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault
P241600Motor overtemperature level 2 fault
P241700Motor overtemperature level 3 fault
P240000Bus Overvoltage Level 2 FaultRefer to MCU3 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P240100Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault
P240200Bus level 2 undervoltage fault
P240300Bus level 3 undervoltage fault
P240B00The U-phase current sensor is faulty
P240C00The V-phase current sensor is faulty
P240D00W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved)
P240E00U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault
P240F00V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault
P241000W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved)
P241100U-phase fault
P241200V-phase fault
P241300W-phase fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P25040024V undervoltage faultRefer to MCU4 Power Fault
B111717High battery voltage
B111716Low battery voltage
U012287Communication with the VCU is lostRefer to MCU4 Communication Fault
U015687missing CDCU
U019887VCAN bus-off
U008E88PCAN4 BusOff
P250500The hardware overvoltage is faultyRefer to MCU4 Internal Fault
P250600Busbar level 3 undervoltage fault
P250700Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulation
P250800The controller output software overcurrent level 2 fault
P250900The controller output software overcurrent level 3 fault

MCU4

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P250A00The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-three
P251800The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P251900Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit fault
P251A00Rotatory fault
P251B00Motor overspeed 2 alarm
P251C00Motor overspeed 3 alarm
P251D00Motor stall fault
P251E00EEPROM read and write failure
P251F00Total hardware failure
P251400Motor controller overtemperature level 2 faultRefer to MCU4 Overheating Fault
P251500Motor controller overtemperature level 3 fault
P251600Motor overtemperature level 2 fault
P251700Motor overtemperature level 3 fault
P250000Bus Overvoltage Level 2 FaultRefer to MCU4 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P250100Bus Overvoltage Level 3 Fault
P250200Bus level 2 undervoltage fault
P250300Bus level 3 undervoltage fault
P250B00The U-phase current sensor is faulty
P250C00The V-phase current sensor is faulty
P250D00W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved)
P250E00U-phase current sensor zero drift too large fault
P250F00V phase current sensor zero drift too large fault
P251000W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved)
P251100U-phase fault
P251200V-phase fault
P251300W-phase fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717High battery voltageRefer to TCU Power Fault
B111716Low battery voltage

TCU

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U012287Communication with VCU was lostRefer to TCU Communication Fault
U012A87Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus)
U012B87Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus)
U012D87Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus)
U008E88PCAN4 BusOff
U012E87CDCUCommunication exception
U012F87TDWCommunication exception
P270300First and second gear position sensor open circuit failureRefer to TCU Internal Fault
P270301First and second gear position sensor to power short circuit fault
P270302First and second gear position sensor to ground short-circuit fault
P270303The first and second gear position sensor signal exceeds the upper limit
P270304The first and second gear position sensor signal exceeds the lower limit
P270305The output shaft speed sensor is open faulty
P270306The output shaft speed sensor short- circuits the power supply
P270307The output shaft speed sensor is short circuit to the ground
P270308The output shaft speed sensor signal exceeds the upper limit
P27031EReverse second shift failed
P27031FSecond shift in 1st gear failed
P270320Second gear failed
P270348Shift power supply harness positive and negative connection
P270349Shift actuator stuck
P270350The shift motor current sensor is faulty
P270351The MCU1 motor has abnormal overspeed in the drive gear
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P270352The MCU4 motor has abnormal overspeed in the drive gear
P270353Velocity ratio anomaly
P270354Abnormal shift
P270355Shift motor open circuit fault
P270356The shift motor is short circuit to the power supply
P270357Shift motor to ground short circuit fault
P270358The 5V power supply to the position sensor is abnormal
P270359The 8V power supply to the tachometer is abnormal
P270360The temperature of the control board is too high
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P22040024V undervoltage fault24V power supply voltage <9V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive medium axle vehicle
B111717High battery voltageDetected that the power supply voltage > 32V lasts for 5s
B111716Low battery voltageDetected that the power supply voltage <18V lasted for 30s

4.1.6.6 MCU1 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.6 MCU1 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012287Communication with the VCU is lostMCU cannot receive messages sent by VCU for 1800ms (ID:0x18017427))1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
U015687missing CDCUMCU cannot receive messages sent by CDVCU for 500ms (ID:0x18FEC1EEx)
U019887VCAN bus-offMCU fails to receive messages sent by T-BOX for 500ms (ID:0x18FEE6EEx)
U008E88PCAN4 BusOffDTC is recorded after 8 BUSOFFs

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides MCU1? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.7 MCU1 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.7 MCU1 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P220500The hardware overvoltage is faultyHardware bus overvoltage signal is valid1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P220600Busbar level 3 undervoltage faultThe driver board hardware detects a fault and issues a hardware signal
P220700Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulationThe maximum value of the weak magnetic current compensation is greater than 500A
P220800The controller output software overcurrent level 2 faultThe maximum current is greater than 680A
P220900The controller output software overcurrent level 3 faultCurrent greater than 720A
P220A00The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-threeThe hardware circuit detects that the current is too high and a fault occurs
P221800The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contactThe driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P221900Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit faultThe motor temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P221A00Rotatory faultThe resolver connector is loose and not plugged in tightly, triggering the driver protection
P221B00Motor overspeed 2 alarmMotor speed>11000rpm
P221C00Motor overspeed 3 alarmMotor speed>11300rpm
P221D00Motor stall faultThe controller output torque is greater than 275NM, and the operating frequency is less than 1Hz for more than 2s (speed within 15rpm);
P221E00EEPROM read and write failureAbnormality in reading and writing drive parameters

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.8 MCU1 Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P221F00Total hardware failureController hardware failure detected
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P221400Motor controller overtemperature level 2 faultController temperature>167℉1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P221500Motor controller overtemperature level 3 faultController temperature>185℉
P221600Motor overtemperature level 2 faultController temperature>284℉
P221700Motor overtemperature level 3 faultController temperature>302℉

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.9 MCU1 Overheating Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.10 MCU1 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P220000Bus Overvoltage Level 2 FaultBus voltage>920V1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P220100Bus Overvoltage Level 3 FaultBus voltage>950V
P220200Bus level 2 undervoltage faultBus voltage < 520V and MCU is in the open state
P220300Bus level 3 undervoltage faultBus voltage < 500V and MCU is in the open state
P220B00The U-phase current sensor is faultyThe U-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P220C00The V-phase current sensor is faultyThe V-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P220D00W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved)The W-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P220E00U-phase current sensor zero drift too large faultU-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P220F00V phase current sensor zero drift too large faultV-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P221000W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved)W-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P221100U-phase faultThe motor U phase line connection is abnormal
P221200V-phase faultThe motor V phase line connection is abnormal
P221300W-phase faultThe motor W phase line connection is abnormal

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.11 MCU2 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Ttrigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P23040024V undervoltage fault24V power supply voltage <9V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive medium axle vehicle
B111717High battery voltageDetected that the power supply voltage > 32V lasts for 5s
B111716Low battery voltageDetected that the power supply voltage <18V lasted for 30s

2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.11 MCU2 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012287Communication with the VCU is lostMCU cannot receive messages sent by VCU for 1800ms (ID: 0x18017427))1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
U015687Communication with the CDCU is lostMCU cannot receive messages sent by CDVCU for 500ms (ID:0x18FEC1EEx)
U019887VCAN bus-offMCU fails to receive messages sent by T-BOX for 500ms (ID:0x18FEE6EEx)
U008E88PCAN4 BusOffDTC is recorded after 8 BUSOFFs

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides MCU2? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.12 MCU2 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.12 MCU2 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Ttrigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P230500Hardware overvoltage faultHardware bus overvoltage signal is valid1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P230600Busbar level 3 undervoltage faultThe driver board hardware detects a fault and issues a hardware signal
P230700Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulationThe maximum value of the weak magnetic current compensation is greater than 500A
P230800The controller output software overcurrent level 2 faultThe maximum current is greater than 680A
P230900The controller output software overcurrent level 3 faultCurrent greater than 720A
P230A00The U-phase current sensor is faultyThe hardware circuit detects that the current is too high and a fault occurs
P231800The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contactThe driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P231900Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit faultThe motor temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P231A00Rotatory faultThe resolver connector is loose and not plugged in tightly, triggering the driver protection
P231B00Motor overspeed 2 alarmMotor speed>11000rpm
P231C00Motor overspeed 3 alarmMotor speed>11300rpm
P231D00Motor stall faultThe controller output torque is greater than 275NM, and the operating frequency is less than 1Hz for more than 2s (speed within 15rpm);
P231E00EEPROM read and write failureAbnormality in reading and writing drive parameters
P231F00Total hardware failureController hardware failure detected

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.13 MCU2 Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P231400Motor controller overtemperature level 2 faultController temperature>167℉1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P231500Motor controller overtemperature level 3 faultController temperature>185℉
P231600Motor overtemperature level 2 faultController temperature>284℉
P231700Motor overtemperature level 3 faultController temperature>302℉

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.14 MCU2 Overheating Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.15 MCU2 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P230000Bus Overvoltage Level 2 FaultBus voltage>920V1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P230100Bus Overvoltage Level 3 FaultBus voltage>950V
P230200Bus level 2 undervoltage faultBus voltage < 520V and MCU is in the open state < 520V and MCU is in the open state
P230300Bus level 3 undervoltage faultBus voltage < 500V and MCU is in the open state
P230B00The U-phase current sensor is faultyThe U-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P230C00The V-phase current sensor is faultyThe V-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P230D00W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved)The W-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P230E00U-phase current sensor zero drift too large faultU-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P230F00V phase current sensor zero drift too large faultV-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P231000W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved)W-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P231100U-phase faultThe motor U phase line connection is abnormal
P231200V-phase faultThe motor V phase line connection is abnormal
P231300W-phase faultThe motor W phase line connection is abnormal

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.16 MCU3 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P24040024V undervoltage fault24V power supply voltage <9V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive rear axle vehicle
B111717High battery voltageDetected that the power supply voltage > 32V lasts for 5s
B111716Low battery voltageDetected that the power supply voltage <18V lasted for 30s

2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.16 MCU3 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Total body power supply B+ L22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012287Communication with the VCU is lostMCU cannot receive messages sent by VCU for 1800ms (ID: 0x18017427))1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface
U015687Communication with the CDCU is lostMCU cannot receive messages sent by CDVCU for 500ms (ID:0x18FEC1EEx)
U019887Communication with the T-BOX is lostMCU fails to receive messages sent by T-BOX for 500ms (ID:0x18FEE6EEx)
U008E88PCAN4 BusOffDTC is recorded after 8 BUSOFFsC

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides MCU3? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.17 MCU3 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.17 MCU3 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Total body power supply B+ L22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger conditionsFaulty Part
P240500The hardware overvoltage is faultyHardware bus overvoltage signal is valid1. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P240600Busbar level 3 undervoltage faultThe driver board hardware detects a fault and issues a hardware signal
P240700Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulationThe maximum value of the weak magnetic current compensation is greater than 500A
P240800The controller output software overcurrent level 2 faultThe maximum current is greater than 680A
P240900The controller output software overcurrent level 3 faultCurrent greater than 720A
P240A00The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-threeThe hardware circuit detects that the current is too high and a fault occurs
P241800The driver temperature sensor plug has poor contactThe driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P241900Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit faultThe motor temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P241A00Rotatory faultThe resolver connector is loose and not plugged in tightly, triggering the driver protection
P241B00Motor overspeed 2 alarmMotor speed>11000rpm
P241C00Motor overspeed 3 alarmMotor speed>11300rpm
P241D00Motor stall faultThe controller output torque is greater than 275NM, and the operating frequency is less than 1Hz for more than 2s (speed within 15rpm);
P241E00EEPROM read and write failureAbnormality in reading and writing drive parameters

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.18 MCU3 Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger conditionsFaulty Part
P241F00Total hardware failureController hardware failure detected
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P241400Motor controller overtemperature level 2 faultController temperature>167℉1. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P241500Motor controller overtemperature level 3 faultController temperature>185℉
P241600Motor overtemperature level 2 faultController temperature>284℉
P241700Motor overtemperature level 3 faultController temperature>302℉

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.19 MCU3 Overheating Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.20 MCU3 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P240000Bus Overvoltage Level 2 FaultBus voltage>920V1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P240100Bus Overvoltage Level 3 FaultBus voltage>950V
P240200Bus level 2 undervoltage faultBus voltage < 520V and MCU is in the open state
P240300Bus level 3 undervoltage faultBus voltage < 500V and MCU is in the open state
P240B00The U-phase current sensor is faultyThe U-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P240C00The V-phase current sensor is faultyThe V-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P240D00W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved)The W-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P240E00U-phase current sensor zero drift too large faultU-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P240F00V phase current sensor zero drift too large faultV-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P241000W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved)W-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P241100U-phase faultThe motor U phase line connection is abnormal
P241200V-phase faultThe motor V phase line connection is abnormal
P241300W-phase faultThe motor W phase line connection is abnormal

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.21 MCU4 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P25040024V undervoltage fault24V power supply voltage <9V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive rear axle vehicle
B111717High battery voltageDetected that the power supply voltage > 32V lasts for 5s
B111716Low battery voltageDetected that the power supply voltage <18V lasted for 30s

2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.21 MCU4 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Total body power supply B+ L22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012287Communication with the VCU is lostMCU cannot receive messages sent by VCU for 1800ms (ID: 0x18017427))1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface
U015687Communication with the CDCU is lostMCU cannot receive messages sent by CDVCU for 500ms (ID:0x18FEC1EEx)
U019887Communication with the T-BOX is lostMCU fails to receive messages sent by T-BOX for 500ms (ID:0x18FEE6EEx)
U008E88PCAN4 BusOffDTC is recorded after 8 BUSOFFs

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides MCU3? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.22 MCU4 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.22 MCU4 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Total body power supply B+ L22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P250500The hardware overvoltage is faultyHardware bus overvoltage signal is valid1. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P250600Busbar level 3 undervoltage faultThe driver board hardware detects a fault and issues a hardware signal
P250700Compensates for excessive fault of weak magnetic current regulationThe maximum value of the weak magnetic current compensation is greater than 500A
P250800The controller output software overcurrent level 2 faultThe maximum current is greater than 680A
P250900The controller output software overcurrent level 3 faultCurrent greater than 720A
P250A00The controller output hardware overcurrent fault is level-threeThe hardware circuit detects that the current is too high and a fault occurs
P251800The IGBT temperature sensor is faultyThe driver temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P251900Motor housing temperature sensor open circuit faultThe motor temperature sensor plug has poor contact
P251A00Rotatory faultThe resolver connector is loose and not plugged in tightly, triggering the driver protection
P251B00Motor overspeed 2 alarmMotor speed>11000rpm
P251C00Motor overspeed 3 alarmMotor speed>11300rpm
P251D00Motor stall faultThe controller output torque is greater than 275NM, and the operating frequency is less than 1Hz for more than 2s (speed within 15rpm);
P251E00The EEPROM reads and writes are faultyAbnormality in reading and writing drive parameters

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.23 MCU4 Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P251F00Total hardware failureController hardware failure detected
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P251400Motor controller overtemperature level 2 faultController temperature>167℉1. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P251500Motor controller overtemperature level 3 faultController temperature>185℉
P251600Motor overtemperature level 2 faultController temperature>284℉
P251700Motor overtemperature level 3 faultController temperature>302℉

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.24 MCU4 Overheating Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.25 MCU4 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P250000Bus Overvoltage Level 2 FaultBus voltage>920V1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Electric drive rear axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P250100Bus Overvoltage Level 3 FaultBus voltage>950V
P250200Bus level 2 undervoltage faultBus voltage < 520V and MCU is in the open state
P250300Bus level 3 undervoltage faultBus voltage < 500V and MCU is in the open state
P250B00The U-phase current sensor is faultyThe U-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P250C00The V-phase current sensor is faultyThe V-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P250D00W phase current Sensor Open Circuit fault (reserved)The W-phase Hall plug is loose, triggering the driver protection
P250E00U-phase current sensor zero drift too large faultU-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P250F00V phase current sensor zero drift too large faultV-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P251000W phase current sensor zero drift too large fault (reserved)W-phase current Hall abnormality, zero bias over limit, main cycle normal detection, only power-on detection once
P251100U-phase faultThe motor U phase line connection is abnormal
P251200V-phase faultThe motor V phase line connection is abnormal
P251300W-phase faultThe motor W phase line connection is abnormal

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive rear axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.26 TCU Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717The TCU power supply overvoltageTCU supply voltage higher than 32V for a period of time (about 200ms)1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low voltage interface of electric drive medium axle vehicle
B111716The TCU supply undervoltageTCU supply voltage below 18V for a period of time (about 200ms)

2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.26 TCU Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012287Communication with VCU was lostVDC Counter signal lost or unchanged for 500ms (detection message ID:0x18010327)1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
U012A87Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus)VDC Counter signal lost or unchanged for 500ms (detection message ID:0x18012774)
U012B87Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus)VDC Counter signal lost or unchanged for 500ms (detection message ID:0x18012775)
U012D87Loss of communication with MCU (TCU can receive life signals from MCU1-4 on the bus)VDC Counter signal lost or unchanged for 500ms (detection message ID:0x18012777))
U008E88PCAN4 BusOffThe DTC was recorded after eight busoffs
U012E87The CDCU communication is abnormalCDCU communication remains unchanged for 500ms (Detection message ID:0x18FEC1EE)
U012F87TDW communication is abnormalGSW does not change for 500ms(Check packet ID:0x18FEE6EE)

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides TCU? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.27 TCU Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.1.6.27 TCU Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P270300First and second gear position sensor open circuit failure1, the sensor 5V power supply is normal; 2, position voltage <0.1V; 3, last 200ms1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface
P270301First and second gear position sensor to power short circuit fault1, the sensor 5V power supply is normal; 2, position voltage >4.9; 3, last 200ms
P270302First and second gear position sensor to ground short-circuit fault1, the sensor 5V power supply is normal; 2, position voltage <0.1V; 3, last 200ms
P270303The first and second gear position sensor signal exceeds the upper limit1, the sensor power supply is normal; 2, sensor voltage >4500mv; 3, last 1000ms;
P270304The first and second gear position sensor signal exceeds the lower limit1, the sensor power supply is normal; 2, sensor voltage <500mv; 3, last 1000ms;
P270305The output shaft speed sensor is open faulty1, the sensor 8V power supply is normal; 2, sensor AD signal voltage <2.5V; 3, output shaft speed value =0rpm; 4, last 200ms;
P270306The output shaft speed sensor short-circuits the power supply1, the sensor 8V power supply is normal; 2, sensor AD signal voltage>3.3V; 3, output shaft speed value =0rpm; 4, last 200ms;
P270307The output shaft speed sensor is short circuit to the ground1, the sensor 8V power supply is normal; 2, sensor AD signal voltage <0.25V; 3, output shaft speed value =0rpm; 4, last 200ms;
P270308The output shaft speed sensor signal exceeds the upper limit1, the sensor 8V power supply is normal; 2, speed value greater than 120km*1.2; 3, last 200ms;

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.6.28 TCU Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P27031EReverse second shift failedIn a single shift cycle, the number of shift failures >=5
P27031FSecond shift in 1st gear failedIn a single shift cycle, the number of shift failures >=5
P270320Second gear failedIn a single shift cycle, the number of shift failures >=5
P270348Shift power supply harness positive and negative connection1. When shifting, the actual motion direction of the shifting motor is opposite to the theoretical position (request 1 gear but actually hang 2 gear direction); 2, last 200ms
P270349Shift actuator stuck1. Take off the block card for 5s
P270350The shift motor current sensor is faulty1, displacement sensor change rate >1V 2, shifting motor current <1.5A; 3, duty cycle ≥30; 4, last 1000ms
P270351The MCU1 motor has abnormal overspeed in the drive gear1, the actual motor speed >11000rpm for 200ms 2. Driving in gear
P270352The MCU4 motor has abnormal overspeed in the drive gear1, the actual motor speed >11000rpm for 200ms 2. Driving in gear
P270353Velocity ratio anomalyIn gear, | actual output shaft speed - theoretical output shaft speed |>50rpm for 1000ms
P270354Abnormal shiftDuring a power-on process, if the internal gear of TCU is inconsistent with the current requested gear of the VDC for more than 5 times during driving, it is judged to be abnormal gear removal
P270355Shift motor open circuit fault1, the shift motor power supply is normal; 2, duty cycle > 10, current less than 200mA; 3, last 1000ms;
P270356The shift motor is short circuit to the power supply/
P270357Shift motor to ground short circuit fault1, the shift motor power supply is normal; 2, duty cycle > 10, current less than 200mA; 3, last 1000ms;
P270358The 5V power supply to the position sensor is abnormal1, 5V voltage sampling greater than 5.5V or less than 4.5V; 2, continuous 100ms;
P270359The 8V power supply to the tachometer is abnormal1, 8V voltage sampling is greater than 9V or less than 7V 2, continuous 100ms;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P270360The temperature of the control board is too highThe sampled temperature is greater than 75 ° C

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Step 4:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.1.7 Dismantling and Installation

4.1.7.1 Replacement of Integrated axle - Intermediate Axle

Figure p2132
Figure p2125
Figure p2124
Figure p675

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from the power system. 8 Removal the fifth wheel assembly. 9 Remove the corrugated plate. 10 Remove the drive wheel (front left). 11 Removal the rear wheel housing left front assembly. 12 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (left front). 13 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 14 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (left front). 15 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 16 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 17 Remove the balance beam (left). 18 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 19 Remove the rear wheel housing right front assembly. 20 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (right front). 21 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (right front). 22 Remove the balance beam (right). 23 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (front).

24 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 25 Disconnect the 1 harness connectors of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.

Figure p123
Figure p123

26 Disconnect the 3 air pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 27 Remove the 2 straps.

Figure p124
Figure p124

28 Disconnect the 2 air pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 29 Remove the 2 straps.

Figure p125
Figure p125

30 Disconnect the 4 water pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.

31 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the high-voltage wire harness clamp on the integrated electric axle-intermediate axle.

Figure p126
Figure p126

32 Remove 10 fixing bolts on the integrated electric axle- intermediate axle.

Figure p127
Figure p127

33 Disconnect 1 wire harness connector of the integrated electric axle-intermediate axle. 34 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the fixed clamp for the high- voltage wire harness of the integrated electric axle- intermediate axle.

Figure p128
Figure p128

35 Using a lifting platform or other tools to remove the integrated axle - intermediate axle. Installation Procedures 1 Use a lifting platform or other tools to move the integrated axle - intermediate axle to the installation position. 2 Install two fixing bolts of the fixed clamp for the high- voltage wire harness on the integrated electric axle- intermediate axle.

Torque: (12 ft-lb +/- .36) ft-lb
Figure p129

3 Connect one wire harness connector of the integrated electric axle-intermediate axle.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install ten fixing bolts of the integrated electric axle- intermediate axle.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

5 Install one fixing bolt of the high-voltage wire harness clamp on the integrated electric axle-intermediate axle.

Torque:(9 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb

6 Connect the 4 water pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.

7 Install the 2 straps. 8 Connect the 2 air pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.

9 Install the 2 straps. 10 Connect the 3 air pipes of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.

11 Connect 1 harness connector of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

12 Connect 2 harness connector of the integrated axle - intermediate axle.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

13 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 14 Install the balance beam (right). 15 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (right front). 16 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (right front). 17 Install the rear wheel housing right front assembly. 18 Install the drive wheel (right front). 19 Install the balance beam (left). 20 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 21 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 22 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (left front). 23 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 24 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (left front).

Figure p976
Figure p784

25 Install the rear wheel housing left front assembly. 26 Install the drive wheel (left front). 27 Install the corrugated plate. 28 Install the fifth wheel assembly. 29 Fill coolant in the power system. 30 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 31 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 32 Connect the battery negative cable. 33 Close the front flip cover plate. 34 Close the door.

4.1.7.2 Replacement of Integrated axle - Rear Axle

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from the power system. 8 Remove the rear wheel housing upper body. 9 Remove the drive wheel (rear left). 10 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (left). 11 Remove the rear left wheel housing middle body assembly. 12 Remove the rear left wheel housing rear body assembly. 13 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 14 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 15 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 16 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 17 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 18 Remove the rear spring U-bolt 2. 19 Remove the balance beam (left). 20 Remove the drive wheel (rear right). 21 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (right). 22 Remove the rear right wheel housing middle body assembly. 23 Remove the rear right wheel housing rear body assembly.

24 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 25 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 26 Remove the balance beam (right). 27 Remove the dual channel module assembly. 28 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 29 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the integrated axle - rear axle. 30 Remove the 4 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle.

Figure p137
Figure p137

31 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the integrated axle - rear axle. 32 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the integrated axle - rear axle. 33 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the integrated axle - rear axle.

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
Figure p138
Figure p138
Figure p138

34 Remove the 5 fixing bolts of the integrated electric axle - the rear axle. 35 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the high-voltage wire harness clamp on the integrated electric axle - the rear axle. 39 Disconnect the 2 air pipes of the integrated axle - rear axle.

Figure p139
Figure p139
Figure p139

40 Remove the 2 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 41 Disconnect the 3 pipelines of the integrated axle - rear axle. 42 Remove the 2 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 43 Use a lifting platform or other tools to remove the integrated axle - rear axle.

Figure p140
Figure p140
Figure p140

Installation Procedures 1 Use a lifting platform or other tools to move the integrated axle - rear axle to the installation position. 2 Install the 2 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 3 Connect the 3 air pipes of the integrated axle - rear axle.

4 Install the 2 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 5 Connect the 2 air pipes of the integrated axle - rear axle. 9 Install the 2 fixing bolts of the high-voltage wire harness clamp on the integrated electric axle - the rear axle.

Torque: (9 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb

10 Install the 5 fixing bolts of the integrated electric axle - the rear axle.

Torque: (9 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb

11 Connect the 2 water pipes of the integrated axle - rear axle. 12 Connect 2 harness connector of the integrated axle - rear axle.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

13 Connect 2 harness connector of the integrated axle - rear axle.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

14 Install the 4 straps of the integrated axle - rear axle. 15 Connect 2 harness connector of the integrated axle - rear axle.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

16 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 17 Install the dual channel module assembly. 18 Install the balance beam (right). 19 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 20 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 21 Install the rear right wheel housing rear body assembly. 22 Install the rear right wheel housing middle body assembly. 23 Install the height adjustment device assembly (right). 24 Install the drive wheel (rear right). 25 Install the balance beam (left). 26 Install the rear spring U-bolt 2. 27 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 28 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 29 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 30 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 31 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 32 Install the rear left wheel housing rear body assembly. 33 Install the rear left wheel housing middle body assembly. 34 Install the height adjustment device assembly (left). 35 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 36 Install the rear wheel housing upper body. 37 Fill coolant in the power system. 38 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 39 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 40 Connect the battery negative cable. 41 Close the front flip cover plate. 42 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the parts, it is necessary to recalibrate the height.
Fastener nameSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolt connecting the differential lock solenoid valve to the pipe beamM8(9 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb

4.2 Differential Lock Solenoid Valve Device2407

4.2.1 Specifications

4.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p147

4.2.2 Decomposition Diagram

4.2.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Differential Lock Solenoid Device 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p148
Figure p148

4.2.3 Dismantling and Installation

4.2.3.1 Replacement of the Differential Lock Solenoid Valve

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 6 Disconnect the 3 air pipes of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket.

7 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 8 Detach the differential lock solenoid valve. Installation Procedures 1 Move the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket to the installation position. 2 Install the 2 fixing bolts of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket.

Torque: (11 ft-lb +/- .5 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p149

3 Connect the 3 air pipes of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the differential lock solenoid valve assembly with bracket.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

4.3 Power Battery Device2101 / 1224· 8g

4.3.1 Description and Operation

4.3.1.1 Description and Operation

Accident

1. Handle traffic accidents in accordance with relevant provisions of State Local and Federal law on Road Traffic Safety. 2. Notify the vehicle after-sales service specialist. It is prohibited to reuse the vehicle before the after-sales department issues the battery safety judgment results. 3. If repair or painting is required after collision of the vehicle, it must be performed at an authorized dealer of the vehicle, and it is prohibited to remove the vehicle without permission. Before painting, remove the high voltage battery, high voltage harness, MCU and other high voltage components. This is because the service life of the high voltage battery can be affected when it is exposed to the higher temperature painting workshop. In addition, the high voltage battery on the vehicle may bring potential safety hazards to maintenance personnel who have not received professional training in maintenance of electric vehicles.

Catching Fire

1. Immediately turn off the emergency high voltage switch and low voltage power supply, and notify the manufacturer's after-sales personnel. 2. Do not touch the leaking electrolyte with your hands; If your skin or eyes come into contact with the electrolyte, rinse immediately with plenty of water, and seek medical attention immediately to avoid injury.

Falling in Water or Immersion in Water

1. Do not power on the vehicle. 2. Contact the service personnel.

Recovery and Tracing of High Voltage Battery

1. Car owners and enterprises shall dispose of batteries in accordance with the Interim Measures for the Management of Recovery and Utilization of New Energy Vehicle High Voltage Battery and the Interim Regulations on the Management of Recovery, Utilization and Tracing of New Energy Vehicle High Voltage Battery. 2. If repair or replacement of the high voltage battery is required, the owner of a new energy vehicle should send the new energy vehicle to an after-sales service organization recognized by our company with corresponding capabilities for repair and replacement. 3. When the new energy vehicle is eligible for scrapping, it should be sent to a company engaged in recovery and disassembly of scrapped vehicles approved by our company for removal of the high voltage battery. 4. The owner of high voltage battery (battery leasing and other operating enterprises) should hand over the waste high voltage batteries to a recycling service outlet approved by our company. 5. Do not disassemble, remove or discard the high voltage batteries without permission. Do not hand over waste high voltage batteries to other units or individuals. You will be held responsible for any environmental pollution or safety accidents caused by removing, disassembling or discarding high voltage batteries without permission.

Environmental Pollution

1. The electrode material of the waste battery in the environment will go through hydrolysis, decomposition, oxidation and other chemical reactions with the substances in the environment, producing heavy metal ions, strong alkali and negative electrode carbon dust which will result in heavy metal, alkali and dust pollutions. 2. The electrolyte of waste batteries in the environment can go through hydrolysis, decomposition, combustion and other chemical reactions, producing HF, arsenic-containing compounds and phosphorus-containing compounds, which will lead to fluorine and arsenic pollutions. 3. The solvent of waste batteries undergoes hydrolysis, combustion, decomposition and other chemical reactions, producing small molecule organic compounds such as formaldehyde, methanol, acetaldehyde, ethanol, or formic acid, which are easily soluble in water and can cause water pollution. 4. Other substances in the battery can cause organic matter and fluorine pollutions when they are in the environment. 5. When using the battery, some harmful substances produced after side reactions, including the products of solvent decomposition such as propylene, glycol, ethylene, and ethanol, the by-products generated via reaction between electrolyte and positive electrode such as HF, LiF, (CH2OCO2Li)2CH3OCO2Li, CH4, CO, and CH3OH, the products of side reaction between the negative electrode and the electrolyte, and additives added in the pretreatment process of electrode can directly or indirectly cause environmental pollution.

Harm to Human Health

1. Ingestion of harmful components in batteries can cause severe chemical burns to the mouth, esophagus, gastrointestinal tract, which will lead to upper respiratory tract and lung allergies. If you have ingested harmful ingredients, do not induce vomiting and do not eat or drink. Instead, you should seek medical attention immediately. 2. Skin contact and absorption of harmful components such as ethylene carbonate, diethyl carbonate, and dimethyl carbonate in battery packs may cause local inflammation or skin allergies and/or chemical burns. 3. Eye contact with the harmful components of the battery pack may cause severe allergies and chemical burns.

Fastener nameSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
NCM-The fixing bolts connecting the battery pack assembly (CALB 161Ah) to the battery mounting bracketM14147.5 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
NCM-The fixing bolts connecting the battery pack assembly (CALB 161Ah) to the frame assemblyM818 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb
ItemParameter
Working environment temperature (*)-30 - 55
Working environment relative humidity (%)5~95
Rated capacity (Ah)644
Nominal voltage (V)754.8
Working voltage range (V)571.2~887.4
SOC working range (%)2~97
SOC at delivery (%)50
Thermal management modeLiquid cooling, liquid heating
Battery pack module4P, 1P204S
Rated storage energy (kWh)486.09
Battery modelEV-CALB-755161
Main featuresTernary lithium battery
Charging modeDC charging
Charging current (A)644
Charging voltage (V)887.4
ManufacturerHuating (Hefei) Hybrid Technology Co., Ltd.
ItemParameter
Working environment temperature (*)-22 - 122
Working environment relative humidity (%)5~95
Rated capacity (Ah)920
Nominal voltage (V)766.4
Working voltage range (V)595~868.7
SOC working range (%)2~100
SOC at delivery (%)50

4.3.2 Specifications

4.3.2.1 Fastener Specifications

4.3.2.2 Technical Parameters

High Voltage Battery (NCM Lithium Battery)
High Voltage Battery (LFP Battery)
ItemParameter
Thermal management modeLiquid cooling, liquid heating
Battery pack module4P, 1P238S
Rated storage energy (kWh)705.2
Battery modelEV-CALB-766230
Main featuresLithium iron phosphate battery
Charging modeDC charging
Charging current (A)920
Charging voltage (V)868.7
ManufacturerHuating (Hefei) Hybrid Technology Co., Ltd.

4.3.3 System Schematic Diagram

4.3.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111716The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery packRefer to CMU1 Power Fault
B111717The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack
P168400The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack
P168500The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack
U012287VDC communication is lost - battery packRefer to CMU1 Communication Fault
U008C88PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack
U015687CDCU communication lost - battery pack
U019887T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack
P163900The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faultyRefer to CMU1 Internal Fault
P166600The CMU storage state is faulty
P166700Failure of temperature acquisition

4.3.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

4.3.4.1 Diagnosis Description

Before diagnosing faults in the power battery system, refer to Description And Operation Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of the power battery device before starting system diagnosis can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps in the event of a malfunction, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the power battery device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process

can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 4.3.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the power battery system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the power battery system.

• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 4.3.4.3 DTC Confirmation

1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the malfunction code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a malfunction code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output malfunction code.

– No:Perform intermittent malfunction checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 4.3.4.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

CMU1

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P16A100The CMU passive equalization function is faulty
P160200The battery temperature limit is too highRefer to CMU1 Temperature Abnormality
P160500The temperature is too low
P163500The temperature is too high
P163A00The temperature difference is too large
P166900The temperature difference is too large
P168300The temperature is too low
P161500The total voltage is too lowRefer to CMU1 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P161600The total voltage is too high
P163600The discharge current is too large
P166A00The feedback current is too large
P163700High voltage interlock faultRefer to CMU1 High Voltage Interlock Fault
P160300Limit undervoltage of the unitRefer to CMU1 Individual Voltage Abnormality
P160400The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage
P163300The cell voltage is too low
P163400The cell voltage is too high
P163800The voltage dropout of the cell is too large
P166800The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty
P166B00The voltage dropout of the cell is too large
P166C00The cell voltage is too low
P166D00The cell voltage is too high
P160100Battery pack fire alarmRefer to CMU1 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111716The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery packRefer to CMU2 Power Fault
B111717The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack
P178400The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack

CMU2

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P178500The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack
U012287VDC communication is lost - battery packRefer to CMU2 Communication Fault
U008C88PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack
U015687CDCU communication lost - battery pack
U019887T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack
P173900The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faultyRefer to CMU2 Internal Fault
P176600The CMU storage state is faulty
P176700Failure of temperature acquisition
P17A100The CMU passive equalization function is faulty
P170200The battery temperature limit is too highRefer to CMU2 Temperature Abnormality
P170500The temperature is too low
P173500The temperature is too high
P173A00The temperature difference is too large
P176900The temperature difference is too large
P178300The temperature is too low
P171500The total voltage is too lowRefer to CMU2 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P171600The total voltage is too high
P173600The discharge current is too large
P176A00The feedback current is too large
P173700High voltage interlock faultRefer to CMU2 High Voltage Interlock Fault
P170300Limit undervoltage of the unitRefer to CMU2 Individual Voltage Abnormality
P170400The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage
P173300The cell voltage is too low
P173400The cell voltage is too high
P173800The voltage dropout of the cell is too large
P176800The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty
P176B00The voltage dropout of the cell is too large
P176C00The cell voltage is too low
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P176D00The cell voltage is too high
P170100Battery pack fire alarmRefer to CMU2 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111716The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery packRefer to CMU3 Power Fault
B111717The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack
P188400The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack
P188500The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack
U012287VDC communication is lost - battery packRefer to CMU3 Communication Fault
U008C88PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack
U015687CDCU communication lost - battery pack
U019887T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack
P183900The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faultyRefer to CMU3 Internal Fault
P186600The CMU storage state is faulty
P186700Failure of temperature acquisition
P18A100The CMU passive equalization function is faulty
P180200The battery temperature limit is too highRefer to CMU3 Temperature Abnormality
P180500The temperature is too low
P183500The temperature is too high
P183A00The temperature difference is too large
P186900The temperature difference is too large
P188300The temperature is too low
P181500The total voltage is too lowRefer to CMU3 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P181600Over voltage
P183600The discharge current is too large
P186A00The feedback current is too large
P183700High voltage interlock faultRefer to CMU3 High Voltage Interlock Fault

CMU3

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P180300Limit undervoltage of the unitRefer to CMU3 Individual Voltage Abnormality
P180400The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage
P183300The cell voltage is too low
P183400The cell voltage is too high
P183800The voltage dropout of the cell is too large
P186800The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty
P186B00The voltage dropout of the cell is too large
P186C00The cell voltage is too low
P186D00The cell voltage is too high
P180100Battery pack fire alarmRefer to CMU3 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111716The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery packRefer to CMU4 Power Fault
B111717The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery pack
P168400The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery pack
P168500The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery pack
U012287VDC communication is lost - battery packRefer to CMU4 Communication Fault
U008C88PCAN2 BusOff- battery pack
U015687CDCU communication lost - battery pack
U019887T-BOX communication is lost - battery pack
P193900The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faultyRefer to CMU4 Internal Fault
P196600The CMU storage state is faulty
P196700Failure of temperature acquisition
P19A100The CMU passive equalization function is faulty

CMU4

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P190200The battery temperature limit is too highRefer to CMU4 Temperature Abnormality
P190500The temperature is too low
P193500The temperature is too high
P193A00The temperature difference is too large
P196900The temperature difference is too large
P198300The temperature is too low
P191500The total voltage is too lowRefer to CMU4 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P191600The total voltage is too high
P193600The discharge current is too large
P196A00The feedback current is too large
P193700High voltage interlock faultRefer to CMU4 High Voltage Interlock Fault
P190300Limit undervoltage of the unitRefer to Abnormal Voltage Of CMU4 Unit
P190400The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltage
P193300The cell voltage is too low
P193400The cell voltage is too high
P193800The voltage dropout of the cell is too large
P196800The loose set of the single sampling line is faulty
P196B00The voltage dropout of the cell is too large
P196C00The cell voltage is too low
P196D00The cell voltage is too high
P190100Battery pack fire alarmRefer to CMU4 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111716The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery packBATT24V <9V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Upper left battery pack 1
B111717The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery packBATT24V >36

4.3.4.5 CMU1 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P168400The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery packBATT24V < 18V
P168500The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery packBATT24V > 32V

2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.5 CMU1 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012287VDC communication is lost - battery packVDC_TO_CMU/0x10016827x lost for more than 20s1.Wiring harness 2. Upper left battery pack 1
U008C88PCAN2 BusOff- battery packCMU BusOff
U015687CDCU communication lost - battery packCDCU_VDHR/0x18FEC1EExlost for more than 5s
U019887T-BOX communication is lost - battery packTGW_TD_Time/0x18FEE6EExlost for more than 5s

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CMU1? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the upper left battery pack 1. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.6 CMU1 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.6 CMU1 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P163900The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faultyCommunication error with the CMU's internal capture chip1. Upper left battery pack 1
P166600The CMU storage state is faultyThe CMU storage state is faulty
P166700Failure of temperature acquisitionFailure of temperature acquisition
P16A100The CMU passive equalization function is faultyThe CMU passive equalization function is faulty
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P160200The battery temperature limit is too highTmax ≥140℉1. Upper left battery pack 1
P160500The temperature is too lowTmin < -22℉
P163500The temperature is too highTmax ≥131℉
P163A00The temperature difference is too largeΔT≥77℉
P166900The temperature difference is too largeΔT≥68℉
P168300The temperature is too lowTmin < -13℉

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 5:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.7 CMU1 Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 4:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.8 CMU1 Temperature Abnormality

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P161500The total voltage is too lowTmin>15℃ PackVokt≤530.4V(2.6V * 204) 0℃<Tmin≤15℃PackVokt≤469.2V(2.3V * 204) Tmin≤0℃ PackVokt≤387.6V(1.9V * 204)1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Upper left battery pack 1
P161600The total voltage is too highPackVokt≥877.2V (4.3V * 204)
P163600The discharge current is too largeI >1.2*Check the pulse discharge ammeter+30A
P166A00The feedback current is too largeI >1.2*Check back the charge current meter+30A

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check whether the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.9 CMU1 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage harness of the upper left battery pack 1. Step 4:Check the insulation detection circuit inside the upper left battery pack 1. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.10 CMU1 High Voltage Interlock Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P163700High voltage interlock malfunctionThe battery high-voltage interlock signal status is abnormal1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Upper left battery pack 1
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P160300Limit undervoltage of the unitTmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.2V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.0V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.8V1. Upper left battery pack 1
P160400The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltageVmax≥4.4V
P163300The cell voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.6V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.3V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.9V
P163400The cell voltage is too highVmax≥4.37V
P163800The voltage dropout of the cell is too largeΔV≥650mV
P166800The loose set of the single sampling line is faultyThe fault flag of single collection disconnection is 1
P166B00The voltage dropout of the cell is too largeΔV≥500mv
P166C00The cell voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ Vmin≤3.28V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤3.19V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤2.21V

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 4:Check the high-voltage interlock harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.11 CMU1 Individual Voltage Abnormality

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P166D00The cell voltage is too highVmax≥4.316v
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P160100Battery pack fire alarmThe thermal runaway fault flag in the packet is 1 or the VDC receives the CMU thermal runaway wake-up hardwire signal1.Wiring harness 2. Upper left battery pack 1

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 4:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.12 CMU1 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.12 CMU1 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111716The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery packBATT24V <9V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Lower left battery pack 2
B111717The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery packBATT24V >36
P178400The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery packBATT24V < 18V
P178500The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery packBATT24V > 32V

Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system malfunction codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the thermal runaway signal harness of the upper left battery pack 1. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper left battery pack 1. Step 6:Replace the upper left battery pack 1. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.13 CMU2 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.13 CMU2 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012287VDC communication is lost - battery packVDC_TO_CMU/0x10016827x lost for more than 20s1.Wiring harness 2. Lower left battery pack 2
U008C88PCAN2 BusOff- battery packCMU BusOff
U015687CDCU communication lost - battery packCDCU_VDHR/0x18FEC1EExlost for more than 5s
U019887T-BOX communication is lost - battery packTGW_TD_Time/0x18FEE6EExlost for more than 5s

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CMU2? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the lower left battery pack 2. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.14 CMU2 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.14 CMU2 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P173900The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faultyCommunication error with the CMU's internal capture chip1. Lower left battery pack 2
P176600The CMU storage state is faultyThe CMU storage state is faulty
P176700Failure of temperature acquisitionFailure of temperature acquisition
P17A100The CMU passive equalization function is faultyThe CMU passive equalization function is faulty
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P170200The battery temperature limit is too highTmax ≥140℉1. Lower left battery pack 2
P170500The temperature is too lowTmin < -22℉
P173500The temperature is too highTmax ≥131℉
P173A00The temperature difference is too largeΔT≥77℉
P176900The temperature difference is too largeΔT≥68℉
P178300The temperature is too lowTmin < -13℉

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 5:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.15 CMU2 Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 4:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.16 CMU2 Temperature Abnormality

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P171500The total voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ PackVokt≤530.4V(2.6V * 204) 32℉<Tmin≤59℉PackVokt≤469.2V(2.3V * 204) Tmin≤32℉ PackVokt≤387.6V(1.9V * 204)1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Lower left battery pack 2
P171600The total voltage is too highPackVokt≥877.2V (4.3V * 204)
P173600The discharge current is too largeI >1.2*Check the pulse discharge ammeter+30A
P176A00The feedback current is too largeI >1.2*Check back the charge current meter+30A

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check if the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.17 CMU2 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high voltage harness of the lower left battery pack 2. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the lower left battery pack 2. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.18 CMU2 High Voltage Interlock Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P173700High voltage interlock malfunctionThe battery high-voltage interlock signal status is abnormal1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Lower left battery pack 2
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P170300Limit undervoltage of the unitTmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.2V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.0V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.8V1. Lower left battery pack 2
P170400The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltageVmax≥4.4V
P173300The cell voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.6V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.3V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.9V
P173400The cell voltage is too highVmax≥4.37V
P173800The voltage dropout of the cell is too largeΔV≥650mV
P176800The loose set of the single sampling line is faultyThe fault flag of single collection disconnection is 1
P176B00The voltage dropout of the cell is too largeΔV≥500mv
P176C00The cell voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ Vmin≤3.28V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤3.19V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤2.21V

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 4:Check the high-voltage interlock harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.19 CMU2 Individual Voltage Abnormality

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P176D00The cell voltage is too highVmax≥4.316v
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P170100Battery pack fire alarmThe thermal runaway fault flag in the packet is 1 or the VDC receives the CMU thermal runaway wake-up hardwire signal1.Wiring harness 2. Lower left battery pack 2

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 4:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.20 CMU2 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.20 CMU2 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111716The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery packBATT24V <9V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Upper right battery pack 3
B111717The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery packBATT24V >36
P188400The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery packBATT24V < 18V
P188500The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery packBATT24V > 32V

Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system malfunction codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the lower left battery pack 2 thermal runaway signal harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower left battery pack 2. Step 6:Replace the lower left battery pack 2. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.21 CMU3 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.21 CMU3 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012287VDC communication is lost - battery packVDC_TO_CMU/0x10016827x lost for more than 20s1.Wiring harness 2. Upper right battery pack 3
U008C88PCAN2 BusOff- battery packCMU BusOff
U015687CDCU communication lost - battery packCDCU_VDHR/0x18FEC1EExlost for more than 5s
U019887T-BOX communication is lost - battery packTGW_TD_Time/0x18FEE6EExlost for more than 5s

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CMU3? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the upper right battery pack 3. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.22 CMU3 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.22 CMU3 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P183900The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faultyCommunication error with the CMU's internal capture chip1. Upper right battery pack 3
P186600The CMU storage state is faultyThe CMU storage state is faulty
P186700Failure of temperature acquisitionFailure of temperature acquisition
P18A100The CMU passive equalization function is faultyThe CMU passive equalization function is faulty
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P180200The battery temperature limit is too highTmax ≥140℉1. Upper right battery pack 3
P180500The temperature is too lowTmin < -22℉
P183500The temperature is too highTmax ≥131℉
P183A00The temperature difference is too largeΔT≥77℉
P186900The temperature difference is too largeΔT≥68℉
P188300The temperature is too lowTmin < -13℉

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 5:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.23 CMU3 Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 4:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.24 CMU3 Temperature Abnormality

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P181500The total voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ PackVokt≤530.4V(2.6V * 204) 32℉<Tmin≤15℃PackVokt≤469.2V(2.3V * 204) Tmin≤32℉ PackVokt≤387.6V(1.9V * 204)1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Upper right battery pack 3
P181600The total voltage is too highPackVokt≥877.2V (4.3V * 204)
P183600The discharge current is too largeI >1.2*Check the pulse discharge ammeter+30A
P186A00The feedback current is too largeI >1.2*Check back the charge current meter+30A

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check whether the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.25 CMU3 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage harness of the upper right battery pack 3. Step 4:Check the insulation detection circuit inside the upper right battery pack 3. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.26 CMU3 High Voltage Interlock Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P183700High voltage interlock malfunctionThe battery high-voltage interlock signal status is abnormal1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Upper right battery pack 3
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P180300Limit undervoltage of the unitTmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.2V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.0V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.8V1. Upper right battery pack 3
P180400The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltageVmax≥4.4V
P183300The cell voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.6V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.3V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.9V
P183400The cell voltage is too highVmax≥4.37V
P183800The voltage dropout of the cell is too largeΔV≥650mV
P186800The loose set of the single sampling line is faultyThe fault flag of single collection disconnection is 1
P186B00The voltage dropout of the cell is too largeΔV≥500mv
P186C00The cell voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ Vmin≤3.28V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤3.19V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤2.21V

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 4:Check the high-voltage interlock harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.27 CMU3 Individual Voltage Abnormality

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P186D00The cell voltage is too highVmax≥4.316v
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P180100Battery pack fire alarmThe thermal runaway fault flag in the packet is 1 or the VDC receives the CMU thermal runaway wake-up hardwire signal1.Wiring harness 2. Upper right battery pack 3

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 4:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.28 CMU3 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.28 CMU3 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111716The CMU supply voltage limit is too low - battery packBATT24V <9V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Lower right battery pack 4
B111717The CMU supply voltage limit is too high - battery packBATT24V >36
P168400The supply voltage of the CMU is too low - the battery packBATT24V < 18V
P168500The supply voltage of the CMU is too high - the battery packBATT24V > 32V

Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system malfunction codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the thermal runaway signal harness of the upper right battery pack 3. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the upper right battery pack 3. Step 6:Replace the upper right battery pack 3. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.29 CMU4 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.29 CMU4 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012287VDC communication is lost - battery packVDC_TO_CMU/0x10016827x lost for more than 20s1.Wiring harness 2. Lower right battery pack 4
U008C88PCAN2 BusOff- battery packCMU BusOff
U015687CDCU communication lost - battery packCDCU_VDHR/0x18FEC1EExlost for more than 5s
U019887T-BOX communication is lost - battery packTGW_TD_Time/0x18FEE6EExlost for more than 5s

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CMU4? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the lower right battery pack 4. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.30 CMU4 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.30 CMU4 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P193900The internal communication of the CMU is abnormally faultyCommunication error with the CMU's internal capture chip1. Lower right battery pack 4
P196600The CMU storage state is faultyThe CMU storage state is faulty
P196700Failure of temperature acquisitionFailure of temperature acquisition
P19A100The CMU passive equalization function is faultyThe CMU passive equalization function is faulty
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P190200The battery temperature limit is too highTmax ≥140℉1. Lower right battery pack 4
P190500The temperature is too lowTmin < -22℉
P193500The temperature is too highTmax ≥131℉
P193A00The temperature difference is too largeΔT≥77℉
P196900The temperature difference is too largeΔT≥68℉
P198300The temperature is too lowTmin < -13℉

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 5:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.31 CMU4 Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 4:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.32 CMU4 Temperature Abnormality

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P191500The total voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ PackVokt≤530.4V(2.6V * 204) 32℉<Tmin≤59℉PackVokt≤469.2V(2.3V * 204) Tmin≤32℉ PackVokt≤387.6V(1.9V * 204)1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Lower right battery pack 4
P191600The total voltage is too highPackVokt≥877.2V (4.3V * 204)
P193600The discharge current is too largeI >1.2*Check the pulse discharge ammeter+30A
P196A00The feedback current is too largeI >1.2*Check back the charge current meter+30A

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.33 CMU4 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage harness of the lower right battery pack 4. Step 4:Check the insulation detection circuit inside the lower right battery pack 4. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.34 CMU4 High Voltage Interlock Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P193700High voltage interlock malfunctionThe battery high-voltage interlock signal status is abnormal1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Lower right battery pack 4
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P190300Limit undervoltage of the unitTmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.2V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.0V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.8V1. Lower right battery pack 4
P190400The voltage limit of the unit is overvoltageVmax≥4.4V
P193300The cell voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ Vmin≤2.6V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤2.3V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤1.9V
P193400The cell voltage is too highVmax≥4.37V
P193800The voltage dropout of the cell is too largeΔV≥650mV
P196800The loose set of the single sampling line is faultyThe fault flag of single collection disconnection is 1
P196B00The voltage dropout of the cell is too largeΔV≥500mv
P196C00The cell voltage is too lowTmin>59℉ Vmin≤3.28V 32℉<Tmin≤59℉Vmin≤3.19V Tmin≤32℉ Vmin≤2.21V

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 4:Check the high-voltage interlock harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.35 Abnormal Voltage Of CMU4 Unit

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P196D00The cell voltage is too highVmax≥4.316v
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P190100Battery pack fire alarmThe thermal runaway fault flag in the packet is 1 or the VDC receives the CMU thermal runaway wake-up hardwire signal1.Wiring harness 2. Lower right battery pack 4

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 4:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.4.36 CMU4 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.3.4.36 CMU4 Thermal Runaway Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system malfunction codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the thermal runaway signal harness of the lower right battery pack 4. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the lower right battery pack 4. Step 6:Replace the lower right battery pack 4. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.3.5 Dismantling and Installation

4.3.5.1 Replacement of NCM-battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah).

Figure p1954
Figure p1857
Figure p1857
Figure p1837

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 14 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery. 15 Remove the bottom front left inclined beam. 16 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 17 Remove the bottom middle cross beam. 18 Remove the bottom rear left inclined beam. 19 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 20 Remove the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 21 Remove the outer battery mount (NCM). 22 Remove the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).

23 Disconnect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). 24 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah).

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.

25 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.

Figure p200
Figure p200
Figure p200

26 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). 27 Remove the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) and detach the NCM- battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). Installation Procedures

Figure p201
Figure p201

1 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery, and move the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) to the installation position. 2 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). 3 Install the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah).

Torque:(148 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.

Torque: (18.5 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

5 Connect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah). 6 Connect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

7 Install the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah). 8 Install the outer battery mount (NCM). 9 Install the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 10 Install the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 11 Install the bottom rear left inclined beam. 12 Install the bottom middle cross beam. 13 Install the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 14 Install the bottom front left inclined beam. 15 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 16 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 17 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 18 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1.

Figure p1990

19 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 20 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 21 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 22 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 23 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 24 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 25 Connect the battery negative cable. 26 Close the front flip cover plate. 27 Close the door.

4.3.5.2 Replacement of NCM-battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 14 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery. 15 Remove the bottom front left inclined beam. 16 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 17 Remove the bottom middle cross beam. 18 Remove the bottom rear left inclined beam. 19 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 20 Remove the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 21 Remove the outer battery mount (NCM).

22 Disconnect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah). 23 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.

24 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).

Figure p205
Figure p205

25 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 26 Remove the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) and detach the NCM- battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).

Figure p206
Figure p206
Figure p206

Installation Procedures 1 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery, and move the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) to the installation position. 2 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah). 3 Install the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).

Torque: (148 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

5 Connect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah). 6 Connect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

7 Install the outer battery mount (NCM). 8 Install the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 9 Install the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 10 Install the bottom rear left inclined beam. 11 Install the bottom middle cross beam. 12 Install the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 13 Install the bottom front left inclined beam. 14 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 15 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 16 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 17 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 18 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 19 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 20 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 21 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 22 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 23 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 24 Connect the battery negative cable. 25 Close the front flip cover plate. 26 Close the door.

4.3.5.3 Replacement of NCM-Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 8 Remove the lamp (upper). 9 Remove the lamp (lower). 10 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 11 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 13 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery. 14 Remove the bottom front right inclined beam.

15 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 16 Remove the bottom middle cross beam. 17 Remove the bottom rear left inclined beam. 18 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 19 Remove the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 20 Remove the outer battery mount (NCM). 21 Remove the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). 23 Disconnect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah). 24 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
Figure p210
Figure p210

25 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 26 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah). 27 Remove the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) and detach the NCM- battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).

Figure p211
Figure p211

Installation Procedures 1 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery, and move the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) to the installation position. 2 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah). 3 Install the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).

Torque: (148 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p212

4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

5 Connect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).

6 Connect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

8 Install the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). 9 Install the outer battery mount (NCM). 10 Install the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 11 Install the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 12 Install the bottom rear left inclined beam. 13 Install the bottom middle cross beam. 14 Install the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 15 Install the bottom front right inclined beam. 16 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 17 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 18 Install the boarding step body assembly. 19 Install the lamp (lower). 20 Install the lamp (upper). 21 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 22 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 23 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 24 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 25 Connect the battery negative cable. 26 Close the front flip cover plate. 27 Close the door.

4.3.5.4 Replacement of NCM-battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 8 Remove the lamp (upper). 9 Remove the lamp (lower). 10 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 11 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 13 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery. 14 Remove the bottom front right inclined beam. 15 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 16 Remove the bottom middle cross beam. 17 Remove the bottom rear left inclined beam. 18 Remove the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 19 Remove the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 20 Remove the outer battery mount (NCM). 21 Disconnect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).

Figure p215

22 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.

23 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 24 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).

Figure p216
Figure p216

25 Remove the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) and detach the NCM- battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). Installation Procedures

Figure p217
Figure p217

1 Use the high voltage battery lifting platform to support the high voltage battery, and move the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) to the installation position. 2 Jack the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). 3 Install the 7 fixing bolts and nuts of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).

Torque:(148 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

5 Connect the 2 water pipes of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah). 6 Connect the 3 harness connectors of the NCM-battery pack assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

7 Install the outer battery mount (NCM). 8 Install the outer battery bracket double hole (NCM). 9 Install the bottom middle inclined beam bracket 2. 10 Install the bottom rear left inclined beam. 11 Install the bottom middle cross beam. 12 Install the bottom middle inclined beam 1. 13 Install the bottom front right inclined beam. 14 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 15 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the boarding step body assembly. 17 Install the lamp (lower). 18 Install the lamp (upper). 19 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system.

20 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 21 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 22 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.

Fastener nameSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolt connecting the fixed bracket of the water pump and the electronic water pumpM818 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb
The fixing nut connecting the fixed bracket of the water pump and the electronic water pumpM818 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb
Fixed bolts connecting the expansion tank (plastic) to the rear integrated frame (unit) (plastic)M1028 ft-lb - 38 ft-lb
The fixing bolts connecting the front-end module and the front connecting beamM1266 ft-lb +/- 3.5 ft-lb

4.4 Power System Cooling Device1300 / 1318 / 1319· 74g

4.4.1 Specifications

4.4.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p222

4.4.2 Decomposition Diagram

4.4.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. FRont end Module

2. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Electronic Water Pump 9. Water Pump Fixing Bracket(Back) 5. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Water Pump Fixing Bracket(Front)

Figure p223

41. Water Refill Hose 47. Long Exhaust Pipe(l=5350) 42. One-hole Fixing Clamp 48. Water Refill Hose 2 43. Cable Ties 1 49. PDU & Water outlet Hose of the Air Pump 44. Pdu Water Outlet Hose 50. Water Inlet Hose of the Air Pump 45. Hose Hoop-type b and Type c 51. Water Outlet Hose of the Air Pump 46. Pdu Water Inlet Hose 52. Front end Module Outlet Nylon Pipe

Figure p224

29. Three-hole Fixing Clamp 55. Rear Water Pmp Otlet Hse 42. One-hole Fixing Clamp 56. Hose Btween Pmps 43. Cable Ties 1 57. Hose Hop-type b and Tpe c 46. Pdu Water Inlet Hose 58. Hydrating nylon tube 47. Long Exhaust Pipe(l=5350) 59. Water Pump Out Nylon Pipe 48. Water Refill Hose 2 60. Hexagon Flange Bolt 52. Front end Module Outlet Nylon Pipe 61. Hose Clamp 1 53. Front Pump - Water Inlet Hose 62. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p225

42. One-hole Fixing Clamp 82. M2 Water Hose (With Protective Bra 45. Hose Hoop-type b and Type c 84. Water Outlet Rubber Hose of M2 & MCU2 (With Protective Braiding) 69. Mcu2 Outlet Hose(With Protective b 85. Mcu1 Water Inlet Hose (With Protec 70. M1 Water Inlet Hose 1 (With Protec 86. Transition Straight Through Hard p 71. Middle and Rear Axle Return Water 87. Mcu2 Connects to M3 House 1(With p 72. Combination Tee Hard Pipe 88. Mcu2 Connects to M3 House 2 (With 73. M3 Water Inlet Hose 1(With Protect 89. Mcu2 and M3 Connects Haerd Pipes 74. Middle and Rear Axle Return Waterr 90. M3 Water Inlet Hose Support 75. Middle and Rear Axle Combination h 91. Mcu2 Outlet Hose(With Protective b 77. M3 Water Inlet Hose 2 (With Protec 92. Hexagon Flange Bolt 78. Uble Hole Nylon Cable Tie ( Gtb-3 93. Hexagon Flange Bolt 80. Middle axle Mcu2 Hose Fixing Bra 94. Hard Mcu2 Outlet Pipe

Figure p226

48. Water Refill Hose 2 65. M1 Water Inlet Hose 49. Water Outlet Hose of PDU & Air Pump 66. Front-end Module Water Inlet Nylon 63. Hexagon Flange Bolt 67. Water Inlet Nylon Tube 1 of M & MCU 64. Three-hole Fixing Clamp 68. Fixed Thread Rolling Strip(t120rh

Figure p227

40. Expansion Tank (Plastic) 42A. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 41A. Hexagon Flange Bolt 43A. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p228

4.4.3 Inspect

4.4.3.1 Inspection of Coolant

After the coolant temperature drops, check the coolant level in the reservoir is between the MIN to MAX marks; If the coolant is insufficient, the warning lamp on the instrument cluster will be illuminated to remind you to add coolant. If the coolant has suspended matter, sediment or discoloration, replace it with new coolant immediately. Regularly check the freezing point of the coolant to ensure that it meets the requirements of the local environment and replace it regularly.

Figure p230

4.4.4 The Working Principle of the System

4.4.4.1 System Working Principle

Three-motor Cooling Solution

1. Front end module total 7. Intermediate axle motor 2 2. Expansion tank 8. Intermediate axle MCU1 3. Electronic water pump 9. Intermediate axle MCU2 4. Inflation pump 11. Intermediate axle motor 1 5. PDU 13. Rear axle motor 2 6. Intermediate axle motor 1

Four-motor Cooling Solution

1. Front end module total 8. Intermediate axle MCU1 2. Expansion tank 9. Intermediate axle MCU2 3. Electronic water pump 10. Intermediate axle motor 1 4. Inflation pump 11. Rear axle MCU1 5. PDU 12. Rear axle MCU2 6. Intermediate axle motor 1 13. Rear axle motor 2 7. Intermediate axle motor 2

Figure p231
Figure p232
Figure p232

4.4.5 Dismantling and Installation

4.4.5.1 Change of Power System Coolant

Removal Procedures 1 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 2 Detach the filler cap. 3 Disengage 1 clamp and disconnect the pipeline. 4 Drain coolant from the power system. Installation Procedures

1 Connect the pipeline and attach 1 clamp. 2 Fill coolant in the power system.

caution
1. The coolant must meet the requirements of the national standards, and the coolant of same model cannot be mixed. It is recommended to use coolant with a freezing point 14* F lower than the minimum temperature in local area.

3 Install the filler cap. 4 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap.

4.4.5.2 Change of Battery Thermal Management System Coolant

Removal Procedures

1 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 2 Detach the filler cap. 3 Disengage the pipeline. 4 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. Installation Procedures

Figure p234
Figure p234

1 Connect the pipeline. 2 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system.

caution
1. The coolant must meet the requirements of the national standards, and the coolant of same model cannot be mixed. It is recommended to use coolant with a freezing point 14* F lower than the minimum temperature in local area.
2. Add coolant to the auxiliary water tank until the level is between the MIN and MAX marks. When filling coolant, the air in the coolant cavity must be discharged. For this reason, you should open the air release valve (if any) on the radiator (water tank), slowly add the coolant to prevent air blockage, and wait for 2 to 3 minutes to completely discharge air. The coolant should be filled into the bottom of the water filling port or liquid level inspection port of the radiator.

3 Install the filler cap. 4 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap.

4.4.5.3 Replacement of Front End Module

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 5 Drain coolant from the power system. 6 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 7 Remove the through-type lamp. 8 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 9 Remove the forward MMW radar. 10 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 11 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 12 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 13 Remove the front bumper assembly. 14 Remove the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 15 Remove the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 16 Remove the sealing cross beam. 17 Remove the MMW radar bracket. 18 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 19 Remove the deflector assembly. 20 Remove the condenser. 21 Disconnect the 5 harness connectors of the front end module.

Figure p236

22 Disconnect the 3 water pipes of the front end module.

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.

23 Remove the 5 clamp fixing bolts of the front end module.

Figure p237
Figure p237
Figure p237

24 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the front end module and detach the front end module.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the front end module, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Figure p238
Figure p238
Figure p238

Installation Procedures 1 Move the front end module to the installation position.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the front end module, it shall be moved to the installation position with the help of an assistant.

2 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the front end module.

Torque:(66 ft-lb +/-3.5 ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Install the 5 clamp fixing bolts of the front end module.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Connect the 3 water pipes of the front end module.

5 Connect the 5 harness connectors of the front end module.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Install the condenser. 7 Install the deflector assembly. 8 Install the front lower protection assembly. 9 Install the MMW radar bracket. 10 Install the sealing cross beam. 11 Install the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 12 Install the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 13 Install the front bumper assembly. 14 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 15 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 16 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 17 Install the forward MMW radar. 18 Install the front MMW radar shield.

19 Install the through-type lamp. 20 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 21 Fill coolant in the power system. 22 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.

Figure p242

4.4.5.4 Replacement of Electronic Water Pump

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Drain coolant from the power system. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electronic water pump.

6 Disconnect the 2 water pipes of the electronic water pump.

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.

7 Remove the 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the electronic water pump. 8 Remove the electronic water pump. Installation Procedures

Figure p243
Figure p243

1 Move the electronic water pump to the installation position. 2 Install the 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the electronic water pump.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Connect the 2 water pipes of the electronic water pump. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the electronic water pump.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Fill coolant in the power system. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
Fixed bolts connecting the bottom of the thermal management unit to the integrated frameworkM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
Fixed nuts connecting the bottom of the thermal management unit to the integrated frameworkM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
Fixed bolts connecting the side of the thermal management unit to the integrated frameM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the left battery pack connector bracket to the frame assemblyM14103 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
The fixing nut connecting the left battery pack connector bracket to the frame assemblyM14103 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
Fixed bolts for the connection between the expansion tank (plastic) and the integrated frameM1052 ft-lb
The fixing nut for the fixed connection between the expansion tank (plastic) and the integrated frameM852 ft-lb

4.5 Battery Thermal Management Device2127· 1g

4.5.1 Specifications

4.5.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p247

4.5.2 Decomposition Diagram

4.5.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Expansion Tank (Plastic) 19. Right Water Filter Inlet Hose 2. Water Filter 20. Right Water Filter Outlet Hose 3. Thermal Management Unit-lh 21. Right Unit Water Replenishment Hos 5. Thermal Management Unit-rh 22. Right Unit Inlet Hose 8. Tee Joint ( t25 ) 48. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Expansion Kettle Water Outlet Hose 49. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Wptc Water Outlet Hose 50. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Left Unit Exhaust Hose 51. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Right Unit Exhaust Hose 52. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Left Chiller Water Outlet Hose 53. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Left Water Filter Inlet Hose 54. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Left Water Filter Outlet Hose 57. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 17. Left Unit Inlet Hose 58. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 18. Right Chiller Water Outlet Hose 61 Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock

4. Three-way Joint for Battery Piping 38. Right 1 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 23. Fixed Bracket for the Piping of the Left Battery Pack 39. Left 1 Battery Pack Water Outlet n 24. Right Battery Pack Line Fixing Bra 40. Right 1 Battery Pack Water Outlet 26. Right Unit Inlet Nylon Pipe 41. Water Inlet Nylon Tube of the Lower Battery Pack 27. Right Unit Water Outlet Nylon Pipe 42. Water Outlet Nylon Tube of the Lower Battery Pack 28. Left Unit Inlet Nylon Pipe 43. Left 2 Battery Pack Water Inlet Ny 29. Left Unit Water Outlet Nylon Pipe 44. Right 2 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 30. Left Battery Pack Connector Fixing 45. Left 2 Battery Pack Water Outlet n 31. Right Battery Pack Connector Fixin 1 46. Right 2 Battery Pack Water Outlet 32. Right Battery Pack Connector Fixin 2 47. Hexagon Flange Bolt 33. Battery Pack Pipeline Fixing Brack 1 55. Hexagon Flange Bolt 34. Battery Pack Pipeline Fixing Brack 2 56. Hexagon Flange Nut 35. Water Inlet Nylon Tube of the Upper Battery Pack 57. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 36. Water Outlet Nylon Tube of the Upper Battery Pack 60. Hexagon Flange Bolt 37. Left 1 Battery Pack Water Inlet Ny

Figure p248

4. Battery Pipeline 4-Way Connector 41. Right 1 Battery Pack Water Outlet 24. Right Battery Pack Connector Fixin 42. Right 2 Battery Pack Water Outlet 25. Right Battery Pack Line Fixing Bra 43. Right 3 Battery Pack Water Outlet 26. Right Unit Inlet Nylon Pipe 44. Right Battery Pack Water Outlet Ny 27. Right Unit Water Outlet Nylon Pipe 45. Right Battery Pack Water Inlet Nyl 38. Right 1 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 47. Hexagon Flange Bolt 39. Right 2 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 55. Hexagon Flange Bolt 40. Right 3 Battery Pack Water Inlet n 56. Hexagon Flange Nut

Figure p249
Figure p250

4.5.3 The Working Principle of the System

4.5.3.1 System Working Principle

Figure p251

4.5.4 Dismantling and Installation

4.5.4.1 Replacement of the Thermal Management Unit (left)

Figure p2123

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 7 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 9 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 11 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 12 Remove the left deflector lower body. 13 Remove the expansion tank (plastic) (left). 14 Remove the water filter. 15 Remove the rear working lamp. 16 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the bracket.

17 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the bracket.

Figure p252
Figure p252
Figure p252

18 Remove the 3 fixing nuts of the bracket. 19 Disconnect the 2 harness connectors of the thermal management unit (left).

Figure p253
Figure p253
Figure p253

20 Disconnect the 3 water pipes of the thermal management unit (left).

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.

21 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the water pipe.

Figure p254
Figure p254
Figure p254

22 Remove the 12 fixing bolts and nuts of the thermal management unit (left) and detach the thermal management unit (left). Installation Procedures

Figure p255
Figure p255

1 Move the thermal management unit (left) to the installation position. 2 Install the 12 fixing bolts and nuts of the thermal management unit (left).

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Install the 2 fixing bolts of the water pipe.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Connect the 3 water pipes of the thermal management unit (left). 5 Connect the 2 harness connectors of the thermal management unit (left).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Install the 3 fixing nuts of the bracket.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2ft-lb) ft-lb

7 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the bracket.

Torque: (88 ft-lb +/- 6 ft-lb) ft-lb

8 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the bracket.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p2119
Figure p318
Figure p318
Figure p318

9 Install the rear working lamp. 10 Install the water filter. 11 Install the expansion tank (plastic) (left). 12 Install the left deflector lower body. 13 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 14 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 15 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 16 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 17 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 18 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 19 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 20 Connect the battery negative cable. 21 Close the front flip cover plate. 22 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
Fixed bolts connecting the multi in one power distribution assembly to the integrated frameM12(62 ft-lb +/- 6ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing nut connecting the multi in one power distribution assembly and the integrated frameM12(62 ft-lb +/- 6ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt of the grounding wire harness on the multi in one power distribution assemblyM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the high- voltage harness clamp to the high- voltage harnessM10(22 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
ItemParameterRemark
Rated input voltage750Vdc/
Input voltage range500~950Vdc/
Maximum input current14A/
Auxiliary power input voltage16~32Vdc10~36V, communicable
Output rated voltage27.5±0.3Vde (adjustable within 30Vdc)It can respond to 30Vdc
Output rated current218A/
Peak output current240A6min
Rated output power6000W/
Peak output power6600W6min
Output efficiency95.50%/
Stabilized voltage precision±1%/
Stabilized current precision±1%/
Power regulation±1%/
Load regulation±2%/
Temperature coefficient±0.02%/℃/

4.6 Multi-in-One Power Distribution Device2104· 2g

4.6.1 Specifications

4.6.1.1 Fastener Specifications

4.6.1.2 Technical Parameters

DC/DC
ItemParameterRemark
Output ripple and noise≤300mVp-pBandwidth limited to 20MHz, 10uF electrolytic capacitor and 0.1uF film capacitor connected in parallel at the test end; 25℃
Output rise time<500ms/
On/off overshoot amplitude≤±5%/
On/off output delay≤1s/
Dynamic response overshoot▲V: ≤+5%/
Dynamic response recovery time≤5ms30%~80%~30% load change
Output current limiting characteristicConstant current 240A/
Figure p263

4.6.2 Decomposition Diagram

4.6.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Hexagon Flange Nut 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Auxiliary Drive All-in-One Assy

4.6.3 System Schematic Diagram

4.6.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P1D0C00The auxiliary power supply overvoltageRefer to DCDC1 Power Fault
P1D0D00Secondary power supply undervoltage
P1D0E00Low pressure KL30
P1D0F00Low pressure KL30
P1D0B00Communication exceptionRefer to DCDC1 Communication Fault
P1D0500Hardware overvoltageRefer to DCDC1 Internal Fault
P1D0600Hardware overflows
P1D0700KB fault
P1D0800Threshold fault
P1D0900Short circuit protection
P1D0A00The DCDC is overheatedRefer to DCDC1 Overheating Fault
P1D0200The DCDC output overvoltageRefer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault
P1D0300The DCDC output undervoltage
P1D0400The DCDC output overflows
P1D0000The input voltage of the DCDC is too highRefer to DCDC1 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P1D0100DCDC input undervoltage

4.6.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

4.6.4.1 Diagnosis Description

Before diagnosing faults in multi in one power distribution equipment, Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of multi in one power distribution equipment before starting system diagnosis can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps in the event of a fault, and more importantly, it can help determine whether the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of multi in one power distribution equipment should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the

diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 4.6.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check the after-sales installation devices that may affect the operation of the multi in one power distribution system to ensure that these devices do not affect the operation of the multi in one power distribution system.

• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 4.6.4.3 DTC Confirmation

1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 4.6.4.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

DCDC1 DCDC2

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P1E0C00The auxiliary power supply overvoltageRefer to DCDC2 Power Fault
P1E0D00Secondary power supply undervoltage
P1E0E00Low pressure KL30
P1E0F00Low pressure KL30
P1E0B00Communication exceptionRefer to DCDC2 Communication Fault
P1E0500Hardware overvoltageRefer to Internal Fault Of DCDC2
P1E0600Hardware overflows
P1E0700KB fault
P1E0800Threshold fault
P1E0900Short circuit protection
P1E0A00The DCDC is overheatedRefer to DCDC2 Overheating Fault
P1E0200The DCDC output overvoltageRefer to DCDC2 Low-voltage Power Supply Sstem Fault
P1E0300The DCDC output undervoltage
P1E0400The DCDC output overflows
P1E0000The input voltage of the DCDC is too highRefer to DCDC2 High Voltage Circuit Fault
P1E0100DCDC input undervoltage
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P260700KL30 voltage is too low when the main drive circuit is powered onRefer to PDU Power Fault
P260811The main contactor of the main drive circuit is closed abnormally
P260F00KL30 is too low when the auxiliary drive circuit is powered on
P261011Auxiliary drive circuit main contactor closing abnormal fault
P261D00Battery voltage is out of controller range fault
P261F11KL30 undervoltage fault
P262011KL30 overvoltage fault
P262211Intranet BusOff FaultRefer to PDU Communication Fault
P262311Intranet DCDC communication alarm
P262411Intranet TM1 communication alarm
P262511Intranet TM2 communication alarm
P260000Main contactor adhesion fault in main drive circuitRefer to Internal Fault Of PDU
P260100Reverse voltage difference fault when the main drive circuit is powered on

PDU

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P260200Main drive circuit power-on pre-charge timeout fault
P260300The rear end of the main drive circuit is completely short-circuited.
P260400Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the main drive circuit
P260500Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear secondary of the main drive circuit
P260600Main drive circuit with speed power-on fault
P260900Auxiliary drive circuit main contactor adhesion fault
P260A00Auxiliary drive circuit power-on reverse voltage difference fault
P260B00Auxiliary drive circuit power-on pre- charge timeout fault
P260C00The rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit is completely short-circuited
P260D00Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit
P260E00Secondary incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit
P261100PTC1 contactor adhesion fault
P261200PTC2 contactor adhesion fault
P261300TOP1 contactor adhesion failure
P261400TOP2 contactor adhesion failure
P261500FAST1 contactor adhesion fault
P261600FAST2 contactor adhesion fault
P261711PTC1 closing abnormal fault
P261811PTC2 closing abnormal fault
P261911TOP1 closing abnormal fault
P261A11TOP2 closing abnormal fault
P261B11FAST1 closing abnormality fault
P261C11FAST2 closing abnormality fault
P261E00Main negative contactor disconnect/ battery feed
P262100Compilation failure

APU

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U015687missing CDCURefer to APU Communication Fault
U019887VCAN bus-off
U012287Lost Communication with VDC
U008D88PCAN3 BusOff
P1C0000EPS hardware overcurrent faultRefer to APU Reports EHPS Related Fault
P1C0100EPS drive upper axle failure
P1C0200EPS drive lower axle failure
P1C0300EPS drive undervoltage fault
P1C0400EPS hardware overvoltage fault
P1C0500EPS bus overvoltage fault
P1C0600EPS bus undervoltage fault
P1C0700EPS resolver failure
P1C0800EPS phase failure
P1C0900EPS AC zero drift is too large
P1C0A00EPS Hall disconnection
P1C0B00EPS three-phase current verification error
P1C0C00EPSKL30 low voltage power supply undervoltage
P1C0D00EPSKL30 low voltage power supply overvoltage
P1C0E00EPS module over temperature fault
P1C0F00EPS motor over temperature fault
P1C1000EPS motor overspeed failure
P1C1100EPS speed deviation is too large
P1C1200EPS active discharge timeout
P1C1300EPS parameter tuning failed
P1C1410EPS jam alarm
P1C1510EPS bus voltage overvoltage drop power
P1C1610EPS bus voltage undervoltage alarm
P1C1710EPS motor temperature sensor is disconnected
P1C1810EPS module over temperature alarm
P1C1910EPS motor over temperature alarm
P1C1A10EPS control overload alarm
P1C1B10EPS motor overload alarm
P1C1C10EPS motor overspeed alarm
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P1C1D11EPS motor temperature sensor 1 is offline
P1C1E11EPS motor temperature sensor 2 is offline
P1C1F11EPSU phase current zero drift fault
P1C2011EPSV phase current zero drift fault
P1C2111EPSW phase current zero drift fault
P1C2211EPSU phase Hall wire disconnection
P1C2311EPSV phase Hall wire disconnection
P1C2411EPSW phase Hall disconnection
P1C2500EPSCompilation failure
P1C2600EPS EEPROM read and write failure
P1C2700ACM hardware overcurrent faultRefer to APU Reports Air Compressor Related Fault
P1C2800ACM driver upper axle failure
P1C2900ACM drive lower axle fault
P1C2A00ACM driver undervoltage fault
P1C2B00ACM hardware overvoltage fault
P1C2C00ACM bus overvoltage fault
P1C2D00ACM bus undervoltage fault
P1C2E00ACM resolver failure
P1C2F00ACM phase failure
P1C3000ACM AC zero drift is too large
P1C3100ACM Hall disconnection
P1C3200ACM three-phase current verification error
P1C3300ACM KL30 low voltage power supply undervoltage
P1C3400ACM KL30 Low Voltage Power Supply Overvoltage
P1C3500ACM module over temperature fault
P1C3600ACM motor over temperature fault
P1C3700ACM Motor Overspeed Fault
P1C3800ACM speed deviation too large
P1C3900ACM Active Discharge Timeout
P1C3A00ACM parameter tuning failed
P1C3B10ACM stall alarm
P1C3C10ACM bus voltage overvoltage drop power
P1C3D10ACM bus voltage undervoltage alarm
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P1C3E10ACM motor temperature sensor disconnected
P1C3F10ACM module over temperature alarm
P1C4010ACM motor over temperature alarm
P1C4110ACM control overload alarm
P1C4210ACM motor overload alarm
P1C4310ACM Motor Overspeed Alarm
P1C4411ACM motor temperature sensor 1 is offline
P1C4511ACM motor temperature sensor 2 is offline
P1C4611U phase current zero drift fault
P1C4711V phase current zero drift fault
P1C4811W phase current zero drift fault
P1C4911U phase Hall wire disconnection
P1C4A11V phase Hall wire disconnection
P1C4B11W phase Hall disconnection
P1C4C00Compilation failure
P1C4D00EEPROM read and write failure
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1D0C00The auxiliary power supply overvoltageThe auxiliary power supply voltage is greater than 13V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Power distribution unit
P1D0D00Secondary power supply undervoltageThe auxiliary power supply voltage is less than 9V
P1D0E00Low pressure KL30The KL30 voltage is greater than 37V
P1D0F00Low pressure KL30The KL30 voltage is less than 9V

4.6.4.5 DCDC1 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.6.4.5 DCDC1 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1D0B00Communication exception30s The correct packet frame was not received1.Wiring harness 2. Power distribution unit

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides DCDC1? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power distribution unit power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.6 DCDC1 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.6.4.6 DCDC1 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of PCAN3 bus network integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1D0500Hardware overvoltageComparator equivalent voltage greater than 37V1. Power distribution unit
P1D0600Hardware overflowsComparator equivalent current greater than 350A
P1D0700KB faultThe correct KB correction factor was not read
P1D0800Threshold faultThe correct fault threshold was not read. Procedure
P1D0900Short circuit protectionThe output voltage is lower than 4V and the output current is greater than 180A
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1D0A00The DCDC is overheatedThe primary temperature of DCDC is greater than 239℉. Or the secondary side temperature of DCDC is greater than 239℉; Or the ambient temperature is greater than 239℉1. Power distribution unit

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.7 DCDC1 Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 4:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement of Multi in One Power Distribution Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.8 DCDC1 Overheating Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.9 DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1D0200The DCDC output overvoltageThe output voltage is greater than 32V1. Main battery 2. Wiring harness 3. Power distribution unit
P1D0300The DCDC output undervoltageThe output voltage is lower than 18V
P1D0400The DCDC output overflowsThe output current is greater than 200A

2.Circuit Diagram

4.6.4.9 DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1D0000The input voltage of the DCDC is too highThe input voltage is greater than 960V1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Power distribution unit
P1D0100DCDC input undervoltageThe input voltage is lower than 480V
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1E0C00The auxiliary power supply overvoltageThe auxiliary power supply voltage is greater than 13V1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Power distribution unit
P1E0D00Secondary power supply undervoltageThe auxiliary power supply voltage is less than 9V
P1E0E00The KL30 is overpressurizedThe KL30 voltage is greater than 37V
P1E0F00Low pressure KL30The KL30 voltage is less than 9V

Step 4:Check the low-voltage charging circuit of the power distribution unit (integrated DCDC). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.10 DCDC1 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power distribution unit high-voltage harness. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the power distribution unit. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.11 DCDC2 Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.6.4.11 DCDC2 Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1E0B00Communication exception30s The correct packet frame was not received1.Wiring harness 2. Power distribution unit

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides DCDC2? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power distribution unit power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.12 DCDC2 Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.6.4.12 DCDC2 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1E0500Hardware overvoltageComparator equivalent voltage greater than 37V1. Power distribution unit
P1E0600Hardware overflowsComparator equivalent current greater than 350A
P1E0700KB faultThe correct KB correction factor was not read
P1E0800Threshold faultThe correct fault threshold was not read. Procedure
P1E0900Short circuit protectionThe output voltage is lower than 4V and the output current is greater than 180A
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1E0A00The DCDC is overheatedThe primary temperature of DCDC is greater than 239℉. Or the secondary side temperature of DCDC is greater than 239℉; Or the ambient temperature is greater than 239℉1. Power distribution unit

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.13 Internal Fault Of DCDC2

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 4:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.14 DCDC2 Overheating Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.15 DCDC2 Low-voltage Power Supply Sstem Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1E0200The DCDC output overvoltageThe output voltage is greater than 32V1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit
P1E0300The DCDC output undervoltageThe output voltage is lower than 18V
P1E0400The DCDC output overflowsThe output current is greater than 200A

2.Circuit Diagram

4.6.4.15 DCDC2 Low-voltage Power Supply Sstem Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1E0000The input voltage of the DCDC is too highThe input voltage is greater than 960V1. High voltage wiring harness 2. Power distribution unit
P1E0100DCDC input undervoltageThe input voltage is lower than 480V
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P260700KL30 voltage is too low when the main drive circuit is powered on(1) The power-on state is ready to power on (state 1); (2) The power-on state is ready to close the main connection (state 3); (3) The KL30 voltage is less than the fault threshold (8.6V for 12V system and 15.7V for 24V system); Meet ((1) OR (2)) ADN (3)1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Power distribution unit
P260811The main contactor of the main drive circuit is closed abnormally(1) There is a closing command and the power-on is completed; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4))

Step 3:Check the low-voltage power supply line of the thermal management unit of the power distribution unit (integrated DCDC). Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.16 DCDC2 High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power distribution unit high-voltage harness. Step 4:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the power distribution unit. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.17 PDU Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P260F00KL30 is too low when the auxiliary drive circuit is powered on(1) The power-on state is ready to power on (state 1); (2) The power-on state is ready to close the main connection (state 3); (3) The KL30 voltage is less than the fault threshold (8.6V for 12V system and 15.7V for 24V system); Meet ((1) OR (2)) ADN (3)
P261011Auxiliary drive circuit main contactor closing abnormal fault(1) Main contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3))OR(4))
P261D00Battery voltage is out of controller range fault(1) The power-on status of the main circuit is ready for power-on; (2) The power-on status of the auxiliary circuit is ready for power-on; (3) The power-on status of the upper circuit is ready for power-on; (4) The power-on status of the BMS circuit is the main connection closed state; (5) After the high-voltage power-on is successful, the front-end voltage is less than the battery voltage lower limit - 10V and greater than the battery voltage upper limit + 10V.. (6) When the high-voltage power-on is unsuccessful, the front-end voltage is less than the battery voltage lower limit. Meet ((1)OR(2)OR(3)OR(4))AND((5)OR(6))
P261F11KL30 undervoltage fault(1) 24V control power supply:Voltage below 18V; 2) 12V control power supply:hardware trigger voltage is lower than 8.6V
P262011KL30 overvoltage fault(1) 24V control power supply:voltage higher than 32V; (2) 12V control power supply:voltage higher than 18V; Meet (1) OR (2)

2.Circuit Diagram

4.6.4.17 PDU Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P262211Intranet BusOff Fault(1) CanA control register Boff bit is 1 (Can high and low are short-circuited)1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit
P262311Intranet DCDC communication alarm(1) The intranet is interrupted from receiving DCDC messages, which lasts for 3 seconds.
P262411Intranet TM1 communication alarm(1) The intranet is interrupted from receiving TM1 messages, which lasts for 3 seconds.
P262511Intranet TM2 communication alarm(1) The intranet is interrupted from receiving TM2 messages, which lasts for 3 seconds.

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides PDU? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power distribution unit power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.18 PDU Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

4.6.4.18 PDU Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P260000Main contactor adhesion fault in main drive circuitSticky detection command: (1) Sticky detection enable is turned on; (2) There is no internal network fault in the main circuit; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) The loop state machine is in the state of preparing for pre-charging power-on or preparing for controlling power-down. If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed.1. Power distribution unit
P260100Reverse voltage difference fault when the main drive circuit is powered on(1) The power-on state is ready to power on; (2) The power-on state is ready to power on; Meet (1) AND (2)
P260200Main drive circuit power-on pre-charge timeout fault(1)The power-on state is slow charging state (state 2). And the heartbeat update of the main drive circuit intranet is normal during fault judgment; (2) The voltage difference between the front and rear ends of the main connection is not less than 15V for 100ms continuously; (3) The front-end voltage is not greater than the undervoltage point for 100ms continuously; Meet (1) AND ((2) OR (3))
P260300The rear end of the main drive circuit is completely short- circuited.(1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (depending on the voltage, the time varies); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (50V); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4)

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.19 Internal Fault Of PDU

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P260400Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the main drive circuit(1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (350ms); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (41% of the front-end voltage); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4)
P260500Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear secondary of the main drive circuit(1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (800ms); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (81% of the front end voltage); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4)
P260600Main drive circuit with speed power-on fault(1) There is a power-on command; (2) The power-on status is powering on; (3)Not one-button power-on andNon-panel control (4) TM speed greater than 500rpm Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND(4)
P260900Auxiliary drive circuit main contactor adhesion faultSticky detection command: (1) Sticky detection enable is turned on; (2) There is no internal network fault in the main circuit; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) The loop state machine is in the state of preparing for pre-charging power-on or preparing for controlling power-down. If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed.
P260A00Auxiliary drive circuit power-on reverse voltage difference fault(1) The power-on state is ready to power on (state 1); (2) The power-on state is ready to power on; (3) The voltage at the front end of the contactor is greater than the undervoltage point; Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3)
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P260B00Auxiliary drive circuit power-on pre-charge timeout fault(1) The power-on state is slow charging (state 2); (2) The voltage difference between the front and rear ends of the main connection is not less than 15V for 100ms continuously; (3) The front-end voltage is not greater than the undervoltage point for 100ms continuously; Meet (1) AND ((2) OR (3))
P260C00The rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit is completely short- circuited(1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (depending on the voltage, the time varies); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (50V); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4)
P260D00Incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit(1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (300ms); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (41% of the front-end voltage); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4)
P260E00Secondary incomplete short circuit fault at the rear end of the auxiliary drive circuit(1) The detection enable is turned on and the power-on state is slow charging state 2; (2) The heartbeat of the main circuit intranet communication message is normal; (3) The slow-charging contactor is closed for a period of time (750ms); (4) The voltage at the rear end of the slow-charging contactor is still lower than a certain value (81% of the front end voltage); Meet (1) AND (2) AND (3) AND (4)
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P261100PTC1 contactor adhesion faultSticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed.
P261200PTC2 contactor adhesion faultSticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed.
P261300TOP1 contactor adhesion failureSticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed.
P261400TOP2 contactor adhesion failureSticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed.
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P261500FAST1 contactor adhesion faultSticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed.
P261600FAST2 contactor adhesion faultSticky detection command: (1) Adhesion detection is enabled; (2) The state of the state machine of the circuit where the contactor is located is:power-on completed; (3) There is no adhesion fault in the contactor; (4) Once the circuit is powered on, a sticking test is performed; If the above conditions are met, adhesion detection is performed.
P261711PTC1 closing abnormal fault(1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4))
P261811PTC2 closing abnormal fault(1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4))
P261911TOP1 closing abnormal fault(1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4))
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P261A11TOP2 closing abnormal fault(1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4))
P261B11FAST1 closing abnormality fault(1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4))
P261C11FAST2 closing abnormality fault(1) Contactor closing command; (2) The absolute value of the voltage difference between the front-end voltage and the rear-end voltage exceeds 20V for 50ms continuously; (3) No loop intranet communication failure; (4) KL30 voltage is lower than the fault threshold (6V for 12V system, 12V for 24V system). Meet (1)AND(((2) AND (3)) OR (4))
P261E00Main negative contactor disconnect/ battery feed(1) Any circuit of the main, auxiliary, upper and air conditioner is powered on; (2) The front-end voltage is 20V lower than the undervoltage point for 200ms. Meet (1)AND(2)
P262100Compilation failureThe length of the function code structure is inconsistent with the defined length

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 4:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

4.6.4.20 APU Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U015687Lost Communications with CDCU1) In communication control mode; 2) No CDCU message with ID 0x18FEC1EE is received; 3) Lasts for 5 seconds;1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit
U019887VCAN bus-off1) In communication control mode; 2) No T-BOX message with ID 0x18FEE6EE is received; 3) Lasts for 5 seconds;
U012287Lost Communication with VDC1) In communication control mode; 2) Failure to receive the VDC message with ID 0x18017827; 3) Lasts for 5 seconds;
U008D88PCAN3 BusOff(1) Can control register Boff bit is 1 (Can high and low are short-circuited)

2.Circuit Diagram

4.6.4.20 APU Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C0000EPS hardware overcurrent faultOutput current exceeds the hardware overcurrent trigger point:88A;1.Wiring harness 2.EHPS 3.Power distribution unit
P1C0100EPS drive upper axle failureThe hardware driver upper axle Fault signal trigger is effective;
P1C0200EPS drive lower axle failureThe hardware-driven axle Fault signal trigger is effective;
P1C0300EPS drive undervoltage faultThe hardware driver undervoltage Fault signal trigger is valid;
P1C0400EPS hardware overvoltage faultThe bus voltage exceeds the hardware overvoltage trigger point:800V;
P1C0500EPS bus overvoltage fault1) Bus voltage > bus overvoltage fault trigger point:750V (F10-00 setting)
P1C0600EPS bus undervoltage fault1) Bus voltage < bus undervoltage fault trigger point:350V (set in F10-01) for 1s; 2) Or, bus voltage < (bus undervoltage fault trigger point - 100V) 3) And, the run command is valid;
P1C0700EPS resolver failureWithin 100ms, when measuring angle, DOS and LOT are both low level and reach 60%

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C0800EPS phase failurePhase loss during operation:If any of the conditions 1 or 2 is met, the operating condition 1 is reported: 1) Output phase loss detection during operation is enabled (F10-17) 2) Operating frequency>0.8Hz; 3) The controller is in operation; 4) The three-phase maximum current effective value/ minimum current effective value ≥11, and the three- phase maximum current effective value>12.2% base current; 5) Condition 4) is judged once every 5 switching cycles, and it is met for 5 consecutive times, and a phase loss fault is reported. Operating condition 2: 1) The output AC voltage is greater than the rated voltage & the output AC current effective value is less than 1/40 base current, 2) The operating frequency of the synchronous motor type is less than 1/4 of the rated frequency of the motor, and there is no frequency requirement for the asynchronous motor; 3) If 1) and 2 are met at the same time, the fault counter is +1, otherwise -1; if the fault counter is ≥10, a phase loss fault is reported. Power-on phase loss detection:Meet all the following conditions for 4ms 1) The controller is powered on at low voltage for the first time; 2) When the tube is turned on for the first time, UV, VW, and WU three-phase pulses are sent respectively for phase sequence phase loss detection. PS:Base current = Min (0.5 times the maximum current of the motor, 0.25 times the maximum current of the controller)
P1C0900EPS AC zero drift is too large200ms after power-on: 1) The controller is in shutdown state, and the back electromotive force amplitude is less than 0.85 times the bus voltage; 2) The three-phase current is sampled 50 times (2ms/ time) continuously, and the average value is calculated, which is greater than 15.6% of the AD full-scale current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 3 consecutive tests, a zero
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
drift fault is reported;
P1C0A00EPS Hall disconnection1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s;
P1C0B00EPS three-phase current verification error1) The sum of the three-phase sampled current exceeds the threshold (determined by hardware)
P1C0C00EPSKL30 low voltage power supply undervoltage1) Battery voltage ≤undervoltage point (12V) and lasts for 100ms
P1C0D00EPSKL30 low voltage power supply overvoltageBattery voltage ≥overvoltage point (36V)
P1C0E00EPS module over temperature faultThe maximum module temperature is ≥the module over-temperature fault trigger point:85°C (F10-02) and lasts for 20ms
P1C0F00EPS motor over temperature fault1) Motor temperature ≥motor overtemperature fault trigger point:150℃(F10-07), and lasts for 500ms; 2) And, motor overtemperature detection is enabled (F10-06);
P1C1000EPS motor overspeed failure1) In the running state; 2) The motor speed exceeds 3500rpm (F10-12); 3) Lasts for 100ms; 4) Overspeed fault detection is enabled (F10-10)
P1C1100EPS speed deviation is too large1) Speed control mode and in operation; 2) The deviation between the current motor speed frequency and the target speed frequency is greater than the speed deviation detection threshold (F10-15); ; 3) The deviation lasts for more than 3 seconds; 4) The speed deviation detection is enabled (F10-14)
P1C1200EPS active discharge timeout1) Active discharge duration is greater than 3s and voltage is greater than 36V 2) Or, motor speed exceeds 15rpm
P1C1300EPS parameter tuning failed(1) Tuning timeout:stator resistance tuning 20s, magnetic pole position tuning 4s, resolver zero position 80s, back EMF tuning 80s; (2) Or, the resolver pole pair number does not match the motor pole pair number;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C1410EPS jam alarm1) In the running state; 2) Frequency < 1Hz 3) Current exceeds 1.5 times the rated value; 4) The above three conditions are met at the same time and maintained for 10s;
P1C1510EPS bus voltage overvoltage drop power1) When the bus voltage is ≥the bus overvoltage point -20V, the power will be reduced; 2) When the bus voltage is greater than the bus overvoltage, the power will be reduced to 0;
P1C1610EPS bus voltage undervoltage alarm1) When the bus voltage is less than or equal to the bus undervoltage point +20V, the power will be reduced; 2) When the bus voltage is less than the bus undervoltage point, the power will be reduced to 0;
P1C1710EPS motor temperature sensor is disconnectedAll the set motor temperature sensors are offline
P1C1810EPS module over temperature alarm1) Module temperature ≥module over-temperature reset point:80℃(F10-03), start to reduce power; 2) Module temperature > module over-temperature point 85℃(F10-02), power is reduced to 0; 3) And, controller over-temperature power reduction is enabled, F10-04;
P1C1910EPS motor over temperature alarm1) When the motor temperature is ≥the motor overtemperature reset point:140°C (F10-08), the power starts to be reduced; 2) When the motor temperature is greater than the motor overtemperature point 150°C (F10-07), the power is reduced to 0; 3) And, the controller overtemperature power reduction is enabled, F10-09;
P1C1A10EPS control overload alarm1) When the output current exceeds 1.2 times the rated current of the inverter, it is judged as overload; 2) The overload time is obtained by looking up the table according to different current coefficients;
P1C1B10EPS motor overload alarm1) When the output current exceeds 1.2 times the rated current of the motor, it is judged as overloaded; 2) The overload time is obtained by looking up the table according to different current coefficients;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C1C10EPS motor overspeed alarm1) In the running state; 2) When the motor speed exceeds the overspeed power reduction threshold (F10-13), the power reduction starts; 3) When the motor speed exceeds the overspeed detection threshold of 10000rpm (F10-12), the power is reduced to 0; 4) When the motor overspeed power reduction is enabled, F10-11
P1C1D11EPS motor temperature sensor 1 is offline1) The temperature sampling value voltage is greater than the offline detection threshold voltage:PT1000 voltage threshold:3.25V PT100 voltage threshold:3.25V NTC voltage threshold: 3.15V 2) And, it lasts for 100ms;
P1C1E11EPS motor temperature sensor 2 is offline1) The temperature sampling value voltage is greater than the offline detection threshold voltage:PT1000 voltage threshold:3.25V PT100 voltage threshold:3.25V NTC voltage threshold: 3.15VV 2) And, it lasts for 100ms;
P1C1F11EPSU phase current zero drift fault1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the U-phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported;
P1C2011EPSV phase current zero drift fault1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the U-phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported;
P1C2111EPSW phase current zero drift fault1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the W phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C2211EPSU phase Hall wire disconnection1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s;
P1C2311EPSV phase Hall wire disconnection1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s;
P1C2411EPSW phase Hall disconnection1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s;
P1C2500EPSCompilation failureThe length of the function code structure is inconsistent with the defined length
P1C2600EPS EEPROM read and write failureEEPROM read and Disconnection and interruption events occur during parameter reading and writingfailure
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C2700ACM hardware overcurrent faultOutput current exceeds the hardware overcurrent trigger point:88A;1.Wiring harness 2. Air compressor 3. Power distribution unit
P1C2800ACM driver upper axle failureThe hardware driver upper axle Fault signal trigger is effective;
P1C2900ACM drive lower axle faultThe hardware-driven axle Fault signal trigger is effective;

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Check the high-voltage harness of the battery pack. Step 6:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the battery pack. Step 7:Check the EHPS three-phase input harness. Step 8:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EHPS. Step 9:Replace the EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 10:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 11:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 12:Clear and confirm DTC.

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C2A00ACM driver undervoltage faultThe hardware driver undervoltage Fault signal trigger is valid;
P1C2B00ACM hardware overvoltage faultThe bus voltage exceeds the hardware overvoltage trigger point:800V;
P1C2C00ACM bus overvoltage fault1) Bus voltage > bus overvoltage fault trigger point:750V (F10-00 setting)
P1C2D00ACM bus undervoltage fault1) Bus voltage < bus undervoltage fault trigger point:350V (set in F10-01) for 1s; 2) Or, bus voltage < (bus undervoltage fault trigger point - 100V) 3) And, the run command is valid;
P1C2E00ACM resolver failureWithin 100ms, when measuring angle, DOS and LOT are both low level and reach 60%
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C2F00ACM phase failurePhase loss during operation:If any of the conditions 1 or 2 is met, the operating condition 1 is reported: 1) Output phase loss detection during operation is enabled (F10-17) 2) Operating frequency>0.8Hz; 3) The controller is in operation; 4) The three-phase maximum current effective value/ minimum current effective value ≥11, and the three- phase maximum current effective value>12.2% base current; 5) Condition 4) is judged once every 5 switching cycles, and it is met for 5 consecutive times, and a phase loss fault is reported. Operating condition 2: 1) The output AC voltage is greater than the rated voltage & the output AC current effective value is less than 1/40 base current, 2) The operating frequency of the synchronous motor type is less than 1/4 of the rated frequency of the motor, and there is no frequency requirement for the asynchronous motor; 3) If 1) and 2 are met at the same time, the fault counter is +1, otherwise -1; if the fault counter is ≥10, a phase loss fault is reported. Meet all the following conditions for 4ms 1) The controller is powered on at low voltage for the first time; 2) When the tube is turned on for the first time, UV, VW, and WU three-phase pulses are sent respectively for phase sequence phase loss detection. PS: Base current = Min (0.5 times the maximum current of the motor, 0.25 times the maximum current of the controller)
P1C3000ACM AC zero drift is too large200ms after power-on: 1) The controller is in shutdown state, and the back electromotive force amplitude is less than 0.85 times the bus voltage; 2) The three-phase current is sampled 50 times (2ms/ time) continuously, and the average value is calculated, which is greater than 15.6% of the AD full-scale current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 3 consecutive tests, a zero
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
drift fault is reported;
P1C3100ACM Hall disconnection1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s;
P1C3200ACM three-phase current verification error1) The sum of the three-phase sampled current exceeds the threshold (determined by hardware)
P1C3300ACM KL30 low voltage power supply undervoltage1) Battery voltage ≤undervoltage point (12V) and lasts for 100mss
P1C3400ACM KL30 Low Voltage Power Supply OvervoltageBattery voltage ≥overvoltage point (36V)
P1C3500ACM module over temperature faultThe maximum module temperature is ≥the module over-temperature fault trigger point:85°C (F10-02) and lasts for 20ms
P1C3600ACM motor over temperature fault1) Motor temperature ≥motor overtemperature fault trigger point:150℃(F10-07), and lasts for 500ms; 2) And, motor overtemperature detection is enabled (F10-06);
P1C3700ACM Motor Overspeed Fault1) In the running state; 2) The motor speed exceeds 3500rpm (F10-12); 3) Lasts for 100ms; 4) Overspeed fault detection is enabled (F10-10)
P1C3800ACM speed deviation too large1) Speed control mode and in operation; 2) The deviation between the current motor speed frequency and the target speed frequency is greater than the speed deviation detection threshold (F10-15); 3) The deviation lasts for more than 3 seconds; 4) The speed deviation detection is enabled (F10-14)
P1C3900ACM Active Discharge Timeout1) Active discharge duration is greater than 3s and voltage is greater than 36V 2) Or, motor speed exceeds 15rpm
P1C3A00ACM parameter tuning failed(1) Tuning timeout:stator resistance tuning 20s, magnetic pole position tuning 4s, resolver zero position 80s, back EMF tuning 80s; (2) Or, the resolver pole pair number does not match the motor pole pair number;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C3B10ACM stall alarm1) In the running state; 2) Frequency < 1Hz 3) Current exceeds 1.5 times the rated value; 4) The above three conditions are met at the same time and maintained for 10s;
P1C3C10ACM bus voltage overvoltage drop power1) When the bus voltage is ≥the bus overvoltage point -20V, the power will be reduced; 2) When the bus voltage is greater than the bus overvoltage, the power will be reduced to 0;
P1C3D10ACM bus voltage undervoltage alarm1) When the bus voltage is less than or equal to the bus undervoltage point +20V, the power will be reduced; 2) When the bus voltage is less than the bus undervoltage point, the power will be reduced to 0;
P1C3E10ACM motor temperature sensor disconnectedAll the set motor temperature sensors are offline
P1C3F10ACM module over temperature alarm1) Module temperature ≥module over-temperature reset point:80℃(F10-03), start to reduce power; 2) Module temperature > module over-temperature point 85℃(F10-02), power is reduced to 0; 3) And, controller over-temperature power reduction is enabled, F10-04;
P1C4010ACM motor over temperature alarm1) When the motor temperature is ≥the motor overtemperature reset point:140°C (F10-08), the power starts to be reduced; 2) When the motor temperature is greater than the motor overtemperature point 150°C (F10-07), the power is reduced to 0; 3) And, the controller overtemperature power reduction is enabled, F10-09;
P1C4110ACM control overload alarm1) When the output current exceeds 1.2 times the rated current of the inverter, it is judged as overload; 2) The overload time is obtained by looking up the table according to different current coefficients;
P1C4210ACM motor overload alarm1) When the output current exceeds 1.2 times the rated current of the motor, it is judged as overloaded; 2) The overload time is obtained by looking up the table according to different current coefficients;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C4310ACM Motor Overspeed Alarm1) In the running state; 2) When the motor speed exceeds the overspeed power reduction threshold (F10-13), the power reduction starts; ; 3) When the motor speed exceeds the overspeed detection threshold of 10000rpm (F10-12), the power is reduced to 0; 4) When the motor overspeed power reduction is enabled, F10-11
P1C4411ACM motor temperature sensor 1 is offline1) The temperature sampling value voltage is greater than the offline detection threshold voltage:PT1000 voltage threshold:3.25V PT100 voltage threshold:3.25V NTC voltage threshold: 3.15V 2) And, it lasts for 100ms;
P1C4511ACM motor temperature sensor 2 is offline1) The temperature sampling value voltage is greater than the offline detection threshold voltage:PT1000 voltage threshold:3.25V PT100 voltage threshold:3.25V NTC voltage threshold: 3.15V 2) And, it lasts for 100ms;
P1C4611U phase current zero drift fault1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the U-phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported;
P1C4711V phase current zero drift fault1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the U-phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported;
P1C4811W phase current zero drift fault1) The controller is in shutdown state and not in uncontrolled rectification state; 2) Continuously sample the W phase current 32 times (2ms/time), calculate the average value, which is greater than 8.6% of the Hall maximum current value; 3) If condition 2 is met for 5 consecutive tests, a zero drift fault is reported;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P1C4911U phase Hall wire disconnection1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s;
P1C4A11V phase Hall wire disconnection1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s;
P1C4B11W phase Hall disconnection1) The input voltage of the Hall AD port is greater than 3.1V; 2) The cumulative time exceeds 1s;
P1C4C00Compilation failureThe length of the function code structure is inconsistent with the defined length
P1C4D00EEPROM read and write failureEEPROM read and Disconnection and interruption events occur during parameter reading and writingfailure

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check the vehicle has any malfunction codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Check the high-voltage harness of the battery pack. Step 6:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the battery pack. Step 7:Check the three-phase wiring harness of the air compressor. Step 8:Replace the air compressor. Refer to Replacement Of Air Compressor Assembly Step 9:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the power distribution unit. Step 10:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 11:Clear and confirm DTC.

Figure p309

4.6.5 Dismantling and Installation

4.6.5.1 Replacement of the All-in-one Power Distribution Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Drain coolant from the power system. 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 8 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the 10 fixing screws of the cover plate and detach the cover plate.

10 Remove the 8 fixing screws of the harness. 11 Remove the 8 fixing bolts of the harness. 12 Remove the 12 fixing screws of the cover plate and detach the 2 cover plates.

Figure p310
Figure p310
Figure p310

13 Remove the 12 fixing screws of the harness. 14 Remove the 12 fixing bolts of the harness. 15 Disconnect the 15 harness connectors of the all-in-one power distribution assembly.

Figure p311
Figure p311
Figure p311

16 Disconnect the 2 water pipes.

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.
Figure p312
Figure p312
Figure p312

17 Remove 2 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 18 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the all-in-one power distribution assembly and detach the all-in-one power distribution assembly.

Figure p313
Figure p313
Figure p313

Installation Procedures 1 Move the all-in-one power distribution assembly to the installation location. 2 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the all-in-one power distribution assembly.

Torque:62 ft-lb +/- 6 ft-lb
Figure p314

3 Install 2 fixing bolt of the ground harness.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Connect the 2 water pipes. 5 Connect the 15 harness connectors of the all-in-one power distribution assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Install the 12 fixing bolts of the harness.

Torque: (22 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

7 Install the 12 fixing screws of the harness.

8 Install the 12 fixing screws of the cover plate. 9 Install the 8 fixing bolts of the harness.

Torque: (22 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

10 Install the 8 fixing screws of the harness.

11 Install the 10 fixing screws of the cover plate. 12 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 13 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 14 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 15 Fill coolant in the power system. 16 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Close the door.

Figure p320

4.7 Vehicle-mounted Charging Device 4.7.1 Dismantling and Installation2107· 7g

4.7.1.1 Replacement of MCS Charging Socket Assembly

Removal procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Remove the left deflector lower body. 6 Remove the left charging cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 9 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 10 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the MCS charging socket assembly.

11 Remove 1 ground harness fixing bolt of the MCS charging socket assembly harness clip. 12 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the MCS charging socket assembly.

Figure p321
Figure p321
Figure p321

13 Remove the MCS charging socket assembly. Installation procedures 1 Move the MCS charging socket assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the MCS charging socket assembly.

3 Install 1 ground harness fixing bolt of the MCS charging socket assembly harness clip. 4 Connect 3 harness connectors of the MCS charging socket assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p2129

5 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Install the left charging cover plate assembly. 9 Install the left deflector lower body. 10 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolt connecting the air conditioning compressor assembly to the high-voltage cableM54 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump and the high-voltage cableM66 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb
The fixing bolt for connecting the grounding terminal and the vehicle frame.M817 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb

4.8 High-Voltage Cable and Connector Device2105· 14g

4.8.1 Specifications

4.8.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p325

4.8.2 Decomposition Diagram

4.8.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

Figure p392
Figure p391
Figure p389
Figure p387
Figure p386
Figure p384
Figure p384
Figure p382
Figure p381
Figure p381

20. Hexagon Flange Nut 95. Electric Drive axle Harness 1 86. Cable Ties 1 96. Electric Drive axle Harness 2 89. Motor Power Cable Assembly Ⅰ 97. Electric Drive axle Harness 4 90. Motor Power Cable Assembly Ⅱ 98. Mountable Head Ties 91. Motor Power Cable Assembly Ⅳ 99. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 94. Tapered Locking Washer 10- 0. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolt connecting the front millimeter wave radar adapter bracket to the millimeter wave radar bracketM67 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the millimeter wave radar bracket to the front lower protection assemblyM817 ft-lb +/- 1.5 ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the forward millimeter wave radar and the forward millimeter wave radar adapter bracketM54 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb
Rubber cushion assembly connecting side millimeter wave radar and side skirt assemblyM89 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb
5Intelligent Driving

5.1 Intelligent Driving Device3602· 24g

5.1.1 Specifications

5.1.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p328

5.1.2 Decomposition Diagram

5.1.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Front View Intelligent Camera 2. Self-Tapping Screw

1. Front Millimeter-Wave Radar 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Bracket for Front Millimeter Wave Radar 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Cover-Front Millimeter Wave Radar 4. Adapter Brkt-Front Millimeter Wave Radar

Figure p329

1. Left Millimeter Wave Radar 3. Rubber Buffer 2. Cross Recessed Pan Head Screw Assy 4. Right Millimeter Wave Radar

Figure p330

1. Main Ultrasonic radar ( Snow white ) 3. Sub Ultrasonic Radar ( Snow white ) 2. Sub Ultrasonic Radar ( Matte black )

Figure p331

5.1.3 System Schematic Diagram

5.1.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

SymptomSuspected malfunctiony projectMeasures
The radar keeps ringing when the vehicle is driving in an open area or does not sound when encountering obstacles while driving1. The radar probe is covered by foreign objectsCheck if the surface of the radar probe is covered by foreign objects.
2. The paint coating on the surface of the radar probe is too thickCheck if the paint coating on the surface of the radar probe is too thick.
3. Incorrect installation position of radar probeReinstall the radar probe.
4. Radar probe malfunctionCheck the radar probe and replace it if necessary. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white).Replacement of Sub USS (matte black). Replacement of Left Side USS (snowy white)
After turning on the panoramic image, the CAR screen does not display the image1. The panoramic camera is obstructed or damagedClean or replace the panoramic camera.
2. Panoramic camera wiring harness malfunctionCheck the wiring harness between the panoramic camera and CDC.
3. LVDS signal harness fault between CAR screen and CDCCheck the LVDS signal harness between the CAR screen and CDC.
4. CAR screenRefer to Replacement Of CAR screen

5.1.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

5.1.4.1 Diagnosis Description

Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of intelligent driving devices before diagnosing their faults, and then starting system diagnosis, can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of intelligent driving devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis.

Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 5.1.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the intelligent driving device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the intelligent driving device system.

• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 5.1.4.3 Fault Symptom Table

5.1.4.4 DTC Confirmation

1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the malfunction code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a malfunction code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output malfunction code.

– No:Perform intermittent malfunction checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 5.1.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

CAMF

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717High battery voltageRefer to Front View Intelligent Camera Power Fault
B111716Low battery voltage
U019887Lost Communication With TGWRefer to Front View Intelligent Camera Communication Fault
U014087Lost Communication With BDCU
U019987Lost Communication With DCM
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU
U012287Lost Communication With VDC
U012187Lost Communication With EBS
U013087Lost Communication With EPS
U013287Lost Communication With ECAS
U012887Lost Communication With EPB
U007888CANFD6 BusOff
U122000Invalid data received from CDCU
U122100Invalid data received from EPS
C180008VDC Performance Abnormal
C180108EBS Performance Abnormal
U122208EPS Performance Abnormal
U122344ADCU Internal failureRefer to Internal Fault Of Front View Intelligent Camera
U122C00Front View Intelligent Camera State Error
U122D00Front Radar State Error
C180202Brake Switch Signal ErrorRefer to Brake Pedal Switch Fault
C180302Vehicle Speed Signal ErrorRefer to Vehicle Speed Signal Fault
C180702Left-Front Wheel Speed Signal Error
C180802Right-Front Wheel Speed Signal Error
C180902Left-Rear Wheel Speed Signal Error
C180A02Right-Rear Wheel Speed Signal Error
C180402Yaw Rate Signal ErrorRefer to Front View Intelligent Camera Reports Other System Fault
C180502Lateral Acceleration Signal Error
C180602Longitudinal Acceleration Signal Error
C180B02Master Cylinder Pressure Signal Error
C180C02Road Grade Signal Error
U122402Absoluted Steering Angle Signal Error
U122502Steering Speed Signal Error
C180D02Steering Torque Signal Error
U122602Motor Torque Signal Error
U122702Motor Speed Signal Error
U122A02Gear State Signal Error
C180F02Meter Vehicle Speed Signal Error
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717Power supply voltage above thresholdRefer to Left Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault
B111716Power supply voltage below threshold
U007888right radar calibrated faultRefer to Left Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault
U019887VCAN bus-off
U019987Lost Communication with DCM
U012187missing EBS
U015687missing CDCU
U220900CANFD6 Network Management limps home.
U012287lost comunication with VDC
U11E000CDCU_ADCUSET data invalidRefer to Left Millimeter Wave Radar Reports CDC-Related Fault
C140000left radar calibrated faultPerform side millimeter wave radar calibration, refer to Side MMW Radar Calibration Procedure
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717Power supply voltage above thresholdRefer to Right Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault
B111716Power supply voltage below threshold
U007888right radar calibrated faultRefer to Right Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault
U019887VCAN bus-off
U019987Lost Communication with DCM
U012187missing EBS
U015687missing CDCU
U220900CANFD6 Network Management limps home
U012287lost comunication with VDC
U120000CDCU_ADCUSET data invalidRefer to Right Millimeter Wave Radar Reports CDC-Related Fault
C160000CDCU_ADCUSET data invalidIG-ON,The counter or check value is incorrect for five consecutive periods about 0x18FF1B41 Side MMW Radar Calibration Procedure
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717Battery Voltage Too HighRefer to Main Uss Power Fault
B111716Battery Voltage Tool low
U007488Enter the CAN Bus-off for twice in a rowRefer to Main Uss Communication Fault

MMWRL MMWRR USS

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U012287The VDC message related to vehicle speed (with the ID of 0x18FEF100) has been lost for a duration of 10 times the cycle, which is 10 * 100
U019887Losting the TGW gear message lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100
U015687Losting the soft switch CDCU message (0x18FF1B41)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 200
U012887Losting the EPB message (0x18FE1250)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100
U014087The BDCU temperature message (0x18E0FF21) is lost for 5S
C121209Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or OCRefer to Right Sub Uss Fault
C121306Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12140CFront Right Sensor ringing time failure
C120309Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or ocRefer to Left Sub Uss Fault
C120406Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12050CFront Left Sensor ringing time failure
C120609Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or ocRefer to Left Middle Sub Uss Fault
C120706Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12080CFront Left Center Sensor ringing time failure
C120909Front Righ Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or octRefer to Right Middle Sub Uss Fault
C121006Front Right Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12110CFront Right Center Sensor ringing time failure
C120009Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or ocRefer to Left Side Sub Uss Fault
C120106Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
C12020CFront Left Side Sensor ringing time failure
C121509Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or ocRefer to Main Uss Signal Circuit Fault
C121606Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12170CFront Right Side Sensor ringing time failure
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717High battery voltageVoltage > 32 V, t > 5000ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Front view intelligent camera
B111716Low battery voltageVoltage < 18V, t > 30s

5.1.4.6 Front View Intelligent Camera Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.6 Front View Intelligent Camera Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U019887Lost Communication With TGW(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 5000ms ID :0x18FEE6EE1.Wiring harness 2.Front view intelligent camera
U014087Lost Communication With BDCU(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0xCFDCC21.0x14FD1721.0x18FF6121
U019987Lost Communication With DCM(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state ( (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FDA54F
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FF0C41.0x18FF6341.0x18FF1B41.0x18FEA- E41.0x18FEC1EE.0x18FF6017
U012287Lost Communication With VDC(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18F01127.0xCF00400.0x18F06A27.0x18FE- F100.0x18F00F27.0x18011727

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the Front view intelligent camera? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the front view intelligent camera. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 6:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.7 Front View Intelligent Camera Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012187Lost Communication With EBS(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18F0010B.0x18FDC40B.0x18F0090B.0x8FE6E0- B.0x18FEAD0B
U013087Lost Communication With EPS(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FF0513.0x18FF0613
U013287Lost Communication With ECAS(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FE582F
U012887Lost Communication With EPB(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Any of the following monitoring messages is missing , t > 1000ms ID:0x18FE1250.0xCF01350
U007888CANFD6 BusOff(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)The Bus Off counter is equal to 8
U122000Invalid data received from CDCU(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)Monitoring message 0x18FF6341 CDCUStatus reporting status error (4)The rolling counter or check sum in any of the following monitoring message is invalid, t > 2000ms ID:0x18FF0C41.0x18FF1B41.0x18FF6341
U122100Invalid data received from EPS(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)CAN not in busoff state (3)The rolling counter or check sum in any of the following monitoring message is invalid, t > 500ms ID:0x18FF0513.0x18FF0613
C180008VDC Performance AbnormalDetected low control performance valid (1)ADAS system torque control command error percentage is too large and has accumulated for more than a certain period of time Returned Operational State Error valid (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2) ID 0x18F06A27 VDC Status reporting error status
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C180108EBS Performance AbnormalDetected low control performance valid (1)In a driving cycle, the ADAS system detects that the deceleration command response time is too long and accumulates a certain number of times. Returned Operational State Error valid (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2) ID 0x18F0010B EBSRedWarningSignal or ABS_ EBSamberWarningState condition established (3)ID 0x18FF6121 TPMS_F_TireStatusTOCAMF or TPMS_F_TireBurstEmDeviceConnectStatusTOCAMF condition established
U122208EPS Performance AbnormalDetected low control performance valid (1)ADAS system detects that the steering angle control command error is too large for a period of time and the vehicle deviates from the lane centerline. Returned Operational State Error valid (1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2) ID 0x18FF0513 EHPS_SysState reporting error status

2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.7 Front View Intelligent Camera Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CANFD6 bus network integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U122344ADCU Internal failure(1)RAM fault, t > 500ms (2)ROM fault, t > 500ms (3)ADC fault, t > 500ms (4)EEPROM fault, t > 500ms (5)CPU load > 95% , t > 500ms1. Front view intelligent camera
U122C00front view intelligent camera State Error(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected status error information by camera, t > 1000ms (3)Detected internal fault information by camera, t > 1000ms (4)Detected not calibrated information by camera, t > 1000ms
U122D00Front Radar State Error(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected status error information by radar, t > 1000ms (3)Detected internal fault information by radar, t > 1000ms (4)Detected not calibrated information by radar, t > 1000ms
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C180202Brake Switch Signal Error(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected brake switch signal error , t > 1000ms1. Brake pedal switch 2. Wiring harness 3. Front view intelligent camera

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 5:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.8 Internal Fault Of Front View Intelligent Camera

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 4:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.9 Brake Pedal Switch Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

5.1.4.9 Brake Pedal Switch Fault — circuit diagram

2.Circuit Diagram 3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C180302Vehicle Speed Signal Error(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected vehilcle speed signal out of range , t > 1000ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms1. Front axle left wheel ABS sensor 2. Front axle right wheel ABS sensor 3. Rear axle left wheel ABS sensor 4. Rear axle right wheel ABS sensor 5. Vehicle axle modulator 1M 6. Axle modulator 2M 7. Wiring harness 8. EBS 9. Front view intelligent camera
C180702Left-Front Wheel Speed Signal Error(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected left-front wheel speed signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms
C180802Right-Front Wheel Speed Signal Error(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected right-front wheel speed signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms
C180902Left-Rear Wheel Speed Signal Error(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected left-rear wheel speed signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms
C180A02Right-Rear Wheel Speed Signal Error(1) 10 seconds after power on initialization (2)Detected right-rear wheel speed signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms

Step 3:Check the relevant circuits of the brake pedal switch. Refer to Brake Pedal Switch Fault Step 4:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD7 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 7:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.10 Vehicle Speed Signal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.10 Vehicle Speed Signal Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
5.1.4.10 Vehicle Speed Signal Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection X1 C21-8

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C180402Yaw Rate Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected yaw rate signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms1. Front view intelligent camera
C180502Lateral Acceleration Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected lateral acceleration signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms
C180602Longitudinal Acceleration Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected longitudinal acceleration signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms
C180B02Master Cylinder Pressure Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. ((2)Detected that the pressure signal of eithcer front axle or rear axle out of range at the same time, t >500ms
C180C02Road Grade Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected road grade signal out of range , t > 1000ms
U122402Absoluted Steering Angle Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected absoluted steering angle signal out of range , t > 500ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle left wheel ABS sensor, front axle right wheel ABS sensor, and axle modulator 1M. Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle left wheel ABS sensor, rear axle right wheel ABS sensor, and axle modulator 2M. Step 5:Check the wiring harness between axle modulator 1M, axle modulator 2M, and EBS. Step 6:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Communication Harness Step 7:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:While ensuring safety, drive the vehicle and observe whether the speedometer changes with the speed of the vehicle? – Yes: Next. – No: Replace the faulty ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly . Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 9:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 10:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 11:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.11 Front View Intelligent Camera Reports Other System Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U122502Steering Speed Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected steering speed signal out of range , t > 500ms
C180D02Steering Torque Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected steering torque signal out of range , t > 500ms
U122602Motor Torque Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected motor torque signal out of range , t > 500ms
U122702Motor Speed Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected motor speed signal out of range , t > 500ms
U122A02Gear State Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected gear state signal error , t > 1000ms
C180F02Meter Vehicle Speed Signal Error(1)10 s after power on initialization. (2)Detected meter vehicle speed signal out of range , t > 1000ms (3)Detected Rationality Fault flag valid , t > 500ms
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717Power supply voltage above thresholdPower supply voltage greater than or equal to 33V,t>= 5000ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Left millimeter wave radar
B111716Power supply voltage below thresholdPower supply voltage less than or equal to 17V,t>=30s

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check if there are any other system fault codes on the vehicle? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting other system failures. – No: Next Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the front view intelligent camera. Step 5:Replace the front view intelligent camera. Refer to Replacement Of Forward Looking Intelligent Camera Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.12 Left Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.12 Left Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
5.1.4.12 Left Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007888Main_CAN Bus-OFFIG-ON,The voltage is 9V-16V, 8 consecutive detections of Bus-Off, only for transmission1.Wiring harness 2. Left millimeter wave radar
U019887lost comunication with T-BOXIG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FEE6EE)more than 5s
U019987lost comunication with DCMIG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FDA54F)more than 5s
U012187lost comunication with EBSIG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x08FE6E0B or 0x18F0090B) more than 1s
U015687lost comunication with CDCUIG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FF1B41 or 0x18FEC1EE) more than 5s
U220900CANFD6 Network Management limps homeIG-ON,after entering limphome and record tLimpHomeDTC more than 2s
U012287lost comunication with VDCIG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x0x18F00F27 or 00x18F06A27)) more than 5s

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the left millimeter wave radar? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next Step 4:Check the left millimeter wave radar power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Reload the software, and upgrade the left millimeter wave radar. Step 6:Replace the left millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRL Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.13 Left Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.13 Left Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U11E000CDCU_ADCUSET data invalidIG-ON,The counter or check value is incorrect for five consecutive periods about 0x18FF1B411. Sensor 2. CDC 3. Left millimeter wave radar
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717Power supply voltage above thresholdPower supply voltage greater than or equal to 33V,t>= 5000mss1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Right millimeter wave radar
B111716Power supply voltage below thresholdPower supply voltage less than or equal to 17V,t>=30s

Step 4:Reload the software, and upgrade the left millimeter wave radar. Step 5:Replace the left millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRL Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check all the related sensors on CDC. Step 4:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD5 BusOff communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD5 BusOff Network Integrity Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the left millimeter wave radar. Step 7:Replace the left millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRL Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.15 Right Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.15 Right Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
5.1.4.15 Right Millimeter Wave Radar Power Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007888right radar calibrated faultRadar uncalibrated or failed1.Wiring harness 2. Right millimeter wave radar
U019887VCAN bus-offIG-ON,The voltage is 9V-16V, 8 consecutive detections of Bus-Off, only for transmission
U019987lost comunication with T-BOXIG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FEE6EE)more than 5s
U012187lost comunication with DCMIG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FDA54F)more than 5s
U015687lost comunication with CDCUIG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x18FF1B41 or 0x18FEC1EE) more than 5s
U220900CANFD6 Network Management limps homeIG-ON,after entering limphome and record tLimpHomeDTC more than 2s
U012287lost comunication with VDCIG-ON,CAN busoff does not occur.The voltage is 9V- 16V,can not receive (0x0x18F00F27 or 00x18F06A27)) more than 5s

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the right millimeter wave radar? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the millimeter wave radar on the right side. Step 5:Reload the software, and upgrade the millimeter wave radar on the right side. Step 6:Replace the right millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRR Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.16 Right Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.16 Right Millimeter Wave Radar Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U120000CDCU_ADCUSET data invalidIG-ON,The counter or check value is incorrect for five consecutive periods about 0x18FF1B411. Sensor 2. CDC 3. Right millimeter wave radar
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717Battery Voltage Too HighSupply Voltage above 16V more than 5000ms, KL15 ON1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Main Uss
B111716Battery Voltage Tool lowSupply Voltage under 9V more than 5000ms, KL15 ON

Step 4:Reload the software, and upgrade the millimeter wave radar on the right side. Step 5:Replace the right millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRR Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check all the related sensors on CDC. Step 4:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD5 BusOff communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD5 BusOff Network Integrity Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the millimeter wave radar on the right side. Step 7:Replace the right millimeter wave radar. Refer to Replacement of MMWRR Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.18 Main Uss Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.18 Main Uss Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007488Enter the CAN Bus-off for twice in a rowEnter the CAN Bus-off for twice in a row1.Wiring harness 2.Main uss
U012287The VDC message related to vehicle speed (with the ID of 0x18FEF100) has been lost for a duration of 10 times the cycle, which is 10 * 100The VDC message related to vehicle speed (with the ID of 0x18FEF100) has been lost for a duration of 10 times the cycle, which is 10 * 100
U019887Losting the TGW gear message lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100Losting the TGW gear message lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100
U015687Losting the soft switch CDCU message (0x18FF1B41)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 200Losting the soft switch CDCU message(0x18FF1B41) lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 200
U012887Losting the EPB message (0x18FE1250)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100Losting the EPB message(0x18FE1250)lasts 10 times the cycle:10 x 100
U014087The BDCU temperature messageThe BDCU temperature message

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the main uss? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the main uss. Step 5:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 6:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.19 Main Uss Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.19 Main Uss Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the ADCAN1 bus communication harness. Refer to Replacement Of ADCAN1 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C121509Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or ocFront Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc1.Wiring harness 2.Main uss
C121606Front Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to UbatFront Right Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12170CFront Right Side Sensor ringing time failureFront Right Side Sensor ringing time failure

Step 4:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 5:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.20 Main Uss Signal Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.20 Main Uss Signal Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the surface of the main uss.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C120309Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or ocFront Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc1.Wiring harness 2.Main uss 3.Left sub uss
C120406Front Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to UbatFront Left Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12050CFront Left Sensor ringing time failureFront Left Sensor ringing time failure

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the main uss and other ultrasonic slave radars. Step 5:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 6:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.21 Left Sub Uss Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.21 Left Sub Uss Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the left sub uss surface.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C120609Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or ocFront Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc1. Wiring harness 2. Main uss 3. Left middle sub uss
C120706Front Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to UbatFront Left Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12080CFront Left Center Sensor ringing time failureFront Left Center Sensor ringing time failure

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the left sub uss and the main uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the left sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Sub USS (matte black) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.22 Left Middle Sub Uss Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.22 Left Middle Sub Uss Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the left middle sub uss surface.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C120909Front Righ Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or octFront Righ Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oct1. Wiring harness 2. Main uss 3. Right middle sub uss
C121006Front Right Center Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to UbatFront Right Center Sensor signal line failure short- circuit to Ubat
C12110CFront Right Center Sensor ringing time failureFront Right Center Sensor ringing time failure

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the left middle sub uss and the main uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the left middle sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left middle sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Sub USS (matte black) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.23 Right Middle Sub Uss Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.23 Right Middle Sub Uss Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the surface of the right middle sub uss.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C120009Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or ocFront Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or oc1. Wiring harness 2. Left side sub uss 3. Main uss
C120106Front Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to UbatFront Left Side Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12020CFront Left Side Sensor ringing time failureFront Left Side Sensor ringing time failure

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the right middle sub uss and the main uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the right middle sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right middle sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Sub USS (matte black) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.24 Left Side Sub Uss Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.24 Left Side Sub Uss Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the left side sub uss surface.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C121209Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or OCFront Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to GND or OC1. Wiring harness 2. Right sub uss 3. Main uss
C121306Front Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to UbatFront Right Sensor signal line failure short-circuit to Ubat
C12140CFront Right Sensor ringing time failureFront Right Sensor ringing time failure

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the main uss and the left side sub uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the left side sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left side sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Left Side USS (snowy white) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.25 Right Sub Uss Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.1.4.25 Right Sub Uss Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Clean the right sub uss surface.

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD6(H) and CANFD6(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD6 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD6 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the right sub uss and the main uss. Step 5:Check if the working voltage of the right sub uss meets 9-16V? – Yes: Next – No: Replace the right sub uss. Refer to Replacement of Sub USS (matte black) Step 6:Reload the software, and upgrade the main uss. Step 7:Replace the main uss. Refer to Replacement of Main USS (snowy white) Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.1.4.26 Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the CANFD6 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD6 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD6 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD6 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD6 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
ADCAN1(H) and ADCAN1(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD6 bus. C. Measure the CANFD6 bus resistance between each module and the front view intelligent camera in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD6 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD6 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD6 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD6 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD6 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.

5.1.4.27 ADCAN1 Bus Network Integrity Check

Step 1 Check the ADCAN1 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the ADCAN1 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
ADCAN1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
ADCAN1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
ADCAN1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
ADCAN1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the ADCAN1 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the ADCAN1 bus. C. Measure the ADCAN1 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the resistance of ADCAN1 bus to ground is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the ADCAN1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the ADCAN1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the ADCAN1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the ADCAN1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Figure p380
Figure p380

5.1.5 Dismantling and Installation

5.1.5.1 Replacement of Front View Intelligent Camera

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the front view intelligent camera. 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the front view intelligent camera. 7 Remove the front view intelligent camera. Installation Procedures

1 Move the front view intelligent camera to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the front view intelligent camera. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the front view intelligent camera.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the camera.

5.1.5.2 Replacement of Front Millimeter Wave Radar Shield

Removal Procedures

1 Pry off the Front Millimeter Wave Radar shield. Installation Procedures 1 Install theFront Millimeter Wave Radar shield.

Figure p382

5.1.5.3 Replacement of Front Millimeter Wave Radar

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the Front millimeter wave radar radar shield.

5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the Front millimeter wave radar. 6 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the Front millimeter wave radar. 7 Remove the Front millimeter wave radar. Installation Procedures

Figure p383
Figure p383

1 Move the Front millimeter wave radar to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the Front millimeter wave radar.

Torque:(4 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the Front millimeter wave radar.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the Front millimeter wave radar radar shield. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the radar.

5.1.5.4 Replacement of MMWRL

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the MMWRL. 7 Remove the MMWRL. Installation Procedures 1 Move the MMWRL to the mounting position. 2 Install the rubber buffer pad and then install the four fixing screws of the millimeter wave radar on the left side.

Figure p385
Figure p385

3 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 4 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the radar.

5.1.5.5 Replacement of MMWRR

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right skirt plate assembly.

6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the MMWRR. 7 Remove the MMWRR. Installation Procedures 1 Move the MMWRR to the mounting position. 2 Install the rubber buffer pad and then install the four fixing screws of the millimeter wave radar on the right side.

Figure p387

3 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 4 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the radar.
Figure p388

5.1.5.6 Replacement of Main USS (snowy white)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly.

12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the USS (snowy white). 13 Remove the USS (snowy white). Installation Procedures 1 Move the Main USS (snowy white)to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the USS (snowy white).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the front bumper assembly. 4 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 5 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 7 Install the forward MMW radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar shield. 9 Install the through-type lamp. 10 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

Figure p389
Figure p390

5.1.5.7 Replacement of Sub USS (matte black)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the Sub USS (matte black). 15 Remove the Sub USS (matte black). Installation Procedures

1 Move the Sub USS (matte black) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the Sub USS (matte black).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the right intake grille assembly. 4 Install the left intake grille assembly. 5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

5.1.5.8 Replacement of Left Side USS (snowy white)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield.

7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left side USS (snowy white). 13 Remove the left side USS(snowy white). Installation Procedures 1 Move the left side USS(snowy white) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the left side USS(snowy white).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the front bumper assembly. 4 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 5 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 7 Install the forward MMW radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar shield.

Figure p392
Figure p457
Figure p457
Figure p454
Figure p454
Figure p454
Figure p453
Figure p450
Figure p449
Figure p448
Figure p446
Figure p445
Figure p445
Figure p444
Figure p443
Figure p443
Figure p441
Figure p441
Figure p439
Figure p439
Figure p437
Figure p437
Figure p435
Figure p435
Figure p433
Figure p432
Figure p432
Figure p430
Figure p429
Figure p429
Figure p429
Figure p426
Figure p426
Figure p424
Figure p424

9 Install the through-type lamp. 10 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
Fixed bolts connecting IVI screen bracket and tube beam assemblyM66.5 ft-lb +/- .75
The fixing bolts connecting the CAR screen bracket and the pipe beam assemblyM66.5 ft-lb +/- .75
The fixing bolts connecting the cockpit domain controller to the cockpit domain controller bracketM66.5 ft-lb +/- .75
The fixing bolt connecting the cockpit domain controller bracket to the lower left instrument panel controller bracketM66.5 ft-lb +/- .75
Speaker - fixing bolt for connecting bass and bass speaker bracketM56.5 ft-lb +/- .75
The fixing bolt connecting the bass speaker bracket to the floor sheet metalM66.5 ft-lb +/- .75
AR-HUDFixed bolts connected to the pipe beam assemblyM66.5 ft-lb +/- .75
The fixing bolt connecting the glass antenna amplifier to the inner panel assembly of the front windshield crossbeamM66.5 ft-lb +/- .75
Fixed bolts connecting the reversing camera to the integrated frameM818 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb

5.2 Intelligent Cockpit Device7912 / 1357 / 1359· 5g

5.2.1 Specifications

5.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications

5.2.2 System Schematic Diagram

5.2.2.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
The speaker is silent1. IVI screen setting mute modeRelease the mute mode.
2. Speaker wiring harness faultCheck the wiring harness between the tweeter, subwoofer, mid-range speaker, and CDC.
3. Speaker faultCheck the high-frequency speaker, low- frequency speaker, and mid-range speaker, and replace them if necessary. Refer to Replacement Of Speaker - Tweeter.Replacement Of Speaker - Woofer (Left) .Replacement of Speaker - Woofer (Right) .Replacement Of Speaker - squawker
4. CDC faultReplace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller
IVI screen cannot be turned on/off or displays no signal1. IVI screen power grounding harness faultCheck the IVI screen power grounding harness. Refer to IVI Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault
2. IVI screen wake-up signal harness faultCheck the wake-up signal harness between the IVI screen and CDC.
3. IVI screen LVDS signal harness faultCheck the LVDS signal harness between the IVI screen and CDC.
4. IVI screen faultReplace the IVI screen. Refer to Replacement Of IVI Screen
5. CDC faultReplace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller
CAR screen cannot be turned on/off or displays no signal1. CAR screen power grounding harness faultCheck the grounding harness of the CAR screen power supply. Refer to CAR Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault

5.2.3 Diagnostic Information and Steps

5.2.3.1 Diagnosis Description

Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of the intelligent cockpit device before diagnosing its faults, and then starting system diagnosis, can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of intelligent cockpit devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment

of faulty parts. 5.2.3.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the intelligent cockpit device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the intelligent cockpit device system.

• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 5.2.3.3 Fault Symptom Table

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
2. CAR screen wake-up signal harness faultCheck the wake-up signal harness between the CAR screen and CDC.
3. CAR screen LVDS signal harness faultCheck the LVDS signal harness between the CAR screen and CDC.
4. CAR screen faultReplace the CAR screen. Refer to Replacement Of CAR Screen
5. CDC faultReplace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller
IPC screen cannot turn on/off or display no signal1. IPC screen power grounding harness faultCheck the IPC screen power grounding harness. Refer to IPC Screen Power Fault
2. IPC screen wake-up signal harness faultCheck the wake-up signal harness between the IPC screen and CDC.
3. IPC screenLVDS signal harness faultCheck the LVDS signal harness between the IPC screen and CDC.
4. IPC screen faultReplace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen
5. CDC faultReplace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller
The voice assistant is not working1. Microphone voice input signal harness faultCheck the wiring harness between the microphone and CDC.
2. Microphone faultReplace the microphone. Refer to Replacement Of Microphone Array MIC
3. CDC faultReplace CDC. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111716Low VoltageRefer to CDC Power Fault
B111717Over voltage
U018787Lost communication with CMSRefer to CDC Communication Fault
U018887Lost communication with CMS_R
U01B287Lost communication with AR_HUD

5.2.3.4 DTC Confirmation

1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 5.2.3.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

CDC

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U014087Lost communication with BDCU
U019987Lost Communication with DCM
U019887Lost Communication with T-BOX
U012287Lost Communication with VDC
U013287Lost Communication with ECAS
U019A87Lost Communication with VTDR
U012887Lost Communication with EPB
U012187Lost Communication with EBS
U012787Lost Communication with TPMS_F
U016487Lost communication with A/C
U014187Lost communication with AVAS
U015787Lost communication with ADCU
U015788Lost communication with CAMF
U026687Lost communication with MMWR_L1
U026487Lost communication with USS
U013087Lost communication with EPS
U007788CANFD5 BusOff
U008588IntCANFD1 BusOff
U220400CANFD5 network management is in a limp home state.
U238084SQI insufficientRefer to Internal Fault Of CDC
U238208The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal
U120487There is no communication on the IntLIN1 network.Refer to CDC LIN Communication Fault
U238108Unexpected Ethernet connection lossRefer to CDC Ethernet Fault
U230C12Ethernet signal line short circuit
U230C13Ethernet signal line open circuit
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717IP display ICD overvoltageRefer to IPC Screen Power Fault
B111716IP displays ICD low voltage
U007688CANFD4 BusOffRefer to IPC Screen Communication Fault
U014087missing BDCU
U012287missing VDC
U015687missing CDCU
U012187missing EBS
U013087missing EPS
B260009IP Display Dimming module statusRefer to IPC Screen Internal Fault
B260103IPC Display not received backlight value

IPC

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B260209IPC Display TFT failure
B260404IPC Display OSD failure
B260303IPC Display video signal connect failureRefer to IPC Screen LVDS Signal Fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717High voltage of HUDRefer to HUD Power Fault
B111716Low Voltage of HUD
U015687Communication timeout with CDCURefer to HUD Communication Fault
U014087Communication timeout with BDCU
U012287Communication timeout with VDC
U015788Communication timeout with CAMF
U019887Communication timeout with TGW
U008588CANFD bus closed
U026887Communication timeout with MMWR_R
U026687Communication timeout with MMWR_L
B2A0001High temperature malfunctionRefer to HUD Internal Fault
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111716Low VoltageVoltage<16V,t>500ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Cockpit domain controller
B111717Over voltageVoltage > 32V, t > 500ms

HUD

5.2.3.6 CDC Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.2.3.6 CDC Power Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
5.2.3.6 CDC Power Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U018787Lost communication with CMS1. The message 0x18FF0351x sent by CMS-L cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 50ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range1.Wiring harness 2. Cockpit domain controller
U018887Lost communication with CMS_R1.The message 0x18FF035Cx sent by CMS-R cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 50ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U01B287Lost communication with AR_HUD1.The message 0x18FF0028x sent by AR_HUD cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD1 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U014087Lost communication with BDCU1.The message 0x18FF0C21x sent by BDCU cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 200ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U019987Lost Communication with DCM1.The message 0x18FDA54Fx sent by DCM cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U019887Lost Communication with T-BOXNo relevant node message was found. 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U012287Lost Communication with VDC1.The message 0x18F00F27x sent by VDC cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides CDC? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the cockpit domain controller. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 6:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.7 CDC Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U013287Lost Communication with ECAS1.The message 0x0CFE5A2FX sent by ECAS cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U019A87Lost communication with VTDRNo relevant node message was found. 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U012887Lost Communication with EPB1.The message 0x1CECFF50x sent by EPB cannot be detected for 5 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (Cycle = 1000ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U012187missing EBS1.The message 0x18FE4F0Bx sent by EBS cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle =100ms)) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U012787Lost communication with TPMS1.The message 0x18FEF433x sent by TPMS_f cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network (10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 500ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U016487Lost communication with A/C1.The message 0x18FF0B19x sent by AC cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U014187Lost communication with AVAS1.The message 0x18FF0E57xx sent by AVAS cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U015787Lost communication with ADCU1.The message 0x18FF3531x sent by ADCU cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U015788Lost communication with CAMF1.The message 0x18FF4B31x sent by CAMF cannot be detected for 10 consecutive times on the CANFD5 network(10 *Cycle)(Cycle = 100ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U026687Lost communication with MMWR_L1No relevant node message was found. 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U026487Lost communication with USSNo relevant node message was found. 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U013087missing EPS1.Message 0x18FF0513x sent by EPS cannot be detected continuously for 500ms on CANFD5 network (Cycle = 10ms) 2.Within the diagnostic voltage range
U007788CANFD5 BusOffDetecting CANFD5 bus communication faults (with more than 5 times of busoff recovery)
U008588IntCANFD1 BusOffDetecting communication faults on the IntCANFD1 bus (with more than 5 times of busoff recovery)
U220400CANFD5 network management is in a limp home state.Detecting that CANFD5 network management is in a limp home state

2.Circuit Diagram

5.2.3.7 CDC Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IntCANFD bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of IntCANFD Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U238084SQI insufficientSQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s1. Cockpit domain controller
U238208The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormalUnable to read SWITCH chip register
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U120487There is no communication on the IntLIN1 network.Detecting LIN bus communication faults1.Wiring harness 2. Ambient light 3. Clock spring 4. Cockpit domain controller

Step 4:Check the CANFD5 BusOff communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD5 BusOff Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 6:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.8 Internal Fault Of CDC

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 4:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.9 CDC LIN Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.2.3.9 CDC LIN Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the LIN communication harness between the cabin domain controller and the ambient light and clock spring.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U238108Unexpected Ethernet connection lossIf the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported1.Wiring harness 2. Cockpit domain controller
U230C12Ethernet signal line short circuit-
U230C13Ethernet signal line open circuit-

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 5:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.10 CDC Ethernet Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.2.3.10 CDC Ethernet Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the Ethernet harness of the cockpit domain controller.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717IP display ICD overvoltageVoltage>32V, t > 500ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.IPC screen
B111716IP displays ICD low voltageVoltage>9V, t > 500ms

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the cockpit domain controller. Step 5:Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.11 IPC Screen Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.2.3.11 IPC Screen Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007688CANFD4 BusOffBus shutdown fault1.Wiring harness 2. IPC screen
U014087missing BDCUBDCU node 0x18FE4021x has been continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (Cycle<100ms, take 500ms)
U012287missing VDCVDC Node 0x18011727x has been continuously lost for more than 10 cysles(1000ms)
U015687missing CDCUCDCU Node 0x18FF5A41x has been continuously lost for more than 10 cysles(2000ms)
U012187missing EBSEBS Node 0x18F0010BX has been continuously lost for more than 10 cysles(1000ms)
U013087missing EPSEPS(EHPS1) Node 0x18FF0513X has been continuously lost for more than 50 cysles (Cycle<100ms, take 500ms)

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides IPC? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the IPC screen power and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the IPC screen. Step 6:Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.12 IPC Screen Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.2.3.12 IPC Screen Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD4 BusOff communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CANFD4 BusOff Network integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B260009IP Display Dimming module statusTest dimming module short circuit, open circuit or over current more than 150ms1. IPC screen
B260103IPC Display not received backlight valueAfter power on for 10s received a value of 0
B260209IPC Display TFT failureTFT fail for more than 150ms
B260404IPC Display OSD failureROHM IC fail Pin fault and MCU dectect System fail signal Enabling for 170ms
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B260303IPC Display video signal connect failureLOCK signal connect fail more than 5000ms1.Wiring harness 2. Cockpit domain controller 3. IPC screen

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the IPC screen. Step 5:Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.13 IPC Screen Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the IPC screen. Step 4:Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.14 IPC Screen LVDS Signal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the video signal harness between the cockpit domain controller and the IPC screen. Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the IPC screen. Step 5:Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.15 HUD Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717High voltage of HUDVoltage > 32V, t > 500ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.HUD
B111716Low Voltage of HUDVoltage < 18V, t > 30s

2.Circuit Diagram

5.2.3.15 HUD Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U015687Communication timeout with CDCU0x18FF0741x, Node continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (1s);0x18FEC1EEx node continuously lost for more than 5000ms;0x18FF6441x, Node continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (2s);Any node that meets the requirements is sufficient1.Wiring harness 2.HUD
U014087Communication timeout with BDCU0x18FE4021x Nodes are continuously lost for more than 500ms
U012287Communication timeout with VDC0x18011727x,0x18FEF100x Nodes are continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (1 second)
U015788Communication timeout with CAMF0x18FF3531x 0x18FF4031x 0x18FF4731x 0x18FF4B31x 0x18FF4131x, node continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (1s); 0x0CF02FA0x,0x0CFF552Ax, node continuously lost for more than 500ms, any node that meets the requirements is sufficient
U019887Communication timeout with TGW0x18FEE6EEx node continuously lost for more than 5000ms
U008588CANFD bus closedRecord one BUS off for 8 consecutive time
U026887Communication timeout with MMWR_R0x18FF4263x, node lost continuously for more than 10 cycles (1s)
U026687Communication timeout with MMWR_L0x18FF4361x, Node continuously lost for more than 10 cycles (1s))

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides HUD? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the HUD power and grounding harness. Step 5:HUD rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the HUD. Refer to Replacement Of AR-HUD Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.16 HUD Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

5.2.3.16 HUD Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IntCANFD bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of IntCANFD Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B2A0001High temperature malfunctionThe temperature protection value exceeds 102 ° C and lasts for more than 10 sampling cycles1.HUD
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
IntCANFD1 (H) and IntCANFD1 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

Step 4:HUD rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the HUD. Refer to Replacement Of AR-HUD Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.17 HUD Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:HUD rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the HUD. Refer to Replacement Of AR-HUD Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

5.2.3.18 IntInspection Of CANFD1 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of IntCANFD1 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the IntCANFD1 bus voltage. No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
IntCANFD1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
IntCANFD1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
IntCANFD1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
IntCANFD1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the IntCANFD1 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the IntCANFD1 bus. C. Measure the IntCANFD1 bus resistance between each module and the cabin domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the resistance of IntCANFD1 bus to ground is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the IntCANFD1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the IntCANFD1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the IntCANFD1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the IntCANFD1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Figure p423
Figure p423

5.2.4 Dismantling and Installation

5.2.4.1 Replacement of IVI Screen

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the DMS camera bracket. 5 Remove the DMS camera. 6 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the IVI screen. 7 Remove 3 fixing bolt of the IVI screen. 8 Remove the IVI screen. Installation Procedures

1 Move the IVI screen to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolt of the IVI screen.

Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Connect 3 harness connectors of the IVI screen.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the DMS camera. 5 Install the DMS camera bracket. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

5.2.4.2 Replacement of IPC Screen

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP brim assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing screws of the IPC screen. 6 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the IPC screen. 7 Remove the IPC screen. Installation Procedures

Figure p425
Figure p425

1 Move the IPC screen to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 harness connectors of the IPC screen.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p653

3 Install 2 fixing screws of the IPC screen. 4 Install the IP brim assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the IPC, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing.

5.2.4.3 Replacement of CAR Screen

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the plug cover on the rear shell of the CAR screen. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the CAR screen.

Figure p427
Figure p427

6 Disengage 1 clip of the IP harness. 7 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the CAR screen. 8 Remove the CAR screen. Installation Procedures

Figure p428
Figure p428

1 Move the CAR screen to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the CAR screen.

Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Install 1 clip of the IP harness. 4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the CAR screen.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the plug cover on the rear shell of the CAR screen. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

5.2.4.4 Replacement of CDCU

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
Figure p942
Figure p670

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the VTDR. 11 Remove the VTDR bracket. 12 Remove the left lower fixing bracket.

13 Disconnect 12 harness connectors of the CDCU. 14 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the CDCU with bracket, and remove the CDCU with bracket. 15 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the CDCU. 16 Remove the CDCU.

Figure p431
Figure p431
Figure p431

Installation Procedures 1 Move the CDCU to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the CDCU.

Torque: (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Install the CDCU with bracket, and install 4 fixing bolts of the CDCU with bracket.

4 Connect 12 harness connectors of the CDCU.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the left lower fixing bracket. 6 Install the VTDR bracket. 7 Install the VTDR. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

caution
After replacement of CDCU, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing, read and write the VIN, vehicle model settings, and read the PN and certificate status; If there is no certificate or if the certificate is abnormal, read the VIN SN, UIN, certificate request information CSR, and perform PKI certificate flashing; After writing of the certificate, read the certificate status and certificate serial number (according to the latest PKI specifications), and write the configuration word.

5.2.4.5 Replacement of Speaker - Low Pitch (left)

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the speaker - low pitch (left). 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the speaker - low pitch (left). 7 Remove the speaker - low pitch (left). Installation Procedures

Figure p434
Figure p434

1 Move the speaker - low pitch (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the speaker - low pitch (left). 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the speaker - low pitch (left).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

5.2.4.6 Replacement of Speaker - Low Pitch (right)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the speaker - low pitch (right). 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the speaker - low pitch (right). 7 Remove the speaker - low pitch (right). Installation Procedures

Figure p436
Figure p436

1 Move the speaker - low pitch (right) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the speaker - low pitch (right). 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the speaker - low pitch (right).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

5.2.4.7 Replacement of Speaker - Medium Pitch

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP squawker cover assembly. 5 Remove 4 fixing screws of the speaker - medium pitch. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the speaker - medium pitch. 7 Remove the speaker - medium pitch. Installation Procedures

Figure p438
Figure p438

1 Move the speaker - medium pitch to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the speaker - medium pitch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 4 fixing screws of the speaker - medium pitch. 4 Install the IP squawker cover assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

5.2.4.8 Replacement of Speaker - High Pitch

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP high-pitch speaker cover assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing screws of the speaker - high pitch. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the speaker - high pitch. 7 Remove the speaker - high pitch. Installation Procedures

Figure p440
Figure p440

1 Move the speaker - high pitch to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the speaker - high pitch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 2 fixing screws of the speaker - high pitch. 4 Install the IP high-pitch speaker cover assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

5.2.4.9 Replacement of Full Frequency Speaker (left)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left speaker cover. 5 Remove 4 fixing screws of the full frequency speaker (left). 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the full frequency speaker (left). 7 Remove the full frequency speaker (left). Installation Procedures

Figure p442
Figure p442

1 Move the full frequency speaker (left) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the full frequency speaker (left).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 4 fixing screws of the full frequency speaker (left). 4 Install the left speaker cover. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

5.2.4.10 Replacement of Full Frequency Speaker (right)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right speaker cover. 5 Remove 4 fixing screws of the full frequency speaker (right). 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the full frequency speaker (right). 7 Remove the full frequency speaker (right). Installation Procedures

Figure p444

1 Move the full frequency speaker (right) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the full frequency speaker (right).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 4 fixing screws of the full frequency speaker (right). 4 Install the right speaker cover. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

5.2.4.11 Replacement of Microphone Array MIC

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the microphone array MIC. Installation Procedures 1 Install the microphone array MIC. 2 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly.

Figure p446
Figure p954
Figure p954

3 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 4 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 5 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

Figure p447

5.2.4.12 Replacement of DVR Camera

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the DVR camera. 6 Remove the DVR camera. Installation Procedures

1 Move the DVR camera to the mounting position.

caution
Before installing the DVR camera, the front windshield should be cleaned thoroughly first.

2 Connect 1 harness connector of the DVR camera.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

5.2.4.13 Replacement of Selfie Camera

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly.

9 Remove the selfie camera bracket. 10 Remove the selfie camera. Installation Procedures 1 Install the selfie camera. 2 Install the selfie camera bracket. 3 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 4 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 6 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

Figure p449

5.2.4.14 Replacement of DMS Camera

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the DMS camera bracket. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connector of the DMS camera. 6 Remove the DMS camera. Installation Procedures 1 Move the DMS camera to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 harness connector of the DMS camera.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the DMS camera bracket. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p450

5.2.4.15 Replacement of AR-HUD

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the ip brim assy. 5 Remove the ivi screen. 6 Remove the car screen. 7 Remove the ipc screen. 8 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 9 Remove the camera monitor screen. 10 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 11 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 12 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 13 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 14 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 15 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 16 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 17 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 18 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 19 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 20 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard.

21 Disconnect one wire harness connector of the NFC antenna. 22 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the AR-HUD.

Figure p452
Figure p452
Figure p452

23 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the AR-HUD. 24 Remove the AR-HUD. Installation Procedures 1 Move the AR-HUD to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the AR-HUD.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p453

3 Install 4 fixing bolts of the AR-HUD.

Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Connect one wire harness connector of the NFC antenna.

5 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 6 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 7 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 8 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 9 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 10 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 11 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 12 Install the base-rh display brkt. 13 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 14 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 15 Install the base-lh display brkt. 16 Install the camera monitor screen. 17 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 18 Install the ipc screen. 19 Install the car screen. 20 Install the ivi screen. 21 Install the ip brim assy. 22 Connect the battery negative cable. 23 Close the front flip cover plate. 24 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the AR-HUD, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing, and write the configuration word.

5.2.4.16 Replacement of Rear View Camera

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the rear view camera. 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the rear view camera. 6 Remove the rear view camera. Installation Procedures

Figure p456
Figure p456

1 Move the rear view camera to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the rear view camera.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the rear view camera.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting suspension bracket two to the frame assemblyM14147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
The fixing nut connecting suspension bracket two to the frame assemblyM14147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
The fixing bolts connecting the suspension bracket three to the frame assemblyM14147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the left side of the fourth suspension of the vehicle body to the integrated frameM16228.5ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb(Kesai New 1262)
The fixing bolt connecting the right side of the fourth suspension of the vehicle body to the integrated frameM16228.5ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb(Kesai New 1262)
The fixing bolt connecting the fourth suspension support rod of the vehicle body to the frame assemblyM14147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the fourth suspension support rod assembly of the vehicle body and the fourth suspension of the vehicle bodyM14147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
The fixing nut connecting the fourth suspension support rod assembly of the vehicle body and the fourth suspension of the vehicle bodyM14147 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
6Vehicle Body

6.1 Vehicle Body Mounting Connection Device

6.1.1 Specifications

6.1.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p460

6.1.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.1.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Suspunsion Bracket Two Assy 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Body Fourth Suspension Lh 4. Hexagon Flange Nut 13. Plate Rr Wall Mounting 5. Suspunsion Bracket Three Assy 14. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Body Fourth Suspension Support Rod Assy 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 8. Body Fourth Suspension Rh 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 18. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_all Metal

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolts connecting the left bumper mounting frame and the upper body assembly of the left bumperM64.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb

6.2 Bumper Device

6.2.1 Specifications

6.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p462

6.2.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.2.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1.1. The Main Body Skeleton Assy on the Bumper 3. Body Assy on the Right Bumper 1.2. Body Assy on the Middle Bumper 4. Brkt-Bumper Mounts-Lh 1.3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Body Assy on the Left Bumper 1.4. Right Bumper Tow Hook Cover 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 1.5. Left Bumper Tow Hook Cover 7. Self-Tapping Screw 1.6. Self-Tapping Screw 8. License Plate Mounting Plate Assy 2. Brkt-Bumper Mounts-rh 9. Body Assy Under Bumper

6.2.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.2.3.1 Replacement of Bumper Middle Body Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
Figure p466

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the GASM harness module. 16 Remove the USS (snowy white). 17 Remove the auxiliary USS (matte black). 18 Remove the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 19 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). 20 Remove the blinding camera (front view). 21 Remove the front lower blinding camera bracket. 22 Remove the bumper lower body assembly. 23 Remove the left bumper upper body assembly.

Figure p464

24 Remove the right bumper upper body assembly. 25 Remove the bumper middle body assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the bumper middle body assembly. 2 Install the right bumper upper body assembly. 3 Install the left bumper upper body assembly. 4 Install the bumper lower body assembly. 5 Install the front lower blinding camera bracket. 6 Install the blinding camera (front view). 7 Install the Bluetooth antenna (front). 8 Install the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 9 Install the auxiliary USS (matte black). 10 Install the USS (snowy white). 11 Install the GASM harness module.

Figure p464

12 Install the right intake grille assembly. 13 Install the left intake grille assembly. 14 Install the license plate mounting plate assembly. 15 Install the front bumper assembly. 16 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 17 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 18 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 19 Install the forward MMW radar. 20 Install the front MMW radar shield. 21 Install the through-type lamp. 22 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.

6.2.3.2 Replacement of Middle Bumper Upper Body Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the GASM harness module. 16 Remove the USS (snowy white). 17 Remove the auxiliary USS (matte black). 18 Remove the auxiliary USS (snowy white).

19 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). 20 Remove the blinding camera (front view). 21 Remove the front lower blinding camera bracket. 22 Remove the bumper lower body assembly. 23 Remove the left bumper upper body assembly. 24 Remove the right bumper upper body assembly. 25 Remove the bumper middle body assembly. 26 Remove the bumper upper body frame assembly. 27 Remove the middle bumper upper body assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the middle bumper upper body assembly. 2 Install the bumper upper body frame assembly. 3 Install the bumper middle body assembly. 4 Install the right bumper upper body assembly.

Figure p466

5 Install the left bumper upper body assembly. 6 Install the bumper lower body assembly. 7 Install the front lower blinding camera bracket. 8 Install the blinding camera (front view). 9 Install the Bluetooth antenna (front). 10 Install the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 11 Install the auxiliary USS (matte black). 12 Install the USS (snowy white). 13 Install the GASM harness module. 14 Install the right intake grille assembly. 15 Install the left intake grille assembly. 16 Install the license plate mounting plate assembly. 17 Install the front bumper assembly. 18 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 19 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 20 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 21 Install the forward MMW radar. 22 Install the front MMW radar shield. 23 Install the through-type lamp. 24 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 25 Connect the battery negative cable. 26 Close the front flip cover plate. 27 Close the door.

6.2.3.3 Replacement of Left Bumper Upper Body Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar.

10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the GASM harness module. 16 Remove the USS (snowy white). 17 Remove the auxiliary USS (matte black). 18 Remove the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 19 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). 20 Remove the blinding camera (front view). 21 Remove the front lower blinding camera bracket. 22 Remove the bumper lower body assembly. 23 Remove 4 fixing screws of the left bumper upper body assembly. 24 Remove the left bumper upper body assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p468
Figure p469

1 Move the left bumper upper body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the left bumper upper body assembly. 3 Install the bumper lower body assembly. 4 Install the front lower blinding camera bracket. 5 Install the blinding camera (front view). 6 Install the Bluetooth antenna (front). 7 Install the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 8 Install the auxiliary USS (matte black). 9 Install the USS (snowy white). 10 Install the GASM harness module. 11 Install the right intake grille assembly. 12 Install the left intake grille assembly. 13 Install the license plate mounting plate assembly. 14 Install the front bumper assembly. 15 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 16 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 17 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 18 Install the forward MMW radar. 19 Install the front MMW radar shield. 20 Install the through-type lamp. 21 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 22 Connect the battery negative cable. 23 Close the front flip cover plate. 24 Close the door.

6.2.3.4 Replacement of Bumper Lower Body Aassembly

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Remove the left intake grille assembly. 14 Remove the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the GASM harness module. 16 Remove the USS (snowy white). 17 Remove the auxiliary USS (matte black). 18 Remove the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 19 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). 20 Remove the blinding camera (front view). 21 Remove the front lower blinding camera bracket. 22 Remove 11 fixing screws of the bumper lower body assembly, and remove the bumper lower body assembly.

Figure p470

Installation Procedures

Figure p471
Figure p471
Figure p472
Figure p472
Figure p472

1 Move the bumper lower body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 11 fixing screws of the bumper lower body assembly.

Figure p481
Figure p481
Figure p480
Figure p480
Figure p479
Figure p479

3 Install the front lower blinding camera bracket. 4 Install the blinding camera (front view). 5 Install the Bluetooth antenna (front). 6 Install the auxiliary USS (snowy white). 7 Install the auxiliary USS (matte black). 8 Install the USS (snowy white). 9 Install the GASM harness module. 10 Install the right intake grille assembly. 11 Install the left intake grille assembly. 12 Install the license plate mounting plate assembly. 13 Install the front bumper assembly. 14 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 15 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 16 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 17 Install the forward MMW radar. 18 Install the front MMW radar shield. 19 Install the through-type lamp. 20 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 21 Connect the battery negative cable. 22 Close the front flip cover plate. 23 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolt connecting the front lower protection assembly and the left front connecting beamM1037 ft-lb +/- 3.5 ft-lb
The fixing nut connecting the front lower protection assembly and the left front connecting beamM818.5 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb

6.3 Front Lower Protection Device

6.3.1 specifications

6.3.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p475

6.3.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.3.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Fl Protection Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Self-Locking Nut 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

6.3.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.3.3.1 Replacement of Front Lower Protection Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the MMW radar bracket.

13 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the front lower protection assembly to the headlamp bracket. 14 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the front lower protection assembly, and remove the front lower protection assembly.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the front lower protection assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Figure p477
Figure p477
Figure p477
Figure p478
Figure p478
Figure p478

Installation Procedures 1 Move the front lower protection assembly to the mounting position.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the front lower protection assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.

2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the front lower protection assembly.

Torque:(44 ft-lb - 59 ft-lb)ft-lb

3 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the front lower protection assembly to the headlamp bracket.

Torque: (17 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Install the MMW radar bracket. 5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the MMW radar bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolts connecting the white body assembly and the front connecting beamM16229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
The fixing bolts connecting the white body assembly and the suspension bracket three assembliesM16229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
The fixing bolts connecting the white body assembly and the suspension bracket two assembliesM16229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb
The fixing bolts connecting the white body assembly and the air conditioning pipelineM66.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb
The fixing bolt of the grounding wire harness connecting the white body assembly and the frame assemblyM1037 ft-lb +/- 3.5 ft-lb

6.4 Body-in-White Device

6.4.1 Specifications

6.4.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p483

6.4.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.4.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Slide Door Assy 2. Slide Door Assy

S/NColorSupplier
1Snowy whiteShanghai Kinlita Chemical Co., Ltd.

6.4.3 Sheet Metal and Painting

6.4.3.1 Colored Paint Information

6.4.3.2 Sheet Metal

Removal 1. Remove all relevant panels and components related to replacement parts. 2. Remove the sealant and anti-corrosion materials if necessary. 3. Locate, mark, and drill all factory solder joints connecting the components to be replaced. 4. Remove damaged components to be replaced. 5. Remove residual materials. Installation 1. Pre-treat the mating surface as necessary. 2. Select the correct welding method based on the welding form of the original vehicle. Employ shielded welding in areas where resistance welding is inconvenient. If plug welding is chosen, drill holes for plug welding seams on the new part, and determine the diameter and spacing of the plug welding holes based on the original solder joints. 3. Temporarily place the new part on the vehicle. 4. Assemble and fix the new part with a correction support (correctly position the maintenance panel). 5. Regularly measure the position of the new part to ensure its assembly dimensions are correct. 6. Perform corresponding welding. 7. Clean all welding surfaces. 8. Apply primer. 9. Apply sealant and anti-corrosion materials if necessary. 10. Install all relevant panels and components.

6.4.3.3 Painting

Painting Procedure

The painting procedure for rigid surfaces after sheet metal repair is similar to the painting process for rigid surfaces, except that the following steps are added after grinding the primer and before applying the base coat: 1. Scrape coating of poly-putty base. 2. Grinding of poly-putty base. 3. Dust blowing, degreasing, cleaning. 4. Scrape coating of fill-in putty. 5. Surface sanding of old paint film. 6. Cleaning, degreasing, and covering of unpainted areas.

6.4.4 Dismantling and Installation

6.4.4.1 Replacement of BIW Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 8 Drain coolant from the power system. 9 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 10 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 11 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 12 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing rear body. 14 Remove the roof deflector body. 15 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 16 Remove the left deflector upper body. 17 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 18 Remove the left deflector lower body. 19 Remove the upper deflector mounting bracket. 20 Remove the right deflector upper body. 21 Remove the right deflector lower body. 22 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 23 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 24 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 25 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 26 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 27 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 28 Remove the through-type lamp. 29 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 30 Remove the forward MMW radar. 31 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 32 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar.

33 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 34 Remove the front bumper assembly. 35 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 36 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 37 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 38 Remove the left fender trim strip. 39 Remove the left fender assembly. 40 Remove the left front combination lamp. 41 Remove the left headlamp. 42 Remove the left headlamp bracket. 43 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Remove the right fender trim strip. 45 Remove the right fender assembly. 46 Remove the right front combination lamp. 47 Remove the right headlamp. 48 Remove the right headlamp bracket. 49 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 50 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 51 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 52 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 53 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 54 Remove the lamp (upper). 55 Remove the lamp (lower). 56 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 57 Remove the boarding step bracket. 58 Remove the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 59 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 60 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 61 Remove the frame main truss.

62 Remove 5 fixing bolts of Left Junction Box cover plate, and open Left Junction Box. 63 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of Left Junction Box. 64 Remove 1 fixing nut of Left Junction Box ground harness, and disconnect Left Junction Box ground harness.

Figure p487
Figure p487
Figure p487

65 Remove 5 fixing bolts of Right Junction Box cover plate, and open Right Junction Box. 66 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of Right Junction Box. 67 Remove 1 fixing nut of Right Junction Box ground harness, and disconnect Right Junction Box ground harness.

Figure p488
Figure p488
Figure p488

68 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of the SJB_UN. 69 Disengage 5 harness clips. 70 Disconnect 1 harness connector.

Figure p489
Figure p489
Figure p489

71 Remove the 4 fixing bolts of the harness. 72 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the BIW assembly ground harness (at Right Junction Box). 73 Disconnect 1 harness connector.

Figure p490
Figure p490
Figure p490

74 Disconnect 5 brake air pipes of the brake signal transmitter. 75 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric horn - high pitch. 76 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric horn - low pitch.

Figure p491
Figure p491
Figure p491

77 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the steering drive shaft, and disconnect the steering drive shaft from the integrated EHPS assembly. 78 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the A/C high/low pressure pipe (left), and disconnect the A/C high/low pressure pipe (left). 79 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the A/C high/low pressure pipe (right), and disconnect the A/C high/low pressure pipe (right).

Figure p492
Figure p492
Figure p492

80 Disconnect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly. 81 Disconnect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly. 82 Remove 2 fixing bolts, and disconnect the A/C pipeline at the bottom of the BIW assembly.

Figure p493
Figure p493
Figure p493

83 Disconnect 1 high voltage harness connector at the rear of the BIW assembly. 84 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the left front joint beam. 85 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the mounting bracket II and III assembly.

Figure p494
Figure p494
Figure p494

86 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the mounting bracket II and III assembly. 87 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the right front joint beam. 88 Disconnect the strap clip of the BIW assembly front wall harness, clean the harness, and separate it from the cab. 89 Pre-install the cab lifting tool. 90 Remove 2 bolt (left upper) of the rear wall mounting plate (left). 91 Remove 2 bolt (right upper) of the rear wall mounting plate (right).

Figure p495
Figure p495
Figure p498
Figure p498

92 Add a spacer block between the rear enclosure mounting plate and the lifting tool, and install the lifting bracket at the rear part of the white body assembly.

warning !
It is necessary to use the lifting tools provided or permitted by Windrose.
The lifting tool should maintain a distance of 5 to 10 centimeters from the rear enclosure of the vehicle body.

93 Install the lifting tool at the lifting points of the white body assembly (the lifting points are located at the left and right lower sides of the front part of the white body assembly).

Figure p496
Figure p496
Figure p496
Figure p497
Figure p497

94 Adjust the lifting tool to the appropriate position to keep the BIW assembly stable. 95 Lift the BIW assembly. 96 Place the BIW assembly on the storage bracket. 97 Separate the lifting bracket from the BIW assembly. 98 Remove the BIW assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the BIW assembly to the mounting position. 2 Pre-install the cab lifting tool. 3 Install the lifting tool at the lifting points of the white body assembly (the lifting points are located at the left and right lower sides of the front part of the white body assembly).

4 Add a spacer block between the rear enclosure mounting plate and the lifting tool, and install the lifting bracket at the rear part of the white body assembly.

warning !
It is necessary to use the lifting tools provided or permitted by Windrose.
The lifting tool should maintain a distance of 5 to 10 centimeters from the rear enclosure of the vehicle body.

5 Adjust the lifting tool to the appropriate position to keep the BIW assembly stable. 6 Lift the BIW assembly. 7 Place the BIW assembly on the mounting position. 8 Separate the lifting bracket from the BIW assembly. 9 Install 2 bolt (right upper) of the rear wall mounting plate (right). 10 Install 2 bolt (left upper) of the rear wall mounting plate (left). 11 Connect the strap clip of the BIW assembly front wall harness. 12 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the right front joint beam.

Torque: (229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p499
Figure p499
Figure p499

13 Install 1 fixing bolt connecting the BIW assembly to the mounting bracket II and III assembly.

Torque: (229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb

14 Install 1 fixing bolt connecting the BIW assembly to the mounting bracket II and III assembly.

Torque: (229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb

15 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the BIW assembly to the left front joint beam.

Torque: (229 ft-lb +/- 7 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p500
Figure p500
Figure p500

16 Install 2 fixing bolts, and connect one A/C pipeline at the bottom of the BIW assembly.

Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p501
Figure p501
Figure p501

17 Connect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

18 Connect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

19 Connect 1 high voltage harness connector at the bottom of the BIW assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

20 Install 1 fixing bolt of the A/C high/low pressure pipe (right), and connect the A/C high/low pressure pipe (right).

Torque:(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

21 Install 1 fixing bolt of the A/C high/low pressure pipe (left), and connect the A/C high/low pressure pipe (left).

Torque: (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p502
Figure p502
Figure p502

22 Install 1 fixing bolt of the steering drive shaft, and connect the steering drive shaft to the integrated EHPS assembly.

Torque:(39 ft-lb +/- 5 ft-lb) ft-lb

23 Connect 1 harness connector of the electric horn - high pitch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

24 Connect 1 harness connector of the electric horn - low pitch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p503
Figure p503
Figure p503

25 Connect 5 brake air pipes of the brake signal transmitter. 26 Connect 1 harness connector.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

27 Install 1 fixing bolt of the BIW assembly ground harness (at Right Junction Box).

Torque:(37 ft-lb +/- 4 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p504
Figure p504
Figure p504

28 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the harness.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

29 Connect 1 harness connector.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

30 Install 5 harness clips.

Figure p505
Figure p505
Figure p505

31 Connect 6 harness connector.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

32 Install 1 fixing nut of Right Junction Box ground harness, and connect Right Junction Box ground harness.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

33 Connect 6 harness connectors of Right Junction Box.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p506
Figure p506
Figure p506

34 Install 5 fixing bolts of Right Junction Box cover plate, and close Right Junction Box.

Torque:(4 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

35 Install 1 fixing nut of Left Junction Box ground harness, and connect Left Junction Box ground harness.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

36 Connect 6 harness connectors of Left Junction Box.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p507

37 Install 5 fixing bolts of Left Junction Box cover plate, and close Left Junction Box.

Torque: (4 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

38 Install the frame main truss. 39 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 40 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 41 Install the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 42 Install the boarding step bracket. 43 Install the boarding step body assembly. 44 Install the lamp (lower). 45 Install the lamp (upper). 46 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 47 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 48 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 49 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 50 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 51 Install the right headlamp bracket. 52 Install the right headlamp. 53 Install the right front combination lamp. 54 Install the right fender assembly. 55 Install the right fender trim strip. 56 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 57 Install the left headlamp bracket. 58 Install the left headlamp. 59 Install the left front combination lamp. 60 Install the left fender assembly. 61 Install the left fender trim strip.

62 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 63 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 64 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 65 Install the front bumper assembly. 66 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 67 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 68 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 69 Install the forward MMW radar. 70 Install the front MMW radar shield. 71 Install the through-type lamp. 72 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 73 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 74 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 75 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 76 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 77 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 78 Install the right deflector lower body. 79 Install the right deflector upper body. 80 Install the upper deflector mounting bracket. 81 Install the left deflector lower body. 82 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 83 Install the left deflector upper body. 84 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 85 Install the roof deflector body. 86 Install the right front wheel housing rear body. 87 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 88 Install the right front wheel housing body. 89 Install the left front wheel housing body. 90 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 91 Fill coolant in the power system. 92 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 93 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 94 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 95 Connect the battery negative cable.

96 Close the front flip cover plate. 97 Close the door.

Figure p509

6.4.4.2 Replacement of Sliding Door Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the cable cover plate. 6 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 8 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 9 Remove the towing chain harness assembly. 10 Remove the ground lock assembly. 11 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the upper hinge assembly.

Figure p511

12 Remove 1 fixing nut connecting the sliding door assembly to the middle hinge assembly. 13 Remove 3 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the middle hinge assembly. 14 Remove 1 fixing nut connecting the sliding door assembly to the lower hinge assembly.

Figure p510
Figure p510
Figure p510

15 Remove 3 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the lower hinge assembly. 16 Remove the sliding door assembly.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the sliding door assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the sliding door assembly to the mounting position.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the sliding door assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.

2 Install 3 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the lower hinge assembly.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p511
Figure p512
Figure p512
Figure p512

3 Install 1 fixing nut connecting the sliding door assembly to the lower hinge assembly.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Install 3 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the middle hinge assembly.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

5 Install 1 fixing nut connecting the sliding door assembly to the middle hinge assembly.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p513

6 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the sliding door assembly to the upper hinge assembly.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

7 Install the ground lock assembly. 8 Install the towing chain harness assembly. 9 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 10 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 11 Install the door protective plate assembly. 12 Install the cable cover plate. 13 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolts connecting the toolbox assembly to the vehicle bodyM66.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb

6.5 Toolbox Device

6.5.1 Specifications

6.5.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p515

6.5.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.5.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Hinge-Toolbox 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Striker-Toolbox 3. Lock-Toolbox 6. Toolbox Assy

Figure p516
Figure p516

6.5.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.5.3.1 Replacement of Toolbox Lock Front End (with cable)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Open the sleeper mat assembly and disconnect one harness connector of the toolbox lock front end (with cable). 5 Disengage 2 fixing clips of the cable.

6 Disengage the cable. 7 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the toolbox lock front end (with cable). 8 Remove the toolbox lock front end (with cable). Installation Procedures

Figure p517
Figure p517
Figure p518
Figure p518
Figure p518

1 Move the toolbox lock front end (with cable) to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the toolbox lock front end (with cable). 3 Connect the cable. 4 Install 2 fixing clips of the cable.

Figure p519

5 Connect one harness connector of the toolbox lock front end (with cable).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Figure p519

6.5.3.2 Replacement of Toolbox Lock Back End

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing screws of the toolbox lock back end.

Figure p520

3 Disengage the cable. 4 Remove the toolbox lock back end. Installation Procedures 1 Move the toolbox lock back end to the mounting position. 2 Connect the cable.

Figure p520
Figure p521

3 Install 2 fixing screws of the toolbox lock back end. 4 Close the door.

Figure p521

6.5.3.3 Replacement of Toolbox Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the toolbox lock catch. 3 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the toolbox assembly. 4 Remove the toolbox assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p522

1 Move the toolbox assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the toolbox assembly.

Torque: 6 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb

3 Install the toolbox lock catch. 4 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolt connecting the left skirt assembly and the frame assemblyM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the left skirt assembly and the skirt lower mounting bracketM6(4.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the right side skirt assembly and the skirt lower mounting bracketM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the right side skirt assembly and the skirt lower mounting bracketM6(4.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing nut connecting the right side skirt assembly and the right front assembly of the rear wheel coverM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the right side skirt assembly to the bracket on the skirtM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing nut connecting the left skirt assembly and the left front assembly of the rear wheel coverM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the left skirt assembly to the bracket on the skirtM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the rear step assembly and the side skirt assemblyM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

6.6 Side Skirt Panel Device

6.6.1 specifications

6.6.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p524

6.6.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.6.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Skirt Assy-Lh 9. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Brkt-Lh Rr Wheel Arch Attachment 10. Upr Attach Brkt-Skirt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Brkt-Skrit Lower 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Riveted Nut 5. Hexagon Flange Nut 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Skrit Bracket 14. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 8. Brkt-Skrit Upper 16. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy

1. Skrit Plate-Rh 10. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Hexagon Flange Nut 11. Skrit Bracket 3. Rear Step Assy 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 14. Brkt-Skrit Upper 6. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 15. Upr Attach Brkt-Skirt 7. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 16. Brkt-Skrit Lower 8. Brkt-Rh Rr Wheel Arch Attachment 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 18. Riveted Nut

Figure p525
Figure p526
Figure p526

6.6.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.6.3.1 Replacement of Left Skirt Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the left skirt plate assembly.

7 Remove 4 protection covers. 8 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly. 9 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly.

Figure p527
Figure p527
Figure p527
Figure p528

10 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the left skirt plate assembly. 11 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left skirt plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 3 harness connectors of the left skirt plate assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p528
Figure p529
Figure p529
Figure p529

3 Install 4 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Install 2 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly.

Torque: (4.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

5 Install 4 protection covers.

Figure p530
Figure p530

6 Install 1 fixing nut of the left skirt plate assembly.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

7 Install 5 fixing bolts of the left skirt plate assembly.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

8 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

6.6.3.2 Replacement of Right Skirt Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the right skirt plate assembly.

Figure p531
Figure p531

7 Remove 4 protection covers. 8 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly. 9 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly, and detach the right skirt plate assembly.

Figure p532
Figure p532
Figure p532
Figure p533

10 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the right skirt plate assembly. 11 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right skirt plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 3 harness connectors of the right skirt plate assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p533
Figure p534
Figure p534
Figure p534

3 Connect the right skirt plate assembly, and install 4 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly.

Torque: (18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

4 Install 2 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly.

Torque: (4.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

5 Install 4 protection covers.

Figure p535
Figure p535

6 Install 1 fixing nut of the right skirt plate assembly.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

7 Install 5 fixing bolts of the right skirt plate assembly.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb

8 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

Figure p536

6.7 Carpet Device

6.7.1 Decomposition Diagram

6.7.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Carpet-frt 2. Carpet-Rr

6.7.2 Dismantling and Installation

6.7.2.1 Replacement of Front Carpet

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Remove the wiper arm assy. 8 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 9 Remove the dab decorative cove. 10 Remove the steering wheel assy. 11 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 12 Remove the ip brim assy. 13 Remove the IVI screen. 14 Remove the CAR screen. 15 Remove the IPC screen. 16 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 17 Remove the camera monitor screen. 18 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 19 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 20 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 21 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 22 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 23 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 24 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 25 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 26 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 27 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 28 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 29 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 30 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 31 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 32 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 33 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 34 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt.

35 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 36 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 37 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 38 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 39 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 40 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 41 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 42 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 43 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 44 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 45 Remove the AR-HUD. 46 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 47 Remove the smart appliance box. 48 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 49 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 50 Remove the Tbox-gw. 51 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 52 Remove the EBS controller assy. 53 Remove the EBS bracket. 54 Remove the body domain control unit. 55 Remove the controller bracket assy. 56 Remove the cross car beam pole. 57 Remove the cross car beam assy. 58 Remove the right foot blowing duct assembly. 59 Remove the storage box bracket assembly. 60 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 61 Remove the left foot blowing duct assembly. 62 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 63 Remove the speaker - low pitch (left). 64 Remove the speaker - low pitch (right). 65 Remove the low-pitch speaker bracket - left. 66 Remove the low-pitch speaker bracket - right. 67 Remove the steering column fixing bracket 1. 68 Remove the steering column fixing bracket 2. 69 Remove the brake signal transmitter assembly. 70 Remove the brake pedal assembly. 71 Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. 72 Remove the kettle holder.

73 Remove the kettle holder bracket assembly. 74 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. 75 Remove the rear A/C lower air duct. 76 Remove the fire extinguisher. 77 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 78 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 79 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 80 Remove the 120V receptacle. 81 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). 82 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear). 83 Remove the toolbox trim panel assembly. 84 Remove the toolbox sill molding assembly. 85 Remove the toolbox lamp. 86 Remove the toolbox lamp bracket. 87 Remove the sleeper toolbox. 88 Remove the electric sliding door switch. 89 Remove the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 90 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 91 Remove the driver seat assembly. 92 Remove the front carpet. Installation Procedures

Figure p539
Figure p934
Figure p540

1 Install the front carpet. 2 Install the driver seat assembly. 3 Install the right sill molding assembly. 4 Install the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 5 Install the electric sliding door switch. 6 Install the sleeper toolbox. 7 Install the toolbox lamp bracket. 8 Install the toolbox lamp. 9 Install the toolbox sill molding assembly. 10 Install the toolbox trim panel assembly. 11 Install the interior temperature sensor (rear). 12 Install the vehicle power supply (12V). 13 Install the 120V receptacle. 14 Install the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 15 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 17 Install the fire extinguisher. 18 Install the rear A/C lower air duct. 19 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 20 Install the kettle holder bracket assembly. 21 Install the kettle holder. 22 Install the accelerator pedal assembly. 23 Install the brake pedal assembly. 24 Install the brake signal transmitter assembly. 25 Install the steering column fixing bracket 2. 26 Install the steering column fixing bracket 1.

Figure p641

27 Install the low-pitch speaker bracket - right. 28 Install the low-pitch speaker bracket - left. 29 Install the speaker - low pitch (right). 30 Install the speaker - low pitch (left). 31 Install the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 32 Install the left foot blowing duct assembly. 33 Install the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 34 Install the storage box bracket assembly. 35 Install the right foot blowing duct assembly. 36 Install the cross car beam assy. 37 Install the cross car beam pole. 38 Install the controller bracket assy. 39 Install the body domain control unit. 40 Install the EBS bracket. 41 Install the EBS controller assy. 42 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 43 Install the Tbox-gw. 44 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 45 Install the cockpit domain controller. 46 Install the smart appliance box. 47 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 48 Install the AR-HUD. 49 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 50 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 51 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 52 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 53 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 54 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 55 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 56 Install the storage box assy-rh. 57 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 58 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 59 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 60 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 61 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 62 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 63 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh.

64 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 65 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 66 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 67 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 68 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 69 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 70 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 71 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 72 Install the base-rh display brkt. 73 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 74 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 75 Install the base-lh display brkt. 76 Install the camera monitor screen. 77 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 78 Install the IPC screen. 79 Install the CAR screen. 80 Install the IVI screen. 81 Install the ip brim assy. 82 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 83 Install the steering wheel assy. 84 Install the dab decorative cove. 85 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 86 Install the wiper arm assy. 87 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 88 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 89 Connect the battery negative cable. 90 Close the front flip cover plate. 91 Close the door.

6.7.2.2 Replacement of Rear Carpet

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Remove the rear seat assembly. 4 Remove the seat rear storage box. 5 Remove the right drawer assembly.

Figure p543

6 Remove the middle drawer assembly. 7 Remove the rear carpet. Installation Procedures 1 Install the rear carpet. 2 Install the middle drawer assembly. 3 Install the right drawer assembly. 4 Install the seat rear storage box. 5 Install the rear seat assembly. 6 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 7 Close the door.

Figure p543
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the lifting glass assembly and the door trim bodyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.8 Full Vehicle Glass Device

6.8.1 Specifications

6.8.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p545

6.8.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.8.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Windsheld Assy-Frt 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Front Quarter Glass Assy-Lh 8. Rear Quarter Glass Assy-Lh 3. Front Quarter Glass Assy-Rh 9. Rear Quarter Glass Assy-Rh 4. Front Glass Assy-Lh 10. Quarter Window Glass on the Left Rear Side Panel 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Right Rear Quarter Window Glass 6. Front Glass Assy-Rh 12. Fixed Glass Roof Assy

6.8.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.8.3.1 Replacement of Front Windshield Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left fender trim strip. 10 Remove the left fender assembly. 11 Remove the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 12 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 14 Remove the right fender trim strip. 15 Remove the right fender assembly. 16 Remove the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 17 Remove the roof sealing strip. 18 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 19 Remove the Identification lamp. 20 Remove the DVR camera. 21 Remove the front view intelligent camera. 22 Remove the RLS.

Figure p547

23 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.

caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.

24 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.

caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.
Figure p564

25 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.

caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.

26 Remove the front windshield assembly using the suction cup.

caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the front windshield assembly to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.

caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.

3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.

caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.
Figure p547

4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.

caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.

5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.

caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.

6 Install the RLS. 7 Install the front view intelligent camera. 8 Install the DVR camera. 9 Install the Identification lamp. 10 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 11 Install the roof sealing strip. 12 Install the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 13 Install the right fender assembly. 14 Install the right fender trim strip. 15 Install the right front wheel housing body. 16 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 17 Install the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 18 Install the left fender assembly. 19 Install the left fender trim strip. 20 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 21 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 22 Install the left front wheel housing body. 23 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 24 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 25 Connect the battery negative cable. 26 Close the front flip cover plate. 27 Close the door.

6.8.3.2 Replacement of Left Adjustable Window Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
Figure p761

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 16 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the left inner weatherstrip assembly. 18 Remove the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 19 Remove the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 20 Remove the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly.

Figure p550

21 Remove the left glass run assembly. 22 Remove the left adjustable window assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left adjustable window assembly. 2 Install the left glass run assembly. 3 Install the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly. 4 Install the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 5 Install the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 6 Install the left inner weatherstrip assembly. 7 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 9 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly.

Figure p550

11 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the left switch panel assembly. 15 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 16 Install the front USB interface. 17 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 18 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 19 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 20 Connect the battery negative cable. 21 Close the front flip cover plate. 22 Close the door.

Figure p551

6.8.3.3 Replacement of Right Adjustable Window Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the right inner weatherstrip assembly. 5 Remove the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 8 Remove the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 9 Remove the right glass run assembly. 10 Remove the right adjustable window assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p552

1 Install the right adjustable window assembly. 2 Install the right glass run assembly. 3 Install the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 4 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 5 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 6 Install the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 7 Install the right inner weatherstrip assembly. 8 Install the door protective plate assembly. 9 Install the cable cover plate. 10 Close the door.

6.8.3.4 Replacement of Left Front Triangular Window Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).

8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left fender trim strip. 10 Remove the left fender assembly. 11 Remove the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 12 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.

caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.

13 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.

caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.

14 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.

caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.

15 Remove the left front triangular window assembly using the suction cup.

caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.

Installation Procedures

Figure p553
Figure p554

1 Move the left front triangular window assembly to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.

caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.

3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.

caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.

4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.

caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.

5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.

caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.

6 Install the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 7 Install the left fender assembly. 8 Install the left fender trim strip. 9 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 10 Install the left front wheel housing body. 11 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 12 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 13 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

Figure p555

6.8.3.5 Replacement of Right Front Triangular Window Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 6 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the right fender trim strip. 10 Remove the right fender assembly. 11 Remove the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 12 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.

caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.

13 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.

caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.

14 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.

caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.
Figure p556

15 Remove the right front triangular window assembly using the suction cup.

caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the right front triangular window assembly to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.

caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.

3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.

caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.

4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.

caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.

5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.

caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.

6 Install the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 7 Install the right fender assembly. 8 Install the right fender trim strip. 9 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 10 Install the right front wheel housing body. 11 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).

12 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 13 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

6.8.3.6 Replacement of Left Rear Quadrangle Window Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 13 Remove the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly. 14 Remove the left glass run assembly. 15 Remove the window regulator left mounting rail assembly.

Figure p558

16 Remove the left quadrangle window sealing strip. 17 Remove the left rear quadrangle window assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left rear quadrangle window assembly. 2 Install the left quadrangle window sealing strip. 3 Install the window regulator left mounting rail assembly. 4 Install the left glass run assembly. 5 Install the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly. 6 Install the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly.

Figure p558

11 Install the left switch panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.

Figure p559

6.8.3.7 Replacement of Right Rear Quadrangle Window Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 5 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 6 Remove the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 7 Remove the right glass run assembly. 8 Remove the window regulator right mounting rail assembly. 9 Remove the right quadrangle window sealing strip. 10 Remove the right rear quadrangle window assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p560

1 Install the right rear quadrangle window assembly. 2 Install the right quadrangle window sealing strip. 3 Install the window regulator right mounting rail assembly. 4 Install the right glass run assembly. 5 Install the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 6 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 7 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 8 Install the door protective plate assembly. 9 Install the cable cover plate. 10 Close the door.

6.8.3.8 Replacement of Awning Glass Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp.

10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 12 Remove the awning sunshade assembly. 13 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.

caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.

14 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.

caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.

15 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.

caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.

16 Remove the awning glass assembly using the suction cup.

caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.

Installation Procedures

Figure p561
Figure p562

1 Move the awning glass assembly to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.

caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.

3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.

caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.

4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.

caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.

5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.

caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.

6 Install the awning sunshade assembly. 7 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 8 Install the right ceiling lamp. 9 Install the left ceiling lamp. 10 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 11 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 12 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 13 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 14 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.

6.8.3.9 Replacement of Left Side Wall Quadrangle Window

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 16 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the left side wall quadrangle window weatherstrip. 18 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.

caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.

19 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.

caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.
Figure p563

20 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.

caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.

21 Remove the left side wall quadrangle window using the suction cup.

caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the left side wall quadrangle window to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.

caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.

3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.

caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.

4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.

caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.

5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.

caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.

6 Install the left side wall quadrangle window weatherstrip. 7 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 9 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the left switch panel assembly. 15 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 16 Install the front USB interface. 17 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 18 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 19 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 20 Connect the battery negative cable. 21 Close the front flip cover plate. 22 Close the door.

6.8.3.10 Replacement of Right Side Wall Quadrangle Window

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket.

7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove the right side wall quadrangle window weatherstrip. 11 Clear away the glass debris inside and outside the vehicle.

caution
Do not sweep debris, or score or scratch the vehicle body.

12 Use an extended straight screwdriver to thread through the windshield sealant.

caution
Install the floor mat, driver seat cover, sleeper protective cover, and other protective measures inside the cab.

13 Extend the wire rope through the glass adhesive, pull out the joint of the wire rope at the other end, and cooperate with the personnel inside and outside the cab to pull the two ends of the wire rope and cut the glass adhesive.

caution
Before using the wire rope to pull and cut glass sealant, the wire rope shall be wrapped around a wooden stick before operation to avoid hand injury. Personnel working at heights outside the cab must take necessary safety precautions.

14 Remove the right side wall quadrangle window using the suction cup.

caution
Wear goggles and cut resistant gloves when removing glass. Damaged glass can be removed using a rubber hammer and cutting knife.

Installation Procedures

Figure p566
Figure p567

1 Move the right side wall quadrangle window to the mounting position. 2 Clean the bonding surfaces of the window frame and glass separately with activated cleaning agents.

caution
Dry for 3 minutes after cleaning.

3 Use a clean degreased cotton or brush to evenly and thinly apply the bottom coat of polyurethane glass adhesive to the pre bonding area of the body sheet metal.

caution
After coating, let it dry for at least 30 seconds.

4 Apply polyurethane glass adhesive evenly to the glass bonding position.

caution
The glue nozzle of the glue gun needs to be cut with an art knife according to the standard.

5 Attach the glass suction cup to the outer curved surface of the glass, align one of the clips with the corresponding body sheet metal hole, then align the diagonal clips with the corresponding sheet metal hole, and evenly press the entire circumference to ensure that the locating clips are effectively engaged with the body sheet metal.

caution
To ensure that the glass is not damaged, two people need to simultaneously grab the suction cup for operation.
Figure p570
Figure p569

6 Install the right side wall quadrangle window weatherstrip. 7 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Install the SSM. 9 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 10 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 11 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 12 Install the right sill molding assembly. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

Figure p568

6.9 A-Pillar Exterior Trim Panel Device 6.9.1 Dismantling and Installation

6.9.1.1 Replacement of Left A-pillar Outer Trim Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the negative cable of the storage battery.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative terminal of the storage battery.

4 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 5 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 6 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 7 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 8 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 9 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the left fender trim strip. 11 Remove the left fender assembly. 12 Remove 1 fixing screw of the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 13 Remove the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the left A-pillar outer trim assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the left A-pillar outer trim assembly. 3 Install the left fender assembly. 4 Install the left fender trim strip. 5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the left front wheel housing body. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 9 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 10 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 11 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

6.9.1.2 Replacement of Right A-pillar Outer Trim Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the negative cable of the storage battery.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative terminal of the storage battery.

4 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 5 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 6 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the right front wheel housing body.

8 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 9 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the right fender trim strip. 11 Remove the right fender assembly. 12 Remove 1 fixing screw of the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 13 Remove the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right A-pillar outer trim assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the right A-pillar outer trim assembly. 3 Install the right fender assembly. 4 Install the right fender trim strip. 5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 7 Install the right front wheel housing body.

Figure p570

8 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 9 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 10 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 11 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the top cabinet assembly and the top cover assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

6.10 Roof Cabinet Device

6.10.1 specifications

6.10.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p573

6.10.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.10.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Top Cabinet Assy 2. Assembly of Hexagon Head Bolts and Plain Washers

6.10.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.10.3.1 Replacement of Top Cabinet Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 16 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 18 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 19 Remove the left speaker cover. 20 Remove the left ceiling assembly. 21 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 22 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 23 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 24 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 25 Remove the SSM. 26 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 27 Remove the sleeper reading lamp. 28 Remove the right speaker cover.

29 Remove the right ceiling assembly. 30 Remove the top cabinet lamp. 31 Remove 12 fixing bolts of the top cabinet assembly, and remove the top cabinet assembly.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the top cabinet assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Figure p575
Figure p575
Figure p576
Figure p576
Figure p576
Figure p577
Figure p577

Installation Procedures 1 Move the top cabinet assembly to the mounting position.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the top cabinet assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.

2 Install 12 fixing bolts of the top cabinet assembly.

Torque:(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p578
Figure p578
Figure p578

3 Install the top cabinet lamp. 4 Install the right ceiling assembly. 5 Install the right speaker cover. 6 Install the sleeper reading lamp. 7 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Install the SSM. 9 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 10 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 11 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 12 Install the right sill molding assembly. 13 Install the left ceiling assembly. 14 Install the left speaker cover. 15 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 16 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 17 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 18 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 19 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 20 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 21 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 22 Install the curtain rail assembly. 23 Install the right ceiling lamp. 24 Install the left ceiling lamp. 25 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 26 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 27 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 28 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 29 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 30 Connect the battery negative cable. 31 Close the front flip cover plate. 32 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Imperial (ft-lb)
The fixing bolts connecting the pipe beam assembly and the white body assembly assemblyM8(18 ft-lb +/- 2 ft-lb) ft-lb
Fixed bolts connecting the pipe beam assembly and HVAC assembly (including PTC)M6(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt connecting the left lower trim assembly of the dashboard to the left lower fixing bracketM6(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
The fixing bolt between the right storage box assembly and the storage box bracket assemblyM6(6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

6.11 Dashboard Device

6.11.1 Specifications

6.11.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p581

6.11.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.11.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Cross Car Beam Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

1. Cross Car Beam Pole 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p582

1. Front Defrost Air Outlet Assy-Lh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p583

1. Front Defrost Vent Assy-Rh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p584

1. Duct Assy-Defrost Rh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p585

1. Defrost Duct Assy-Lh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p586

2. Lower Body of the Instrument Panel 4. Reed Nut 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p587

2. Upper Body of the Instrument Panel 9. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Screw Cover on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel 10. Plastic Nut 4. Screw Cover in the Middle of the Instrument Panel 11. Reed Nut 5. Screw Cover on the Right Side of the Instrument Panel 12. Reed Nut 6. Defrost Air Outlet Assembly on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel 13. Plastic Buckle 7. Defrost air outlet assembly on the right side of the instrument panel 14. Self-Tapping Screw 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p588

2. Tweeter Speaker Grille of the Instrument Panel 3. Reed Buckle

Figure p589

2. Midrange Speaker Grille of the Instrument Panel 3. Plastic Buckle

Figure p590

2. Visor Outer Panel Assembly of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle 3. Visor Inner Panel of the Instrument Panel 6. Metal Buckle 4. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p591

2. Decorative Panel of the Left Air Outlet 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Left Air Outlet Assembly 5. Plastic Buckle

Figure p592

2. Decorative Panel of the Right Air Outlet 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Right Air Outlet Assembly 5. Plastic Buckle

Figure p593

1. Side Blowing Air Duct Assy-Lh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p594

1. Blowing Air Duct Assy-Rh 2. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p595

2. Welded Assembly of the Left Lower Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Nut 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Plastic Buckle 4. Self-Tapping Screw 7. Reed Nut

Figure p596

2. Left Access Panel Cover 3. Plastic Buckle

Figure p597

2. Outer Panel of the Storage Box 10. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Storage Box 3. Body of the Storage Box 11. Felt of the Storage Box 4. Side Panel of the Storage Box 12. Rubber Strip of the Storage Box 5. Shelf of the Storage Box 13. Self-Tapping Screw 6. Roller Blind of the Storage Box 14. Plastic Nut 7. Upper Guide Rail of the Storage Box 15. Reed Nut 8. Lower Guide Rail of the Storage Box 16. Plastic Buckle 9. Magnet of the Storage Box 17. Reed Nut

Figure p598

2. Covered Assembly of the Upper Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Cup Holder Trim Panel on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel 6. Plastic Buckle 4. Cup Holder Mat

Figure p599

2. Upper Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Upper Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle

Figure p600

2. Lower Shroud of the Steering Column 5. Plastic Nut 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Lower Shroud of the Steering Column 6. Reed Nut 4. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p601

2. Dead Pedal 5. Plastic Nut 3. Felt of the Dead Pedal 6. Self-Tapping Screw 4. Sponge of the Dead Pedal 7. Reed Nut

Figure p602

2. Front Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Front Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 6. Reed Nut 4. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p603

2. Front Upper Right Trim panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Front Upper Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 6. Reed Nut 4. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p604

2. Front Lower Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Front Lower Right Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle

Figure p605

2. Upper Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Upper Left Trim Panel of the Instrument Panel 5. Plastic Buckle

Figure p606

2. Lower Trim Panel of the Right Side Switch Panel 4. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Lower Trim Panel of the Right Side Switch Panel 5. Plastic Buckle

Figure p607

2. Left Side Switch Panel 4. Plastic Buckle 3. Bright Trim Strip of the Left Side Switch Panel 5. Metal Buckle

Figure p608

2. Right Side Switch Panel 4. Plastic Buckle 3. Bright Trim Strip of The Right Side Switch Panel 5. Metal Buckle

Figure p609

2. Maintenance Cover Plate on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel 5. Self-Tapping Screw 3. OBD Cover Plate 6. Plastic Buckle 4. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Maintenance Cover Plate on the Left Side of the Instrument Panel

Figure p610

2. Maintenance Cover Plate on The Right Side of the Instrument Panel 5. Self-Tapping Screw 3. Fragrance Cover Plate 6. Plastic Buckle 4. Sound-Absorbing Cotton of the Maintenance Cover Plate on the Right Side of the Instrument Panel 7. Metal Buckle

Figure p611

1. Bracket-Under the Combination Switch 2. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw

Figure p612

1. Cover-Combination Switch-Lor 3. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 2. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p613

2. Upper Protective Cover of the Combination Switch 4. Assembly of the Pressing Strip Under the Protective Cover Flap 3. Pressing Strip Under the Protective Cover Flap 5. Plastic Buckle

Figure p614

1. Storage Box Bracket Assy 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p615

6.11.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.11.3.1 Replacement of Tubular Beam Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the wiper arm assy. 5 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 6 Remove the dab decorative cove. 7 Remove the steering wheel assy. 8 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 9 Remove the ip brim assy. 10 Remove the IVI screen. 11 Remove the CAR screen. 12 Remove the IPC screen. 13 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 14 Remove the camera monitor screen. 15 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 16 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 17 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 18 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 19 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 20 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 21 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy-lowerr lh. 22 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 23 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 24 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 25 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 26 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 27 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 28 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 29 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard.

30 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 31 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 32 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 33 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 34 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 35 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 36 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 37 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 38 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 39 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 40 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 41 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 42 Remove the AR-HUD. 43 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 44 Remove the smart appliance box. 45 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 46 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 47 Remove the Tbox-gw. 48 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 49 Remove the EBS controller assy. 50 Remove the EBS bracket. 51 Remove the body domain control unit. 52 Remove the controller bracket assy. 53 Remove the cross car beam pole. 54 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the combination antenna to the tubular beam assembly, and move the combination antenna to a safe and suitable location.

Figure p617

55 Disengage 24 fixing clips of the tubular beam assembly.

Figure p618
Figure p618
Figure p618

56 Remove 7 fixing bolts of the tubular beam assembly.

Figure p619
Figure p619
Figure p619

57 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the tubular beam assembly, and remove the tubular beam assembly.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the tubular beam assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
Figure p620
Figure p620
Figure p620
Figure p621

Installation Procedures 1 Move the tubular beam assembly to the mounting position, and install the 2 fixing bolts of the tubular beam assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
caution
Due to the heavy weight of the tubular beam assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
Figure p621
Figure p622
Figure p622
Figure p622

2 Install 7 fixing bolts of the tubular beam assembly.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
Figure p623
Figure p623
Figure p623

3 Install 24 fixing clips of the tubular beam assembly.

Figure p625
Figure p624
Figure p624
Figure p624

4 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the combination antenna to the tubular beam assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

5 Install the cross car beam pole. 6 Install the controller bracket assy. 7 Install the body domain control unit. 8 Install the EBS bracket. 9 Install the EBS controller assy. 10 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 11 Install the Tbox-gw. 12 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 13 Install the cockpit domain controller. 14 Install the smart appliance box. 15 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 16 Install the AR-HUD. 17 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 18 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 19 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 20 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 21 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 22 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 23 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 24 Install the storage box assy-rh. 25 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 26 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 27 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 28 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 29 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard.

30 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 31 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 32 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 33 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 34 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 35 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 36 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 37 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 38 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 39 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 40 Install the base-rh display brkt. 41 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 42 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 43 Install the base-lh display brkt. 44 Install the camera monitor screen. 45 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 46 Install the IPC screen. 47 Install the CAR screen. 48 Install the IVI screen. 49 Install the ip brim assy. 50 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 51 Install the steering wheel assy. 52 Install the dab decorative cove. 53 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 54 Install the wiper arm assy. 55 Connect the battery negative cable. 56 Close the front flip cover plate. 57 Close the door.

6.11.3.2 Replacement of Tubular Beam Strut

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 3 Remove the right foot blowing duct assembly.

4 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the tubular beam strut, and remove the tubular beam strut. Installation Procedures

Figure p627
Figure p627
Figure p628
Figure p628

1 Move the tubular beam strut to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the tubular beam strut.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install the right foot blowing duct assembly. 4 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Close the door.

6.11.3.3 Replacement of Left Defroster Duct Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the wiper arm assy. 5 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 6 Remove the dab decorative cove. 7 Remove the steering wheel assy. 8 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 9 Remove the ip brim assy. 10 Remove the IVI screen. 11 Remove the CAR screen. 12 Remove the IPC screen. 13 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 14 Remove the camera monitor screen. 15 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 16 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 17 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 18 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 19 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 20 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 21 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 22 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 23 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 24 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 25 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 26 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 27 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 28 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 29 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 30 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 31 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 32 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 33 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 34 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 35 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 36 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 37 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 38 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 39 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 40 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt.

41 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 42 Remove the AR-HUD. 43 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 44 Remove the smart appliance box. 45 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 46 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 47 Remove the Tbox-gw. 48 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 49 Remove the EBS controller assy. 50 Remove the EBS bracket. 51 Remove the body domain control unit. 52 Remove the controller bracket assy. 53 Remove the cross car beam pole. 54 Remove the cross car beam assy. 55 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left defroster duct assembly. 56 Remove the left defroster duct assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p630
Figure p631

1 Move the left defroster duct assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left defroster duct assembly. 3 Install the cross car beam assy. 4 Install the cross car beam pole. 5 Install the controller bracket assy. 6 Install the body domain control unit. 7 Install the EBS bracket. 8 Install the EBS controller assy. 9 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 10 Install the Tbox-gw. 11 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 12 Install the cockpit domain controller. 13 Install the smart appliance box. 14 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 15 Install the AR-HUD. 16 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 17 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 18 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 19 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 20 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 21 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 22 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 23 Install the storage box assy-rh. 24 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 25 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 26 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 27 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh.

28 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 29 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 30 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 31 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 32 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 33 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 34 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 35 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 36 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 37 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 38 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 39 Install the base-rh display brkt. 40 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 41 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 42 Install the base-lh display brkt. 43 Install the camera monitor screen. 44 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 45 Install the IPC screen. 46 Install the CAR screen. 47 Install the IVI screen. 48 Install the ip brim assy. 49 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 50 Install the steering wheel assy. 51 Install the dab decorative cove. 52 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 53 Install the wiper arm assy. 54 Connect the battery negative cable. 55 Close the front flip cover plate. 56 Close the door.

6.11.3.4 Replacement of Right Defroster Duct Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the wiper arm assy. 5 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 6 Remove the dab decorative cove. 7 Remove the steering wheel assy. 8 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 9 Remove the ip brim assy. 10 Remove the IVI screen. 11 Remove the CAR screen. 12 Remove the IPC screen. 13 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 14 Remove the camera monitor screen. 15 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 16 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 17 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 18 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 19 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 20 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 21 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 22 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 23 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 24 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 25 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 26 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 27 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 28 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 29 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 30 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 31 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 32 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 33 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 34 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 35 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh.

36 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 37 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 38 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 39 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 40 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 41 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 42 Remove the AR-HUD. 43 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 44 Remove the smart appliance box. 45 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 46 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 47 Remove the Tbox-gw. 48 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 49 Remove the EBS controller assy. 50 Remove the EBS bracket. 51 Remove the body domain control unit. 52 Remove the controller bracket assy. 53 Remove the cross car beam pole. 54 Remove the cross car beam assy. 55 Remove 2 fixing screws of the right defroster duct assembly. 56 Remove the right defroster duct assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p634
Figure p635

1 Move the right defroster duct assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right defroster duct assembly. 3 Install the cross car beam assy. 4 Install the cross car beam pole. 5 Install the controller bracket assy. 6 Install the body domain control unit. 7 Install the EBS bracket. 8 Install the EBS controller assy. 9 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 10 Install the Tbox-gw. 11 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 12 Install the cockpit domain controller. 13 Install the smart appliance box. 14 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 15 Install the AR-HUD. 16 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 17 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 18 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 19 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 20 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 21 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 22 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 23 Install the storage box assy-rh. 24 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 25 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 26 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 27 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh.

28 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 29 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 30 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 31 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 32 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 33 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 34 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 35 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 36 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 37 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 38 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 39 Install the base-rh display brkt. 40 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 41 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 42 Install the base-lh display brkt. 43 Install the camera monitor screen. 44 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 45 Install the IPC screen. 46 Install the CAR screen. 47 Install the IVI screen. 48 Install the ip brim assy. 49 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 50 Install the steering wheel assy. 51 Install the dab decorative cove. 52 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 53 Install the wiper arm assy. 54 Connect the battery negative cable. 55 Close the front flip cover plate. 56 Close the door.

6.11.3.5 Replacement of IP Lower Body Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the dab decorative cove. 5 Remove the steering wheel assy. 6 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 7 Remove the ip brim assy. 8 Remove the ivi screen. 9 Remove the car screen. 10 Remove the ipc screen. 11 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 12 Remove the camera monitor screen. 13 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 14 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 15 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 16 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 17 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 18 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 19 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 20 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 21 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 22 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 23 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 24 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 25 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 26 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 27 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 28 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 29 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 30 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 31 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 32 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 33 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 34 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 35 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt.

36 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 37 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 38 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 49 Remove 15 fixing bolts of the IP lower body assembly, and remove the IP lower body assembly.

Figure p638
Figure p638

Installation Procedures

Figure p639
Figure p639
Figure p640
Figure p640
Figure p640

1 Move the IP lower body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 15 fixing bolts of the IP lower body assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 4 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 5 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 6 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 7 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 8 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 9 Install the storage box assy-rh. 10 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 11 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 12 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 13 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 14 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 15 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 16 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 17 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 18 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 19 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 20 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 21 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 22 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 23 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 24 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 25 Install the base-rh display brkt.

26 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 27 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 28 Install the base-lh display brkt. 29 Install the camera monitor screen. 30 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 31 Install the ipc screen. 32 Install the car screen. 33 Install the ivi screen. 34 Install the ip brim assy. 35 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 36 Install the steering wheel assy. 37 Install the dab decorative cove. 38 Connect the battery negative cable. 39 Close the front flip cover plate. 40 Close the door.

6.11.3.6 Replacement of IP Upper Body Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the ip brim assy. 5 Remove the ivi screen. 6 Remove the car screen. 7 Remove the ipc screen. 8 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 9 Remove the camera monitor screen. 10 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 11 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 12 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 13 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 14 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 15 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 16 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 17 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh.

18 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 19 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 20 Disengage 2 fixing clips of the IP upper body assembly.

Figure p643
Figure p643

21 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the IP upper body assembly. 22 Remove 11 fixing screws of the IP upper body assembly.

Figure p644
Figure p644
Figure p644
Figure p645
Figure p645
Figure p645

23 Detach 3 protection covers of the IP upper body assembly.

Figure p646
Figure p646
Figure p646
Figure p647

24 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the IP upper body assembly. 25 Remove the IP upper body assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP upper body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the IP upper body assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p647
Figure p648
Figure p648
Figure p648

3 Install 3 protection covers of the IP upper body assembly. 4 Install 11 fixing screws of the IP upper body assembly.

Figure p650
Figure p650
Figure p650
Figure p649
Figure p649
Figure p649

5 Install 4 fixing bolts of the IP upper body assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p651
Figure p651

6 Install 2 fixing clips of the IP upper body assembly. 7 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 8 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 9 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 10 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 11 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 12 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 13 Install the base-rh display brkt. 14 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 15 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 16 Install the base-lh display brkt. 17 Install the camera monitor screen.

18 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 19 Install the ipc screen. 20 Install the car screen. 21 Install the ivi screen. 22 Install the ip brim assy. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.

Figure p652

6.11.3.7 Replacement of IP Brim Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP brim assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Install the IP brim assembly. 2 Close the door.

6.11.3.8 Replacement of Left Vent Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the upr cover assy-combination switch. 5 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 6 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy-lowerr lh. 7 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 8 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 9 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 10 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy-upper lh.

Figure p654

11 Remove 5 fixing screws of the left vent trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left vent trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left vent trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the left vent trim panel assembly. 3 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy-upper lh. 4 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 5 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 6 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 7 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy-lowerr lh. 8 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 9 Install the upr cover assy-combination switch. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

Figure p654
Figure p655

6.11.3.9 Replacement of Right Vent Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the upr cover assy-combination switch. 5 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 6 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 7 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 8 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 9 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 10 Remove 5 fixing screws of the right vent trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the right vent trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p656

1 Move the right vent trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the right vent trim panel assembly. 3 Install the storage box assy-rh. 4 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 5 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 6 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 7 Install the Assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 8 Install the upr cover assy-combination switch. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

6.11.3.10 Replacement of Left Foot Blowing Duct Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly.

3 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left foot blowing duct assembly, and remove the left foot blowing duct assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p657
Figure p657
Figure p658
Figure p658

1 Move the left foot blowing duct assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left foot blowing duct assembly. 3 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 4 Close the door.

6.11.3.11 Replacement of Right Foot Blowing Duct Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly.

3 Remove 3 fixing screws of the right foot blowing duct assembly, and remove the right foot blowing duct assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p659
Figure p659
Figure p660
Figure p660

1 Move the right foot blowing duct assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the right foot blowing duct assembly. 3 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 4 Close the door.

6.11.3.12 Replacement of IP Left Lower Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 5 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 6 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 7 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 8 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 9 Use a small flat-head screwdriver to pry open the cover plate from the three notches at the top.Separate the upper clips.Insert a long - handled clip prying plate into the area where the cover has been pried open. Pry open the clips beneath the cover, and then remove the cover.

caution
The width of the flat - bladed screwdriver should be smaller than that of the notches on the cover. Otherwise, it may scratch the cover, and in severe cases, even damage it.
Before using the flat - bladed screwdriver, wrap the flat tip with cloth tape or a strip of cloth to prevent scratching the cover.

10 Remove 3 fixing screws of the IP left lower trim panel assembly.

Figure p661
Figure p661
Figure p662

11 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP left lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the IP left lower trim panel assembly.

Torque: (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb
Figure p662
Figure p663
Figure p663

3 Install 3 fixing screws of the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 4 Install the cover plate. 5 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 6 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 7 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 8 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 9 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

6.11.3.13 Replacement of Right Storage Box Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 6 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 7 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Remove 4 fixing screws of the right storage box assembly. 9 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the right storage box assembly. 10 Remove the right storage box assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p664
Figure p664
Figure p665
Figure p665

1 Move the right storage box assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the right storage box assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 4 fixing screws of the right storage box assembly. 4 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the right switch panel assembly. 6 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 7 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

6.11.3.14 Replacement of IP Left Upper Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Detach the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p666
Figure p666
Figure p667
Figure p667

1 Move the IP left upper trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the IP left upper trim panel assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

6.11.3.15 Replacement of IP Right Upper Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Detach the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p668
Figure p668
Figure p669
Figure p669

1 Move the IP right upper trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 harness connectors of the IP right upper trim panel assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

6.11.3.16 Replacement of Steering Column Lower Shield Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
Figure p676

4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 8 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 13 Remove 7 fixing screws of the steering column lower shield assembly. 14 Remove the steering column lower shield assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the steering column lower shield assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 7 fixing screws of the steering column lower shield assembly. 3 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 4 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly.

Figure p670

5 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the right switch panel assembly. 7 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 8 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.

Figure p671

6.11.3.17 Replacement of Footrest Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 8 Remove 3 fixing screws of the footrest assembly. 9 Remove the footrest assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p672

1 Move the footrest assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the footrest assembly. 3 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 4 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left switch panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

6.11.3.18 Replacement of IP Left Front Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly.

7 Remove 2 fixing screws of the IP left front trim panel assembly. 8 Detach the IP left front trim panel assembly. 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the IP left front trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p673
Figure p673
Figure p674
Figure p674

1 Move the IP left front trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the interior temperature sensor assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 2 fixing screws of the IP left front trim panel assembly. 4 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left switch panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

6.11.3.19 Replacement of IP Right Front Upper Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 7 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Remove 5 fixing screws of the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP right front upper trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 3 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 4 Install the right switch panel assembly.

Figure p675

5 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

Figure p676

6.11.3.20 Replacement of IP Right Front Lower Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 3 Remove 1 fixing screw of the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 4 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP right front lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the IP right front lower trim panel assembly.

3 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 4 Close the door.

6.11.3.21 Replacement of Left Switch Panel Lower Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left switch panel assembly.

6 Remove 5 fixing screws of the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p678
Figure p678
Figure p679
Figure p679

1 Move the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 3 Install the left switch panel assembly. 4 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

6.11.3.22 Replacement of Right Switch Panel Lower Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 6 Remove 5 fixing screws of the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p680
Figure p680
Figure p681
Figure p681

1 Move the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 3 Install the right switch panel assembly. 4 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

6.11.3.23 Replacement of Left Switch Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Detach the left switch panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the left switch panel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p682
Figure p682
Figure p683
Figure p683

1 Move the left switch panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the left switch panel assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the left switch panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

6.11.3.24 Replacement of Right Switch Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Detach the right switch panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right switch panel assembly. 6 Remove the right switch panel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p684
Figure p684
Figure p685
Figure p685

1 Move the right switch panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the right switch panel assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the right switch panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

6.11.3.25 Replacement of IP Left Access Cover Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Remove the OBD cover plate. 3 Detach the OBD harness interface.

Figure p686
Figure p686
Figure p687

4 Remove 3 fixing screws of the IP left access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP left access cover plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the IP left access cover plate assembly.

Figure p687
Figure p688
Figure p688

3 Connect the OBD harness interface. 4 Install the OBD cover plate. 5 Close the door.

6.11.3.26 Replacement of IP Right Access Cover Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures

Figure p689

1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing screws of the IP right access cover plate assembly. 3 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the IP right access cover plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the IP right access cover plate assembly. 3 Close the door.

Figure p689

6.11.3.27 Replacement of Combination Switch Lower Shield Mounting Bracket

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 3 Remove the steering wheel assy. 4 Remove the combination switch lower shield.

5 Disengage 4 clip of the IP harness. 6 Remove 4 fixing screws of the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. 7 Remove the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. Installation Procedures

Figure p690
Figure p690
Figure p695
Figure p691
Figure p691
Figure p694
Figure p694
Figure p694

1 Move the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. 3 Install 4 clip of the IP harness. 4 Install the combination switch lower shield. 5 Install the steering wheel assy. 6 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 7 Close the door.

6.11.3.28 Replacement of Combination Switch Lower Shield

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly.

3 Remove 5 fixing screws of the combination switch lower shield, and remove the combination switch lower shield.

Figure p692
Figure p692
Figure p692
Figure p693

Installation Procedures 1 Move the combination switch lower shield to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing screws of the combination switch lower shield.

Figure p693

3 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 4 Close the door.

Figure p695

6.11.3.29 Replacement of Combination Switch Upper Shield Assembly

Figure p729
Figure p729
Figure p728
Figure p727
Figure p726
Figure p726
Figure p726
Figure p725
Figure p725
Figure p725
Figure p721
Figure p720
Figure p719
Figure p717
Figure p717
Figure p715
Figure p713
Figure p713
Figure p712
Figure p712
Figure p709
Figure p709
Figure p707
Figure p705
Figure p704
Figure p703
Figure p702
Figure p701
Figure p699

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 2 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the left side panel assembly, the side panel clothes drying rod assembly, and the side panel sheet metal is the fixing bolt connecting the left side panel lower decorative panel body assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right rear side panel assembly and the side panel sheet metalM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the sunshade cover assembly and the sunshade cover installation bracket assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the thermos holder bracket assembly and the white body assembly assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the thermos holder and the thermos holder bracket assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.12 Side Wall Interior Decoration Device

6.12.1 Specifications

6.12.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p697

6.12.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.12.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. A-Pillar Guard Assy-Lh 19. BCover Assy-Front Camera Decorative 2. A-Pillar Guard Assy-Rh 20. Brkt Assy-Sun Blind Cover-Lh 3. Front Side Enclosure Assy-Lh 21. Brkt Assy-Sun Blind Cover-Rh 4. Front Side Enclosure Assy-Rh 22. Handle Cover-Frt 5. Plastic Nut Seat 23. Handle Cover-Rr Upr 6. Self-Tapping Screw 24. Handle Cover-Rr Lwr 7. B-Pillar Upper Guard Plate Assy-Lh 25. Air Duct-Rear Air Conditioner Upper 8. B-Pillar Upper Guard Plate Assy-Rh 26. Air Duct-Rear Air Conditioner Lower 9. Enclosure Assy-lh Rr 27. Wind Duct-Lh 10. Rear Enclosure Plate Assy-Rh 28. Wind Duct-Rh 11. Tree Clasp 29. Side Hanging Rod Assy 13. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 30. The Bracket of Center Cover 14. B-Pillar Lower Shield Assy-Rh 31. Rear Car Pull Strap Body 15. Center Side Enclosure Assy-Lh 32. Hexagon Flange Bolt 16. Safety Hammer 33. Center Side Enclosure Assy-mid Lh

17. Self-Tapping Screw 34. Center Side Enclosure Assy-lwr Lh 18. Sun Blind Cover AAssy

Figure p699

6.12.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.12.3.1 Replacement of Left A-pillar Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 2 Connect the battery negative cable.

3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.

Figure p700

6.12.3.2 Replacement of Right A-pillar Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the right A-pillar protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect the battery negative cable. 3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.

6.12.3.3 Replacement of Left Front Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly.

6 Remove 1 fixing screw of the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left front side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 4 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

Figure p702

6.12.3.4 Replacement of Right Front Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove 1 fixing screw of the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the right front side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right front side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 4 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable.

Figure p703

6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

Figure p704

6.12.3.5 Replacement of Left B-pillar Upper Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 2 Close the door.

6.12.3.6 Replacement of Right B-pillar Upper Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the electric sliding door switch. 5 Remove the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 2 Install the electric sliding door switch. 3 Connect the battery negative cable.

Figure p705

4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

6.12.3.7 Replacement of Left Rear Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 15 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 16 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly.

17 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 18 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left rear side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 4 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 5 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly.

Figure p707

12 Install the front USB interface. 13 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 14 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 15 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.

Figure p708
Figure p708

6.12.3.8 Replacement of Side Wall Clothes Rail Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cover plate. 3 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the side wall clothes rail assembly. 4 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the side wall clothes rail assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the side wall clothes rail assembly.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install the cover plate. 4 Close the door.

6.12.3.9 Replacement of Right Rear Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly.

6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove 4 clips of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove 1 fixing screw of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly.

Figure p710
Figure p710

11 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Remove 2 fixing screw of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 13 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p711
Figure p711

1 Move the right rear side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

4 Install 1 fixing screws of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 5 Install 4 clips of the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 6 Install the SSM. 7 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 9 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 10 Install the right sill molding assembly. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

6.12.3.10 Replacement of Right B-pillar Lower Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the electric sliding door switch. 5 Remove the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 7 Remove the front boarding armrest assembly. 8 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the right storage box assembly. 10 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 11 Remove the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Remove 2 fixing screws of the right B-pillar lower protective plate assembly. 13 Remove the right B-pillar lower protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p714

1 Move the right B-pillar lower protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right B-pillar lower protective plate assembly. 3 Install the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 6 Install the right storage box assembly. 7 Install the front boarding armrest assembly. 8 Install the right sill molding assembly. 9 Install the right B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 10 Install the electric sliding door switch. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

6.12.3.11 Replacement of Left Middle Side Wall Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly.

9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 15 Remove 7 fixing screws of the left middle side wall protective plate assembly, and remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p716
Figure p716

1 Move the left middle side wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 7 fixing screws of the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 4 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left switch panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front USB interface. 11 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable.

15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

Figure p718

6.12.3.12 Replacement of Left Middle Side Wall Middle Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove 8 fixing screws of the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly, and remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing screws of the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly.

Figure p719

3 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 4 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the left switch panel assembly. 7 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 8 Install the front USB interface. 9 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

6.12.3.13 Replacement of Left Middle Side Wall Lower Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly.

10 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 3 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 4 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left switch panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Install the front USB interface. 8 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

Figure p721

6.12.3.14 Replacement of Sunshade Cover Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the front reading lamp. 10 Remove the DMS camera bracket. 11 Remove the DMS camera. 12 Remove the sunshade assembly. 13 Remove 2 fixing screws of the sunshade cover plate assembly.

Figure p722

14 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the sunshade cover plate assembly.

Figure p723
Figure p723
Figure p723

15 Disconnect 4 harness connectors of the sunshade cover plate assembly, and remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p724
Figure p724

1 Move the sunshade cover plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 4 harness connectors of the sunshade cover plate assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 2 fixing bolts of the sunshade cover plate assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

4 Install 2 fixing screws of the sunshade assembly.

5 Install the sunshade assembly. 6 Install the DMS camera. 7 Install the DMS camera bracket. 8 Install the front reading lamp. 9 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 11 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 12 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

6.12.3.15 Replacement of Left Defroster Duct

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left defroster duct. 8 Remove the left defroster duct. Installation Procedures

1 Move the left defroster duct to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left defroster duct. 3 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

6.12.3.16 Replacement of Right Defroster Duct

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right front side wall protective plate assembly.

7 Remove 2 fixing screws of the right defroster duct. 8 Remove the right defroster duct. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right defroster duct to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right defroster duct. 3 Install the right front side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Figure p730

6.13 Threshold Molding Device

6.13.1 Decomposition Diagram

6.13.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

1.1. Main Body of the Toolbox Threshold Pressing Strip 5.1. Main Body of the Right Threshold Pressing Strip 1.2. Plastic Buckle 5.2. Plastic Buckle 2. Toolbox Threshold Plug Cover 6. Cover-Sill Guard Rh 3. Self-Tapping Screw 7. Self-Tapping Screw Assy 4. Plastic Nut Seat 8. Plastic Nut Seat

Figure p731

6.14 Front Wheel Fender Device

6.14.1 Decomposition Diagram

6.14.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Front Wheel Arch Body-Rh Frt 5.2. Baffle- Anti-Splash Rh 2. Brkt-Upper Wheel Cover 5.3. Mounting Brkt-Wheel Arch 3. Front Wheel Arch Body-Lh Frt 5.4. Reinforcement Plate-Anti-Splash 4. Cover-Wheel Arche 6. Right Front Front Wheel Housing Bracket 5.1. Wheel Cover Rear Body-Rh Frt 7.2. Rear Wheel Arch Body-Lh Frt

Figure p732

6.15 Exhaust Port Device

6.15.1 Decomposition Diagram

6.15.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Pressure Relief Valve

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the left side bracket and the frame assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the bracket assembly on the side panel to the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the bracket assembly on the side panel to the frame assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the left side panel lower decorative panel installation frame assembly and the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the circular hanging bracket to the lower decorative panel body assemblyM8(12 - 13) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the left side panel assembly and the lower decorative panel assembly of the left side panelM6(3 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.16 Side Wall Outer Panel Device

6.16.1 Specifications

6.16.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p734

6.16.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.16.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Lower Trim Assy-Rh 15. Nut Plate 2 2. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 17. Side Perimeter Left Bezel 4. Round Positioning Brkt 18. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19.1. Side Enclosure Decorative Strip 3 6. Front Munting Bracket of Left Side Enclosure 19.2. Plastic Buckle 7. Rubber Cover 1 20.1. Cover Plate of Right Side Enclosure Slide Rail 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 20.2. Plastic Buckle 9. Round Mounting Brkt 20.3. Type A Buckle 10. Rubber Cover 2 21.1. End Cover Plate of Right Side Enclosure Slide Rail 11. Hexagon Flange Nut 21.2. Plastic Buckle 12. Hexagon Flange Nut 22. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 13. Upr Brkt Assy3 – Side Pn1 23. Brkt-Square Mounting 14. Nut Plate 1 24. Brkt-Skrit Lower

1. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 13. Brkt Assy 1-Side Perimeter Mounted 2. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 14. Nut Plate 1 3.1. Lower Plaque Body Assy-Lh Surround 15. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3.2. Left Front Wheel Eyebrow 16. Nut Plate 2 3.3. Self-Tapping Screw 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3.4. Type B Leaf Spring Nut 18. Side Mgt Brkt-Lh 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19. Lower Trim Mounting Frame Assy_Lh 5. Brkt-Skrit Lower 20. Brkt Assy 2-Side Perimeter Mounted 6. Hexagon Flange Nut 21. Rubber Cover 2 7. Brkt-Square Mounting 22. Round Mounting Brkt 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 23.1. Main Body of Side Enclosure Decorative Strip 1 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 23.2. Plastic Buckle 10. Rubber Cover 1 24.1. Main Body of Side Enclosure Decorative Strip 2 11. Side Perimeter Right Bezel 24.2. Plastic Buckle 12. Hexagon Flange Nut

Figure p735
Figure p736

6.17 Vehicle Body Sealing Plug Device

6.17.1 Decomposition Diagram

6.17.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

Figure p755
Figure p755
Figure p753
Figure p752
Figure p752
Figure p749
Figure p749
Figure p749
Figure p748
Figure p746
Figure p746
Figure p745
Figure p745
Figure p742
Figure p742
Figure p741
Figure p741

1. Body Waterproof Foil-Lh(1) 8. Plug Cover 2. Body Waterproof Foil-Rh(1) 9. Plug Cover 3. Body Waterproof Foil-Rh(2) 10. Plug Cover 4. Plug Cover 11. Plug Cover 5. Plug Cover 12. Plug Cover 6. Plug Cover 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Plug Cover

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the left intake grille assembly and the bumper lower body assemblyM6(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right intake grille assembly and the bumper lower body assemblyM6(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the air guide plate assembly and the front moduleM6(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.18 Active Grille Shutter Device

6.18.1 Specifications

6.18.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p738

6.18.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.18.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Wind Deflector Assy 3.2. Active Grille Ecm Harness 2. Air Intake Grille Assy Rh 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3.1. Main Body of the Left Air Inlet Grille

Figure p739

6.18.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.18.3.1 Replacement of Left Intake Grille Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the left intake grille assembly.

13 Disengage 4 harness fixing clips. 14 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the left intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the left intake grille assembly.

Figure p740
Figure p740
Figure p740

Installation Procedures 1 Move the left intake grille assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the left intake grille assembly.

Torque: (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 4 harness fixing clips.

4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the left intake grille assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

Figure p743

6.18.3.2 Replacement of Left Intake Grille Body Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left intake grille body assembly.

13 Disengage 5 harness fixing clips. 14 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the left intake grille body assembly. 15 Remove the left intake grille body assembly.

Figure p744
Figure p744
Figure p744

Installation Procedures 1 Move the left intake grille body assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the left intake grille body assembly.

Torque: (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 5 harness fixing clips.

4 Connect 1 harness connector of the left intake grille body assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

Figure p747

6.18.3.3 Replacement of GASM Harness Module

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the GASM harness module.

13 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the GASM harness module. 14 Remove the GASM harness module. Installation Procedures

Figure p748

1 Move the GASM harness module to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing clip of the GASM harness module. 3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the GASM harness module.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.

6.18.3.4 Replacement of Right Intake Grille Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly.

12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right intake grille assembly. 13 Disengage 2 harness fixing clips of the right intake grille assembly. 14 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the right intake grille assembly. 15 Remove the right intake grille assembly.

Figure p751
Figure p751
Figure p751

Installation Procedures 1 Move the right intake grille assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the right intake grille assembly.

Torque:(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 2 harness fixing clips of the right intake grille assembly.

4 Connect 1 harness connector of the right intake grille assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the front bumper assembly. 6 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 8 Install the MMWR adapter bracket. 9 Install the forward MMW radar. 10 Install the front MMW radar shield. 11 Install the through-type lamp. 12 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

6.18.3.5 Replacement of Air Deflector Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket.

9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 13 Remove the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 14 Remove the sealing cross beam. 15 Remove the MMW radar bracket. 16 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 17 Remove 2 harness clips of the air deflector assembly. 18 Remove 10 fixing bolts of the air deflector assembly. 19 Remove the air deflector assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p754
Figure p754

1 Move the air deflector assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts of the air deflector assembly.

Torque:(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 2 harness clips of the air deflector assembly. 4 Install the front lower protection assembly. 5 Install the MMW radar bracket. 6 Install the sealing cross beam. 7 Install the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 8 Install the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 9 Install the front bumper assembly. 10 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 12 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 13 Install the forward MMW radar. 14 Install the front MMW radar shield. 15 Install the through-type lamp. 16 Install the engine compartment trim panel body.

17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the side cover plate assembly of the back integrated bracket and the upper cover plate of the back integrated bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.19 Integrated Bracket Decoration Device

6.19.1 Specifications

6.19.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p758

6.19.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.19.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Upper Cover Plate of the Rear Integrated Bracket 4. Center Cover Assy-Back Integrated Bracket 2. Filler Cap-Back Integrated Frame 5. bracket of Center Cover 3. Side Cover Assy-Back Integrated Bracket 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p759

6.20 Door Outer Panel Device

6.20.1 Decomposition Diagram

6.20.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Window Cover Assy-Lh 2. Right Window Cover Assy

6.20.2 Dismantling and Installation

6.20.2.1 Replacement of Left Window Cover Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Remove the front USB interface. 9 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 11 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 16 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 18 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly.

19 Remove the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 20 Remove the left window cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left window cover plate assembly. 2 Install the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 3 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left switch panel assembly.

Figure p761

12 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 16 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Lift all windows. 20 Close the door.

Figure p762

6.20.2.2 Replacement of Right Window Cover Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Remove the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 4 Remove the right window cover plate assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p770
Figure p770
Figure p770
Figure p769
Figure p769
Figure p766
Figure p763

1 Move the right window cover plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 3 Lift all windows. 4 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the front windshield cover plate to the white body assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.21 Engine Compartment Covering Device

6.21.1 Specifications

6.21.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p765

6.21.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.21.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Engine Hood Hinge Assy-Rh 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Bolt 11. Engine Hood Striker Assy 3. Large Washer 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 13. Bumper Engine Hood 5. Engine Hood Hinge Assy-Lh 14. Cable Hood Opening Assy 6. Handle Assy-Frt Cover Opening 15. The Air Pole Is Installed With the Ball End 7. Hex Socket Set Screw 16. Front cover assy 8. Large Washer 17. Air strut engine hood 9. Engine Hood Lock Assy 18. Plug cover

Figure p766

6.21.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.21.3.1 Replacement of Engine Compartment Trim Panel Body

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove 6 fixing screws of the engine compartment trim panel body. 4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. Installation Procedures 1 Move the engine compartment trim panel body to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws of the engine compartment trim panel body. 3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.

6.21.3.2 Replacement of Front Windshield Cover Plate

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 4 Remove the two-way joint. 5 Disengage the water fluid reservoir water pipe.

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged coolant.

6 Disengage 9 clips of the front windshield cover plate.

Figure p767
Figure p767

7 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the front windshield cover plate, and remove the front windshield cover plate.

Figure p768
Figure p768
Figure p768

Installation Procedures 1 Move the front windshield cover plate to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the front windshield cover plate.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 9 clips of the front windshield cover plate. 4 Install the water fluid reservoir water pipe.

Figure p775
Figure p775

5 Install the two-way joint. 6 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the rear boarding armrest to the integrated frameM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

6.22 Rear Boarding Handrail Device

6.22.1 Specifications

6.22.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p773

6.22.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.22.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Rear Pedal Armrest 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p774
Figure p774

6.22.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.22.3.1 Replacement of Rear Boarding Handrail

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the rear boarding handrail. 3 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the rear boarding handrail. 4 Remove the rear boarding handrail. Installation Procedures

1 Move the rear boarding handrail to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the rear boarding handrail.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install 2 fixing bolts of the rear boarding handrail.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

4 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the rear seat belt and the right drawer assemblyM10(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the base of the rear storage box to the rear panel sheet metalM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.23 Rear Interior Trim Device

6.23.1 Specifications

6.23.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p777

6.23.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.23.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Rear Enclosure Assy 4. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 1.1. Main Body of the Rear Enclosure Panel 5. Rear Compartment Holder 1.2. Cover Plate of the Rear Enclosure Storage Box 6. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Tree Clasp 7. Rear Compartment Cover 3. Coat Hook

6.23.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.23.3.1 Replacement of Rear Wall Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 13 Remove the front USB interface. 14 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 15 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 16 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 18 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 19 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 20 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 21 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 22 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 23 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 24 Remove the rear wall storage box protective plate. 25 Remove the rear wall storage box base. 26 Remove the coat hook. 27 Remove the seat rear storage box.

28 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly. 29 Remove 19 clips of the rear wall protective plate assembly, and remove the rear wall protective plate assembly.

Figure p779
Figure p779
Figure p779
Figure p780
Figure p780
Figure p780
Figure p781
Figure p781

Installation Procedures 1 Move the rear wall protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 19 clips of the rear wall protective plate assembly.

Figure p783
Figure p782
Figure p782
Figure p782

3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly.

Torque: (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs

4 Install the seat rear storage box. 5 Install the coat hook. 6 Install the rear wall storage box base. 7 Install the rear wall storage box protective plate. 8 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 9 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 10 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 11 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 15 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left switch panel assembly. 17 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 18 Install the front USB interface. 19 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 20 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 21 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 22 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 23 Install the SSM. 24 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 25 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 26 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 27 Install the right sill molding assembly. 28 Connect the battery negative cable.

29 Close the front flip cover plate. 30 Close the door.

Figure p784

6.23.3.2 Replacement of Rear Wall Storage Box Base

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the rear wall storage box protective plate. 3 Remove 6 fixing screws of the rear wall storage box base. 4 Remove the rear wall storage box base. Installation Procedures 1 Move the rear wall storage box base to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws of the rear wall storage box base. 3 Install the rear wall storage box protective plate. 4 Close the door.

6.23.3.3 Replacement of Rear Wall Storage Box Outer Panel

Removal Procedures

Figure p785

1 Open the door. 2 Remove the rear wall storage box outer panel. Installation Procedures 1 Install the rear wall storage box outer panel. 2 Close the door.

Figure p785
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the front windshield cover plate and the white body assembly of the installation bracket for the air guide coverM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the lower body of the left side guide vane and the integrated frameM6(14.75 - 19) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the front windshield cover plate and the white body assembly of the installation bracket for the air guide coverM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the top guide cover body and the left guide cover upper bodyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the top flow guide cover body and the upper body of the right flow guideM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the upper body of the left flow guide cover to the installation bracket of the flow guide coverM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the lower body of the right deflector and the integrated frameM6(14.75 - 19) ft lbs

6.24 Deflector Shield Device

6.24.1 Specifications

6.24.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p787

6.24.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.24.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Mid Brkt-Cover-Diversion-Upr 7. Lor Cover-Diversion-Rh 2. Cover-Diversion-Upr 8. Charging Port Cover Assy-Rh/Cover Assy - Rh 3. Mounting Brkt-Guide Hood 9. Charging Port Cover Assy 4. Mounting Brkt-Upr Guide Hood 10. Lor Cover-Diversion-Lh 5. Lower Metal Brkt 1-Shroud 11. Upr Cover-Diversion-Lh 6. Lower Metal Brkt 2-Shroud

Figure p788
Figure p788

6.24.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.24.3.1 Replacement of Roof Deflector Body

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 5 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the roof deflector body, and remove the roof deflector body. Installation Procedures

Figure p789
Figure p789

1 Move the roof deflector body to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the roof deflector body.

Torque:(14.75 +/- 19) ft lbs

3 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 4 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

6.24.3.2 Replacement Of Left Deflector Upper Body

Removal Procedures

1 Remove 8 fixing bolts of the left deflector upper body, and remove the left deflector upper body. Installation Procedures

Figure p790
Figure p790
Figure p791
Figure p791

1 Move the left deflector upper body to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing bolts of the left deflector upper body.

Torque:(14.75 - 19) ft lbs

6.24.3.3 Replacement of Right Deflector Upper Body

Removal Procedures

1 Remove 8 fixing bolts of the right deflector upper body, and remove the right deflector upper body. Installation Procedures

Figure p792
Figure p792
Figure p793
Figure p793

1 Move the right deflector upper body to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing bolts of the right deflector upper body.

Torque: (14.75 - 19) ft lbs

6.24.3.4 Replacement of Left Deflector Lower Body

Removal Procedures

1 Remove 10 fixing bolts of the left deflector lower body, and remove the left deflector lower body.

Figure p794
Figure p794
Figure p794
Figure p796
Figure p795
Figure p795

Installation Procedures 1 Move the left deflector lower body to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts of the left deflector lower body.

Torque:(14.75 - 19) ft lbs
Figure p796

6.24.3.5 Replacement of Right Deflector Lower Body

Removal Procedures 1 Remove 10 fixing bolts of the right deflector lower body, and remove the right deflector lower body.

Installation Procedures

Figure p797
Figure p797
Figure p798
Figure p798
Figure p798

1 Move the right deflector lower body to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts of the right deflector lower body.

Torque: (14.75 - 19) ft lbs
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the top cover assembly and the white body assembly assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the laser radar cover bracket and the top cover assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.25 Roof Panel Device

6.25.1 Specifications

6.25.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p800

6.25.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.25.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

Figure p811
Figure p811
Figure p811
Figure p807
Figure p807
Figure p807
Figure p804
Figure p803

1. Top Cover Assy 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p801

6.26 Roof Interior Decoration Device

6.26.1 Decomposition Diagram

6.26.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Ceiling Assy-Mid 3.1. Main Body of the Right Roof Liner 1.1. Main Body of the Central Roof Liner 3.2. Plastic Buckle 1.2. Rubber Strip for Clamping the Edge of the Central Roof Liner 4. Self-Tapping Screw 2. Ceiling Assy-Lh 5. Plastic Nut Seat 2.1. Main Body of the Left Roof Liner 6. Tree Clasp 2.2. Plastic Buckle 7. Speaker Mask-Lh 3. Ceiling Assy-Rh 8. Speaker Mask-Rh

Figure p802

6.26.2 Dismantling and Installation

6.26.2.1 Replacement of Middle Ceiling Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove 8 fixing screws of the middle ceiling assembly, and remove the middle ceiling assembly.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the middle ceiling assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing screws of the middle ceiling assembly.

Figure p803

3 Install the curtain rail assembly. 4 Install the right ceiling lamp. 5 Install the left ceiling lamp. 6 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 7 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 9 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 10 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

6.26.2.2 Replacement of Left Ceiling Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly.

9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Remove the front USB interface. 16 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 17 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 18 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 19 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 20 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 21 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 22 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 23 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 24 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 25 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 26 Remove the left speaker cover. 27 Remove 13 fixing screws of the left ceiling assembly. 28 Remove the left ceiling assembly.

Figure p805

Installation Procedures

Figure p806
Figure p806

1 Move the left ceiling assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 13 fixing screws of the left ceiling assembly.

3 Install the left speaker cover. 4 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 5 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 6 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the left switch panel assembly. 13 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 14 Install the front USB interface. 15 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 16 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 17 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 18 Install the curtain rail assembly. 19 Install the right ceiling lamp. 20 Install the left ceiling lamp. 21 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 22 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 23 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 24 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 25 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 26 Connect the battery negative cable. 27 Close the front flip cover plate. 28 Close the door.

6.26.2.3 Replacement of Right Ceiling Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly.

7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 14 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 15 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 16 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 17 Remove the SSM. 18 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 19 Remove the sleeper reading lamp. 20 Remove the right speaker cover. 21 Remove 13 fixing screws of the right ceiling assembly, and remove the right ceiling assembly.

Figure p809

Installation Procedures

Figure p810
Figure p810

1 Move the right ceiling assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 13 fixing screws of the right ceiling assembly.

3 Install the right speaker cover. 4 Install the sleeper reading lamp. 5 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 6 Install the SSM. 7 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 9 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 10 Install the right sill molding assembly. 11 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 12 Install the curtain rail assembly. 13 Install the right ceiling lamp. 14 Install the left ceiling lamp. 15 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 16 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 17 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 18 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 19 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 20 Connect the battery negative cable. 21 Close the front flip cover plate. 22 Close the door.

6.27 Seat Belt Device

6.27.1 Description and Operation

6.27.1.1 Description and Operation

Wearing seat belts is the main way to protect occupants. The seat belts are used to restrain the occupants' bodies on the seats, preventing the occupants' bodies from rushing out of the seats and causing secondary collisions with internal components such as the steering wheel and IP in the event of a collision, thereby minimizing occupant casualties. Seat belts not only reduce the risk of secondary collisions for occupants, but also prevent them from being thrown away from their seats in dangerous situations such as vehicle rollover. Including but not limited to the following situations: 1. Frontal impact collision. 2. Rear impact collision. 3. Side impact collision. 4. Rollover type collision.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the rear seat belt assembly and the white body assemblyM10(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the rear seat belt buckle assembly and the rear seat assemblyM10(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs

6.27.2 Specifications

6.27.2.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p815

6.27.3 Decomposition DiagramDecomposition Diagram

6.27.3.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Rear Seat Belt Assy 2. Rear Seat Belt Locking Assy

6.27.4 Dismantling and Installation

6.27.4.1 Replacement of Rear Seat Belt Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 13 Remove the front USB interface. 14 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 15 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 16 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 18 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 19 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 20 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 21 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 22 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 23 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 24 Remove the rear wall storage box protective plate. 25 Remove the rear wall storage box base. 26 Remove the coat hook. 27 Remove the seat rear storage box. 28 Remove the seat assy-rear.

29 Remove the rear wall protective plate assembly. 30 Remove 2 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly. 31 Remove the rear seat belt assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p817
Figure p817
Figure p818
Figure p818

1 Move the rear seat belt assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly.

Torque: (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs

3 Install the rear wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the seat assy-rear. 5 Install the seat rear storage box. 6 Install the coat hook. 7 Install the rear wall storage box base. 8 Install the rear wall storage box protective plate. 9 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 11 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 13 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly.

15 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Install the left switch panel assembly. 18 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 19 Install the front USB interface. 20 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 21 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 22 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 23 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 24 Install the SSM. 25 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 26 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 27 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 28 Install the right sill molding assembly. 29 Connect the battery negative cable. 30 Close the front flip cover plate. 31 Close the door.

Figure p819

6.27.4.2 Replacement of Rear Seat Belt Buckle Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt buckle assembly. 3 Remove the rear seat belt buckle assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p820

1 Move the rear seat belt buckle assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt buckle assembly.

Torque:(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs

3 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the door handle assembly and sliding door assembly inside the car doorM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the door trim assembly and the sliding door assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.28 Door Trim Panel Device

6.28.1 Specifications

6.28.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p822

6.28.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.28.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1.1. Main Body of the Door Panel 2. Plug Cover 1.2. Sound-Absorbing Cotton 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 1.3. Plastic Buckle 4.1. Peg 1.4. Self-Tapping Screw 4.2. Inner Handle 1.5. Water Cut Bracket 4.3. Inner Handle Base

Figure p823
Figure p823

6.28.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.28.3.1 Replacement of Door Inside Handle Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the door inside handle assembly. 5 Disengage 2 cables of the door inside handle assembly. 6 Remove the door inside handle assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p824
Figure p824

1 Move the door inside handle assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 cables of the door inside handle assembly. 3 Install 3 fixing bolts of the door inside handle assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

4 Install the door protective plate assembly. 5 Install the cable cover plate. 6 Close the door.

6.28.3.2 Replacement of Door Protective Plate Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate.

Figure p825

3 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the door protective plate assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the door protective plate assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the door protective plate assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install the cable cover plate. 4 Close the door.

Figure p825
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the upper guide rail assembly and the right side inner panel assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt nut connecting the upper guide rail assembly and the right side inner panel assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.29 Sliding Door Guide Rail Device

6.29.1 Specifications

6.29.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p827

6.29.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.29.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Guide Assy-Upr 5. Hex Socket Set Screw 2. Hexagon Flange Nut 6. Pulley Limit Shrapnel Lwr 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Guide Assy-Mid 8. Bumper Guide-Upr

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the right window regulator assembly and the door trim assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the left window regulator assembly and the door trim assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.30 Window Regulator Device

6.30.1 Specifications

6.30.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p829

6.30.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.30.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Window Regulator-Rh 8. Hexagon Flange Nut 1.1. Assembly of the Left Window Regulator Guide Rail 9. Window Regulator Mount Guide Rail Assy-Lh Lower 1.2. Assembly of the Left Window Regulator Motor 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 1.3. Self-Tapping Screw 11. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Window Regulator Mount Guide Rail Assy-Rh Lower 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut 14. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 5. Window Regulator-Rh 15. Window Regulator Mount Guide Rail-Rh 5.1. Assembly of the Right Window Regulator Guide Rail 16. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 5.2. Assembly of the Right Window Regulator Motor 17. Hex Socket Set Screw 5.3. Self-Tapping Screw 18. Window Regulator Mount Guide Rail-Rh 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 20. Hex Socket Set Screw

Figure p830

6.30.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.30.3.1 Replacement of Left Window Regulator Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 15 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left window regulator assembly.

16 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the left window regulator assembly. 17 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the left window regulator assembly. 18 Remove the left window regulator assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p831
Figure p831
Figure p832
Figure p832
Figure p832

1 Move the left window regulator assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the left window regulator assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 3 fixing nuts of the left window regulator assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

4 Connect 1 harness connector of the left window regulator assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 6 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the front USB interface. 13 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 14 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 15 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.

6.30.3.2 Replacement of Right Window Regulator Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II).

8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right window regulator assembly. 9 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the right window regulator assembly. 10 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the right window regulator assembly. 11 Remove the right window regulator assembly.

Figure p834
Figure p834
Figure p834
Figure p835
Figure p835

Installation Procedures 1 Move the right window regulator assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the right window regulator assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 3 fixing nuts of the right window regulator assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p836

4 Connect 1 harness connector of the right window regulator assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p883
Figure p882
Figure p881
Figure p881
Figure p879
Figure p878
Figure p876
Figure p876
Figure p876
Figure p875
Figure p875
Figure p875
Figure p871
Figure p871
Figure p869
Figure p868
Figure p868
Figure p868
Figure p867
Figure p867
Figure p867
Figure p863
Figure p863
Figure p862
Figure p862

5 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 6 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Install the door protective plate assembly. 8 Install the cable cover plate. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the ground lock assembly and the lower hinge assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the ground lock buckle assembly and the side panel outer assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.31 Sliding Door Accessory Device

6.31.1 Specifications

6.31.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p838

6.31.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.31.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Lock Assy-Rr 11. Mounting Bracket for DCM Module 2. Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw 12. Anti-Pinch Sensor Assr 3. Striker -Rr 13. Ground Lock Assy 4. Hex Socket Set Screw 14. Hexagon Flange Nut 5. Lock Assy-Fr 15. Striker Ground Lock Assy 6. Striker -Fr 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Drag Chain Assy 17. Door End Guide Pin 8. Hex Socket Set Screw 18. Hexagon Socket Head Cap Screw ( m6*16 ) 9. Slide Door Drive Unit Assy 19. Guide Pin at Side Circumference End 10. Hex Socket Set Screw 20. Door Bumper-Rh

6.31.3 System Schematic Diagram

6.31.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
NFC key cannot lock/open the car door Fault definition:NFC key cannot lock/ open the car door, the vehicle's central control switch unlocks the door normally.1. There is electromagnetic interference in the usage environmentMove to an undisturbed environment for use.
2. NFC key bending, damage, demagnetizationInspect the NFC key and replace it if necessary.
3. NFC key anti-theft lossReprogram the NFC key.
4. Bluetooth&NFC module faultRepair Bluetooth&NFC module, replace Bluetooth if necessary&NFC module. Refer to Replacement Of Concealed External Handle Assembly
The door lock bounces while driving Fault definition:During the driving process of the vehicle, the door lock unlocks/locks.1. Mechanical mechanism failure of door lockAdjust the mechanical mechanism of the door lock and replace it if necessary. Refer to Replacement Of Front Lock Assembly.Replacement Of Rear Lock Assembly
2. Poor contact of wiring harness plugInspect the wiring harness and plugs.
3. Poor contact of relevant grounding pointsRepair the grounding point fault.
4. Wiring harness faultInspect the wiring harness of the car door lock.
5. Fault in the contact switch of the central locking motorReplace the door lock motor assembly.
6. Gate control module faultRepair the door control module and replace it if necessary. Refer to Replacement Of DCM

6.31.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

6.31.4.1 Diagnosis Description

Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of the white body device before diagnosing faults in the white body device, and then starting system diagnosis, can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the white body device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of

faulty parts. 6.31.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the body in white system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the body in white system.

• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 6.31.4.3 Fault Symptom Table

6.31.4.4 DTC Confirmation

1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle.

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717High battery voltageRefer to Gate Control Module Power Fault
B111716Low battery voltage
U007E88BCANFD3 BusOffRefer to Communication Fault Of Door Control Module
U014087Lost communication with BDCU
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU
U012287Lost Communication With VDC
U019887Lost Communication With T-BOX
B1B0188door lock motor open circuitRefer to Door Lock Motor Fault
B1B0189door lock motor short to ground or drive fault
B1B0190door lock motor short to battery or drive fault
B1B0A01lock block state signal error or open lock actuator stuck
B1B0288cinch motor short open circuitRefer to Electric Opening And Suction Motor Fault
B1B0289cinch motor short to ground or drive fault
B1B0290cinch motor short to battery or drive fault
B1B0649cinch reset timeout
B1B0749cinch motor unlock reset timeout
B1B0489handle light short to ground or drive failureRefer to Door Handle LED Light Fault
B1B0490handle light short to battery or drive failure
B1B0549cinch timeoutRefer to Cinch Timeout Fault
B1B0B88Anti pinch strip open circuitRefer to Anti Pinch Strip Fault
B1B0088Sliding door motor open circuitRefer to Sliding Door Motor Fault
B1B0089Sliding door motor positive and negative poles short circuit to ground or drive fault
B1B0090Sliding door motor short to battery or drive fault
B1B0849open door timeout
B1B0949close door timeout

3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 6.31.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTCs)

DCM

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717High battery voltageSystem voltage >32V for 5s1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Gate control module
B111716Low battery voltageSystem voltage <8V for 30s

6.31.4.6 Gate Control Module Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

6.31.4.6 Gate Control Module Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007E88BCANFD3 BusOffThe bus controller enters BUSOFF mode1.Wiring harness 2. Gate control module
U014087Lost communication with BDCUmessage 0x18860021 Lost Communication fo more than 10 cycle(1s)
U015687missing CDCUmessage 0x18FEC1EE Lost Communication fo more than 5 cycle(5s)
U012287Lost Communication with VDCmessage 0x18FEF100 Lost Communication fo more than 10 cycle(1s)
U019887VCAN bus-offmessage 0x18FEE6E Lost Communication fo more than 10 cycle(1s)

Step 3:Check if there are any power fault codes for other modules besides the door control module? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the door control module. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

6.31.4.7 Communication Fault Of Door Control Module

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

6.31.4.7 Communication Fault Of Door Control Module — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND3 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1B0188door lock motor open circuitSliding door motor detected open circuit for 10 consecutive times1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (door lock motor) 3. Gate control module
B1B0189door lock motor short to ground or drive faultSliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times
B1B0190door lock motor short to battery or drive faultSliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times
B1B0A01lock block state signal error or open lock actuator stuckthe lock status does not match the action after completing the unlocking process

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 5:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

6.31.4.8 Door Lock Motor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

6.31.4.8 Door Lock Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door hinge (door lock motor) and the door control module.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1B0288cinch motor short open circuitSliding door motor detected open circuit for 10 consecutive times1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (electrically operated electric suction motor) 3. Gate control module
B1B0289cinch motor short to ground or drive faultSliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times
B1B0290cinch motor short to battery or drive faultSliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times
B1B0649cinch reset timeoutcinch reset action timeout
B1B0749cinch motor unlock reset timeoutcinch motor unlock reset action timeout

Step 4:Connect the sliding door hinge (door lock motor) to an external 12V power supply and observe the sliding door hinge (door lock motor) is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (door lock motor). Refer to Replacement Of Front Lock Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

6.31.4.9 Electric Opening And Suction Motor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

6.31.4.9 Electric Opening And Suction Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1B0489handle light short to ground or drive failurehandle light on and voltage fault being detected1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (door handle LED light) 3. Gate control module
B1B0490handle light short to battery or drive failurehandle light off and voltage fault being detected

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door hinge (electrically open electric suction motor) and the door control module. Step 4:Connect the sliding door hinge (electric suction motor) to an external 12V power supply and observe if the sliding door hinge (electric suction motor) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (electrically open and suction motor). Refer to Replacement Of Sliding Door Driver Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

6.31.4.10 Door Handle LED Light Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

6.31.4.10 Door Handle LED Light Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door hinge (door handle LED light) and the door control module.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1B0549cinch timeoutcinch action timeout1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (electrically operated electric suction motor) 3. Rear lock 4. Gate control module

Step 4:Connect the sliding door hinge (door handle LED light) to an external 12V power supply and observe if the sliding door hinge (door handle LED light) is lit up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (door handle LED light). Refer to Replacement Of Hidden External Handle Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

6.31.4.11 Cinch Timeout Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

6.31.4.11 Cinch Timeout Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
6.31.4.11 Cinch Timeout Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1B0B88Anti pinch strip open circuitanti pinch strip over 4.5V1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door hinge (anti pinch strip) 3. Gate control module

Step 3:Check the relevant circuits of the sliding door hinge (electric opening and suction motor). Refer to Electric Opening And Suction Motor Fault Step 4:Check the full lock signal harness between the rear lock and the door control module. Step 5:Replace the rear lock. Refer to Replacement Of Rear Lock Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 7:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

6.31.4.12 Anti Pinch Strip Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

6.31.4.12 Anti Pinch Strip Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door hinge (anti pinch strip) and the door control module.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1B0088Sliding door motor open circuitSliding door motor detected open circuit for 10 consecutive times1.Wiring harness 2. Sliding door motor 3. Gate control module
B1B0089Sliding door motor positive and negative poles short circuit to ground or drive faultSliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times
B1B0090Sliding door motor short to battery or drive faultSliding door motor detected short to ground for 10 consecutive times
B1B0849open door timeoutSliding door open timeout
B1B0949close door timeoutSliding door close timeout
B1B0C01hall power supply errorhall power supply low

Step 4:Check if the resistance of the sliding door hinge (anti pinch strip) is 1K Ω when the anti pinch function is activated? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (anti pinch strip). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

6.31.4.13 Sliding Door Motor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sliding door motor and the door control module.

Step 4:Connect the sliding door motor to an external 12V power supply and observe the sliding door motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door motor. Refer to Replacement Of Sliding Door Driver Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the door control module. Step 6:Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

Figure p860

6.31.5 Dismantling and Installation

6.31.5.1 Replacement of Hidden Outside Handle Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 7 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the hidden outside handle assembly.

8 Disengage 3 clips of the hidden outside handle assembly. 9 Disengage 2 cables of the hidden outside handle assembly. 10 Remove 4 fixing screws of the hidden outside handle assembly. 11 Remove the hidden outside handle assembly.

Figure p861
Figure p861
Figure p861

Installation Procedures 1 Move the hidden outside handle assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the hidden outside handle assembly. 3 Connect 2 cables of the hidden outside handle assembly.

4 Install 3 clips of the hidden outside handle assembly. 5 Connect 2 harness connectors of the hidden outside handle assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 7 Install the door protective plate assembly. 8 Install the cable cover plate. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

6.31.5.2 Replacement of Rear Lock Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 8 Remove the door inside handle assembly. 9 Remove the hidden outside handle assembly. 10 Remove the ground lock assembly. 11 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the rear lock assembly. 12 Disengage 5 clips of the rear lock assembly.

Figure p864
Figure p864

13 Disengage 4 cables of the rear lock assembly. 14 Disengage 6 clips of the rear lock assembly.

Figure p865
Figure p865
Figure p865

15 Remove 3 fixing screws of the rear lock assembly. 16 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the rear lock assembly. 17 Remove the rear lock assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p866
Figure p866

1 Move the rear lock assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the rear lock assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 3 fixing screws of the rear lock assembly. 4 Install 6 clips of the rear lock assembly.

5 Connect 4 cables of the rear lock assembly. 6 Install 5 clips of the rear lock assembly.

7 Connect 1 harness connector of the rear lock assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

8 Install the ground lock assembly. 9 Install the hidden outside handle assembly. 10 Install the door inside handle assembly. 11 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 12 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 13 Install the door protective plate assembly. 14 Install the cable cover plate. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.

6.31.5.3 Replacement of Front Lock Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II).

5 Disengage 1 cable of the front lock assembly. 6 Remove 3 fixing screws of the front lock assembly. 7 Remove the front lock assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p870
Figure p870

1 Move the front lock assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the front lock assembly. 3 Connect 1 cable of the front lock assembly. 4 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 5 Install the door protective plate assembly. 6 Install the cable cover plate. 7 Close the door.

6.31.5.4 Replacement of Sliding Door Driver Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Remove the right side wall slide rail cover plate assembly. 11 Remove the right side wall slide rail end cover plate assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the sliding door driver assembly.

Figure p872

13 Disengage 2 cables of the sliding door driver assembly. 14 Remove 4 fixing screws of the sliding door driver assembly.

Figure p873
Figure p873
Figure p873

15 Remove 6 fixing screws of the sliding door driver assembly, and remove the sliding door driver assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p874
Figure p874

1 Move the sliding door driver assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws of the sliding door driver assembly. 3 Install 4 fixing screws of the sliding door driver assembly.

4 Connect 2 cables of the sliding door driver assembly. 5 Connect 1 harness connector of the sliding door driver assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Install the right side wall slide rail end cover plate assembly. 7 Install the right side wall slide rail cover plate assembly. 8 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 9 Install the SSM. 10 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 11 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 12 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 13 Install the right sill molding assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

Figure p877

6.31.5.5 Replacement of Lock Cylinder Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the cable cover plate. 3 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 4 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 5 Disengage 1 cable of the lock cylinder assembly.

6 Remove 1 fixing screw of the lock cylinder assembly. 7 Remove the lock cylinder assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the lock cylinder assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the lock cylinder assembly.

Figure p878

3 Connect 1 cable of the lock cylinder assembly. 4 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 5 Install the door protective plate assembly. 6 Install the cable cover plate. 7 Close the door.

6.31.5.6 Replacement of Ground Lock Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II).

7 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the ground lock assembly. 8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the ground lock assembly. 9 Disengage 1 cable of the ground lock assembly. 10 Remove the ground lock assembly.

Figure p880
Figure p880
Figure p880

Installation Procedures 1 Move the ground lock assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 cable of the ground lock assembly. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the ground lock assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install 2 fixing nuts of the ground lock assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

5 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 6 Install the door protective plate assembly. 7 Install the cable cover plate. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

Figure p882

6.31.5.7 Replacement of Ground Lock Catch Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 3 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the ground lock catch assembly. 4 Remove the ground lock catch assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the ground lock catch assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the ground lock catch assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 4 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts between the upper hinge assembly and the sliding door inner panel assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the middle hinge assembly and the sliding door inner panel assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the lower chain assembly and the sliding door inner panel assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the lower hinge assembly and the ground lock assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.32 Door Hinge Device

6.32.1 Specifications

6.32.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p885

6.32.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.32.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Hinge Assy Upr 5. Hinge Assy Lwr 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Upper Hinge Guide Pin Holder 3. Hinge Assy Mid 7. Hex Socket Set Screw 4. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy

Figure p886
Figure p886

6.32.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.32.3.1 Replacement of Upper Hinge Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the upper hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 3 Remove 3 fixing screws of the upper hinge assembly. 4 Remove the upper hinge assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p887
Figure p887

1 Move the upper hinge assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the upper hinge assembly. 3 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the upper hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

4 Close the door.

6.32.3.2 Replacement of Middle Hinge Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the right side wall slide rail cover plate assembly. 3 Remove the right side wall slide rail end cover plate assembly.

4 Separate the mingle hinge assembly from the sliding door driver assembly. 5 Remove 1 fixing nut connecting the middle hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 6 Remove 3 fixing bolts connecting the middle hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 7 Remove the middle hinge assembly.

Figure p888
Figure p888
Figure p888
Figure p889
Figure p889

Installation Procedures 1 Move the middle hinge assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts connecting the middle hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install 1 fixing nut connecting the middle hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
Figure p890

4 Connect the mingle hinge assembly to the sliding door driver assembly. 5 Install the right side wall slide rail end cover plate assembly. 6 Install the right side wall slide rail cover plate assembly. 7 Close the door.

Figure p890

6.32.3.3 Replacement of Lower Hinge Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 2 fixing nuts connecting the lower hinge assembly to the ground lock assembly.

3 Remove 1 fixing nut connecting the lower hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 4 Remove 3 fixing bolts connecting the lower hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing screws of the lower hinge assembly. 6 Remove the lower hinge assembly.

Figure p891
Figure p891
Figure p891
Figure p892
Figure p892

Installation Procedures 1 Move the lower hinge assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the lower hinge assembly. 3 Install 3 fixing bolts connecting the lower hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
Figure p893
Figure p893

4 Install 1 fixing nut connecting the lower hinge assembly to the sliding door assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

5 Install 2 fixing nuts connecting the lower hinge assembly to the ground lock assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p913
Figure p913
Figure p911
Figure p910
Figure p908
Figure p906
Figure p906
Figure p904
Figure p903
Figure p902
Figure p901
Figure p901
Figure p899
Figure p898
Figure p898

6 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the left window regulator assembly and the left window regulator assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right window regulator assembly and the right window regulator assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.33 Vehicle Body Sealing Device

6.33.1 Specifications

6.33.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p895

6.33.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.33.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Seal Door Waist Upr 11. Waist Otr Assy-Lh 2. Door Opening Sealing Strip 12. Seal Fender-Lh 3. Seal Fender-Rh 13. Seal Toolbox 4. Top Sealing Strip 14. Self-Tapping Screw 5. Waist Inr Assy-Lh 15. Fixed Window Seal-Rh 6. Sealing Strip-Cabin Lh Frt 16. Waist Otr Assy-Rh 7. Engine Hood Seal-Rr 17. Seal Glass Run Assy-Rh 8. Engine Hood Seal Fr Assy 18. Waist Inr Assy-Rh 9. Seal Glass Run Assy-Lh 19. Combination of Cross Recessed Pan Head Screws and Large Washers 10. Fixed Window Seal-Lh

6.33.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.33.3.1 Replacement of Left Outer Weatherstrip Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Remove the front USB interface. 9 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 11 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 16 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the side wall clothes rail assembly. 18 Remove the left rear side wall protective plate assembly.

19 Remove 2 fixing screws of the left outer weatherstrip assembly. 20 Remove the left outer weatherstrip assembly.

Figure p897
Figure p897
Figure p897

Installation Procedures 1 Move the left outer weatherstrip assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the left outer weatherstrip assembly.

3 Install the left rear side wall protective plate assembly. 4 Install the side wall clothes rail assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left switch panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 15 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 16 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Lift all windows. 20 Close the door.

6.33.3.2 Replacement of Right Outer Weatherstrip Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows.

3 Remove 2 fixing screws of the right outer weatherstrip assembly. 4 Remove the right outer weatherstrip assembly.

Figure p900
Figure p900
Figure p900

Installation Procedures 1 Move the right outer weatherstrip assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the right outer weatherstrip assembly.

3 Lift all windows. 4 Close the door.

Figure p902

6.33.3.3 Replacement of Engine Compartment Rear Sealing Strip Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove the engine compartment rear sealing strip assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Install the engine compartment rear sealing strip assembly. 2 Close the front flip cover plate. 3 Close the door.

Figure p903

6.33.3.4 Replacement of Right Fender Trim Strip

Removal Procedures 1 Remove the right fender trim strip. Installation Procedures

1 Install the right fender trim strip.

6.33.3.5 Replacement of Left Glass Run Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 13 Remove the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly.

14 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the left adjustable window assembly to the left window regulator assembly. 15 Move the left adjustable window assembly to the lowest position. 16 Remove the left glass run assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p905
Figure p905

1 Install the left glass run assembly. 2 Move the left adjustable window assembly to the highest position. 3 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the left adjustable window assembly to the left window regulator assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

4 Install the window regulator left lower mounting rail assembly. 5 Install the left body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 6 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the front USB interface. 13 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable.

15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

6.33.3.6 Replacement of Left Inner Weatherstrip Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Remove the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 8 Remove the front USB interface. 9 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 11 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly.

16 Remove the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 17 Remove the left inner weatherstrip assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left inner weatherstrip assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install the left middle side wall protective plate assembly. 3 Install the left B-pillar upper protective plate assembly. 4 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left switch panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front USB interface.

Figure p908

11 Install the left front side wall protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Lift all windows. 17 Close the door.

Figure p909

6.33.3.7 Replacement of Right Inner Weatherstrip Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Lower all windows. 3 Remove the cable cover plate. 4 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right inner weatherstrip. Installation Procedures

1 Move the right inner weatherstrip to the mounting position. 2 Install the door protective plate assembly. 3 Install the cable cover plate. 4 Lift all windows. 5 Close the door.

Figure p910

6.33.3.8 Replacement of Left Fender Trim Strip

Removal Procedures 1 Remove the left fender trim strip. Installation Procedures

1 Install the left fender trim strip.

6.33.3.9 Replacement of Right Glass Run Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the cable cover plate. 5 Remove the door protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Remove the right body waterproof membrane (II). 8 Remove the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly.

9 Remove 2 fixing bolts connecting the right adjustable window assembly to the right window regulator assembly. 10 Move the right adjustable window assembly to the lowest position. 11 Remove the right glass run assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p912
Figure p912

1 Install the right glass run assembly. 2 Move the right adjustable window assembly to the highest position. 3 Install 2 fixing bolts connecting the right adjustable window assembly to the right window regulator assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

4 Install the window regulator right lower mounting rail assembly. 5 Install the right body waterproof membrane (II). 6 Install the right body waterproof membrane ( Ⅰ ). 7 Install the door protective plate assembly. 8 Install the cable cover plate. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the driver's seat assembly and the white body assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

6.34 Driver's Seat Device

6.34.1 Specifications

6.34.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p915

6.34.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.34.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. BACK COVER 23. BACKREST VENT 2. SEAT COVER 24. PNUEMATIC LUMBAR 3. BACK FOAM ASSY 25. BELT EXIT BEZELTOP RH 4. CUSHION FOAM 26. H&V ECU 12V 5. PNEUMATIC BACK BOLSTER 27. SEATBELT 6. ARMRESTASSEMBLY 28. TETHER BELT SUSPENSION 7. SWIVEL 29. AIR CYLINDER 8. PLINTH 30. SIDE SHIELD LH 9. FRAME KIT 31. ARMRESTASSEMBLY 10. REAR QTR SHIELD - RH 32. RECLINER HANDLE COVER PLATE 11. SIDE SHIELD – RH 33. RECLINE CTRL HANDLE - LH 12. BUCKLE 34. REAR QTR SHIELD - LH 13. DUMP VALVE OF SWIVEL 35. VALVE ASSY- SUSP HEIGHTADJUST (MEM) - RH 14. ADJ DAMPER KNOB 36. H&V SWITCH 15. CUSHION VENT 37. CUSHION 3D NET 16. FRONT SHIELD 38. VALVE ASSY- LUMBAR TRIPLE - RH 17. SUSPENSION 39. CONTROL PANEL - LH [HAM+HV3LD] 18. SUSPENSION COVER 40. VALVE ASSY- DUMP VALVE - LH

19. KNOB - CUSHION SLIDE PTD 41. T-SHAPE OPS 20. CYLINDER CAP 42. CUSHION HEATER 21. AIR CYLINDER 43. SEAT PAN ASSY 22. CUSHION VENT COVER 44. SLIDE RAIL ASSEMBLY

Figure p917
Figure p917

6.34.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.34.3.1 Replacement of Driver Seat Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release the brake system air pressure 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Move the driver seat assembly backward, and remove 4 fixing bolts at the front end of the driver seat assembly. 5 Move the driver seat assembly forward, and remove 4 fixing bolts at the rear end of the driver seat assembly. 6 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

7 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the driver seat assembly. 8 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the driver seat assembly. 9 Remove the driver seat assembly.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the driver seat assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.

Installation Procedures

Figure p918
Figure p918
Figure p919
Figure p919

1 Move the driver seat assembly to the mounting position.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the driver seat assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.

2 Connect 1 air pipe of the driver seat assembly. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the driver seat assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable.

Figure p920
Figure p920

5 Move the driver seat assembly forward, and install 4 fixing bolts at the rear end of the driver seat assembly.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

6 Move the driver seat assembly backward, and install 4 fixing bolts at the front end of the driver seat assembly.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the rear seat assembly and the right drawer assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

6.35 Rear Seat Device

6.35.1 Specifications

6.35.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p922

6.35.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.35.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

2. Headrest Assembly 6. Right Guard Plate 3. Backrest Assembly 7. Pull Strap Housing 4. Seat Cushion Assembly 8. Headrest Cap 5. Left Guard Plate 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p923
Figure p923

6.35.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.35.3.1 Replacement of Rear Seat Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the rear seat assembly, and remove the rear seat assembly.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the rear seat assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.

Installation Procedures

Figure p924
Figure p924

1 Move the rear seat assembly to the mounting position.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the rear seat assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.

2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the rear seat assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the toolbox assembly to the metalM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the middle drawer assembly and the sheet metal plateM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the toolbox decorative panel assembly and the tool box assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the toolbox assembly and toolbox hingeM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right drawer assembly to the floor sheet metalM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right drawer assembly and the rear seat belt assemblyM10(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the middle drawer assembly and the floor sheet metalM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the toolbox decorative panel assembly and the white body assembly assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.36 Sleeping Berth Device

6.36.1 Specifications

6.36.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p926

6.36.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.36.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

2. Plug-Toolbox 9. Sleeper Mat Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Toolbox Decorative Plate Assy-lh 4. Drawer Assy-Mid 11. Rear Seat Storage Box 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Sleeping Berth Protection Net Assembly 6. Drawer Assy-Rh 13. Protection Net Lock Catch (with Spacer) 7. Toolbox Decorative Plate Assy 14. Protection Net Lock Catch 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt

6.36.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.36.3.1 Replacement of Sleeper Toolbox

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. 5 Remove the rear A/C lower air duct. 6 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 7 Remove the front USB interface. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the 120V receptacle. 16 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). 17 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear). 18 Remove the toolbox trim panel assembly. 19 Remove the toolbox sill molding assembly. 20 Remove the toolbox lamp. 21 Remove the toolbox lamp bracket.

22 Remove 4 plug caps. 23 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the sleeper toolbox. 24 Remove the sleeper toolbox. Installation Procedures

Figure p928
Figure p928
Figure p929
Figure p929

1 Move the sleeper toolbox to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the sleeper toolbox.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install 4 plug caps. 4 Install the toolbox lamp bracket. 5 Install the toolbox lamp. 6 Install the toolbox sill molding assembly. 7 Install the toolbox trim panel assembly. 8 Install the interior temperature sensor (rear). 9 Install the vehicle power supply (12V). 10 Install the 120V receptacle. 11 Install the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 12 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 15 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly.

16 Install the left switch panel assembly. 17 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 18 Install the front USB interface. 19 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 20 Install the rear A/C lower air duct. 21 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 22 Connect the battery negative cable. 23 Close the front flip cover plate. 24 Close the door.

Figure p930

6.36.3.2 Replacement of Middle Drawer Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Disengage 6 clips of the middle drawer assembly.

4 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the middle drawer assembly, and remove the middle drawer assembly.

Figure p931
Figure p931
Figure p931
Figure p932

Installation Procedures 1 Move the middle drawer assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the middle drawer assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p932
Figure p933
Figure p933
Figure p933

3 Install 6 clips of the middle drawer assembly.

4 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 5 Close the door.

Figure p934

6.36.3.3 Replacement of Right Drawer Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the rear seat assembly. 3 Remove the seat rear storage box. 4 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly.

5 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the right drawer assembly, and remove the right drawer assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p935
Figure p935
Figure p936
Figure p936
Figure p936

1 Move the right drawer assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the right drawer assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the rear seat belt assembly.

Torque: (37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs

4 Install the seat rear storage box. 5 Install the rear seat assembly. 6 Close the door.

6.36.3.4 Replacement of Toolbox Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the fire extinguisher. 5 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the front USB interface. 7 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the 120V receptacle. 15 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). 16 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear).

Figure p945

17 Open the sleeper mat assembly. 18 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the toolbox trim panel assembly, and remove the toolbox trim panel assembly.

Figure p938
Figure p938
Figure p938
Figure p939

Installation Procedures 1 Move the toolbox trim panel assembly to the mounting position, and install the 5 fixing bolts of the toolbox trim panel assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p939
Figure p941
Figure p940
Figure p940

2 Close the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Install the interior temperature sensor (rear). 4 Install the vehicle power supply (12V). 5 Install the 120V receptacle. 6 Install the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left switch panel assembly. 12 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 15 Install the fire extinguisher. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.

6.36.3.5 Replacement of Toolbox Left Trim Panel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 12 Open the sleeper mat assembly. 13 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p942
Figure p943
Figure p943

1 Move the toolbox left trim panel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the toolbox left trim panel assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p944
Figure p944

3 Close the sleeper mat assembly. 4 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 5 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 7 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the left switch panel assembly. 9 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front USB interface. 11 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.

6.36.3.6 Replacement of Sleeper Mat Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the sleeper mat assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 2 Close the door.

6.36.3.7 Replacement of Seat Rear Storage Box

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Remove the seat rear storage box. Installation Procedures 1 Install the seat rear storage box. 2 Close the sleeper mat assembly. 3 Close the door.

Figure p945
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the sunshade assembly and the sunshade cover assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.37 Sunshade Curtain Device

6.37.1 Specifications

6.37.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p947

6.37.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.37.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Assembly of the Sunshade Curtain Body 3. Cross Recessed Pan Head Screw Assy 2. Assembly of the Sunshade Curtain Guide Rod 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p948

6.37.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.37.3.1 Replacement of Sunshade Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove 8 fixing screws of the middle ceiling assembly, and lift up the middle ceiling assembly.

10 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the sunshade assembly. 11 Remove 2 fixing screws of the sunshade assembly.

Figure p949
Figure p949
Figure p949

12 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the sunshade assembly. 13 Remove the sunshade assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p950
Figure p950
Figure p951
Figure p951
Figure p951

1 Move the sunshade assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the sunshade assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install 2 fixing screws of the sunshade assembly.

Figure p952
Figure p952
Figure p952

4 Connect 1 harness connector of the sunshade assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install 8 fixing screws of the middle ceiling assembly.

6 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 7 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 9 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 10 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

Figure p953
Figure p953

6.37.3.2 Replacement of Sunshade Rail Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 1 fixing screw of the sunshade rail assembly. 3 Rotate to remove the sunshade rail assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 2 Install 1 fixing screw of the sunshade rail assembly. 3 Close the door.

Figure p955

6.38 Curtain Device

6.38.1 Decomposition Diagram

6.38.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Guide Rail Assy-Curtain 1.3. Curtain Rail End Cap 1.1. Curtain Rail Body 2. Self-Tapping Screw 1.2. Curtain Rail Slide Beads

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the front boarding armrest assembly to the bodyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the rear boarding armrest assembly to the integrated frameM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

6.39 Boarding Handrail Device

6.39.1 Specifications

6.39.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p957

6.39.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.39.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Boarding Handrail Assy-Frt 2. Boarding Handrail Assy-Frt 1.1. Front Boarding Handrail Body 2.1. Front Boarding Handrail Body 1.2. Handrail Sealing Ring 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p958
Figure p958

6.39.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.39.3.1 Replacement of Front Boarding Handrail Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove the plug cap. 3 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the front boarding Handrail assembly. 4 Remove the front boarding Handrail assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p959
Figure p959

1 Move the front boarding Handrail assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the front boarding Handrail assembly.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install the plug cap. 4 Close the door.

6.39.3.2 Replacement of Rear Boarding Handrail Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Remove the plug cap. 3 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the rear boarding Handrail assembly. 4 Remove the rear boarding Handrail assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p960
Figure p960
Figure p961
Figure p961

1 Move the rear boarding Handrail assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the rear boarding Handrail assembly.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
Figure p968
Figure p967
Figure p967
Figure p967
Figure p966

3 Install the plug cap. 4 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the sunroof sunshade assembly and the top cover assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.40 Sunroof Sunshade Curtain Device

6.40.1 Specifications

6.40.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p963

6.40.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.40.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Fixed Glass Roof Sunshade Assy 1.3. Hex Socket Set Screw 1.1. Assembly of Canopy Sunshade Curtain Fabric 1.4. Mushroom Fastener 1.2. Assembly of Canopy Sunshade Curtain Motor 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p964

6.40.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.40.3.1 Replacement of Awning Sunshade Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left display bracket base inner cover. 5 Remove the CMS left display assembly. 6 Remove the left display bracket base. 7 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 8 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 9 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 10 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 11 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 12 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 13 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 14 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 15 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the awning sunshade assembly.

16 Remove 18 fixing bolts of the awning sunshade assembly, and remove the awning sunshade assembly.

Figure p965
Figure p965
Figure p965

Installation Procedures 1 Move the awning sunshade to the mounting position. 2 Install 18 fixing bolts of the awning sunshade assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p966

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the awning sunshade.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 5 Install the right ceiling lamp. 6 Install the left ceiling lamp. 7 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 8 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 9 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 10 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 11 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left display bracket base. 13 Install the CMS left display assembly. 14 Install the left display bracket base inner cover. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts between the front cover lock assembly and the front cover assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the front cover latch assembly and the front cover assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.41 Front Hood Device

6.41.1 Specifications

6.41.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p970

6.41.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.41.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Engine Hood Hinge Assy-Rh 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Hexagon Bolt 11. Engine Hood Striker Assy 3. Large Washer 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 13. Bumper Engine Hood 5. Engine Hood Hinge Assy-Lh 14. Cable Hood Opening Assy 6. Handle Assy-Frt Cover Opening 15. The Air Pole Is Installed With The Ball End 7. Hex Socket Set Screw 16. Front Cover Assy 8. Large Washer 17. Air Strut Engine Hood 9. Engine Hood Lock Assy 18. Plug Cover

Figure p971
Figure p971

6.41.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.41.3.1 Replacement of Engine Hood Opening Handle Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Remove 1 fixing screw of the engine hood opening handle assembly, and detach the engine hood opening handle assembly. 3 Disengage the engine hood lock cable assembly. 4 Remove the engine hood opening handle assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p975
Figure p975
Figure p975
Figure p972
Figure p972

1 Move the engine hood opening handle assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect the engine hood lock cable assembly. 3 Install 1 fixing screw of the engine hood opening handle assembly. 4 Close the door.

6.41.3.2 Replacement of Engine Hood Lock Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the engine hood lock assembly. 5 Disengage 1 clip of the engine hood lock assembly. 6 Disengage the engine hood lock cable assembly.

Figure p973
Figure p973
Figure p973
Figure p974

7 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the engine hood lock assembly. 8 Remove the engine hood lock assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the engine hood lock assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the engine hood lock assembly.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p974

3 Connect the engine hood lock cable assembly. 4 Install 1 clip of the engine hood lock assembly. 5 Connect 1 harness connector of the engine hood lock assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Figure p976

6.41.3.3 Replacement of Engine Hood Pneumatic Strut (left)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Pry off 2 lock pieces of the engine hood pneumatic strut (left). 4 Remove the engine hood pneumatic strut (left).

caution
One person is required to support the engine hood cover plate during removal.
Figure p977

Installation Procedures 1 Move the engine hood pneumatic strut to the mounting position. 2 Fasten 2 lock pieces of the engine hood pneumatic strut (left). 3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.

Figure p977

6.41.3.4 Replacement of Engine Hood Pneumatic Strut (right)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Pry off 2 lock pieces of the engine hood pneumatic strut (right). 4 Remove the engine hood pneumatic strut (right).

caution
One person is required to support the engine hood cover plate during removal.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the engine hood pneumatic strut (right) to the mounting position. 2 Fasten 2 lock pieces of the engine hood pneumatic strut (right). 3 Close the front flip cover plate. 4 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the right fender cover bracket assembly and the white body assembly assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6.42 Fender Device

6.42.1 specifications

6.42.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p979

6.42.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.42.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Fender Assy-Rh 8. Fender Cover Body 2. Filling Block-Fender-Lh 9. Upr Skeleton-Fender-Rh 3. Connect Skeleton Assy-Lh Fender 10. Brkt Assy-Rh Fender 4. Upper Bracket on the Left Fender 11. Fender Assy-Rh 5. Brkt Assy-Lh Fender 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Filling Block-Fender-Rh 13. Self-Tapping Screw Assy 7. Brkt Assy-Fender Cover Rh 14. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the upper step bracket to the white body assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the upper step pipe beam and the white body assemblyM10(33 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the upper step body assembly and the right front wheel housing rear bodyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the upper step body assembly and the wheel cover connection bracketM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

6.43 Boarding Step Device

6.43.1 Specifications

6.43.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p981

6.43.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.43.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Outer Decorative Cover Plate of the Sill 2. Plug-Stepping 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3.1. Boarding Step Body 7. Pipe Beams 3.2. Secondary Step Mat 8. Attachment Brkt-Lower Wheel Arch 3.3. Primary Step Mat 9. Attachment Brkt-Upper Wheel Arch 3.4. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 10. Pedal Bracket 4. Hex Socket Set Screw

Figure p982
Figure p982

6.43.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.43.3.1 Replacement of Boarding Step Body Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the plug cap. 5 Remove the 3 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.

6 Disengage 1 snap fastener of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 7 Remove the 6 fixing screws of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 8 Remove the 4 fixing screws of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.

Figure p983
Figure p983
Figure p983

9 Remove the 5 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 10 Separate 1 snap fastener. 11 Disconnect 2 wire harness connectors. 12 Take off the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.

Figure p984
Figure p984
Figure p984
Figure p985
Figure p985

Installation Procedures 1 Install the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 2 Connect 2 wire harness connectors. 3 Connect 1 snap fastener.

Figure p986
Figure p986
Figure p986

4 Install the 5 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

5 Install the 4 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

6 Install the 6 fixing screws of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.

Figure p987
Figure p987
Figure p987

7 Install 1 snap fastener of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy. 8 Install the 3 fixing bolts of the main body assembly of the get on the bus and step on the main assy.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

9 Install the plug cap.

10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the side skirt bracket and the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the side skirt bracket to the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the side skirt bracket and the frame assemblyM6(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the side skirt bracket and the frame assemblyM6(.75 - 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the left skirt assembly and the side skirt bracketM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the skirt mounting bracket to the frame assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the side skirt bracket to the frame assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the skirt mounting bracket to the frame assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the installation bracket under the skirt and the side skirt assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the rear step assembly and the right side skirt assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

6.44 Side Skirt Panel Device

6.44.1 Specifications

6.44.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p990

6.44.2 Decomposition Diagram

6.44.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Skirt Assy-Lh 9. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Brkt-Lh Rr Wheel Arch Attachment 10. Upr Attach Brkt-Skirt 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Brkt-Skrit Lower 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Riveted Nut 5. Hexagon Flange Nut 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Skrit Bracket 14. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 8. Brkt-Skrit Upper 16. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy

1. Skrit Plate-Rh 10. Hexagon Flange Nut 2. Hexagon Flange Nut 11. Skrit Bracket 3. Rear Step Assy 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 14. Brkt-Skrit Upper 6. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 15. Upr Attach Brkt-Skirt 7. Pulg-Side Skirt Trim 16. Brkt-Skrit Lower 8. Brkt-Rh Rr Wheel Arch Attachment 17 Hexagon Flange Bolt 9 Hexagon Flange Bolt 18 Riveted Nut

Figure p991
Figure p992

6.44.3 Dismantling and Installation

6.44.3.1 Replacement of Rear Step Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove the rear step mounting base. 7 Remove 8 fixing bolts of the rear step assembly. 8 Remove the rear step assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p993

1 Move the rear step assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 8 fixing bolts of the rear step assembly.

Torque:(17 +/- 2) ft lbs
Figure p1757
Figure p1756
Figure p1756
Figure p1751
Figure p1750
Figure p1750
Figure p1747
Figure p1746
Figure p1745
Figure p1744
Figure p1742
Figure p1742
Figure p1742
Figure p1697
Figure p1696
Figure p1696
Figure p1695
Figure p1691
Figure p1691
Figure p1690
Figure p1688
Figure p1688
Figure p1688
Figure p1681
Figure p1681
Figure p1680
Figure p1679
Figure p1678
Figure p1678
Figure p1676
Figure p1676
Figure p1674
Figure p1673
Figure p1672
Figure p1671
Figure p1671
Figure p1669
Figure p1669
Figure p1667
Figure p1667
Figure p1663
Figure p1662
Figure p1662
Figure p1660
Figure p1660
Figure p1658
Figure p1657
Figure p1656
Figure p1655
Figure p1653
Figure p1652
Figure p1651
Figure p1650
Figure p1648
Figure p1647
Figure p1646
Figure p1646
Figure p1644
Figure p1643
Figure p1641
Figure p1641
Figure p1639
Figure p1639
Figure p1637
Figure p1636
Figure p1634
Figure p1634
Figure p1631
Figure p1631
Figure p1629
Figure p1628
Figure p1626
Figure p1626
Figure p1624
Figure p1623
Figure p1595
Figure p1595
Figure p1593
Figure p1592
Figure p1591
Figure p1589
Figure p1588
Figure p1586
Figure p1586
Figure p1584
Figure p1584
Figure p1583
Figure p1483
Figure p1482
Figure p1480
Figure p1479
Figure p1479
Figure p1477
Figure p1477
Figure p1475
Figure p1474
Figure p1473
Figure p1471
Figure p1455
Figure p1454
Figure p1454
Figure p1452
Figure p1451
Figure p1450
Figure p1450
Figure p1449
Figure p1445
Figure p1445
Figure p1445
Figure p1442
Figure p1442
Figure p1440
Figure p1439
Figure p1249
Figure p1248
Figure p1247
Figure p1247
Figure p1247
Figure p1244
Figure p1244
Figure p1243
Figure p1243
Figure p1243
Figure p1242
Figure p1242
Figure p1238
Figure p1238
Figure p1238
Figure p1237
Figure p1237
Figure p1234
Figure p1234
Figure p1232
Figure p1231
Figure p1229
Figure p1228
Figure p1227
Figure p1225
Figure p1225
Figure p1218
Figure p1218
Figure p1216
Figure p1215
Figure p1213
Figure p1203
Figure p1203
Figure p1087
Figure p1086
Figure p1084
Figure p1083
Figure p1081
Figure p1081
Figure p1079
Figure p1079
Figure p1076
Figure p1076
Figure p1076
Figure p1075
Figure p1072
Figure p1072
Figure p1071
Figure p1071
Figure p1070
Figure p1070
Figure p1069
Figure p1064
Figure p1064
Figure p1063
Figure p1063
Figure p1063
Figure p1062
Figure p1056
Figure p1056
Figure p1056
Figure p1055
Figure p1055
Figure p1055
Figure p997

3 Install the rear step mounting base. 4 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 5 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

7Automotive Electrical Appliances

7.1 Air Conditioning and Heating

7.1.1 Description and Operation

7.1.1.1 Refrigerant Leakage Detection

caution
1. Do not use fluorescent dyes to detect leakage in the refrigeration system, otherwise the compressor may be damaged.
2. To detect leakage in the refrigeration system, a refrigerant leak detector must be used for leak detection.

1. Measure the pressure of the A/C system pipeline to confirm if there is any residual refrigerant in the A/C system. 2. Refill the refrigerant to the A/C system.

caution
1. Vacuumize the A/C system before filling.
2. Fill refrigerant with the same model and amount as indicated on the refrigerant nameplate.

3. Conduct testing under the following conditions. 1. The vehicle is in a stationary state with the screen illuminated. 2. Ensure good ventilation in the working environment. 3. Use a refrigerant leakage detector to check for refrigerant leakage in the A/C system and repeat the test 2-3 times.

Note
The leakage detector may react to volatile gases that are not refrigerants, such as gasoline vapors, exhaust gases, etc.

7.1.1.2 Inspection of Refrigerant Air-tightness

caution
1. Do not spray soapy water on the pins of the pressure sensor/pressure switch plastic case.
2. If it is necessary to check if there is a leakage at the pins of the pressure sensor/pressure switch plastic case, visual inspection can be carried out. If there is a leakage, there will be refrigerant residue at the pins of the plastic case. If it is not a leakage from the pressure sensor/pressure switch itself, there will be no impurities or refrigerant oil stains at the pins of the plastic case.
3. If it is confirmed that the leakage is caused by damage to a component in the A/C system, please replace it and perform pressure and leakage testing. Do not use alkaline liquids such as soap water to test the leakage of the pressure sensor/pressure switch and other electrical components, otherwise internal corrosion and damage of the pressure sensor and refrigerant leakage may occur.

1. Use a refrigerant leak detector with an accuracy of 10g to check if the system is leaking normally on a annual basis or at shorter interval. 2. If abnormal leakage is found and the system needs to be disassembled (repaired or replaced with hoses, fittings, etc.), all refrigerant in the system shall be recovered. 3. After leak detection and repair, refrigerant vacuumizing/ pressure holding/filling of the system must be carried out.

7.1.1.3 Refrigerant Recovery

caution
1. In practical operation, refrigerant maintenance equipment must be used. Please refer to the equipment manufacturer's user manual for specific instructions on how to use the equipment.
2. In the event of an accidental emission of the system, the work site must be adequately ventilated before continuing maintenance.
3. For further instructions on health and safety, please refer to the instructions provided by refrigerant and lubricant manufacturers.

1. As shown in the figure, connect the refrigerant recovery/ recirculation/filling equipment (A) or other equipment with the same function to the high-pressure maintenance interface (B) and low-pressure maintenance interface (C) according to the instructions of the equipment manufacturer.

Figure p996

2. After the recovery process, measure the amount of refrigerant oil discharged from the A/C system. Before filling, ensure that an equal amount of new refrigerant oil is filled back into the A/C system.

Figure p996

7.1.1.4 Vacuumizing Refrigerant System

caution
When the A/C system is exposed to the atmosphere (such as during installation and repair), refrigerant recovery/recirculation/filling equipment must be used for vacuumizing. However, if the system is disassembled for several days, the fluid reservoir/desiccant shall be replaced and the system shall be vacuumized for several hours.

1. As shown in the figure, connect the refrigerant recovery/ recirculation/filling equipment (A) or other equipment with the same function to the high-pressure maintenance interface (B) and low-pressure maintenance interface (C) according to the instructions of the equipment manufacturer. 2. Vacuumize the system.

7.1.1.5 Refrigerant Filling

caution
1. After filling refrigerant, make sure to preheat the engine for at least 3 minutes when turning on the A/C switch for the first time to prevent damage.
2. After refrigerant filling, set the temperature to maximum cooling under idle conditions, adjust the blower to high speed, and let the compressor run in for 3 minutes or longer.

1. As shown in the figure, connect the refrigerant recovery/ recirculation/filling equipment (A) or other equipment with the same function to the high-pressure maintenance interface (B) and low-pressure maintenance interface (C) according to the instructions of the equipment manufacturer.

2. Vacuumize the system. 3. Fill a specified amount of refrigerant to the system.

caution
Do not overfill, otherwise the compressor will be damaged.

4. Check for refrigerant leakage.

caution
1. Do not spray soapy water on the pins of the pressure sensor/pressure switch plastic case.
2. Check if there is a leakage at the pins of the pressure sensor/pressure switch plastic case, visual inspection can be carried out. If there is a leakage, there will be refrigerant residue at the pins of the plastic case. If it is not a leakage from the pressure sensor/pressure switch itself, there will be no impurities or refrigerant oil stains at the pins of the plastic case.
3. If it is confirmed that the leakage is caused by damage to a component in the A/C system, please replace it and perform pressure and leakage testing. Do not use alkaline liquids such as soap water to test the leakage of the pressure sensor/pressure switch and other electrical components, otherwise internal corrosion and damage of the pressure sensor and refrigerant leakage may occur.

5. Check the system performance.

caution
1. Do not operate the compressor before adding refrigerant, as the compressor cannot function properly without any refrigerant and may overheat.
2. Check the amount of refrigerant through measurement rather than the observation holes.
3. It is only allowed to fill refrigerant into the A/C system when the engine is stopped.

7.1.1.6 Refrigerant Oil Balance

caution
1. To replace any of the following components such as condenser, evaporator, pipeline, hose, or compressor, it is necessary to add refrigerant oil.
2. the used refrigerant oil according to regulations.
3. Do not mix brands or types of refrigerant oils, otherwise the compressor will be damaged.
4. The refrigerant oil has strong moisture absorption, so when removing any component of the A/C system, it is necessary to immediately block the interface with a plug or plastic tape to isolate it from the air.
5. Do not splash the refrigerant oil onto the vehicle, otherwise the paint layer will be damaged; If refrigerant oil splashes onto the paint layer, it shall be immediately rinsed off.

1. Remove the compressor. 2. Drain the refrigerant oil from the suction and exhaust ports of the compressor into the same container.

caution
1. Drain the refrigeration oil into a clean, graduated container.
2. During the operation, avoid foreign objects and moisture from entering the compressor and refrigerant oil.
3. When draining oil, rotate the compressor to facilitate the discharge of refrigerant oil (traditional compressor).
4. When draining oil, change the tilt angle of the compressor to facilitate the discharge of refrigerant oil (electric compressor).

3. Record the amount of refrigerant oil released from the removed compressor.

caution
This measurement value will be used when installing the replaced/repaired compressor.

4. Discard the used refrigerant oil properly. 5. The replaced/repaired compressor comes with a certain capacity of refrigerant oil. Before installing the replaced/ repaired compressor, it is necessary to drain or add some refrigerant oil.

caution
1. Refer to the amount of refrigerant oil discharged when removing the compressor.
2. Subtract the amount of refrigerant oil discharged during removal from the amount of refrigerant oil in the replaced/repaired compressor, and the difference is the amount of refrigerant oil that needs to be discharged.
3. If the amount of refrigerant oil in the replaced/ repaired compressor is small, the difference in the previous step is the amount of refrigerant oil that needs to be added.

6. Discharge or add refrigerant oil in the replaced/repaired compressor based on the calculated value.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the air conditioning compressor assembly and the air conditioning compressor bracketM8(18.5 +/- 1.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the bracket of the air conditioning compressor to the frame on the subframeM8(18.5 +/- 1.5) ft lbs
HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolt connecting the front left to the vehicle bodyM8(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolt connecting the front left and front wall crossbeam inner panel assemblyM6(5 +/- .75) ft lbs
HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing nut connecting the front left to the vehicle bodyM6(5 +/- .75) ft lbs
HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolt connecting the front right to the vehicle bodyM8(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolts connecting the front right and front crossbeam inner panel assemblyM6(5 +/- .75) ft lbs
HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing nut connecting the front right to the vehicle bodyM6(5 +/- .75) ft lbs
HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolts connecting the rear to the vehicle bodyM8(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolts connecting the rear and rear evaporator to the connecting pipe assemblyM8(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
HVAC assembly (including PTC) - fixing bolts connecting the rear to the vehicle bodyM6(5 +/- .75) ft lbs

7.1.2 Specifications

7.1.2.1 Fastener Specifications

S/NItemStructural Parameters
1Performance parametersCooling capacity≥6.7kW - face blowing Blower capacity for face blowing, full cool≥600m³/h Heating capacity≥8kW
2Refrigerant specificationsHFC-134a
3Refrigerant capacity29.9 oz +/- 1.76 oz
4Refrigerant leakage rate< 1.41 oz/year
5Model of refrigerant oilPOE RB68
6Amount of refrigerant oil6.76 oz
S/NItemStructural Parameters
1ModelEBJ33C-MD01
2TypeElectric vortex type
3Displacement33CC
4Rated voltage (high voltage)800V
5Working voltage range480V~920V
6Rated voltage (low voltage)24V
7Input voltage range18~36V
8Working temperature68*F - 212*F
9Rated input power4 hp
10Rated speed7000rpm
11Maximum speed12000rpm
12Insulation resistance≥50MΩ
S/NItemStructural Parameters
1ModelYJ0174, YJ0175, YJ0176
2Rated voltage (high voltage)800V
3Working voltage range450V~940V
4Rated voltage (low voltage)24V
5Input voltage range18~32V
6Working temperature-40*F - -121*F

7.1.2.2 Technical Parameters

A/C System
Compressor
Heater
Figure p1001

7.1.3 Decomposition Diagram

7.1.3.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. HVAC Device Assy-Frt Lh 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Tie-Fir Tree 5. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

2. HVAC Device Assy-Frt Rh 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Tie-Fir Tree 5. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

Figure p1002

3. HVAC Device Assy-Rr 8. Fixed Frame After Air Conditioning 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1003

10. Room Temperature Sensor 12. Aroma Generator Assembly In New Energy Vehicles 11. Self-Tapping Screw 13. Self-Tapping Screw

Figure p1004

14. Compressor Assy 17. Compressor Bracket 15. Compressor Mounting Bolts 18. Hexagon Flange Bolt 16. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 38. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1005

19. Stent 21. Hexagon Flange Bolt 20. Hexagon Flange Bolt 22. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

Figure p1006

23. Lh Steanm to Front S0V Line Assy 1 Cold Steam End 29. Condensor Inlet and Outlet Tube Assy 24. Left Steam to Pre-S0V Line Assy 1 Stepress End 30. Pipeline Assembly From SOV to Evaporator In New Energy Vehicles 25. Left Evaporator to SOV Line Assy 2 31. Pressure Cooling Tube Tripler 26. Right Evaporator to SOV Valve Line Assy Autoclaclve End 32. Return Air Tube-Rransfer Tube 27. Rh Evaporator to SOV Valve Line Assy Cold Steam End 33. Adapter Pipe at the Outlet of SOV In New Energy Vehicles 28. Rnght Evaporator to SOV Valve Line Assy 2 34. Rear Evaporator to Transfer Line Assy

Figure p1007

6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 36. Pipe Clamp 16. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 37. Hexagon Flange Bolt 35. Pipe Clip φ 9- φ 12

Figure p1008
Figure p1009

7.1.4 System Schematic Diagram

7.1.4.1 System Working Principle

7.1.4.2 Electrical Schematic Diagram

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
The air conditioning blower is not producing air or the air volume is low1. Blockage of air conditioning filter elementClean or replace the air conditioning filter element.
2. Fault in the power supply harness of the air conditioning blowerCheck the power supply harness of the air conditioning blower. Refer to Left Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault.Right Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault. Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Sleeper Air Conditioning Blower
3. Fault in the wiring harness of the PWM control signal for the air conditioning blowerCheck the PWM control signal wiring harness between the driver's blower, passenger's blower, sleeper blower, and AC.
4. Air conditioning blower faultReplace the driver's blower, passenger's blower, and sleeper blower. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - Front Left . Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right. Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Rear
5. Air conditioning controller faultReplace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right
Air conditioning system not cooling or insufficient cooling1. Blockage of air conditioning filter elementClean or replace the air conditioning filter element.
2. Too much or too little refrigerantCheck for refrigerant leakage in the air conditioning system and add it again if necessary.

7.1.5 Diagnostic Information and Steps

7.1.5.1 Diagnosis Description

Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principles of air conditioning and heating before diagnosing faults in air conditioning and heating, and then starting system diagnosis, can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of air conditioning and heating should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and

avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.1.5.2 Routine Inspection

• Check the after-sales installation devices that may affect the operation of the air conditioning and heating system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the air conditioning and heating system.

• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 7.1.5.3 Fault Symptom Table

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
3. Poor heat dissipation of condenserCheck if the condenser is blocked or covered by foreign objects.
4. Evaporator blockage or foreign object coverageCheck if the evaporator is blocked or covered by foreign objects.
5. Evaporator temperature sensor faultRefer to Left Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault. Right Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault.Sleeper Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault
6. Fault in the power supply circuit of the air conditioning compressorRefer to Compressor Power Supply Circuit Fault
7. CAN communication harness fault between air conditioning compressor and ACCheck the CAN communication harness between the air conditioning compressor and AC.
8. High voltage wiring harness fault of air conditioning compressorCheck the high-pressure wiring harness of the air conditioning compressor.
9. High pressure interlock harness fault of air conditioning compressorCheck the high-pressure interlock harness of the air conditioning compressor.
The air conditioning system is not heating or heating is insufficient1. Blockage of air conditioning filter elementClean or replace the air conditioning filter element.
2. Fault in PTC power supply circuitRefer to PTC Power Supply Circuit Fault
3. CAN communication harness fault between PTC and ACCheck the CAN communication harness between the driver PTC, passenger PTC, sleeper PTC, and AC.
4. Fault in PTC high-voltage wiring harnessCheck the driver PTC, passenger PTC, and sleeper PTC high-voltage wiring harness.
5. PTC high-voltage interlock harness faultCheck the high-voltage interlock wiring harness of the driver PTC, passenger PTC, and sleeper PTC.

7.1.5.4 DTC Confirmation

1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.1.5.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

AC

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717High battery voltageRefer to Air Conditioning Controller Power Fault
B111716Low battery voltage
U115087Lost communication with XF-AC (0x18FF2F19x)Refer to Communication Fault Of Air Conditioning Controller
U115187Lost communication with ACP_AC1 (0x18FF2B19x)
U115287Lost communication with PTC1_AC (0x18FF2C19x)
U115387Lost communication with PTC2_AC (0x18FF2D19x)
U115487Lost communication with PTC3_AC (0x18FF2E19x)
U014087Lost communication with BDCU_To_ AC_Front(0x18FF1121x)
U015687Lost communication with CDC_VDHR (0x18FEC1EEx)
U012287Lost communication with VDC_CCVS (0x18FEF100x)
U019887Lost communication with TGW_TD_ Time(0x18FEE6EEx)
U007D88BCANFD2 BusOff
U007D89BCANFD2 CAN H short-circuit fault to the ground
U007D90BCANFD2 CAN H short-circuit fault to the ground
U115F87The CANFD transmission is abnormal
B258113Front - Interior temperature sensor open circuitRefer to Front Interior Temperature Sensor Fault
B258111Short-circuited front - interior temperature sensor
B258613Rear-interior temperature sensor open circuitRefer to Rear Interior Temperature Sensor Fault
B258611Rear-interior temperature sensor short- circuited
B250117Actuator 1 of the front left mode damper motor is faultyRefer to Left Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault
B250217Actuator 2 of the front left mode damper motor is faulty
B250317Front left circulation damper actuator is faultyRefer to Left Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B250417Front left heating and cooling valve actuator is faultyRefer to Left Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault
B258213Front left air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor open circuitRefer to Left Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault
B258211Front left air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor is short-circuited
B258313Open the circuit for the exhaust air temperature sensor in the front left air conditionerRefer to Left Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault
B258311The exhaust air temperature sensor of the front left air conditioner is short- circuited
B250517Actuator 1 of the front right mode damper motor is faultyRefer to Right Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault
B250617Actuator 2 of the front right mode damper motor is faulty
B250717Front right circulation damper actuator is faultyRefer to Right Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault
B250817The actuator of the front right heating and cooling valve is faultyRefer to Right Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault
B258413Front right air conditioning evaporative temperature sensor open circuitRefer to Right Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault
B258411Short-circuited evaporation temperature sensor of front right air conditioner
B258513Open the air outlet temperature sensor on the front right air conditionerRefer to Right Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault
B258511The outlet air temperature sensor of the front right air conditioner is short- circuited
B258713Rear air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor open circuitRefer to Sleeper Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault
B258711The evaporation temperature sensor of the rear left air conditioner is short- circuited
B258813Rear air conditioner air temperature sensor open circuitRefer to Sleeper Air Conditioning Temperature Sensor Fault
B258811The outlet air temperature sensor of the rear air conditioner is shorted

7.1.5.6 Air Conditioning Controller Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717High battery voltageThe power supply voltage exceeds 32.5V for more than 1 second1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Air conditioning controller
B111716Low battery voltageThe power supply voltage is lower than 17.5V for more than 1 second

2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.6 Air Conditioning Controller Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U115087Lost communication with XF-AC (0x18FF2F19x)If all XF-AC packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified1.Wiring harness 2. Air conditioning controller
U115187Lost communication with ACP_AC1 (0x18FF2B19x)If all ACP_AC1 packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified
U115287Lost communication with PTC1_AC (0x18FF2C19x)If all PTC1_AC packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified
U115387Lost communication with PTC2_AC (0x18FF2D19x)If all PTC2_AC packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified
U115487Lost communication with PTC3_AC (0x18FF2E19x)If all PTC3_AC packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified
U014087Lost communication with BDCU_To_AC_ Front(0x18FF1121x)If all BDCU_To_AC_Front packets are lost within 10 sending cycles, the fault is rectified
U015687Lost communication with CDC_VDHR (0x18FEC1EEx)If all CDC_VDHR packets are lost within 5 seconds, the fault is rectified
U012287Lost communication with VDC_CCVS (0x18FEF100x)If all VDC_CCVS packets are lost within 10 sending intervals (1s), the fault is rectified
U019887Lost communication with TGW_TD_Time (0x18FEE6EEx)If all TGW_TD_Time packets are lost within 5 seconds, the fault is rectified
U007D88BCANFD2 BusOffBus Off

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the air conditioning controller? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the air conditioning controller. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.7 Communication Fault Of Air Conditioning Controller

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007D89BCANFD2 CAN H short-circuit fault to the groundCAN bus exception
U007D90BCANFD2 CAN H short-circuit fault to the groundCAN bus exception
U115F87The CANFD transmission is abnormalAbnormal packets sent by the CANFD module are detected for more than 300ms

2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.7 Communication Fault Of Air Conditioning Controller — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCAND2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND2 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B258113Front - Interior temperature sensor open circuitSensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second1.Wiring harness 2. Front interior temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller
B258111Short-circuited front - interior temperature sensorThe sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second

Step 4:Check the air conditioning CAN bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of The Air Conditioning CAN Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.8 Front Interior Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.8 Front Interior Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front interior temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller.

SensorTemperatureResistance
Front interior temperature sensor77℉2.12KΩ - 2.25KΩ
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B258613Rear-interior temperature sensor open circuitSensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second1.Wiring harness 2. Rear interior temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller
B258611Rear-interior temperature sensor short-circuitedThe sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second

Step 4:Check if the resistance of the front car interior temperature sensor is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front interior temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Indoor Temperature Sensor Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.9 Rear Interior Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.9 Rear Interior Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear interior temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller.

SensorTemperatureResistance
Rear interior temperature sensor77℉2.12KΩ - 2.25KΩ
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B250117Actuator 1 of the front left mode damper motor is faultyThe actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning mode damper motor 3. Air conditioning controller
B250217Actuator 2 of the front left mode damper motor is faultyThe actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting

Step 4:Check if the resistance of the rear temperature sensor in the car is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the Rear interior temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Indoor Temperature Sensor Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.10 Left Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.10 Left Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning mode damper motor and the air conditioning controller.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B250317Front left circulation damper actuator is faultyThe actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning internal and external circulation motor 3. Air conditioning controller

Step 4:Connect the left air conditioning mode damper motor to an external 12V power supply and observe if the left air conditioning mode damper motor is working? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left air conditioning mode damper motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.11 Left Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.11 Left Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B250417Front left heating and cooling valve actuator is faultyThe actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning cooling and heating motor 3. Air conditioning controller

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning internal and external circulation motor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Connect the left air conditioner's internal and external circulation motor to a 12V power supply and observe if the left air conditioner's internal and external circulation motor is working? – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the left air conditioning internal and external circulation motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC assembly (including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.12 Left Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.12 Left Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning cooling and heating motor and the air conditioning controller.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B258213Front left air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor open circuitSensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller
B258211Front left air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor is short-circuitedThe sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second

Step 4:Connect the left air conditioning cooling and heating motor to an external 12V power supply and observe if the left air conditioning cooling and heating motor is working? – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the left air conditioning cooling and heating motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC assembly (including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.13 Left Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.13 Left Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

SensorTemperatureResistance
Left air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor77℉1.48KΩ - 1.6KΩ
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B258313Open the circuit for the exhaust air temperature sensor in the front left air conditionerSensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second1.Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller
B258311The exhaust air temperature sensor of the front left air conditioner is short- circuitedThe sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check if the resistance of the left air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor is normal at different temperatures? – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the left air conditioning evaporative temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC assembly (including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.14 Left Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.14 Left Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller.

SensorTemperatureResistance
Left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor77℉9.9KΩ - 10.1KΩ
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B250517Actuator 1 of the front right mode damper motor is faultyThe actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning mode damper motor 3. Air conditioning controller
B250617Actuator 2 of the front right mode damper motor is faultyThe actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting

Step 4:Check if the resistance of the left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left air conditioning outlet temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.15 Right Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.15 Right Air Conditioning Mode Damper Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right air conditioning mode damper motor and the air conditioning controller.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B250717Front right circulation damper actuator is faultyThe actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioner internal and external circulation motor 3. Air conditioning controller

Step 4:Connect the right air conditioning mode damper motor to an external 12V power supply and observe if the right air conditioning mode damper motor is working? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right air conditioning mode damper motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.16 Right Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.16 Right Air Conditioner Internal And External Circulation Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B250817The actuator of the front right heating and cooling valve is faultyThe actuator cannot reach the predetermined position within 10 seconds after starting1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning cooling and heating motor 3. Air conditioning controller

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the inner and outer circulation motors of the right air conditioner and the air conditioner controller. Step 4:Connect the inner and outer circulation motors of the right air conditioner to a 12V power supply and observe if they are working? – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the internal and external circulation motor of the right air conditioner. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.17 Right Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.17 Right Air Conditioning Cooling And Heating Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B258413Front right air conditioning evaporative temperature sensor open circuitSensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller
B258411Short-circuited evaporation temperature sensor of front right air conditionerThe sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right air conditioning cooling and heating motor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Connect the right air conditioning cooling and heating motor to an external 12V power supply and observe if the right air conditioning cooling and heating motor is working? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right air conditioning cooling and heating motor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.18 Right Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

B54-10 B54-11
7.1.5.18 Right Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

SensorTemperatureResistance
Right air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor77℉1.48KΩ - 1.6KΩ
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B258513Open the air outlet temperature sensor on the front right air conditionerThe sensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second1.Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller
B258511The outlet air temperature sensor of the front right air conditioner is short- circuitedThe sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check if the resistance of the evaporator temperature sensor on the right side of the air conditioner is normal at different temperatures? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the evaporator temperature sensor on the right side of the air conditioner. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.19 Right Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

B54-10 B54-11
7.1.5.19 Right Air Conditioning Outlet Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

SensorTemperatureResistance
Right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor77℉9.9KΩ - 10.1KΩ
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B258713Rear air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor open circuitSensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second1.Wiring harness 2. Sleeper air conditioner evaporation temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller
B258711The evaporation temperature sensor of the rear left air conditioner is short- circuitedThe sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check if the resistance of the right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor is normal at different temperatures? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right air conditioning outlet temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.20 Sleeper Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.20 Sleeper Air Conditioning Evaporation Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

SensorTemperatureResistance
Sleeper air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor77℉1.48KΩ - 1.6KΩ
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B258813Rear air conditioner air temperature sensor open circuitSensor voltage exceeds 4.95V for more than 1 second1.Wiring harness 2. Sleeper air conditioner outlet air temperature sensor 3. Air conditioning controller
B258811The outlet air temperature sensor of the rear air conditioner is shortedThe sensor voltage is below 0.05V for more than 1 second

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sleeper air conditioning evaporation temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check the resistance value of the evaporation temperature sensor of the sleeper air conditioner at different temperatures is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper air conditioning evaporative temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - Rear Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.21 Sleeper Air Conditioning Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.1.5.21 Sleeper Air Conditioning Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

SensorTemperatureResistance
Sleeper air conditioner air temperature sensor77℉9.9KΩ - 10.1KΩ
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
Air conditioning CAN (H) and air conditioning CAN (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the sleeper air conditioning outlet air temperature sensor and the air conditioning controller. Step 4:Check the resistance value of the sleeper air conditioner outlet air temperature sensor is normal at different temperatures? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper air conditioning temperature sensor. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Rear Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the air conditioning controller. Step 6:Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.1.5.22 Check The Integrity Of The Air Conditioning CAN Bus Network

Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of the air conditioning CAN bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the voltage of the air conditioning CAN bus. No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
Air conditioning CAN (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
Air conditioning CAN (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
Air conditioning CAN (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
Air conditioning CAN (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the air conditioning CAN bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the air conditioning CAN bus. C. Measure the air conditioning CAN bus resistance between each module and the air conditioning compressor in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of the air conditioning CAN bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the air conditioning CAN bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the air conditioning CAN bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the air conditioning CAN bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the air conditioning CAN bus in sequence, observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance returns to normal, and if it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

7.1.6 Dismantling and Installation

7.1.6.1 Replacement of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - front Left

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 6 Remove the wiper arm assy. 7 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 8 Remove the dab decorative cove. 9 Remove the steering wheel assy. 10 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 11 Remove the ip brim assy. 12 Remove the IVI screen. 13 Remove the CAR screen. 14 Remove the IPC screen. 15 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 16 Remove the camera monitor screen. 17 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 18 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 19 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 20 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 21 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 22 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 23 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 24 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 25 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 26 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 27 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 28 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 29 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 30 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 31 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 32 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 33 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt.

34 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 35 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 36 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 37 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 38 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 39 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 40 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 41 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 42 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 43 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 44 Remove the AR-HUD. 45 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 46 Remove the smart appliance box. 47 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 48 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 49 Remove the Tbox-gw. 50 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 51 Remove the EBS controller assy. 52 Remove the EBS bracket. 53 Remove the body domain control unit. 54 Remove the controller bracket assy. 55 Remove the cross car beam pole. 56 Remove the cross car beam assy. 57 Remove the side blowing air duct assy-lh. 58 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.

Figure p1052

59 Disengage 2 clips of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 60 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.

Figure p1053
Figure p1053
Figure p1053

61 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 62 Disconnect the A/C pipeline. 63 Remove 1 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 64 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. Installation Procedures

Figure p1054
Figure p1054

1 Move the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.

Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect the A/C pipeline. 4 Install 2 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.

Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

5 Install 3 fixing nuts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.

Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6 Install 2 clips of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left. 7 Connect 2 harness connectors of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front left.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

8 Install the side blowing air duct assy-lh. 9 Install the cross car beam assy. 10 Install the cross car beam pole. 11 Install the controller bracket assy. 12 Install the body domain control unit. 13 Install the EBS bracket. 14 Install the EBS controller assy. 15 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 16 Install the Tbox-gw. 17 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 18 Install the cockpit domain controller. 19 Install the smart appliance box. 20 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 21 Install the AR-HUD. 22 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 23 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 24 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 25 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 26 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 27 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 28 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 29 Install the storage box assy-rh. 30 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 31 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 32 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 33 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 34 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 35 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 36 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 37 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 38 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 39 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 40 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 41 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 42 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 43 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh.

44 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 45 Install the base-rh display brkt. 46 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 47 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 48 Install the base-lh display brkt. 49 Install the camera monitor screen. 50 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 51 Install the IPC screen. 52 Install the CAR screen. 53 Install the IVI screen. 54 Install the ip brim assy. 55 Install the cover-combination switch-lor. 56 Install the steering wheel assy. 57 Install the dab decorative cove. 58 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 59 Install the wiper arm assy. 60 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 61 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 62 Connect the battery negative cable. 63 Close the front flip cover plate. 64 Close the door.

7.1.6.2 Replacement of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - front Right

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 6 Remove the wiper arm assy. 7 Remove the assembly of the front windshield cover. 8 Remove the dab decorative cove. 9 Remove the steering wheel assy. 10 Remove the cover-combination switch-lor. 11 Remove the ip brim assy. 12 Remove the IVI screen. 13 Remove the CAR screen. 14 Remove the IPC screen. 15 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt.

16 Remove the camera monitor screen. 17 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 18 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 19 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 20 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 21 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 22 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 23 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 24 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 25 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 26 Remove the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 27 Remove the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 28 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder. 29 Remove the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 30 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 31 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 32 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 33 Remove the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 34 Remove the switch panel assy-rh. 35 Remove the lower switch panel assy-rh. 36 Remove the storage box assy-rh. 37 Remove the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 38 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 39 Remove the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 40 Remove the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 41 Remove the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 42 Remove the cover assy-defrost frt. 43 Remove the ontology assy under the dashboard. 44 Remove the AR-HUD. 45 Remove the fixing bracket-lh. 46 Remove the smart appliance box. 47 Remove the cockpit domain controller. 48 Remove the cockpit domain controller bracket. 49 Remove the Tbox-gw. 50 Remove the Tbox-gw bracket. 51 Remove the EBS controller assy.

52 Remove the EBS bracket. 53 Remove the body domain control unit. 54 Remove the controller bracket assy. 55 Remove the cross car beam pole. 56 Remove the cross car beam assy. 57 Remove the blowing air duct assy-rh. 58 Remove the storage box bracket assy. 59 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.

Figure p1060
Figure p1060

60 Disengage 2 clips of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 61 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 62 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 63 Disconnect the A/C pipeline.

Figure p1061
Figure p1061
Figure p1061

64 Remove 1 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. 65 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right. Installation Procedures 1 Move the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.

Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1062

3 Connect the A/C pipeline. 4 Install 3 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.

Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

5 Install 3 fixing nuts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.

Torque: (7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6 Connect 2 clips of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.

7 Connect 2 harness connectors of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - front right.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

8 Install the storage box bracket assy. 9 Install the blowing air duct assy-rh. 10 Install the cross car beam assy. 11 Install the cross car beam pole. 12 Install the controller bracket assy. 13 Install the body domain control unit. 14 Install the EBS bracket. 15 Install the EBS controller assy. 16 Install the Tbox-gw bracket. 17 Install the Tbox-gw. 18 Install the cockpit domain controller bracket. 19 Install the cockpit domain controller.

20 Install the smart appliance box. 21 Install the fixing bracket-lh. 22 Install the AR-HUD. 23 Install the ontology assy under the dashboard. 24 Install the cover assy-defrost frt. 25 Install the decorative plate assy-dashboard-rh frt. 26 Install the lor trim assy-dashboard-rh frt. 27 Install the trim assy-dashboard-lh frt. 28 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 29 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-rh. 30 Install the storage box assy-rh. 31 Install the lower switch panel assy-rh. 32 Install the switch panel assy-rh. 33 Install the cover assy-dashboard-rh frt. 34 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 35 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 36 Install the air vent decorative plate assy-lh. 37 Install the instrument panel trim panel assy- upper lh. 38 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder. 39 Install the switch panel lower trim assy-lh. 40 Install the trim assy on the switch panel-lh. 41 Install the cover assy-dashboard-lh frt. 42 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 43 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 44 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 45 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 46 Install the base-rh display brkt. 47 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 48 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 49 Install the base-lh display brkt. 50 Install the camera monitor screen. 51 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 52 Install the IPC screen. 53 Install the CAR screen. 54 Install the IVI screen. 55 Install the ip brim assy. 56 Install the cover-combination switch-lor.

57 Install the steering wheel assy. 58 Install the dab decorative cove. 59 Install the assembly of the front windshield cover. 60 Install the wiper arm assy. 61 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 62 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 63 Connect the battery negative cable. 64 Close the front flip cover plate. 65 Close the door.

7.1.6.3 Replacement of HVAC Assembly (including PTC) - Rear

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 6 Remove the rear A/C lower air duct. 7 Remove the middle drawer assembly. 8 Remove the fire extinguisher. 9 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the front USB interface. 11 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 13 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 16 Remove the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 17 Remove the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 18 Remove the 120V receptacle. 19 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). 20 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear). 21 Remove the toolbox trim panel assembly.

22 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 23 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 24 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.

Figure p1067
Figure p1067
Figure p1067

25 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 26 Pull out the harness, and disconnect 1 harness connector of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.

Figure p1068
Figure p1068
Figure p1068

27 After flipping the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear, remove 1 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 28 Remove the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. Installation Procedures 1 Move the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.

Torque:(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1069

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install 4 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.

Torque:(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

5 Install 2 fixing bolt of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

6 Install 1 fixing clip of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear. 7 Connect 1 harness connector of the HVAC assembly (including PTC) - rear.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

8 Install the toolbox trim panel assembly. 9 Install the interior temperature sensor (rear). 10 Install the vehicle power supply (12V). 11 Install the 120V receptacle. 12 Install the toolbox left trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left middle side wall middle trim panel assembly. 14 Install the left middle side wall lower trim panel assembly. 15 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Install the left switch panel assembly. 18 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 19 Install the front USB interface.

20 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 21 Install the fire extinguisher. 22 Install the middle drawer assembly. 23 Install the rear A/C lower air duct. 24 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 25 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 26 Connect the battery negative cable. 27 Close the front flip cover plate. 28 Close the door.

7.1.6.4 Replacement of A/C Compressor Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 7 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Remove the electric oil pump.

14 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the A/C compressor assembly. 15 Remove 1 ground harness fixing bolt of the A/C compressor assembly, and detach the ground harness. 16 Remove 2 fixing bolts to disconnect the A/C pipeline from the A/C compressor.

Figure p1074
Figure p1074
Figure p1074

17 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the A/C compressor assembly. 18 Remove the A/C compressor assembly.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the A/C compressor assembly, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the A/C compressor assembly to the mounting position.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the A/C compressor assembly, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.

2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the A/C compressor assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 1.5) ft lbs
Figure p1075

3 Connect the A/C pipeline to the A/C compressor, and install 2 fixing bolts.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 1.5) ft lbs

4 Connect the ground harness, and install 1 ground harness fixing bolt of the A/C compressor assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect 2 harness connectors of the A/C compressor assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Install the electric oil pump. 7 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 8 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 9 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 10 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 11 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the left front wheel housing body. 13 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 14 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 15 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.

7.1.6.5 Replacement of Exterior Temperature Sensor

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 5 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly.

6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the exterior temperature sensor. 7 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the exterior temperature sensor. 8 Remove the exterior temperature sensor. Installation Procedures

Figure p1078
Figure p1078

1 Move the exterior temperature sensor to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing clip of the exterior temperature sensor. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the exterior temperature sensor.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 5 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door

7.1.6.6 Replacement of Interior Temperature Sensor (rear)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the interior temperature sensor (rear). 5 Remove 2 fixing screws of the interior temperature sensor (rear). 6 Remove the interior temperature sensor (rear). Installation Procedures

Figure p1080
Figure p1080

1 Move the interior temperature sensor (rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the interior temperature sensor (rear). 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the interior temperature sensor (rear).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.1.6.7 Replacement of Front A/C Filter Element

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 4 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly.

5 Press 2 clips of the cover plate. 6 Remove the cover plate. 7 Pull out the front A/C filter element. Installation Procedures

Figure p1082
Figure p1082

1 Install the front A/C filter element. 2 Install the cover plate. 3 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 4 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1083

7.1.6.8 Replacement of Rear A/C Filter Element

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Lift up the sleeper mat assembly.

3 Press 2 clips of the cover plate. 4 Remove the cover plate. 5 Pull out the rear A/C filter element. Installation Procedures

Figure p1085
Figure p1085

1 Install the rear A/C filter element. 2 Install the cover plate.

Figure p1086

3 Install the sleeper mat assembly. 4 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the power domain controller bracket to the battery pressure plate 2M6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the power domain controller bracket to the battery pressure plate 3M6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the bracket of the power domain controller to the power domain controller assemblyM6(11 +/- 1.5) ft lbs

7.2 Vehicle Control Unit (VCU) Device

7.2.1 Specifications

7.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1089

7.2.2 Decomposition Diagram

7.2.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Vehicle Domain Controller 3. Vehicle Controller Assy Bracket 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt

7.2.3 System Schematic Diagram

7.2.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

Vehicle domain controller(VDC)

EVCC

Fault CodeFault DescriptionTroubleshooting
P100000Low voltage power supply undervoltage LvARefer to VDC Power Fault
P100100Low voltage power supply undervoltage LvB
P100200Low-voltage power supply overvoltage LvA
P100300Low-voltage power supply overvoltage LvB
P100402DCDC1 output undervoltage
P100502DCDC1 output overvoltage
P103D10Drive thermal management, SJB power supply failure
P103E10Battery thermal management, SJB power supply failure
U019887VCAN bus-offRefer to VDC Communication Fault
U014087Lost Communication with BDCU
U01A087Lost Communication with SJB_UP
U019987Lost Communication with DCM
U01A187Lost Communication with SJB_UN
U015687missing CDCU

7.2.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

7.2.4.1 Diagnosis Description

Before diagnosing the fault of the vehicle controller device, understand and be familiar with the working principle of the vehicle controller device, and then start system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs. More importantly, this Helps determine the situation described by the customer is normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the vehicle controller device should start with Routine Inspection to guide the maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of

faulty parts. 7.2.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check after-sales installation devices that may affect the operation of the vehicle controller device system, and ensure that these devices cannot affect the operation of the vehicle controller device system.

• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 7.2.4.3 DTC Confirmation

1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm whether the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 7.2.4.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

VDC

Fault CodeFault DescriptionTroubleshooting
U017487Lost Communication with CMU01
U017587Lost Communication with CMU02
U017687Lost Communication with CMU03
U017787Lost Communication with CMU04
U017887Lost Communication with CMU05
U017987Lost Communication with CMU06
U017A87Lost Communication with PDU1
U017B87Lost Communication with PDU2
U017C87Lost Communication with PDU3
U012A87Lost Communication with MCU1
U012B87Lost Communication with MCU2
U012C87Lost Communication with MCU3
U012D87Lost Communication with MCU4
U010187TCU1 Communication failure
U010287TCU2 Communication failure
U01B387GSM Communication failure
U012187missing EBS
U013287Lost Communication with ECAS
U012887Lost Communication with EPB
U008C88PCAN2_Busoff
U008D88PCAN3_Busoff
U008E88PCAN4_Busoff
U008B88ChargrCAN_Busoff
U007988CANFD7_Busoff
U008088CANFD10_Busoff
P101010HTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit the power supplyRefer to VDC Internal Fault
P101110HTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit to ground
P101210HTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply
P101310HTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit to ground
P101410LTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply
P101510LTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit to ground
P101610LTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply
P101710LTP_P Sensor 2 short circuit to ground
P101810HPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply
P101910HPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit to ground
Fault CodeFault DescriptionTroubleshooting
P101A10HPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply
P101B10HPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit to ground
P101C10LPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit the power supply
P101D10LPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit to ground
P101E10LPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit the power supply
P101F10LPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit to ground
P102C10AccPed 1, short circuit the power supplyRefer to Accelerator Pedal Fault
P102D10AccPed 2, short circuit the power supply
P102E10AccPed 1, short circuit to ground
P102F10AccPed 2, short circuit to ground
P103010Associated fault of two accelerator pedals
P103110Both accelerator pedals are wrong at the same time
P103910The motor liquid level sensor is short of liquidRefer to Motor Coolant Level Sensor Fault
P103A10The battery liquid level sensor is short of liquidRefer to Battery Coolant Level Sensor Fault
P103310Motor fan FaultRefer to Motor Fan Fault
P103610Motor and water pump FaultRefer to Motor And Water Pump Fault
P103410Battery fan 1 failureRefer to Left Battery Fan Fault
P103510Battery fan 2 failureRefer to Right Battery Fan Fault
P103710Battery Pump 1 FaultRefer to Left Battery Water Pump Fault
P103810Battery Pump 2 FaulteRefer to Right Battery Water Pump Fault
P108130CMU1 Thermal runaway faultRefer to Battery Thermal Runaway Fault
P108230CMU2 Thermal runaway fault
P108330CMU3 Thermal runaway fault
P108430CMU4 Thermal runaway fault
P108530CMU5 Thermal runaway fault
P108630CMU6 Thermal runaway fault
P108730Hard wire detection thermal runaway fault
P102010FCT Sensor 1, Open-circuit faultRefer to MCS Fast Charging Port Temperature Detection Signal Fault
P102110FCT Sensor 1, Short-circuit fault
P102210FCT Sensor 2, Open-circuit fault
P102310FCT Sensor 2, Short-circuit fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionTroubleshooting
P108830Fast charge temperature check 1 Overtemperature LvA
P108930Fast charge temperature check 2 Overtemperature LvA
P108C30Fast charge temperature check 1 Overtemperature LvB
P108D30Fast charge temperature check 2 Overtemperature LvB
P102810ExhT Sensor 1, short circuit the power supplyRefer to Left Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault
P102910ExhT Sensor 1, short circuit to ground
P102A10ExhT Sensor 2, short circuit the power supplyRefer to Right Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault
P102B10ExhT Sensor 2, short circuit to ground
P10C040NormRdyFltChkFailr_StRefer to VDC Reports MCU Internal Fault
P10E563MCU failure
P104953MCU1 Communication FaultRefer to VDC Reports MCU Communication Fault
P104A53MCU2 Communication Fault
P104B53MCU3 Communication Fault
P104C53MCU4 Communication Fault
P10A530MCU1 High voltage interlock faultRefer to VDC Reports MCU High Voltage Interlock Fault
P10A630MCU2 High voltage interlock fault
P10A730MCU3 High voltage interlock fault
P10A830MCU4 High voltage interlock fault
P107430CMU1 total voltage is too highRefer to VDC Reports Internal Fault In CMU
P107530CMU1 total voltage is too low
P107630CMU2 total voltage is too high
P107730CMU2 total voltage is too low
P107830CMU3 total voltage is too high
P107930CMU3 total voltage is too low
P107A30CMU4 total voltage is too high
P107B30CMU4 total voltage is too low
P107C30CMU5 total voltage is too high
P107D30CMU5 total voltage is too low
P107E30CMU6 total voltage is too high
P107F30CMU6 total voltage is too low
P108030The voltage difference between packages is too high
Fault CodeFault DescriptionTroubleshooting
P10E061Battery failure
P109030CMU1 Charge overcurrent LvBRefer to VDC Reports CMU High Voltage Circuit Fault
P109130CMU1 Charge overcurrent LvA
P109230CMU2 Charge overcurrent LvB
P109330CMU2 Charge overcurrent LvA
P109430CMU3 Charge overcurrent LvB
P109530CMU3 Charge overcurrent LvA
P109630CMU4 Charge overcurrent LvB
P109730CMU4 Charge overcurrent LvA
P109830CMU5 Charge overcurrent LvB
P109930CMU5 Charge overcurrent LvA
P109A30CMU6 Charge overcurrent LvB
P109B30CMU6 Charge overcurrent LvA
P109F30CMU1 High Voltage Interlock FaultRefer to VDC Reports CMU High Voltage Interlock Fault
P10A030CMU2 High Voltage Interlock Fault
P10A130CMU3 High Voltage Interlock Fault
P10A230CMU4 High Voltage Interlock Fault
P10A330CMU5 High Voltage Interlock Fault
P10A430CMU6 High Voltage Interlock Fault
P105230CMU1 Cell overtempRefer to VDC Reports Abnormal CMU Temperature
P105330CMU1 Cell undertemp
P105630CMU2 Cell overtemp
P105730CMU2 Cell undertemp
P105A30CMU3 Cell overtemp
P105B30CMU3 Cell undertemp
P105E30CMU4 Cell overtemp
P105F30CMU4 Cell undertemp
P106230CMU5 Cell overtemp
P106330CMU5 Cell undertemp
P106630CMU6 Cell overtemp
P106730CMU6 Cell undertemp
P106E30CMU1 Cell temp difference is large
P106F30CMU2 Cell temp difference is large
P107030CMU3 Cell temp difference is large
P107130CMU4 Cell temp difference is large
P107230CMU5 Cell temp difference is large
P107330CMU6 Cell temp difference is large
Fault CodeFault DescriptionTroubleshooting
P10AA30The temperature difference between packages is too high
P105030CMU1 Cell overvoltageRefer to VDC Reports Abnormal Voltage Of CMU Unit
P105130CMU1 Cell undervoltage
P105430CMU2 Cell overvoltage
P105530CMU2 Cell undervoltage
P105830CMU3 Cell overvoltage
P105930CMU3 Cell undervoltage
P105C30CMU4 Cell overvoltage
P105D30CMU4 Cell undervoltage
P106030CMU5 Cell overvoltage
P106130CMU5 Cell undervoltage
P106430CMU6 Cell overvoltage
P106530CMU6 Cell undervoltage
P106830CMU1 Cell volt difference is large
P106930CMU2 Cell volt difference is large
P106A30CMU3 Cell volt difference is large
P106B30CMU4 Cell volt difference is large
P106C30CMU5 Cell volt difference is large
P106D30CMU6 Cell volt difference is large
P104051CMU1 CommunicationFaultRefer to VDC Reports CMU Communication Fault
P104151CMU2 Communication Fault
P104251CMU3 Communication Fault
P104351CMU4 Communication Fault
P104451CMU5 Communication Fault
P104551CMU6 Communication Fault
P10AD40TCU1 ratio anomalyRefer to VDC Reports TCU Internal Fault
P10AE40TCU2 ratio anomaly
P10E663TCU failure
P104D53TCU1 Communication failureRefer to VDC Reports TCU Communication Fault
P104E53TCU2 Communication failure
P10E162PDU_PDU failureRefer to VDC Reports Internal Fault Of PDU
P10E262PDU_DCAC failure
P10E362PDU_DCDC failure
P104652PDU_PDU Communication failureRefer to VDC Reports PDU Communication Fault
P104752PDU_DCAC Communication failure
P104852PDU_DCDC Communication failure
Fault CodeFault DescriptionTroubleshooting
P10C240NormRdy_Gear_ChkFailr_StRefer to VDC Reports GSM Internal Fault
P10E763GSM failure
P104F53GSM Communication failureRefer to VDC Reports GSM Communication Fault
U120587LIN flt statusRefer to VDC LIN Communication Fault
P10AF40NormupBnRlyChkFailr_StRefer to CMU Wake-up Signal Fault
P10BA40ChUpBnRlyChkFailr_St
P10B640NormupPduadhnChkFailr_StRefer to PDU Wake-up Signal Fault
P10B740NormupAux_Drv_RlyChkFailr_St
P10B840NormupDC_OutVChkFailr_St
P10B940NormupMain_Drv_RlyChkFailr_St
P10BB40ChUpPduadhnChkFailr_St
P10BC40ChUpPDUIsnOnChkFailr_St
P10BD40ChUpChpRlyChkFailr_St
P10BE40ChUpAux_Drv_RlyChkFailr_St
P10BF40ChUpDC_OutVChkFailr_St
P100602DCDC2 output undervoltageRefer to DCDC2 Voltage Output Fault
P100702DCDC2 output overvoltage
P103B10Left grid motor failureRefer to Active Grille Shutter Fault
P103C10Right grid motor failure
P100852WPTC1 Communication failureRefer to Left Battery Water Heater Fault
P100952WPTC2 Communication failureRefer to Fault In The Right Water Heater Of The Battery
P100A52BLR1 Communication failureRefer to Left Battery Compressor Fault
P100B52BLR2 Communication failureRefer to Battery Right Compressor Fault
P109C30Insulation fault LvCRefer to Insulation Fault
P109D30Insulation fault LvB
P109E30Insulation fault LvA
P10AC40Brake pressure rise monitoring during air pump operationRefer to Air Compressor Fault
P10C140NormRdy_AirPChkFailr_St
P10C340NormRdy_Escl_ChkFailr_StRefer to ESCL Fault
P10E863IBS failureRefer to IBS Fault
P10E462thermal management system failureRefer to Thermal Management System Fault
Diagnostic Tool Display ItemsTest PartsSpan Of ControlDiagnosis Description
Drive water pump controlMotor water pumpTurn on/offAccording to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the motor and water pump to turn on/off
Drive fan controlMotor fanTurn on/offControl the motor fan to turn on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Battery water pump 1 controlBattery water pump 1Turn on/offAccording to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the battery water pump 1 to turn on/off
Battery water pump 2 controlBattery water pump 2Turn on/offAccording to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the battery water pump 2 to turn on/off
Battery fan 1 controlBattery fan 1Turn on/offAccording to the instructions of the diagnostic tool, control the battery fan 1 to turn on/off
Battery fan 2 controlBattery fan 2Turn on/offAccording to the instructions of the diagnostic tool, control the battery fan 2 to turn on/off
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P100000Low voltage power supply undervoltage LvAPower on, The low-voltage power supply is less than or equal to 18V for 10s1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.VDC

7.2.4.5 Action Test List

By reading the "action test" on the fault diagnosis instrument, the working status of the relays and actuators controlled by VDC can be checked without disassembling any parts. Before performing relevant fault diagnosis on the control system, performing an action test is a prerequisite for troubleshooting, which can shorten the troubleshooting time.

Note
The data under normal conditions are listed in the table below for reference only. Never rely solely on these reference values to determine whether a part has failed. Usually, a normal working vehicle can be compared with the diagnosed vehicle in the same state to determine whether the diagnosed vehicle data is normal in the current state.

a.Perform vehicle power-on operation. b.Connect the diagnostic tool. c.Select "VDC"/"Action Test". d.Refer to the table below for proactive testing.

7.2.4.6 VDC Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P100100Low voltage power supply undervoltage LvBPower on, The low-voltage power supply is less than or equal to 10V for 2s
P100200Low-voltage power supply overvoltage LvAPower on, The low-voltage power supply is greater than or equal to 32V for 10s
P100300Low-voltage power supply overvoltage LvBPower on, The low-voltage power supply is greater than or equal to 35V for 2s
P100402DCDC1 output undervoltageHV Satus, The DCDC1 function takes effect, DCDC1 output voltage is less than or equal to 23V for 10s
P100502DCDC1 output overvoltageHV Satus, The DCDC1 function takes effect, DCDC1 output voltage is greater than or equal to 32V for 10s
P103D10Drive thermal management, SJB power supply failurePower on, The VDC is enabled, but SJB does not provide power supply for 5s
P103E10Battery thermal management, SJB power supply failurePower on, The VDC is enabled, but SJB does not provide power supply and the maximum temperature of the battery is greater than or equal to 97 degrees ferenhieght for 5s

2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.6 VDC Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U019887Lost Communication With T-BOXKL15 valid, 0x18FF18FBx lost, last for 2s1.Wiring harness 2.VDC
U014087Lost communication with BDCUKL15 valid, 0x18FF1921x lost, last for 1s
U01A087Lost Communication With SJB_UPKL15 valid, 0x18FF3354x lost, last for 1s
U019987Lost Communication With DCMKL15 valid, 0x18FDA54Fx lost, last for 1s
U01A187Lost Communication With SJB_UNKL15 valid, 0x18FF2359x lost, last for 1s
U015687Lost Communication With CDCUKL15 valid, 0x18FF1241x lost, last for 2s
U017487Lost Communication With CMU01KL15 valid, 0x18082768x lost, last for 1s
U017587Lost Communication With CMU02KL15 valid, 0x18082769x lost, last for 1s
U017687Lost Communication With CMU03KL15 valid, 0x1808276Ax lost, last for 1s
U017787Lost Communication With CMU04KL15 valid, 0x1808276Ax lost, last for 1s
U017887Lost Communication With CMU05KL15 valid, 0x1808276Cx lost, last for 1s
U017987Lost Communication With CMU06KL15 valid, 0x1808276Dx lost, last for 1s
U017A87Lost Communication With PDU1KL15 valid, 0x18012778x lost, last for 1s
U017B87Lost Communication With PDU2KL15 valid, 0x1804276Ex lost, last for 1s
U017C87Lost Communication With PDU3KL15 valid, 0x1801276Fx lost, last for 1s

Step 3:Check there are other module power fault codes besides VDC? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the VDC power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.7 VDC Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U012A87Lost Communication With MCU1KL15 valid, 0x18012774x lost, last for 0.5s
U012B87Lost Communication With MCU2KL15 valid, 0x18012775x lost, last for 0.5s
U012C87Lost Communication With MCU3KL15 valid, 0x18012776x lost, last for 0.5s
U012D87Lost Communication With MCU4KL15 valid, 0x18012777x lost, last for 0.5s
U010187TCU1 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18012703x lost, last for 0.5s >
U010287TCU2 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18012703x lost, last for 0.5s
U01B387GSM Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x0C010305x lost, last for 0.5s
U012187Lost Communication With EBSKL15 valid, 0x18F0010Bx lost, last for 1s
U013287Lost Communication With ECASKL15 valid, 0x18FECA2Fx lost, last for 5s
U012887Lost Communication With EPBKL15 valid, 0x18FE1250x lost, last for 1s
U008C88PCAN2_BusoffEnter busoff
U008D88PCAN3_BusoffEnter busoff
U008E88PCAN4_BusoffEnter busoff
U008B88ChargrCAN_BusoffEnter busoff
U007988CANFD7_BusoffEnter busoff
U008088CANFD10_BusoffEnter busoff

2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.7 VDC Communication Fault — circuit diagram (1/3)
7.2.4.7 VDC Communication Fault — circuit diagram (2/3)
7.2.4.7 VDC Communication Fault — circuit diagram (3/3)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN1 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P101010HTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4120 for 10s1.VDC
P101110HTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than 0 for 10s
P101210HTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4120 for 10s)
P101310HTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than 0 for 10s
P101410LTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4120 for 10s)
P101510LTP_P Sensor 1, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than 0 for 10s
P101610LTP_P Sensor 2, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4120 for 10s
P101710LTP_P Sensor 2 short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than 0 for 10s
P101810HPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4100 for 10s
P101910HPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 40 for 10s
P101A10HPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4100 for 10s
P101B10HPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 40 for 10s

Step 4:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity Step 6:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Step 7:Check the CANFD7 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.8 VDC Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P101C10LPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4100 for 10s
P101D10LPT_T Sensor 1, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 40 for 10s
P101E10LPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 4100 for 10s
P101F10LPT_T Sensor 2, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 40 for 10s
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P102C10AccPed 1, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 3250 for 10s1.Wiring harness 2.Accelerator pedal 3.VDC
P102D10AccPed 2, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 1650 for 10s
P102E10AccPed 1, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 550 for 10s
P102F10AccPed 2, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 250 for 10s
P103010Associated fault of two accelerator pedalsPower on, The ratio of accelerator pedal opening is not in the range of 1.5 to 2.5, Less than or equal to 1.4 or greater than or equal to 2.6 lasts for 10s
P103110Both accelerator pedals are wrong at the same timePower on, The AD1 value is greater than or equal to 3250 and the AD2 value is greater than or equal to 1650 for 10s, Or the AD1 value is less than or equal to 550 and the AD2 value is less than or equal to 250 for 10s

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 4:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.9 Accelerator Pedal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.9 Accelerator Pedal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the accelerator pedal and VDC.

SensorAccelerator Pedal AngleSignal Output Voltage
Accelerator pedal sensor 10.375 ± 0.05V
Accelerator pedal sensor 20.375 ± 0.05V
Accelerator pedal sensor 113.1°3.84 ± 0.1V
Accelerator pedal sensor 213.1°1.92 ± 0.1V

Step 4:Check the resistance of the accelerator pedal at different openings is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the accelerator pedal. Refer to Replacement Of Accelerator Pedal Assembly Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.10 Left High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.10 Left High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left high pressure & temperature sensor) and VDC.

Step 3:Check and replace the left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly

7.2.4.11 Right High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.11 Right High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right high pressure & temperature sensor) and VDC.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P103910The motor liquid level sensor is short of liquidPower on, The hard cable fault signal lasts for 10s1.Wiring harness 2. Motor cooling liquid level sensor 3.VDC

Step 3:Replace the right thermal management unit (right high pressure & temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Right) Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly

7.2.4.12 Motor Coolant Level Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.12 Motor Coolant Level Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the motor coolant level sensor and VDC.

Liquid Level StatusSwitch Status
Liquid levelThe motor coolant level sensor has a signal
No liquid levelMotor coolant level sensor has no signal
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P103A10The battery liquid level sensor is short of liquidPower on, The hard cable fault signal lasts for 10s1.Wiring harness 2.Battery coolant level sensor 3.VDC

Step 4:Check the motor coolant level sensor ground harness. Step 5:Check the motor coolant level sensor is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the motor coolant level sensor. Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.13 Battery Coolant Level Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.13 Battery Coolant Level Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the battery coolant level sensor and VDC.

Liquid Level StatusSwitch Status
Liquid levelBattery coolant level sensor has signal
No liquid levelBattery coolant level sensor no signal
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P103310Motor fan failurePower on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds1.Wiring harness 2. Motor fan 3.VDC

Step 4:Check the battery coolant level sensor grounding harness. Step 5:Check the battery coolant level sensor is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the Battery coolant level sensor. Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.14 Motor Fan Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.14 Motor Fan Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the motor fan power supply and grounding harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P103610Motor pump failurePower on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds1.Wiring harness 2.Motor pump failure 3.VDC

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the motor fan and VDC. Step 5:Enter the diagnostic instrument interface VDC-action test and perform the "motor fan, open/close" action test. Check the motor fan operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the motor fan. Refer to Replacement Of Front End Module Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.15 Motor And Water Pump Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.15 Motor And Water Pump Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the motor and water pump.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P103410Battery fan 1 failurePower on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1) 3. Left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2) 4.VDC

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the motor water pump and VDC. Step 5:Enter the VDC-action test of the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "motor water pump, open/close" action test. Check the motor water pump operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic tool. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the motor water pump. Refer to Replacement Of Electronic Water Pump Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.16 Left Battery Fan Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.16 Left Battery Fan Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P103510Battery fan 2 failurePower on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1) 3. Right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2) 4.VDC

Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1), left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2). Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1), left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2) and VDC. Step 5:Enter the VDC-action test of the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Battery fan 1, open/close" action test. Check the left battery fan operates according to the diagnostic tool's instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1) and the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.17 Right Battery Fan Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.17 Right Battery Fan Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P103710Battery Pump 1 FaultPower on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery water pump) 3.VDC

Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1), right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2). Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1), the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2) and VDC. Step 5:Enter the VDC-action test of the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Battery fan 2, open/close" action test. Check the right battery fan operates according to the diagnostic tool's instructions. – Yes: Nex step step step step step step stept step step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1) and right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2). Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.18 Left Battery Water Pump Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.18 Left Battery Water Pump Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P103810Battery pump 2 failurePower on, The power supply is valid, the fan is enabled, and the hard cable fault signal is valid for 10 seconds1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right battery water pump) 3.VDC

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump) and VDC. Step 5:Enter the diagnostic instrument interface VDC-action test and perform the "battery water pump 1, open/close" action test. Check the left battery water pump operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Nex step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.19 Right Battery Water Pump Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.19 Right Battery Water Pump Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P108130CMU1 Thermal runaway faultCMU1 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear1.Battery pack 2. Wiring harness 3.VDC
P108230CMU2 Thermal runaway faultCMU2 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear
P108330CMU3 Thermal runaway faultCMU4 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear
P108430CMU4 Thermal runaway faultCMU4 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear
P108530CMU5 Thermal runaway faultCMU5 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear
P108630CMU6 Thermal runaway faultCMU6 Thermal runaway is valid; Power-off clear
P108730Hard wire detection thermal runaway faultHard wire thermal runaway is valid; Hard wire thermal runaway is invalid, automatically cleared

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump) and VDC. Step 5:Enter the VDC-action test of the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "battery water pump 2, open/close" action test. Check the right battery water pump operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump). Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.20 Battery Thermal Runaway Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.20 Battery Thermal Runaway Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.2.4.20 Battery Thermal Runaway Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P102010FCT Sensor 1, Open- circuit faultPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to X for 10s X1=4300, X2=4300, X3=8001. MCS fast charging port 2. Wiring harness 3.VDC
P102110FCT Sensor 1, Short- circuit faultPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 110 for 10s M1=20, M2=20, M3=40
P102210FCT Sensor 2, Open- circuit faultPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to X for 10s PwrOn X1=4300, X2=4300, X3=800
P102310FCT Sensor 2, Short- circuit faultPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 110 for 10s PwrOn M1=20, M2=20, M3=40
P108830Fast charge temperature check 1 Overtemperature LvATA_NTC1≥100℃(2s),≤95℃clear(2s)
P108930Fast charge temperature check 2 Overtemperature LvATA_NTC2≥100℃(2s),≤95℃clear(2s)
P108C30Fast charge temperature check 1 Overtemperature LvBTA_NTC1≥120℃(1s),Power-off clear
P108D30Fast charge temperature check 2 Overtemperature LvBTA_NTC1≥120℃(1s),Power-off clear

Step 3:Check if the vehicle is experiencing thermal runaway? – Yes: A. Stop vehicle charging operations immediately. B. Park the vehicle in a suitable temperature environment and let it sit. C. Execute the operation to release the high voltage system. D. Check vehicle thermal management system fault codes. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the battery pack thermal runaway signal harness. Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.21 MCS Fast Charging Port Temperature Detection Signal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.21 MCS Fast Charging Port Temperature Detection Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while.

Step 4:Check the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step Step 5:Check the temperature control signal harness between the MCS fast charging port and VDC. Step 6:Replace the MCS fast charging port. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.22 Brake Pedal Switch Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.22 Brake Pedal Switch Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the brake pedal switch power supply and grounding harness. Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the brake pedal switch and VDC.

Pedal statusSwitch status
Depress the brake pedalBrake pedal switch on
Release the brake pedalBrake pedal switch disconnected

Step 4:Check the brake pedal switch is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the brake pedal switch. Refer to Replacement Of Brake Pedal Assembly Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly

7.2.4.23 Left Low Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.23 Left Low Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left low pressure & temperature sensor) and VDC.

Step 3:Replace the left thermal management unit (left low pressure & temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly

7.2.4.24 Right Low Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.24 Right Low Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right low pressure & temperature sensor) and VDC.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P102810ExhT Sensor 1, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 3900 for 10s1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left exhaust temperature sensor) 3.VDC
P102910ExhT Sensor 1, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 80 for 10s

Step 3:Replace the right thermal management unit (right low pressure & temperature sensor). Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly

7.2.4.25 Left Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.25 Left Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left thermal management unit (left exhaust temperature sensor) and VDC.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P102A10ExhT Sensor 2, short circuit the power supplyPower on, The AD value is greater than or equal to 3900 for 10s1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right exhaust temperature sensor) 3.VDC
P102B10ExhT Sensor 2, short circuit to groundPower on, The AD value is less than or equal to 80 for 10s

Step 4:Replace the left thermal management unit (left exhaust temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.26 Right Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.26 Right Exhaust Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right thermal management unit (right exhaust temperature sensor) and VDC.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10C040NormRdyFltChkFailr_ StKKL15 ON,After the vehicle is on the high voltage, the brakes are stepped on, and the driving fault is prohibited1.VDC 2. Electric drive module
P10E563MCU failureThe MCU reports fault level and fault code
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P104953MCU1 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18012774x lost, last for 5s1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive module 3.VDC
P104A53MCU2 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18012775x lost, last for 5s
P104B53MCU3 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18012776x lost, last for 5s
P104C53MCU4 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18012777x lost, last for 5s

Step 4:Replace the right thermal management unit (right exhaust temperature sensor). Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.27 VDC Reports MCU Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check there are MCU related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting MCU related faults. – No: Nex step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the electric drive module. Step 5:Replace the electric drive module. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle . Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.28 VDC Reports MCU Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10A530MCU1 High voltage interlock faultMCU1 High voltage interlock valid(1s),invalid(1s), automatically cleared1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3. Electric drive module 4.VDC
P10A630MCU2 High voltage interlock faultMCU2 High voltage interlock valid(1s),invalid(1s), automatically cleared
P10A730MCU3 High voltage interlock faultMCU3 High voltage interlock valid(1s),invalid(1s), automatically cleared
P10A830MCU4 High voltage interlock faultMCU4 High voltage interlock valid(1s),invalid(1s), automatically cleared

Step 3:Check there are MCU related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting MCU related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the electric drive module. Step 6:Replace the electric drive module. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle . Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.29 VDC Reports MCU High Voltage Interlock Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check there are MCU related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting MCU related faults. – No: Nex step Step 4:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Check the high-voltage interlock wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the electric drive module. Step 7:Replace the electric drive module. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle . Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.30 VDC Reports Internal Fault In CMU

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P107430CMU1 total voltage is too highNCM: VPack1≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack1≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP: VPack1≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s)1.VDC 2.Battery pack
P107530CMU1 total voltage is too lowNCM: VPack1≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack1≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05
P107630CMU2 total voltage is too highNCM: VPack2≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack2≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack2≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s)
P107730CMU2 total voltage is too lowNCM: VPack2≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack2≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05
P107830CMU3 total voltage is too highNCM: VPack3≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack3≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack3≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s)
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P107930CMU3 total voltage is too lowNCM: VPack3≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack3≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05
P107A30CMU4 total voltage is too highNCM: VPack4≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack4≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack4≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s)
P107B30CMU4 total voltage is too lowNCM: VPack4≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack4≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05
P107C30CMU5 total voltage is too highNCM: VPack5≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack5≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack5≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s)
P107D30CMU5 total voltage is too lowNCM: VPack5≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack5≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P107E30CMU6 total voltage is too highNCM: VPack6≥874V(4.28*204)(2s),≤871V(4.27*204) cleear (2s) VPack6≥878V(4.30*204)(2s),≤875V(4.29*204) cleear ((2s) LFP:VPack6≥869V(3.65*238)(2s),≤866V(3.64*238) cleear(2s)
P107F30CMU6 total voltage is too lowNCM: VPack5≤xV(m*204)V(2s),≥yV(n*204)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=530.4,m=2.6,y=540.6,n=2.65 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=489.6,m=2.4,y=499.8,n=2.45 Tmin<=0:x=428.4,m= 2.1,y=438.6,n=2.15 LFP:VPack5≤xV(m*238)V(2s),≥yV(n*238)V cleear(2s) Tmin>15:x=571.2,m=2.4,y=583.1,n=2.45 Tmin∈(0,15]: x=547.4,m=2.3,y=559.3,n=2.35 Tmin<=0:x=476,m=2.0, y=487.9,n=2.05
P108030The voltage difference between packages is too highThe voltage difference value between packages is greater than or equal to 10V for 15s; Power-off clear
P10E061Battery failureThe battery reports fault level and fault code

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 5:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.31 VDC Reports CMU High Voltage Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P109030CMU1 Charge overcurrent LvBCMU1 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear1. High voltage wiring harness 2.Battery pack 3.VDC
P109130CMU1 Charge overcurrent LvACMU1 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU1 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared
P109230CMU2 Charge overcurrent LvBCMU2 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear
P109330CMU2 Charge overcurrent LvACMU2 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU2 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s)
P109430CMU3 Charge overcurrent LvBCMU3 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear
P109530CMU3 Charge overcurrent LvACMU3 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU3 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared
P109630CMU4 Charge overcurrent LvBCMU4 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear
P109730CMU4 Charge overcurrent LvACMU4 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU4 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared
P109830CMU5 Charge overcurrent LvBCMU5 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear
P109930CMU5 Charge overcurrent LvACMU5 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU5 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared
P109A30CMU6 Charge overcurrent LvBCMU6 current≥1.5*Look-up value+10(30s), Power-off clear
P109B30CMU6 Charge overcurrent LvACMU6 current≥1.1*Look-up value+10(30s), CMU6 current≤1.1*Look-up value+5(60s) automatically cleared

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check whether there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the battery pack high-voltage wiring harness. Step 5:Check the internal insulation detection circuit of the battery pack. Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P109F30CMU1 High voltage interlock faultCMU1 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear1. High voltage wiring harness 2. High-voltage interlocking wiring harness 3.Battery pack 4.VDC
P10A030CMU2 High voltage interlock faultCMU2 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear
P10A130CMU3 High voltage interlock faultCMU3 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear
P10A230CMU4 High voltage interlock faultCMU4 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear
P10A330CMU5 High voltage interlock faultCMU5 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear
P10A430CMU6 High voltage interlock faultCMU6 Fault Code 23(1s), Power-off clear

Step 7:Replace the battery pack. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.32 VDC Reports CMU High Voltage Interlock Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check whether there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the high-voltage wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 5:Check the high-voltage interlock wiring harness of each high-voltage component. Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 7:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.33 VDC Reports Abnormal CMU Temperature

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P105230CMU1 Cell overtempTMaxCell1≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s)1.Battery pack 2.VDC
P105330CMU1 Cell undertempTMinCell1≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s)
P105630CMU2 Cell overtempTMaxCell2≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s)
P105730CMU2 Cell undertempTMinCell2≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s)
P105A30CMU3 Cell overtempTMaxCell3≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s)
P105B30CMU3 Cell undertempTMinCell3≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s)
P105E30CMU4 Cell overtempTMaxCell4≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s)
P105F30CMU4 Cell undertempTMinCell4≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s)
P106230CMU5 Cell overtempTMaxCell5≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s)
P106330CMU5 Cell undertempTMinCell5≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s)
P106630CMU6 Cell overtempTMaxCell6≥122℉(2s),≤113℉clear(2s)
P106730CMU6 Cell undertempTMinCell6≤-4℉(2s),≥-2.2℉clear(2s)
P106E30CMU1 Cell temp difference is largeTDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s)
P106F30CMU2 Cell temp difference is largeTDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s)
P107030CMU3 Cell temp difference is largeTDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s)
P107130CMU4 Cell temp difference is largeTDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s)
P107230CMU5 Cell temp difference is largeTDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s)
P107330CMU6 Cell temp difference is largeTDiffCell1≥59℉(2s),≤53.6℉clear(2s)
P10AA30The temperature difference between packages is too highThe temperature difference value between packages is greater than or equal to 59℉for 15s, less than or equal to 53.6℉for 5s,automatically cleared

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check if there are any fault codes related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 5:Check if the vehicle has any fault codes related to the thermal management system? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to thermal management systems. – No: Next step

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P105030CMU1 Cell overvoltageNCM:VMaxCell1≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell1≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s)1.Battery pack 2.VDC
P105130CMU1 Cell undervoltageVMinCell1≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6
P105430CMU2 Cell overvoltageNCM:VMaxCell2≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell2≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s)
P105530CMU2 Cell undervoltageVMinCell2≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6
P105830CMU3 Cell overvoltageNCM:VMaxCell3≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell3≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s)
P105930CMU3 Cell undervoltageVMinCell3≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6
P105C30CMU4 Cell overvoltageNCM:VMaxCell4≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell4≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s)
P105D30CMU4 Cell undervoltageVMinCell4≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6
P106030CMU5 Cell overvoltageNCM:VMaxCell5≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP:VMaxCell5≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s)

Step 6:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 7:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 8:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 9:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 10:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.34 VDC Reports Abnormal Voltage Of CMU Unit

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P106130CMU5 Cell undervoltageVMinCell5≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6
P106430CMU6 Cell overvoltageNCM:VMaxCell6≥4.316V(2s),≤4.3V clear(2s) LFP: VMaxCell6≥3.67V(2s),≤3.6V clear(2s)
P106530CMU6 Cell undervoltageVMinCell6≤mV(2s),≥nV clear(2s) NCM: Tmin>15:m=3.1,n=3.4 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.8,n=3.1 Tmin<=0:m=2.3,n=2.6 LFP:Tmin>15:m=2.75,n=3.1 Tmin∈(0,15]:m=2.45,n=2.9 Tmin<=0: m=2.2,n=2.6
P106830CMU1 Cell volt difference is largeVDiffCell1≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s)
P106930CMU2 Cell volt difference is largeVDiffCell2≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s)
P106A30CMU3 Cell volt difference is largeVDiffCell3≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s)
P106B30CMU4 Cell volt difference is largeVDiffCell4≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s)
P106C30CMU5 Cell volt difference is largeVDiffCell5≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s)
P106D30CMU6 Cell volt difference is largeVDiffCell6≥0.4V(2s),≤0.25V clear(2s)

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check if there any fault codes related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 5:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P104051CMU1 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18082768x lost, last for 10s1.Wiring harness 2.Battery pack 3.VDC
P104151CMU2 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18082769x lost, last for 10s
P104251CMU3 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x1808276Ax lost, last for 10s
P104351CMU4 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x1808276Bx lost, last for 10s
P104451CMU5 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x1808276Cx lost, last for 10s
P104551CMU6 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x1808276Dx lost, last for 10s
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10AD40TCU1 ratio anomalyIn gear mode, the corresponding error between TCU1 output shaft speed and MCU1 speed is greater than 1000rpm(5s)1. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface 2.VDC
P10AE40TCU2 ratio anomalyIn gear mode, the corresponding error between TCU2 output shaft speed and MCU4 speed is greater than 1000rpm(5s)
P10E663TCU failureThe TCU reports fault level and fault code

7.2.4.35 VDC Reports CMU Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 6:Replace the battery pack. Refer to NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement . NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Replacement Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.36 VDC Reports TCU Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P104D53TCU1 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18012703x lost, last for 5s1.Wiring harness 2. Electric drive mid-axle vehicle low-voltage interface 3.VDC
P104E53TCU2 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18042703x lost, last for 5s

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check there is a TCU related fault code? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to TCU. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 5:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.37 VDC Reports TCU Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check there is a TCU related fault code? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to TCU. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid-axle vehicle. Step 6:Replace the low-voltage interface of the electric drive mid axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.38 VDC Reports Internal Fault Of PDU

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10E162PDU_PDU failureThe PDU_PDU reports fault level and fault code1.Power distribution unit 2.VDC
P10E262PDU_DCAC failureThe PDU_DCAC reports fault level and fault code
P10E362PDU_DCDC failureThe PDU_DCDC reports fault level and fault code
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P104652PDU_PDU Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18012778x lost, last for 10s1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit 3.VDC
P104752PDU_DCAC Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x1804276Ex lost, last for 10s
P104852PDU_DCDC Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x1801276Fx lost, last for 10s

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check if there is a fault code related to the power distribution unit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to the power distribution unit. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.39 VDC Reports PDU Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection Step 3:Check if there is a fault code related to the power distribution unit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to the power distribution unit. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi in One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10C240NormRdy_Gear_ ChkFailr_StKL15 ON,After the vehicle is on the high voltage, the brakes are stepped on, The gear is not in N gear1.Shift switch 2.VDC
P10E763GSM failureThe GSM reports fault level and fault code
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P104F53GSM Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x010305x lost, last for 10s.1.Wiring harness 2.Shift switch 3.VDC

7.2.4.40 VDC Reports GSM Internal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for shift switch related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to shift switches. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.41 VDC Reports GSM Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for shift switch related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to shift switches. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U120587LIN flt statusEnter flt status1.Wiring harness 2.VDC

7.2.4.42 VDC LIN Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.42 VDC LIN Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10AF40NormupBnRlyChkFail- r_StKL15 ON, VDC sends negative relay closed,6 CMUs have negative relay closed abnormally.(1.5s set up)1. Wiring harness 2.Battery pack 3.VDC
P10BA40ChUpBnRlyChkFailr_ StA+ ON,VDC sends negative relay closed,6 CMUs have negative relay closed abnormally.(1.5s set up)

Step 3:Check the VDC LIN communication components and give priority to troubleshooting LIN communication component failures. Step 4:Check the LIN communication harness between VDC, intelligent battery sensor IBS, and active grille shutter. Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.43 CMU Wake-up Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.43 CMU Wake-up Signal Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.2.4.43 CMU Wake-up Signal Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10B640NormupPduadhnChk- Failr_StKL15 ON, The auxiliary drive relay and the main drive relay have sticking faults(1.5s set up)1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit 3.VDC
P10B740NormupAux_Drv_ RlyChkFailr_StKL15 ON,VDC sends auxiliary drive relay closed, the auxiliary drive relay is closed abnormally.(1.5s set up)
P10B840NormupDC_ OutVChkFailr_StKL15 ON,VDC sends DCDC1 and DCDC2 to be enabled, the output voltage of DCDC1 or DCDC2 is Less than(2s set up)
P10B940NormupMain_Drv_ RlyChkFailr_StKL15 ON,VDC sends the maindrive relay closed, and the main drive relay closes abnormally(1.5s set up)
P10BB40ChUpPduadhnChkFai- lr_StA+ ON, The auxiliary drive relay and the Charg relay have sticking faults(1.5s set up)
P10BC40ChUpPDUIsnOnChkF- ailr_StA+ ON,The charging interaction is not complete(100s set up)
P10BD40ChUpChpRlyChkFailr_ StA+ ON,VDC sends Charg relay closed, the Charg relay is closed abnormally.(1.5s set up)
P10BE40ChUpAux_Drv_ RlyChkFailr_StA+ ON,VDC sends auxiliary drive relay closed, the auxiliary drive relay is closed abnormally.(1.5s set up)
P10BF40ChUpDC_ OutVChkFailr_StA+ ON,VDCsends DCDC1 and DCDC2 to be enabled, the output voltage of DCDC1 or DCDC2 is Less than(2s set up)

Step 3:Check if there is a fault code related to the battery pack? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to battery packs. – No: Nex step Step 4:Check the wake-up signal harness between VDC and the battery pack. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the battery pack. Step 6:Replace the battery pack. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.44 PDU Wake-up Signal Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.44 PDU Wake-up Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P100602DCDC2 output undervoltageHV Satus, The DCDC2 function takes effect, DCDC2 output voltage is less than or equal to 23V for 10s)1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit 3.VDC
P100702DCDC2 output overvoltageHV Satus, The DCDC2 function takes effect, DCDC2 output voltage is greater than or equal to 32V for 10s

Step 3:Check if there is a fault code related to the power distribution unit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting related to the power distribution unit. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the wake-up signal harness between VDC and power distribution unit. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.45 DCDC2 Voltage Output Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.45 DCDC2 Voltage Output Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P103B10Left grid motor failurePower on, The grille failure lasts for 10s1.Wiring harness 2.Active grille shutter 3.VDC
P103C10Right grid motor failurePower on, The grille failure lasts for 10s

Step 3:Check the low-voltage power supply line of the thermal management unit of the power distribution unit (integrated DCDC). Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code of the power distribution unit, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.46 Active Grille Shutter Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.46 Active Grille Shutter Fault — circuit diagram

23. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the active grille shutter.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P100852WPTC1 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18032779x lost and the maximum temperature of the battery is greater than or equal to 97 degrees ferenhieght , last for 10s1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (battery left water heater) 3.VDC

Step 4:Check the LIN communication harness between VDC and the active grille shutter. Step 5:Replace the active grille shutter. Refer to Replacement Of Active Grille Wire Harness Module Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.47 Left Battery Water Heater Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.47 Left Battery Water Heater Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the left thermal management unit (battery left water heater).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P100952WPTC2 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x18032760x lost and the maximum temperature of the battery is greater than or equal to 97 degrees ferenhieght , last for 10s1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (battery right water heater) 3.VDC

Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 BusNetwork Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the left thermal management unit (battery left water heater). Step 6:Replace the left thermal management unit (battery left water heater). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.48 Fault In The Right Water Heater Of The Battery

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.48 Fault In The Right Water Heater Of The Battery — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the right thermal management unit (battery right water heater).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P100A52BLR1 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x1802277Ax lost and the minimum temperature of the battery is less than or equal to 41 degrees ferenhieght , last for 10s1.Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (battery left compressor) 3.VDC

Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 BusNetwork Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the right thermal management unit (battery right water heater). Step 6:Replace the right thermal management unit (battery right water heater). Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.49 Left Battery Compressor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.49 Left Battery Compressor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the left thermal management unit (battery left compressor).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P100B52BLR2 Communication failureKL15 valid, 0x1802277Bx lost and the minimum temperature of the battery is less than or equal to 41 degrees ferenhieght , last for 10s1.Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (battery right compressor) 3.VDC

Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the left thermal management unit (battery left compressor). Step 6:Replace the left thermal management unit (battery left compressor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.50 Battery Right Compressor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.50 Battery Right Compressor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the right thermal management unit (battery right compressor).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P109C30Insulation fault LvCInsulation value≤500kΩ(22s),Power-off clear1.Wiring harness 2. High voltage components 3.VDC
P109D30Insulation fault LvBInsulation value≤1000kΩ(66s),≥1200kΩ for 1s, automatically cleared
P109E30Insulation fault LvAInsulation value≤1000kΩ(66s),≥1200kΩ for 1s, automatically cleared
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10AC40Brake pressure rise monitoring during air pump operationWhen the air compressor starts working, the pressure rise rate within a certain time (tentatively 30s) is less than the specified value (tentatively 2Bar).1.Wiring harness 2. Air compressor 3.VDC
P10C140NormRdy_ AirPChkFailr_StKL15 ON,After the vehicle is on the high voltage, the brakes are stepped on, Brake air pressure<0.7Mpa

Step 4:Check the PCAN3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN3 BusNetwork Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the right thermal management unit (battery right compressor). Step 6:Replace the right thermal management unit (battery right compressor). Step 7:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 8:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.51 Insulation Failure

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the insulation resistance of high-voltage components. Step 4:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.52 Air Compressor Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-pressure circuit harness of the air compressor. Step 4:Replace the air compressor. Refer to Replacement Of Air Compressor Assembly Step 5:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10C340NormRdy_Escl_ ChkFailr_StKL15 ON,After the vehicle is on the high voltage, the brakes are stepped on, ESCL is unlocked1.Wiring harness 2.ESCL 3.VDC

Step 6:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.53 ESCL Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.53 ESCL Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the ESCL power supply and grounding harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10E863IBS failureThe IBS reports fault level and fault code1.Wiring harness 2.Intelligent battery sensor IBS 3.VDC

Step 4:ESCL rewrites the configuration code, reloads the software, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace ESCL. Refer to Replacement Of Steering Column Assembly Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.54 IBS Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.54 IBS Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IBS power supply and grounding harness of the battery.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P10E462thermal management system failureThe thermal management system reports fault1.Wiring harness 2.Cooling unit 3.VDC

Step 4:Check the LIN communication harness between the intelligent battery sensor IBS and VDC. Step 5:Replace the intelligent battery sensor IBS. Refer to Replacement Of Smart Battery Sensors Step 6:VDC rewrites the configuration code, software reloads, and upgrades. Step 7:Replace the VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.55 Thermal Management System Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Move the vehicle to a normal temperature environment and let it sit for a while. Step 4:Check if the coolant is insufficient. – Yes: Add coolant to the standard mark. – No: Next step Step 5:Check if there are any thermal runaway related fault codes on the vehicle? – Yes: Eliminate fault codes related to thermal runaway. Refer to Battery Thermal Runaway Fault – No: Next step Step 6:Check the motor coolant level sensor. Refer to Motor Coolant Level Sensor Fault Step 7:Check the battery coolant level sensor. Refer to Battery Coolant Level Sensor Fault Step 8:Check the motor fan. Refer to Motor Fan Fault Step 9:Check the motor water pump. Refer to Motor Water Pump Fault Step 10:Check the left battery fan. Refer to Left Battery Fan Malfunction Step 11:Check the right battery fan. Refer to Right Battery Fan Malfunction Step 12:Check left battery water pump. Refer to Left Battery Water Pump Malfunction Step 13:Check right battery water pump. Refer to Right Battery Water Pump Malfunction Step 14:Check the left water heater of the battery. Refer to Left Battery Water Heater Fault Step 15:Check the right water heater of the battery. Refer to Fault In The Right Water Heater Of The Battery Step 16:VDC rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 17:Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 18:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.2.4.56 EVCC Power Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.56 EVCC Power Fault — circuit diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps

Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the EVCC? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 3:Check the power and grounding harness of the EVCC. Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 5:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly

7.2.4.57 EVCC Communication Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.57 EVCC Communication Fault — circuit diagram

2.Circuit Diagram Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the PCAN1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN1 Bus Network Integrity

Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 4:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly

7.2.4.58 EVCC A+ Signal Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.58 EVCC A+ Signal Fault — circuit diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the A+ wake-up signal harness between the EVCC and the VDC. Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 4:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly

7.2.4.59 EVCC CP Signal Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.59 EVCC CP Signal Fault — circuit diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the CP signal harness between the EVCC and the VDC.

Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 4:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly

7.2.4.60 PP Signal Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.60 PP Signal Fault — circuit diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the A+ wake-up signal harness between the EVCC and the MCS fast charging port. Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 4:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly

7.2.4.61 MCS Fast Charging Port Electronic Lock Fault

1.Circuit Diagram

7.2.4.61 MCS Fast Charging Port Electronic Lock Fault — circuit diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the feedback signal harness of the electronic lock between the EVCC and the MCS fast charging port. Step 3:Check the electronic - lock - control - signal harness between the EVCC and the fast charge connector.

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN1(H) and PCAN1 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
PCAN1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

Step 4:Check the electronic lock control signal harness between the MCS charging connection and the MCS fast charging port. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the EVCC. Step 6:Replace the EVCC. Refer to Replacement Of MCS Charging Socket Assembly

7.2.4.62 Inspection Of PCAN1 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the PCAN1 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the PCAN1 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
PCAN1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the PCAN1 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN2(H) and PCAN2 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the PCAN1 bus. C. Measure the PCAN1 bus resistance between each module and the power domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of PCAN1 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the PCAN1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace PCAN1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the PCAN1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the PCAN1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.

7.2.4.63 Inspection Of PCAN2 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the PCAN2 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the PCAN2 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN2 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
PCAN2 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN2 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
PCAN2 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the PCAN2 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the PCAN2 bus. C. Measure the PCAN2 bus resistance between each module and the power domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of PCAN2 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the PCAN2 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace PCAN2 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the PCAN2 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the PCAN2 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN3(H) and PCAN3 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN3 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
PCAN3 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

7.2.4.64 Inspection Of PCAN3 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the PCAN3 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the PCAN3 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN3 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
PCAN3 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the PCAN3 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the PCAN3 bus. C. Measure the PCAN3 bus resistance between each module and the power domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of PCAN3 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the PCAN3 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace PCAN3 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the PCAN3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the PCAN3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. No Yes

Figure p1202
Figure p1202

7.2.5 Dismantling and Installation

7.2.5.1 Replacement of VDC Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove 2 harness connectors of the VDC assembly. 5 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the VDC assembly. 6 Remove the VDC assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the VDC assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the VDC assembly.

Torque:(11 +/- 1.5) ft lbs

3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the VDC assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the low-speed alarm module (AVAS) to the white body assemblyM8(18 +/- 2) ft lbs

7.3 Electrical Accessory Device

7.3.1 Specifications

7.3.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1205

7.3.2 Decomposition Diagram

7.3.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Light Rain Sensor 3. Acoustic Vehicle Alerting System 2. Brkt-Sunlight Rain Sensor 4. Reverse Buzzer

7.3.3 System Schematic Diagram

7.3.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
When the vehicle is driving at low speed, there is no sound or noise from the low-speed alarm module1. The external sound module is covered by foreign objectsClean up foreign objects.
2. Interference with other componentsReinstall the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Replacement Of Low-speed Alarm Module (AVAS)
3. Low speed alarm module malfunctionCheck for faults in the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Low Speed Alarm Module Power Fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717Voltage HighRefer to Low Speed Alarm Module Power Fault
B111716Voltage Low
U019887TGW_TD_Time mesg lostRefer to Low Speed Alarm Module Communication Fault
U014087TGW_TD_Time mesg lost
U015687CDC_BDCUSET mesg Lost
U012287VDC_CCVS LOST
U007D88BCANFD2 BusOff

7.3.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

7.3.4.1 Diagnosis Description

Before diagnosing faults in electrical accessory devices, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the electrical accessory device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct steps for fault diagnosis when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of electrical accessory devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten

the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.3.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the electrical accessory system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the electrical accessory system.

• Inspect system components that are easily accessible or visible to make sure they are not visibly damaged or have conditions that could cause failure. 7.3.4.3 Fault Symptom Table

7.3.4.4 DTC Confirmation

1.Connect the diagnostic instrument to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Restart the vehicle. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm the system has a fault code output. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Fault 7.3.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

AVAS

7.3.4.6 Low Speed Alarm Module Power Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717Voltage HighVoltage > 33V, t > 2s1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Low speed alarm module
B111716Voltage LowVoltage < 18V, t > 2s

2.Circuit Diagram

7.3.4.6 Low Speed Alarm Module Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection B48-38 B48-18

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U019887TGW_TD_Time mesg lost10 cycle lost1.Wiring harness 2. Low speed alarm module
U014087BDCU_OELight mesg lost10 cycle lost
U015687CDC_BDCUSET mesg Lost10 cycle lost
U012287VDC_CCVS LOST10 cycle lost
U007D88BCANFD2 BusOffErr cycle more 255

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the low-speed alarm module? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harness of the low-speed alarm module. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-speed alarm module. Step 6:Replace the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Replacement Of Low-speed Alarm Module (AVAS) Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.3.4.7 Low Speed Alarm Module Communication Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity B48-38 B48-18

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the low-speed alarm module. Step 5:Replace the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Replacement Of Low-speed Alarm Module (AVAS) Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

Figure p1213

7.3.5 Dismantling and Installation

7.3.5.1 Replacement of RLS

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the RLS. 6 Remove the RLS. Installation Procedures 1 Move the RLS to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the RLS.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1214

7.3.5.2 Replacement of AVAS

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the lamp (upper). 5 Remove the lamp (lower). 6 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 7 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 8 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the AVAS.

10 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the AVAS. 11 Remove the AVAS. Installation Procedures 1 Move the AVAS to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the AVAS.

Torque: (18 +/- 2) ft lbs
Figure p1215

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the AVAS.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 5 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 6 Install the boarding step body assembly. 7 Install the lamp (lower). 8 Install the lamp (upper). 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

7.3.5.3 Replacement of The Reverse Buzzer

Removal procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 wire harness connector of the reverse buzzer. 5 Remove the 2 fixing bolts of the reverse buzzer. 6 Remove the reverse buzzer. Installation procedures

Figure p1217
Figure p1217

1 Move the reverse buzzer to the mounting position. 2 Install the 2 fixing bolts of the reverse buzzer. 3 Connect 1 wire harness connector of the reverse buzzer.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the battery assembly bracket to the right front connecting beamM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the battery assembly bracket to the left front connecting beamM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the battery assembly bracket to the right front connecting beamM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the battery assembly bracket to the right front connecting beamM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the battery pad and the battery assembly bracketM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
Intelligent electrical box - fixing bolt connecting the vehicle body to the lower left dashboard controller bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Intelligent electrical box - fixing bolts connecting the chassis and intelligent electrical box bracketM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the auxiliary battery and the negative terminal harness of the batteryM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the battery pressure plate 3 to the power domain controller bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

7.4 Battery Device

7.4.1 Specifications

7.4.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1220

7.4.2 Decomposition Diagram

7.4.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Battery Bracket 6. Battery Pressing Plate 3 2. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 7. Battery Pressing Plate 2 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 8. Battery Tie Rod 4. Battery Tray 9. Smart Battery Sensor 5. Auxiliary Battery 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt

11. Smart Junction Box-Body 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1221

10 Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Smart Junction Box Bracket-Chassis 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Smart Junction Box-Chassis 17. Smart Junction Box Bracket-Chassis 2

Figure p1222

7.4.3 Dismantling and Installation

7.4.3.1 Replacement of Battery Assembly Bracket

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
It is necessary to power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 8 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. 9 Remove the auxiliary battery. 10 Remove the battery backing plate. 11 Remove Left Junction Box. 12 Remove Right Junction Box.

13 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the battery assembly bracket. 14 Remove the battery assembly bracket. Installation Procedures

Figure p1224
Figure p1224

1 Move the battery assembly bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the battery assembly bracket.

Torque: (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs

3 Install Right Junction Box. 4 Install Left Junction Box. 5 Install the battery backing plate. 6 Install the auxiliary battery. 7 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 8 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 9 Install the battery rod. 10 Install the VDC bracket. 11 Install the VDC assembly. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.

Figure p1226

7.4.3.2 Replacement of Battery Backing Plate

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 8 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. 9 Remove the auxiliary battery. 10 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the battery backing plate. 11 Remove the battery backing plate. Installation Procedures

1 Move the battery backing plate to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the battery backing plate.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install the auxiliary battery. 4 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 5 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 6 Install the battery rod. 7 Install the VDC bracket. 8 Install the VDC assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

7.4.3.3 Replacement of Auxiliary Battery

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 8 Remove the battery pressure plate 2.

9 Loosen 3 fixing nuts of the auxiliary battery terminal. 10 Remove the auxiliary battery. Installation Procedures 1 Move the auxiliary battery rod to the mounting position. 2 Tighten 3 fixing nuts of the auxiliary battery terminal.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 4 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 5 Install the battery rod. 6 Install the VDC bracket. 7 Install the VDC assembly. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

Figure p1228

7.4.3.4 Replacement of Battery Pressure Plate 2

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 8 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. Installation Procedures 1 Move the battery pressure plate 2 to the mounting position. 2 Install the battery pressure plate 3.

Figure p1229

3 Install the battery rod. 4 Install the VDC bracket. 5 Install the VDC assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Figure p1230

7.4.3.5 Replacement of Battery Pressure Plate 3

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the VDC assembly. 5 Remove the VDC bracket. 6 Remove the battery rod. 7 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. Installation Procedures

1 Move the battery pressure plate 3 to the mounting position. 2 Install the battery rod. 3 Install the VDC bracket. 4 Install the VDC assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.4.3.6 Replacement of Battery Rod

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the VDC assembly.

5 Remove the vehicle controller assy bracket. 6 Remove 3 battery rods. Installation Procedures 1 Move the battery rod to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 battery rods. 3 Install the vehicle controller assy bracket. 4 Install the VDC assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

Figure p1232

7.4.3.7 Replacement of IBS

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the IBS. 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the IBS. 6 Remove the IBS. Installation Procedures

Figure p1233
Figure p1233

1 Move the IBS to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the IBS.

Torque: (14.75) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the IBS.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.4.3.8 Replacement of SJB_UP

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly.

5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the vehicle controller assy bracket. 7 Remove the vehicle travelling data recorder bracket. 8 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 10 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 12 Remove the left lower fixing bracket. 13 Disconnect 5 harness connectors of the SJB_UP. 14 Remove 1 screw, and remove the SJB_UP cover plate.

Figure p1235
Figure p1235

15 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the harness to detach the harness. 16 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the harness to detach the harness. 17 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the SJB_UP. 18 Remove the SJB_UP.

Figure p1236
Figure p1236
Figure p1236

Installation Procedures 1 Move the SJB_UP to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the SJB_UP.

Torque:(7.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect the harness, and install 3 fixing nuts of the harness.

4 Connect the harness, and install 3 fixing nuts of the harness. 5 Install the SJB_UP cover plate, and install 1 screw. 6 Connect 5 harness connectors of the SJB_UP.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

7 Install the left lower fixing bracket. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 13 Install the vehicle travelling data recorder bracket. 14 Install the vehicle controller assy bracket. 15 Install the front USB interface. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.

Figure p1239

7.4.3.9 Replacement of SJB_UN

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove 4 fixing bolts of Left Junction Box, and move Left Junction Box.

5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the SJB_UN bracket, and move the SJB_UN bracket. 6 Remove the cover plate and remove 2 fixing bolts to detach the harness.

Figure p1240
Figure p1240
Figure p1240

7 Remove 3 fixing bolts to detach the harness. 8 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of the SJB_UN. 9 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the SJB_UN. 10 Remove the SJB_UN.

Figure p1241
Figure p1241
Figure p1241

Installation Procedures 1 Move the SJB_UN to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the SJB_UN.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Connect 6 harness connectors of the SJB_UN.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the harness, and install 3 fixing bolts. 5 Connect the harness, install 2 fixing bolts, and install the cover plate. 6 Install the SJB_UN bracket, and install 2 fixing bolts of the SJB_UN bracket.

7 Install Left Junction Box, and install 4 fixing bolts of Left Junction Box. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

7.4.3.10 Replacement of The DC Converter

Removal procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 wire harness connector of the DC converter. 5 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the DC converter.

Figure p1245
Figure p1245

6 Separate the DC converter from the DC converter bracket. 7 Remove the DC converter. Installation procedures

Figure p1246
Figure p1246

1 Move the DC converter to the mounting position. 2 Connect the DC converter to the DC converter bracket. 3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the DC converter.

4 Connect 1 wire harness connector of the DC converter.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.4.3.11 Replacement of The DC Converter Bracket

Removal procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the DC converter.

5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the DC converter bracket. 6 Remove the DC converter bracket. Installation procedures 1 Move the DC converter bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the DC converter bracket. 3 Install the DC converter. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1249
Measurement ResultExecution Operations
The battery is in good conditionInspection completed
Need to chargeCharge the main battery
Need to replaceRefer to Replacement Of Auxiliary Battery

7.4.4 Inspect

7.4.4.1 Inspection Of The Main Battery

Step 1 Check the appearance of the main battery. A. Check the appearance of the main battery for deformation or damage. B. Check if the main battery is leaking. C. Confirm if the above checks are normal. Refer to Replacement Of Auxiliary Battery Step 2 Check the positive and negative connectors of the main battery. A. Check whether the positive and negative connectors of the main battery are loose, oxidized, or corroded. B. Confirm if the above checks are normal. Repair or replace faulty components. Step 3 Use a battery tester to test the main battery. A. Set the vehicle power to OFF for multimedia. B. Disconnect the positive and negative terminals of the main battery. C. Use a battery tester to measure the main battery and perform the corresponding operations according to the table below. No Yes No Yes

7.4.5 System Schematic Diagram

7.4.5.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

Body smart electrical box

Chassis smart electrical box

12V power distribution system

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B180017Module overvoltageRefer to Smart Junction Box UP Power Fault
U014087Communication with the BDCU timed outRefer to Smart Junction Box UP Communication Fault
U007C88BCANFD1 BusOff
U220600BCANFD1 NM Limphome
B111717High battery voltage
B111716Low Battery Voltage
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU
U019887Lost Communication With T-Box
U012287Lost Communication With VDC
B180713OUT07:KL15 load open circuitRefer to Smart Junction Box UP KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault
B180719OUT07:KL15 overcurrent
B18074BOUT07:KL15 over temperature
B180113OUT01:Rear Blower load open circuitRefer to Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Sleeper Air Conditioning Blower
B180119OUT01:Rear Blower overcurrent
B18014BOUT01:Rear Blower over temperature
B180213OUT02:Right Front Blower load open circuitRefer to Right Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault
B180219OUT02:Right Front Blower overcurrent

7.4.6 Diagnostic Information and Steps

7.4.6.1 Diagnostic Description

Before diagnosing the fault of the battery device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the battery device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of battery devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid

misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.4.6.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the battery system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the battery system.

• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 7.4.6.3 DTC Confirmation

1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.4.6.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

SJBUP

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B18024BOUT02:Right Front Blower over temperature
B180313OUT03:Left Front Blower load open circuitRefer to Left Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault
B180319OUT03:Left Front Blower overcurrent
B18034BOUT03:Left Front Blower over temperature
B180513OUT05:SWC load open circuitRefer to Seat Module Power Supply Circuit Fault
B180519OUT05:SWC overcurrent
B18054BOUT05:SWC over temperature
B180613OUT06:Body BDCU1 load open circuitRefer to Vehicle Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault
B180619OUT06:Body BDCU1 overcurrent
B18064BOUT06:Body BDCU1 over temperature
B180B13OUT11:Body BDCU2 load open circuit
B180B19OUT11:Body BDCU2 overcurrent
B180B4BOUT11:Body BDCU2 over temperature
B180813OUT08:CDCU load open circuitRefer to Cabin Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault
B180819OUT08:CDCU overcurrent
B18084BOUT08:CDCU over temperature
B180913OUT09:ECAS load open circuitRefer to ECAS Power Supply Circuit Fault
B180919OUT09:ECAS overcurrent
B18094BOUT09:ECAS over temperature
B180A13OUT10:DCM load open circuitRefer to Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Door Control Module
B180A19OUT10:DCM overcurrent
B180A4BOUT10:DCM over temperature
B180C13OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel load open circuitRefer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Sunroof Sunshade
B180C19OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel overcurrent
B180C4BOUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel over temperature
B180E13OUT14:Work load open circuitRefer to Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Switch Type Power Supply
B180E19OUT14:Work overcurrent
B180E4BOUT14:Work over temperature
B181113OUT17:IPC load open circuitRefer to Instrument Panel Power Supply Circuit Fault
B181119OUT17:IPC overcurrent
B18114BOUT17:IPC over temperature
B181213OUT18:OBD load open circuitRefer to OBD Power Supply Circuit Fault
B181219OUT18:OBD overcurrent
B18124BOUT18:OBD over temperature
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B181313OUT19:ACAndBatCompressor load open circuitRefer to Compressor Power Supply Circuit Fault
B181319OUT19:ACAndBatCompressor overcurrent
B18134BOUT19:ACAndBatCompressor over temperature
B181513OUT21:PTC load open circuitRefer to PTC Power Supply Circuit Fault
B181519OUT21:PTC overcurrent
B18154BOUT21:PTC over temperature
B181613OUT22:AC load open circuitRefer to Air Conditioning Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault
B181619OUT22:AC overcurrent
B18164BOUT22:AC over temperature
B181713OUT23:FrontUSB load open circuitRefer to Front Row USB Power Supply Circuit Fault
B181719OUT23:FrontUSB overcurrent
B18174BOUT23:FrontUSB over temperature
B181813OUT24:RearUSB load open circuitRefer to Rear USB Power Supply Circuit Fault
B181819OUT24:RearUSB overcurrent
B18184BOUT24:RearUSB over temperature
B181A13OUT26:AR_HUD load open circuitRefer to HUD Power Supply Circuit Fault
B181A19OUT26:AR_HUD overcurrent
B181A4BOUT26:AR_HUD over temperature
B181D13OUT29:PWC load open circuitRefer to Wireless Charging Module Power Supply Circuit Fault
B181D19OUT29:PWC overcurrent
B181D4BOUT29:PWC over temperature
B182013OUT32:TV load open circuitRefer to Vehicle Mounted TV Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182019OUT32:TV overcurrent
B18204BOUT32:TV over temperature
B182113OUT33:ESCL load open circuitRefer to ESCL Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182119OUT33:ESCL overcurrent
B18214BOUT33:ESCL over temperature
B182213OUT34_Sleeper switch devices open circuitRefer to Sleeper Switch Devices Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182219OUT34:SSM overcurrent
B18224BOUT34:SSM over temperature
B182313OUT35:CAR load open circuitRefer to CAR Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182319OUT35:CAR overcurrent
B18234BOUT35:CAR over temperature
B182413OUT36:IVI load open circuitRefer to IVI Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182419OUT36:IVI overcurrent
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B18244BOUT36:IVI over temperature
B182613OUT38:BatDrivPump1 load open circuitRefer to Left Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182619OUT38:BatDrivPump1 overcurrent
B18264BOUT38:BatDrivPump1 over temperature
B182F13OUT47:BatDrivPump2 load open circuitRefer to Right Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182F19OUT47:BatDrivPump2 overcurrent
B182F4BOUT47:BatDrivPump2 over temperature
B182A13OUT42:VertMotorDrivPump1 load open circuitRefer to Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Motor Water Pump 1
B182A19OUT42:VertMotorDrivPump1 overcurrent
B182A4BOUT42:VertMotorDrivPump1 over temperature
B182B13OUT43:VertMotorDrivPump2 load open circuitRefer to Fault In The Power Supply Crcuit Of Motor Water Pump 2
B182B19OUT43:VertMotorDrivPump2 overcurrent
B182B4BOUT43:VertMotorDrivPump2 over temperature
B182713OUT39:BatFanGuard1 load open circuitRefer to Left Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182719OUT39:BatFanGuard1 overcurrent
B18274BOUT39:BatFanGuard1 over temperature
B182813OUT40:BatFanGuard2 load open circuitRefer to Left Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182819OUT40:BatFanGuard2 overcurrent
B18284BOUT40:BatFanGuard2 over temperature
B182E13OUT46:BatFanGuard3 load open circuitRefer to Right Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182E19OUT46:BatFanGuard3 overcurrent
B182E4BOUT46:BatFanGuard3 over temperature
B182D13OUT45:BatFanGuard4 load open circuitRefer to Right Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182D19OUT45:BatFanGuard4 overcurrent
B182D4BOUT45:BatFanGuard4 over temperature
B182913OUT41:AlterFanGuard1 load open circuitRefer to Motor Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182919OUT41:AlterFanGuard1 overcurrent
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B18294BOUT41:AlterFanGuard1 over temperature
B182C13OUT44:AlterFanGuard2 load open circuitRefer to Motor Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault
B182C19OUT44:AlterFanGuard2 overcurrent
B182C4BOUT44:AlterFanGuard2 over temperature
B182513OUT37:AlterFanGuard3 load open circuitRefer to Motor Fan 3 Power Supply Crcuit Fault
B182519OUT37:AlterFanGuard3 overcurrent
B18254BOUT37:AlterFanGuard3 over temperature
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717High battery voltageRefer to Smart Junction Box DOWN Power Fault
B111716Low Battery Voltage
B1E0017Module overvoltage
U014087Communication with the BDCU timed outRefer to Smart Junction Box DOWN Communication Fault
U007C88BCANFD1 BusOff
U220600BCANFD1 NM Limphome
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU
U01A087Lost Communication With SJB_UP
U019887Lost Communication With T-Box
U012287Lost Communication With VDC
U007D88BCANFD2 BusOff
U220700BCANFD2 NM Limphome
B1E0113OUT01:Body load open circuitRefer to Fault In The Main Power Supply Circuit Of The Vehicle Body
B1E0119OUT01:Body overcurrent
B1E014BOUT01:Body over temperature
B1E0313OUT03:EPS load open circuitRefer to EPS Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E0319OUT03:EPS overcurrent
B1E034BOUT03:EPS over temperature
B1E1D13OUT29:EPSAssist load open circuit
B1E1D19OUT29:EPSAssist overcurrent
B1E1D4BOUT29:EPSAssist over temperature
B1E0413OUT04:KL15_1 load open circuitRefer to Smart Junction Box DOWN KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E0419OUT04:KL15_1 overcurrent
B1E044BOUT04:KL15_1 over temperature

SJBUN

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B1E2213OUT34:KL15_3 load open circuit
B1E2219OUT34:KL15_3 overcurrent
B1E224BOUT34:KL15_3 over temperature
B1E0513OUT05:EBSKL30 load open circuitRefer to EBS Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E0519OUT05:EBSKL30 overcurrent
B1E054BOUT05:EBSKL30 over temperature
B1E0A13OUT10:EBS_KL15 load open circuit
B1E0A19OUT10:EBS_KL15 overcurrent
B1E0A4BOUT10:EBS_KL15 over temperature
B1E1F13OUT31-EBS trailer open circuit
B1E1F19OUT31:TrailerEBS overcurrent
B1E1F4BOUT31:TrailerEBS over temperature
B1E2113OUT33:EBSBat30 load open circuit
B1E2119OUT33:EBSBat30 overcurrent
B1E214BOUT33:EBSBat30 over temperature
B1E0813OUT08:MediumaxleTCU load open circuitRefer to Electric Drive Medium axle TCU Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E0819OUT08:MediumaxleTCU overcurrent
B1E084BOUT08:MediumaxleTCU over temperature
B1E0913OUT09:TGWBat load open circuitRefer to Gateway Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E0919OUT09:TGWBat overcurrent
B1E094BOUT09:TGWBat over temperature
B1E2613OUT38:TGWAssist load open circuit
B1E2619OUT38:TGWAssist overcurrent
B1E264BOUT38:TGWAssist over temperature
B1E0B13OUT11:BackupLamp load open circuitRefer to Reverse Light Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E0B19OUT11:BackupLamp overcurrent
B1E0B4BOUT11:BackupLamp over temperature
B1E0D13OUT13:TractorMarkerLight load open circuitRefer to Small Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E0D19OUT13:TractorMarkerLight overcurrent
B1E0D4BOUT13:TractorMarkerLight over temperature
B1E1113OUT17:LeftLowBeam load open circuitRefer to Left Low Beam Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E1119OUT17:LeftLowBeam overcurrent
B1E114BOUT17:LeftLowBeam over temperature
B1E1213OUT18_ Right high beam open circuitRefer to Right High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B1E1219OUT18:TractorRightHighBeam overcurrent
B1E124BOUT18:TractorRightHighBeam over temperature
B1E1313OUT19:TractorLeftHighBeam load open circuitRefer to Left High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E1319OUT19:TractorLeftHighBeam overcurrent
B1E134BOUT19:TractorLeftHighBeam over temperature
B1E1413OUT20:RightLowBeam load open circuitRefer to Right Low Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E1419OUT20:RightLowBeam overcurrent
B1E144BOUT20_ Right low beam overheating
B1E1613OUT22:LeftRunning load open circuitRefer to Left Daytime Running Light Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E1619OUT22:LeftRunning overcurrent
B1E164BOUT22:LeftRunning over temperature
B1E1813OUT24:RightRunning load open circuitRefer to Right Daytime Running Light Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E1819OUT24:RightRunning overcurrent
B1E184BOUT24:RightRunning over temperature
B1E1A13OUT26:IBS load open circuitRefer to IBS Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E1A19OUT26:IBS overcurrent
B1E1A4BOUT26:IBS over temperature
B1E1B13OUT27:WorkingLights load open circuitRefer to Rear Work Light Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E1B19OUT27:WorkingLights overcurrent
B1E1B4BOUT27:WorkingLights over temperature
B1E1E13OUT35: EPB load open circuitRefer to EPB Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E1E19OUT35: EPB overcurrent
B1E1E4BOUT35:EPB over temperature
B1E2513OUT37:VDCB load open circuitRefer to VDC Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E2519OUT37:VDCB overcurrent
B1E254BOUT37:VDCB over temperature
B1E2713OUT39:MediumRearaxleTCU load open circuitRefer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Rear Axle MCU In The Electric Drive
B1E2719OUT39:MediumRearaxleTCU overcurrent
B1E274BOUT39:MediumRearaxleTCU over temperature
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B1E2813OUT40:AirHandlingUnit load open circuitRefer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Air Handling Unit
B1E2819OUT40:AirHandlingUnit overcurrent
B1E284BOUT40:AirHandlingUnit over temperature
B1E2913OUT41:HighLowPitchElectricHorn load open circuitRefer to Electric Horn Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E2919OUT41:HighLowPitchElectricHorn overcurrent
B1E294BOUT41:HighLowPitchElectricHorn over temperature
B1E2F13OUT47:AirHorn load open circuitRefer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Gas Horn
B1E2F19OUT47:AirHorn overcurrent
B1E2F4BOUT47:AirHorn over temperature
B1E2C13OUT44:Battery pack load open circuitRefer to Battery Pack Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E2C19OUT44:Battery pack overcurrent
B1E2C4BOUT44:Battery pack over temperature
B1E2D13OUT45:AuxiDrivMultiOne load open circuitRefer to Power Distribution Unit Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E2D19OUT45:AuxiDrivMultiOne overcurrent
B1E2D4BOUT45:AuxiDrivMultiOne over temperature
B1E2E13OUT46:BatWaterHeatComp load open circuitRefer to Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Battery Water Heater
B1E2E19OUT46:BatWaterHeatComp overcurrent
B1E2E4BOUT46:BatWaterHeatComp over temperature
B1E2A13OUT42:AVAS load open circuitRefer to Low Speed Pedestrian Alarm Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E2A19OUT42:AVAS overcurrent
B1E2A4BOUT42:AVAS over temperature
B1E3013OUT48:TPMS load open circuitRefer to Tire Pressure Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E3019OUT48:TPMS overcurrent
B1E304BOUT48:TPMS over temperature
B1E3113OUT49:ChassisSensors load open circuitRefer to Chassis Sensor Power Supply Circuit Fault
B1E3119OUT49:ChassisSensors overcurrent
B1E314BOUT49:ChassisSensors over temperature
Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Output channel control - VBU-B+_VDCVDCOn/OffControl the VDC B+power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Output Channel Control - Assisted Intelligent Driving DomainAuxiliary intelligent driving domain controllerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the auxiliary intelligent driving domain controller to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Master Intelligent Driving DomainMaster intelligent driving domain controllerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the main intelligent driving domain controller to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - EBS ControllerEBSOn/OffControl the EBS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Output Channel Control - KL15-1 Main Power Supply 1KL15 power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the KL15 power supply to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Steering Gear AssemblyEHPSOn/OffControl the EHPS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Output Channel Control - Car Power SupplyCar power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the on/off of the onboard power supply
Output Channel Control - Body B+Body B+On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the B+power supply of the vehicle body to turn on/off

7.4.6.5 Action Test List

By reading the "Action Test" on the fault diagnosis instrument, the working status of relays and actuators controlled by SJBUN can be checked without disassembling any components. Before conducting relevant fault diagnosis on the control system, performing action testing is a prerequisite for troubleshooting, which can shorten the time for troubleshooting.

Note
The following table lists the data under normal conditions for reference only. Do not rely solely on these reference values to determine whether a certain component has malfunctioned. Under normal circumstances, a comparison can be made between a functioning vehicle and a diagnosed vehicle in the same state to determine the data of the diagnosed vehicle is normal in its current state.

a.Perform vehicle power on operation. b.Connect the fault diagnosis device. c.Select "SJBUN"/"Action Test". d.Refer to the table below and conduct active testing.

Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Output Channel Control - Right brake lampRight brake lampOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right brake lamp to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Left brake lampLeft brake lampOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the left brake lamp power supply to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Reversing lightReversing lightOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the reversing light to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Reverse lightReverse lightOn/OffAccording to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the power supply of the reversing lights to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - EBS power supplyEBSOn/OffControl the EBS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Output Channel Control - Central gatewayCentral gatewayOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the central gateway to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Right daytime running lampRight daytime running lampOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right daytime running lamp to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Left daytime running lampLeft daytime running lampOn/OffAccording to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument, control the power supply of the left daytime running lamp to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Right low beam headlightRight low beam headlightOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right low beam to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Left high beamLeft high beamOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the left high beam to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Right high beamRight high beamOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right high beam to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Left low beamLeft low beamOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the left low beam power supply to turn on/off
Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Output Channel Control - Main intelligent driving domain auxiliary power supplyMain intelligent driving domain auxiliary power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the main intelligent driving domain controller to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - EBS trailerEBS trailerOn/OffControl the EBS trailer power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Output Channel Control - Electronic parkingElectronic parkingOn/OffControl the electronic parking power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Output Channel Control - EPS steering gear assembly auxiliary power supplyEHPSOn/OffControl the EHPS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Output Channel Control - Emergency brake solenoid valveEmergency brake solenoid valveOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the emergency brake solenoid valve to turn on/ off
Output Channel Control - Rear work lightRear work lightOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the rear work light to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Intelligent battery sensorIntelligent battery sensorOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the intelligent battery sensor to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - HSDHSDOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the HSD power supply to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Air handling unitAir handling unitOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the air handling unit to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Mid/Rear axle MCUMid/Rear axle MCUOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the middle/rear axle MCU to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Gateway auxiliary power supplyGateway auxiliary power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the central gateway to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Middle axle TCUMiddle axle TCUOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the TCU in the middle axle to turn on/off
Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Output Channel Control - ADB headlightsADB headlightsOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the ADB headlight power supply to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Auxiliary intelligent driving domain auxiliary power supplyAuxiliary intelligent driving domain auxiliary power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the auxiliary intelligent driving domain controller to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - KL15 main power supply 3KL15 main power supply 3On/OffControl the KL15 power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Output Channel Control - EBS-KL30BEBSOn/OffControl the EBS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Output Channel Control - Tire pressure + active grille shutterTire pressure + active grille shutterOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the tire pressure/active grille shutter power supply on/off
Output Channel Control - Air hornAir hornOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the gas horn to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Battery water heatingBattery water heatingOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the battery water heating power supply to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Power distribution unitPower distribution unitOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the on/off of the power distribution unit power supply
Output Channel Control - Battery PackBattery PackOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the battery pack power supply to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - HSDHSDOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the HSD power supply to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Low speed pedestrian alarmLow speed pedestrian alarmOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the low-speed pedestrian alarm power supply to turn on/ off
Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Output Channel Control - High/low frequency electric speakertweeter/woofer frequency electric speakerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the high/low frequency electric speaker power supply to turn on/off
Output Channel Control - Chassis sensor power supplyChassis sensor power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of chassis sensors to turn on/off
Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Cockpit domain controllerCockpit domain controllerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the cabin domain controller to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - KL15 power supplyKL15 power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the KL15 power supply to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Vehicle Domain Control-1Vehicle domain controlOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the vehicle domain controller to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Seat control moduleSeat control moduleOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the seat control module to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - 24V car power supply24V car power supplyOn/OffControl the 24V onboard power supply on/ off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Left front blowerLeft front blowerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the left front blower to turn on/off

By reading the "Action Test" on the fault diagnosis instrument, the working status of relays and actuators controlled by SJBUP can be checked without disassembling any components. Before conducting relevant fault diagnosis on the control system, performing action testing is a prerequisite for troubleshooting, which can shorten the time for troubleshooting.

Note
The following table lists the data under normal conditions for reference only. Do not rely solely on these reference values to determine whether a certain component has malfunctioned. Under normal circumstances, a comparison can be made between a functioning vehicle and a diagnosed vehicle in the same state to determine the data of the diagnosed vehicle is normal in its current state.

a.Perform vehicle power on operation. b.Connect the fault diagnosis device. c.Choice “ SJBUP ” / “ Action Test ” . d.Refer to the table below and conduct active testing.

Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Right front blowerRight front blowerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the right front blower to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Rear blowerRear blowerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the rear blower to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Driving recorderDriving recorderOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the driving recorder to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Reserve KL30KL30On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the KL30 power supply to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Switching power supplySwitching power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the on/off of the switch type power supply power supply
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Electric stepsElectric stepsOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the electric step to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Sunroof sunshadeSunroof sunshadeOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the sunroof sunshade to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Vehicle domain controller -2Vehicle domain controllerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the vehicle domain controller to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Gate control moduleGate control moduleOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the door control module to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - ECASECASOn/OffControl the ECAS power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Rear USB power supplyRear USB power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the rear USB power supply to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Front row USB power supplyFront row USB power supplyOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the front row USB power supply to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Air conditioning controllerAir conditioning controllerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the air conditioning controller to turn on/off
Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Vehicle Output Channel Control - PTC controllerPTC controllerOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the PTC controller power supply to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - The cigarette lighterThe cigarette lighterOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the cigarette lighter to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Air conditioning&compress- orAir conditioning&compressorOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the compressor power supply to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - OBD interfaceOBD interfaceOn/OffControl the OBD interface power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Instrument screenInstrument screenOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the instrument panel to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Car TVCar TVOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the car TV to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Car refrigeratorCar refrigeratorOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the car refrigerator to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Bar water pumpBar water pumpOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the bar water pump to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Wireless charging moduleWireless charging moduleOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the wireless charging module to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - HSDHSDOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the HSD power supply to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - HSDHSDOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the HSD power supply to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - AR-HUDAR-HUDOn/OffControl the AR-HUD power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Electronic rearview mirrorElectronic rearview mirrorOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the electronic rearview mirror to turn on/off
Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Vehicle Output Channel Control - IVI screenIVI screenOn/OffControl the IVI screen power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Vehicle Output Channel Control - CAR screenCAR screenOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of the CAR screen to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - Sleeper switch devicesSleeper switch devicesOn/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of sleep switch devices to turn on/off
Vehicle Output Channel Control - ESCLESCLOn/OffControl the ESCL power supply on/off according to the diagnostic instrument instructions
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor fan 2Motor fan 2On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor fan 2 to turn on/off
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor water pump 2Motor water pump 2On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor water pump 2 to turn on/off
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor water pump 1Motor water pump 1On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor water pump 1 to turn on/off
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor fan 1Motor fan 1On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor fan 1 to turn on/off
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery fan 2Battery fan 2On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery fan 2 to turn on/off
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery fan 1Battery fan 1On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery fan 1 to turn on/off
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery water pump 1Battery water pump 1On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery water pump 1 to turn on/off
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor fan 3Motor fan 3On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of motor fan 3 to turn on/off
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery water pump 2Battery water pump 2On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery water pump 2 to turn on/off
Fault Diagnosis Instrument Display ItemsTest PartsControl RangeDiagnostic Description
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery fan 3Battery fan 3On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery fan 3 to turn on/off
Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery fan 4Battery fan 4On/OffAccording to the diagnostic instrument instructions, control the power supply of battery fan 4 to turn on/off
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180017Module overvoltageVoltage > 32V, t > 500ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Smart junction box UP

7.4.6.6 Smart Junction Box UP Power Failure

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.6 Smart Junction Box UP Power Failure — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.4.6.6 Smart Junction Box UP Power Failure — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation.Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection.Refer to Routine Inspection CAN1FD

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U014087Communication with the BDCU timed outWhen the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18860021 is received within 1s1. Wiring harness 2.Smart junction box UP
U007C88BCANFD1 BusOffError frames occur in the CAN network under normal KL15 and supply voltage conditions
U220600BCANFD1 NM LimphomeWhen the KL15 and power supply voltage are normal, no NM messages are received from other network nodes
B111717High battery voltageVoltage > 32V, t > 500ms
B111716Low Battery VoltageVoltage < 18V, t > 30s
U015687Lost Communication With CDCUWhen the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FEC1EE is received within 10s
U019887Lost Communication With T-BoxWhen the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FEE6EE is received within 10s
U012287Lost Communication With VDCWhen the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FCC231 is received within 1s

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the smart junction box UP? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the smart junction box UP. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.7 Smart Junction Box UP Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.7 Smart Junction Box UP Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity CAN1FD

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180713OUT07:KL15 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2.Smart junction box UP
B180719OUT07:KL15 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18074BOUT07:KL15 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 5:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.8 Smart Junction Box UP KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.8 Smart Junction Box UP KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the KL15 main power supply harness of the smart junction box UP.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180113OUT01:Rear Blower load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Bedding air conditioning blower 3.Smart junction box UP
B180119OUT01:Rear Blower overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18014BOUT01:Rear Blower over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - KL15 Power Supply, On/Off" action test. Check if the KL15 power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.9 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Sleeper Air Conditioning Blower

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.9 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Sleeper Air Conditioning Blower — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the sleeper air conditioning blower.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180213OUT02:Right Front Blower load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Right air conditioning blower 3. Smart junction box UP
B180219OUT02:Right Front Blower overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18024BOUT02:Right Front Blower over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Rear Blower, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the sleeper air conditioning blower operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper air conditioning blower. Refer to HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Rear Replacement Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Intelligent Electrical Box - Vehicle Body Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.10 Right Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.10 Right Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the right air conditioning blower.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180313OUT03:Left Front Blower load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Left air conditioning blower 3. Smart junction box UP
B180319OUT03:Left Front Blower overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18034BOUT03:Left Front Blower over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Right Front Blower, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the right air conditioning blower operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right air conditioning blower. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.11 Left Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.11 Left Air Conditioning Blower Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the left air conditioning blower.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180513OUT05:SWC load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Seat module 3. Smart junction box UP
B180519OUT05:SWC overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18054BOUT05:SWC over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Left Front Blower, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the left air conditioning blower operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left air conditioning blower. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Left Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.12 Seat Module Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.12 Seat Module Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the seat module.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180613OUT06:Body BDCU1 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Body domain control uint 3. Smart junction box UP
B180619OUT06:Body BDCU1 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18064BOUT06:Body BDCU1 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on
B180B13OUT11:Body BDCU2 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on
B180B19OUT11:Body BDCU2 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B180B4BOUT11:Body BDCU2 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Seat Control Module, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the seat module operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the seat module. Refer to Replacement Of Driver's Seat Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.13 Vehicle Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.13 Vehicle Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the body domain controller.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180813OUT08:CDCU load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Cockpit domain controller 3. Smart junction box UP
B180819OUT08:CDCU overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18084BOUT08:CDCU over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Body Domain Control-1, On/Off" and "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Vehicle Domain Control-2, On/Off" action tests. Check the power supply of the vehicle domain controller operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the body domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.14 Cabin Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.14 Cabin Domain Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the cockpit domain controller.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180913OUT09:ECAS load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1.Wiring harness 2.ECAS 3.Smart junction box UP
B180919OUT09:ECAS overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18094BOUT09:ECAS over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Cabin Domain Controller, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the cabin domain controller operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the cockpit domain controller. Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.15 ECAS Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.15 ECAS Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the ECAS power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180A13OUT10:DCM load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Gate control module 3. Smart junction box UP
B180A19OUT10:DCM overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B180A4BOUT10:DCM over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control ECAS, On/Off" action test. Check if the ECAS power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.16 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Door Control Module

1. DTC Monitoring Logic

2. Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.16 Circuit Diagram — Door Control Module power supply

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the door control module.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180C13OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Skyroof sunshade 3. Smart junction box UP
B180C19OUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B180C4BOUT12:Sky Shade CurIntel over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control Door Control Module, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the door control module operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the door control module. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.17 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Sunroof Sunshade

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.17 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Sunroof Sunshade — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the skyroof sunshade.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B180E13OUT14:Work load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Shift switch 3. Brake pedal switch 4. Smart junction box UP
B180E19OUT14:Work overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B180E4BOUT14:Work over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Skyroof Sunshade, Open/Close" action test. Check the power supply of the sunroof sunshade operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sunroof sunshade. Refer to Replacement of the sunroof sunshade assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement of body smart electrical box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.18 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Switch Type Power Supply

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.18 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Switch Type Power Supply — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the shift switch and brake pedal switch.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B181113OUT17:IPC load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. IPC screen 3. Smart junction box UP
B181119OUT17:IPC overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18114BOUT17:IPC over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Switching Power Supply, On/Off" action test. Check the switching power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the faulty switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch . Replacement Of Brake Pedal Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.19 Instrument Panel Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.19 Instrument Panel Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IPC screen power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B181213OUT18:OBD load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1.Wiring harness 2.OBD 3.Smart junction box UP
B181219OUT18:OBD overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18124BOUT18:OBD over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Instrument Screen, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the IPC screen operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the IPC screen. Refer to Replacement Of IPC Screen Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.20 OBD Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.20 OBD Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the OBD power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B181313OUT19: ACAndBatCompressor load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Compressor 3. Smart junction box UP
B181319OUT19: ACAndBatCompressor overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18134BOUT19: ACAndBatCompressor over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control OBD Interface, On/Off" action test. Check if the OBD interface power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace OBD. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.21 Compressor Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.21 Compressor Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the compressor.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B181513OUT21:PTC load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1.Wiring harness 2.PTC 3.Smart junction box UP
B181519OUT21:PTC overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18154BOUT21:PTC over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Air Conditioning & battery Compressor, On/Off" action test. Check if the compressor power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the compressor. Refer to Replacement Of Air Conditioning Compressor Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.22 PTC Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.22 PTC Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PTC power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B181613OUT22:AC load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Air conditioning controller 3. Smart junction box UP
B181619OUT22:AC overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18164BOUT22:AC over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control PTC Controller, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the PTC controller operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the PTC controller. Refer to Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Left . Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Right . Replacement Of HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Rear Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.23 Air Conditioning Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.23 Air Conditioning Controller Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the air conditioning controller.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B181713OUT23:FrontUSB load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Front row USB 3. Smart junction box UP
B181719OUT23:FrontUSB overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18174BOUT23:FrontUSB over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Air Conditioning Controller, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the air conditioning controller operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the air conditioning controller. Refer to HVAC Assembly (Including PTC) - Front Rght Replacement Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.24 Front Row USB Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.24 Front Row USB Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the front row USB power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B181813OUT24:RearUSB load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Rear USB 3. Smart junction box UP
B181819OUT24:RearUSB overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18184BOUT24:RearUSB over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Front USB Power, On/Off" action test. Check if the front USB power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front row USB. Refer to Replacement Of The Front USB Interface Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.25 Rear USB Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.25 Rear USB Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the rear USB power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B181A13OUT26:AR_HUD load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1.Wiring harness 2.HUD 3.Smart junction box UP
B181A19OUT26:AR_HUD overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B181A4BOUT26:AR_HUD over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Rear USB Power, On/Off" action test. Check the rear USB power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the rear USB. Refer to Replacement Of Rear USB Interface Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.26 HUD Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.26 HUD Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the HUD power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B181D13OUT29:PWC load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Wireless charging module 3. Smart junction box UP
B181D19OUT29:PWC overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B181D4BOUT29:PWC over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control AR-HUD, On/Off" action test. Check if the HUD power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace HUD. Refer to Replacement of AR-HUD Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.27 Wireless Charging Module Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.27 Wireless Charging Module Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the wireless charging module.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182013OUT32:TV load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Car TV 3. Smart junction box UP
B182019OUT32:TV overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18204BOUT32:TV over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Wireless Charging Module, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the wireless charging module operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the wireless charging module. Refer to Replacement Of Wireless Charging Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.28 Vehicle Mounted TV Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.28 Vehicle Mounted TV Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the car TV.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182113OUT33:ESCL load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. ESCL 3. Smart junction box UP
B182119OUT33:ESCL overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18214BOUT33:ESCL over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - Car TV, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the car TV operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the car TV. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.29 ESCL Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.29 ESCL Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the ESCL power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182213OUT34:SSM load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1.Wiring harness 2.Sleeper switch devices 3.Smart junction box UP
B182219OUT34:SSM overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18224BOUT34:SSM over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control ESCL, On/Off" action test. Check if the ESCL power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace ESCL. Refer to Replacement Of Steering Column Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.30 Sleeper Switch Devices Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.30 Sleeper Switch Devices Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the sleeper switch devices.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182313OUT35:CAR load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. CAR screen 3. Smart junction box UP
B182319OUT35:CAR overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18234BOUT35:CAR over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "body output channel control sleeper switch devices, on/off" action test. Check the power supply of the sleeper switch devices operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper switch devices. Refer to Replacement Of Sleep Switch Devices Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.31 CAR Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.31 CAR Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAR screen power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182413OUT36:IVI load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. IVI screen 3. Smart junction box UP
B182419OUT36:IVI overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18244BOUT36:IVI over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control CAR Screen, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the CAR screen operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the CAR screen. Refer to Replacement Of CAR Screen Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.32 IVI Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.32 IVI Screen Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IVI screen power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182613OUT38:BatDrivPump1 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery water pump) 3. Smart junction box UP
B182619OUT38:BatDrivPump1 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18264BOUT38:BatDrivPump1 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Vehicle Output Channel Control - IVI Screen, On/Off" action test. Check if the IVI screen power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the IVI screen. Refer to Replacement Of IVI Screen Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.33 Left Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.33 Left Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182F13OUT47:BatDrivPump2 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right battery water pump) 3. Smart junction box UP
B182F19OUT47:BatDrivPump2 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B182F4BOUT47:BatDrivPump2 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Water Pump 1, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump) operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery water pump). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.34 Right Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.34 Right Battery Water Pump Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182A13OUT42: VertMotorDrivPump1 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Electric motor water pump 1 3. Smart junction box UP
B182A19OUT42: VertMotorDrivPump1 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B182A4BOUT42: VertMotorDrivPump1 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Water Pump 2, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery water pump). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.35 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Motor Water Pump 1

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.35 Power Supply Circuit Fault Of Motor Water Pump 1 — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor water pump 1.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182B13OUT43: VertMotorDrivPump2 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Electric motor water pump 2 3. Smart junction box UP
B182B19OUT43: VertMotorDrivPump2 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B182B4BOUT43: VertMotorDrivPump2 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Water Pump 1, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Water Pump 1 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor water pump 1. Refer to Replacement Of Electronic Water Pump Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.36 Fault In The Power Supply Crcuit Of Motor Water Pump 2

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.36 Fault In The Power Supply Crcuit Of Motor Water Pump 2 — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor water pump 2.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182713OUT39:BatFanGuard1 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1) 3. Smart junction box UP
B182719OUT39:BatFanGuard1 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18274BOUT39:BatFanGuard1 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Water Pump 2, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Water Pump 2 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor water pump 2. Refer to Replacement Of Electronic Water Pump Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.37 Left Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.37 Left Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182813OUT40:BatFanGuard2 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2) 3. Smart junction box UP
B182819OUT40:BatFanGuard2 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18284BOUT40:BatFanGuard2 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Fan 1, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 1). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.38 Left Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.38 Left Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2). CAN1FD

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182E13OUT46:BatFanGuard3 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1) 3. Smart junction box UP
B182E19OUT46:BatFanGuard3 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B182E4BOUT46:BatFanGuard3 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Fan 2, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (left battery fan 2). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.39 Right Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.39 Right Battery Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1). CAN1FD

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182D13OUT45:BatFanGuard4 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Right thermal management unit (Right battery fan 2) 3. Smart junction box UP
B182D19OUT45:BatFanGuard4 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B182D4BOUT45:BatFanGuard4 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Fan 3, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the right thermal management unit (Right Battery Fan 1) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 1). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.40 Right Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.40 Right Battery Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2). CAN1FD

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182913OUT41: AlterFanGuard1 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Motor fan 1 3. Smart junction box UP
B182919OUT41: AlterFanGuard1 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18294BOUT41: AlterFanGuard1 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Battery Fan 4, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the right thermal management unit (Right Battery Fan 2) operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right thermal management unit (right battery fan 2). Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.41 Motor Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.41 Motor Fan 1 Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor fan 1.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182C13OUT44: AlterFanGuard2 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Motor fan 2 3. Smart junction box UP
B182C19OUT44: AlterFanGuard2 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B182C4BOUT44: AlterFanGuard2 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Fan 1, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Fan 1 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor fan 1. Refer to Replacement Of Front End Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.42 Motor Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.42 Motor Fan 2 Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor fan 2.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B182513OUT37: AlterFanGuard3 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Motor fan 3 3. Smart junction box UP
B182519OUT37: AlterFanGuard3 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B18254BOUT37: AlterFanGuard3 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Fan 2, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Fan 2 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor fan 2. Refer to Replacement Of Front End Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.43 Motor Fan 3 Power Supply Crcuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.43 Motor Fan 3 Power Supply Crcuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of motor fan 3.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717High battery voltageVoltage > 32V, t > 500ms Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4. Smart junction box DOWN
B111716Low Battery VoltageVoltage < 18V, t > 30s Voltage < 18V, t > 30s
B1E0017Module overvoltageVoltage > 32V, t > 500ms Voltage > 32V, t > 500ms

Step 4:Enter the SJBUP action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Thermal Management Output Channel Control - Motor Fan 3, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of Motor Fan 3 operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace motor fan 3. Refer to Replacement Of Front End Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box UP. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.44 Smart Junction Box DOWN Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.44 Smart Junction Box DOWN Power Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.4.6.44 Smart Junction Box DOWN Power Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD2 BCANFD1

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U014087Communication with the BDCU timed outWhen the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18860021 is received within 1s1. Wiring harness 2. Smart junction box DOWN
U007C88BCANFD1 BusOffError frames occur in the CAN network under normal KL15 and supply voltage conditions
U220600BCANFD1 NM LimphomeWhen the KL15 and power supply voltage are normal, no NM messages are received from other network nodes
U015687Lost Communication With CDCUWhen the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FEC1EE is received within 10s
U01A087Lost Communication With SJB_UPWhen the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FF1554 is received within 1s
U019887Lost Communication With T-BoxWhen the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FEE6EE is received within 10s
U012287Lost Communication With VDCWhen the KL15 and the power supply voltage are normal, no ID0x18FCC231 is received within 1s
U007D88BCANFD2 BusOffError frames occur in the CAN network under normal KL15 and supply voltage conditions
U220700BCANFD2 NM LimphomeWhen the KL15 and power supply voltage are normal, no NM messages are received from other network nodes

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the smart junction box DOWN? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the smart junction box DOWN. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.45 Smart Junction Box DOWN Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.45 Smart Junction Box DOWN Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD2 BCANFD1

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E0113OUT01:Body load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Smart junction box UP 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E0119OUT01:Body overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E014BOUT01:Body over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Check the BCAND2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND2 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.46 Fault In The Main Power Supply Circuit Of The Vehicle Body

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.46 Fault In The Main Power Supply Circuit Of The Vehicle Body — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the main power supply harness of the vehicle body.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E0313OUT03:EPS load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. EHPS 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E0319OUT03:EPS overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E034BOUT03:EPS over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on
B1E1D13OUT29:EPSAssist load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on
B1E1D19OUT29:EPSAssist overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E1D4BOUT29:EPSAssist over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Body B+, On/ Off" action test. Check if the body B+power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the smart junction box UP. Refer to Replacement Of Body Smart Electrical Box Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.47 EPS Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.47 EPS Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the EHPS power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E0413OUT04:KL15_1 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E0419OUT04:KL15_1 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E044BOUT04:KL15_1 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on
B1E2213OUT34:KL15_3 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on
B1E2219OUT34:KL15_3 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E224BOUT34:KL15_3 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - EPS Steering Assembly Auxiliary Power, On/Off" action test. Check if the EHPS power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.48 Smart Junction Box DOWN KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.48 Smart Junction Box DOWN KL15 Main Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the KL15 main power supply harness of the smart junction box DOWN. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E0513OUT05:EBSKL30 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. EBS 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E0519OUT05:EBSKL30 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E054BOUT05:EBSKL30 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on
B1E0A13OUT10:EBS_KL15 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on
B1E0A19OUT10:EBS_KL15 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E0A4BOUT10:EBS_KL15 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on
B1E1F13OUT31-EBS trailer open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on
B1E1F19OUT31:TrailerEBS overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E1F4BOUT31:TrailerEBS over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the diagnostic tool interface SJBUN action test and perform the "Output Channel Control - KL15 Main Power 3, On/Off" and "Output Channel Control - KL15-1 Main Power 1, On/Off" action tests. Check if the KL15 power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.49 EBS Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2113OUT33:EBSBat30 load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on
B1E2119OUT33:EBSBat30 overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E214BOUT33:EBSBat30 over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.49 EBS Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.4.6.49 EBS Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the EBS power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E0813OUT08: MediumaxleTCU load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Low voltage interface of electric drive medium axle vehicle (electric drive medium axle TCU) 3.Chassis smart electrical box
B1E0819OUT08: MediumaxleTCU overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E084BOUT08: MediumaxleTCU over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control EBS Controller, On/Off" action test. Check if the EBS power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.50 Electric Drive Medium axle TCU Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.50 Electric Drive Medium axle TCU Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the low-voltage interface (TCU) of the electric drive medium axle vehicle.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E0913OUT09:TGWBat load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. T-Gateway 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E0919OUT09:TGWBat overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E094BOUT09:TGWBat over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on
B1E2613OUT38:TGWAssist load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on
B1E2619OUT38:TGWAssist overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E264BOUT38:TGWAssist over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Middle axle TCU, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the low-voltage interface (Middle axle TCU) of the electric drive vehicle operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the low-voltage interface (TCU) of the electric drive medium axle vehicle. Refer to Replacement of Integrated axle - Medium axle Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the chassis smart electrical box. Step 6:Replace the chassis smart electrical box. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.51 Gateway Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.51 Gateway Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram (1/3)
7.4.6.51 Gateway Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram (2/3)
7.4.6.51 Gateway Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram (3/3)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the T-gateway power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E0B13OUT11:BackupLamp load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2.Rear combination light (reverse light) 3.Smart junction box DOWN
B1E0B19OUT11:BackupLamp overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E0B4BOUT11:BackupLamp over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Central Gateway, On/Off" action test. Check if the T-gateway power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.52 Reverse Light Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.52 Reverse Light Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the rear combination lamp (reverse light).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E0D13OUT13: TractorMarkerLight load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Small lamp 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E0D19OUT13: TractorMarkerLight overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E0D4BOUT13: TractorMarkerLight over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Reverse Light, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the rear combination light (reverse light) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the rear combination light (reverse light). Refer to Replacement Of Reverse Light Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.53 Small Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

Identification light O318f Z01 Ground

7.4.6.53 Small Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.4.6.53 Small Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the small lamp.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E1113OUT17:LeftLowBeam load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Front left headlight (left low beam) 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E1119OUT17:LeftLowBeam overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E114BOUT17:LeftLowBeam over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Small Lamp, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the small lamp operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the small light. Refer to Replacement Of Left Front Clearance Lamp . Replacement Of Right Front Clearance Lamp Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.54 Left Low Beam Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.54 Left Low Beam Lamp Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front left headlight (left low beam).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E1213OUT18_ Right high beam open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Front right headlight (right high beam) 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E1219OUT18: TractorRightHighBeam overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E124BOUT18: TractorRightHighBeam over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Left Low Beam, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the front left headlight (left low beam) operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left headlight (left low beam). Refer to Replacement Of Left Headlight Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.55 Right High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.55 Right High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front right headlight (right high beam).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E1313OUT19: TractorLeftHighBeam load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Front left headlight (left high beam) 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E1319OUT19: TractorLeftHighBeam overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E134BOUT19: TractorLeftHighBeam over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Right High Beam, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the front right headlight (right high beam) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front right headlight (right high beam). Refer to Replacement Of Right Headlight Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.56 Left High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.56 Left High Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front left headlight (left high beam). Identification light O318f Z01 Ground

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E1413OUT20: RightLowBeam load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2.Front right headlight (right low beam) 3.Smart junction box DOWN
B1E1419OUT20: RightLowBeam overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E144BOUT20_ Right low beam overheatingWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Left High Beam, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the front left headlight (left high beam) operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left headlight (left high beam). Refer to Replacement Of Left Headlight Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.57 Right Low Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.57 Right Low Beam Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front right headlight (right low beam). Identification light O318f Z01 Ground

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E1613OUT22:LeftRunning load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Front left combination light (left daytime running light) 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E1619OUT22:LeftRunning overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E164BOUT22:LeftRunning over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Right Low Beam, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the front right headlight (right low beam) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front right headlight (right low beam). Refer to Replacement Of Right Headlight Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.58 Left Daytime Running Light Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram Refer to chassis smart electrical box 3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front left combination light (left daytime running light). Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Left Daytime Running Light, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the front left combination light (left daytime running light) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left combination light (left daytime running light). Refer to Replacement Of Left Front Combination Lamp Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.59 Right Daytime Running Light Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E1813OUT24:RightRunning load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Front right combination light (right daytime running light) 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E1819OUT24:RightRunning overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E184BOUT24:RightRunning over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.59 Right Daytime Running Light Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front right combination light (right daytime running light). Identification light O318f Z01 Ground

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E1A13OUT26:IBS load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Intelligent battery sensor IBS 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E1A19OUT26:IBS overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E1A4BOUT26:IBS over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Right Daytime Running Light, On/Off" action test. Check if the power supply of the front right combination light (right daytime running light) operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front right combination light (right daytime running light). Refer to Replacement Of Right Front Combination Lamp Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.60 IBS Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.60 IBS Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the IBS power supply harness of the battery.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E1B13OUT27:WorkingLights load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Rear work light 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E1B19OUT27:WorkingLights overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E1B4BOUT27:WorkingLights over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Intelligent Battery Sensor, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the intelligent battery sensor operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace Intelligent battery sensor IBS. Refer to Replacement Of Smart Battery Sensors Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.61 Rear Work Light Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.61 Rear Work Light Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the rear work light.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E1E13OUT35:EPB load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1.Wiring harness 2.EPB 3.Smart junction box DOWN
B1E1E19OUT35:EPB overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E1E4BOUT35:EPB over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Rear Work Light, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the rear work light operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the work light. Refer to Replacement of rear work light Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.62 EPB Power Supply Circuit Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.62 EPB Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation.Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection.Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the EPB power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2513OUT37:VDCB load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1.Wiring harness 2.VDC 3.Smart junction box DOWN
B1E2519OUT37:VDCB overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E254BOUT37:VDCB over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Electronic Parking, On/Off" action test. Check the electronic parking power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN.Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.63 VDC Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.63 VDC Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the VDC power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2713OUT39: MediumRearaxleTCU load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Rear axle MCU in electric drive 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E2719OUT39: MediumRearaxleTCU overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E274BOUT39: MediumRearaxleTCU over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic tool interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - VBU-B+_VDC, On/Off" action test. Check if the VDC B+power supply operates according to the diagnostic tool instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace VDC. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.64 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Rear Axle MCU In The Electric Drive

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.64 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Rear Axle MCU In The Electric Drive — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the rear axle MCU in the electric drive.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2813OUT40: AirHandlingUnit load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Air handling unit 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E2819OUT40: AirHandlingUnit overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E284BOUT40: AirHandlingUnit over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Mid/Rear axle MCU, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the mid/rear axle MCU operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the rear axle MCU in the electric drive. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated axle - Medium axle . Replacement Of Integrated axle - Rear axle Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.65 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Air Handling Unit

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.65 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Air Handling Unit — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the air handling unit. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2913OUT41: HighLowPitchElectric- Horn load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Electric horn 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E2919OUT41: HighLowPitchElectric- Horn overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E294BOUT41: HighLowPitchElectric- Horn over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Air Handling Unit, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the air handling unit operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the air handling unit. Refer to Replacement Of Air Handling Unit Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.66 Electric Horn Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.66 Electric Horn Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the electric horn. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2F13OUT47:AirHorn load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Air horn 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E2F19OUT47:AirHorn overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E2F4BOUT47:AirHorn over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - High/Low Frequency Electric Speaker, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the high/low frequency electric speaker operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the electric horn. Refer to Replacement Of Electric Horn Assembly - bass . Replacement Of Electric Horn Assembly - High Frequency Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.67 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Gas Horn

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.67 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Gas Horn — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the air horn. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2C13OUT44:Battery pack load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Battery pack 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E2C19OUT44:Battery pack overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E2C4BOUT44:Battery pack over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - air horn, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the air horn operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the air horn. Refer to Replacement Of Air Horn Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.68 Battery Pack Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.68 Battery Pack Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the Battery pack. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2D13OUT45: AuxiDrivMultiOne load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1.Wiring harness 2.Power distribution unit 3.Smart junction box DOWN
B1E2D19OUT45: AuxiDrivMultiOne overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E2D4BOUT45: AuxiDrivMultiOne over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Battery pack, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the Battery pack operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the battery pack. Refer to Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 1 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 2 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 3 (CALB 161Ah) . Replacement Of NCM Battery Pack Assembly 4 (CALB 161Ah) . Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.69 Power Distribution Unit Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.69 Power Distribution Unit Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power distribution unit power supply harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2E13OUT46: BatWaterHeatComp load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2. Thermal management unit (battery water heater) 3. Smart junction box DOWN
B1E2E19OUT46: BatWaterHeatComp overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E2E4BOUT46: BatWaterHeatComp over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Auxiliary Drive Multi in One, On/Off" action test. Check if the power distribution unit power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the power distribution unit. Refer to Replacement Of Multi In One Power Distribution Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.70 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Battery Water Heater

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.70 Fault In The Power Supply Circuit Of The Battery Water Heater — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the thermal management unit (battery water heater).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E2A13OUT42:AVAS load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2.Low speed alarm module 3.Smart junction box DOWN
B1E2A19OUT42:AVAS overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E2A4BOUT42:AVAS over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Battery Water Heater, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the thermal management unit (battery water heater) operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the thermal management unit (battery water heater). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.71 Low Speed Alarm Module Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.71 Low Speed Alarm Module Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the low-speed alarm module. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E3013OUT48:TPMS load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2.Rear tire pressure module 3.Smart junction box DOWN
B1E3019OUT48:TPMS overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E304BOUT48:TPMS over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Low Speed Pedestrian Alarm, On/Off" action test. Check if the low-speed pedestrian alarm power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the low-speed alarm module. Refer to Replacement Of Low Speed Alarm Module (AVAS) Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.72 Tire Pressure Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.72 Tire Pressure Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the rear tire pressure module. KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B1E3113OUT49: ChassisSensors load open circuitWhen the power supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the output current is 0A when the current channel is powered on1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle pressure sensor 3.Rear axle pressure sensor 4.Smart junction box DOWN
B1E3119OUT49: ChassisSensors overcurrentWhen the supply voltage is normal and there is no sleep state, the current exceeding the rated value is detected when the current channel power is turned on
B1E314BOUT49: ChassisSensors over temperatureWhen the power supply voltage is normal and the current channel is not in the hibernation state, the temperature exceeds the rated temperature when the current channel is powered on

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test on the diagnostic instrument interface and perform the "Output Channel Control - Tire Pressure+Active Grille Shutter, On/Off" action test. Check if the tire pressure/active grille power supply operates according to the diagnostic instrument instructions. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the rear tire pressure module. Refer to Replacement Of Tire Pressure CAN Module Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.73 Chassis Sensor Power Supply Circuit Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.73 Chassis Sensor Power Supply Circuit Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the power supply harness of the front axle pressure sensor and the rear axle pressure sensor.

Step 4:Enter the SJBUN action test interface of the diagnostic instrument and perform the "Output Channel Control - Chassis Sensor Power Supply, On/Off" action test. Check the power supply of the front and rear axle pressure sensors operates according to the instructions of the diagnostic instrument. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front and rear axle pressure sensors. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.4.6.74 12V Car Power Supply Failure

1.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.74 12V Car Power Supply Failure — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.4.6.74 12V Car Power Supply Failure — circuit diagram (2/2)

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F02 of the 12V junction box. Step 3:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery

Step 4:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 5:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 6:Check the wire harness between the 12V vehicle power supply and DCDC3. Step 7:Replace the 12V car power supply. Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Power Supply (12V)

7.4.6.75 Car Refrigerator Failure

1.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.75 Car Refrigerator Failure — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.4.6.75 Car Refrigerator Failure — circuit diagram (2/2)

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F08 of the 12V junction box. Step 3:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery

Step 4:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 5:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 6:Check the wire harness between the car refrigerator and DCDC3. Step 7:Replace the car refrigerator.

7.4.6.76 Trailer Turn Signal Failure

1.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.76 Trailer Turn Signal Failure — circuit diagram (1/3)
7.4.6.76 Trailer Turn Signal Failure — circuit diagram (2/3)
7.4.6.76 Trailer Turn Signal Failure — circuit diagram (3/3)

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F07 of the 12V junction box. Step 3:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery

Step 4:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 5:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 6:Check the wire harness between the trailer turn signal controller and DCDC3. Step 7:Check the turn signal power signal wire harness between the trailer turn signal controller and the Trailer cable socket 1/ 2. Step 8:Replace the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 9:Replace the trailer turn signal controller.

7.4.6.77 Rear Side - Marker Light Failure

1.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.77 Rear Side - Marker Light Failure — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.4.6.77 Rear Side - Marker Light Failure — circuit diagram (2/2)

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F05 of the 12V junction box.

Step 3:Remove the tail light relay and Measure there is an open circuit between terminal 30 and terminal 87 of the tail light relay. Connect an external 12V power supply to terminal 85 of the tail light relay and ground terminal 86, then Measure there is a closed circuit between terminal 30 and terminal 87 of the tail light relay. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the tail light relay. Step 4:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Step 5:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 6:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 7:Check the wire harness between the tail light relay and DCDC3. Step 8:Check the control wire harness between the tail light relay and the smart junction box DOWN. Step 9:Check the grounding wire harness of the tail light relay. Step 10:Check the rear side - marker light power wire harness between the tail - light relay and the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 11:Check the grounding wire harness of the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 12:Replace the trailer cable socket 1/2.

7.4.6.78 Side - Marker - Light Failure

1.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.78 Side - Marker - Light Failure — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.4.6.78 Side - Marker - Light Failure — circuit diagram (2/2)

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F04 of the 12V junction box.

Step 3:Remove the marker light relay and Measure there is an open - circuit between Pin 30 and Pin 87 of the marker light relay. Connect an external 12V power supply to Pin 85 of the marker light relay and ground Pin 86, then Measure there is a closed - circuit between Pin 30 and Pin 87 of the marker light relay. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the marker light relay. Step 4:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Step 5:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 6:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 7:Check the wire harness between the marker - light relay and DCDC3. Step 8:Check the control wire harness between the marker - light relay and the smart junction box DOWN. Step 9:Check the grounding wire harness of the marker - light relay. Step 10:Check the side - marker - light power wire harness between the marker - light relay and the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 11:Check the ground wire harness of the trailer cable socket 1/2. Step 12:Replace the trailer cable socket 1/2.

7.4.6.79 Brake Lamp Failure

1.Circuit Diagram

7.4.6.79 Brake Lamp Failure — circuit diagram

2.Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 2:Check the fuses FS02, F01 and F06 of the 12V junction box.

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCANFD2(H) and BCANFD2(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

Step 3:Remove the brake lamp relay and Measure there is an open circuit between terminal 30 and terminal 87 of the brake lamp relay. Connect an external 12V power supply to terminal 85 of the brake lamp relay and ground terminal 86, then Measure there is a closed circuit between terminal 30 and terminal 87 of the brake lamp relay. – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the brake lamp relay. Step 4:Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Step 5:Check the 24V power input wire harness between the main battery and DCDC3. Step 6:Check the input voltage of DCDC3 is between 22V and 27V, and whether the voltage output from DCDC3 to the 12V junction box is between 11V and 14V? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the DCDC3. Step 7:Check the wire harness between the brake lamp relay and DCDC3. Step 8:Check the control wire harness between the brake lamp relay and the smart junction box DOWN. Step 9:Check the grounding wire harness of the brake lamp relay. Step 10:Check the brake lamp power wire harness between the brake lamp relay and the trailer cable socket 2. Step 11:Check the ground wire harness of the trailer cable socket 2. Step 12:Replace the trailer cable socket 2.

7.4.6.80 Inspection Of BCAND2 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCAND2 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the voltage of the BCAND2 bus. No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAND2 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAND2 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAND2 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAND2 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAND2 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAND2 bus. C. Measure the BCAND2 bus resistance between each module and the smart junction box DOWN in sequence to ensure it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of the BCAND2 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAND2 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAND2 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAND2 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAND2 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the electric horn assembly and the sealing crossbeamM6(6.5 +/- .75 ) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the electric horn assembly and the sealing crossbeamM6(6.5 +/- .75 ) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the air horn and the air horn bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75 ) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the horn bracket and the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the horn bracket and the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs

7.5 Electric Horn Device

7.5.1 Specifications

7.5.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1436

7.5.2 Decomposition Diagram

7.5.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Bass Electric Horn 6. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 2. Tweeter Electric Horn 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Trumpet Type Horn 8. Hexagon Flange Nut 4. Trumpet Type Horn Bracket 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt

7.5.3 Inspect

7.5.3.1 Inspection of Horn

1. Park the vehicle, press the horn button on the steering wheel to check the electric horn is working properly. 2. Press the electric/air horn change-over switch, press the horn switch repeatedly, and check whether the air horn is working properly.

Figure p1438

7.5.4 Dismantling and Installation

7.5.4.1 Replacement of Electric Horn Assembly - low Pitch

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric horn assembly - low pitch.

13 Remove 1 fixing nut of the electric horn assembly - low pitch. 14 Remove the electric horn assembly - low pitch. Installation Procedures 1 Move the electric horn assembly - low pitch to the mounting position. 2 Install and tighten 1 fixing nut of the electric horn assembly - low pitch.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1439

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the electric horn assembly - low pitch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.

7.5.4.2 Replacement of Electric Horn Assembly - High Pitch

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket.

9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric horn assembly - high pitch. 13 Remove 1 fixing nut of the electric horn assembly - high pitch. 14 Remove the electric horn assembly - high pitch. Installation Procedures

Figure p1441
Figure p1441

1 Move the electric horn assembly - high pitch to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the electric horn assembly - high pitch.

Torque: (6.5 ft-lb +/- .75 ft-lb) ft-lb

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the electric horn assembly - high pitch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.

7.5.4.3 Replacement of Air Horn

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 7 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Remove the electric oil pump. 14 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the air horn.

Figure p1443

15 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the air horn. 16 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the air horn. 17 Remove the air horn. Installation Procedures

Figure p1444
Figure p1444

1 Move the air horn to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the air horn.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 air pipe of the air horn. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the air horn.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the electric oil pump. 6 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 7 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 8 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 9 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 12 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 13 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 14 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the 120V power supply body to the rear enclosure panel assemblyM5(6.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

7.6 Vehicle-mounted Power Supply Device

7.6.1 Specifications

7.6.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1448
Figure p1448

7.6.2 Dismantling and Installation

7.6.2.1 Replacement of 120V Power

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the 120V power. 5 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the 120V power.

6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the 120V power. 7 Remove the 120V power. Installation Procedures 1 Move the 120V power to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the 120V power.

Torque: (6.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
Figure p1449

3 Install 1 fixing clip of the 120V power. 4 Connect 3 harness connectors of the 120V power.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.6.2.2 Replacement of Vehicle Power Supply (12V)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the vehicle power supply (12V). 5 Remove the vehicle power supply (12V). Installation Procedures 1 Move the vehicle power supply (12V) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the vehicle power supply (12V).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

Figure p1451

7.6.2.3 Replacement of 120V Receptacle

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the 120V receptacle. 5 Remove the 120V receptacle. Installation Procedures 1 Move the 120V receptacle to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the 120V receptacle.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

Figure p1452

7.6.2.4 Replacement of Rear USB Interface

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Detach the rear USB interface. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the rear USB interface. 6 Remove the rear USB interface. Installation Procedures

Figure p1453
Figure p1453

1 Move the rear USB interface to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the rear USB interface.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the rear USB interface. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.6.2.5 Replacement of Front USB Interface

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the front USB interface. 5 Remove the front USB interface. Installation Procedures 1 Move the front USB interface to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 harness connectors of the front USB interface.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

Figure p1455
Figure p1456

7.7 Switch Device

7.7.1 Decomposition Diagram

7.7.1.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Sleeper Switch Devices 7. Lh Switch Group at Instrument Panel 2. Power Sliding Door 9. Switch-Locker Lighting 3. Rh Switch Group at Instrument Panel 10. Self-Tapping Screw 4. Clock-Spring 11. Hex Socket Set Screw 5. Multi-Function Switch 12. Hex Socket Set Screw 6. Multi-Function Switch Bracket

7.7.2 System Schematic Diagram

7.7.2.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

Right combination switch - gear position Sleeper switch devices

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
The vehicle cannot shift gears1.Shift switch stuck or damagedCheck the gear shift switch and replace it if necessary. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch
2. Shift switch malfunctionRefer to Shift Switch Power Failure
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717Battery voltage is too highRefer to Shift Switch Power Fault
B111716Battery voltage is too low
U008E88PCAN4 BusOffRefer to Shift Switch Communication Fault
U019887Lost communication with TGW
U015687Communication with CDCU is lost
U012287Communication with VDC is lost
P280096Shift switch sensor malfunctionRefer to Shift Switch Internal Fault
P280171Gear shift lever jamming failure
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111716Power supply voltage below thresholdRefer to Sleeper Switch Devices Power Fault
B111717Power supply voltage above threshold

7.7.3 Diagnostic Information and Steps

7.7.3.1 Diagnostic Description

Before diagnosing faults in the switch device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the switch device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of switch devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment

of faulty parts. 7.7.3.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket installation devices that may affect the operation of the switchgear system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the switchgear system.

• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 7.7.3.3 Fault Symptom Table

7.7.3.4 DTC Confirmation

1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.7.3.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

GSM SSM

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U007E88BCANFD3 BusOffRefer to Sleeper Switch Devices Communication Fault
U019887lost communication with T-BOX
U014087lost communication with BDCU
U016487lost communication with A/C
U015687lost communication with CDCU
U012287lost communication with VDC
U220A00CANFD3 network management limp home
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717Battery voltage is too highVoltage > 32V, t > 2000ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.Shift switch
B111716Battery voltage is too lowVoltage < 18V, t > 2000ms

7.7.3.6 Shift Switch Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.7.3.6 Shift Switch Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Total body power supply B+ L22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U008E88PCAN4 BusOff1.BUSOFF lasts more than 8 times 2.The current voltage is 18~32V1. Wiring harness 2. Shift switch
U019887Lost communication with TGW1.KL15 ON; 2.The current voltage is 18~32V 3.When GSM loses communication with TGW (0x18FEE6EEx) for more than 5000ms, GSM sets the current DTC
U015687Communication with CDCU is lost1.KL15 ON; 2.The current voltage is 18~32V 3.When GSM loses communication with CDCU (0x18FEC1EEx) for more than 5000 ms, GSM sets the current DTC
U012287Communication with VDC is lost1.KL15 ON; 2.The current voltage is 18~32V 3.When GSM loses communication with VDC (0x18FEF100x) for more than 1000 ms, GSM sets the current DTC

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the shift switch? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the gear shift switch. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code for the gear shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 6:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.7.3.7 Shift Switch Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.7.3.7 Shift Switch Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the PCAN4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity Total body power supply B+ L22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
P280096Shift switch sensor malfunction1.Gear sensor failure lasts for 3S 2.The current voltage is 18~32V1.Shift switch
P280171Gear shift lever jamming failure1.The gear stays in a non-default position for 60 seconds 2.The current voltage is between 18 and 32V
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111716Low Battery VoltageVoltage < 18V, t > 500ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.Sleeper switch devices
B111717High battery voltageVoltage > 32V, t > 500ms

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code for the gear shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.7.3.8 Shift Switch Internal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite the configuration code for the gear shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 4:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.7.3.9 Sleeper Switch Devices Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.7.3.9 Sleeper Switch Devices Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007E88BCANFD3 BusOffeight times in a row1. Wiring harness 2.Sleeper switch devices
U019887Lost Communication With T-Box0x18FEE6EE(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms)
U014087lost communication with BDCU0x14FD1721(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms)
U016487lost communication with A/C0x18FF2419(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms)
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU0x18FEC1EE(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms)
U012287Lost Communication With VDC0x18FEF100(T>50ms:5*T;or else:250ms)
U220A00CANFD3 network management limp home2 seconds in limphome state

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides the sleeper switch devices? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power and grounding harnesses of the sleep switch devices. Step 5:Sleep switch devices rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the sleeper switch devices. Refer to Replacement Of Sleep Switch Devices Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.7.3.10 Sleeper Switch Devices Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.7.3.10 Sleeper Switch Devices Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to BInspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN4(H) and PCAN4 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN4 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
PCAN4 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the sleep switch devices. Step 5:Replace the sleeper switch devices. Refer to Replacement Of Sleep Switch Devices Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.7.3.11 Inspection Of PCAN4 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the PCAN4 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the PCAN4 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
PCAN4 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
PCAN4 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the PCAN4 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the PCAN4 bus. C. Measure the PCAN4 bus resistance between each module and the shift switch in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of PCAN4 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the PCAN4 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace PCAN4 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the PCAN4 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the PCAN4 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. No Yes

Figure p1471

7.7.4 Dismantling and Installation

7.7.4.1 Replacement of Left Central Control Switch Group

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 5 Remove 3 fixing screws of the left central control switch group. 6 Remove the left central control switch group. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left central control switch group to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the left central control switch group.

3 Install the left switch panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1472

7.7.4.2 Replacement of Right Central Control Switch Group

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 5 Remove 3 fixing screws of the right central control switch group. 6 Remove the right central control switch group. Installation Procedures

1 Move the right central control switch group to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the right central control switch group. 3 Install the right switch panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1473

7.7.4.3 Replacement of SSM

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Pry off the SSM.

5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the SSM. 6 Remove the SSM. Installation Procedures 1 Move the SSM to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the SSM.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p1474

3 Install the SSM. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to rewrite the configuration word.

7.7.4.4 Replacement of Electric Sliding Door Switch

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Pry off the electric sliding door switch. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the electric sliding door switch. 6 Remove the electric sliding door switch. Installation Procedures

Figure p1476
Figure p1476

1 Move the electric sliding door switch to the mounting position. 2 Connect1 harness connector of the electric sliding door switch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the electric sliding door switch. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.7.4.5 Replacement of Combination Switch

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly.

5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Remove the steering wheel assembly. 8 Remove the clock spring. 9 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the combination switch. 10 Detach the combination switch clip. 11 Remove the combination switch. Installation Procedures

Figure p1478
Figure p1478

10 Move the combination switch to the mounting position. 11 Connect the combination switch clip. 3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the combination switch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the clock spring. 5 Install the steering wheel assembly. 6 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Install the combination switch lower shield. 8 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

7.7.4.6 Replacement of Clock Spring

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Remove the steering wheel assembly. 8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the clock spring. 9 Remove the clock spring. Installation Procedures 1 Move the clock spring to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 harness connector of the clock spring.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the steering wheel assembly. 4 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 5 Install the combination switch lower shield.

Figure p1480

6 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

Figure p1481

7.7.4.7 Replacement of Storage Compartment Lamp Switch

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove 1 fixing screw of the storage compartment lamp switch.

5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the storage compartment lamp switch. 6 Remove the storage compartment lamp switch. Installation Procedures 1 Move the storage compartment lamp switch to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the storage compartment lamp switch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p1482

3 Install 1 fixing screw of the storage compartment lamp switch. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.8 Body Control Module (BCM) Device

7.8.1 Description and Operation

7.8.1.1 Description and Operation

1. Mobile phone wireless charging is a wireless energy transfer process in which the energy is transferred from the transmitting coil to the receiving coil based on the principle of electromagnetic induction. 2. The mobile phone wireless charging function can be achieved by placing a mobile phone that supports wireless charging on a charging surface. 3. The mobile phone wireless charging function is not applicable to all mobile phones, but only to "Qi" certified mobile phones.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the low-speed alarm module (AVAS) and the low- speed alarm bracket assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the body controller and the lower left dashboard controller fixing bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket to the white body assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket to the white body assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket to the dashboard deviceM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket and the lower left bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the EBS bracket to the lower left instrument panel controller fixing bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the column lock and the steering column assemblyM8(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

7.8.2 Specifications

7.8.2.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1486

7.8.3 Decomposition Diagram

7.8.3.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Body Domain Control Uint 7. DCM 2. NFC Antenna 8. Fixing Bracket-Lh 3. Wpc(Wireless Power Consortium) 9. Controller Bracket Assy 4. Electrical Steering Colum Lock 10. EBS Bracket 5. Bluetooth Antenna-Frt 11. NFC+Bluetooth Antenna 6. Bluetooth Antenna (Left) In New Energy Vehicles 12. NFC Key

1. Cockpit Domain Controller 13. Surround-Sound Speaker 2. Cockpit Domain Controller Bracket 14. DVR Camera(Digital Video Recorder Camera) 3. IVI Screen 15. Glass Antenna Amplifier 4. CAR Screen 16. MIC 5. IPC Screen 17. Occupancy Monitoring System Camera 6. Rear Shell Plugged Cover 18. Selfie Camera Bracket 7. AR-HUD 19. Rear-View Camera 8. Squawker 20. Rear-View Camera Bracket 9. Tweeter 21. Rear View Camera 10. Woofer 22. Driver Monitor System Camera 11. Woofer Bracket Left 23. Driver Monitor System Camera Mount 12. Woofer Bracket Right

Figure p1487

7.8.4 System Schematic Diagram

7.8.4.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717High battery voltageRefer to BDCU Power Fault
B111716Low Battery Voltage
U015787On the BCANFD4 network, the BDCU cannot receive the CAN packet ADCU_ LCMD whose ID is 0x18FE4131, and the communication between the BDCU and the ADCU node fails. ProcedureRefer to BDCU Communication Fault
U220200The BDCU on BCANFD3 limps home (send ID: 0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome). Receive ID:0x18FFF058, (SSM_NM_Limphome)). The send or receive timeout occurred. Procedure
U018087There is no CAN message ABL_Light with the ID of 0x18FF1455 received by BDCU on the BCANFD1 network, and the communication with the ADBL node is lost
U018087The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal

7.8.5 Diagnostic Information and Steps

7.8.5.1 Diagnostic Description

Before diagnosing faults in the vehicle body controller device, refer to Description And Operation Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of the vehicle body controller device before starting system diagnosis can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a fault occurs, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the vehicle body controller device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the

diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.8.5.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the vehicle body control system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the vehicle body control system.

• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 7.8.5.3 DTC Confirmation

1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there are any fault codes output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault checks, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.8.5.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

BDCU

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U01A187The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message SJBUN_Status with the ID of 0x18FF1659, losing communication with the SJBUN node
U01A087The BDCU on the BCANFD1 network fails to receive the CAN message SJBUP_Status with the ID of 0x18FF1554, losing communication with the SJBUP node
U012787The BDCU on the BCANFD1 network is unable to receive the CAN message TPMS_F_TirePressure with the ID of 0x18FEF433, losing communication with the TPMS_F node
U016487The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message AC_ RearStatus with the ID of 0x18FF2419, losing communication with the AC node
U018187The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message ADBR_Light with the ID of 0x18FF145A, losing communication with the ADBR node
U014187The BDCU on the BCAND2 network cannot receive the CAN message AVA_ Status with ID 0x18FF0E57 and has lost communication with the AVAS node
U02A687The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message SDM_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0F1D, losing communication with the SDM node
U019987The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message DCM_ DC2 with the ID of 0x18FDA54F, losing communication with the DCM node
U018887The BDCU on the CANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message EPM_ Motor with the ID of 0x18F00E52, losing communication with the EPM node
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U014487The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network is unable to receive the CAN message PWC_CS with the ID of 0x18FF0953 and loses communication with the PWC node
U024A87The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message SSM_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0F58 and loses communication with the SSM node
U012F87The BDCU on the BCANFD4 network fails to receive the CAN message TPMS_Trailer_TirePressure with the ID of 0x18FEF45D and loses communication with the TPMS_Trailer node
U021287The BDCU on the BCAN5 network fails to receive the CAN message ESCL_ STATUS with the ID of 0x18FE054D and loses communication with the ESCL node
U019887The BDCU on the CANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message TGW_TD_Time with the ID of 0x18FEE6EE and loses communication with the TGW node
U007C88BCANFD1 network Busoff
U007D88BCANFD2 network Busoff
U007E88BCANFD3 network Busoff
U007F88BCANFD4 network Busoff
U008388BCANFD5 network Busoff
U008488BCAN6 network Busoff
U10538AThe BDCU on the BCAN6 network fails to receive the CAN message BCANFD6_RXID_NBSM_0x200 with the ID of 0x200 and loses communication with the Bluetooth node
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U015687The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FEC1EE (CDCU_VDHR), resulting in a timeout error and leading to the belief that it has lost contact with the CDCU
U012287The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FCC231 (VDC_HSS1), which leads to a timeout error and makes it consider that it has lost contact with the VDCU
U012187The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x08FE6E0B (EBS_HRW) and thus generates a timeout error, believing that it has lost contact with the EBS
U012887The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FE1250 (EPBS1_EPB), which results in a timeout error and leads to the belief that it has lost contact with the EPB
U007588CANFD3 BusOff
U220600On BCANFD1, the BDCU enters limp - home mode (sends ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_Limphome), and receives IDs:0x18FFF054 (SJBUP_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF055 (ADBL_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF059 (SJBUN_NM_ Limphome)), and a send or receive timeout occurs
U220700On BCANFD2, the BDCU enters limp - home mode (sending ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_Limphome) and receiving IDs: 0x18FFF05A (ADBR_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF059 (SJBUN_NM_ Limphome)), resulting in a send or receive timeout
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U220A00On BCANFD3, the BDCU enters limp- home mode (sending ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_Limphome) and receiving ID:0x18FFF058 (SSM_NM_ Limphome)), which results in a send or receive timeout
U015788Communication with CAMF is lost
U238084SQI insufficientRefer to BDCU Internal Fault
U238208The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal
U238108Unexpected Ethernet connection lossRefer to BDCU Ethernet Fault
U120387The BDCU on the LIN1 network fails to receive the slave - response message RSL1 with the ID of 0x12, and the communication with the RSL node is abnormalRefer to BDCU LIN1 Communication Fault
U105388The BDCU on the LIN1 network can't receive the slave - response message RSL2 with the ID of 0x13, and there is an abnormal communication with the RSL node
U105389On the LIN1 network, the BDCU is unable to receive the slave - response message RSL3 with an ID of 0x14, and the communication with the RSL node is abnormal
B151635Main vehicle right front turn signal FaultRefer to Right Front Turn Signal Fault
B151735Main vehicle left front turn signal FaultRefer to Left Front Turn Signal Fault
B152532The high beam/overtaking switch is faultyRefer to High Beam Overtaking Switch Fault
B152632The wiper combination switch is faultyRefer to Wiper Switch Fault
B152933The high voltage pressure signal input is faultyRefer to High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault
B152A33The high voltage pressure signal input is faulty
B153036The ON power feedback of the electrical box is faultyRefer to KL15 Power Feedback Signal Fault
B15353FThe power-on command output is faultyRefer to KL15 Power On/off Command Output Signal Fault
B15363FThe power-off command output is faulty
B153831The power supply to the height adjustment module of the low light is faultyRefer to Headlight Adjustment Motor Fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B153C31The power supply to the left center left rear turn signal of the main vehicle is faultyRefer to Left Center Rear Turn Signal Fault
B153D31The power supply of the right, middle and right rear turn signal of the main vehicle is faultyRefer to Right Center Rear Turn Signal Fault
B15403FThe wiper is faulty at low speedRefer to Wiper Motor Low-speed Signal Fault
B15413FHigh-speed wiper failureRefer to High Speed Signal Fault Of Wiper Motor
B15423FThe wiper washing motor is faultyRefer to Washing Motor Fault
B154437Rearview Mirror Heating FailureRefer to Rearview Mirror Heating Fault
B15453FThe charging port is unlocked. ProcedureRefer to Charging Port Cover Lock Motor Fault
B15463FThe charging port is blocked
B15493FExternal toolbox motor unlocking failureRefer to External Toolbox Motor Fault
B154A3FExternal toolbox motor lockout failure
B154B3FThe skylight visor opening function failedRefer to Fault Of The Sunroof Sunshade
B154C3FThe awning curtain closing function is faulty
B154D37The upward adjustment of the left rearview mirror failsRefer to Left Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault
B154E37The downward adjustment of the left rearview mirror fails
B154F37The left rearview mirror fails to adjust to the left
B155037The left rearview mirror fails to adjust to the right
B155137The right rearview mirror fails to adjust upwardsRefer to Right Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault
B155237Right rearview mirror downward adjustment failure
B155337The left adjustment of the right rearview mirror fails
B155437The right rearview mirror fails to adjust to the right
B15573FThe interwheel solenoid valve is faultyRefer to Interwheel Lock Solenoid Valve Fault
B155D31Main driver reading light power supply failureRefer to Front Left Reading Light Fault
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B155E31Sleeper reading lamp power supply failureRefer to Sleeper Reading Light Fault
B155F31The ceiling light power supply is faultyRefer to Sky Roof Light Fault
B156031The power supply of the indicator lamp is faultyRefer to Position Lamp Fault
B156331The backlight lighting power supply is faultyRefer to Backlight Power Fault
B156431Danger alarm indicator key light power supply failureRefer to Hazard Alarm Switch Backlight Power Fault
B156B31Secondary car window rising power supply failureRefer to Right window regulator Fault
B156C31Secondary car window down power supply failure
B156931Main driving window rising power supply failureRefer to Left window regulator Fault
B156A31Main driving window down power supply failure
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717High battery voltageWhen the supply voltage rises to the upper limit of the diagnostic voltage, the ECU immediately stops the network-related diagnostic function. When the supply voltage is in the overvoltage state for 2 seconds, the overvoltage DTC is recorded1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.BDCU
B111716Low Battery VoltageWhen the supply voltage drops below the diagnostic voltage limit, the ECU immediately stops the network- related diagnostic function. When the supply voltage is in the undervoltage state for 2 seconds, the undervoltage DTC is recorded

7.8.5.5 BDCU Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

IP17-7 IP17-6

Total body power supply B+ L22

7.8.5.5 BDCU Power Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.8.5.5 BDCU Power Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U015787On the BCANFD4 network, the BDCU cannot receive the CAN packet ADCU_ LCMD whose ID is 0x18FE4131, and the communication between the BDCU and the ADCU node fails. Procedure1.The timeout period for receiving CAN ADCU_LCMD reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL30 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;1. Wiring harness 2.BDCU
U220200The BDCU on BCANFD3 limps home (send ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome). Receive ID:0x18FFF058, (SSM_NM_ Limphome)). The send or receive timeout occurred. ProcedureThe BDCU on the BCANFD3 limps home, resulting in a send or receive timeout.
U018087There is no CAN message ABL_Light with the ID of 0x18FF1455 received by BDCU on the BCANFD1 network, and the communication with the ADBL node is lost1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets ABL_ LightJIE reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides BDCU? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the BDCU power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.6 BDCU Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U018087The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormal1.In section 1 and 4_1, add DID:2506 Debug log path information, 2507 Bluetooth primary node VIN code, 2508 Bluetooth primary node serial number, 2509 Bluetooth primary node software version, 250A Bluetooth left node software version, 250B Bluetooth right node software version, and 250C Bluetooth front node software version
U01A187The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message SJBUN_Status with the ID of 0x18FF1659, losing communication with the SJBUN node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN message SJBUN_Status reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.network wake up; 3.Diagnostic voltage range;
U01A087The BDCU on the BCANFD1 network fails to receive the CAN message SJBUP_Status with the ID of 0x18FF1554, losing communication with the SJBUP node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN message SJBUP_Status reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U012787The BDCU on the BCANFD1 network is unable to receive the CAN message TPMS_ F_TirePressure with the ID of 0x18FEF433, losing communication with the TPMS_F node1. The TPMS_F_TirePressure receiving timeout period reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 500 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U016487The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message AC_ RearStatus with the ID of 0x18FF2419, losing communication with the AC node1.The receiving timeout of the CAN message AC_ RearStatus reaches 10 * Cycle (where Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U018187The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message ADBR_ Light with the ID of 0x18FF145A, losing communication with the ADBR node1.The receiving timeout of the CAN message ADBR_ Light reaches 10 * Cycle (where Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U014187The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message AVAS_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0E57, losing communication with the AVAS node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packet AVAS_ Status reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 500 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U02A687The BDCU on the BCANFD2 network fails to receive the CAN message SDM_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0F1D, losing communication with the SDM node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN SJBUN_Status packets reaches 5000 ms(Cycle = 1000 ms). 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U019987The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message DCM_ DC2 with the ID of 0x18FDA54F, losing communication with the DCM node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN DCM_DC2 packets reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2. Power on the DCM. 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U018887The BDCU on the CANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message EPM_Motor with the ID of 0x18F00E52, losing communication with the EPM node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packet EPM_ Motor reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 200 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U014487The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network is unable to receive the CAN message PWC_ CS with the ID of 0x18FF0953 and loses communication with the PWC node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets PWC_ CS reaches 5000(Cycle = 1000 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U024A87The BDCU on the BCANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message SSM_ Status with the ID of 0x18FF0F58 and loses communication with the SSM node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packet SSM_ Status reaches 10 *Cycle (Cycle = 200 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U012F87The BDCU on the BCANFD4 network fails to receive the CAN message TPMS_ Trailer_TirePressure with the ID of 0x18FEF45D and loses communication with the TPMS_Trailer node1. The TPMS_Trailer_TirePressure receive timeout period reaches 5000 (Cycle = 50000 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U021287The BDCU on the BCAN5 network fails to receive the CAN message ESCL_ STATUS with the ID of 0x18FE054D and loses communication with the ESCL node1.The receiving timeout of the CAN message ESCL_ STATUS reaches 10 * Cycle (where Cycle = 50 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U019887The BDCU on the CANFD3 network fails to receive the CAN message TGW_TD_ Time with the ID of 0x18FEE6EE and loses communication with the TGW node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN TGW_TD_ Time packets reaches 5000(Cycle = 1000 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007C88BCANFD1 network Busoff1. The BCANFD1 network CAN controller enters the BusOff state. 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U007D88BCANFD2 network Busoff1. The BCANFD2 network CAN controller enters the BusOff state. 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U007E88BCANFD3 network Busoff1. The BCANFD3 network CAN controller enters BusOff state; 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U007F88BCANFD4 network Busoff1. The BCANFD4 network CAN controller enters BusOff state; 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U008388BCANFD5 network Busoff1. The BCANFD5 network CAN controller enters BusOff state; 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U008488BCAN6 network Busoff1. The BCAN6 network CAN controller enters the BusOff state; 2.network wake up; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U10538AThe BDCU on the BCAN6 network fails to receive the CAN message BCANFD6_ RXID_NBSM_0x200 with the ID of 0x200 and loses communication with the Bluetooth node1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets BCANFD6_RXID_NBSM_0x200 reaches 10 x Cycle (Cycle = 100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U015687The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FEC1EE (CDCU_ VDHR), resulting in a timeout error and leading to the belief that it has lost contact with the CDCU1. The timeout period for receiving CAN CDCU_VDHR packets reaches 10000(Cycle = 1000ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U012287The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FCC231 (VDC_ HSS1), which leads to a timeout error and makes it consider that it has lost contact with the VDCU1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets VDC_ HSS1 reaches 1000(Cycle = 100ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U012187The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x08FE6E0B (EBS_ HRW) and thus generates a timeout error, believing that it has lost contact with the EBS1. The timeout period for receiving CAN EBS_HRW packets reaches 20(Cycle = 200ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U012887The BDCU on CANFD3 fails to receive the message with the ID of 0x18FE1250 (EPBS1_ EPB), which results in a timeout error and leads to the belief that it has lost contact with the EPB1. The timeout period for receiving CAN packets VDC_ HSS1 reaches 1000(Cycle = 100ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;
U007588CANFD3 BusOffCANFD3 BusOff occurs for five consecutive times
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U220600On BCANFD1, the BDCU enters limp - home mode (sends ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome), and receives IDs:0x18FFF054 (SJBUP_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF055 (ADBL_ NM_Limphome), 0x18FFF059 (SJBUN_ NM_Limphome)), and a send or receive timeout occursThe BDCU on BCANFD1 limps home, resulting in sending or receiving timeout.
U220700On BCANFD2, the BDCU enters limp - home mode (sending ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome) and receiving IDs:0x18FFF05A (ADBR_NM_ Limphome), 0x18FFF059 (SJBUN_ NM_Limphome)), resulting in a send or receive timeoutThe BDCU on BCANFD2 limps home, resulting in sending or receiving timeout.
U220A00On BCANFD3, the BDCU enters limp- home mode (sending ID:0x18FFF021 (BDCU_NM_ Limphome) and receiving ID:0x18FFF058 (SSM_NM_ Limphome)), which results in a send or receive timeoutThe BDCU on the BCANFD3 limps home, resulting in a send or receive timeout.
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U015788Communication with CAMF is lost1. The timeout period for receiving CAN CAMF_Stauts reaches 10 x Cycle (Cycle =100 ms). 2.KL15 on; 3. Diagnostic voltage range;

2.Circuit Diagram

IP17-7 IP17-6

Total body power supply B+ L22

7.8.5.6 BDCU Communication Fault — circuit diagram (1/4)
7.8.5.6 BDCU Communication Fault — circuit diagram (2/4)
7.8.5.6 BDCU Communication Fault — circuit diagram (3/4)
7.8.5.6 BDCU Communication Fault — circuit diagram (4/4)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCAN6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAN6 Bus Network Integrity Ground Z01 B16-5

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U238084SQI insufficientSQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s1.BDCU
U238208The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormalUnable to read SWITCH chip register
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U238108Unexpected Ethernet connection lossIf the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported1. Wiring harness 2.BDCU

Step 4:Check the BCANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the BCAN5 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAN5 Bus Network Integrity Step 6:Check the BCAND2 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND2 Bus Network Integrity Step 7:Check the CANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity Step 9:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 10:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 11:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.7 BDCU Internal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 4:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.8 BDCU Ethernet Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.8 BDCU Ethernet Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BDCU Ethernet harness. Ground Z01 B16-5

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U120387The BDCU on the LIN1 network fails to receive the slave - response message RSL1 with the ID of 0x12, and the communication with the RSL node is abnormal1. The BDCU cannot receive response packet RSL1 from the slave whose ID is 0x12. 2, KL15 on; 3, diagnostic voltage range;1. Wiring harness 2.Sunshine and rainfall sensor 3.BDCU
U105388The BDCU on the LIN1 network can't receive the slave - response message RSL2 with the ID of 0x13, and there is an abnormal communication with the RSL node1. The BDCU cannot receive response packet RSL3 from the slave machine whose ID is 0x13. 2, KL15 on; 3, diagnostic voltage range;
U105389On the LIN1 network, the BDCU is unable to receive the slave - response message RSL3 with an ID of 0x14, and the communication with the RSL node is abnormal1. The BDCU cannot receive response packet RSL3 from the slave whose ID is 0x14. 2, KL15 on; 3, diagnostic voltage range;

Step 4:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.9 BDCU LIN1 Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.9 BDCU LIN1 Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the LIN1 network harness between the BDCU and the sunlight rain sensor.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B151635Main vehicle right front turn signal malfunction1, KL15 on; 2. After the switch is turned on/off, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Front right combination lamp (right front turn signal) 3.BDCU

Step 4:Replace the sunlight and rain sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Sunshine Rainfall Sensor Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.10 Right Front Turn Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.10 Right Front Turn Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the front right combination light (right front turn signal light). Ground Z01 B16-5

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B151735Main vehicle left front turn signal malfunction1.KL15 on; 2.After the switch is turned on/off, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Front left combination lamp (left front turn signal) 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the front right combination lamp (right front turn signal lamp). Step 5:Connect the front right combination lamp (right front turn signal) to an external 12V power supply. Observe if the front right combination lamp (right front turn signal) lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front right combination light (right front turn signal light). Refer to Replacement Of Right Front Combination Lamp Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.11 Left Front Turn Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.11 Left Front Turn Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B152532The high beam/ overtaking switch is faulty1.KL15 on; 2.After the switch is turned on/off, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Left combination switch (high beam overtaking switch) 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal). Step 5:Connect the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal) to an external 12V power supply. Observe if the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal) lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left combination lamp (left front turn signal). Refer to Replacement Of Left Front Combination Lamp Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.12 High Beam Overtaking Switch Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

IP17-7 IP17-6
7.8.5.12 High Beam Overtaking Switch Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left combination switch (high beam overtaking switch). Total body power supply B+ L22

OperationSwitch Status
Turn on high beam/passing lightsTurn on the high beam/overtaking switch
Turn off high beam/passing lightsHigh beam/overtaking switch disconnected
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B152632The wiper combination switch is faulty1, KL15 on; 2. After the switch is turned on/off, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2. Left combination switch (wiper switch) 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check if the left combination switch (high beam overtaking switch) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left combination switch (high beam overtaking switch). Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.13 Wiper Switch Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

IP17-7 IP17-6
7.8.5.13 Wiper Switch Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left combination switch (wiper switch). Total body power supply B+ L22

OperationSwitch Status
Turn on the wiper at low speedWiper switch low gear on
Turn off the wiper at low speedWiper switch low gear disconnected
Turn on the wiper high gearWiper switch on high gear
Turn off the windshield wipers in high gearWiper switch high gear disconnected
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B152933The high voltage pressure signal input is faulty1, KL15 on; 2, the controller can not collect the input voltage1. Wiring harness 2.Left thermal management unit (left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor)) 3.BDCU
B152A33The high voltage pressure signal input is faulty1, KL15 on; 2, the controller can not collect the input voltage

Step 4:Check if the left combination switch (wiper switch) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left combination switch (wiper switch). Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.14 High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

ylppus a414BV5 ylppus rewop b414Bylirosnes b634B
7.8.5.14 High Pressure & Temperature Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor). 5V power

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B153036The ON power feedback of the electrical box is faulty1.KL15 on; 2.the controller can not collect the input voltage1. Wiring harness 2.Smart junction box DOWN 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check if the left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left thermal management unit (high pressure & temperature sensor). Refer to Replacement Of Thermal Management Unit (Left) Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.15 KL15 Power Feedback Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.15 KL15 Power Feedback Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B15353FThe power-on command output is faulty1, KL15 on; 2, the controller can not collect the input voltage1. Wiring harness 2.BDCU
B15363FThe power-off command output is faulty1, KL15 on; 2, the controller can not collect the input voltage

Step 3:Check if there are any fault codes related to the power supply circuit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting power supply circuit related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the KL15 power feedback harness between the BDCU and the smart junction box DOWN. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the smart junction box DOWN. Step 6:Replace the smart junction box DOWN. Refer to Replacement Of Chassis Smart Electrical Box Step 7:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.16 KL15 Power On/off Command Output Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.16 KL15 Power On/off Command Output Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B153831The power supply to the height adjustment module of the low light is faulty1.KL15 on; 2.the controller can not collect the input voltage1. Wiring harness 2.Headlight adjustment motor 3.BDCU

Step 3:Check if there are any fault codes related to the power supply circuit? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting power supply circuit related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:Check the hard wire collection harness between BDCU, smart junction box DOWN, and smart junction box UP. Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.17 Headlight Adjustment Motor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

IP17-7 IP17-6
7.8.5.17 Headlight Adjustment Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the BDCU and the headlight adjustment motor. Total body power supply B+ L22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B153C31The power supply to the left center left rear turn signal of the main vehicle is faulty1.KL15 on; 2.the controller can not collect the input voltage1. Wiring harness 2.Left middle rear turn signal 3.BDCU

Step 4:The headlight adjustment motor is connected to an external 12V power supply. observe the headlight adjustment motor is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the headlight adjustment motor. Refer to Replacement of left headlight . Replacement Of Right Headlight Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.18 Left Center Rear Turn Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.18 Left Center Rear Turn Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left middle rear turn signal. Ground Z01 B16-5

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B153D31The power supply of the right, middle and right rear turn signal of the main vehicle is faulty1.KL15 on; 2.the controller can not collect the input voltage1. Wiring harness 2.Right center rear turn signal 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the left middle rear turn signal. Step 5:Connect the left middle rear turn signal to an external 12V power supply. Observe if the left middle rear turn signal lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left middle rear turn signal. Refer to Replacement Of Left-Side Combination Marker Lamp Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.19 Right Center Rear Turn Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.19 Right Center Rear Turn Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the right center rear turn signal.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B15403FThe wiper is faulty at low speed1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2. Wiper motor 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the right middle rear turn signal. Step 5:Connect the right center rear turn signal to an external 12V power supply. Observe if the right center rear turn signal lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right center rear turn signal. Refer to Replacement Of Right-Side Combination Marker Lamp Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.20 Wiper Motor Low-speed Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.20 Wiper Motor Low-speed Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the low-speed power harness between BDCU and wiper motor. B63-11 B63-22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B15413FHigh-speed wiper failure1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Wiper motor 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the wiper motor. Step 5:The wiper motor is connected to an external 12V power supply. observe the wiper motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the wiper motor. Refer to Replacement Of Wiper Motor Assembly Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.21 High Speed Signal Fault Of Wiper Motor

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.21 High Speed Signal Fault Of Wiper Motor — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the high-speed power harness between BDCU and wiper motor. B63-11 B63-22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B15423FThe wiper washing motor is faulty1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1.Wiring harness 2.Wiper motor 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the wiper motor. Step 5:The wiper motor is connected to an external 12V power supply. observe the wiper motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the wiper motor. Refer to Replacement Of Wiper Motor Assembly Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.22 Washing Motor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.22 Washing Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and washing motor. B63-11 B63-22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B154437Rearview Mirror Heating Failure1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Physical rearview mirror 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the washing motor. Step 5:Connect the washing motor to an external 12V power supply and observe the washing motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the washing motor. Refer to Replacement Of Washing Pot Assembly Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.23 Rearview Mirror Heating Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.23 Rearview Mirror Heating Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the physical rearview mirror heating wire.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B15453FThe charging port is unlocked. Procedure1, KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Charging port cover lock motor 3.BDCU
B15463FThe charging port is blocked1, KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the physical rearview mirror heating wire. Step 5:Check if the heating wire of the physical rearview mirror is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the physical rearview mirror. Refer to Replacement Of The Left Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly . Replacement Of The Right Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.24 Charging Port Cover Lock Motor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.24 Charging Port Cover Lock Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the charging port cover lock motor. B63-11 B63-22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B15493FExternal toolbox motor unlocking failure1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2. External toolbox motor 3.BDCU
B154A3FExternal toolbox motor lockout failure1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;

Step 4:Connect the charging port cover lock motor to an external 12V power supply and observe the charging port cover lock motor is operating? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the charging port cover lock motor. Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.25 External Toolbox Motor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.25 External Toolbox Motor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the external toolbox motor. B63-11 B63-22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B154B3FThe skylight visor opening function failed1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2. Skyline sunshade 3.BDCU
B154C3FThe awning curtain closing function is faulty1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;

Step 4:External toolbox motor connected to 12V power supply, observe whether the external toolbox motor performs any action? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the external toolbox motor. Refer to Replacement Of Toolbox Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.26 Fault Of The Sunroof Sunshade

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.26 Fault Of The Sunroof Sunshade — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the sunroof sunshade.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B154D37The upward adjustment of the left rearview mirror fails1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2. Left physical rearview mirror 3.BDCU
B154E37The downward adjustment of the left rearview mirror fails1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;
B154F37The left rearview mirror fails to adjust to the left1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;
B155037The left rearview mirror fails to adjust to the right1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;

Step 4:Replace the sunroof sunshade. Refer to Replacement Of The Sky Sunshade Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.27 Left Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.27 Left Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left physical rearview mirror.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B155137The right rearview mirror fails to adjust upwards1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2. Right physical rearview mirror 3.BDCU
B155237Right rearview mirror downward adjustment failure1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;
B155337The left adjustment of the right rearview mirror fails1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;
B155437The right rearview mirror fails to adjust to the right1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;

Step 4:Replace the left physical rearview mirror. Refer to Replacement Of The Left Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.28 Right Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.28 Right Physical Rearview Mirror Adjustment Signal Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the right physical rearview mirror.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B15573FThe interwheel solenoid valve is faulty1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2. Interlocking solenoid valve between wheels 3.BDCU

Step 4:Replace the right physical rearview mirror. Refer to Replacement Of The Right Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.29 Interwheel Lock Solenoid Valve Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.29 Interwheel Lock Solenoid Valve Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the inter wheel locking solenoid valve.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B155D31Main driver reading light power supply failure1. KL15 on; 2. After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2. Front left reading light 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the inter wheel locking solenoid valve. Step 5:Replace the inter wheel locking solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of Differential Lock Solenoid Valve Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.30 Front Left Reading Light Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the front left reading light.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B155E31Sleeper reading lamp power supply failure1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Sleeping reading light 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the left front reading light. Step 5:Connect the front left reading light to an external 12V power supply, observe if the front left reading light is on? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the front left reading light. Refer to Replacement Of Front Reading Light Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.31 Sleeper Reading Light Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and sleeper reading light.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B155F31The ceiling light power supply is faulty1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Sky roof light 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the sleeper reading light. Step 5:Connect the sleeper reading light to an external 12V power supply and observe if the sleeper reading light is on? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sleeper reading light. Refer to Replacement Of Sleeper Reading Light Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.32 Sky Roof Light Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the sky roof light.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B156031The power supply of the indicator lamp is faulty1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Position lamp 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the sky roof light. Step 5:Connect the sky roof light to an external 12V power supply and observe if the sky roof light is on? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sky roof light. Refer to Replacement Of Lighting Fixtures Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.33 Position Lamp Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

IP17-7 IP17-6
7.8.5.33 Position Lamp Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the BDCU and the position light. Total body power supply B+ L22

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B156331The backlight lighting power supply is faulty1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Backlight 3.BDCU

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the position light. Step 5:Connect the position light to an external 12V power supply and observe if the position light is on? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the position light. Refer to Replacement Of Left Front Clearance Lights . Replacement of Right Front Clearance Lights Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.34 Backlight Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.34 Backlight Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B156431Danger alarm indicator key light power supply failure1.KL15 on; 2.After the body end output power supply, the voltage collected by the controller does not change;1. Wiring harness 2.Right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight) 3.BDCU

Step 3:Check the backlight power harness between BDCU and sleeper switch devices, left central control switch group, clock spring, right central control switch group, and sliding door switch. Step 4:Replace the backlight. Refer to Replacement Of Sleeper Toolbox . Replacement Of The Left Switch Panel Assembly . Replacement Of Combination Switch . Replacement Of The Right Switch Panel Assembly . Replacement Of Electric Sliding Door Switch Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.35 Hazard Alarm Switch Backlight Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.35 Hazard Alarm Switch Backlight Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the backlight power harness between BDCU and the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B156B31Secondary car window rising power supply failure1.KL15 on; 2.After the power is supplied from the vehicle body end, there is no change in the voltage collected by the controller.1. Wiring harness 2.Sliding door hinge (right window regulator) 3.BDCU
B156C31Secondary car window down power supply failure1.KL15 on; 2.After the power is supplied from the vehicle body end, there is no change in the voltage collected by the controller.

Step 4:Check the grounding harness of the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight). Step 5:Connect the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight) to an external 12V power supply, and observe if the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight) lights up? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right central control switch (hazard alarm switch backlight). Refer to Replacement Of The Right Central Control Switch Group Step 6:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 8:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.36 Right window regulator Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.36 Right window regulator Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and sliding door hinge (right glass lifter).

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B156931Main driving window rising power supply failure1.KL15 on; 2.After the power is supplied from the vehicle body end, there is no change in the voltage collected by the controller.1. Wiring harness 2.Left window regulator 3.BDCU
B156A31Main driving window down power supply failure1.KL15 on; 2.After the power is supplied from the vehicle body end, there is no change in the voltage collected by the controller.

Step 4:The sliding door hinge (right glass lifter) is connected to an external 12V power supply. observe the sliding door hinge (right glass lifter) is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the sliding door hinge (right window regulator). Refer to Replacement Of The Right Window Regulator Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.37 Left window regulator Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.8.5.37 Left window regulator Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between BDCU and the left window regulator.

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCANFD3(H) and BCANFD3(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCANFD3 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCANFD3 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

Step 4:Connect the left glass lifter to an external 12V power supply and observe if the left glass lifter is functioning properly? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the left window regulator. Refer to Replacement Of Left Window Regulator Assembly Step 5:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.8.5.38 BInspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCAND3 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the bus voltage of BCAND3. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCANFD3 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCANFD3 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAND3 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAN5(H) and BCAN5 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAND3 bus. C. Measure the BCAND3 bus resistance between each module and the vehicle domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of the BCAND3 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAND3 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAND3 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAND3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAND3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.

7.8.5.39 Inspection Of BCAN5 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCAN5 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the BCAN5 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAN5 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAN5 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAN5 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAN5 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAN5 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAN5 bus. C. Measure the BCAN5 bus resistance between each module and the vehicle domain controller in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of BCAN5 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAN5 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAN5 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAN5 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAN5 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAN6(H) and BCAN6 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAN6 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAN6 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

7.8.5.40 Inspection Of BCAN6 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCAN6 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the BCAN6 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAN6 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAN6 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAN6 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAN7(H) and BCAN7 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAN6 bus. C. Measure the BCAN6 bus resistance between each module and the sliding door hinge(door handle) in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of BCAN6 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAN6 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAN6 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAN6 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAN6 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.

7.8.5.41 BCAN7 Bus Network Integrity Check

Step 1 Check the BCAN7 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the BCAN7 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAN7(H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAN7(L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCAN7(H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAN7(L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAN7 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCAN7 bus. C. Measure the ADCAN1 bus resistance between each module and the body domain control uint sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the resistance of BCAN7 bus to ground is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAN7 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCAN7 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAN7 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAN7 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Figure p1582
Figure p1582

7.8.6 Dismantling and Installation

7.8.6.1 Replacement of BCM

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 7 harness connectors of the BCM. 6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the BCM, and remove the BCM.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the BCM to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the BCM.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1583

3 Connect 7 harness connectors of the BCM.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the BCM, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing, read VIN, and write the configuration word.

7.8.6.2 Replacement of Pillar Lock

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the pillar lock. 7 Drill one hole on the anti-theft bolt using a drill bit with a diameter of (3-4) mm. 8 Remove 2 anti-theft bolts with a screw extractor. 9 Remove the pillar lock. Installation Procedures

Figure p1585
Figure p1585

1 Move the pillar lock to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 anti-theft bolts of the pillar lock.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the pillar lock.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the combination switch lower shield. 5 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

caution
The anti-theft bolt is a disposable part and shall not be reused.
When reinstalling the pillar lock, the anti-theft bolt needs to be replaced with a new one, and the upper part of the anti-theft bolt needs to be twisted off during installation.
Figure p1587

7.8.6.3 Replacement of Bluetooth Antenna (front)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the Bluetooth antenna (front). 13 Remove the Bluetooth antenna (front). Installation Procedures

1 Move the Bluetooth antenna (front) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the Bluetooth antenna (front).

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the front bumper assembly. 4 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 5 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 7 Install the forward MMW radar. 8 Install the front MMW radar shield. 9 Install the through-type lamp. 10 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

7.8.6.4 Replacement of The Bluetooth Antenna-lh

Removal Procedures 1 Open the car door. 2 Open the front flip cover. 3 Disconnect the negative cable of the storage battery.

caution
power off the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the battery.

4 Remove the panel-cabin decoration. 5 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 6 Remove the left side physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 7 Remove the front wheel arch body-lh frt. 8 Remove the wiper arm assy.

9 Remove the front windshield cover assembly. 10 Remove the seal fender-lh. 11 Remove the fender assy-rh 12 Take off the bluetooth antenna-lh. Installation Procedures 1 Fit the bluetooth antenna-lh. 2 Install the fender assy-rh 3 Install the seal fender-lh. 4 Install the front windshield cover assembly. 5 Install the wiper arm assy. 6 Install the front wheel arch body-lh frt. 7 Install the left side physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 8 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh.

Figure p1589

9 Install the panel-cabin decoration. 10 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 11 Close the front flip cover. 12 Close the car door.

Figure p1590

7.8.6.5 Replacement of NFC Antenna

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the NFC antenna.

6 Remove 3 fixing screws of the NFC antenna. 7 Remove the NFC antenna. Installation Procedures 1 Move the NFC antenna to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the NFC antenna.

Figure p1591

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the NFC antenna.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.8.6.6 Replacement of Wireless Charging Module

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly.

5 Remove 4 fixing screws of the wireless charging module. 6 Remove the wireless charging module. Installation Procedures 1 Move the wireless charging module to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the wireless charging module. 3 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1593

7.8.6.7 Replacement of DCM

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right sill molding assembly. 5 Remove the door opening sealing strip assembly. 6 Remove the safety hammer fixing bracket. 7 Remove the rear boarding handrail assembly. 8 Remove the SSM. 9 Remove the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 10 Disconnect 3 harness connector of the DCM. 11 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the DCM. 12 Remove the DCM. Installation Procedures

Figure p1594
Figure p1594

1 Move the DCM to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the DCM.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 3 harness connector of the DCM.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the right rear side wall protective plate assembly. 5 Install the SSM. 6 Install the rear boarding handrail assembly. 7 Install the safety hammer fixing bracket. 8 Install the door opening sealing strip assembly. 9 Install the right sill molding assembly. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the DCM, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing.
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting Left Junction Box and the floor harnessM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting Right Junction Box and the floor harnessM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the cab grounding harness to the frame assemblyM10(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the cab grounding harness and the frame assemblyM10(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the floor harness and the chassis intelligent boxM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

7.9 Vehicle Body Harness Device

7.9.1 Specifications

7.9.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1597

7.9.2 Decomposition Diagram

7.9.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Bumper Wiring Harness

2. Top Cover Wiring Harness 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1598

3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Left Junction Box 4. Floor Wire Harness 8. Right Junction Box 5 Floor Harness Fixing Support 2 9. Floor Harness Fixing Support 1 6. Left Junction Box Bracket 10. Seat Harness

Figure p1599

6. Left Junction Box Bracket 12. Hexagon Flange Nut 8. Right Junction Box 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1600

3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Instrument Harness

Figure p1601

3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Left Roof Harness

Figure p1602

3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 16. Right Roof Harness

Figure p1603

17. Cab Grounding Harness 20. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 18. Hexagon Flange Bolt 21. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19. Hexagon Flange Nut

Figure p1604

22. Bar Counter Wiring Harness In New Energy Vehicles

Figure p1605
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the chassis harness and the frame assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the negative terminal harness of the left battery to the frame assemblyM10(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the negative terminal harness of the left battery to the frame assemblyM10(37 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the L-shaped bracket and the air conditioning compressor assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the L- shaped bracket and the frame assemblyM12(40.5 +/- 3.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the L- shaped bracket and the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
Fixed nut connecting L-shaped bracket and air conditioning compressor assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the L-shaped bracket and the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the flange bracket and the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the flange bracket and the frame assemblyM14(103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the wire harness bracket and the frame assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the chassis harness and harness bracket IIM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

7.10 Chassis Harness Device

7.10.1 Specifications

7.10.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1607

7.10.2 Decomposition Diagram

7.10.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Battery Pack Wiring HarnessLH 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wire Harness Bracket

1. Battery Pack Wiring Harness RH 3. Cable Ties 2 2. Wire Harness Bracket

Figure p1608

1. DC/DC Power Cord 1 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wire Harness Bracket 5. Hexagon Flange Nut 3. Cable Ties 1 6. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

Figure p1609

1. DC/DC Grounding Harness 1 4. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 2. Cable Ties 1 5. Hexagon Flange Nut 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1610

1. DC/DC Grounding Harness 2 3. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut

Figure p1611

1. Battery Connecting Cable 2. Sheet Metal Cable Ties In New Energy Vehicles

Figure p1612

1. LH Battery Negative Wire Harness 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Cable Ties 1 5. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 3. Hexagon Flange Nut 6. Hexagon Flange Nut

Figure p1613

1. LH Battery Positive Wire Harness 2. Smart Appliance Box Harness

Figure p1614

1. Chassis Harness 3. Inside and Out Teeth Serrated Lock Washer 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut

Figure p1615

1. Wire Harness Bracket 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Water Pipe Fixing Bracket 1 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Flanging Bracket 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Through the Hole Sheath 2 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Mountable Head Ties 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Interactive Fixed Ties 14. Hexagon Flange Nut 7. Hexagon Flange Nut 15. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1616

1. Wire Harness Bracket 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wire Harness Bracket Ⅱ 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Tie-Fir Tree 7. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1617

1. Wire Harness Bracket 4. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 2. Interactive Fixed Ties 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Mountable Head Ties 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1618
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight to the left headlight bracketM8(6 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight bracket to the front lower protective assemblyM12(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight bracket to the A-pillar exterior decoration assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight bracket and the side fender bracket assemblyM8(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the left headlight bracket to the left front connecting beamM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight to the right headlight bracketM8(6 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight bracket to the front lower protective assemblyM12(17 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight bracket to the A-pillar exterior decoration assemblyM8(17 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight bracket and the side fender bracket assemblyM8(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the right headlight bracket to the right front connecting beamM8(17 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the through light and the bumper body skeleton assemblyM6(6.5+/- .75) ft lb
The fixing bolt connecting the right front combination lamp and the right front headlight bracketM6(6.5+/- .75) ft lb

7.11 Exterior Vehicle Body Lamp Device

7.11.1 Specifications

7.11.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the left front combination lamp and the left fender bracket assemblyM6(6.5+/- .75) ft lb
The fixing bolt connecting the right front combination lamp and the left fender bracket assemblyM6(6.5+/- .75) ft lb
The fixing nut connecting the left front clearance lamp to the top cover assemblyM6(6.5+/- .75) ft lb
The fixing nut connecting the right front clearance lamp to the top cover assemblyM6(6.5+/- .75) ft lb
The fixing bolt connecting the rear clearance lamp and the rear clearance lamp mounting bracketM6(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the rear clearance lamp and the rear clearance lamp mounting bracketM6(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the rear work light bracket to the integrated frameM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
Fixed bolts connecting the rear work light bracket to the integrated frameM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the side marker combination light and the lower decorative panel assembly of the side panelM6(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the side marker combination light and the side skirt assemblyM6(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Name of Light BulbQuantityModel of Light BulbPower
Low beam240W eachLED
High beam240W eachLED
Front turn signal lamp214W eachLED
Daytime running lamp214W eachLED
Front position lamp26.6W eachLED
End-outline marker lamp21.7W eachLED
Side turn signal lamp25.1W eachLED
Side marker lamp80.82W eachLED

7.11.1.2 Technical Parameters

Name of Light BulbQuantityModel of Light BulbPower
Reversing lamp22.5W eachLED
Rear end-outline marker lamp41.3W for the rear upper, 0.63W for the rear lowerLED
Brake lamp22.9W eachLED
Rear working lamp19WLED
License plate lamp12.5WLED
Rear turn signal lamp22.1WLED
Figure p1622

7.11.2 Dismantling and Installation

7.11.2.1 Replacement of Left Headlamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the left headlamp.

13 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the left headlamp. 14 Remove the left headlamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left headlamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the left headlamp.

Torque:(6 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1623

3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the left headlamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate. 14 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the headlamps, it is necessary to recalibrate the position of the lights.

7.11.2.2 Replacement of Right Headlamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp.

6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the right headlamp. 13 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the right headlamp. 14 Remove the right headlamp. Installation Procedures

Figure p1625
Figure p1625

1 Move the right headlamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the right headlamp.

Torque: (6 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 2 harness connector of the right headlamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the front bumper assembly. 5 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 6 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 7 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 8 Install the forward MMW radar. 9 Install the front MMW radar shield. 10 Install the through-type lamp. 11 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 12 Connect the battery negative cable. 13 Close the front flip cover plate.

14 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the headlamps, it is necessary to recalibrate the position of the lights.
Figure p1627

7.11.2.3 Replacement of Through-type Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the through-type lamp, and remove the through-type lamp.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the through-type lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the through-type lamp.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1628

3 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.11.2.4 Replacement of Left Front Combination Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 13 Remove the left front wheel housing body.

14 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 15 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 16 Remove the left fender trim strip. 17 Remove the left fender assembly. 18 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left front combination lamp. 19 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the left front combination lamp. 20 Remove the left front combination lamp. Installation Procedures

Figure p1630
Figure p1630

1 Move the left front combination lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the left front combination lamp.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1824
Figure p1824
Figure p1819

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left front combination lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the left fender assembly. 5 Install the left fender trim strip. 6 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the left front wheel housing body. 9 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 10 Install the front bumper assembly. 11 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 12 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 13 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 14 Install the forward MMW radar.

15 Install the front MMW radar shield. 16 Install the through-type lamp. 17 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 18 Connect the battery negative cable. 19 Close the front flip cover plate. 20 Close the door.

7.11.2.5 Replacement of Right Front Combination Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the through-type lamp. 6 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 7 Remove the forward MMW radar. 8 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 9 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 10 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 11 Remove the front bumper assembly. 12 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 14 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 15 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 16 Remove the right fender trim strip. 17 Remove the right fender assembly.

18 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right front combination lamp. 19 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the right front combination lamp. 20 Remove the right front combination lamp. Installation Procedures

Figure p1633
Figure p1633

1 Move the right front combination lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the right front combination lamp.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1859
Figure p1859
Figure p1854
Figure p1854

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right front combination lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the right fender assembly. 5 Install the right fender trim strip. 6 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the right front wheel housing body. 9 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 10 Install the front bumper assembly. 11 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 12 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 13 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 14 Install the forward MMW radar.

15 Install the front MMW radar shield. 16 Install the through-type lamp. 17 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 18 Connect the battery negative cable. 19 Close the front flip cover plate. 20 Close the door.

Figure p1635

7.11.2.6 Replacement of Left Front End-outline Marker Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left front end- outline marker lamp.

14 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the left front end-outline marker lamp. 15 Remove the left front end-outline marker lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the left front end-outline marker lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the left front end-outline marker lamp.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1636

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left front end-outline marker lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 5 Install the curtain rail assembly. 6 Install the right ceiling lamp. 7 Install the left ceiling lamp. 8 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 10 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 11 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

7.11.2.7 Replacement of Right Front End- outline Marker Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly.

8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left ceiling lamp. 10 Remove the right ceiling lamp. 11 Remove the curtain rail assembly. 12 Remove the middle ceiling assembly. 13 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right front end- outline marker lamp. 14 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the right front end-outline marker lamp. 15 Remove the right front end-outline marker lamp. Installation Procedures

Figure p1638
Figure p1638

1 Move the right front end-outline marker lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the right front end-outline marker lamp.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right front end-outline marker lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the middle ceiling assembly. 5 Install the curtain rail assembly. 6 Install the right ceiling lamp. 7 Install the left ceiling lamp. 8 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 10 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 11 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 12 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 13 Connect the battery negative cable. 14 Close the front flip cover plate. 15 Close the door.

Figure p1640
Figure p1640

7.11.2.8 Identification marker light

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the identification marker light. 6 Remove 2 fixing screws of the identification marker light. 7 Remove the identification marker light. Installation Procedures

1 Move the identification marker light to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing screws of the identification marker light. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the identification marker light.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.11.2.9 Replacement of Left side Combination Marker Light

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the left fender trim strip. 10 Remove the left fender assembly. 11 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the left side combination marker light. 12 Remove the left side combination marker light. Installation Procedures

Figure p1642

1 Move the left side combination marker light to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the left side combination marker light.

Torque:(4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install the left fender assembly. 4 Install the left fender trim strip. 5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the left front wheel housing body. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 9 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

7.11.2.10 Replacement of Right Side Combination Marker Light

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 5 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 6 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 7 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).

8 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the right fender trim strip. 10 Remove the right fender assembly. 11 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the right side combination marker light. 12 Remove the right side combination marker light. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right side combination marker light to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the right side combination marker light.

Torque: (4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install the right fender assembly. 4 Install the right fender trim strip. 5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the right front wheel housing body. 7 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 8 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 9 Install the engine compartment trim panel body.

Figure p1644

10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

Figure p1645
Figure p1645

7.11.2.11 Replacement of Rear Working Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the rear working lamp. 5 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the rear working lamp. 6 Remove the rear working lamp. Installation Procedures

1 Move the rear working lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing bolt of the rear working lamp.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the rear working lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.11.2.12 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (right middle)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove the MMWRR. 7 Remove 4 fixing screws of the side marker combination lamp (right middle). 8 Remove the side marker combination lamp (right middle). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (left middle) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the side marker combination lamp (left middle). 3 Install the MMWRR. 4 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 5 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Figure p1647

7.11.2.13 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (right front)

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (right front). 6 Remove the side marker combination lamp (right front). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (right front) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (right front).

Torque: (.4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable.

Figure p1648

5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1649

7.11.2.14 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (right rear)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (right rear). 7 Remove the side marker combination lamp (right rear). Installation Procedures

1 Move the side marker combination lamp (right rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (right rear).

Torque: (.4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install the right skirt plate assembly. 4 Attach the right side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.11.2.15 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (left middle)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove the MMWRL.

7 Remove 4 fixing screws of the side marker combination lamp (left middle). 8 Remove the side marker combination lamp (left middle). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (left middle) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing screws of the side marker combination lamp (left middle). 3 Install the MMWRL. 4 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 5 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Figure p1651

7.11.2.16 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (left front)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (left front). 6 Remove the side marker combination lamp (left front). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (left front) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (left front).

Torque: (.4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1652
Figure p1653

7.11.2.17 Replacement of Side Marker Combination Lamp (left rear)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the left skirt plate assembly. 6 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (left rear). 7 Remove the side marker combination lamp (left rear). Installation Procedures 1 Move the side marker combination lamp (left rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the side marker combination lamp (left rear).

Torque: (.4.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install the left skirt plate assembly. 4 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

Figure p1654

7.11.2.18 Replacement of Reversing Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 6 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the reversing lamp.

7 Remove 6 fixing nuts of the reversing lamp. 8 Remove the reversing lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the reversing lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing nuts of the reversing lamp.

Figure p1655

3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the reversing lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

Figure p1656

7.11.2.19 Replacement of the License Plate Light

Disassembly Procedure 1 Open the car door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the negative battery cable. 4 Disconnect one wire harness connector of the license plate light.

5 Remove the two fixing screws of the license plate light. 6 Take down the license plate light. Installation Procedure 1 Install the license plate light. 2 Install the two fixing screws of the license plate light.

Figure p1657

3 Connect one wire harness connector of the license plate light. 4 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 5 Close the front flip cover panel. 6 Close the car door.

7.11.2.20 Replacement of Left Rear Combination Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear upper).

6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left rear combination lamp. 7 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the left rear combination lamp. 8 Remove the left rear combination lamp. Installation Procedures

Figure p1659
Figure p1659

1 Move the left rear combination lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing nuts of the left rear combination lamp.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left rear combination lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.11.2.21 Replacement of Right Rear Combination Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate.

4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right rear combination lamp. 7 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the right rear combination lamp. 8 Remove the right rear combination lamp. Installation Procedures

Figure p1661
Figure p1661

1 Move the right rear combination lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing nuts of the right rear combination lamp. 3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right rear combination lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear upper). 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.11.2.22 Replacement of Rear Retro-reflector

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear upper).

3 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear retro-reflector. 4 Remove the rear retro-reflector. Installation Procedures 1 Move the rear retro-reflector to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear retro-reflector. 3 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear upper).

Figure p1663
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the toolbox light bracket to the sleeper toolboxM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Name of Llight BulbQuantityModel of Light BulbPower
Brake light2LED1.1W
Turn signal2LED1.1W
Position light2LED0.2W
Reverse light2LED1.5W
License plate light2LED0.7W
High beam2LED32.0W
Low beam2LED40.0W
Daytime Running Lights2LED14.0W
Front turn signal2LED14.0W
Front position light2LED6.6W
Front side marker light2LED1.7W
Identification Light3LED1.7W
Rear work light1LED9.0W
Side marker light2LED1.5W
Ceiling light2LED9.5W
Front reading light2LED0.6W
Berth reading light1LED1.3W
Illuminating lamp3LED0.5W
Ambient light2LED0.4W

7.12 Interior Vehicle Body Lamp Device

7.12.1 Specifications

7.12.1.1 Fastener Specifications

7.12.1.2 Technical Parameters

Figure p1665

7.12.2 Decomposition Diagram

7.12.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Atmosphere Lamp -Instrument Trim Panel Lh Upr 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Atmosphere Lamp of Right Workbench 9. Tool Box Lamp Bracket 3. Self-Tapping Screw 10. Courtesy Lamp 4. Reading Lamp-Frt 11. Hexalobular Socket Pan Head Screw In New Energy Vehicles 5. Ceiling Lamp-Lh 12. Sleeper Reading Lamp 6. Ceiling lamp-rh 13. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw 7. Lamp

Figure p1666
Figure p1666

7.12.3 Dismantling and Installation

7.12.3.1 Replacement of Lighting Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Detach the lighting lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the lighting lamp. 6 Remove the lighting lamp. Installation Procedures

1 Move the lighting lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the lighting lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the lighting lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.12.3.2 Replacement of Courtesy Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove 2 fixing screws of the courtesy lamp, and detach the courtesy lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the courtesy lamp. 6 Remove the courtesy lamp. Installation Procedures

Figure p1668
Figure p1668

1 Move the courtesy lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the courtesy lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 2 fixing screws of the courtesy lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.12.3.3 Replacement of Sleeper Reading Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove 2 fixing screws of the sleeper reading lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the sleeper reading lamp. 6 Remove the sleeper reading lamp. Installation Procedures

Figure p1670
Figure p1670

1 Move the sleeper reading lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the sleeper reading lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install 2 fixing screws of the sleeper reading lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.12.3.4 Replacement of Instrument Left Upper Trim Panel Ambient Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 6 fixing screws on the instrument left upper trim panel ambient lamp. 6 Remove the instrument left upper trim panel ambient lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the instrument left upper trim panel ambient lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws on the instrument left upper trim panel ambient lamp. 3 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1672

7.12.3.5 Replacement of Right Workbench Ambient Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove 6 fixing screws on the right workbench ambient lamp. 6 Remove the right workbench ambient lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Move the right workbench ambient lamp to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing screws on the right workbench ambient lamp. 3 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1673
Figure p1674

7.12.3.6 Replacement of Toolbox Lamp Bracket

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the toolbox lamp. 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the toolbox lamp bracket 6 Remove the toolbox lamp bracket. Installation Procedures 1 Move the toolbox lamp bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the toolbox lamp bracket

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Install the toolbox lamp.

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1675
Figure p1675

7.12.3.7 Replacement of Left Ceiling Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Pry off the left ceiling lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left ceiling lamp. 6 Remove the left ceiling lamp. Installation Procedures

1 Move the left ceiling lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the left ceiling lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the left ceiling lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.12.3.8 Replacement of Right Ceiling Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Pry off the right ceiling lamp. 5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right ceiling lamp. 6 Remove the right ceiling lamp. Installation Procedures

Figure p1677
Figure p1677

1 Move the right ceiling lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the right ceiling lamp.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Install the right ceiling lamp. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

7.12.3.9 Replacement of Front Reading Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly.

5 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Remove the sunshade rail assembly. 7 Remove the front camera trim cover assembly. 8 Remove the sunshade cover plate assembly. 9 Remove the front reading lamp. Installation Procedures 1 Install the front reading lamp. 2 Install the sunshade cover plate assembly. 3 Install the front camera trim cover assembly. 4 Install the sunshade rail assembly. 5 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 6 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 7 Connect the battery negative cable.

Figure p1679

8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

Figure p1680

7.12.3.10 Replacement of Top Cabinet Lamp

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Open the top cabinet assembly. 5 Detach the top cabinet lamp. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the top cabinet lamp. 7 Remove the top cabinet lamp. Installation Procedures

1 Move the top cabinet lamp to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the top cabinet lamp. 3 Install the top cabinet lamp. 4 Close the top cabinet assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.13 Wiper Device

7.13.1 Description and Operation

7.13.1.1 Description and Operation

The windshield washer system employs CEM to collect and determine the gear position of the combination switch handle, and then turns on the windshield washer motor to transport the washer fluid to the front/rear nozzles through the washer fluid pipe, and the washer fluid is sprayed from the nozzle position, combined with the rotation of the wiper, to achieve the cleaning of the windshield.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the wiper motor assembly and the wiper motor mounting bracketM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the main wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose) to the wiper motor assemblyM8(14.75 - 17) ft lbs

7.13.2 Specifications

7.13.2.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1684

7.13.3 Decomposition Diagram

7.13.3.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Wiper Arm Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wiper Motor Assy

7.13.4 Inspect

7.13.4.1 Inspection of Wiper

Power on the vehicle, turn on the wiper switch, and check the wiper is working properly at each gear.

Figure p1686

7.13.5 Dismantling and Installation

7.13.5.1 Replacement of Wiper Motor Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 5 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the wiper motor assembly.

7 Disengage 1 clip of the wiper motor assembly. 8 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the wiper motor assembly. 9 Remove the wiper motor assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p1687
Figure p1687

1 Move the wiper motor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the wiper motor assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install 1 clip of the wiper motor assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the wiper motor assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 6 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

Figure p1689
Figure p1689

7.13.5.2 Replacement of Primary Wiper Arm Blade Assembly (nozzle and hose)

Removal Procedures 1 Disconnect the hose. 2 Remove 2 plug caps.

3 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 4 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). Installation Procedures 1 Move the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).

Torque: (14.5 +/- 17) ft lbs
Figure p1690

3 Install 2 plug caps. 4 Connect the hose.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the inner panel of the right enclosure plate to the washing pot assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the front outer crossbeam assembly of the floor to the washing pot assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

7.14 Windshield Washer Device

7.14.1 specifications

7.14.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1693

7.14.2 Decomposition Diagram

7.14.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Two-Way Connector for Windshield Wiper Water Pipe In New Energy Vehicles 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Wash reservoir Assy 4. Windshield Wiper Water Pipe In New Energy Vehicles

Figure p1694
Figure p1694

7.14.3 Dismantling and Installation

7.14.3.1 Replacement of Washer Fluid Reservoir Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the washer fluid reservoir assembly. 5 Disconnect the washer fluid reservoir water pipe, and use a container to catch the overflowing washer fluid.

caution
Use a clean container to receive the discharged washer fluid.

6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the washer fluid reservoir assembly. 7 Remove the washer fluid reservoir assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the washer fluid reservoir assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the washer fluid reservoir assembly.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1695

3 Connect the washer fluid reservoir water pipe. 4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the washer fluid reservoir assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.14.3.2 Replacement of Washer Fluid Reservoir Water Pipe

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose).

4 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the washer fluid reservoir water pipe. Installation Procedures 1 Install the washer fluid reservoir water pipe. 2 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 3 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

Figure p1697

7.15 Information and Communication Device

7.15.1 Description and Operation

7.15.1.1 Description and Operation

The relevant communication devices between the vehicle and the outside are as follows: 1. TGW and TBOX functions: It serves as the on-board terminal and the key device in the Internet of Vehicles (IOV), which integrates GPS and communication modules and interacts with vehicle information through the gateway, and collects and uploads GB/T 32960 data and Windrose enterprise standard data, realizes remote control, fault diagnosis, position query, OTA tasks, and other functions. It serves as the central gateway for the vehicle, implements the CAN signal routing function at the vehicle end, and provides an OBD diagnostic interface; 2. Combination antenna: It provides 5G communication and BD/GPS positioning signals for the TGW, and 4G communication and BD/GPS positioning signals for the VTDR; 3. VTDR: It is a regulatory part approved by the Ministry of Transport, which provides position query, vehicle and driver information; 4. ETC: Electronic Toll Collection.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the driving recorder bracket to the lower left instrument panel controller bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the T gateway and the T gateway bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the lower left dashboard controller bracket to the T gateway bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the combination antenna and the pipe beam assemblyM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolts connecting the T gateway and the T gateway bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

7.15.2 Specifications

7.15.2.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1700

7.15.3 Decomposition Diagram

7.15.3.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. ETC(Electronic Toll Collection) 5. Tbox-Gw 2. Composite Antenna(Gnss+5g/4g) 6. Vehicle Travelling Data Recorder Bracket 3. ECALL Mic 7. Vehicle Travelling Data Recorder 4. Tbox-Gw Bracke 8. Emergency Call for Help Loudspeakers

7.15.4 System Schematic Diagram

7.15.4.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
The diagnostic tool cannot communicate with the vehicle1.The diagnostic tool version is too lowUpdate the diagnostic tool to the latest version.
2.OBD power supply circuit faultRefer to OBD Power Supply Circuit Fault
3. OBD CAN communication harness malfunctionCheck the OBD CAN communication harness.
4. OBD Ethernet harness malfunctionCheck the OBD Ethernet harness.
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717High battery voltageRefer to GW Power Fault
B111716Low Battery Voltage
U018787Lost Communication With CMS_LRefer to GW Communication Fault
U014087Lost Communication With BDCU communication with BDCU
U01A087Lost Communication With SJB_UP
U019987Lost Communication With DCM
U014187Lost Communication With AVAS
U01A187Lost Communication With SJB_UN
U012787Lost Communication With TPMS_F

7.15.5 Diagnostic Information and Steps

7.15.5.1 Diagnostic Description

Before diagnosing faults in information communication devices, refer to Description And Operation Understanding and familiarizing oneself with the working principle of information and communication devices before starting system diagnosis can help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps in the event of a malfunction, and more importantly, it can help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of information and communication devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis.

Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 7.15.5.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the information and communication device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the information and communication device system.

• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 7.15.5.3 Fault Symptom Table

7.15.5.4 DTC Confirmation

1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 7.15.5.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

GW

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U016487Lost Communication With A/C
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU
U015787Lost Communication With CAMF
U026487Lost Communication With USS
U026687Lost Communication With MMWR_L
U026887Lost Communication With MMWR_R
U012287Lost Communication With VDC
U015A87Lost Communication With FCU1
U015B87Lost Communication With FCU2
U015C87Lost Communication With HCU
U012187Lost Communication With EBS
U013287Lost Communication With ECAS
U012887Lost Communication With EPB
U007388CANFD1 BusOff
U007488CANFD2 BusOff
U007588CANFD3 BusOff
U007688CANFD4 BusOff
U007788CANFD5 BusOff
U007888CANFD6 BusOff
U007988CANFD7 BusOff
U007A88CAN8 BusOff
U007B88CANFD9 BusOff
U008088CANFD10 BusOff
U220200CANFD3 network limp home
U220300CANFD4 network limp home
U220400CANFD5 network limp home
U220900CANFD6 network limp home
U220500CANFD7 network limp home
U220800CANFD10 network limp home
U238208The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormalRefer to GW Internal Fault
B100000RTC chip error
B100001MCU temperature is too high
B100002CPU temperature is too high
B100004Backup battery not connected
B100005End of backup battery life
U100001BDC Ethernet T1 port connection abnormalityRefer to GW Ethernet Fault
U100002CDC Ethernet link failure
U100003ADC Ethernet link failure
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U100004BDC Ethernet insufficient SQI
U100005CDC Ethernet insufficient SQI
U100006ADC Ethernet insufficient SQI
U100007BDC Ethernet CRC error
U100008CDC Ethernet CRC error
U100009ADC Ethernet CRC error
U10000AGateway certificate exceptionRefer to GW Certificate Abnormality
U10000BGateway certificate application failed
U10000CRoot certificate exception
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U019887Lost Communication With GWRefer to TBOX Communication Fault
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU
B10FF96Safety Chip FailureRefer to TBOX Internal Fault
B10FE96CODEC Module Failure
B10FA115G Antenna Shorted To The GroundRefer to Combination Antenna Fault
B10FA135G Antenna Open Circuit
B10F9965G Module Failure
U10000AGateway certificate exceptionRefer to TBOX Certificate Abnormality
U10000BGateway certificate application failed
U10000CRoot certificate exception
B10FB00No SIM CardPlease reinsert the SIM card
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717High battery voltageVoltage measured > 32V for 5000ms(Deviation not exceeding 1000ms)1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.T-Gateway
B111716Low Battery VoltageVoltage measured < 16V for 5000ms(Deviation not exceeding 1000ms)

TBOX

7.15.5.6 GW Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.15.5.6 GW Power Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
7.15.5.6 GW Power Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection B76-17

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U018787Lost Communication With CMS_L1.Message 0x18FF0351 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 50 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v)1. Wiring harness 2. T-Gateway
U014087Lost Communication With BDCU communication with BDCU1.Message 0x0CFDCC21 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v)
U01A087Lost Communication With SJB_UP1.Message 0x18FF3354 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v)
U019987Lost Communication With DCM1.Message 0x18FDA54F timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v)
U014187Lost Communication With AVAS1.Message 0x18FF0E57 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 500 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v)
U01A187Lost Communication With SJB_UN1.Message 0x18FF2359 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 500 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(16v-32v)
U012787Lost Communication With TPMS_F1.Message 0x18FEF433 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 500 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U016487Lost Communication With A/C1.Message 0x18FF0B19 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU1.Message 0x18FF0841 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 1000 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides GW? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the T-gateway power and grounding harness. Step 5:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 6:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.15.5.7 GW Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U015787Lost Communication With CAMF1.Message 0x18FF3531 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U026487Lost Communication With USS1.Message 0x18FF5C5F timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U026687Lost Communication With MMWR_L1.Message 0x18FF4361 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U026887Lost Communication With MMWR_R1.Message 0x18FF4263 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U012287Lost Communication With VDC1.Message 0x18FEF100 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U015A87Lost Communication With FCU11.Message 0x18102465 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U015B87Lost Communication With FCU21.Message 0x181024A5 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U015C87Lost Communication With HCU1.Message 0x18f30189 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U012187Lost Communication With EBS1.Message 0x18F0010B timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U013287Lost Communication With ECAS1.Message 0x18FEEA2F timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U012887Lost Communication With EPB1.Message 0x18FE1250 timeout for 10cycle(Cycle = 100 ms) 2.battery in normal voltage(18v-32v)
U007388CANFD1 BusOffCANFD1 bus communication failure
U007488CANFD2 BusOffCANFD2 bus communication failure
U007588CANFD3 BusOffCANFD3 bus communication failure
U007688CANFD4 BusOffCANFD4 bus communication failure
U007788CANFD5 BusOffCANFD5 bus communication failure
U007888CANFD6 BusOffCANFD6 bus communication failure
U007988CANFD7 BusOffCANFD7 bus communication failure
U007A88CAN8 BusOffCANFD8 bus communication failure
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007B88CANFD9 BusOffCANFD9 bus communication failure
U008088CANFD10 BusOffCANFD10 bus communication failure
U220200CANFD3 network limp homeCANFD3 NM in limp home state
U220300CANFD4 network limp homeCANFD4 NM in limp home state
U220400CANFD5 network limp homeCANFD5 NM in limp home state
U220900CANFD6 network limp homeCANFD6 NM in limp home state
U220500CANFD7 network limp homeCANFD7 NM in limp home state
U220800CANFD10 network limp homeCANFD10 NM in limp home state

2.Circuit Diagram

B76-17

7.15.5.7 GW Communication Fault — circuit diagram (1/3)
7.15.5.7 GW Communication Fault — circuit diagram (2/3)
7.15.5.7 GW Communication Fault — circuit diagram (3/3)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD1 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U238208The Ethernet MDIO chip is abnormalUnable to read SWITCH chip register1. T-Gateway
B100000RTC chip errorGet RTC time error lasts 5s
B100001MCU temperature is too highTemperature measurement > 110℃for 5s
B100002CPU temperature is too highTemperature measurement > 110℃for 5s
B100004Backup battery not connectedBackup battery not connected for more than 5s
B100005End of backup battery lifeBackup battery life less than 10%
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U100001BDC Ethernet T1 port connection abnormalityIf the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported1. Wiring harness 2. T-Gateway

Step 4:Check the CANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD4 Bus Network Integrity Step 6:Check the CANFD5 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD5 Bus Network Integrity Step 7:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:Check the CANFD7 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity Step 9:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity Step 10:Check the CANFD9 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD9 Bus Network Integrity Step 11:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 12:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 13:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.15.5.8 GW Internal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 4:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.15.5.9 GW Ethernet Fault

1.DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U100002CDC Ethernet link failureIf the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported
U100003ADC Ethernet link failureIf the current link status of the Ethernet port is not link- Up, the counter increases by 1. If the current link status is not link-Up for 10 consecutive times, a fault is reported
U100004BDC Ethernet insufficient SQISQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s
U100005CDC Ethernet insufficient SQISQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s
U100006ADC Ethernet insufficient SQISQI below the threshold occurs 20 times within 60s
U100007BDC Ethernet CRC errorRead the Ethernet chip CRC value and report a fault if there is a single CRC error
U100008CDC Ethernet CRC errorRead the Ethernet chip CRC value and report a fault if there is a single CRC error
U100009ADC Ethernet CRC errorRead the Ethernet chip CRC value and report a fault if there is a single CRC error

2. Circuit Diagram

7.15.5.9 GW Ethernet Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation.Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection.Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the T-gateway Ethernet harness.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U10000AGateway certificate exceptionReport a fault if the certificate is abnormal1. T-Gateway
U10000BGateway certificate application failedIf the certificate application fails, a fault will be reported
U10000CRoot certificate exceptionThe root certificate does not exist or its content is empty
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U019887Lost Communication With GWNo GW heartbeat received, lasting for 60 seconds1. Wiring harness 2. T-Gateway
U015687Lost Communication With CDCUNo USB channel communication heartbeat received from CDCU, lasting for 60 seconds

Step 4:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 5:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.15.5.10 GW Certificate Abnormality

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Reapply for the certificate. Step 4:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 5:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.15.5.11 TBOX Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

B76-17

7.15.5.11 TBOX Communication Fault — circuit diagram (1/3)
7.15.5.11 TBOX Communication Fault — circuit diagram (2/3)
7.15.5.11 TBOX Communication Fault — circuit diagram (3/3)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD1 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B10FF96Safety Chip Failurecommand timeout1. T-Gateway
B10FE96CODEC Module Failurecodec Module initialization failed or Codec the module cannot communicate
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B10FA115G Antenna Shorted To The GroundKL15 OFF->ON In 60s, a short circuit is detected for 5s1. Wiring harness 2. Combination antenna 3. T-Gateway
B10FA135G Antenna Open CircuitKL15 OFF->ON In 60s, an open circuit is detected for 5s
B10F9965G Module FailureIn normal mode, failure to connect to the network is detected for 10 minutes

Step 4:Check the CANFD3 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity Step 5:Check the CANFD4 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CANFD4 bus network integrity Step 6:Check the CANFD5 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CANFD5 bus network integrity Step 7:Check the CANFD6 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD6 Bus Network Integrity Step 8:Check the CANFD7 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity Step 9:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity Step 10:Check the CANFD9 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CANFD9 Bus Network Integrity Step 11:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 12:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 13:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.15.5.12 TBOX Internal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 4:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.15.5.13 Combination Antenna Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

7.15.5.13 Combination Antenna Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the T-gateway and the combination antenna. B76-17

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U10000AGateway certificate exceptionReport a fault if the certificate is abnormal1. T-Gateway
U10000BGateway certificate application failedIf the certificate application fails, a fault will be reported
U10000CRoot certificate exceptionThe root certificate does not exist or its content is empty
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CAN8(H) and CAN8(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

Step 4:Replace the combination antenna. Refer to Replacement of combination antenna Step 5:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 6:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.15.5.14 TBOX Certificate Abnormality

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Reapply for the certificate. Step 4:T-Gateway rewrites configuration codes, software reloads, upgrades. Step 5:Replace the T-gateway. Refer to Replacement Of T Gateway Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

7.15.5.15 Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of CAN8 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CAN8 bus voltage. No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CAN8 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CAN8 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CAN8 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CAN8 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CAN8 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CAN8 bus. C. Measure the CAN8 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CAN8 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CAN8 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CAN8 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CAN8 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CAN8 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD1(H) and CANFD1(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

7.15.5.16 Inspection Of CANFD1 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of CANFD1 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD1 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD1 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD3(H) and CANFD3(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD1 bus. C. Measure the CANFD1 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD1 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.

7.15.5.17 Inspection Of CANFD3 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the CANFD3 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD3 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD3 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD3 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD3 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD3 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD3 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD3 bus. C. Measure the CANFD3 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD3 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD3 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD3 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD3 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD4(H) / CANFD4 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD4 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD4 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

7.15.5.18 Inspection Of CANFD4 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the CANFD4 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD4 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD4 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD4 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD4 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD5(H) and CANFD5(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD4 bus. C. Measure the CANFD4 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD4 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD4 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD4 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD4 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD4 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.

7.15.5.19 Inspection of CANFD5 bus network integrity

Step 1 Check the CANFD5 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD5 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD5 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD5 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD5 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD5 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD5 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD5 bus. C. Measure the CANFD5 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD5 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD5 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD5 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD5 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD5 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD7(H) and CANFD7(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD7 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD7 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

7.15.5.20 Inspection Of CANFD7 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the CANFD7 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD7 bus voltage. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD7 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD7 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD7 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD9(H) and CANFD9(L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD7 bus. C. Measure the CANFD7 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD7 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD7 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD7 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD7 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD7 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty.

7.15.5.21 Inspection Of CANFD9 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the CANFD9 bus terminal resistance. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the CANFD9 bus voltage. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD9 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD9 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
CANFD9 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
CANFD9 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. No Yes No Yes No Yes

A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the CANFD9 bus harness. A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the CANFD9 bus. C. Measure the CANFD9 bus resistance between each module and the T-gateway sequentially to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of CANFD9 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the CANFD9 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the CANFD9 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the CANFD9 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the CANFD9 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. Yes No No Yes

Figure p1740

7.15.6 Dismantling and Installation

7.15.6.1 Replacement of TGW

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the front USB interface. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the VTDR. 11 Remove the VTDR bracket. 12 Remove the left lower fixing bracket. 13 Disconnect 7 harness connectors of the TGW.

14 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the TGW with bracket, and remove the TGW with bracket. 15 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the TGW. 16 Remove the TGW. Installation Procedures

Figure p1741
Figure p1741

1 Move the TGW to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the TGW.

Torque:(6.5 +/+.75) ft lbs

3 Install the TGW with bracket, and install 4 fixing bolts of the TGW with bracket. 4 Connect 7 harness connectors of the TGW.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the left lower fixing bracket. 6 Install the VTDR bracket. 7 Install the VTDR. 8 Install the IP left lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Install the left switch panel assembly. 11 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 12 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 13 Install the front USB interface. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

Figure p1743

7.15.6.2 Replacement of Speaker - emergency Call

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Pull open the seat backrest cushion, and disconnect 2 harness connectors of the speaker - emergency call.

5 Remove 3 fixing screws of the speaker - emergency call. 6 Remove the speaker - emergency call. Installation Procedures 1 Move the speaker - emergency call to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the speaker - emergency call.

Figure p1744

3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the speaker - emergency call, and pull up the seat backrest cushion.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1745

7.15.6.3 Replacement of E-CALL Mic

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Pull open the seat backrest cushion, and disconnect 1 harness connector of the E-CALL Mic. 5 Remove the E-CALL Mic. Installation Procedures

1 Move the E-CALL Mic to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the E-CALL Mic, and pull up the seat backrest cushion.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

7.15.6.4 Replacement of Combination Antenna

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the ip brim assy. 5 Remove the IVI screen. 6 Remove the CAR screen. 7 Remove the IPC screen. 8 Remove the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 9 Remove the camera monitor screen. 10 Remove the base-lh display brkt. 11 Remove the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 12 Remove the camera monitor screen-rh. 13 Remove the base-rh display brkt. 14 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 15 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 16 Remove the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh.

17 Remove the front side enclosure assy-lh. 18 Remove the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 19 Remove the front side enclosure assy-rh. 20 Remove the ontology assy on the dashboard. 21 Disconnect the two wire harness connectors that connect the combined antenna to the Tbox-gw, and disconnect the two wire harness connectors that connect the combined antenna to the tachograph. 22 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the combination antenna. 23 Remove the combination antenna. Installation Procedures 1 Move the combination antenna to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the combination antenna.

Torque: (6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
Figure p1747

3 Straighten out the wire harnesses, connect the two wire harness connectors that connect the combined antenna to the Tbox-gw, and connect the two wire harness connectors that connect the combined antenna to the tachograph.

caution
The wire harness should be plugged firmly, following the principle of "first plugging, second clicking, third confirming".

4 Install the ontology assy on the dashboard. 5 Install the front side enclosure assy-rh. 6 Install the assembly of the cover assy-steering under column guard. 7 Install the front side enclosure assy-lh. 8 Install the assembly of the instrument panel trim panel assy- lowerr lh. 9 Install the a-pillar guard assy-rh. 10 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 11 Install the base-rh display brkt. 12 Install the camera monitor screen-rh. 13 Install the upr cover- rh camera brkt. 14 Install the base-lh display brkt. 15 Install the camera monitor screen. 16 Install the upr cover- lh camera brkt. 17 Install the IPC screen. 18 Install the CAR screen. 19 Install the IVI screen. 20 Install the ip brim assy. 21 Connect the battery negative cable. 22 Close the front flip cover plate. 23 Close the door.

Figure p1748

7.15.6.5 Replacement of VTDR

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Insert and remove the VTDR from the two end holes using the built-in tool. 5 Disconnect 6 harness connectors of the VTDR. 6 Remove the VTDR. Installation Procedures

Figure p1749
Figure p1749

1 Connect 6 harness connectors of the VTDR.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

2 Slowly push the VTDR into the mounting position to install it. 3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

7.15.6.6 Replacement of ETC

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the ETC. 5 Remove the ETC. Installation Procedures 1 Move the ETC to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the ETC.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p1754
Figure p1754

3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

Figure p1751
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly and the white body assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly and the white body assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

7.16 Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Device

7.16.1 Specifications

7.16.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1753
Figure p1753

7.16.2 Dismantling and Installation

7.16.2.1 Replacement of Left Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 7 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing nuts of the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the left A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.16.2.2 Replacement of Right Physical Exterior Rearview Mirror Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 7 Remove the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p1755
Figure p1755

1 Move the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing nuts of the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Connect 2 harness connectors of the right physical exterior rearview mirror assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the right A-pillar protective plate assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

7.16.2.3 Replacement Of The Blind Spot Filling Camera

Removal Procedures 1 Open the car door. 2 Open the front flip cover. 3 Disconnect the negative cable of the storage battery.

caution
power off the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the battery.

4 Remove the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 5 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 6 Remove the lower lens of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 7 Remove the upper lens of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 8 Remove the inner mounting plate of the lens. 9 Remove the rear cover assembly of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 10 Remove the blind spot filling camera bracket. 11 Remove the blind spot filling camera. Installation Procedures 1 Fit the Blind spot filling camera. 2 Install the blind spot filling camera bracket.

Figure p1757
Figure p1760

3 Install the rear cover assembly of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 4 Install the inner mounting plate of the lens. 5 Install the upper lens of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 6 Install the lower lens of the physical exterior rearview mirror. 7 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 8 Install the a-pillar guard assy-lh. 9 Connect the negative cable of the storage battery. 10 Close the front flip cover. 11 Close the car door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the traction seat assembly and the corrugated plateM16240 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the traction seat assembly and the corrugated plateM16240 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the corrugated plate and the frame assemblyM16240 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the corrugated plate to the frame assemblyM16240 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
8Chassis

8.1 Fifth Wheel Device2730· 4g

8.1.1 Specifications

8.1.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1760

8.1.2 Dismantling and Installation

8.1.2.1 Replacement of Fifth Wheel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Remove 30 fixing nuts of the fifth wheel assembly front bracket. 2 Remove the fifth wheel assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the fifth wheel assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 30 fixing nuts of the fifth wheel assembly.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
NCM - fixing bolts connecting the battery pack assembly (CALB 161Ah) to the battery supportM1288.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs)
NCM - fixing nut connecting battery pack assembly (CALB 161Ah) to battery supportM1288.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the bottom inclined beam bracket 2 to the frame assemblyM1288.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the bottom inclined beam bracket 2 to the frame assemblyM1288.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the lower protective installation bracket to the frame assemblyM20420 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the front beam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the front beam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the middle cast crossbeam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the middle cast crossbeam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the middle cast crossbeam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the middle longitudinal beam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the internal battery support (NCM) to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

8.2 Vehicle Frame Device2800 / 2810· 4g

8.2.1 Specifications

8.2.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the internal battery support (NCM) to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the external battery support (NCM) to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the external battery support (NCM) to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the external battery mounting plate to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the external battery mounting plate to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the internal battery mounting plate to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the internal battery mounting plate to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the lining beam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the lining beam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the tail crossbeam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the tail crossbeam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the bThe fixing bolts connecting the first crossbeam and the front connecting beameam and the front connecting beamM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the first crossbeam 2 and the front connecting beamM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
Fixed bolts connecting the pipe beam and X-shaped control arm assemblyM22516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the pipe beam and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

8.2.2 Dismantling and Installation

8.2.2.1 Replacement of Frame Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 8 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 9 Drain coolant from the power system. 10 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 11 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 12 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 13 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 14 Remove the right front wheel housing rear body. 15 Remove the roof deflector body. 16 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 17 Remove the left deflector upper body. 18 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 19 Remove the left deflector lower body. 20 Remove the upper deflector mounting bracket. 21 Remove the right deflector upper body. 22 Remove the right deflector lower body. 23 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 24 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 25 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 26 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 27 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 28 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 29 Remove the through-type lamp. 30 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 31 Remove the forward MMW radar. 32 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket.

33 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 34 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 35 Remove the front bumper assembly. 36 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 37 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 38 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 39 Remove the left fender trim strip. 40 Remove the left fender assembly. 41 Remove the left front combination lamp. 42 Remove the left headlamp. 43 Remove the left headlamp bracket. 44 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 45 Remove the right fender trim strip. 46 Remove the right fender assembly. 47 Remove the right front combination lamp. 48 Remove the right headlamp. 49 Remove the right headlamp bracket. 50 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 51 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 52 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 53 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 54 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 55 Remove the lamp (upper). 56 Remove the lamp (lower). 57 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 58 Remove the boarding step bracket. 59 Remove the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 60 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 61 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 62 Remove the frame main truss. 63 Remove the BIW assembly. 64 Remove the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 65 Remove the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 66 Remove the sealing cross beam. 67 Remove the MMW radar bracket.

Figure p1986
Figure p1832
Figure p1822

68 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 69 Remove the deflector assembly. 70 Remove the condenser. 71 Remove the front end module. 72 Remove the guide wheel (left). 73 Remove the front spring left upper mounting plate. 74 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. 75 Remove the front air spring assembly (left). 76 Remove the brake chamber (left). 77 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (left). 78 Remove the left front wheel end assembly. 79 Remove the ABS sensor (left). 80 Remove the guide wheel (right). 81 Remove the front spring right upper mounting plate. 82 Remove the front air spring assembly (right). 83 Remove the brake chamber (right). 84 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (right). 85 Remove the right front wheel end assembly. 86 Remove the ABS sensor (right). 87 Remove the steering fluid reservoir. 88 Remove the electric oil pump. 89 Remove the low pressure oil pipe. 90 Remove the high pressure oil pipe. 91 Remove the A/C compressor assembly. 92 Remove the integrated EHPS assembly. 93 Remove the driving rocker arm. 94 Remove the driven rocker arm. 95 Remove the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 96 Remove the brake hose assembly (left). 97 Remove the ABS solenoid valve bracket. 98 Remove the brake hose assembly (right). 99 Remove the brake pipe bundle assembly. 100 Remove the single channel module assembly. 101 Remove the electronic water pump (front). 102 Remove the electronic water pump (rear). 103 Remove the walking platform rear trim panel. 104 Remove the front walking platform. 105 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear).

106 Remove the corrugated plate. 107 Removal the fifth wheel assembly. 108 Remove the drive wheel (front left). 109 Remove the rear left wheel housing middle body assembly. 110 Removal the rear wheel housing left front assembly. 111 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (left front). 112 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (left front). 113 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 114 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 115 Remove the rear spring U-bolt 2. 116 Remove the balance beam (left). 117 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 118 Remove the rear wheel housing right front assembly. 119 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (right front). 120 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (right front). 121 Remove the balance beam (right). 122 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 123 Remove the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 124 Remove the drive wheel (rear left). 125 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (left). 126 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 127 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 128 Remove the drive wheel (rear right). 129 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (right). 130 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 131 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 132 Remove the dual channel module assembly. 133 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear).

Figure p1768

134 Remove the integrated axle - rear axle. 135 Remove the frame assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the frame assembly. 2 Install the integrated axle - rear axle. 3 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 4 Install the dual channel module assembly. 5 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 6 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 7 Install the height adjustment device assembly (right). 8 Install the drive wheel (rear right). 9 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 10 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 11 Install the height adjustment device assembly (left).

Figure p1768

12 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 13 Install the integrated axle - intermediate axle. 14 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 15 Install the balance beam (right). 16 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (right front). 17 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (right front). 18 Install the rear wheel housing right front assembly. 19 Install the drive wheel (right front). 20 Install the balance beam (left). 21 Install the rear spring U-bolt 2. 22 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 23 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 24 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (left front). 25 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (left front). 26 Install the rear wheel housing left front assembly. 27 Install the drive wheel (left front). 28 Install the fifth wheel assembly. 29 Install the corrugated plate. 30 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 31 Install the front walking platform. 32 Install the walking platform rear trim panel. 33 Install the electronic water pump (rear). 34 Install the electronic water pump (front). 35 Install the single channel module assembly. 36 Install the brake pipe bundle assembly. 37 Install the brake hose assembly (right). 38 Install the ABS solenoid valve bracket. 39 Install the brake hose assembly (left). 40 Install the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 41 Install the driven rocker arm. 42 Install the driving rocker arm. 43 Install the integrated EHPS assembly. 44 Install the A/C compressor assembly. 45 Install the high pressure oil pipe. 46 Install the low pressure oil pipe. 47 Install the electric oil pump. 48 Install the steering fluid reservoir. 49 Install the ABS sensor (right).

Figure p1994

50 Install the right front wheel end assembly. 51 Install the front shock absorber assembly (right). 52 Install the brake chamber (right). 53 Install the front air spring assembly (right). 54 Install the front spring right upper mounting plate. 55 Install the guide wheel (right). 56 Install the ABS sensor (left). 57 Install the left front wheel end assembly. 58 Install the front shock absorber assembly (left). 59 Install the brake chamber (left). 60 Install the front air spring assembly (left). 61 Install the pressure sensor assembly. 62 Install the front spring left upper mounting plate. 63 Install the guide wheel (left). 64 Install the front end module. 65 Install the condenser. 66 Install the deflector assembly. 67 Install the front lower protection assembly. 68 Install the MMW radar bracket. 69 Install the sealing cross beam. 70 Install the electric horn assembly - high-pitch. 71 Install the electric horn assembly - low-pitch. 72 Install the BIW assembly. 73 Install the frame main truss. 74 Install the right deflector lower body. 75 Install the left deflector lower body. 76 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 77 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 78 Install the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 79 Install the boarding step bracket. 80 Install the boarding step body assembly. 81 Install the lamp (lower). 82 Install the lamp (upper). 83 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 84 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 85 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 86 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2.

87 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 88 Install the right headlamp bracket. 89 Install the right headlamp. 90 Install the right front combination lamp. 91 Install the right fender assembly. 92 Install the right fender trim strip. 93 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 94 Install the left headlamp bracket. 95 Install the left headlamp. 96 Install the left front combination lamp. 97 Install the left fender assembly. 98 Install the left fender trim strip. 99 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 100 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 101 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 102 Install the front bumper assembly. 103 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 104 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 105 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 106 Install the forward MMW radar. 107 Install the front MMW radar shield. 108 Install the through-type lamp. 109 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 110 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 111 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 112 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 113 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 114 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 115 Install the right deflector upper body. 116 Install the upper deflector mounting bracket. 117 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 118 Install the left deflector upper body. 119 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 120 Install the roof deflector body.

121 Install the rear end-outline marker lamp mounting bracket. 122 Install the rear end-outline marker lamp. 123 Install the right front wheel housing rear body. 124 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 125 Install the right front wheel housing body. 126 Install the left front wheel housing body. 127 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system. 128 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 129 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 130 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 131 Connect the battery negative cable. 132 Close the front flip cover plate. 133 Close the door.

Figure p1772

8.2.2.2 Replacement of Head Cross Beam 2

Removal Procedures 1 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the head cross beam 2. 2 Remove the head cross beam 2. Installation Procedures

Figure p1773

1 Move the head cross beam 2 to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the head cross beam 2.

Torque:140 - 170 (ft lbs)

8.2.2.3 Replacement of Left Front Joint Beam

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 8 Drain coolant from the power system. 9 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 10 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 11 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 12 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing rear body. 14 Remove the roof deflector body. 15 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 16 Remove the left deflector upper body. 17 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 18 Remove the left deflector lower body. 19 Remove the upper deflector mounting bracket. 20 Remove the right deflector upper body. 21 Remove the right deflector lower body. 22 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).

23 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 24 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 25 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 26 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 27 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 28 Remove the through-type lamp. 29 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 30 Remove the forward MMW radar. 31 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 32 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 33 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 34 Remove the front bumper assembly. 35 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 36 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 37 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 38 Remove the left fender trim strip. 39 Remove the left fender assembly. 40 Remove the left front combination lamp. 41 Remove the left headlamp. 42 Remove the left headlamp bracket. 43 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Remove the right fender trim strip. 45 Remove the right fender assembly. 46 Remove the right front combination lamp. 47 Remove the right headlamp. 48 Remove the right headlamp bracket. 49 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 50 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 51 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 52 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 53 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 54 Remove the lamp (upper).

55 Remove the lamp (lower). 56 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 57 Remove the boarding step bracket. 58 Remove the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 59 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 60 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 61 Remove the frame main truss. 62 Remove the BIW assembly. 63 Remove the MMW radar bracket. 64 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 65 Remove the lower protection left mounting support. 66 Remove the sealing cross beam. 67 Remove the VDC assembly. 68 Remove the VDC bracket. 69 Remove the battery rod. 70 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 71 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. 72 Remove the auxiliary battery. 73 Remove the battery backing plate. 74 Remove Left Junction Box. 75 Remove Right Junction Box. 76 Remove the battery assembly bracket. 77 Removal the head cross beam. 78 Removal the head cross beam 2. 79 Remove the upper wheel housing mounting bracket (left). 80 Disconnect 4 harness connectors of the left front joint beam.

Figure p1775

81 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the left front joint beam. 82 Remove 13 fixing bolts and nuts of the left front joint beam. 83 Remove the left front joint beam. Installation Procedures

Figure p1776
Figure p1776
Figure p1777
Figure p1777
Figure p1777

1 Move the left front joint beam to the mounting position. 2 Install 13 fixing bolts and nuts of the left front joint beam.

Torque: 140 +/- 170 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 2 air pipes of the left front joint beam. 4 Connect 4 harness connectors of the left front joint beam.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the upper wheel housing mounting bracket (left). 6 Install the head cross beam 2. 7 Install the head cross beam. 8 Install the battery assembly bracket. 9 Install Right Junction Box. 10 Install Left Junction Box. 11 Install the battery backing plate. 12 Install the auxiliary battery. 13 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 14 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 15 Install the battery rod. 16 Install the VDC bracket. 17 Install the VDC assembly. 18 Install the sealing cross beam. 19 Install the lower protection left mounting support. 20 Install the front lower protection assembly. 21 Install the MMW radar bracket. 22 Install the BIW assembly. 23 Install the frame main truss. 24 Install the right deflector lower body. 25 Install the left deflector lower body. 26 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 27 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 28 Install the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 29 Install the boarding step bracket. 30 Install the boarding step body assembly. 31 Install the lamp (lower). 32 Install the lamp (upper). 33 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 34 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 35 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 36 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 37 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 38 Install the right headlamp bracket. 39 Install the right headlamp. 40 Install the right front combination lamp. 41 Install the right fender assembly.

42 Install the right fender trim strip. 43 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Install the left headlamp bracket. 45 Install the left headlamp. 46 Install the left front combination lamp. 47 Install the left fender assembly. 48 Install the left fender trim strip. 49 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 50 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 51 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 52 Install the front bumper assembly. 53 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 54 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 55 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 56 Install the forward MMW radar. 57 Install the front MMW radar shield. 58 Install the through-type lamp. 59 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 60 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 61 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 62 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 63 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 64 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 65 Install the right deflector upper body. 66 Install the upper deflector mounting bracket. 67 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 68 Install the left deflector upper body. 69 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 70 Install the roof deflector body. 71 Install the right front wheel housing rear body. 72 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 73 Install the right front wheel housing body. 74 Install the left front wheel housing body. 75 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system.

76 Fill coolant in the power system. 77 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 78 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 79 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 80 Connect the battery negative cable. 81 Close the front flip cover plate. 82 Close the door.

8.2.2.4 Replacement of Right Front Joint Beam

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Recycle A/C refrigerant. 7 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 8 Drain coolant from the power system. 9 Drain coolant from battery thermal management system. 10 Remove the left front wheel housing body. 11 Remove the right front wheel housing body. 12 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 13 Remove the right front wheel housing rear body. 14 Remove the roof deflector body. 15 Remove the roof deflector middle bracket. 16 Remove the left deflector upper body. 17 Remove the roof deflector mounting bracket. 18 Remove the left deflector lower body. 19 Remove the upper deflector mounting bracket. 20 Remove the right deflector upper body. 21 Remove the right deflector lower body. 22 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 23 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 24 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 25 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 26 Remove the back integrated bracket upper cover plate.

27 Remove the engine compartment trim panel body. 28 Remove the through-type lamp. 29 Remove the front MMW radar shield. 30 Remove the forward MMW radar. 31 Remove the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 32 Remove the left cover plate of the corner radar. 33 Remove the right cover plate of the corner radar. 34 Remove the front bumper assembly. 35 Remove the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 36 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 37 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 38 Remove the left fender trim strip. 39 Remove the left fender assembly. 40 Remove the left front combination lamp. 41 Remove the left headlamp. 42 Remove the left headlamp bracket. 43 Remove the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Remove the right fender trim strip. 45 Remove the right fender assembly. 46 Remove the right front combination lamp. 47 Remove the right headlamp. 48 Remove the right headlamp bracket. 49 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 50 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 51 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 52 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 53 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 54 Remove the lamp (upper). 55 Remove the lamp (lower). 56 Remove the boarding step body assembly. 57 Remove the boarding step bracket. 58 Remove the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 59 Remove the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 60 Remove the boarding step tubular beam. 61 Remove the frame main truss.

62 Remove the BIW assembly. 63 Remove the MMW radar bracket. 64 Remove the front lower protection assembly. 65 Remove the lower protection right mounting support. 66 Remove the sealing cross beam. 67 Remove the VDC assembly. 68 Remove the VDC bracket. 69 Remove the battery rod. 70 Remove the battery pressure plate 3. 71 Remove the battery pressure plate 2. 72 Remove the auxiliary battery. 73 Remove the battery backing plate. 74 Remove Left Junction Box. 75 Remove Right Junction Box. 76 Remove the battery assembly bracket. 77 Removal the head cross beam. 78 Removal the head cross beam 2. 79 Remove the upper wheel housing mounting bracket (right). 80 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the right front joint beam.

Figure p1782

81 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the right front joint beam. 82 Remove 10 fixing bolts and nuts of the right front joint beam. 83 Remove the right front joint beam. Installation Procedures

Figure p1783
Figure p1783
Figure p1784
Figure p1784
Figure p1784

1 Move the right front joint beam to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts and nuts of the right front joint beam.

Torque: 140 +/- 170 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 2 air pipes of the right front joint beam. 4 Connect 3 harness connectors of the right front joint beam.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the upper wheel housing mounting bracket (right). 6 Install the head cross beam 2. 7 Install the head cross beam. 8 Install the battery assembly bracket. 9 Install Right Junction Box. 10 Install Left Junction Box. 11 Install the battery backing plate. 12 Install the auxiliary battery. 13 Install the battery pressure plate 2. 14 Install the battery pressure plate 3. 15 Install the battery rod. 16 Install the VDC bracket. 17 Install the VDC assembly. 18 Install the sealing cross beam. 19 Install the lower protection right mounting support. 20 Install the front lower protection assembly. 21 Install the MMW radar bracket. 22 Install the BIW assembly. 23 Install the frame main truss. 24 Install the right deflector lower body. 25 Install the left deflector lower body. 26 Install the boarding step tubular beam. 27 Install the lower wheel housing connecting bracket. 28 Install the upper wheel housing connecting bracket. 29 Install the boarding step bracket. 30 Install the boarding step body assembly. 31 Install the lamp (lower). 32 Install the lamp (upper). 33 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 34 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 35 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 36 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 37 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 38 Install the right headlamp bracket. 39 Install the right headlamp. 40 Install the right front combination lamp. 41 Install the right fender assembly.

42 Install the right fender trim strip. 43 Install the right triangular cover plate assembly. 44 Install the left headlamp bracket. 45 Install the left headlamp. 46 Install the left front combination lamp. 47 Install the left fender assembly. 48 Install the left fender trim strip. 49 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 50 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 51 Install the left physical exterior rearview mirror assembly. 52 Install the front bumper assembly. 53 Install the right cover plate of the corner radar. 54 Install the left cover plate of the corner radar. 55 Install the front MMW radar adapter bracket. 56 Install the forward MMW radar. 57 Install the front MMW radar shield. 58 Install the through-type lamp. 59 Install the engine compartment trim panel body. 60 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate. 61 Install the back integrated bracket upper cover plate filler cap. 62 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 63 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 64 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 65 Install the right deflector upper body. 66 Install the upper deflector mounting bracket. 67 Install the deflector mounting bracket. 68 Install the left deflector upper body. 69 Install the roof deflector middle bracket. 70 Install the roof deflector body. 71 Install the right front wheel housing rear body. 72 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 73 Install the right front wheel housing body. 74 Install the left front wheel housing body. 75 Fill coolant in the battery thermal management system.

76 Fill coolant in the power system. 77 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 78 Fill with A/C refrigerant. 79 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 80 Connect the battery negative cable. 81 Close the front flip cover plate. 82 Close the door.

Figure p1787

8.2.2.5 Replacement of Tail Cross Beam

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the air reservoir assembly (rear). 6 Remove the license plate lamp. 7 Remove the rear license plate mounting plate assembly. 8 Remove the left rear combination lamp. 9 Remove the right rear combination lamp. 10 Remove the reversing lamp. 11 Remove the rear retro-reflector. 12 13 Remove 10 fixing bolts and nuts of the tail cross beam. Remove the tail cross beam.

Figure p1788

Installation Procedures 1 Move the tail cross beam to the mounting position. 2 Install 10 fixing bolts and nuts of the tail cross beam.

Figure p1788
Figure p1789

3 Install the rear retro-reflector. 4 Install the reversing lamp. 5 Install the right rear combination lamp. 6 Install the left rear combination lamp. 7 Install the rear license plate mounting plate assembly. 8 Install the license plate lamp. 9 Install the air reservoir assembly (rear). 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

8.2.2.6 Replacement of Tubular Beam

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from the power system. 8 Remove the drive wheel (rear left). 9 Remove the air reservoir bracket. 10 Removal the tail cross beam. 11 Remove the left tail cross beam reinforcement plate. 12 Remove the tail cross beam reinforcement plate connecting plate. 13 Remove the air spring upper bracket 1.

14 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 15 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (left). 16 Remove the limit buffer assembly. 17 Remove the limit buffer assembly bracket. 18 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 19 Remove the shock absorber bracket. 20 Remove the air spring upper bracket 3 (left rear). 21 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 22 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 23 Remove the thrust bar bracket (left). 24 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 25 Remove the balance beam (left). 26 Remove the airbag solenoid valve assembly (rear). 27 Remove the parking solenoid valve assembly. 28 Remove the drive wheel (rear right). 29 Remove the right tail cross beam reinforcement plate. 30 Remove the air spring upper bracket 2. 31 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 32 Remove the height adjustment device assembly (right). 33 Remove the air spring upper bracket 4 (right rear). 34 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 35 Remove the thrust bar bracket (right). 36 Remove the balance beam (right). 37 Remove the dual channel module assembly. 38 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 39 Remove the integrated axle - rear axle.

40 Remove 8 fixing bolts and nuts of the tubular beam. 41 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the tubular beam.

Figure p1791
Figure p1791
Figure p1791
Figure p1792

42 Remove the tubular beam. Installation Procedures 1 Move the tubular beam to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the tubular beam.

Torque: 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
Figure p1792
Figure p1793
Figure p1793
Figure p1793

3 Install 8 fixing bolts and nuts of the tubular beam.

Torque: 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

4 Install the integrated axle - rear axle. 5 Install the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 6 Install the dual channel module assembly. 7 Install the balance beam (right). 8 Install the thrust bar bracket (right). 9 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear right). 10 Install the air spring upper bracket 4 (right rear). 11 Install the height adjustment device assembly (right). 12 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear right). 13 Install the air spring upper bracket 2. 14 Install the right tail cross beam reinforcement plate. 15 Install the drive wheel (rear right). 16 Install the parking solenoid valve assembly. 17 Install the airbag solenoid valve assembly (rear). 18 Install the balance beam (left). 19 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 20 Install the thrust bar bracket (left). 21 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 22 Install the rear air spring assembly - 280 (rear left). 23 Install the air spring upper bracket 3 (left rear). 24 Install the shock absorber bracket. 25 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 26 Install the limit buffer assembly bracket. 27 Install the limit buffer assembly. 28 Install the height adjustment device assembly (left). 29 Install the rear air spring assembly - 260 (rear left). 30 Install the air spring upper bracket 1. 31 Install the tail cross beam reinforcement plate connecting plate. 32 Install the left tail cross beam reinforcement plate. 33 Install the tail cross beam. 34 Install the air reservoir bracket. 35 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 36 Fill coolant in the power system. 37 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 38 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 39 Connect the battery negative cable.

40 Close the front flip cover plate. 41 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the upper skeleton of the subframe to the lower connecting bracket of the subframeM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the upper skeleton of the subframe to the lower connecting bracket of the subframeM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

8.3 Subframe Device2810· 2g

8.3.1 Specifications

8.3.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1797

8.3.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.3.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Middle Skeleton_Sub Frame 5. Sub-frame positioning bolt 14×78 in new energy vehicles 2. Brkt-Connection Subframe Lor Frt 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Brkt-Connection Subframe Lor Rr 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut

1. Middle Skeleton_Sub Frame 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Nut 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Hexagon Flange Bolt 8. Upr Mounting Bracket-Frt Damper Lh 15. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Upr Mounting Bracket-Frt Damper Rh 16. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Mounting Plate-Front Spring Upr Lh 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Mounting Plate-Front Spring Upr Rh

Figure p1798
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
Fixed bolts connecting the integrated framework and frame assemblyM1288.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs)
Fixed bolts connecting the fixed support to the frameM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Fixed bolts connecting the integrated framework and fixed bracketM1288.5 +/- 6 (ft lbs)

8.4 Rear Integrated Frame Device2811· 2g

8.4.1 Specifications

8.4.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1800

8.4.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.4.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Outer Overiap Casting 2 8. Intermediate Overiap Casting 2 2. Integrated Framework 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Intermediate Overiap Casting 3 10. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Outer Overiap Casting 1 5. Intermediate Overiap Casting 4 12. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Intermediate Overiap Casting 1

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the front walking platform and the frame assemblyM1037 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts between the rear walkway decorative panel and the frame assemblyM811 +/- 2 (ft lbs)

8.5 Walkway Plate Device2812· 3g

8.5.1 Specifications

8.5.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1802

8.5.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.5.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

Figure p1803

1. Fixed Bracket for Catwalk Plate In New Energy Vehicles 6. Rear Trim Panel of Catwalk Plate In New Energy Vehicles 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 3. Front Walking Platform 8. Hexagon Flange Nut 4. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 9. No Stepping Warning Label 5. Fixed Bracket 2 For Catwalk Plate In New Energy Vehicles

Figure p1803

8.5.3 Dismantling and Installation

8.5.3.1 Replacement of Front Walking Platform

Removal Procedures 1 Remove the walking platform rear trim panel. 2 Remove 4fixing bolts of the front walking platform. 3 Remove the front walking platform.

caution
1. Due to the heavy weight of the front walking platform, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.
2. Just loosen the two fixing bolts in the middle. there is no need to remove them completely.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the front walking platform to the mounting position.

caution
1. Due to the heavy weight of the front walking platform, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.
2. Install the fixing brackets first before installing the front walking platform, and tighten the two fixing bolts in the middle.

2 Install 4fixing bolts of the front walking platform.

Torque:37 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

3 Install the walking platform rear trim panel.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the upper swing arm assembly and the upper frame of the subframeM20420 +/- 22 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing bolts connecting the lower arm assembly and the frame on the subframeM20420 +/- 22 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing nut connecting the front air spring assembly and the mounting plate on the front springM1240.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the front air spring assembly and the left steering knuckle bracket assemblyM18199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the front shock absorber assembly to the lower mounting bracket of the front shock absorberM1666 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the front shock absorber assembly and the mounting bracket on the front shock absorberM1666 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the front brake assembly and the steering knuckleM20405 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the upper end of the steering knuckle and the left steering knuckle bracket assemblyM40800 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the lower end of the steering knuckle and the left steering knuckle bracket assemblyM4089 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs
Wheel hub flange fixing boltM16243 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the brake chamber to the front brake assemblyM16133 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the steering arm and the steering knuckleM22627 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the steering arm and the tie rodM24254 +/- 11 (ft lbs)

8.6 Front Suspension Device2901

8.6.1 Specifications

8.6.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the wheel hub bearing unit and the steering knuckleM45442.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
Upper end cover and steering knuckle/147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Lower end cover steering knuckle/147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Brake system parameters
ItemUnit AdjustmentNumerical ValueRemark
Brake lining - outside - newmm31Disc
Minimum thickness of brake lining - outsidemm11Disc
Brake lining - inside - newmm30Disc
Minimum thickness of brake lining - insidemm10Disc
Brake caliper typemmFloatingDisc
Thickness of brake disc - newmm45Disc
Scrap thickness of brake discmm37Disc

8.6.1.2 Technical Parameters

Figure p1806

8.6.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.6.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Left Front Wheel End Assy 6. Upper Swing Arm Mounting Bolt(Rear) 2. Front Shock Absorber 7. Inner Pivot Nut 3. Front Airspring 8. Nut M12x1.5 (Spiralock) In New Energy Vehicles 4. Right Front Wheel End Assy 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Upper Swing Arm Mounting Bolt(Rear) 10. Nut M20x1.5 (Spiralock)

11. Flange Bolt 12. Hub Flange Assembly

Figure p1807

13. Brake Caliper Assy-Lh Frt 16. Brake Bolts 14. Brake Disc 56. Brake Caliper Assy-Rh Frt 15. Brake Chamber

Figure p1808

17. Snap Ring 19. Stop Washer 18. Hub Lock Nut 20. Hub Bearing Units

Figure p1809

21. Limit Screw And Nut 29. Kingpin 22. Steering Knuckle 30. Sealing Rings 23. ABS Sensor 31. Spherical Bearings 24. SensorAbs Sensor Bushing 32. Lower O-Ring 25. Upper End Cap 33. Lower End Cap 26. Upper O-Ring 34. Steering Arm_Left 27. Kingpin Lock Nut 35. Hexagon Flange Bolt 28. Thrust Bearings 57. Right Steering Arm

Figure p1810

36. Stabilizer Rod Tie Rod Support Fixing Nut 43. Outer Pivot Self-Aligning Washer In New Energy Vehicles 37. Lower Mounting Bracket_Shock Absorber 44. Upper Arm_Left 38. Hexagon Flange Bolt 45. Swing Arm Assy-Lh Lor 39. Knuckle Carrier-Lh 46. Outer Bearing Assembly of Swing Arm In New Energy Vehicles 40. Outer Pivot_Lower Arm 58. Right Steering Knuckle Bracket Assembly In New Rnergy Vehicles 41. Damper Bracket Fixing Bolt 59. Swing Arm - Right 42. Kingpin Lock Nut 60. Swing Arm Assy-Lor Rh

Figure p1811

47. Snap Ring 49. Left Upper Swing Arm Body In New Energy Vehicles 48. Ball Joint Bushing In New Energy Vehicles

Figure p1812

47. Snap Ring 50. Left Lower Swing Arm Body In New Energy Vehicles 48. Ball Joint Bushing In New Energy Vehicles

Figure p1813

51. Brake Chamber Fixing Nut In New Energy Vehicles 54. Friction Plate 52. Brake Chamber Gasket In New Energy Vehicles 55. Left Front Brake Caliper Body 53. Brake Chamber Body In New Energy Vehicles 61. Brake Caliper Assy-Rh Frt

Figure p1814
Figure p1815

8.6.3 Dismantling and Installation

8.6.3.1 Replacement of Brake Disc

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left). 8 Remove the left front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake disc (left).

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the brake disc (left), it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.

Installation Procedures

Figure p1816

1 Install the brake disc (left).

caution
Due to the heavy weight of brake disc (left), it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.

2 Install the hub flange assembly (left). 3 Install the left front brake assembly. 4 Install the brake chamber (left). 5 Install the guide wheel (left). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

8.6.3.2 Replacement of Left Front Brake Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left).

8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left front brake assembly. 9 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the left front brake assembly, and remove the left front brake assembly.

Figure p1817
Figure p1817
Figure p1817
Figure p1818
Figure p1818

Installation Procedures 1 Move the left front brake assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the left front brake assembly.

Torque: 406 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left front brake assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the brake chamber (left). 5 Install the guide wheel (left). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

8.6.3.3 Replacement of Friction Plate

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (left).

3 Remove 1 fixing pin of the friction plate (left) cover plate, and open the friction plate (left) cover plate. 4 Remove the friction plate (left). Installation Procedures

Figure p1820
Figure p1820
Figure p1821
Figure p1821

1 Install the friction plate (left). 2 Close the friction plate (left) cover plate, and install 1 fixing pin of the friction plate (left) cover plate. 3 Install the guide wheel (left). 4 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.6.3.4 Replacement of Left Front Brake Body

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle.

6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left). 8 Remove the friction plate (left). 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the left front brake body. 10 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the left front brake body and remove the left front brake body.

Figure p1822
Figure p1823
Figure p1823

Installation Procedures 1 Move the left front brake body to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the left front brake body.

Torque: 405 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the left front brake body.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the friction plate (left). 5 Install the left front brake assembly. 6 Install the brake chamber (left). 7 Install the guide wheel (left). 8 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

8.6.3.5 Replacement of Hub Bearing Unit

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door.

3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left). 8 Remove the left front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (left) . 10 Remove the brake disc (left). 11 Remove the circlip. 12 Remove 1 lock nut of the hub bearing unit (left). 13 Remove the hub bearing unit (left). Installation Procedures

Figure p1825
Figure p1825
Figure p1826
Figure p1826

1 Move the hub bearing unit (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 lock nut of the hub bearing unit (left).

Torque:442.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

3 Install the circlip. 4 Install the brake disc (left). 5 Install the hub flange assembly (left) . 6 Install the left front brake assembly. 7 Install the brake chamber (left). 8 Install the guide wheel (left). 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

8.6.3.6 Replacement of Steering Knuckle

Removal Procedures

1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the brake chamber (left). 8 Remove the left front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake disc (left). 11 Remove the hub bearing unit (left). 12 Remove the left steering arm. 13 Remove the ABS sensor. 14 Remove the upper end cover.

Figure p1827

15 Remove the lower end cover. 16 Remove 1 fixing nut at the upper end of the steering knuckle (left). 17 Remove 1 fixing nut at the lower end of the steering knuckle (left).

Figure p1828
Figure p1828
Figure p1828
Figure p1829

18 Remove the kingpin. 19 Remove the steering knuckle (left) and sealing ring. Installation Procedures 1 Press the thrust bearing and joint bearing into the steering knuckle hole, and then install the sealing ring into the steering knuckle. 2 Install the kingpin and connect the knuckle carrier.

Figure p1829
Figure p1844
Figure p1844
Figure p1844
Figure p1830
Figure p1830
Figure p1830

3 Install 1 fixing nut at the upper end of the steering knuckle (left).

Torque: 590 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

4 Install 1 fixing nut at the lower end of the steering knuckle (left).

Torque: 59 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)

5 Install the lower end cover.

Torque: 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Figure p1845
Figure p1831

6 Install the upper end cover.

Torque: 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

7 Install the ABS sensor. 8 Install the left steering arm. 9 Install the hub bearing unit (left). 10 Install the brake disc (left). 11 Install the hub flange assembly (left). 12 Install the left front brake assembly. 13 Install the brake chamber (left). 14 Install the guide wheel (left). 15 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.

8.6.3.7 Replacement of Left Lower Swing Arm Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the front spring left upper mounting plate.

8 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. 9 Remove the front air spring assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake chamber (left). 11 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (left). 12 Remove the left front wheel end assembly. 13 Remove the swing arm outside pivot (left). 14 Remove the left lower swing arm assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left lower swing arm assembly. 2 Install the swing arm outside pivot (left). 3 Install the left front wheel end assembly. 4 Install the front shock absorber assembly (left). 5 Install the brake chamber (left). 6 Install the front air spring assembly (left).

Figure p1832

7 Install the pressure sensor assembly. 8 Install the front spring left upper mounting plate. 9 Install the guide wheel (left). 10 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

Figure p1833

8.6.3.8 Replacement of Right Lower Swing Arm Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the front spring right upper mounting plate. 8 Remove the front air spring assembly (right). 9 Remove the brake chamber (right). 10 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (right). 11 Remove the right front wheel end assembly. 12 Remove the swing arm outside pivot (right). 13 Remove the right lower swing arm assembly.

Figure p1834

Installation Procedures 1 Install the right lower swing arm assembly. 2 Install the swing arm outside pivot (right). 3 Install the right front wheel end assembly. 4 Install the front shock absorber assembly (right). 5 Install the brake chamber (right). 6 Install the front air spring assembly (right). 7 Install the front spring right upper mounting plate. 8 Install the guide wheel (right). 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

8.6.3.9 Replacement of Brake Chamber

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 3 Remove the guide wheel (left).

4 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the brake chamber (left). 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the brake chamber (left). 6 Remove the brake chamber (left). Installation Procedures

Figure p1835
Figure p1835
Figure p1836
Figure p1836

1 Move the brake chamber (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the brake chamber (left).

Torque: 133 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 1 air pipe of the brake chamber (left). 4 Install the guide wheel (left). 5 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.6.3.10 Replacement of Left Upper Swing Arm Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the front spring left upper mounting plate. 8 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. 9 Remove the front air spring assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake chamber (left). 11 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (left). 12 Remove the left front wheel end assembly. 13 Remove the swing arm outside pivot (left). 14 Remove the left upper swing arm assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Install the left upper swing arm assembly. 2 Install the swing arm outside pivot (left). 3 Install the left front wheel end assembly.

Figure p1837

4 Install the front shock absorber assembly (left). 5 Install the brake chamber (left). 6 Install the front air spring assembly (left). 7 Install the pressure sensor assembly. 8 Install the front spring left upper mounting plate. 9 Install the guide wheel (left). 10 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to perform four-wheel alignment.
Figure p1838

8.6.3.11 Replacement of Left Steering Arm

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (left). 3 Remove 1 cotter pin at the connection between the tie rod (left) and the left steering arm.

4 Remove 1 fixing nut at the connection between the tie rod (left) and the left steering arm to separate the tie rod (left). 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the left steering arm. 6 Remove the left steering arm. Installation Procedures

Figure p1839
Figure p1839
Figure p1840
Figure p1840
Figure p1840

1 Move the left steering arm to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the left steering arm.

Torque:627 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

3 Install 1 fixing nut at the connection between the tie rod (left) and the left steering arm.

Torque:254.5 +/- 11 (ft lbs)
Figure p1850

4 Install 1 cotter pin at the connection between the tie rod (left) and the left steering arm.

5 Install the guide wheel (left). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

Figure p1841

8.6.3.12 Replacement of Steering Knuckle

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Remove the right front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (left). 10 Remove the brake disc (right). 11 Remove the hub bearing unit (right). 12 Remove the right steering arm. 13 Remove the ABS sensor. 14 Remove the upper end cover.

15 Remove the lower end cover. 16 Remove 1 fixing nut at the upper end of the steering knuckle (right). 17 Remove 1 fixing nut at the lower end of the steering knuckle (right).

Figure p1842
Figure p1842
Figure p1842
Figure p1843

18 Remove the spindle. 19 Remove the steering knuckle (right) and sealing ring. Installation Procedures 1 Press the thrust bearing and joint bearing into the steering knuckle hole, and then install the sealing ring into the steering knuckle. 2 Install the kingpin and connect the knuckle carrier.

Figure p1843

3 Install 1 fixing nut at the upper end of the steering knuckle (right).

Torque: 627 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

4 Install 1 fixing nut at the lower end of the steering knuckle (right).

Torque: 59 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)

5 Install the lower end cover.

Torque: 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

6 Install the upper end cover.

Torque: 147.5 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

7 Install the ABS sensor. 8 Install the right steering arm. 9 Install the hub bearing unit (right). 10 Install the brake disc (right). 11 Install the hub flange assembly (left). 12 Install the right front brake assembly. 13 Install the brake chamber (right). 14 Install the guide wheel (right). 15 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 16 Connect the battery negative cable. 17 Close the front flip cover plate. 18 Close the door.

8.6.3.13 Replacement of Brake Chamber

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 3 Remove the guide wheel (right).

4 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the brake chamber (right). 5 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the brake chamber (right). 6 Remove the brake chamber (right). Installation Procedures

Figure p1846
Figure p1846
Figure p1847
Figure p1847

1 Move the brake chamber (right) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the brake chamber (right).

Torque:133 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 1 air pipe of the brake chamber (right). 4 Install the guide wheel (right). 5 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.6.3.14 Replacement of Right Steering Arm

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (right).

3 Remove 1 cotter pin at the connection between the tie rod (right) and the right steering arm. 4 Remove 1 fixing nut at the connection between the tie rod (right) and the right steering arm to separate the tie rod (right). 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the right steering arm. 6 Remove the right steering arm.

Figure p1848
Figure p1848
Figure p1848
Figure p1849
Figure p1849

Installation Procedures 1 Move the right steering arm to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the right steering arm.

Torque:627 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

3 Install 1 fixing nut at the connection between the tie rod (right) and the right steering arm.

Torque: 255 +/- 11 (ft lbs)

4 Install 1 cotter pin at the connection between the tie rod (right) and the right steering arm. 5 Install the guide wheel (right). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.6.3.15 Replacement of Brake Disc

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Remove the right front brake assembly.

Figure p1851

9 Remove the hub flange assembly (right) . 10 Remove the brake disc (right).

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the brake disc (right), it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.

Installation Procedures 1 Install the brake disc (right).

caution
Due to the heavy weight of brake disc (right), it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.

2 Install the hub flange assembly (right). 3 Install the right front brake assembly. 4 Install the brake chamber (right). 5 Install the guide wheel (right). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

Figure p1851

8.6.3.16 Replacement of Right Front Brake Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right front brake assembly. 9 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the right front brake assembly, and remove the right front brake assembly.

Figure p1852
Figure p1852
Figure p1853

Installation Procedures 1 Move the right front brake assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the right front brake assembly.

Torque:406 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
Figure p1853

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right front brake assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the brake chamber (right). 5 Install the guide wheel (right). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

8.6.3.17 Replacement of Friction Plate

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (right).

3 Remove 1 fixing pin of the friction plate (right) cover plate, and open the friction plate (right) cover plate. 4 Remove the friction plate (right). Installation Procedures

Figure p1855
Figure p1855
Figure p1856
Figure p1856

1 Install the friction plate (right). 2 Close the friction plate (right) cover plate, and install 1 fixing pin of the friction plate (right) cover plate. 3 Install the guide wheel (right). 4 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.6.3.18 Replacement of Right Front Brake Body

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Remove the friction plate (right). 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the right front brake body. 10 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the right front brake body and remove the right front brake body.

Figure p1858
Figure p1858

Installation Procedures 1 Move the right front brake body to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the right front brake body.

Torque: 405.5 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the right front brake body.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the friction plate (right). 5 Install the brake chamber (right). 6 Install the guide wheel (right). 7 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

8.6.3.19 Replacement of Hub Bearing Unit

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate.

4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the brake chamber (right). 8 Remove the right front brake assembly. 9 Remove the hub flange assembly (right). 10 Remove the brake disc (right). 11 Remove the circlip. 12 Remove 1 lock nut of the hub bearing unit (right). 13 Remove the hub bearing unit (right). Installation Procedures

Figure p1860
Figure p1860
Figure p1861
Figure p1861

1 Move the hub bearing unit (right) to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 lock nut of the hub bearing unit (right).

Torque: 442.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

3 Install the circlip. 4 Install the brake disc (right). 5 Install the hub flange assembly (right). 6 Install the right front brake assembly. 7 Install the brake chamber (right). 8 Install the guide wheel (right). 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

8.6.3.20 Replacement of Right Upper Swing Arm Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (right). 7 Remove the front spring right upper mounting plate. 8 Remove the front air spring assembly (right). 9 Remove the brake chamber (right). 10 Remove the front shock absorber assembly (right). 11 Remove the right front wheel end assembly. 12 Remove the swing arm outside pivot (right). 13 Remove the right upper swing arm assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p1862
Figure p1863

1 Install the right upper swing arm assembly. 2 Install the swing arm outside pivot (right). 3 Install the right front wheel end assembly. 4 Install the front shock absorber assembly (right). 5 Install the brake chamber (right). 6 Install the front air spring assembly (right). 7 Install the front spring right upper mounting plate. 8 Install the guide wheel (right). 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to perform four-wheel alignment.

8.6.3.21 Replacement of Front Air Spring Assembly (left)

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Remove the guide wheel (left). 7 Remove the front spring left upper mounting plate. 8 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. 9 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the front air spring assembly (left). 10 Remove 1 fixing nut at the upper part of the front air spring assembly (left).

Figure p1864
Figure p1864
Figure p1865

11 Remove 1 fixing nut at the lower part of the front air spring assembly (left). 12 Remove the front air spring assembly (left). Installation Procedures 1 Move the front air spring assembly (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut at the lower part of the front air spring assembly (left).

Torque: 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
Figure p1865
Figure p1866
Figure p1866

3 Install 1 fixing nut at the upper part of the front air spring assembly (left).

Torque:40.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

4 Connect 1 air pipe of the front air spring assembly (left). 5 Install the pressure sensor assembly. 6 Install the front spring left upper mounting plate. 7 Install the guide wheel (left). 8 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

8.6.3.22 Replacement of Front Shock Absorber Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the front shock absorber assembly, and remove the front shock absorber assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p1867
Figure p1867
Figure p1868
Figure p1868

1 Move the front shock absorber assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the front shock absorber assembly.

Torque:66 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)

3 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the rear air spring assembly to the upper bracket of the air springM1240.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the rear air spring assembly and the balance beamM18199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the bracket on the air spring to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Fixed nut for balancing beam and integrated axle rear axle connectionM22516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
Fixed bolts connecting the pipe beam and thrust rod bracketM16228.5 +/- 84.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the pipe beam and the thrust rod bracketM16228.5 +/- 84.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the thrust rod bracket to the frame assemblyM16228.5 +/- 84.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the X-shaped control arm assembly to the pipe beamM22516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing nut for the X-shaped control arm assembly and the integrated axle rear axle connectionM22516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixed nut connecting the X-shaped control arm assembly and the integrated axle middle axleM22516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing bolt connecting the shock absorber assembly (rear) and the balance beamM20516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing bolt connecting the shock absorber assembly (rear) to the shock absorber bracketM20516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing nut connecting the shock absorber assembly (rear) to the shock absorber bracketM20516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing bolts connecting the shock absorber bracket to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the shock absorber bracket to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

8.7 Rear Suspension Device2911· 7g

8.7.1 Specifications

8.7.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the limit buffer block assembly and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the limit buffer block assembly and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the longitudinal thrust rod assembly and the thrust rod bracketM20516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing nut connecting the longitudinal thrust rod assembly and the thrust rod bracketM20516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing bolts connecting the longitudinal thrust rod assembly and the balance beamM20516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
The fixing bolts connecting the longitudinal thrust rod assembly and the balance beamM20516 +/- 37 (ft lbs) (Loctite 680)
Figure p1871

8.7.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.7.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Bush 4. Nut M22x1.5(Spiralock) 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt M22x1.5 5. Double Stud M22x2.5x1.5 3. X-Link Bracket Assy

6. Trailing Arm Assy 11. Nut M20x1.5(Spiralock) 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Trailing Arm Bravket 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 9. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

Figure p1872

4. Nut M22x1.5(Spiralock) 19. U-Bolt1 6. Trailing Arm Assy 20. U-Bolt2 11. Nut M20x1.5(Spiralock) 21. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Axle Pressure Equalizer-Left 22. Equalizer Pin 16. Axle Pressure Equalizer-Right 23. Double Stud M18x2x1.5 17. Shock Absorber Lower Gasket 24. Nut M18x1.5(Spiralock) 18. Rear Shock Absorber Assy 25. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1873

26. Air Spring-260 32. Hexagon Flange Bolt 27. Air Spring Mounting Bracket 4 33. Air Spring Mounting Bracket 2 28. Hexagon Flange Bolt 34. Air Spring Mounting Bracket 1 29. Hexagon Flange Bolt 35. Buffering Stopper Assy 30. Air Spring Mounting Bracket 3 36. Shock Absorber Bracket 31. Air Spring-280 37. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal

Figure p1874

11. Nut M20x1.5(Spiralock) 24. Nut M18x1.5(Spiralock) 18. Rear Shock Absorber Assy 38. Nut M12x1.5(Spiralock) 23. Double Stud M18x2x1.5 39. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1875
Figure p1876
Figure p1876

8.7.3 Dismantling and Installation

8.7.3.1 Replacement of Rear Air Spring Assembly - 260

Removal Procedures 1 Turn off the vehicle power and place the parking wedge to prevent the vehicle from rolling. 2 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 3 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 4 Disconnect 1 pipeline of the rear air spring assembly - 260. 5 Remove 1 plug of the rear air spring assembly - 260.

6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 260. 7 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 260. 8 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 260. Installation Procedures

Figure p1877
Figure p1877
Figure p1878
Figure p1878
Figure p1878

1 Move the rear air spring assembly - 260 to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 260.

Torque: 40.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

3 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 260.

Torque: 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)

4 Install 1 plug of the rear air spring assembly - 260.

Torque:7.5 - 12 (ft lbs)
Figure p1879

5 Connect 1 pipeline of the rear air spring assembly - 260. 6 Install the drive wheel (right front). 7 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

Figure p1879

8.7.3.2 Replacement of Rear Air Spring Assembly - 280

Removal Procedures 1 Turn off the vehicle power and place the parking wedge to prevent the vehicle from rolling. 2 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 3 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 4 Disconnect 1 pipeline of the rear air spring assembly - 280.

5 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 280. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 280. 7 Remove the rear air spring assembly - 280. Installation Procedures

Figure p1880
Figure p1880
Figure p1881
Figure p1881
Figure p1881

1 Move the rear air spring assembly - 280 to the mounting position. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 280.

Torque: 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)

3 Install 1 fixing nut of the rear air spring assembly - 280.

Torque:40.5 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

4 Connect 1 pipeline of the rear air spring assembly - 280.

5 Install the drive wheel (right front). 6 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

Figure p1882
Figure p1882

8.7.3.3 Replacement of Balance Beam (left)

Removal Procedures 1 Turn off the vehicle power and place the parking wedge to prevent the vehicle from rolling. 2 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 3 Loosen the air spring air pipe joint and exhaust the air inside. 4 Remove the drive wheel (rear left). 5 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 6 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 7 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 8 Remove 1 fixing bolt and nut of the balance beam (left). 9 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the balance beam (left). 10 Remove the balance beam (left).

Figure p1883
Figure p1883

Installation Procedures 1 Move the balance beam (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the balance beam (left).

Torque: 199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)

3 Install 1 fixing bolt and nut of the balance beam (left).

Torque: 405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

4 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 5 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 6 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 7 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 8 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

8.7.3.4 Replacement of Balance Beam (right)

Removal Procedures 1 Turn off the vehicle power and place the parking wedge to prevent the vehicle from rolling. 2 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 3 Loosen the air spring air pipe joint and exhaust the air inside.

4 Remove the drive wheel (rear right). 5 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). 6 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 7 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. 8 Remove 1 fixing bolt and nut of the balance beam (right). 9 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the balance beam (right). 10 Remove the balance beam (right). Installation Procedures

Figure p1884
Figure p1884
Figure p1885
Figure p1885

1 Move the balance beam (right) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the balance beam (right).

Torque:199 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)

3 Install 1 fixing bolt and nut of the balance beam (right).

Torque:405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

4 Install the rear spring U-bolt. 5 Install the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 6 Install the shock absorber assembly (rear). 7 Install the drive wheel (rear right). 8 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

8.7.3.5 Replacement of X-shaped Control Arm Assembly (front)

Removal Procedures 1 Removal the fifth wheel assembly. 2 Remove the corrugated plate.

3 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 4 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). 5 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (front). Installation Procedures

Figure p1886
Figure p1886
Figure p1887
Figure p1887

1 Move the X-shaped control arm assembly (front) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (front).

Torque:516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
caution
Simply screw in the thread and tighten it after the other end is secured.

3 Install 4 fixing nuts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (front).

Torque:516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

4 Install the corrugated plate. 5 Install the fifth wheel assembly.

8.7.3.6 Replacement of X-shaped Control Arm Assembly (rear)

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the dual channel module assembly.

5 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). 7 Remove the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear). Installation Procedures

Figure p1888
Figure p1888
Figure p1889
Figure p1889

1 Move the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear).

Torque: 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
caution
Simply screw in the thread and tighten it after the other end is secured.

3 Install 4 fixing nuts of the X-shaped control arm assembly (rear).

Torque: 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

4 Install the dual channel module assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

8.7.3.7 Replacement of Shock Absorber Assembly (rear)

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (front left).

Figure p1890

3 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the shock absorber assembly (rear). 4 Remove the shock absorber assembly (rear). Installation Procedures 1 Move the shock absorber assembly (rear) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the shock absorber assembly (rear).

Torque:516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

3 Install the drive wheel (left front). 4 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

Figure p1890

8.7.3.8 Replacement of Shock Absorber Bracket

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (front left).

3 Remove 1 fixing bolt and nut connecting the shock absorber bracket to the shock absorber assembly (rear), and separate the shock absorber assembly (rear). 4 Remove 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the shock absorber bracket. 5 Remove the shock absorber bracket. Installation Procedures

Figure p1891
Figure p1891
Figure p1892
Figure p1892

1 Move the shock absorber bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the shock absorber bracket.

Torque: 155 +/- 14.5 (ft lbs)

3 Install 1 fixing bolt and nut connecting the shock absorber bracket to the shock absorber assembly (rear), and separate the shock absorber assembly (rear).

Torque:405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

4 Install the drive wheel (left front). 5 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

8.7.3.9 Replacement of Limit Buffer Assembly

Removal Procedures

Figure p1893

1 Remove 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the limit buffer assembly. 2 Remove the limit buffer assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the limit buffer assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the limit buffer assembly.

Torque:155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Figure p1893

8.7.3.10 Replacement of Longitudinal Thrust Rod Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (front left).

Figure p1894

3 Remove 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. 4 Remove the longitudinal thrust rod assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the longitudinal thrust rod assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts and nuts of the longitudinal thrust rod assembly.

Torque:405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

3 Install the drive wheel (left front). 4 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

Figure p1894

8.7.3.11 Replacement of Thrust Bar Bracket

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (rear left).

3 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts connecting the thrust bar bracket to the thrust bar. 4 Remove 15 fixing bolts and nuts of the thrust bar bracket. 5 Remove the thrust bar bracket. Installation Procedures

Figure p1895
Figure p1895
Figure p1896
Figure p1896

1 Move the thrust bar bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 15 fixing bolts and nuts of the thrust bar bracket.

Torque:234.5 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)

3 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts connecting the thrust bar bracket to the thrust bar.

Torque: 405.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

4 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 5 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

8.7.3.12 Replacement of Rear Spring U-bolt

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (rear left).

Figure p1897

3 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the rear spring U-bolt. 4 Remove the rear spring U-bolt. Installation Procedures 1 Move the rear spring U-bolt to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the rear spring U-bolt.

Torque: 516 +/- 37 (ft lbs)
Figure p1945
Figure p1944
Figure p1944
Figure p1942
Figure p1942
Figure p1940
Figure p1939
Figure p1937
Figure p1936
Figure p1936
Figure p1935
Figure p1933
Figure p1933

3 Install the drive wheel (rear left). 4 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

Figure p1897
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the airbag solenoid valve bracket to the frame assemblyM14103 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the height sensor bracket to the frame assemblyM14103 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the airbag solenoid valve assembly to the airbag solenoid valve bracketM818.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the airbag solenoid va The fixing bolt connecting the height sensor assembly and the height sensor bracketlve assembly to the airbag solenoid valve bracketM818.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the remote control assembly and the white body assembly assemblyM68 +/- .75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the remote control bracket to the right storage box assemblyM68 +/- .75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the height sensor assembly and the swing rodM68 +/- .75 (ft lbs)
NG8 nut seat on airbag solenoid valve tracheal interfaceM167.5 - 12 (ft lbs)
NG8 nut seat on the air spring assembly air pipe interfaceM167.5 - 12 (ft lbs)
Pressure sensor on the air spring assembly air pipe interfaceM1618.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the air suspension controller assembly to the floor sheet metalM68 +/- .75 (ft lbs)
The direct head connecting the airbag solenoid valve assembly and the overflow valve assemblyM227.5 - 12 (ft lbs)

8.8 ECU Actuator of Air Suspension2950· 2g

8.8.1 Specifications

8.8.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1899

8.8.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.8.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Remote Control Stand 14. Pendulum Bar 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 15. Connecting Rod 3. Remote Control Assy 16. Pressure Sensor Assy 4. Direct Head 17. Nut Seat NG8 5. Hexagon Nut_Type 1 18. Snap Ring NG8 6. Airbag Solenoid Valve Assy 19. Washer Ng8 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 20. Plug 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 21. Air Suspension Controller Assy 9. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 23. Height Sensor Assy 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 24. Distance Sensor Bracket 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt 26. Hexagon Flange Bolt 12. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 28. Brkt-Air Bag Solenoid Valve 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt

4. Direct Head 16. Pressure Sensor Assy 5. Hexagon Nut_Type 1 17. Nut Seat NG8 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 18. Snap Ring NG8 9. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 19. Washer Ng8 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 24. Distance Sensor Bracket 11. Hexagon Flange Bolt 25. Pendulum Bar 12 Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 26. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Hexagon Flange Bolt 27. Airbag Solenoid Valve Assy 14. Pendulum Bar 28. Brkt-Air Bag Solenoid Valve 15. Connecting Rod

Figure p1900

4. Direct Head 19. Washer Ng8 17. Nut Seat NG8 20. Plug 18. Snap Ring NG8 22. Solenoid Modulator Valve Assy

Figure p1901

8.8.3 System Schematic Diagram

8.8.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U152017Over-voltageRefer to ECAS Power Fault
U152016Under-voltage
U15CD08CCVS Communication TimeoutRefer to ECAS Communication Fault
U15D408TCO1 Communication Timeout
U15DB08ASC2 Communication Timeout
U15CE08AIR1 Communication Timeout
C12FE42ECU general memory failureRefer to ECAS Internal Fault
C12FE49VFF power failure
C121011Front height sensor short to gndRefer to Front Axle Height Sensor Fault
C121015Front height sensor short to battery
C121014Front height sensor out of range
C121311Rear left height sensor short to gndRefer to Rear Axle Left Height Sensor Fault
C121315Rear left height sensor short to battery
C121314Rear left height sensor out of range
C121211Rear right height sensor short to gndRefer to Rear Axle Right Height Sensor Fault
C121215Rear right height sensor short to battery
C121214Rear right height sensor out of range

8.8.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

8.8.4.1 Diagnostic Description

Before diagnosing the malfunction of the air suspension electronic control unit actuator, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the air suspension electronic control unit actuator before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a malfunction occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the air suspension electronic control unit execution device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and

avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 8.8.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the air suspension electronic control unit execution device system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the air suspension electronic control unit execution device system.

• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.8.4.3 DTC Confirmation

1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 8.8.4.4 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

ECAS

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
C121611Front pressure sensor short to gndRefer to Front Axle Pressure Sensor Fault
C121612Front pressure sensor short to vcc
C121613Front pressure Sensor open
C121911Rear Left pressure sensor short to gndRefer to Left Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault
C121912Rear Left pressure sensor short to vcc
C121913Rear Left pressure Sensor open
C121811Rear Right pressure sensor short to gndRefer to Right Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault
C121812Rear Right pressure sensor short to vcc
C121813Rear Right pressure sensor open
C120111Front solenoid vavle short to gndRefer to Front Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault
C120112Front solenoid vavle short to vcc
C120113Front solenoid vavle open
C120411Rear left solenoid vavle short to gndRefer to Rear Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault
C120412Rear left solenoid vavle short to vcc
C120413Rear left solenoid vavle open
C120711Rear central solenoid vavle short to gnd
C120712Rear central solenoid vavle short to vcc
C120713Rear central solenoid vavle open
C120311Rear right solenoid vavle short to gnd
C120312Rear right solenoid vavle short to vcc
C120313Rear right solenoid vavle open
C122E94Pressure power failureRefer to Pressure Sensor Power Fault
C122212solenoid valve power short to vccRefer to Suspension Solenoid Valve Power Fault
C122211solenoid valve power short to gnd
C122F12RCU power short circuitRefer to Remote Control Fault
C123013RCU control signal not issued

8.8.4.5 ECAS Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
U152017Over-voltageOver-voltage Timeout 2sIgnition ON1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.ECAS
U152016Under-voltageUnder-voltage Timeout 2sIgnition ON

2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.5 ECAS Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
U15CD08CCVS Communicati- on TimeoutCAN message CCVS Communication Timeout 8sIgnition ON1. Wiring harness 2.ECAS
U15D408TCO1 Communicati- on TimeoutCAN message TCO1 Communication Timeout 8sIgnition ON
U15DB08ASC2 Communicati- on TimeoutCAN message ASC2 Communication Timeout 8sIgnition ON
U15CE08AIR1 Communicati- on TimeoutCAN message AIR1 Communication Timeout 8sIgnition ON

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides ECAS? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the ECAS power and grounding harness. Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.6 ECAS Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.6 ECAS Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C12FE42ECU general memory failureThere was one write - failure of the EEPROM during the ECU inspection processIgnition ON1.ECAS
C12FE49VFF power failureVFF power failures occurred more than three times out of five detectionsIgnition ON
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C121011Front height sensor short to gndECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle height sensor 3.ECAS
C121015Front height sensor short to batteryECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C121014Front height sensor out of rangeECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON

Step 4:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.7 ECAS Internal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 4:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.8 Front Axle Height Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.8 Front Axle Height Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle height sensor and ECAS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C121311Rear left height sensor short to gndECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON1. Wiring harness 2.Rear axle left height sensor 3.ECAS
C121315Rear left height sensor short to batteryECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C121314Rear left height sensor out of rangeECU received fault signal from rear left height sensor continually after 0.5s ,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON

Step 4:Replace the front axle height sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Height Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.9 Rear Axle Left Height Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.9 Rear Axle Left Height Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle left height sensor and ECAS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C121211Rear right height sensor short to gndECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON1. Wiring harness 2.Rear axle right height sensor 3.ECAS
C121215Rear right height sensor short to batteryECU received fault signal from front height sensor continually after 0.5s , set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C121214Rear right height sensor out of rangeECU received fault signal from rear rightheight sensor continually after 0.5s ,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON

Step 4:Replace the left rear axle height sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Height Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.10 Rear Axle Right Height Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.10 Rear Axle Right Height Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle right height sensor and ECAS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C121611Front pressure sensor short to gndPressure signal <0.14V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle pressure sensor 3.ECAS
C121612Front pressure sensor short to vccPressure signal >4.65V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C121613Front pressure Sensor open0.14V<Pressure signal <0.4V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON

Step 4:Replace the rear axle right height sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Height Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.11 Front Axle Pressure Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.11 Front Axle Pressure Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle pressure sensor and ECAS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C121911Rear Left pressure sensor short to gndPressure signal <0.14V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON1. Wiring harness 2. Left rear axle pressure sensor 3.ECAS
C121912Rear Left pressure sensor short to vccPressure signal >4.65V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C121913Rear Left pressure Sensor open0.14V<Pressure signal <0.4V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON

Step 4:Replace the front axle pressure sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.12 Left Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.12 Left Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the left rear axle pressure sensor and ECAS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C121811Rear Right pressure sensor short to gndPressure signal <0.14V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON1. Wiring harness 2. Right rear axle pressure sensor 3.ECAS
C121812Rear Right pressure sensor short to vccPressure signal >4.65V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C121813Rear Right pressure sensor open0.14V<Pressure signal <0.4V continually after 0.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON

Step 4:Replace the left rear axle pressure sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.13 Right Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.13 Right Rear Axle Pressure Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right rear axle pressure sensor and ECAS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C120111Front solenoid vavle short to gndsolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle suspension solenoid valve 3.ECAS
C120112Front solenoid vavle short to vccsolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C120113Front solenoid vavle opensolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON

Step 4:Replace the right rear axle pressure sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.14 Front Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.14 Front Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle suspension solenoid valve and ECAS. C66-2 C66-1

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C120411Rear left solenoid vavle short to gndsolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON1. Wiring harness 2.Rear axle suspension solenoid valve 3.ECAS
C120412Rear left solenoid vavle short to vccsolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C120413Rear left solenoid vavle opensolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C120711Rear central solenoid vavle short to gndsolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C120712Rear central solenoid vavle short to vccsolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C120713Rear central solenoid vavle opensolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C120311Rear right solenoid vavle short to gndsolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C120312Rear right solenoid vavle short to vccsolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON
C120313Rear right solenoid vavle opensolenoid valve control pin unexpected operation continually after 1s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON

Step 4:Replace the front axle suspension solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of Airbag Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.15 Rear Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.15 Rear Axle Suspension Solenoid Valve Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle suspension solenoid valve and ECAS. C66-2 C66-1

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C122E94Pressure power failureThere were more than three air - pressure - sensor - power - related failures in five detectionsIgnition ON1. Wiring harness 2.Pressure sensor 3.ECAS

Step 4:Replace the rear axle suspension solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of Airbag Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.16 Pressure Sensor Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.16 Pressure Sensor Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the pressure sensor and ECAS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C122212solenoid valve power short to vccThere were more than three solenoid valve short-circuit faults to the power supply in five detectionsIgnition ON1. Wiring harness 2. Suspensio- n solenoid valve 3.ECAS
C122211solenoid valve power short to gndThere were more than three solenoid - valve - to - ground short - circuit faults in five detectionsIgnition ON

Step 4:Replace the pressure sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Pressure Sensor Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.17 Suspension Solenoid Valve Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.8.4.17 Suspension Solenoid Valve Power Fault — circuit diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the suspension solenoid valve and ECAS. C66-2 C66-1

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C122F12RCU power short circuitThere were more than three RCU (Remote Control Unit) remote - control - power - supply faults in five detectionsIgnition ON1. Wiring harness 2.Remote control 3.ECAS
C123013RCU control signal not issuedECU received fault signal from RCU continually after 3.5s,set the DTC immediately.Ignition ON

Step 4:Replace the suspension solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of Airbag Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.8.4.18 Remote Control Malfunction

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the remote control and ECAS.

Step 4:Replace the remote control. Step 5:ECAS rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 6:Replace ECAS. Refer to Replacement Of Air Suspension Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

Figure p1932
Figure p1932

8.8.5 Dismantling and Installation

8.8.5.1 Replacement of Air Suspension Controller Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 5 Remove the right storage box assembly. 6 Disconnect 3 harness connectors of the air suspension controller assembly. 7 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the air suspension controller assembly. 8 Remove the air suspension controller assembly.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the air suspension controller assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the air suspension controller assembly.

Torque: (8 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 3 harness connectors of the air suspension controller assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the right storage box assembly. 5 Install the IP right upper trim panel assembly. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the air suspension controller assembly, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the height.

8.8.5.2 Replacement of Airbag Solenoid Valve Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the airbag solenoid valve assembly. 6 Disconnect 4 air pipes of the airbag solenoid valve assembly.

Figure p1934
Figure p1934

7 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the airbag solenoid valve assembly. 8 Remove the airbag solenoid valve assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the airbag solenoid valve assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the airbag solenoid valve assembly.

Torque: (103 +/- 7.5) ft lbs
Figure p1935

3 Connect 4 air pipes of the airbag solenoid valve assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the airbag solenoid valve assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

8.8.5.3 Replacement of Airbag Solenoid Valve Bracket

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate.

4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the airbag solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 6 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the airbag solenoid valve bracket. 7 Remove the airbag solenoid valve bracket. Installation Procedures 1 Move the airbag solenoid valve bracket to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the airbag solenoid valve bracket.

Torque:(18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)

3 Install the airbag solenoid valve assembly with bracket. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1937
Figure p1938

8.8.5.4 Replacement of Overflow Valve Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 7 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the overflow valve assembly.

8 Remove 2 straps of the overflow valve assembly. 9 Remove the overflow valve assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the overflow valve assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 straps of the overflow valve assembly.

Figure p1939

3 Connect 2 air pipes of the overflow valve assembly. 4 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

8.8.5.5 Replacement of Pressure Sensor Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
Figure p2072
Figure p2072

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the pressure sensor assembly. 5 Remove the pressure sensor assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p1941
Figure p1941

1 Move the pressure sensor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the pressure sensor assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

8.8.5.6 Replacement of Height Sensor Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the height sensor assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the height sensor assembly. 6 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the height sensor assembly. 7 Remove the height sensor assembly.

Figure p1943
Figure p1943
Figure p1943

Installation Procedures 1 Move the height sensor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the height sensor assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

3 Install 2 fixing bolts of the height sensor assembly.

Torque: (18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

4 Connect 1 harness connector of the height sensor assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

8.9 Wheel Device3101 / 1000· 1g

8.9.1 Quality Warranty Statement

8.9.1.1 Tire Quality Warranty Statement

Windrose warrants that its vehicles are (1) designed, built and equipped with tires that conform, at the time of sale, with requirements of vehicle manufacturers whose vehicles are designed to meet applicable 2014 and later, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and National Highway Traffic and Safety Administration greenhouse gas and fuel efficiency standards, and (2) those tires are free from defects in material and workmanship which cause the vehicle to fail to conform with the vehicle manufacturer ’ s requirements for a period of 2 years or 24,000 miles, whichever occurs first.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the wheel hub and the wheel rimM22(479 +/- 37) ft lbs
Four-wheel Alignment Parameters
ItemUnit AdjustmentNumerical Value
Kingpin inclination°7.9°±30′
Kingpin caster°2.5°±30′
Wheel camber°0.65°±30′
Front wheel toe-inmm0-1 (left/right)
Driving Tire Model
ItemAxleForm 1Form 2Form 3
Tire specificationsInput shaft12R22.5295/80R22.5315/70R22.5 Z2
Output shaft12R22.5295/80R22.5315/70R22.5 D2
3rd shaft12R22.5295/80R22.5315/70R22.5 D2
Wheel Rim Model
ItemForm 1Form 2Form 3
Rim specifications9.00×22.59.00×22.59.00×22.5
Tire Dynamic Unbalance
ItemUnit AdjustmentWheel Rim Form 1Wheel Rim Form 2
Dynamic unbalanceg≤50 (after balance)≤50 (after balance)
Tire Pressure (cold state)
WheelUnitForm 1Form 2Form 3
Front wheelspsi135 +/- 3 (psi)135 +/- 3 (psi)135 +/- 3 (psi)
Rear wheelspsi135 +/- 3 (psi)135 +/- 3 (psi)135 +/- 3 (psi)
NameParameter
Wheel radial runout≤0.5mm
Wheel face flatness≤0.1mm

8.9.2 Specifications

8.9.2.1 Fastener Specifications

8.9.2.2 Technical Parameters

📝 Note
Note: The camber and toe-in of the wheels are important parameters that shall be prioritized. The difference in left and right

angles shall be ≤ 0.5 °, and the toe-in of the left and right wheels shall be ensured.

Figure p1948

8.9.3 Decomposition Diagram

8.9.3.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Wheel Nut (Front) In New Energy Vehicles 6. Tyre Blowout Emergency Safety Device In New Energy Vehicles 2. Wheel Nut (rear) In New Energy Vehicles 7. Tyre Blowout Emergency Identification (Indoor) In New Energy Vehicles 3. Tire Assembly - Guide Wheel 8. Tyre Blowout Emergency Identification (wheel side) In New Energy Vehicles 4. Tire Assembly - Drive Wheel 9. Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor 5. Wheel Assembly In New Energy Vehicles 10. Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor

8.9.4 Inspect

8.9.4.1 Inspection of Tire

Inspection of Air Pressure

The tire pressure shall comply with the specified value in the user manual. Regularly check the tire pressure, as high or low pressure can cause abnormal tire wear. If the air pressure is too high, it will cause excessive wear in the middle of the tire; If the air pressure is too low, it will cause excessive wear on both sides of the tire. In addition, incorrect tire pressure can also cause reduced ride comfort, heavy steering, braking deviation, and other faults.

Inspection of Crack and Pattern

Regularly inspect the surface of the tire for defects such as cracks and deformations, and if any, replace the tire promptly. Regularly inspect the surface of the tire for defects such as cracks and deformations, and if any, replace the tire promptly. Tire with the pattern wear reaching the height of the TWI (the depth of the tire pattern must not be less than 1.6 mm) must be replaced.

Lifespan Inspection and Rotation

Tires that have been in use for more than 5 years must be replaced by force.

Inspection of Tire Tread

Regularly check the tire tread is punctured and whether there are any stones stuck between the two wheels. Remove the stones embedded in the tire. If small holes are found on the tread, they shall be filled with rubber to prevent sand and mud from entering the cord layer and causing voids.

Vehicle Parking

When parking the vehicle, it is also important to protect the tires and avoid parking on roads with large, sharp, or sharp obstacles. In addition, it is advisable to avoid contact between passenger cars and petroleum products, acidic substances, and other materials that may affect rubber deterioration.

Handling of Overheating

Tires are prone to overheating and increased air pressure during summer or high-speed driving. In this case, the vehicle shall be parked to dissipate heat, and deflation, pressure reduction, or water splashing to cool down are strictly prohibited.

Tire Replacement

When installing tires, tires of the same specification, size, pattern, and number of cord layers shall be installed on the same axle. When replacing tires, it is best to replace all tires at the same time, at least in pairs. For the replacement of the steerable wheel (front wheel), new tires must be used and it is never allowed to replace tires with worn old tires.

Tire Usage

1. Limiting driving speed The increased driving speed, especially frequent high-speed driving, significantly reduces the service life of tires. 2. Driving according to road conditions The type and condition of road surface have a significant impact on the service life of tires. The driver shall choose the road surface according to the road conditions and select the appropriate driving speed to increase the mileage of tires. 3. Mastering tire temperature changes a. When driving in hot weather, due to the high external temperature, the accumulated heat in the tires is difficult to dissipate, causing a sharp rise in tire temperature and an increase in tire pressure, thereby accelerating rubber aging. Therefore, when driving in hot weather, attention shall be paid to controlling the temperature of the tires. In addition to appropriately reducing the vehicle speed, if conditions permit, driving can be done in the morning and evening when the temperature is low, or after driving a certain distance, stopping and resting to prevent tire temperature from being too high. b. It is prohibited to deflate to reduce pressure. In the season of low temperature, as tires dissipate heat faster during use, they are less prone to high heat, and the tread is more wear- resistant. In seasons with low temperatures, especially in severe cold weather, it is advisable to drive at low speeds for the first few kilometers after starting in order to increase tire temperature when the vehicle is parked overnight or after a long period of time. In short, mastering tire temperature changes during driving is extremely important. 4. Adopting the correct driving method The car shall not start too aggressively, and both empty and heavy vehicles shall start smoothly at low speed. Avoid dragging the tires on the ground to reduce tread wear. When driving on a good road surface, keep moving in a straight line, and avoid swaying left and right or making sharp turns, except when meeting vehicles or avoiding obstacles, to prevent lateral cutting between the tire and the wheel rim from damaging the tire. When the vehicle goes down a long slope, the vehicle speed shall be appropriately controlled according to the slope size, length, and road conditions. In situations where the slope is long, the road is steep, and the road conditions are complex, it is advisable to shift into low gear and use light braking to

control the vehicle speed downhill. This not only avoids emergency braking and reduces tire wear, but also ensures safe driving. When the vehicle is going uphill, try to use inertia to drive, change gears at the right time, maintain appropriate residual force, and do not wait for the car to stop before restarting to reduce tire wear. When turning while driving, the vehicle speed shall be controlled according to the situation of the curve. Do not turn at high speed, otherwise the vehicle will generate a large centrifugal force, causing the loaded cargo to tilt, the center of mass to shift to one side, and the single-sided tire to be overloaded and dragged, accelerating wear, and the tire to be cut horizontally by the wheel rim, causing damage. When driving in complex situations (such as meeting, overtaking, passing through towns, intersections, and crossing railways), it is important to maintain an appropriate driving speed, reduce frequent braking, and avoid emergency braking. Otherwise, sliding friction between the tire and the ground will occur, resulting in severe wear of the tread. On bad roads, slow down and observe carefully, choose a path to pass through, and stop to check if there are stones between the twin tires. If there are, they shall be removed in a timely manner. When parking on the way or on site, it is important to develop a habit of safe sliding when parking. Before parking, choose a flat, clean, and oil-free ground. Each tire shall land smoothly, especially if the vehicle is loaded overnight, attention shall be paid to choosing a good parking place, and the rear wheel shall be lifted if necessary.

Figure p1950

8.9.4.2 Four-wheel Alignment

1. Jack the vehicle. 2. Check the tires. 3. Check the front suspension.

caution
Check the suspension for wear, looseness, deformation, and damage. In case of any of the above defects, adjust, tighten, or replace accordingly.

4. Check the steering angle of the wheels.

caution
If the measured value is not within the specified range, the steering tie rod needs to be checked.

5. Loosen the fixing bolts of the upper and lower swing arms, and add shims between the ball joint and the subframe to change the value of the camber angle. 6. Tighten the fixing bolts of the upper and lower swing arms. 7. Loosen the adjustment bolt of the steering rod, adjust the length of the rod by rotating the ball joint, observe the direction of the toe in change, and determine the adjustment value.

caution
1. After adjustment, the difference in length between the left and right tie rods shall be ≤ 2mm;
2. After adjustment, fix the inner clamp bolt above the rod.

8. Tighten the adjustment bolt of the steering rod. 9. Lower the vehicle.

Figure p1951

8.9.4.3 Tire Rotation

caution
If there is obvious uneven tire wear, the cause of this wear shall be ruled out.
In case of tire rotation, it is recommended to check the balance of both the tire and wheel assemblies simultaneously.

1. When performing brake checks on tires according to the prescribed maintenance schedule, it is recommended to perform tire cross rotation. 2. Jack the vehicle.

caution
Record the original position of each tire and wheel assembly relative to the vehicle.

3. Remove the wheel assembly. 4. Perform rotation to the tire and wheel assembly according to the following diagram.

caution
Perform tire cross rotation as shown below.
caution
1. The front axle tires shall not be interchanged with the intermediate and rear axle tires;
2. If there Is a rotation direction on the tire, and after tire rotation,make sure that the direction of rotation is the forward direction of the vehicle;
3. After the tire rotation is completed, recalibrate the tire pressure for all tires.
Figure p1953

5. Install the wheel assembly. 6. Lower the vehicle. 7. Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure.

Figure p1952
Figure p1953

8.9.5 Dismantling and Installation

8.9.5.1 Replacement of Tire Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel. 3 Release the air from the tire and use a pry bar to pry off the tire. 4 Remove the tire assembly.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the tire, it shall be removed with the help of an assistant.

Installation Procedures 1 Move the tire assembly to the mounting position.

caution
Due to the heavy weight of the tire, it shall be moved to the mounting position with the help of an assistant.

2 Measure the tire pressure on both sides with a pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressure remains consistent. 3 Perform tire dynamic balancing. 4 Install the guide wheel. 5 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

8.9.5.2 Replacement of TESD

Removal Procedures

1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the driven wheel. 3 Deflate the tyre and then separate the tyre from the rim, and remove the TESD.

caution
Do not damage the wheels during removal.

Installation Procedures 1 Install the TESD and inflate the tyre assembly after pre- installation.

Torque: (7.5 - ft lbs)

2 Install the driven wheel. 3 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

Figure p1954

8.9.5.3 Replacement of Wheel Assembly

Removal Procedures

caution
The removal and installation procedure for all tires is the same.
To maintain wheel balance, mark the relative position of the wheels before removing the tires.

1 When removing the wheel assembly, first loosen the 10 wheel nuts that connect the wheel assembly to the outer flange connection plate assembly, and then use a jack. 2 Put the jack on the front axle assembly and tighten the control valve clockwise to fix the jack. 3 Insert the jack rocker into jack sleeve to lift the vehicle.

caution
1. The jack must be used on a hard bearing surface and must be supported on the plane position of the vehicle jacking point. It is prohibited to use the jack on an inclined plane with an inclination angle greater than 6° to avoid violent vibration or sliding of the jack.
2. Use the jack within its load limit to avoid abnormalities such as failure caused by overload. After the vehicle is lifted, support the vehicle with solid objects of equal height in the area around to avoid personal injury caused by jack failure. When unloading the jack, open the control valve slightly to allow the jack to drop slowly to avoid slipping or damage due to the jack dropping too fast. Besides, the sudden drop of the vehicle will also threaten personal safety.

4 When the wheel assembly is off the ground, unscrew the 10 wheel nuts that connect the wheel assembly to the outer flange connection plate assembly.

caution
Tighten in the order of diagonal 1 to 10.

5 Remove the wheel assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p1955
Figure p1956

1 Move the wheel assembly to the mounting position.

caution
1. When replacing the tires, the tires on the same axle shall be replaced at the same time.
2. The inner and outer valves shall be staggered to facilitate the tire inflation.

2 Lubricate the threaded surface of the nuts with engine oil, gear oil or grease to achieve a slight degree of wetting.

caution
1. Do not use lubricants containing molybdenum disulfide, organic molybdenum, or other molybdenum additives to avoid corrosion of the tire.
2. Do not apply oil to the tire rims and axle end surfaces that contact with bolts and nuts.

3 Tighten the 10 wheel nuts that connect the wheel assembly to the outer flange connection plate assembly, release the jack and lower the vehicle, then tighten the nuts diagonally again.

Torque: (479 +/- 37) ft lbs
Figure p1980
Figure p1980
Figure p1978
Figure p1977
Figure p1976
Figure p1974

4 After the wheel touches the ground, turn the tire half a circle and tighten the 10 wheel nuts of the wheel assembly again.

Torque:(479 +/- 37) ft lbs
caution
After replacing the tire, conduct an initial test run, and tighten again to the specified torque after driving 30-60 miles.
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the tire pressure relay and the tire preThe fixing bolt connecting the tire pressure relay and the tire pressure monitoring module bracket 2ssure monitoring module bracket 2M4(2 +/- .5) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the tire pressure relay and the tire pressure monitoring module bracket 2M4(2 +/- .5) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the tire pressure monitoring module bracket 2 to the frame assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the tire pressure CAN module and the tire pressure monitoring module bracketM6(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs
The fixing bolt connecting the tire pressure monitoring module bracket to the frame assemblyM14(133 +/- 11) ft lbs
The fixing nut connecting the tire pressure monitoring module bracket to the frame assemblyM14(133 +/- 11) ft lbs

8.10 Tire Pressure Monitoring System3818· 1g

8.10.1 Specifications

8.10.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1958

8.10.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.10.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor 8. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 3. Tire Pressure Repeater 9. Tire Pressure CAN Module 4. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Bracket 2 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 6. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Bracket 2 12. Hexagon Nut_Type 1

8.10.3 System Schematic Diagram

8.10.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
Abnormal tire pressure system malfunction indicator light1.Low or high tire pressureAdjust the tire pressure to the standard pressure range.
2.Modified tires or wheelsRestore the vehicle and recalibrate the tire pressure system.
3.Rear tire pressure module power failureRefer to Rear Tire Pressure Module Power Failure
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111716Battery Voltage Tool lowRefer to Rear Tire Pressure Module Power Fault
B111717Battery Voltage Too High
U007C88BCANFD1 BusOffRefer to Rear Tire Pressure Module Communication Fault
U012287Lost Communication With VDC
U015687Lost Communication With CDCU
U019887Lost Communication With TGW
B220000The transmitter of the No.1 wheel position is faultyRefer to Wheel Position Transmitter Fault
B220001The battery of the transmitter at the No.1 wheel position is running low

8.10.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

8.10.4.1 Diagnostic Description

Before diagnosing the malfunction of the tire pressure monitoring device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the tire pressure monitoring device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a malfunction occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of tire pressure monitoring devices should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the

diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 8.10.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the tire pressure monitoring system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the tire pressure monitoring system.

• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.10.4.3 Fault Symptom Table

8.10.4.4 DTC Confirmation

1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 8.10.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

TMPS

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B220002The transmitter of the No.1 wheel position gives a high - temperature alarm
B220003The transmitter of the No.2 wheel position is faulty
B220004The battery of the transmitter at the No.2 wheel position is running low
B220005The transmitter of the No.2 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B220006The transmitter of the No.3 wheel position is faulty
B220007The battery of the transmitter at the No.3 wheel position is running low
B220008The transmitter of the No.3 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B220009The transmitter of the No.4 wheel position is faulty
B22000AThe battery of the transmitter at the No.4 wheel position is running low
B22000BThe transmitter of the No.4 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B22000CThe transmitter of the No.5 wheel position is faulty
B22000DThe battery of the transmitter at the No.5 wheel position is running low
B22000EThe transmitter of the No.5 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B22000FThe transmitter of the No.6 wheel position is faulty
B220010The battery of the transmitter at the No.6 wheel position is running low
B220011The transmitter of the No.6 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B220012The transmitter of the No.7 wheel position is faulty
B220013The battery of the transmitter at the No.7 wheel position is running low
B220014The transmitter of the No.7 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B220015The transmitter of the No.8 wheel position is faulty
B220016The battery of the transmitter at the No.8 wheel position is running low
B220017The transmitter of the No.8 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B220018The transmitter of the No.9 wheel position is faulty
B220019The battery of the transmitter at the No.9 wheel position is running low
B22001AThe transmitter of the No.9 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B22001BThe transmitter of the No.10 wheel position is faulty
B22001CThe battery of the transmitter at the No.10 wheel position is running low
B22001DThe transmitter of the No.10 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B22001EThe transmitter of the No.11 wheel position is faulty
B22001FThe battery of the transmitter at the No.11 wheel position is running low
B220020The transmitter of the No.11 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B220021The transmitter of the No.12 wheel position is faulty
B220022The battery of the transmitter at the No.12 wheel position is running low
B220023The transmitter of the No.12 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B220024The transmitter of the No.13 wheel position is faulty
B220025The battery of the transmitter at the No.13 wheel position is running low
B220026The transmitter of the No.13 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
B220027The transmitter of the No.14 wheel position is faulty
B220028The battery of the transmitter at the No.14 wheel position is running low
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B220029The transmitter of the No.14 wheel position gives a high-temperature alarm
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111716Battery Voltage Tool lowVoltage < 18V, t > 1000ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.Rear tire pressure module
B111717Battery Voltage Too HighVoltage > 32V, t > 1000ms

8.10.4.6 Rear Tire Pressure Module Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.10.4.6 Rear Tire Pressure Module Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007C88BCANFD1 BusOffBusoff occurred ten times in a row1. Wiring harness 2.Rear tire pressure module
U012287Lost Communication With VDCDetected signal (ID :0x18FEF100 lost, t > 1000ms
U015687Lost Communication With CDCUDetected signal (ID :0x18FEC1EE) lost, t > 5000ms
U019887Lost Communication With TGWDetected signal (ID :0x18FEE6EE) lost, t > 5000ms

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides the rear tire pressure module? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the power supply and grounding harness of the rear tire pressure module. Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the rear tire pressure module. Step 6:Replace the rear tire pressure module. Refer to Replacement Of Tire Pressure CAN Module Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.10.4.7 Rear Tire Pressure Module Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.10.4.7 Rear Tire Pressure Module Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the BCANFD1 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B220000The transmitter of the No.1 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes1. Wiring harness 2.Wheel position transmitter 3.Rear tire pressure module
B220001The battery of the transmitter at the No.1 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B220002The transmitter of the No.1 wheel position gives a high - temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B220003The transmitter of the No.2 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B220004The battery of the transmitter at the No.2 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B220005The transmitter of the No.2 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B220006The transmitter of the No.3 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B220007The battery of the transmitter at the No.3 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B220008The transmitter of the No.3 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received

Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the rear tire pressure module. Step 5:Replace the rear tire pressure module. Refer to Replacement Of Tire Pressure CAN Module Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.10.4.8 Wheel Position Transmitter Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B220009The transmitter of the No.4 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B22000AThe battery of the transmitter at the No.4 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B22000BThe transmitter of the No.4 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B22000CThe transmitter of the No.5 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B22000DThe battery of the transmitter at the No.5 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B22000EThe transmitter of the No.5 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B22000FThe transmitter of the No.6 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B220010The battery of the transmitter at the No.6 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B220011The transmitter of the No.6 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B220012The transmitter of the No.7 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B220013The battery of the transmitter at the No.7 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B220014The transmitter of the No.7 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B220015The transmitter of the No.8 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B220016The battery of the transmitter at the No.8 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B220017The transmitter of the No.8 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B220018The transmitter of the No.9 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B220019The battery of the transmitter at the No.9 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B22001AThe transmitter of the No.9 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B22001BThe transmitter of the No.10 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B22001CThe battery of the transmitter at the No.10 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B22001DThe transmitter of the No.10 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B22001EThe transmitter of the No.11 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B22001FThe battery of the transmitter at the No.11 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B220020The transmitter of the No.11 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B220021The transmitter of the No.12 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B220022The battery of the transmitter at the No.12 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B220023The transmitter of the No.12 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B220024The transmitter of the No.13 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B220025The battery of the transmitter at the No.13 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B220026The transmitter of the No.13 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
B220027The transmitter of the No.14 wheel position is faultyWhen the vehicle speed is over 20 mph, the transmitter information has not been received continuously for 10 minutes
B220028The battery of the transmitter at the No.14 wheel position is running lowTwo consecutive frames of the transmitter battery voltage less than 1.9V are received
B220029The transmitter of the No.14 wheel position gives a high- temperature alarmTwo consecutive frames of the detected temperature value of the transmitter that is greater than or equal to 194 degrees ferenhieght are received
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCANFD1 (H) and BCANFD1 (L)Resistance:55 - 63 Ω
Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCANFD1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAND1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

32. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Re calibrate tire pressure. Refer to Tire Pressure Calibration Program Step 4:Replace the wheel position transmitter. Refer to Replacement Of Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor . Replacement Of Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor Step 5:Rewrite the configuration code, reload the software, and upgrade the rear tire pressure module. Step 6:Replace the rear tire pressure module. Refer to Replacement Of Tire Pressure CAN Module Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.10.4.9 Inspection Of BCAND1 Bus Network Integrity

Step 1 Check the terminal resistance of BCANFD1 bus. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. Step 2 Check the bus voltage of BCANFD1. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Do not disconnect the wiring harness connector. Use a multimeter to measure each terminal according to the following table: C. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Up to step 6. No Yes No Yes

Measuring TerminalsStandard Value
BCANFD1 (H) and vehicle groundingVoltage:2.5 - 3.5 V
BCAND1 (L) and vehicle groundingVoltage:1.5 - 2.5 V

Step 3 Check the bus voltage of each module. A. Perform vehicle power on operation. B. Measure the bus voltage of each module in sequence (do not disconnect the harness connectors). C. Confirm the bus voltage of each module meets the standard. Up to step 6. Step 4 Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. A. Check the power grounding of the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the module power grounding is normal. Repair or replace the wiring harness. Step 5 Replace the communication loss module. A. Replace the communication loss module. B. Confirm if the system is functioning properly. The system is functioning properly. Step 6 Check the BCAND1 bus harness. No Yes No Yes Yes No

A. Perform vehicle power-off operation. B. Disconnect all module harness connectors on the BCANFD1 bus. C. Measure the BCAND1 bus resistance between each module and the rear tire pressure module in sequence to see if it is normal. Standard resistance:less than 1 Ω D. Measure the ground resistance of the BCAND1 bus is normal. Standard resistance:10K Ω or higher E. Perform vehicle power on operation. F. Measure the BCAND1 bus is short circuited to the power supply. Standard voltage:0 V G. Confirm the measured values meet the standards. Repair or replace the BCANFD1 bus. Step 7 Disconnect the modules on the BCAND1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/ resistance. Disconnect the modules on the BCAND1 bus in sequence and observe the bus communication voltage/resistance returns to normal. If it returns to normal, determine that the disconnected module is faulty. No Yes

Figure p1974

8.10.5 Dismantling and Installation

8.10.5.1 Replacement of Front Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (right). 3 Remove the tire assembly. 4 Remove the front tire pressure monitoring sensor and TESD. Installation Procedures 1 Move the front tire pressure monitoring sensor and TESD to the mounting position. 2 Install the tire assembly. 3 Install the guide wheel (right).

4 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

caution
After replacing the tire pressure monitoring sensor, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the tire pressure.
Figure p1975

8.10.5.2 Replacement of Tire Pressure Repeater

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the tire pressure repeater.

5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the tire pressure repeater. 6 Remove the tire pressure repeater. Installation Procedures 1 Move the tire pressure repeater to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the tire pressure repeater.

Torque: (2 +/- .5) ft lbs
Figure p1976

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the tire pressure repeater.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Figure p1977

8.10.5.3 Replacement of Rear Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the drive wheel (right front) 3 Remove the tire assembly. 4 Remove the rear tire pressure monitoring sensor. Installation Procedures

1 Move the rear tire pressure monitoring sensor to the mounting position. 2 Install the tire assembly. 3 Install the drive wheel (right front). 4 Lower the rear end of the vehicle.

caution
After replacing the tire pressure monitoring sensor, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the tire pressure.

8.10.5.4 Replacement of Tire Pressure CAN Module

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Jack the rear end of the vehicle. 5 Remove the drive wheel (front left).

6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the tire pressure CAN module. 7 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the tire pressure CAN module. 8 Remove the tire pressure CAN module. Installation Procedures

Figure p1979
Figure p1979

1 Move the tire pressure CAN module to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the tire pressure CAN module.

Torque:(6.5 +/- .75) ft lbs

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the tire pressure CAN module.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the drive wheel (left front). 5 Lower the rear end of the vehicle. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
Fixed bolts connecting the driven rocker arm to the frame on the subframeM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the driven rocker arm and the frame on the subframeM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the tie rod and relay rodM24254 +/- 11 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the tie rod and relay rodM45498 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the active rocker arm and the relay rodM24254 +/- 11 (ft lbs)

8.11 Steering Rod Device3003

8.11.1 Specifications

8.11.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1982

8.11.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.11.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Split Pin 2. Idlerarm 6. Hexagon Slotted Thin Nut 3. Pitman Arm 7. Relay Rod 4. Hexagon Flange Nut 8. Tie Rod

Figure p1983
Figure p1983

8.11.3 Dismantling and Installation

8.11.3.1 Replacement of Relay Rod

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (left). 3 Remove the guide wheel (right). 4 Remove 4 fixing pins of the relay rod.

5 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the relay rod, and remove the relay rod. Installation Procedures

Figure p1984
Figure p1984
Figure p1985
Figure p1985
Figure p1985

1 Move the relay rod to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing nuts of the relay rod.

Torque: 243 - 266 (ft lbs)

3 Install 4 fixing pins of the relay rod.

4 Remove the guide wheel (right). 5 Install the guide wheel (left). 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

Figure p1986

8.11.3.2 Replacement of Driving Rocker Arm

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel. 3 Remove 1 fixing pin.

Figure p1988

4 Remove 1 fixing nut of the tie rod. 5 Remove 1 fixing pin. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the driving rocker arm.

Figure p1987
Figure p1987
Figure p1987

7 Remove 1 fixing nut of the driving rocker arm. 8 Remove the driving rocker arm. Installation Procedures 1 Move the driving rocker arm to the mounting position.

caution
It is necessary to align the engraved lines during installation.
Figure p1989
Figure p1989
Figure p1989

2 Install 1 fixing nut of the driving rocker arm.

Torque: 498 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
caution
When installing the nuts, it is necessary to fix the pitman armto prevent the excessive rotation angle from damaging the unloading valve.
Figure p1988

3 Install 1 fixing nut of the driving rocker arm.

Torque: 243 - 266 (ft lbs)

4 Install 1 fixing pin. 5 Install 1 fixing nut of the tie rod.

Torque: 254 +/- 11 (ft lbs)

6 Install 1 fixing pin. 7 Install the guide wheel. 8 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

Figure p1990

8.11.3.3 Replacement of Driven Rocker Arm

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel (left). 3 Remove 1 fixing pin.

4 Remove 1 fixing nut of the relay rod. 5 Remove 1 fixing pin. 6 Remove 1 fixing nut of the driven rocker arm.

Figure p1991
Figure p1991
Figure p1991
Figure p1992

7 Remove 4 bolts and nuts of the driven rocker arm. 8 Remove the driven rocker arm. Installation Procedures 1 Move the driven rocker arm to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 bolts and nuts of the driven rocker arm.

Torque: 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Figure p1992
Figure p1993
Figure p1993
Figure p1993

3 Install 1 fixing nut of the driven rocker arm.

Torque:243 - 266 (ft lbs)

4 Install 1 fixing pin. 5 Install 1 fixing nut of the relay rod.

6 Install 1 fixing pin. 7 Install the guide wheel (right). 8 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

Figure p1994

8.11.3.4 Replacement of Tie Rod

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the guide wheel. 3 Remove 2 fixing pins of the tie rod.

Figure p1995

4 Remove 2 fixing nut of the tie rod. 5 Remove the tie rod. Installation Procedures 1 Move the tie rod to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the tie rod.

Torque: 254 +/- 11 (ft lbs)
Figure p1995
Figure p1996

3 Install 2 fixing pins of the tie rod. 4 Install the guide wheel. 5 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to perform four-wheel alignment.
Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the steering column assembly and the steering column fixing bracketM1026 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the steering column assembly and the pipe beam assemblyM818.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the steering column assembly and the integrated EHPS assemblyM1039 +/- 5 (ft lbs)
Cross joint of steering column assembly - fixing bolt for steering gearM1039 +/- 5 (ft lbs)
Cross joint of steering column assembly - fixing nut for steering gearM1039 +/- 5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the steering column assembly and the steering wheel assemblyM1444 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

8.12 Steering Control Device3402· 3g

8.12.1 Specifications

8.12.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p1998

8.12.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.12.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Dab Decorative Cove 7. Hexagon Head Bolt Assy 2. Hex Thin Nut 8. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 3. Flat Washer 9. Hexagon Bolt 4. Steering Wheel Assy 10. Fixing Bracket of Steering Column 1 5. Steering Column Assy 11. Fixing Bracket of Steering Column 2 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p1999
Figure p1999

8.12.3 Dismantling and Installation

8.12.3.1 Replacement of Steering Wheel Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 5 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 6 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the steering wheel assembly. 7 Remove 1 fixing nut of the steering wheel assembly.

caution
Place the wheels in front of the vehicle and mark the connection between the steering wheel assembly and the steering column with intermediate axle assembly with a marker pen.

8 Remove the steering wheel assembly.

caution
Do not rotate the clock spring after removing the steering wheel assembly to prevent damage to the clock spring.
Figure p2000
Figure p2000

Installation Procedures 1 Place the front wheels in front and install the steering wheel assembly. Align the installation marks made with a marker pen before removing the steering wheel assembly. 2 Install 1 fixing nut of the steering wheel assembly.

Torque: 44 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the steering wheel assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 5 Install the combination switch lower shield. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

8.12.3.2 Replacement of Steering Column Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate.

3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 11 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 12 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the steering column lower shield assembly. 16 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 17 Remove the steering wheel assembly. 18 Remove the clock spring. 19 Remove the combination switch. 20 Remove the combination switch fixing bracket. 21 Remove the steering angle sensor assembly. 22 Remove the pillar lock. 23 Remove the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. 24 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the steering column assembly. 25 Remove the steering column assembly.

Figure p2001
Figure p2002

Installation Procedures 1 Move the steering column assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 6 fixing bolts of the steering column assembly.

Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)

3 Install the pillar lock. 4 Install the combination switch lower shield mounting bracket. 5 Install the steering angle sensor assembly. 6 Install the combination switch fixing bracket. 7 Install the combination switch. 8 Install the clock spring. 9 Install the steering wheel assembly. 10 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 11 Install the steering column lower shield assembly. 12 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 13 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 14 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 15 Install the right switch panel assembly. 16 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 17 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 18 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 19 Install the left switch panel assembly. 20 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 21 Install the combination switch lower shield. 22 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 23 Connect the battery negative cable. 24 Close the front flip cover plate. 25 Close the door.

Figure p2003
Figure p2003

8.12.3.3 Replacement of Driver Horn Cover Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Release 3 circlips of the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Disconnect one harness connector,Remove the driver horn cover assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2004

1 Install the driver horn cover assembly,connect one harness connector. 2 Install the combination switch lower shield. 3 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
Fixed bolts connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the frame on the subframeM20406 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Fixed bolts connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the steering columnM1039 +/- 5 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut connecting the electric oil pump and the active rocker armM45498 +/- 18.5 (ft lbs)
The joint connecting the electric oil pump and the oil inlet hoseM2692 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The joint connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the high-pressure oil pipeM1855 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
Fixing nut for high-pressure oil pipeM2281 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
Fixing nut for low-pressure oil pipeM2281 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump and the electric oil pump bracketM1248 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the electric oil pump bracket to the frame on the subframeM1248 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the electric oil pump to the frame on the subframeM1248 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The grounding wire fixing bolt connecting the chassis harness and the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the steering oil tank and the steering oil tank bracketM818.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the steering oil pot bracket to the frame assemblyM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the frame assembly and the electric oil pump bracketM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the frame on the subframe to the electric oil pump bracketM14155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)

8.13 Steering Gear Device3406· 1g

8.13.1 Specifications

8.13.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the steering oil pipe fixing clamp and the steering oil pipe fixing bracket 2M86 +/- .75 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump to the chassis harnessM1248 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump to the chassis harness bracketM1248 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
ItemParameter
Model of steering gear34061X91
Manufacturer of steering gearShashi Jiulong Automotive Power Steering Gear Co., Ltd.
Steering gear typeElectro-hydraulic circulation ball type
Model of steering wheel3402010X9D01
Diameter of steering wheel (mm)380
Structure type of steering columnMechanical adjustable type
Manufacturer of steering columnYuyao Wanguo Machinery Co., Ltd.
Side angle of steering shaft α (°)50
Plane angle of steering shaft β (°)0
Steering boost typeElectric hydraulic power assistance
Manufacturer of steering boosterShashi Jiulong Automotive Power Steering Gear Co., Ltd.

8.13.1.2 Technical Parameters

Figure p2007

8.13.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.13.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Integrated EHPS Assembly 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Sealing Gasket 18. Hexagon Flange Nut 3. Straight-Through Joint 19. Fixing Brkt-Steering Oil Pipe 4. High Pressure Tubing 20. Hose Hoop-Type B and Type c 5. Steering Oil Pipe Fixing Bracket 2 21. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Fixing Clip-Steering Oil Pipe 22. Hose Hoop-Type B and Type c 7. Hexagon Flange Bolt 23. Oil Inlet Hose 8. Hexagon Flange Bolt 24. Oil Return Hose 9. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 25. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. Electric Oil Pump 26. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Oil Can 27. Electric Oil Pump bracket 12. Oil Pump Inlet Tubing Connection 28. Hexagon Flange Bolt 13. Sealing Gasket 29. Low Pressure Tubing 14. Tie-Fir Tree 30. Hexagon Bolt 15. Oil Pot Holder 31. Heavy Spring Washer 16. Assembly of Hexagon Head Bolt, Spring Washer and Flat Washer In New Energy Vehicles 32. Steering Gear Nut

8.13.3 System Schematic Diagram

8.13.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
The steering wheel has no or little power assistance1. The steering column is deformed or stuckCheck the appearance of the steering column.
2.Low transmission hydraulic oil levelCheck for leaks in the transmission system oil pipes.
3.EHPS malfunctionRefer to EHPS Power Failure
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
B111717High battery voltageRefer to EHPS Power Fault
B111716Low Battery Voltage
C1EE54FSupply voltage monitoring voltage too high (warning)
C1EE651Supply voltage monitoring voltage too low (warning)
C1EF84CThe igition signal is lost
U007A88Network CAN bus - communication failureRefer to EHPS Communication Fault
U012287Lost communication with VDC
U143873VDC message is invalid
U143587Lost communication with VDC_HSS1

8.13.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

8.13.4.1 Diagnostic Description

Before diagnosing the malfunction of the steering gear device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the steering gear device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a malfunction occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the steering gear device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process

can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 8.13.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the steering system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the steering system.

• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.13.4.3 Fault Symptom Table

8.13.4.4 DTC Confirmation

1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 8.13.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

EHPS

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
U143253Lost communication with VDC_HSS1
U015687Lost communication with CDCU
U143353CDCU message is invalid
U019887Lost communication with TGW
U143453TGW message is invalid
U015788Lost communication with CAMF
U143553CAMF function is invalid or incorrect
C1EE75FSystem entry thermal protectionRefer to EHPS Internal Fault
C1EE15FECU overtemperature failure
C1EE24CTemperature sensor failure
C1EE3ECECU unexpected reset
C1EE4ECECU Hardware detection failure(Error correction)
C1EF24CECU Internal electrical Faults
C1EE94CECU internal power supply Faults
C1EE85CECU internal predrive faults
C1EE342ECU internal magneto resistive chip faults
C1EE86CECU internal current detection loop faults
C1EE88CECU internal motor three-phase current fault
C1EE362Invaild Torque Sensor value
C1EF25FAbnormal Power Supply to the sensor
C1EF342Invaild Angle Sensor value
U14351FCRC check is invalid
C1EE35FSteering wheel center position not calibratedPerform center calibration to set the steering gear to 0 position when the vehicle is driving straight
C1EE59FEPS end protection is not learned
C1EE45FEPS end protection is not learned
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
B111717High battery voltageSupply voltage above limit and the duration of more than 1000ms1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.EHPS
B111716Low Battery VoltageSupply voltage below limit and the duration of more than 1000ms

8.13.4.6 EHPS Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C1EE54FSupply voltage monitoring voltage too high (warning)The power supply voltage is higher than the voltage threshold . Enable power degradation.
C1EE651Supply voltage monitoring voltage too low (warning)The power supply voltage is lower than the voltage threshold. Enable power degradatio
C1EF84CThe igition signal is lostThe engine is in the state of the operator. The controller cannot detect the ignition signal, and the controller reports a failure after 20s.

2.Circuit Diagram

8.13.4.6 EHPS Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U007A88Network CAN bus - communication failure8 consecutive busoffs without successful message transmission1. Wiring harness 2.EHPS
U012287Lost communication with VDCContinuous 500ms without receiving message VDC_ TCO1 (0x0CFE6CEE)
U143873VDC message is invalidIf message VDC_TCO1 (0x0CFE6CEE) is not received for 500ms continuously, any of the following situations will occur for 10 consecutive frames:1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2. The physical value exceeds the range of 0~155.999 mph
U143587Lost communication with VDC_HSS1Continuous 1000ms without receiving message VDC_ HSS1 (0x18FCC231)
U143253Lost communication with VDC_HSS1Any of the following situations occur in 10 consecutive frames of message VDC_HSS1 (0x18FCC231):1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2.When receiving a signal of 0x2 or 0x3
U015687Lost communication with CDCUContinuous 5000ms without receiving message CDCU_ VDHR (0x18FEC1EEx)
U143353CDCU message is invalidThe message CDCU_VDHR (0x18FEC1EEx) shows any of the following situations for 10 consecutive frames:1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2. The physical value exceeds the range of 0~99999995m
U019887Lost communication with TGWshows any of the following situations for 10 consecutive frames:1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2. The physical value exceeds the range of 0~99999995m and the message TGW_TD_Time (0x18FEE6EEx) has not been received for 5000ms continuously

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power failure codes besides EHPS? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4:Check the EHPS power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Rewrite configuration codes, reload software, and upgrade EHPS. Step 6:Replace EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.13.4.7 EHPS Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
U143453TGW message is invalidoccur in 10 consecutive frames of message TGW-TD_ Time (0x18FEE6EEx):1. DLC is not equal to 8; 2. When the physical value of TGW_Seconds signal exceeds 0- 59; 3. When the physical value of the TGW.Minute signal exceeds 0-59; 4. When the physical value of the TGW_Hours signal exceeds 0-23; 5. When the physical value of the TGWlMench signal exceeds 1-12; 6. When the physical value of the TGW-Day signal exceeds 1-31; 7. When the physical value of the TGW_Year signal exceeds 1985-2235; 8.When the physical value of the TGW_LocalMinuteOffset signal exceeds 0-59; 9.When the physical value of the TGW_LocalHourOffset signal exceeds If any of the following situations 0-59
U015788Lost communication with CAMFContinuous 1000ms without receiving message EHPSI1_LKA_CAMF (0x18FF0031x)
U143553CAMF function is invalid or incorrectMessage ADCU_SPSI1_LKA (0x18FF0031x) shows any of the following situations for 10 consecutive frames:1. CRC does not comply with the algorithm; 2. The MC signal is discontinuous; 3. DLC is not equal to 8; 4. The EPS_VibAct signal value is 0x2-0x3

2.Circuit Diagram

8.13.4.7 EHPS Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine Inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection of CAN8 bus network integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
C1EE75FSystem entry thermal protectionThe internal temperature of the controller or motor exceeds the limit (standardised value)1.EHPS
C1EE15FECU overtemperature failureECU temperature exceeds normal range (T>257℉)
C1EE24CTemperature sensor failureAbnormal voltage range of temperature sensor
C1EE3ECECU unexpected resetMCU initialization reset error
C1EE4ECECU Hardware detection failure(Error correction)MCU ECC Fault
C1EF24CECU Internal electrical Faults1.MCU related faults 2.The internal electrical fault occurs in the controller
C1EE94CECU internal power supply FaultsInternal power chip faults of the ECU
C1EE85CECU internal predrive faultsInternal predrive chip faults of the ECU
C1EE342ECU internal magneto resistive chip faultsThe reluctance sensor faults
C1EE86CECU internal current detection loop faultscurrent detection loop fault
C1EE88CECU internal motor three-phase current faultMotor three-phase current fault
C1EE362Invaild Torque Sensor valueSensor torque signal out of range or abnormal synchronization or torque signal sampling timeout
C1EF25FAbnormal Power Supply to the sensorThe power supply voltage of the sensor is beyond the normal range
C1EF342Invaild Angle Sensor valueAngle sensor signal anomalies or angle signal sampling timeout
U14351FCRC check is invalidInvalid SW flashed (Wrong layout Data Flash)

Step 4:Rewrite configuration codes, reload software, and upgrade EHPS. Step 5:Replace EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.13.4.8 EHPS Internal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Rewrite configuration codes, reload software, and upgrade EHPS.

Step 4:Replace EHPS. Refer to Replacement Of Integrated EHPS Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

Figure p2018

8.13.5 Dismantling and Installation

8.13.5.1 Replacement of Integrated EHPS Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 7 Remove the guide wheel (right). 8 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 9 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 12 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 13 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 14 Remove the electric oil pump. 15 Remove the low pressure oil pipe. 16 Remove the high pressure oil pipe. 17 Remove the A/C compressor assembly. 18 Remove the driving rocker arm. 19 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the integrated EHPS assembly.

20 Remove 1 fixing bolt connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the steering drive shaft. 21 Remove 2 straps of the integrated EHPS assembly. 22 Remove 5 fixing bolts of the integrated EHPS assembly. 23 Remove the integrated EHPS assembly.

Figure p2019
Figure p2019
Figure p2019
Figure p2020
Figure p2020

Installation Procedures 1 Move the integrated EHPS assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 5 fixing bolts of the integrated EHPS assembly.

Torque: 442.5 +/- 37 (ft lbs)

3 Install 2 straps of the integrated EHPS assembly.

Figure p2021
Figure p2021

4 Install 1 fixing bolt connecting the integrated EHPS assembly to the steering drive shaft.

Torque:37 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

5 Connect 2 harness connectors of the integrated EHPS assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Install the driving rocker arm. 7 Install the A/C compressor assembly. 8 Install the high pressure oil pipe. 9 Install the low pressure oil pipe. 10 Install the electric oil pump. 11 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 12 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 13 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 14 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 15 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left front wheel housing rear body.

17 Install the guide wheel (right). 18 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 19 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 20 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 21 Connect the battery negative cable. 22 Close the front flip cover plate. 23 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the zero position.
Figure p2022

8.13.5.2 Replacement of Electric Oil Pump

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 4 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 5 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 6 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 7 Remove the left front wheel housing rear body. 8 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 11 Remove the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 12 Remove the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 13 Disconnect 1 high voltage harness connector of the electric oil pump.

14 Disconnect 2 pipelines of the electric oil pump.

caution
All disconnected oil pipe joints shall be sealed to prevent the entry of debris and residual oil from flowing out.

15 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the harness accessory. 16 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the electric oil pump, and remove the electric oil pump.

Figure p2023
Figure p2023
Figure p2023
Figure p2024

Installation Procedures 1 Move the electric oil pump to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the electric oil pump.

Torque: 44 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
Figure p2024
Figure p2025
Figure p2025
Figure p2025

3 Install 2 fixing bolts of the harness accessory.

Torque: 44 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

4 Connect 2 pipelines of the electric oil pump.

Figure p2026

5 Connect 1 high voltage harness connector of the electric oil pump.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

6 Install the left side wall lower trim panel mounting frame assembly. 7 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 2. 8 Install the left side wall mounting bracket 1. 9 Install the side wall upper mounting bracket assembly 2. 10 Install the left side wall lower trim panel assembly. 11 Install the left front wheel housing rear body. 12 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 13 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 14 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 15 Connect the battery negative cable. 16 Close the front flip cover plate. 17 Close the door.

8.13.5.3 Replacement of Steering Fluid Reservoir

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 5 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. 6 Remove the steering fluid reservoir assembly.

7 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the steering fluid reservoir. 8 Disconnect 2 pipelines of the steering fluid reservoir.

caution
All disconnected oil pipe joints shall be sealed to prevent the entry of debris and residual oil from flowing out.

9 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the steering fluid reservoir, and remove the steering fluid reservoir with bracket.

Figure p2027
Figure p2027
Figure p2027

10 Disengage 1 fixing clip of the steering fluid reservoir. 11 Remove 4 fixing bolts and nuts connecting the steering fluid reservoir to the steering fluid reservoir bracket. 12 Remove the steering fluid reservoir. Installation Procedures

Figure p2028
Figure p2028
Figure p2029
Figure p2029
Figure p2029

1 Move the steering fluid reservoir to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts and nuts connecting the steering fluid reservoir to the steering fluid reservoir bracket.

Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)

3 Install 1 fixing clip of the steering fluid reservoir. 4 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the steering fluid reservoir with bracket.

Torque: 155 +/- 14.75 (ft lbs)
Figure p2030
Figure p2030

5 Connect 2 pipelines of the steering fluid reservoir. 6 Connect 1 harness connector of the steering fluid reservoir.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

7 Install the steering fluid reservoir assembly. 8 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 9 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 10 Connect the battery negative cable. 11 Close the front flip cover plate. 12 Close the door.

8.13.5.4 Replacement of Transmission Hydraulic Oil

Removal Procedures 1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the transmission hydraulic oil filter element.

3 Disconnect the oil inlet hose. 4 Drain the transmission hydraulic oil. Installation Procedures

Figure p2031
Figure p2032

1 Connect the oil inlet hose. 2 Add the transmission hydraulic oil. 3 Turn the steering wheel several times between the extreme positions on the left and right sides until the steering fluid level in the steering fluid reservoir no longer drops and no bubbles are generated.

caution
The steering wheel shall not stay in the extreme position for more than 5 seconds to avoid damaging the steering gear.

4 Check the steering hydraulic oil level.

caution
It is normal for the oil level to exceed the upper limit scale by 1-2mm.
Figure p2034
Figure p2034

5 Install the transmission hydraulic oil filter element. 6 Lower the front end of the vehicle.

Figure p2032

8.13.5.5 Replacement of Transmission Hydraulic Oil Filter Element

Removal Procedures

1 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 2 Remove the filler cap. 3 Remove the transmission hydraulic oil filter element. Installation Procedures

Figure p2033
Figure p2033
Figure p2045
Figure p2044
Figure p2044
Figure p2044
Figure p2041
Figure p2040

1 Install the transmission hydraulic oil filter element. 2 Install the filler cap. 3 Lower the vehicle.

Figure p2035

8.14 Brake Pedal and Transmission Device3504

8.14.1 Braking Schematic Diagram

8.14.1.1 Braking Schematic Diagram

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the electric oil pump to the chassis harness bracket, and the fixing bolt connecting the brake pedal assembly to the white body assemblyM8(18.5 +/- 2) ft lbs

8.14.2 Specifications

8.14.2.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p2037

8.14.3 Decomposition Diagram

8.14.3.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Brake Pedal Assy 3. Hexagon Flange Bolt 2. Accelerator Pedal Assy 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p2038

8.14.4 Inspect

8.14.4.1 Inspection of Brake System

1. Check the working condition of the vehicle's braking system. When fully braking, the pedal travel shall not exceed 3/4 of the full travel. 2. Check the sealing condition of the brake pipeline and joints, and confirm that there is no leakage. 3. Check the valve joints for looseness or air leakage.

8.14.4.2 Inspection of Brake Pad for Wear

1. Lift the vehicle to the appropriate position and remove the wheels. 2. Check the thickness of the inner and outer friction plates through the observation holes on the clamp body. 3. Remove the rear friction plate. 4. Check the thickness of the rear friction plate.

caution
If the thickness is less than the minimum thickness, replace the friction plates as a set.
If the thickness of the inner and outer friction plates is less than the specified minimum thickness or if there is cracking, rupture or damage to the friction plates, they need to be replaced as a set.
Figure p2039

8.14.5 Dismantling and Installation

8.14.5.1 Replacement of Accelerator Pedal Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 6 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 7 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 8 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 9 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the accelerator pedal assembly.

10 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the accelerator pedal assembly. 11 Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the accelerator pedal assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the accelerator pedal assembly.

Torque: 8 +/- .75 (ft lbs)
Figure p2040

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the accelerator pedal assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 5 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 6 Install the right switch panel assembly. 7 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 9 Connect the battery negative cable. 10 Close the front flip cover plate. 11 Close the door.

8.14.5.2 Replacement of Brake Pedal Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 6 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 7 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 9 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 11 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly.

12 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 13 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 16 Remove the steering column lower shield assembly. 17 Remove the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 18 Remove the front windshield cover plate assembly. 19 Remove the steering column fixing bracket 1. 20 Remove the steering column fixing bracket 2. 21 Remove the brake signal transmitter assembly. 22 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the brake pedal assembly. 23 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the brake pedal assembly.

Figure p2042
Figure p2042

24 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the brake pedal assembly, and remove the brake pedal assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2043
Figure p2043

1 Move the brake pedal assembly to the mounting position, and install the 4 fixing bolts of the brake pedal assembly.

Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)

2 Connect 1 air pipe of the brake pedal assembly.

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the brake pedal assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the brake signal transmitter assembly. 5 Install the steering column fixing bracket 2. 6 Install the steering column fixing bracket 1. 7 Install the front windshield cover plate assembly. 8 Install the primary wiper arm blade assembly (nozzle and hose). 9 Install the steering column lower shield assembly. 10 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 11 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 12 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 13 Install the right switch panel assembly. 14 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 15 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 16 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 17 Install the left switch panel assembly. 18 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 19 Install the combination switch lower shield. 20 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 21 Connect the battery negative cable. 22 Close the front flip cover plate. 23 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the ABS solenoid valve bracket to the frame assemblyM14103 +/-7.52 (ft lbs)
Fixed bolts connecting the single channel module assembly to the single channel module bracketM1270 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the dual channel module assembly and the dual channel module bracketM1270 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the ABS solenoid valve assembly to the ABS solenoid valve bracketM818.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the trailer module assembly to the trailer connection bracketM818.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
Pressure sensor fixed on the three-way joint interface of the gas storage cylinderM1218.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
Low pressure alarm switch fixed on the valve tee joint interfaceM1218.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
Test connector fixed on T-shaped teeM1218.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut for the direct connector fixed trailer connector bracket connectionM1837 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
Bent joint fixed on valve interfaceM2222 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
Fixed on the T-shaped joint at the air chamber interfaceM1618.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
The fixing nut of the brake spiral pipe assemblyM1837 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)
Fixed nut of brake hose assemblyM1837 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

8.15 Brake Line Device3506· 10g

8.15.1 Specifications

8.15.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p2047

8.15.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.15.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Through The Hole Sheath 20. Sealing Gasket 2. Hexagon Flange Bolt 21. Hex Thin Nut 3. Wire Harness Bracket 22. Bend Joint 4. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 23. Ebs Axle Modulator Assy 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 24. Nut Seat NG8 6. Test Connector 25. Nut Seat Ng12 7. Sealing Gasket 26. Plug 8. Hex Thin Nut 27. Ebs Axle Modulator Bracket 9. Sealing Gasket 28. Hexagon Flange Bolt 10. O-Ring 29. Hexagon Flange Bolt 11. Brake Hose Assy 30. Brake Bundle Assy 12. Nut Seat Ng12 31. Large Washer 13. Snap Ring Ng12 32. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Washer Ng12 33. Brake Signal Transmitter Assy 15. ABS Solenoid Valve Assy 34. Brake System Parameter Label 16. Solenoid Modulator Valve Brakecket 37. Hexagon Flange Bolt 17. Hexagon Flange Bolt 44. Hexagon Flange Bolt

18. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 47. Hexagon Flange Bolt 19. O-Ring 50. Hexagon Flange Bolt

3. Wire Harness Bracket 28. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 47. Hexagon Flange Bolt 5. Hexagon Flange Bolt 48. Ebs Axle Modulator Bracket 12. Nut Seat Ng12 49. Ebs Axle Modulator Assy 13. Snap Ring Ng12 50. Hexagon Flange Bolt 14. Washer Ng12 51. Bundle Fixing Bracket 24. Nut Seat NG8 52. Low Pressure Warning Switch 25. Nut Seat Ng12

Figure p2049
Figure p2050

8.15.3 Dismantling and Installation

8.15.3.1 Replacement of Brake Signal Transmitter Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the IP left access cover plate assembly. 7 Remove the left switch panel assembly. 8 Remove the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Remove the IP left front trim panel assembly. 10 Remove the IP right access cover plate assembly. 11 Remove the right switch panel assembly. 12 Remove the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 13 Remove the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 14 Remove the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 15 Remove the steering column lower shield assembly. 16 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the brake signal transmitter assembly.

17 Disconnect 4 air pipes of the brake signal transmitter assembly. 18 Remove 4 fixing nuts of the brake signal transmitter assembly. 19 Remove the brake signal transmitter assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2051
Figure p2051
Figure p2052
Figure p2052
Figure p2052

1 Move the brake signal transmitter assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing nuts of the brake signal transmitter assembly.

Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 4 air pipes of the brake signal transmitter assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the brake signal transmitter assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the steering column lower shield assembly. 6 Install the IP right front upper trim panel assembly. 7 Install the IP right front lower trim panel assembly. 8 Install the right switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 9 Install the right switch panel assembly. 10 Install the IP right access cover plate assembly. 11 Install the IP left front trim panel assembly. 12 Install the left switch panel lower trim panel assembly. 13 Install the left switch panel assembly. 14 Install the IP left access cover plate assembly. 15 Install the combination switch lower shield. 16 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 17 Connect the battery negative cable. 18 Close the front flip cover plate. 19 Close the door.

Figure p2053

8.15.3.2 Replacement of ABS Solenoid Valve Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the ABS solenoid valve assembly.

6 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 7 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 8 Remove the ABS solenoid valve assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2054
Figure p2054
Figure p2055
Figure p2055
Figure p2055

1 Move the ABS solenoid valve assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the ABS solenoid valve assembly.

Torque: 44 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 2 air pipes of the ABS solenoid valve assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the ABS solenoid valve assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

Figure p2056
Figure p2056

8.15.3.3 Replacement of Brake Hose Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 3 harness straps of the brake hose assembly. 3 Remove 2 joints of the brake hose assembly. 4 Remove the brake hose assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2057
Figure p2057

1 Move the brake hose assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 joints of the brake hose assembly. 3 Connect 3 harness straps of the brake hose assembly.

8.15.3.4 Replacement of Single Channel Module Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Remove the single channel module assembly with bracket.

6 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the single channel module assembly. 7 Disconnect 4 air pipes of the single channel module assembly.

Figure p2058
Figure p2058
Figure p2058
Figure p2059

8 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the single channel module assembly. 9 Remove the single channel module assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the single channel module assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the single channel module assembly.

Torque:18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
Figure p2059
Figure p2060
Figure p2060
Figure p2060

3 Connect 4 air pipes of the single channel module assembly. 4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the single channel module assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the single channel module assembly with bracket. 6 Connect the battery negative cable. 7 Close the front flip cover plate. 8 Close the door.

Figure p2061

8.15.3.5 Replacement of Trailer Control Module Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 8 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the trailer control module assembly.

9 Disconnect 5 air pipes of the trailer control module assembly. 10 Remove 3 fixing nuts of the trailer control module assembly. 11 Remove the trailer control module assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2062
Figure p2062
Figure p2063
Figure p2063
Figure p2063

1 Move the trailer control module assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing nuts of the trailer control module assembly.

Torque: 103 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 5 air pipes of the trailer control module assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the trailer control module assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

Figure p2064

8.15.3.6 Replacement of Brake Spiral Tube Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the brake spiral tube assembly. 3 Remove the brake spiral tube assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2065

1 Move the brake spiral tube assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 2 air pipes of the brake spiral tube assembly.

Figure p2065

8.15.3.7 Replacement of Trailer Connector Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the trailer connector assembly. 3 Remove the trailer connector assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2066

1 Move the trailer connector assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 air pipe of the trailer connector assembly.

Figure p2066

8.15.3.8 Replacement of Trailer Connector Assembly (control)

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 1 air pipe of the trailer connector assembly (control). 3 Remove the trailer connector assembly (control). Installation Procedures

Figure p2067

1 Move the trailer connector assembly (control) to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 air pipe of the trailer connector assembly (control).

Figure p2067

8.15.3.9 Replacement of Dual Channel Module Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the dual channel module assembly.

6 Disconnect 7 air pipes of the dual channel module assembly. 7 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the dual channel module assembly. 8 Remove the dual channel module assembly.

Figure p2068
Figure p2068
Figure p2068
Figure p2069
Figure p2069

Installation Procedures 1 Move the dual channel module assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the dual channel module assembly.

Torque: 70 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 7 air pipes of the dual channel module assembly.

Figure p2070
Figure p2070

4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the dual channel module assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

8.15.3.10 Replacement of Low Pressure Alarm Switch

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
Figure p2071

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the low pressure alarm switch. 5 Remove the low pressure alarm switch. Installation Procedures 1 Move the low pressure alarm switch to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the low pressure alarm switch.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

Figure p2071

8.15.3.11 Replacement of Pressure Sensor

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the pressure sensor. 5 Remove the pressure sensor. Installation Procedures 1 Move the pressure sensor to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 harness connector of the pressure sensor.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".
Figure p2106
Figure p2106
Figure p2105

3 Connect the battery negative cable. 4 Close the front flip cover plate. 5 Close the door.

Fastener SpecificationsSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the parking solenoid valve assembly and the frame assemblyM14103 +/- 7.5 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the parking solenoid valve assembly and the parking solenoid valve bracketM818.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
NG8 nut seat on the interface of the parking solenoid valve assemblyM167.5 - 12 (ft lbs)
NG12 nut seat on the interface of the parking solenoid valve assemblyM227.5 - 12 (ft lbs)

8.16 Parking Brake Control Device3508· 1g

8.16.1 Specifications

8.16.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p2074

8.16.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.16.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Parking Solenoid Valve Assy 8. Nut Seat Ng12 2. Parking Solenoid Valve Bracket 9. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 3. Washer Ng8 10. Hexagon Flange Bolt 4. Snap Ring NG8 11. Plug 5. Nut seat NG8 12. Hexagon Flange Bolt 6. Washer Ng12 13. Hexagon Flange Lock Nut_All Metal 7. Snap Ring Ng12

8.16.3 System Schematic Diagram

8.16.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

Tractor EPB Trailer EPB

SPN,FMIFault DescriptionExclusion Method
13138,3ON power supply voltage is too high (greater than 32V)Refer to EPB Power Fault
13138,4ON supply voltage is too low (less than 16V)
13138,5The EPB module assembly valve is powered off (normally powered)
15186,3The main valve voltage is higher than 32V
15186,4The main valve voltage is lower than 16V
15186,5The main valve is disconnected
13650,5The standby valve is disconnected
14418,3ON the power supply is too high
14418,4ON power The power supply is too low
13650,3The power supply to the standby valve is too high
13650,4The power supply to the standby valve is too low
193,9CAN packets are lost or delayed. ProcedureRefer to EPB Communication Fault
4289,5The CAN cable is disconnected
22465,19The whole car CAN Busoff
19393,9The AutoDrive_ADCU message is lost
19393,19The AutoDrive_ADCU check error
19393,8AutoDrive_ADCU Counter error
19649,9The AutoDrive_rADCU message is lost

8.16.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

8.16.4.1 Diagnostic Description

Before diagnosing the malfunction of the parking brake control device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the parking brake control device before starting the system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps in the event of a malfunction, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the parking brake control device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the

diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of faulty parts. 8.16.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check for aftermarket devices that may affect the operation of the parking brake control system, ensuring that these devices do not affect the operation of the parking brake control system.

• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.16.4.3 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (SPN, FMI)

EPB

SPN,FMIFault DescriptionExclusion Method
19649,19The AutoDrive_rADCU check error
19649,8AutoDrive_rADCU Counter error
19137,9EPBC1_ADCU is lost
19137,19EPBC1_ADCU check error
19137,8EPBC1_ADCU Counter is incorrect
20161,9EPBC1_rADCU is lost
20161,19EPBC1_rADCU check error
20161,8EPBC1_rADCU Counter is incorrect
15811,9Clutch signal is lost
20417,2The clutch signal is invalid
22721,19Redundant CANbusoff
195,9Packets required by EPB in the redundant can are lost Procedure
14674,11The EPB module assembly valve body is faultyRefer to EPB Internal Fault
13906,3The trailer independent brake solenoid valve shorted the power supply
13906,6Trailer independent brake solenoid valve short circuit to the ground
13906,5Trailer independent brake solenoid valve disconnected
23122,4The output of the parking pressure sensor is abnormal
23122,3The output of the parking pressure sensor is abnormal
135250,2Tilt sensor fault
16722,3The parking solenoid is short circuiting the power supply
16722,6Parking solenoid to ground short circuit
16722,5Parking solenoid valve disconnected
16978,3Release solenoid valve short circuit to power supply
16978,6Release solenoid valve to ground short circuit
16978,5Release solenoid valve disconnected
17234,3The trailer detects the short circuit of the solenoid valve to the power supply
17234,6Trailer detects short circuit of solenoid valve to ground
SPN,FMIFault DescriptionExclusion Method
17234,5Trailer detection solenoid valve disconnected
21330,25The ECU failed to read the memory
21330,24The ECU write memory is faulty. Procedure
12882,4Main valve electric relay cannot drive output
12626,4Backup valve electrical relay cannot drive output
12882,3Main valve electric relay cannot cut off output
12626,3The backup valve electrical relay cannot cut off the output
34898,11The EPB system is seriously faulty
14418,11The EPB switch is faulty. ProcedureRefer to Right Central Control Switch - Electronic Parking Switch Fault
17794,3The release end of the switch is short circuited
17794,6The release end of the switch is short circuited to the ground
17794,5The switch release end is disconnected
18050,3Switch parking terminal electrical short circuit
18050,6Switch parking terminal to ground short circuit
18050,5The switch parking terminal is disconnected
18050,0The switching linearity is not proportional
18050,10Switch card lag
18050,2Switch missing
18306,5Switch power supply exception
18562,4The closing position of the parking switch is abnormal
18818,3Relieve abnormal switch closing position
19074,3Parking indicator light to electric short circuit
19330,5Parking indicator disconnected
9603,5Hard line parking light disconnected
9603,3Hard parking lights are short circuited
SPN,FMIFault DescriptionExclusion Method
9859,5The redundant hard cable of the parking switch is abnormal
10115,5Alleviates redundant switch hard line anomalies
12995,9The gear signal is lostRefer to EPB Reports GSM Related Fault
12993,2The gear signal is invalid
13251,9Throttle signal lossRefer to EPB Reports VDC Related Fault
13507,9Torque signal loss
13763,9The foot brake signal is missing
14019,9Barometric signal loss
15299,9HaltBrakeMode signal is lost
15555,9The XBR signal is lost
13249,2Invalid throttle signal
13505,2Torque signal invalid
13761,2The foot brake signal is invalid
14017,2Barometric failure
15297,2The HaltBrakeMode signal is invalid
15553,2The XBR signal is invalid
16323,9The vehicle ready signal is lost
16321,2The vehicle ready signal is invalid
26450,3The EBS system cannot respond to XBR requestsRefer to EPB Reports EBS Related Fault
14162,3The EBS system cannot respond to temporary parking brake requests
14275,9Speed signal loss
14531,9Speed signal loss
14787,9ABS wheel speed report lost
14273,2Speed signal invalid
14529,2Invalid speed signal
14785,2The ABS wheel speed signal is invalid
8899,10Abnormal speed jump
8899,26Excessive speed error
12739,9Loss of seat belt signalRefer to EPB Reports BDCU Related Fault
15043,9Ready signal loss
14737,2Invalid seat belt sign
15041,2Invalid Ready signal
16067,9Gate signal lossRefer to EPB Reports DCM Related Fault
16065,2Gate signal invalid
SPN,FMIFault DescriptionExclusion Method
16579,9The rear axle running pressure signal is lostRefer to EPB Reports CDC Related Fault
16577,2The rear axle running pressure signal is invalid
19026,1When the vehicle is braking, there is no air in the brake lineRefer to Parking Pipeline Leakage Fault
19282,0There is air in the brake line when the vehicle is not braking
19538,10The brake line is leaking
18770,7Parking system inflation time out
22866,7Parking system exhaust time out
19539,10Parking pipe leakage rate is too large
19027,1Parking status The parking pressure is too highRefer to Abnormal Pressure In The Parking Pipeline
19283,0Running status Parking pressure is too low
29009,6The left sensor is short-circuited to the groundRefer to Left ABS Sensor Fault
29009,3The sensor on the left is short-circuited
29009,5The left sensor is disconnected. Procedure
29009,7Missing tooth on left sensor
29009,1The sensor gap on the left is too large
33105,6The right sensor is short-circuited to the groundRefer to Right ABS Sensor Fault
33105,3The right sensor is short circuited Procedure
33105,5The right sensor is disconnected Procedure
33105,7Missing tooth on right sensor
33105,1The sensor gap on the right is too large
SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
13138,3ON power supply voltage is too high (greater than 32V)The voltage of pin 25 on the controller is higher than 32V for more than 5 seconds1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.Tractor EPB
13138,4ON supply voltage is too low (less than 16V)The voltage of pin 25 at the controller end is lower than 16V for more than 5 seconds

8.16.4.4 EPB Power Fault

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
13138,5The EPB module assembly valve is powered off (normally powered)Pin 25 on the controller does not detect the voltage for more than 1 second
15186,3The main valve voltage is higher than 32VThe input voltage of pin 25 at the controller end is higher than 32V for more than 5 seconds
15186,4The main valve voltage is lower than 16VThe input voltage of pin 25 at the controller end is lower than 16V for more than 5 seconds
15186,5The main valve is disconnectedPin 25 on the controller does not detect voltage for more than 1 second
13650,5The standby valve is disconnectedPin 9 on the controller does not detect voltage for more than 1 second
14418,3ON the power supply is too highThe input voltage of pin 10 at the controller end is higher than 32V for more than 5 seconds
14418,4ON power The power supply is too lowThe input voltage of pin 10 at the controller end is less than 16V for more than 5 seconds
13650,3The power supply to the standby valve is too highThe input voltage of pin 9 at the controller end is higher than 32V for more than 5 seconds
13650,4The power supply to the standby valve is too lowThe input voltage of pin 9 at the controller end is lower than 16V for more than 5 seconds

2.Circuit Diagram

8.16.4.4 EPB Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
193,9CAN packets are lost or delayed. ProcedureThe CAN message is lost or the delay exceeds 3 seconds1. Wiring harness 2.Tractor EPB
4289,5The CAN cable is disconnectedThe CAN line is disconnected and cannot receive or send packets
22465,19The whole car CAN BusoffEPB system CAN communication detects Bus off
19393,9The AutoDrive_ADCU message is lostAutoDrive_ADCU message is lost, more than 500ms
19393,19The AutoDrive_ADCU check errorAutoDrive_ADCU validation error
19393,8AutoDrive_ADCU Counter errorAutoDrive_ADCU Counter error
19649,9The AutoDrive_rADCU message is lostAutoDrive_rADCU message is lost, more than 500ms
19649,19The AutoDrive_rADCU check errorAutoDrive_rADCU validation error
19649,8AutoDrive_rADCU Counter errorAutoDrive_rADCU Counter error
19137,9EPBC1_ADCU is lostThe EPBC1_ADCU packet is lost and exceeds 500ms
19137,19EPBC1_ADCU check errorEPBC1_ADCU verification error
19137,8EPBC1_ADCU Counter is incorrectEPBC1_ADCU Counter error
20161,9EPBC1_rADCU is lostThe EPBC1_rADCU packet is lost and exceeds 500ms
20161,19EPBC1_rADCU check errorEPBC1_rADCU verification error
20161,8EPBC1_rADCU Counter is incorrectEPBC1_rADCU Counter error
15811,9Clutch signal is lostClutch signal loss, more than 500ms

Step 3:Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides Tractor EPB? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Malfunction – No: Next step Step 4:Check the Tractor EPB power supply and grounding harness. Step 5:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

8.16.4.5 EPB Communication Fault

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
20417,2The clutch signal is invalidThe clutch signal sends an invalid value
22721,19Redundant CANbusoffEPB redundant CAN communication detects Bus off
195,9Packets required by EPB in the redundant can are lost ProcedureRedundant CAN requires packet loss of more than 3s

2.Circuit Diagram

8.16.4.5 EPB Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
14674,11The EPB module assembly valve body is faultyThere is a failure inside the EPB module assembly for more than 1 second1.Tractor EPB
13906,3The trailer independent brake solenoid valve shorted the power supplyThe trailer independent brake spool inside the module assembly was shorted with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second
13906,6Trailer independent brake solenoid valve short circuit to the groundThe trailer independent brake valve core inside the module assembly is short-connected to the ground, and the trailer independent brake valve has been working for more than 1 second
13906,5Trailer independent brake solenoid valve disconnectedThe trailer independent brake spool inside the module assembly is not connected for more than 1 second
23122,4The output of the parking pressure sensor is abnormalThe output voltage of the parking pressure sensor inside the EPB module is less than 0.2V, more than 10s
23122,3The output of the parking pressure sensor is abnormalThe output voltage of the parking pressure sensor inside the EPB module is greater than 4.8V, more than 10s
135250,2Tilt sensor faultEPB module internal tilt sensor Angle output or output signal is abnormal
16722,3The parking solenoid is short circuiting the power supplyThe parking solenoid valve spool pair inside the module assembly is shorted with the source (24V) for more than 1 second
16722,6Parking solenoid to ground short circuitthe valve core of the parking solenoid valve inside the module assembly is short connected to the ground, and the parking solenoid valve has been working for more than 1 second
16722,5Parking solenoid valve disconnectedThe parking solenoid valve spool inside the module assembly is not connected for more than 1 second
16978,3Release solenoid valve short circuit to power supplyThe module assembly internal release solenoid valve spool is shorted with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second

Step 4:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

8.16.4.6 EPB Internal Fault

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
16978,6Release solenoid valve to ground short circuitmodule assembly internal release solenoid valve spool and ground short, more than 1 second, release parking solenoid valve has been working
16978,5Release solenoid valve disconnectedThe module assembly internal release solenoid valve spool is not connected for more than 1 second
17234,3The trailer detects the short circuit of the solenoid valve to the power supplyThe trailer detection spool inside the module assembly is shorted with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second
17234,6Trailer detects short circuit of solenoid valve to groundThe trailer detection valve spool inside the module assembly is short connected to the ground, and the trailer detection solenoid valve has been working for more than 1 second
17234,5Trailer detection solenoid valve disconnectedThe trailer detection spool inside the module assembly is not connected for more than 1 second
21330,25The ECU failed to read the memoryThe ECU failed to read memory
21330,24The ECU write memory is faulty. ProcedureThe ECU failed to write to memory
12882,4Main valve electric relay cannot drive outputThe EPB system main valve electrical relay cannot drive output, the relay cannot pull, the main valve electrical disconnect, enable the standby valve power
12626,4Backup valve electrical relay cannot drive outputThe EPB system standby valve electrical relay cannot drive output, the relay cannot pull
12882,3Main valve electric relay cannot cut off outputPower-on self-test EPB system main valve electrical relay can not cut off the output, the relay can not be disconnected
12626,3The backup valve electrical relay cannot cut off the outputPower-on self-test EPB system standby valve electric relay can not cut off the output, the relay can not be disconnected
34898,11The EPB system is seriously faultyThe EPB system has multiple failures, and the electronically controlled parking system cannot be used

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade.

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
14418,11The EPB switch is faulty. ProcedureThe EPB switch or connecting harness fails for more than 3 seconds1. Wiring harness 2.Right central control switch - electronic parking switch 3.Tractor EPB
17794,3The release end of the switch is short circuitedThe internal switch release terminal of the EPB switch is short-circuited with the power supply (24V) for more than 200ms
17794,6The release end of the switch is short circuited to the groundThe internal switch release end of the EPB switch is short-circuited with the ground for more than 200ms
17794,5The switch release end is disconnectedThe internal switch release terminal of the EPB switch is not connected for more than 200ms
18050,3Switch parking terminal electrical short circuitThe internal switch parking terminal of the EPB switch is shorted with the power supply (24V), more than 200ms
18050,6Switch parking terminal to ground short circuitEPB switch internal switch parking terminal and ground short, more than 200ms
18050,5The switch parking terminal is disconnectedThe EPB switch internal switch parking terminal is not connected, more than 200ms
18050,0The switching linearity is not proportionalThe two routing voltages inside the EPB switch are disproportionate, exceeding 200ms
18050,10Switch card lagThe EPB switch is stuck for more than 3s
18050,2Switch missingThe controller does not receive the EPB switch for more than 1s
18306,5Switch power supply exceptionThe EPB switch supply voltage is less than 16V or more than 32V, more than 1s
18562,4The closing position of the parking switch is abnormalAbnormal closing position of the parking switch, more than 200ms
18818,3Relieve abnormal switch closing positionThe closure position of the relief switch is abnormal, exceeding 200ms
19074,3Parking indicator light to electric short circuitParking indicator shorted with power supply (24V), more than 200ms
19330,5Parking indicator disconnectedParking indicator disconnected for more than 200ms

Step 4:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

8.16.4.7 Right Central Control Switch - Electronic Parking Switch Fault

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
9603,5Hard line parking light disconnectedThe hard line of the parking P light is disconnected for more than 2s
9603,3Hard parking lights are short circuitedA short circuit of more than 2s is detected in the hard wire pair of the parking P-light
9859,5The redundant hard cable of the parking switch is abnormalSwitch redundancy Hard line and switch message status are inconsistent for more than 2 seconds
10115,5Alleviates redundant switch hard line anomaliesSwitch redundancy Hard line and switch message status are inconsistent for more than 2 seconds

2.Circuit Diagram

8.16.4.7 Right Central Control Switch - Electronic Parking Switch Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the right central control switch - electronic parking switch and Tractor EPB.

Parking Switch StatusSwitch Status
Turn off parking brake switchTurn off the parking brake switch and turn on the parking release switch
Turn on parking brake switchThe parking brake switch is turned on, and the parking release switch is turned off
SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
12995,9The gear signal is lostThe gear signal is lost, more than 500ms1. Wiring harness 2. Shift switch 3.Tractor EPB
12993,2The gear signal is invalidThe gear signal sends an invalid value
SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
13251,9Throttle signal lossThrottle signal is lost, more than 500ms1. Wiring harness 2.VDC 3.Tractor EPB
13507,9Torque signal lossloss of torque signal, over 500ms
13763,9The foot brake signal is missingThe foot brake signal is lost, more than 500ms
14019,9Barometric signal lossAir pressure signal is lost for more than 5 seconds

Step 4:Check if the right central control switch group is normal? – Yes: Next step – No: Replace the right central control switch - electronic parking switch. Refer to Replacement Of The Right Central Control Switch Group Step 5:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for GSM related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting GSM related issues. – No: Next step Step 4:Rewrite the configuration code for the gear shift switch, reload the software, and upgrade. Step 5:Replace the gear shift switch. Refer to Replacement Of Combination Switch Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
15299,9HaltBrakeMode signal is lostHaltBrakeMode signal loss, more than 500ms
15555,9The XBR signal is lostXBR signal loss, more than 500ms
13249,2Invalid throttle signalThe throttle signal sends an invalid value
13505,2Torque signal invalidThe torque signal sends an invalid value
13761,2The foot brake signal is invalidThe foot brake signal sends an invalid value
14017,2Barometric failureThe air pressure signal sends an invalid value
15297,2The HaltBrakeMode signal is invalidThe HaltBrakeMode signal sent an invalid value
15553,2The XBR signal is invalidThe XBR signal sent an invalid value
16323,9The vehicle ready signal is lostVehicle high voltage ready signal loss, more than 500ms
16321,2The vehicle ready signal is invalidThe high voltage ready signal of the vehicle sends an invalid value
SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
26450,3The EBS system cannot respond to XBR requestsDuring emergency braking, the EPB sends a braking request, and the EBS system does not respond to the request within 1 second1. Wiring harness 2.EBS 3.Tractor EPB
14162,3The EBS system cannot respond to temporary parking brake requestsConfigure for EBS to do stoppage situations When performing near-stop braking, the EPB sends a braking request, and the EBS system does not respond to the request within 1 second
14275,9Speed signal lossThe speed signal is lost, more than 500ms

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for VDC related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting VDC related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:VDC rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace VDC.Refer to Replacement Of Vehicle Domain Controller Assembly Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
14531,9Speed signal lossLoss of speed signal, over 500ms
14787,9ABS wheel speed report lostABS wheel speed signal is lost, more than 500ms
14273,2Speed signal invalidThe speed signal sends an invalid value
14529,2Invalid speed signalThe speed signal sends an invalid value
14785,2The ABS wheel speed signal is invalidThe ABS wheel speed signal sends an invalid value
8899,10Abnormal speed jumpAbnormal jump in the speed signal, deviation of more than 9 mph
8899,26Excessive speed errorDifferent types of speed signals deviate by more than 9 mph for more than 20 seconds
SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
12739,9Loss of seat belt signalSeat belt signal lost, more than 500ms1. Wiring harness 2.BDCU 3.Tractor EPB
15043,9Ready signal lossThe Ready signal is lost, more than 500ms
14737,2Invalid seat belt signThe seat belt signal sent an invalid value
15041,2Invalid Ready signalThe Ready signal sends an invalid value

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for EBS related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting EBS related issues. – No: Next step Step 4:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for BDCU related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting BDCU related faults. – No: Next step Step 4:BDCU rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade.

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
16067,9Gate signal lossDoor signal loss, more than 500ms1. Wiring harness 2.DCM 3.Tractor EPB
16065,2Gate signal invalidThe gate signal sends an invalid value
SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
16579,9The rear axle running pressure signal is lostThe vehicle rear axle running pressure signal is lost, more than 500ms1. Wiring harness 2.CDC 3.Tractor EPB
16577,2The rear axle running pressure signal is invalidThe vehicle running pressure signal sends an invalid value

Step 5:Replace the BDCU. Refer to Replacement Of Body Domain Control Uint Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for DCM related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting DCM related issues. – No: Next step Step 4:DCM rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace DCM. Refer to Replacement Of DCM Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check for CDC related fault codes? – Yes: Prioritize troubleshooting CDC related issues. – No: Next step Step 4:CDC rewrites configuration codes, reloads software, and upgrades. Step 5:Replace CDC.Refer to Replacement Of Cockpit Domain Controller

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
19026,1When the vehicle is braking, there is no air in the brake lineWhen the stop relay valve is working The pressure sensor detects that the pressure is less than 1bar and more than 1s1. Braking system 2.Tractor EPB
19282,0There is air in the brake line when the vehicle is not brakingAt speeds greater than 3 mph After stepping on the accelerator, the pressure sensor is monitored to monitor the driving air path, and the air pressure is always higher than 1bar for more than 10s
19538,10The brake line is leakingNear stop relay valve operation The pressure sensor monitors the driving air route and detects frequent air leakage in the pipeline, which fails to establish the pressure set at the stop after continuous working for 3 cycles
18770,7Parking system inflation time outWhen the parking is released, the parking pressure for 5 seconds is not more than 4.5bar, and the final pressure can be charged more than 6bar
22866,7Parking system exhaust time outWhen parking, exhaust for 5 seconds parking pressure is not less than 1bar
19539,10Parking pipe leakage rate is too largeRelease the parking vehicle, the speed is greater than 3 mph, and the continuous air injection is more than 3 times
SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
19027,1Parking status The parking pressure is too highIn the parking state, the parking pressure is greater than 1bar, more than 10 seconds, or the parking pressure is more than 2bar after 5s.1. Wiring harness 2. Braking system 3.Tractor EPB

Step 6:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 7:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 8:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

8.16.4.14 Parking Pipeline Leakage Fault

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the braking system. Refer to Check The Braking System Step 4:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

8.16.4.15 Abnormal Pressure In The Parking Pipeline

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
19283,0Running status Parking pressure is too lowThe speed is more than 3 mph, the parking pressure is less than 5bar, more than 10 seconds
SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
29009,6The left sensor is short-circuited to the groundThe left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was shorted with the ground wire for more than 1 second1. Wiring harness 2.Left ABS sensor 3.Tractor EPB
29009,3The sensor on the left is short-circuitedThe left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was short-circuited with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second
29009,5The left sensor is disconnected. ProcedureThe left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was short-circuited with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second
29009,7Missing tooth on left sensorThe left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system lacks teeth
29009,1The sensor gap on the left is too largeExcessive clearance of the left wheel speed sensor of the EPB system

2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection.Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the braking system. Refer to Check The Braking System Step 4:Check for brake pipeline leakage faults. Step 5:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

8.16.4.16 Left ABS Sensor Fault

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.16.4.16 Left ABS Sensor Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
8.16.4.16 Left ABS Sensor Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection X1 C21-8

SPN,FMIDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsFaulty Part
33105,6The right sensor is short-circuited to the groundThe right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system is short-circuited with the ground wire for more than 1 second1. Wiring harness 2.Right ABS sensor 3.Tractor EPB
33105,3The right sensor is short circuited ProcedureThe right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was short-circuited with the power supply (24V) for more than 1 second
33105,5The right sensor is disconnected ProcedureThe right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system was not connected for more than 1 second
33105,7Missing tooth on right sensorThe right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system lacks teeth
33105,1The sensor gap on the right is too largeExcessive clearance of the right wheel speed sensor of the EPB system

Step 3:Check the left ABS sensor. Refer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Malfunction . Rear Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Malfunction Step 4:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

8.16.4.17 Right ABS Sensor Fault

1.SPN, FMI Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:Confirm that SPN and FMI are displayed correctly on the instrument screen. Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection X1 C21-8

Step 3:Check the ABS sensor on the right side. Refer to Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Malfunction . Rear Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Malfunction Step 4:Tractor EPB rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace the Tractor EPB. Refer to Replacement Of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm SPN and FMI.

Figure p2104
Figure p2104

8.16.5 Dismantling and Installation

8.16.5.1 Replacement of Parking Solenoid Valve Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the parking solenoid valve assembly. 6 Disconnect 4 air pipes of the parking solenoid valve assembly.

7 Remove 2 fixing nuts of the parking solenoid valve assembly. 8 Remove the parking solenoid valve assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the parking solenoid valve assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing nuts of the parking solenoid valve assembly.

Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
Figure p2105

3 Connect 4 air pipes of the parking solenoid valve assembly. 4 Connect 1 harness connector of the parking solenoid valve assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the parking solenoid valve assembly, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the zero position.
Figure p2107

8.17 Air Reservoir Device 8.17.1 Dismantling and Installation3513· 5g

8.17.1.1 Replacement of Air Compressor Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Jack the front end of the vehicle. 7 Drain coolant from the power system. 8 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 9 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 10 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 11 Remove the 4 fixing screws of the cover plate and detach the cover plate.

12 Remove the 3 fixing bolts of the harness. 13 Disconnect 4 pipelines of the air compressor assembly.

Figure p2108
Figure p2108
Figure p2108

14 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the ground harness. 15 Remove 1 fixing bolt of the harness bracket. 16 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the air compressor assembly. 17 Remove the air compressor assembly.

Figure p2109
Figure p2109
Figure p2109
Figure p2110
Figure p2110

Installation Procedures 1 Move the air compressor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the air compressor assembly.

Torque: 70 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

3 Install 1 fixing bolt of the harness bracket.

Figure p2111
Figure p2111
Figure p2111

4 Install 1 fixing bolt of the ground wire. 5 Connect 4 pipelines of the air compressor assembly.

Figure p2112
Figure p2112

6 Install the 3 fixing bolts of the harness. 7 Install the 4 fixing screws of the cover plate. 8 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 9 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 10 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 11 Fill coolant in the power system. 12 Lower the front end of the vehicle. 13 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 14 Connect the battery negative cable. 15 Close the front flip cover plate. 16 Close the door.

Figure p2113
Figure p2113

8.17.1.2 Replacement of Air Filter Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable. 5 Perform power-off of high voltage system. 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 8 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 9 Remove 6 fixing screws of the cover plate. 10 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the high voltage harness.

11 Remove 6 fixing bolts of the high voltage harness. 12 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the air filter assembly. 13 Disengage 1 clamp of the air filter assembly. 14 Remove the air filter assembly.

Figure p2114
Figure p2114
Figure p2114
Figure p2115
Figure p2115

Installation Procedures 1 Move the air filter assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 1 clamp of the air filter assembly. 3 Install 4 fixing bolts of the air filter assembly.

Torque: 18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
Figure p2116
Figure p2116
Figure p2116

4 Install 6 fixing screws of the high voltage harness. 5 Install 6 fixing bolts of the high voltage harness.

Torque:22 +/- 2 (ft lbs)

6 Install the 6 fixing screws of the cover plate.

7 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 8 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 9 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 10 Perform power-on of the high voltage system. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

Figure p2117

8.17.1.3 Replacement of Air Inlet Hose

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 3 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 4 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Detach the air inlet hose.

Figure p2118

Installation Procedures 1 Install the air inlet hose.

Figure p2118

2 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 3 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 4 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).

8.17.1.4 Replacement of Air Handling Unit Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly.

8 Disconnect 2 harness connectors of the air handling unit assembly. 9 Disconnect 6 air pipes of the air handling unit assembly. 10 Remove 3 fixing bolts of the air handling unit assembly. 11 Remove the air handling unit assembly.

Figure p2120
Figure p2120
Figure p2120
Figure p2121
Figure p2121

Installation Procedures 1 Move the air handling unit assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing bolts of the air handling unit assembly.

Torque:70 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 6 air pipes of the air handling unit assembly.

Figure p2122

4 Connect 2 harness connectors of the air handling unit assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

5 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 8 Connect the battery negative cable. 9 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

8.17.1.5 Replacement of Drain Valve (front)

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 3 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right).

4 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the drain valve (front). Installation Procedures 1 Move the drain valve (front) to the mounting position. 2 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 3 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 4 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).

Figure p2123

8.17.1.6 Replacement of Drain Valve (rear)

Removal Procedures

1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the drain valve (rear). Installation Procedures 1 Move the drain valve (rear) to the mounting position.

Figure p2124

8.17.1.7 Replacement of Air Reservoir Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Disconnect 3 air pipes of the air reservoir assembly. 3 Remove the air reservoir assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the air reservoir assembly to the mounting position. 2 Connect 3 air pipes of the air reservoir assembly.

Figure p2125

8.17.1.8 Replacement of Air Compressor Steel Pipe Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 3 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 4 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Remove the left deflector lower body.

6 Remove the left charging cover plate assembly. 7 Disconnect 2 air pipes of the air compressor steel pipe assembly.

Figure p2126
Figure p2126

8 Remove 2 pipe clamps of the air compressor steel pipe assembly, and remove the air compressor steel pipe assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2127
Figure p2127
Figure p2128
Figure p2128
Figure p2128

1 Move the air compressor steel pipe assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 pipe clamps of the air compressor steel pipe assembly. 3 Connect 2 air pipes of the air compressor steel pipe assembly.

4 Install the left charging cover plate assembly. 5 Install the left deflector lower body. 6 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 8 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).

8.17.1.9 Replacement of Air Compressor Steel Pipe Assembly (left)

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 3 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 4 Remove the left deflector lower body. 5 Remove the left charging cover plate assembly.

6 Disconnect 2 joints of the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left). 7 Remove 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the 2 pipe clamps of the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left). 8 Remove the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left). Installation Procedures

Figure p2130
Figure p2130
Figure p2131
Figure p2131

1 Move the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left) to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts and nuts of the 2 pipe clamps of the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left).

Torque: 22 +/- 3.5 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 2 joints of the air compressor steel pipe assembly (left). 4 Install the left charging cover plate assembly. 5 Install the left deflector lower body. 6 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 7 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left).

8.17.1.10 Replacement of Air Filter Element

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate.

4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.
Figure p2134

5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 8 Remove the air filter assembly. 9 Disengage 3 clips of the air filter element. 10 Remove the air filter element. Installation Procedures 1 Move the air filter element to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 clips of the air filter element.

Figure p2132

3 Install the air filter assembly. 4 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 9 Close the door.

8.17.1.11 Replacement of Air Filter Element (muffler)

Removal Procedures 1 Release air pressure from the brake system. 2 Open the door. 3 Open the front flip cover plate. 4 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

5 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 6 Remove the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 7 Remove the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 8 Remove the air filter assembly.

Figure p2180
Figure p2180
Figure p2178
Figure p2177
Figure p2175
Figure p2175

9 Disengage 3 clips of the air filter element. 10 Remove the air filter element (muffler). Installation Procedures 1 Move the air filter element (muffler) to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 clips of the air filter element. 3 Install the air filter assembly. 4 Install the back integrated bracket middle cover plate assembly. 5 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (right). 6 Install the back integrated bracket side cover plate assembly (left). 7 Connect the battery negative cable. 8 Close the front flip cover plate. 10 Close the door.

Figure p2134
Fastener nameSpecificationsRange Of Torque
Foot Pounds of Torque (ft lbs)
The fixing bolt connecting the yaw sensor assembly and the frame assemblyM818.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)
The fixing bolts connecting the EBS controller assembly to the EBS bracketM68 +/- .75 (ft lbs)

8.18 EBS Electronic Control Unit Execution Device3568· 3g

8.18.1 Specifications

8.18.1.1 Fastener Specifications

Figure p2136

8.18.2 Decomposition Diagram

8.18.2.1 Decomposition Diagram

1. Angle Sensor Assy 2. Cross Recessed Pan Head Machine Screw

3. Ebs Controller Assy 4. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p2137

5. Yaw Sensor Assy 6. Hexagon Flange Bolt

Figure p2138

8.18.3 System Schematic Diagram

8.18.3.1 Electrical Schematic Diagram

SymptomSuspected Faulty ProjectMeasures
The EBS function is always working or not working at any time1.Wheel speed sensor installation errorReinstall the wheel speed sensor and adjust the gap between the wheel speed sensor and the signal board. Replace the wheel speed sensor or signal board if necessary.
2.The gap between the wheel speed sensor and the signal panel is too large or too small, or foreign objects are blocking it
3.Wheel speed sensor malfunctionRefer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault.Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault.Rear Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault.Rear Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault
4.ABS solenoid valve malfunctionRefer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault.Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault
5.EBS module malfunctionRefer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
C330203The voltage of the ECU is too highRefer to EBS Power Fault
C330204The controller (ECU) voltage is too low

8.18.4 Diagnostic Information and Steps

8.18.4.1 Diagnostic Description

Before diagnosing the malfunction of the EBS electronic control unit execution device, it is important to understand and familiarize oneself with the working principle of the EBS electronic control unit execution device before starting system diagnosis. This will help determine the correct fault diagnosis steps when a malfunction occurs, and more importantly, it will help determine the situation described by the customer belongs to normal operation. Any fault diagnosis of the EBS electronic control unit execution device should start with routine inspection, guiding maintenance personnel to take the next logical step for fault diagnosis. Understanding and correctly using the diagnostic process can shorten the diagnosis time and avoid misjudgment of

faulty parts. 8.18.4.2 Routine Inspection

• Check the after-sales installation devices that may affect the operation of the EBS electronic control unit execution device system, ensuring that these devices cannot affect the operation of the EBS electronic control unit execution device system.

• Check system components that are easily accessible or visible to ensure that there is no obvious damage or potential malfunction. 8.18.4.3 Fault Symptom Table

8.18.4.4 DTC Confirmation

1. Connect the diagnostic tool to the diagnostic interface, read and record the DTC, and then clear the DTC. 2. Run the vehicle again. 3. Read the fault code of the control system again to confirm if there is any fault code output from the system. – Yes:Diagnose based on the output fault code.

– No:Perform intermittent fault check, refer to Inspection Of Intermittent Faults 8.18.4.5 List Of Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)

EBS

Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
C35020DValve power failure
C3F0205Vehicle CAN communication failureRefer to EBS Communication Fault
B030205The ESC CAN communication is faulty
C36020CEEPROM faultRefer to EBS Internal Fault
P210305The DBR is disconnected
P2B0305ESC not detected
B010205The EPM CAN communication of axle 1 and axle 2 is faultyRefer to EBS Private CAN Communication Fault
P220305Foot valve failureRefer to Brake Signal Generator Fault
P340305Trailer valve failureRefer to Trailer Control Valve Fault
P390305The yaw rate sensor is faultyRefer to Yaw Rate Sensor Fault
P3A0305The steering Angle sensor is faultyRefer to Steering Angle Sensor Fault
P150301The gap between the left front sensor and the gear ring is too largeRefer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault
P150306Short-circuited left front sensor
P150305Left front sensor disconnected
P15030BLeft front ring missing teeth, deflection
P160301The gap between the right front sensor and the gear ring is too largeRefer to Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault
P160306Right front sensor short-circuited
P160305Right front sensor disconnected
P16030BRight front ring missing teeth, deflection
P170301The gap between the left rear/left second sensor and the gear ring is too largeRefer to Rear Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault
P170306The left rear/left second sensor is short- circuited
P170305The left rear/left second sensor is disconnected
P17030BMissing teeth and deflection of left rear/ left second ring
P180301The gap between the right rear/right second sensor and the gear ring is too largeRefer to Rear Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault
P180306The right rear/right second sensor is short-circuited
P180305The right rear/right second sensor is disconnected
P18030BMissing teeth and deflection of right rear/right second ring
Fault CodeFault DescriptionExclusion Method
P1D0306Left front solenoid valve short circuitRefer to Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault
P1D0305Left front solenoid valve disconnected
P1E0306Right front solenoid valve short circuitRefer to Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault
P1E0305Right front solenoid valve disconnected
P200306One axle EPM short-circuitRefer to Vehicle Axle Modulator 1M Fault
P200309The Hitotsubashi EPM ECU is faulty
P20030AThe EPM pressure sensor of Hitotsubashi is faulty
P200305One axle EPM is disconnected
P250306Second axle EPM short circuitRefer to Vehicle Axle Modulator 2M Fault
P250309The EPM ECU of axle two is faulty
P25030AThe EPM pressure sensor of the second axle is faulty
P250305axle 2 EPM is disconnected
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C330203The voltage of the ECU is too highThe voltage of the ECU is too highController power-on1. Main battery 2. Low voltage charging system 3. Wiring harness 4.EBS
C330204The controller (ECU) voltage is too lowThe controller (ECU) voltage is too lowController power-on
C35020DValve power failureValve power failureController power-on

8.18.4.6 EBS Power Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.6 EBS Power Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C3F0205Vehicle CAN communicatio- n failureThe EEC1 packet timed out. ProcedureController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.EBS
B030205The ESC CAN communicatio- n is faultyThe ESC CAN communication is abnormalController power-on

Step 3 : Check if there are any other module power fault codes besides EBS? – Yes: Check the main battery. Refer to Inspection Of The Main Battery Check the low-voltage charging system. Refer to DCDC1 Low-voltage Charging System Fault – No: Next step Step 4 : Check the EBS power supply and grounding harness. Step 5 : EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6 : Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.7 EBS Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.7 EBS Communication Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the CAN8 bus communication harness. Refer to Inspection Of CAN8 Bus Network Integrity

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
C36020CEEPROM faultEEPROM faultController power-on1.EBS
P210305The DBR is disconnectedThe DBR is not connectedController power-on
P2B0305ESC not detectedThe SAS static check or ESC dynamic check is incomplete.Controller power-on
DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
B010205The EPM CAN communicatio- n of axle 1 and axle 2 is faultyEPM CAN communication between axle 1 and axle 2 is abnormalController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.EBS

Step 4:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 5:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 6:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.8 EBS Internal Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 4:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 5:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.9 EBS Private CAN Communication Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.9 EBS Private CAN Communication Fault — circuit diagram (1/2)
8.18.4.9 EBS Private CAN Communication Fault — circuit diagram (2/2)

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the AA-CAN communication harness between EBS and the axle modulator 1M. X1 C21-8

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P220305Foot valve failureShort break of foot valveController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.Brake signal generator 3.EBS

Step 4:Check the VA-CAN communication harness between EBS and the axle modulator 2M. Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.10 Brake Signal Generator Malfunction

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.10 Brake Signal Generator Malfunction — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the brake signal generator and EBS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P340305Trailer valve failureTrailer valve short breakController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.Trailer control valve 3.EBS

Step 4:Replace the brake signal generator. Refer to Replacement Of Brake Signal Transmitter Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.11 Trailer Control Valve Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.11 Trailer Control Valve Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the trailer control valve and EBS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P390305The yaw rate sensor is faultyThe yaw rate sensor is faultyController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.Yaw rate sensor 3.EBS

Step 4:Replace the trailer control valve. Refer to Replacement Of Trailer Control Module Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.12 Yaw Rate Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.12 Yaw Rate Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the yaw rate sensor and EBS. X1 C21-8

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P3A0305The steering Angle sensor is faultyThe steering Angle sensor is faultyController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.Steering angle sensor 3.EBS

Step 4:Replace the yaw rate sensor. Refer to Replacement Of The Yaw Sensor Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.13 Steering Angle Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.13 Steering Angle Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the steering angle sensor and EBS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P150301The gap between the left front sensor and the gear ring is too largeThe clearance between the sensor and the gear ring is too largeThe controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 1M 3.Front axle left wheel ABS sensor 4.EBS
P150306Short-circuited left front sensorSensor short circuitController power-on
P150305Left front sensor disconnectedSensor breakController power-on
P15030BLeft front ring missing teeth, deflectionTooth ring missing teeth or deflectionThe controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state

Step 4:Replace the steering angle sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Angle Sensor Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.14 Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.14 Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle left wheel ABS sensor and the axle modulator 1M.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P160301The gap between the right front sensor and the gear ring is too largeThe clearance between the sensor and the gear ring is too largeThe controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 1M 3.Front axle right wheel ABS sensor 4.EBS
P160306Right front sensor short- circuitedSensor short circuitController power-on
P160305Right front sensor disconnectedSensor breakController power-on
P16030BRight front ring missing teeth, deflectionTooth ring missing teeth or deflectionThe controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 1M and EBS. Step 5:Replace the front axle left wheel ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 6:Replace the axle modulator 1M. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 7:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.15 Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.15 Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC Confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle right wheel ABS sensor and the axle modulator 1M.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P170301The gap between the left rear/left second sensor and the gear ring is too largeThe clearance between the sensor and the gear ring is too largeThe controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 2M 3.Rear axle left wheel ABS sensor 4.EBS
P170306The left rear/ left second sensor is short-circuitedSensor short circuitController power-on
P170305The left rear/ left second sensor is disconnectedSensor breakController power-on
P17030BMissing teeth and deflection of left rear/left second ringTooth ring missing teeth or deflectionThe controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 1M and EBS. Step 5:Replace the front axle right wheel ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 6:Replace the axle modulator 1M. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 7:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.16 Rear Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.16 Rear Axle Left Wheel ABS Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle left wheel ABS sensor and the axle modulator 2M X1 C21-8

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P180301The gap between the right rear/right second sensor and the gear ring is too largeThe clearance between the sensor and the gear ring is too largeThe controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 2M 3.Rear axle right wheel ABS sensor 4.EBS
P180306The right rear/ right second sensor is short-circuitedSensor short circuitController power-on
P180305The right rear/ right second sensor is disconnectedSensor breakController power-on
P18030BMissing teeth and deflection of right rear/ right second ringTooth ring missing teeth or deflectionThe controller is powered on and the vehicle is in the running state

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 2M and EBS Step 5:Replace the rear axle left wheel ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 6:Replace the axle modulator 2M. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 7:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.17 Rear Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.17 Rear Axle Right Wheel ABS Sensor Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the rear axle right wheel ABS sensor and the axle modulator 2M X1 C21-8

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P1D0306Left front solenoid valve short circuitSolenoid short circuitController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle left wheel ABS solenoid valve 3.EBS
P1D0305Left front solenoid valve disconnectedThe solenoid valve is disconnectedController power-on

Step 4:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 2M and EBS Step 5:Replace the rear axle right wheel ABS sensor. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 6:Replace the axle modulator 2M. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 7:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 8:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 9:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.18 Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.18 Front Axle Left Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle left wheel ABS solenoid valve and EBS

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P1E0306Right front solenoid valve short circuitSolenoid short circuitController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.Front axle right wheel ABS solenoid valve 3.EBS
P1E0305Right front solenoid valve disconnectedThe solenoid valve is disconnectedController power-on

Step 4:Replace the front axle left wheel ABS solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of ABS Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.19 Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.19 Front Axle Right Wheel ABS Solenoid Valve Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the front axle right wheel ABS solenoid valve and EBS

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P200306One axle EPM short-circuitOne axle EPM valve is short-circuitedController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 1M 3.EBS
P200309The Hitotsubashi EPM ECU is faultyOne axle EPM valve ECU is faultyController power-on
P20030AThe EPM pressure sensor of Hitotsubashi is faultyOne axle EPM valve pressure sensor is faultyController power-on
P200305One axle EPM is disconnectedOne axle EPM valve is disconnectedController power-on

Step 4:Replace the front axle right wheel ABS solenoid valve. Refer to Replacement Of ABS Solenoid Valve Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.20 Vehicle Axle Modulator 1M Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

8.18.4.20 Vehicle Axle Modulator 1M Fault — circuit diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC Confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 1M and EBS.

DTC CodeDescriptionDTC Trigger ConditionsDTC Detection Conditions (Control Strategy)Faulty Part
P250306Second axle EPM short circuitSecond axle EPM short circuitController power-on1. Wiring harness 2.Vehicle axle modulator 2M 3.EBS
P250309The EPM ECU of axle two is faultyThe EPM ECU of axle two is faultyController power-on
P25030AThe EPM pressure sensor of the second axle is faultyThe EPM pressure sensor of the second axle is faultyController power-on
P250305axle 2 EPM is disconnectedaxle 2 EPM is disconnectedController power-on

Step 4:Replace the axle modulator 1M. Refer to Replacement Of Single Channel Module Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

8.18.4.21 Vehicle Axle Modulator 2M Fault

1. DTC Monitoring Logic 2.Circuit Diagram

3. Diagnostic Steps Step 1:DTC confirmation. Refer to DTC confirmation Step 2:Routine inspection. Refer to Routine Inspection Step 3:Check the wiring harness between the axle modulator 2M and EBS. X1 C21-8

Step 4:Replace the axle modulator 2M. Refer to Replacement Of Dual Channel Module Assembly Step 5:EBS rewrite configuration code, software reload, upgrade. Step 6:Replace EBS. Refer to Replacement Of EBS Controller Assembly Step 7:Clear and confirm DTC.

Figure p2174
Figure p2174

8.18.5 Dismantling and Installation

8.18.5.1 Replacement of EBS ECU Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Disconnect 5 harness connectors of the EBS ECU assembly. 6 Remove 4 fixing bolts of the EBS ECU assembly. 7 Remove the EBS ECU assembly. Installation Procedures

1 Move the EBS ECU assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 4 fixing bolts of the EBS ECU assembly.

Torque: 8 +/- .75 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 5 harness connectors of the EBS ECU assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the IP left upper trim panel assembly. 5 Connect the battery negative cable. 6 Close the front flip cover plate. 7 Close the door.

caution
After replacing the EBS ECU assembly, it is necessary to connect a scan tool for flashing and recalibrate the zero position.

8.18.5.2 Replacement of Steering Angle Sensor Assembly

Removal Procedures

1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Remove the combination switch upper shield assembly. 5 Remove the combination switch lower shield. 6 Remove the driver horn cover assembly. 7 Remove the steering wheel assembly. 8 Remove the clock spring. 9 Remove the combination switch. 10 Remove the combination switch fixing bracket. 11 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the steering angle sensor assembly.

Figure p2176

12 Remove 3 fixing screws of the steering angle sensor assembly. 13 Remove the steering angle sensor assembly. Installation Procedures 1 Move the steering angle sensor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 3 fixing screws of the steering angle sensor assembly.

Figure p2177

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the steering angle sensor assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Install the combination switch fixing bracket. 5 Install the combination switch. 6 Install the clock spring. 7 Install the steering wheel assembly. 8 Install the driver horn cover assembly. 9 Install the combination switch lower shield. 10 Install the combination switch upper shield assembly. 11 Connect the battery negative cable. 12 Close the front flip cover plate. 13 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the zero position.

8.18.5.3 Replacement of Yaw Sensor Assembly

Removal Procedures 1 Open the door. 2 Open the front flip cover plate. 3 Disconnect the battery negative cable.

caution
power down the high-voltage system before disconnecting the negative pole of the storage battery.

4 Disconnect 1 harness connector of the yaw sensor assembly. 5 Remove 2 fixing bolts of the yaw sensor assembly. 6 Remove the yaw sensor assembly. Installation Procedures

Figure p2179
Figure p2179

1 Move the yaw sensor assembly to the mounting position. 2 Install 2 fixing bolts of the yaw sensor assembly.

Torque:18.5 +/- 2 (ft lbs)

3 Connect 1 harness connector of the yaw sensor assembly.

caution
The harness is firmly connected following the principal of "insert until a click is heard for confirmation".

4 Connect the battery negative cable. 5 Close the front flip cover plate. 6 Close the door.

caution
After part replacement, it is necessary to recalibrate the zero position.
9Circuit

9.1 System Circuit Diagram

9.1.1 Smart Junction Box - Chassis

9.1.1.1 Smart Junction Box - Chassis

9.1.1.1 Smart Junction Box - Chassis — circuit diagram

9.1.1.2 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued

9.1.1.2 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued — circuit diagram

KL15-3 G5Da KL15-3 G5Da Horn power supply O419 Horn power supply O419 KL15 Power supply 3 G5D

9.1.1.3 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 1

9.1.1.3 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.1.4 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 2

9.1.1.4 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 2 — circuit diagram

Identification light O318f Z01 Ground

9.1.1.5 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 3

9.1.1.5 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 3 — circuit diagram

9.1.1.6 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 4

9.1.1.6 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 4 — circuit diagram

9.1.1.7 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 5

9.1.1.7 Smart Junction Box - Chassis Continued 5 — circuit diagram

BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD1-H BH01 BCANFD1-L BL01 BCANFD2 BCANFD1

9.1.2 Smart Junction Box - Body

9.1.2.1 Smart Junction Box - Body

9.1.2.1 Smart Junction Box - Body — circuit diagram

9.1.2.2 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued

9.1.2.2 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.2.3 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 1

9.1.2.3 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.2.4 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 2

9.1.2.4 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 2 — circuit diagram

9.1.2.5 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 3

9.1.2.5 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 3 — circuit diagram

9.1.2.6 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 4

9.1.2.6 Smart Junction Box - Body Continued 4 — circuit diagram

CAN1FD

9.1.3 12V Junction Box 9.1.3.1 12V Junction Box

9.1.3 12V Junction Box 9.1.3.1 12V Junction Box — circuit diagram

9.1.3.2 12V Junction Box Continued

9.1.3.2 12V Junction Box Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.4 DC Fast Charge

9.1.4.1 DC Fast Charge

9.1.4.1 DC Fast Charge — circuit diagram

9.1.4.2 DC Fast Charge Continued

9.1.4.2 DC Fast Charge Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.5 Battery Management System

9.1.5.1 Battery Management System

9.1.5.1 Battery Management System — circuit diagram

9.1.5.2 Battery Management System Continued

9.1.5.2 Battery Management System Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.5.3 Battery Management System Continued 1

9.1.5.3 Battery Management System Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.6 Thermal Management System

9.1.6.1 Thermal Management System

9.1.6.1 Thermal Management System — circuit diagram

Total body power supply B+ L22

9.1.6.2 Thermal Management System Continued

9.1.6.2 Thermal Management System Continued — circuit diagram

Total body power supply B+ L22

9.1.6.3 Thermal Management System Continued 1

9.1.6.3 Thermal Management System Continued 1 — circuit diagram

Total body power supply B+ L22

9.1.6.4 Thermal Management System Continued 2

9.1.6.4 Thermal Management System Continued 2 — circuit diagram

9.1.6.5 Thermal Management System Continued 3

9.1.6.5 Thermal Management System Continued 3 — circuit diagram

9.1.6.6 Thermal Management System Continued 4

9.1.6.6 Thermal Management System Continued 4 — circuit diagram

9.1.7 Drive Control System

9.1.7.1 Drive Control System

9.1.7.1 Drive Control System — circuit diagram

Total body power supply B+ L22

9.1.7.2 Drive Control System Continued

9.1.7.2 Drive Control System Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.7.3 Drive Control System Continued 1

9.1.7.3 Drive Control System Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.8 Charging System

9.1.8.1 Charging System

9.1.8.1 Charging System — circuit diagram

9.1.9 Intelligent Driving

9.1.9.1 Intelligent Driving

9.1.9.1 Intelligent Driving — circuit diagram

9.1.9.2 Intelligent Driving Continued

9.1.9.2 Intelligent Driving Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.9.3 Intelligent Driving Continued 1

9.1.9.3 Intelligent Driving Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.9.4 Intelligent Driving Continued 2

9.1.9.4 Intelligent Driving Continued 2 — circuit diagram

Total body power supply B+ L22 Power KL30 P116b Power supply KL15 P102a

9.1.9.5 Intelligent Driving Continued 3

9.1.9.5 Intelligent Driving Continued 3 — circuit diagram

9.1.9.6 Intelligent Driving Continued 4

9.1.9.6 Intelligent Driving Continued 4 — circuit diagram

9.1.10 VDC 9.1.10.1 VDC

9.1.10 VDC 9.1.10.1 VDC — circuit diagram

9.1.10.2 VDC Continued

9.1.10.2 VDC Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.10.3 VDC Continued 1

9.1.10.3 VDC Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.10.4 VDC Continued 2

9.1.10.4 VDC Continued 2 — circuit diagram

9.1.10.5 VDC Continued 3

9.1.10.5 VDC Continued 3 — circuit diagram

9.1.10.6 VDC Continued 4

9.1.10.6 VDC Continued 4 — circuit diagram

9.1.10.7 VDC Continued 5

9.1.10.7 VDC Continued 5 — circuit diagram

9.1.10.8 VDC Continued 6

9.1.10.8 VDC Continued 6 — circuit diagram

9.1.10.9 VDC Continued 7

9.1.10.9 VDC Continued 7 — circuit diagram

9.1.10.10 VDC Continued 8

9.1.10.10 VDC Continued 8 — circuit diagram

9.1.10.11 VDC Continued 9

9.1.10.11 VDC Continued 9 — circuit diagram

9.1.10.12 VDC Continued 10

9.1.10.12 VDC Continued 10 — circuit diagram

9.1.11 CDCU 9.1.11.1 CDCU

9.1.11 CDCU 9.1.11.1 CDCU — circuit diagram

9.1.11.2 CDCU Continued

9.1.11.2 CDCU Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.11.3 CDCU Continued 1

9.1.11.3 CDCU Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.11.4 CDCU Continued 2

9.1.11.4 CDCU Continued 2 — circuit diagram

9.1.11.5 CDCU Continued 3

9.1.11.5 CDCU Continued 3 — circuit diagram

9.1.11.6 CDCU Continued 4

9.1.11.6 CDCU Continued 4 — circuit diagram

9.1.11.7 CDCU Continued 5

9.1.11.7 CDCU Continued 5 — circuit diagram

9.1.11.8 CDCU Continued 6

9.1.11.8 CDCU Continued 6 — circuit diagram

9.1.12 EBS 9.1.12.1 EBS

9.1.12 EBS 9.1.12.1 EBS — circuit diagram

9.1.12.2 EBS Continued

9.1.12.2 EBS Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.12.3 EBS Continued 1

9.1.12.3 EBS Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.12.4 EBS Continued 2

9.1.12.4 EBS Continued 2 — circuit diagram

9.1.12.5 EBS Continued 3

9.1.12.5 EBS Continued 3 — circuit diagram

9.1.12.6 EBS Continued 4

9.1.12.6 EBS Continued 4 — circuit diagram

X1 C21-8

9.1.13 EPB 9.1.13.1 EPB

9.1.13 EPB 9.1.13.1 EPB — circuit diagram

9.1.13.2 EPB Continued

9.1.13.2 EPB Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.14 EHPS 9.1.14.1 EHPS

9.1.14 EHPS 9.1.14.1 EHPS — circuit diagram

9.1.15 BDCU 9.1.15.1 BDCU

9.1.15 BDCU 9.1.15.1 BDCU — circuit diagram

Total body power supply B+ L22

9.1.15.2 BDCU Continued

9.1.15.2 BDCU Continued — circuit diagram

B63-11 B63-22

9.1.15.3 BDCU Continued 1

9.1.15.3 BDCU Continued 1 — circuit diagram
ylppus a414BV5 ylppus rewop b414Bylirosnes b634B

9.1.15.4 BDCU Continued 2

9.1.15.4 BDCU Continued 2 — circuit diagram

5V power

9.1.15.5 BDCU Continued 3

9.1.15.5 BDCU Continued 3 — circuit diagram

9.1.15.6 BDCU Continued 4

9.1.15.6 BDCU Continued 4 — circuit diagram

9.1.15.7 BDCU Continued 5

9.1.15.7 BDCU Continued 5 — circuit diagram

Ground Z01 B16-5

9.1.15.8 BDCU Continued 6

9.1.15.8 BDCU Continued 6 — circuit diagram

9.1.15.9 BDCU Continued 7

9.1.15.9 BDCU Continued 7 — circuit diagram

9.1.15.10 BDCU Continued 8

9.1.15.10 BDCU Continued 8 — circuit diagram

9.1.16 Headlamp

9.1.16.1 Headlamp

9.1.16.1 Headlamp — circuit diagram

9.1.16.2 Headlamp Continued

9.1.16.2 Headlamp Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.16.3 Headlamp Continued 1

9.1.16.3 Headlamp Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.17 Turn Signal Lamp

9.1.17.1 Turn Signal Lamp

9.1.17.1 Turn Signal Lamp — circuit diagram

9.1.17.2 Turn Signal Lamp Continued

9.1.17.2 Turn Signal Lamp Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.18 Reverse lamp

9.1.18.1 Reverse lamp

9.1.18.1 Reverse lamp — circuit diagram

9.1.19 Brake lamp

9.1.19.1 Brake lamp

9.1.19.1 Brake lamp — circuit diagram

9.1.19.2 Brake lamp Continued

9.1.19.2 Brake lamp Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.20 Daytime Running Light

9.1.20.1 Daytime Running Light

9.1.20.1 Daytime Running Light — circuit diagram

9.1.21 Fog Lamp

9.1.21.1 Fog Lamp

9.1.21.1 Fog Lamp — circuit diagram

9.1.21.2 Fog Lamp Continued

9.1.21.2 Fog Lamp Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.22 Position Light

9.1.22.1 Position Light

9.1.22.1 Position Light — circuit diagram

9.1.22.2 Position Light Continued

9.1.22.2 Position Light Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.22.3 Position Light Continued 1

9.1.22.3 Position Light Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.22.4 Position Light Continued 2

9.1.22.4 Position Light Continued 2 — circuit diagram

9.1.23 Atmosphere lamp

9.1.23.1 Atmosphere lamp

9.1.23.1 Atmosphere lamp — circuit diagram

9.1.23.2 Atmosphere lamp Continued

9.1.23.2 Atmosphere lamp Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.24 Welcome Lamp

9.1.24.1 Welcome Lamp

9.1.24.1 Welcome Lamp — circuit diagram

9.1.25 Indoor Lighting

9.1.25.1 Indoor Lighting

9.1.25.1 Indoor Lighting — circuit diagram

9.1.25.2 Indoor Lighting Continued

9.1.25.2 Indoor Lighting Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.25.3 Indoor Lighting Continued 1

9.1.25.3 Indoor Lighting Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.26 Central Lock 9.1.26.1 Central Lock

9.1.26 Central Lock 9.1.26.1 Central Lock — circuit diagram

9.1.26.2 Central Lock Continued

9.1.26.2 Central Lock Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.26.3 Central Lock Continued 1

9.1.26.3 Central Lock Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.27 Wiper Cleaning

9.1.27.1 Wiper Cleaning

9.1.27.1 Wiper Cleaning — circuit diagram

9.1.28 Power Window 9.1.28.1 Power Window

9.1.28 Power Window 9.1.28.1 Power Window — circuit diagram

9.1.29 Sunroof Sunshade 9.1.29.1 Sunroof Sunshade

9.1.29 Sunroof Sunshade 9.1.29.1 Sunroof Sunshade — circuit diagram

9.1.30 Physical Rearview Mirror

9.1.30.1 Physical Rearview Mirror

9.1.30.1 Physical Rearview Mirror — circuit diagram

9.1.30.2 Physical Rearview Mirror Continued

9.1.30.2 Physical Rearview Mirror Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.31 Multimedia Entertainment System

9.1.31.1 Multimedia Entertainment System

9.1.31.1 Multimedia Entertainment System — circuit diagram

9.1.31.2 Multimedia Entertainment System Continued

9.1.31.2 Multimedia Entertainment System Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.32 Bluetooth & NFC 9.1.32.1 Bluetooth & NFC

9.1.32 Bluetooth & NFC 9.1.32.1 Bluetooth & NFC — circuit diagram

9.1.32.2 Bluetooth & NFC Continued

9.1.32.2 Bluetooth & NFC Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.33 Power Seat 9.1.33.1 Power Seat

9.1.33 Power Seat 9.1.33.1 Power Seat — circuit diagram

9.1.33.2 Power Seat Continued

9.1.33.2 Power Seat Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.34 Vehicle Power Supply

9.1.34.1 Vehicle Power Supply

9.1.34.1 Vehicle Power Supply — circuit diagram

9.1.34.2 Vehicle Power Supply Continued

9.1.34.2 Vehicle Power Supply Continued — circuit diagram

B08-10 B01-1

9.1.35 Steering Wheel Switch

9.1.35.1 Steering Wheel Switch

9.1.35.1 Steering Wheel Switch — circuit diagram

9.1.36 Air Conditioner 9.1.36.1 Air Conditioner

9.1.36 Air Conditioner 9.1.36.1 Air Conditioner — circuit diagram

9.1.36.2 Air Conditioner Continued

9.1.36.2 Air Conditioner Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.36.3 Air Conditioner Continued 1

9.1.36.3 Air Conditioner Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.36.4 Air Conditioner Continued 2

9.1.36.4 Air Conditioner Continued 2 — circuit diagram
B54-10 B54-11

9.1.36.5 Air Conditioner Continued 3

9.1.36.5 Air Conditioner Continued 3 — circuit diagram

9.1.36.6 Air Conditioner Continued 4

9.1.36.6 Air Conditioner Continued 4 — circuit diagram

9.1.36.7 Air Conditioner Continued 5

9.1.36.7 Air Conditioner Continued 5 — circuit diagram

9.1.36.8 Air Conditioner Continued 6

9.1.36.8 Air Conditioner Continued 6 — circuit diagram

9.1.37 Augmented Reality Heads-Up Display

9.1.37.1 Augmented Reality Heads-Up Display

9.1.37.1 Augmented Reality Heads-Up Display — circuit diagram

9.1.38 Tire Pressure Monitoring

9.1.38.1 Tire Pressure Monitoring

9.1.38.1 Tire Pressure Monitoring — circuit diagram

9.1.39 Low Speed Alarm

9.1.39.1 Low Speed Alarm

9.1.39.1 Low Speed Alarm — circuit diagram

B48-38 B48-18

9.1.40 Electronic Post Lock 9.1.40.1 Electronic Post Lock

9.1.40 Electronic Post Lock 9.1.40.1 Electronic Post Lock — circuit diagram

9.1.41 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension

9.1.41.1 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension

9.1.41.1 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension — circuit diagram

9.1.41.2 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Continued

9.1.41.2 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Continued — circuit diagram

9.1.41.3 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Continued 1

9.1.41.3 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.41.4 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Continued 2

9.1.41.4 Electronically Controlled Air Suspension Continued 2 — circuit diagram

C66-2 C66-1

9.1.42 Car TV 9.1.42.1 Car TV

9.1.42 Car TV 9.1.42.1 Car TV — circuit diagram

9.1.43 Megaphone

9.1.43.1 Megaphone

9.1.43.1 Megaphone — circuit diagram

Air horn-KL30 O406 supply O419 supply O419

9.1.44 Car Refrigerator

9.1.44.1 Car Refrigerator

9.1.44.1 Car Refrigerator — circuit diagram

9.1.45 ETC 9.1.45.1 ETC

9.1.45 ETC 9.1.45.1 ETC — circuit diagram

9.1.46 Gateway

9.1.46.1 Gateway

9.1.46.1 Gateway — circuit diagram

9.1.46.2 Gateway Continued

9.1.46.2 Gateway Continued — circuit diagram

B76-17

9.1.46.3 Gateway Continued 1

9.1.46.3 Gateway Continued 1 — circuit diagram

9.1.46.4 Gateway Continued 2

9.1.46.4 Gateway Continued 2 — circuit diagram

9.1.47 OBD 9.1.47.1 OBD

9.1.47 OBD 9.1.47.1 OBD — circuit diagram

9.1.47.2 OBD Continued

9.1.47.2 OBD Continued — circuit diagram
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
8----
9B219W-Profile light +
10P202bR-Top cabinet power +
11R105bW-Right surround- sound speaker +
12B325W-Sleeper reading light +
13R108bW-Left surround- sound speaker-
14R107bW-Left surround- sound speaker+
15----
16----
17----
18----
19----
20----
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z16 Br- Ground
20 W20 Br
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R106b WRight surround- - sound speaker -
2B104 WIndoor overhead - light +
3- -- -
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1B325W-Sleeper reading light +
2Z16Br-Ground

9.2 Information about Cable Harness Connectors

9.2.1 Top Cover Wiring Harness

9.2.1.1 Cable Harness Terminal Diagram For the Top Cover

G10 Take the iron point 16
I1_T_LR Connect the top harness to the left top harness 1
T01 Sleeper reading lamp

20 R 20 W 20 W 20 W

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R106b WRight surround- - sound speaker -
2R105b WRight surround- - sound speaker +
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag e- Stitch definition
1B104bW-Indoor overhead light +
2Z16Br-Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag e- Stitch definition
1B104aW-Indoor overhead light +
2Z16Br-Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z16 Br- Ground
2- -- -
3P202b RTop cabinet power - +
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7- -- -
8- -- -
T02 Right surround-sound speaker
T03 Overhead light
T04 Ceiling lamp-rh
T05 Ceiling lamp-lh
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R108b WLeft surround- - sound speaker -
2R107b WLeft surround- - sound speaker+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z16Br-Ground
2B219aW-Profile light +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z16 Br- Ground
2B219b W- Profile light +
T06 Left surround-sound speaker
T07 End-outline marker lamp-rh frt
T08 End-outline marker lamp-lh frt
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
8B219W-Profile light +
9P108R-Awning curtain KL30
10B207W-Adjust the left rearview mirror to the right
11B329W-Front visor raised
12----
13----
14B104W-Indoor overhead light +
15R105bW-Right surround- sound speaker +
16R106bW-Right surround- sound speaker -
17B325W-Sleeper reading light +
18----
19B221R-Rearview mirror heating +
20 21- -- -- -- - Awning curtain
22 23B214 B202W W- -closing signal Awning curtain open signal
24B308aW-Reading light +
25R108bW-Left surround- sound speaker -
26R107bW-Left surround- sound speaker +
27----
28B210W-Adjust left rearview mirror upward
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z30 Br- Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B208 WLeft rearview mirror - left/down adjust the common end
2B330 WFront sunshade - open
3- -- -
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7P202b RTop cabinet power - +

9.2.2 Left Ceiling Harness

9.2.2.1 Cable Harness Terminal Diagram of the Left Ceiling

G11 Take the iron point 6
I_LR_B The left ceiling wiring harness connects to the floor wiring harness
R106b B104
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1B207 W-Adjust the left rearview mirror to the right
2B210 W-Adjust left rearview mirror upward
3B208 W-Left rearview mirror left/down adjust the common end
4B221 W-Rearview mirror heating +
5Z30a Br-Rearview mirror heating -
6- ---
Wir Stitch num ere Line b- colorVoltag e- Stitch definition
1 R106b W-Right surround- sound speaker -
2 B104 W-Indoor overhead light +
3 ----
4 ----
5 ----
6 ----
7 ----
8 ----
9 B219 W-Profile light +
10 P202b R-Top cabinet power +
11 R105b W-Right surround- sound speaker +
12 B325 W-Sleeper reading light +
13 R108b W-Left surround- sound speaker -
14 R107b W-Left surround- sound speaker +
15 ----
16 ----
17 ----
18 ----
19 ----
20 ----
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1B329 W-rise
2B330 W-Front sunshade open
I1_LR_T Connect the left ceiling harness to the top cover harness 1
LR01 Left physical rearview mirror
LR03 Front visor motor
20 W 20 W 20 W
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z30d Br- Ground
2B308a W- Reading light +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P108 R- KL30
2- -- -
3- -- -
4- -- -
5Z30e Br- Ground
6- -- -
7- -- -
8B214 W- Off signal input
9B202 W- Open signal input
10Z30 Br- Ground
LR04 Front left reading light
LR05 Awning and sunshade

20 W 20 W

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1----
2----
3----
4B308bW-Reading light +
5B307W-Identification lamp 3+
6B306W-Identification lamp 2+
7B305W-Identification lamp 1+
8B317dR12V12V power output
9B203W-Adjust right rearview mirror to the right
10----
11----
12----
13----
14----
15R216W-MIC1+
16 17R232 R215W W- -MIC1- MIC2+
18R231W-MIC2-
19B309W-Sunlight rainfall LIN
20B206W-Adjust right rearview mirror upward
21----
22----
23----
24----
25----
26 27 28AH01 AL01 G2EY G R- - -HMI Private CAN- H HMI private CAN-L Fusioncube B+
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 Z39 Br- Ground
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 Z38 Br- Ground

9.2.3 Right Ceiling Harness

9.2.3.1 Right Ceiling Wiring Harness Terminal Diagram

G12 Take the iron point 20
G13 Take the iron point 18
I_RR_B The right ceiling harness is connected to the floor harness

22 G 22 G

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
29B217W-Right rearview mirror left/down adjust the public end
30----
31----
32----
33----
34TL06dG-Intelligent driving CAN-L
35TH06dY-Intelligent driving CAN-H
36----
37----
38G01R-Front camera KL15
39B221R-Rearview mirror heating +
40----
41----
42----
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B203 WAdjust right - rearview mirror to the right
2B206 WAdjust right - rearview mirror upward
3B217 WRight rearview mirror left/down - adjust the public end
4B221 RRearview mirror - heating +
5Z39d BrRearview mirror - heating -
6- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z38Br-Ground
2B308bW-Reading light +
RR02 Front right reading light
RR03 Right physical rear view mirror
RR07 Identification lamp 1
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z38 Br- Ground
2B305 WIdentification lamp - 1+
StitchWire L numb- c erine Voltag- olor eStitch definition
1Z38Br -Ground
2B306W -Identification lamp 2+
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B317d R12V 12V power output
2Z38 Br- Ground
3- -- -
4B309 WSunlight rainfall - LIN
StitchWire L numb- c erine Voltag- olor eStitch definition
1Z38Br -Ground
2B307W -Identification lamp 3+
1R216 W- MIC1+
2R232 W- MIC1-
3R215 W- MIC2+
4R231 W- MIC2-
RR08 Light rain sensor
RR09 Microphone

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

RR10 Identification lamp 2
RR11 Identification lamp 3
RR12 Front View Intelligent Camera
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1G2ER-B+
2----
3TL06dG-Intelligent driving CAN-L
4----
5G01R-KL15+
6----
7----
8AL01G-HMI private CAN-L
9AH01Y-HMI Private CAN- H
10TH06dY-Intelligent driving CAN-H
11----
12Z38Br-Ground
Wire Line Voltag- Stitch numb- Stitch definition color e er
1N107a R- Power +
2N109 W- signal
3Z36 Br- Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B616 WFront mask switch - signal
2Z36 Br- Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1E251c W- AGS-LIN
2O407a R- AGS-KL30
3Z36 Br- Ground
1N107a R- Power +
2N102 W- signal
3Z36 Br- Ground

9.2.4 Bumper Harness

9.2.4.1 Bumper Harness Terminal Diagram

BU02 Front mask switch
BU05 Active Grille Shutter
BU06 Left Sub Uss
BU07 Left Side Sub Uss

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

BU08 Left Middle Sub Uss

20 R 20 R 20 R 20 W

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1N107a R- Power +
2N103 W- signal
3Z36 Br- Ground
StitchWire Lin numb- col ere Voltag- or eStitch definition
1TH02a Y-ADSCAN1-H
2TL02a G-ADSCAN1-L
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1N107a R- Power +
2N104 W- signal
3Z36 Br- Ground
20 W 20 W 20 W
20 W 20 W20 W
StitchWire Lin numb- col ere Voltag- or eStitch definition
1TH02b Y-ADSCAN1-H
2N102 W-Left radar signal
3N103 W-Left center radar signal
4N104 W-Right center radar signal
5- ---
6- ---
7N107 R-Probe power supply
8TL02b G-ADSCAN1-L
9N109 W-Left radar signal
10N110 W-Right radar signal
11- ---
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1N107a R- Power +
2N110 W- signal
3Z36 Br- Ground
BU09 Right Middle Sub Uss
BU10 Right Sub Uss
BU11 CAN resistance -120 Ω
BU12 Main Uss

20 Br 20 W

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
12- -- -
13Z36 Br- Ground
14B317f R12V Power supply 12V+
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1- -- -
2B616 WFront mask switch - signal
3- -- -
4- -- -
5B317f R12V power supply 12V +
6Z36 Br- Ground
7O407a R- AGS-KL30
8- -- -
9- -- -
10TH02c Y- ADSCAN1-H
11E251c W- AGS-LIN
12- -- -
13- -- -
14TL02c G- ADSCAN1-L
15- -- -
16- -- -
17- -- -
18- -- -
19- -- -
20- -- -
I_BU_B The bumper harness connects to the floor harness

20 R

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1L20R-DC/DC2 power supply
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1L22R-Total body power supply B+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1P4HR-Motor fan 1 Power supply
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1L21R-DC/DC2 power supply

9.2.5 Floor Wiring Harness

9.2.5.1 Floor Cable Harness Terminal Diagram

B01 Body smart box T1
B02 Body smart box T2
B03 Body smart box T3
B04 Body smart box T4
B05 Body smart box T5
StitchWire Lin numb- colo ere Voltag- r eStitch definition
1P4S R-Motor Fan 2 Power supply
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
6P106R-BDCU Power supply B+
7P107R-Seat power B+
8P108R-Skylight shade power KL30
9----
10Z03Br-Ground
11P111R-Main drive blower power supply
12----
13----
14----
15P115R-Copilot blower power supply
16P116R-Switch class power supply KL30 shift switch/parking switch
17P117R-Rear blower power supply
StitchWire Lin numb- colo ere Voltag- r eStitch definition
1P4B R-Motor Fan 3 Power supply
14 R
18R
Wire Line Voltag- Stitch numb- Stitch definition color e er
1P101 R-DCM Power supply KL30
2P102 R-KL15 Power supply
3P103 R-ECAS Power supply KL30
4P104 R-CDC power B+
5P105 R-BDCU Power supply B+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1P201R-Front USB power KL30
2P202R-Rear USB power KL30
B06 Body smart box T6
B07 Body electrical box C1

18 - - - -

B08 Body electrical box C2
StitchWire numb- erLine Volta color eg- Stitch definition
3P203R -PTC controller KL30
4P204R -Air conditioning controller KL30
5P205R -Compressor power supply KL30
6-- --
7P207R -Car TV power supply KL30
8-- --
9P209R -Bar pump power KL30
10P210R -Wireless charging power KL30
11-- --
12-- --
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
7- -- -
8P308 RHUD Power KL30- - Delay 15s power off
9B201 WKL30 Power-on - and power-off request
10- -- -
11- -- -
12- -- -
13P313 RIVI screen power - supply KL30
14P314 RCAR screen power - supply KL30
15P315 RSleeper switch - group power B+
16P316 RESCL Power - supply B+
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P4K RRight battery water - pump
2P4N R- Right battery fan 1
3P4A RLeft battery water - pump
4P4E R- Left battery fan 1
1B216W -KL15 Power-on and power-off request
2BL01bG -BCANFD1-L
3BH01bY -BCANFD1-H
4P304R -OBD Interface Power B+
5P305R -IPC panel power B +
6-- --
B09 Body electrical box C3

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

B10 Body electrical box C4

20 R 20 R 20 R 12 R 12 R

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P4P RMotor water pump - 2
2P4M R- Right battery fan 2
3P4F RMotor water pump - 1
4P4D R- Left battery fan 2
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Q02A R- Power source
1Q02B R- Power source
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O419b R- Horn power supply
2Z01 Br- Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1L22 RTotal body power - supply B+
B11 Body electrical box C5
B12 Chassis smart box T4
B13 Chassis smart box T5
B14 Woofer horn
B15 Left-low-beam adjustment motor

12 R 14 R

M8
L22
R 4

M8 Q02A R 6 Q02B R 6

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B220a W- Power source
2B302a WLow light height - gear signal
3B416 Br- Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z01 Br- Ground
2- -- -
3O303 R- Left high beam
4Z01 Br- Ground
5- -- -
6O301 R- Near left light
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O318a R- Position light
2O317a R- ADS lamp
3O304 R- Left DRL
4B212 WLeft front turn - signal
5Z01 Br- Ground
6B422 WLeft front turn - signal fault feedback
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O4152 R- Battery pack -B+
2O4151 R- Battery pack -B+
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Q02A R- Power source
2Z21 Br- Ground
B16 Front left combination light
B19 Front left light
B20 Emergency high voltage plug-in 1
B21 Vehicle inverter 1-2

20 R

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1G5Db R- KL15 is enabled
2- -- -
3- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1B105W-Power source
2Z11Br-Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z11Br-Ground
2B315aW-Step light +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U504 Br- Ground
2U501 R- Power source
3- -- -
4U503 WSwitch signal - 1SW1
5U502 WTravel signal - 1PWM1
6U506 WSwitch signal - 1SW1
7U505 WTravel signal - 2PWM2
B22 Vehicle inverter X1-1

4 - - - -

B23 Brake signal generator
B24 Washing pot motor
B28 Step light 1
B29 Step light 2
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1Z11Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1B117W- Right window up +
2D304WUnlock motor - positive
3D221W- Outer handle LED+
4B316W- Welcome light +
5D210WSwitch motor reset - signal
6D110WElectric suction/ - electric switch motor +
7D305WUnlock motor - negative
8D207W- Lock condition
9B403WExternal handle - door switch signal
10D205aW- Full lock signal
11B115WRight window down - +
12D212WInduction motor - reset signal
13D204W- Half-lock signal
14D206WTrack lock in place - signal
15D211W- Anti-clamp signal
16D101WElectric suction/ - electric switch motor -
17--- -
18--- -
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1Z26Br- Ground
2B311WExternal toolbox - light +
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1--- -
2--- -
3BL02bG- BCANFD2-L
4BH02bY- BCANFD2-H
5Z11Br- Ground
6O416R- Power KL30

2 B315b W - Step light +

B30 Toolbox light
B31 Low speed alarm module
B32 Sliding door hinge

20 R

StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
19--- -
20B810RBluetooth +NFC - power supply
21--- -
22D220Br- DCM signal ground
23B809W- Bluetooth ID
24BH06bY- BCAN6-H
25BL06bG- BCAN6-L
26Z11Br- Common ground
StitchWire numb- c erLine Voltag olor e- Stitch definition
1B525W -Washing liquid level switch
2Z07Br -Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1O318bR- Position light
2O317bR- ADS lamp
3O306R- Right DRL
4B211WRight front turn - signal
5Z07Br- Ground
6B402WRight front turn - signal fault feedback
StitchWire numb- c erLine Voltag olor e- Stitch definition
1Z07Br -Ground
2O419aR -Horn power supply
B33 Front right combination light
B34 Washing pot level sensor
B35 Tweeter horn
B36 Front right light

20 R

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z07 Br- Ground
2- -- -
3O309 R- Right high beam
4Z07 Br- Ground
5- -- -
6O302 R- Right low light
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1B436fBr- sensorily
2B411WOutdoor - temperature signal
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1B511W- Wiper return signal
2--- -
3--- -
4Z11Br- Ground
5B108W- Wiper low speed +
6B112W- Wiper speed +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B220b WLow light height - power supply
2B302b W- Gear signal
3B416 Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1E125R- Power Supply 2
2E124R- Power Supply 1
3E275Br- Ground 1
B37 Right low-beam adjustment motor
B38 Ambient temp sensor
B39 Wiper motor
B40 Accelerator pedal
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
4 E237 W- Signal 1
5 E236 Br- Ground 2
6 E239 W- Signal 2
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1----
2K102W-Former SOV-
3K103W-After SOV-
4----
5K105W-Main blast PWM
6K106W-Main blast feedback
7K107W12VMain internal and external circulation +
8K108W-Main internal and external circulation -
9K109W12VMain heating and cooling motor +
10K110W-Main heating and cooling motor -
11K111W12VMaster defrost +
12K112W-Master defrost -
13K113W12VMain blow foot +
14K114W-Master blow foot -
15K115W-Main defrosting feedback
16K116W-Main blow foot feedback
17K117W-Actuator carbon film 5V+
18K118W-Main evaporation sensor 5V+
19K119W-Main outlet air temperature sensor 5V+
20Z02Br-Ground
21BH02aY-BCANFD2-H
22BL02aG-BCANFD2-L
23K123W12VAuxiliary internal and external cycle motor +
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 E154 WParking switch - normally on - highly effective
2 P116a RSwitching power - supply
3 Z10 Br- Ground
4 E157 WBrake open - normally closed - low effective
B41 Brake pedal switch
B42 Air conditioning controller A
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
24K124W-Auxiliary internal and external cycle motor -
25K125W12VAuxiliary heating and cooling motor +
26K126W-Auxiliary heating and cooling motor -
27K127W-Sub-defrosting +
28K128W-Secondary defrosting -
29K129W12VSecondary blow foot +
30K130W-Deputy blow foot -
31K131W-Secondary defrosting feedback
32K132W-Secondary foot feedback
33K133W-Secondary evaporation temperature sensor
34K134W-Secondary outlet air temperature sensor
35K135W-sensorily
36K136W-Secondary blast PWM
37K137W-Secondary blast feedback
38K138R12VTemperature sensor 12+
39----
40P204aR-Power KL30
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P204e R- Power KL30
2- -- -
3K203 W- Rear blast PWM
4K204 WRear blast - feedback
5K205 WAfter cooling motor 12V +
6K206 WAfter cooling the - motor -
7K207 WPost evaporation - temperature sensor
8K208 WRear outlet - temperature sensor
9K209 WInterior - temperature sensor - Front
10- -- -
11- -- -
12- -- -
13Z02 Br- Ground
14K214 WTemperature - sensor signal inside the car
15- -- -
16- -- -
17- -- -
B43 Air conditioner Controller B
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- eStitch definition
18K218W-Front left air conditioning inner and outer loop feedback signal
19K219W-Front right air conditioning inside and outside loop feedback signal
20----
21----
22K222Y-Air conditioning CAN-H
23K223G-Air conditioning CAN-L
24----
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1B201W-KL30 Power-on and power-off request
2B202W-Awning curtain open switch signal
3B203W-Adjust right rearview mirror to the right
4B204W-Bar locker lighting +
5B205W-Right charging port motor - lock
6B206W-Adjust right rearview mirror upward
7B207W-Adjust the left rearview mirror to the right
8B208W-Left rearview mirror left/down adjust the common end
9B209W-Right charging port motor - Unlock
10B210W-Adjust left rearview mirror upward
11B211W-Right front turn signal
12B212W-Left front turn signal
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- eStitch definition
1O75R-Car refrigerator power KL30
2Z25Br-Ground
B45 Car refrigerator
B46 Body controller BDCU-2

18 R

StitchWire numb- erLine Volt colorag- Stitch definition e
13--- -
14B214WAwning curtain - close switch signal
15B215W- DCDC3 Enable +
16B216WKL15 Power-on - and power-off request
17B217WRight rearview mirror left/down - adjust the public end
18B218W- Backlight +
19B219W- Top profile light +
20B220Wlow-beam - adjustment motor +
21B221WRearview mirror - heating +
22--- -
23B223WLeft center rear - turn signal
24B224WRight center rear - turn signal
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
4G01nR-KL15 power signal feedback
5B305W-Identification lamp 1+
6B306W-Identification lamp 2+
7B307W-Identification lamp 3+
8B308W-Reading light +
9B309W-Sunlight rainfall LIN
10----
11B311W-External toolbox light +
12----
13----
14B314W-Block key work indicator +
15B315W-Step light +
16B316W-Welcome light +
17B317R12V12V power output
18----
19----
20----
21----
22----
23----
24----
25B325W-Sleeper reading light +
26B326W-Hazard warning switch indicator light
27----
28----
29B329W-Front sunshade closed
30B330W-Front sunshade open
StitchWire numb- erLine Volt colorag- Stitch definition e
1--- -
2B302WLow light height - gear signal output
3--- -
B47 BDCU-3
StitchWire numb- erLine Voltag- color eStitch definition
31B331W -Left charging port motor - lock
32B332W -Left charging port motor - Unlock
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
13B413W-Low pressure PT sensor - pressure signal
14B414W-Sensor Power supply 5V+ high/ Low pressure/ temperature sensor
15B415W-Left/right turn signal switch
16B416Br-Analog switch (light/wiper) public area
17BL01G-BCANFD1-L
18BL02G-BCANFD2-L
19BL03G-BCANFD3-L
20TL03G-GWCANFD3-L
21B421W-Brake pad wear alarm signal
22B422W-Left front turn signal fault feedback
23B423W-Illegal off-seat switch 1
24----
25B425W-Seat belt switch
26H01W-Differential lock status feedback
27----
28----
29----
30B430W-Exhaust temperature cgq signal
31B431W-Inlet temperature signal
32B432W-High pressure/ temperature sensor
StitchWire numb- erLine Voltag- color eStitch definition
1B401W -Wash switch
2B402W -Right front turn signal fault feedback
3B403W -The door handle flicks the switch
4B404W -Main drive shade lowering switch
5B405W -Toolbox switch
6-- --
7-- --
8-- --
9-- --
10B410W -Effluent temperature signal
11B411W -Outdoor temperature signal
12B412W -Low pressure/ temperature sensor
B48 BDCU-4
Wire Stitch numb- erLine Voltag- color eStitch definition
33 B433W -High pressure PT sensor - pressure signal
34 B434W -Wiper switch signal
35 B435H W -igh beam/passing light switch
36 B436Br -sensorily
37 BH01Y -BCANFD1-H
38 BH02Y -BCANFD2-H
39 BH03Y -BCANFD3-H
40 TH03Y -GWCANFD3-H
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
8K222aY-Air conditioning CAN-H
9Z02Br-PTC grounding
10K218W-Air conditioning inside and outside circulation feedback signal
11K135aW-sensorily
12P111R-Blast power supply +
13K113W12VBlower motor 12V+
14K106W-Blower feedback
15K105W-Blower speed regulation PWM
16H03W-High voltage interlock in- air conditioning from sleeper
17H02W-High voltage interlock out- to passenger air conditioning
18K111W12VDefrosting motor 12V+
19----
20K114W-Blower foot motor 12V-
21K108W-Internal and external cycle motor 12V-
22K107W12VInternal and external cycle motor 12V+
23K110W-Heating and cooling motor 12V-
24K109W12VHeating and cooling motor 12V+
Wire Stitch numb- erLine Voltag- color eStitch definition
1 K119W -Outlet air temperature sensor 5V+
2 K118E W -vaporation sensor 5V+
3 K116W -Blowfoot actuator feedback
4 K115D W -efrosting actuator feedback
5 P203aR -PTC controller KL30
6 K117aW -Actuator carbon film 5V+
7 K223aG -Air conditioning CAN-L
B52 Left side air conditioner

20 R

Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
25 K112 WDefrosting motor - 12V-
26 Z02 BrBlast power supply - -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
3K132W-Blowfoot actuator feedback
4K131W-Defrosting actuator feedback
5P203bR-PTC controller KL30
6K117bW-Actuator carbon film 5V+
7K223bG-Air conditioning CAN-L
8K222bY-Air conditioning CAN-H
9Z10Br-PTC grounding
10K219W-Air conditioning inside and outside circulation feedback signal
11K135bW-sensorily
12P115R-Blast power supply +
13K129W12VBlower motor 12V+
14K137W-Blower feedback
15K136W-Blower speed regulation PWM
16H02W-High voltage interlock in- air conditioning from the main driver
17E208W-High voltage interlock out- to VDC
18K127W-Defrosting motor 12V+
19----
20K130W-Blower foot motor 12V-
21K124W-Internal and external cycle motor 12V-
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 R104b W- Left woofer -
2 - -- -
3 - -- -
4 R103b W- Left woofer+
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 K134 WOutlet air - temperature sensor 5V+
2 K133 WEvaporation sensor - 5V+
B53 Left woofer
B54 Right side air conditioner

20 R 14 Br 20 W

StitchWire numb- erLine Volt color eag- Stitch definition
22K123W 12Internal and V external cycle motor 12V+
23K126W -Heating and cooling motor 12V-
24K125W 12Heating and V cooling motor 12V+
25K128W -Defrosting motor 12V-
26Z10Br -Blast power supply -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R102b W- Right woofer -
2- -- -
3- -- -
4R101b W- Right woofer +
StitchWire numb- erLine Volt color eag- Stitch definition
1Z11Br -Ground
2K223cG -Air conditioning CAN-L
3K222cY -Air conditioning CAN-H
4K138cR 1212V power supply V +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U901 RECAS Air pressure - sensor public power supply
2U902 WRight rear axle - pressure signal
3U903 WFront axle pressure - signal
4U904 WSuspension solenoid valve - public power supply
B55 Fragrance
B56 Right woofer
B57 ECAS X2
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
5U905W-Left rear axle height signal
6U906W-Left rear axle pressure signal
7U907Br-sensorily
8U908W-Right rear axle height signal
9U909W-Front axle height signal
10U910W-Left rear solenoid valve
11U911W-Central solenoid valve
12----
13U913W-Right rear solenoid valve
14----
15U915W-Front axle solenoid valve
StitchWire numb- c erLine V oloroltag- eStitch definition
7P103R-ECAS Power supply KL30
8U808W-Remote control CLOCK
9----
10P102mR-ECAS Power supply KL15
11U811W-Remote control DATA
12Z10Br-ECAS grounding
13U813W-Remote control power supply
14----
15U815Br-Remote control grounding
16----
17----
18----
StitchWire numb- c erLine V oloroltag- eStitch definition
1U813W-Remote control power supply
2U815Br-Remote control grounding
3U808W-Remote control CLOCK
4U811W-Remote control DATA
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1TL08bG-Chassis CAN8-L
2----
3TH08bY-Chassis CAN8-H
4----
5----
6----
B58 ECAS X1
B59 Remote control unit
Wire Line Stitch numb- colo erVoltag- Stitch definition r e
5 - -- -
6 - -- -
7 - -- -
8 - -- -
9 - -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1B501W-DCDC3 fault alarm
2----
3----
4----
5D205bW-Door full lock signal
6B506W-Right window drop switch
7B507W-Left window drop switch
8B508W-Bar locker switch
9----
10B510W-Horn switch
11B511W-Wiper return switch
12BL06G-BCAN6-L
13BL05G-ESCL-BCAN5-L
14----
15----
16TBPW-BDCU-TGW 100 Mbit Ethernet
17TBNG-BDCU-TGW 100 Mbit Ethernet
18----
19B519W-Central control lock switch
20B520W-Main drive visor lift switch
21B521W-Right window lift switch
22B522W-Left window lift switch
23B523W-Toolbox reset
24B524W-signal Hazard warning switch
25B525W-Washing liquid level switch
26BH06Y-BCAN6-H
27BH05Y-ESCL-BCAN5-H
28----
Wire Line Stitch numb- colo erVoltag- Stitch definition r e
1 P210a R- Power KL30
2 - -- -
3 - -- -
4 Z11 Br- Ground
5 - -- -
6 - -- -
7 - -- -
8 - -- -
B60 Wireless charging
B61 BDCU-5
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
11B711W-External toolbox motor unlock
12----
13----
14----
15----
16----
17----
18----
19----
20----
21----
22B722W-External toolbox motor lock
StitchWire numb- erLine Vol colortag- Stitch definition e
1R116bR 1Ambient light 12V 2V power supply
2R201aW- Ambient Light LIN
3Z05Br- Ground
4--- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1----
2----
3----
4----
5----
6B606W-Turn to oil level detection switch
7BL07G-BCAN7-L
8----
9----
10----
11----
StitchWire numb- erLine Vol colortag- Stitch definition e
1--- -
2--- -
3--- -
4--- -
5--- -
6--- -
7--- -
8--- -
9--- -
10--- -
B62 Ambient light 1
B63 BDCU-6B
B64 BDCU-6A
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
12----
13----
14B614W-Trailer ABS indicator light
15----
16B616W-Front cover unlocked signal
17B424W-Sliding door switch
18----
19BH07Y-BCAN7-H
20----
21----
22----
23----
24----
25----
26----
StitchWire numb- erLine Volta color eg- Stitch definition
7Z05Br -Ground
8B108W -Wiper low speed power +
9P106R -BDCU-B+2
10-- --
11-- --
12B112W -Wiper high speed power +
13B113W -Left window down +
14B114W -Left window up +
15B115W -Right window down +
16Z05Br -Ground
17B117W -Right window up +
18-- --
r
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1----
2----
3P105R-BDCU-B+1
4B104W-Ceiling light power +
5B105W-Washing motor power +
6B106W-Interwheel lock solenoid valve +
1Z05Br -Ground
2-- --
3P201aR -Front USB power KL30
B65 BDCU-1
B67 Charging usb interface

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
11--- -
12Z05Br- Ground
13--- -
14--- -
15 16- -- -- - - -
17--- -
18--- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1K138b R12V 12V+ power supply
2Z26 Br- Ground
3K214 W- Temperature signal
4K135e W- Temperature signal
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1U201G2M modulator - CAN-L
2U202G- ESC-CAN-L
3U203R- 2M modulator +
4U204Y2M modulator - CAN-H
5U205Y- ESC-CAN-H
6U206RESC Power Supply - +
7U207Br- 2M modulator -
8U208BrESC Power Supply - -
9--- -
10U210WFront left ABS - solenoid valve -AV valve
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1TL08a G- Chassis CAN8-L
2- -- -
3TH08a Y- Chassis CAN8-H
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7G5Da R- EBS-KL15
7G2A R- EBS-KL15
8U108 R- EBS KL30-2
9U109 RPower supply - KL30-A
10- -- -
B68 Rear interior temperature sensor
B69 EBS X1
B70 EBS X2
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
11U211W-Front left ABS solenoid valve -EV valve
12U212W-Front left ABS solenoid valve ground
13U213W-Front right ABS solenoid valve -AV valve
14U214W-Front right ABS solenoid valve -EV valve
15U215W-Front right ABS solenoid valve ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
7U307 WTrailer valve - - pressure sensor power supply
8U308 WTrailer valve - - Pressure sensor signal
9U309 BrTrailer valve - - Pressure sensor grounded
1U401 G1M modulator - CAN-L
2U402 GSteering Angle - internal CAN-L
3- -- -
4U404 Y1M modulator - CAN-H
5U405 YSteering Angle - internal CAN-H
6- -- -
7U407 R- 1M modulator +
8- -- -
9U409 BrSteering Angle - ground
10U410 Br- 1M modulator -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1U301W-Trailer valve AV valve
2U302W-Trailer valve EV valve
3U303R-Trailer valve power supply
4U304Br-Trailer valve grounding
5----
6----
B71 EBS X3
B72 EBS X4

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- Stitch definition e
11--- -
12U412RSteering Angle - power supply
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1R101W-Right high woofer +
2R102W-Right high woofer -
3R103W-Left high woofer +
4R104W-Left high woofer -
5R105W-Right squawker/ surround-sound speaker +
6R106W-Right squawker/ surround-sound speaker -
7R107W-Left squawker/ surround-sound speaker +
8R108W-Left squawker/ surround-sound speaker -
9----
10----
11----
12----
13----
14----
15----
16R116R12VAmbient light 12V power supply
17P102dR-KL15 Power supply
18----
19Z04Br-CDC grounding
20P104R-CDC power B+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U501R- Power source
2U502WTravel signal - 1PWM1
3U503WSwitch signal - 2SW2
4U504Br- Ground
5U505WTravel signal - 2PWM2
6U506WSwitch signal - 2SW2
B73 EBS X5
B74 Cockpit domain controller 1
Wire Lin Stitch numb- col ere Voltag- Stitch definition or e
24 R224 WTV left channel - input -
25 R225 WTV right channel - input signal
26 R226 WTV right channel - input -
27 - -- -
28 - -- -
29 R229 RThe CAR screen 12V wakes up the 12V power supply
30 R230 RIPC wakes up 12V power supply 12V
31 R231 W- MIC2-
32 R232 W- MIC1-
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1R201W- Ambient Light LIN
2IL01aG- INTCANFD1-L
3TL05G- GWCANFD5-L
4--- -
5--- -
6--- -
7--- -
8R208WFront axle pressure - signal
9R209WRear axle pressure - signal
10--- -
11R211Br- Barosensorily
12--- -
13R213RThe IVI screen 12V wakes up the 12V power supply
14--- -
15R215W- MIC2+
16R216W- MIC1+
17--- -
18IH01aY- INTCANFD1-H
19TH05Y- GWCANFD5-H
20--- -
21--- -
22--- -
23R223WTV left channel - input signal
Wire Lin Stitch numb- col ere Voltag- Stitch definition or e
1 - -- -
2 TH01 Y- GWCANFD1-H
3 TH02 Y- ADSCAN1-H
4 TH03 Y- GWCANFD3-H
5 TH04 Y- GWCANFD4-H
6 TH05 Y- GWCANFD5-H
7 TH06 YIntelligent driving - CAN-H
8 TH07 Y- GWCANFD7-H
9 TH08 Y- Chassis CAN8-H
10 TH09 Y- GWCANFD9-H
B75 Cockpit domain controller 2
B76 T-gateway A
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
11----
12----
13Z04Br-Ground
14----
15----
16TL01G-GWCANFD1-L
17TL02G-ADSCAN1-L
18TL03G-GWCANFD3-L
19TL04G-GWCANFD4-L
20TL05G-GWCANFD5-L
21TL06G-Intelligent driving CAN-L
22TL07G-GWCANFD7-L
23TL08G-Chassis CAN8-L
24TL09G-GWCANFD9-L
25----
26----
27Z04Br-Ground
28----
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
8- -- -
9Z04 Br- Ground
10- -- -
11- -- -
12- -- -
13Z04 Br- Ground
14Z04 Br- Ground
15G5Dd R- KL15+2
16- -- -
17- -- -
18- -- -
19- -- -
20- -- -
21Z04 Br- Ground
22- -- -
23- -- -
24- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1G2HR-B1+
2O420R-B2+
3G01mR-KL15+1
4Z04Br-Ground
5----
6----
7----
1TCN G- CDC Ethernet
2TCP W- CDC Ethernet
3- -- -
4- -- -
5TBP W- BDCU Ethernet
6TBN G- BDCU Ethernet
7- -- -
8- -- -
B77 T-gateway B
B78 T-GW Ethernet

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

14 R
1
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1TRP W-Ethernet received signal +
2TRN G-Ethernet received signal -
3TTP W-Ethernet sends signal +
4TTN G-Ethernet sends signals -
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1--- -
2--- -
3--- -
4--- -
5P203cRPTC controller - KL30
6--- -
7K223cGAir conditioning - CAN-L
8K222cYAir conditioning - CAN-H
9Z25Br- PTC grounding
10--- -
11K135cW- sensorily
12P117RBlast power supply - +
13--- -
14K204W- Blower feedback
15K203WBlower speed - regulation PWM
16H04WHigh voltage interlock in- - compressor from chassis
17H03WHigh voltage - interlock out- to left air conditioning
18--- -
19--- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z25 Br-Ground
2O62 R-12V car power supply
B79 T-GW-OBD Ethernet
B80 12V car power supply
B81 Sleeper air conditioner
StitchWire numb- erLine Voltag color e- Stitch definition
20-- --
21K208W -Outlet air temperature sensor 5V+
22K207W -Evaporator temperature 5V+
23K206W -Hybrid actuator drives motor 12V-
24K205W 12VHybrid actuator drives motor 12V+
25-- --
26Z25Br -Blast power supply -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
14----
15----
16----
17----
18----
19----
20----
21----
22----
23----
24----
25P101bR-DCM Power supply KL30
26P101aR-DCM Power supply KL30
6 R
StitchWire numb- erLine Voltag color e- Stitch definition
1-- --
2-- --
3-- --
4BH03bY -BCANFD3-H
5BL03bG -BCANFD3-L
6-- --
7-- --
8-- --
9-- --
10-- --
11-- --
12Z15Br -Ground
13Z15Br -Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z11Br-Ground
2P202aR-Rear USB power KL30
B82 Gated module DCM-A
B83 Multi-media usb interface
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
19- -- -
20D220 Br- DCM signal ground
21D304 W- Door lock motor +
22D305 W- Door lock motor -
1- ---
2D205 W-Door full lock signal
3D204 W-Door half-lock signal
4- ---
5- ---
6- ---
7D212 W-Induction motor reset signal
8D210 W-Switch motor reset signal
9- ---
10D110 W-Electric suction/ electric switch motor +
11D101 W-Electric suction/ electric switch motor -
12- ---
13D221 W-Door handle indicator +
14- ---
15- ---
16D207 W-Central control door lock status signal
17D206 W-Track lock in place signal
18D211 W-Anti-clamp signal
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P315 R- Power B+
2P102f R- KL15 Power supply
3Z10 Br- Ground
4- -- -
5BH03d Y- BCANFD3-H
6BL03d G- BCANFD3-L
7B218b WBacklight power - supply PWM+
8- -- -
B84 Gated module DCM-B

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

B85 Sleeper switch devices
B86 Emergency high voltage plug-in 2

20 R 20 Br 20 R 2 O4152 18 R

StitchWire numb- erLine Volt color eag- Stitch definition
1O4152R -Battery pack -B+
2O4153R -Battery pack -B+
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1TCN G- CDC Ethernet
2TCP W- CDC Ethernet
StitchWire numb- erLine Volt color eag- Stitch definition
1B722W -External toolbox motor lock
2B711W -External toolbox motor unlock
3B523W -External toolbox reset signal
4Z26Br -Ground
5-- --
6-- --
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B113 WLeft window down - +
2B114 W- Left window up +
StitchWire numb- erLine Volt color eag- Stitch definition
1B405W -Toolbox switch
2Z26Br -Ground
B87 External toolbox
B88 Toolbox switch
B89 CDC Ethernet
B90 Left glass regulator
B91 Vehicle inverter 2-2
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Q02B R- Power source
2Z06 Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1R225W-TV right channel input signal
2R226W-TV right channel input -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1G5Dc R- KL15 is enabled
2- -- -
3- -- -
4- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1R223W-TV left channel input signal
2R224W-TV left channel input -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P207 RCar TV power - supply KL30
2Z26 Br- Ground
B92 Vehicle inverter 2-1
B93 TV power interface
B94 TV right speaker
B95 TV left speaker
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1----
2----
3O74R-12V power supply +
4----
5O71Y-Left turn signal output +
6----
7O70G-Right turn signal output +
8----
9----
10----
11----
12----
13Z10Br-Ground
14----
15----
16----
17----
18----
19----
20----
21BH07Y-BCAN7-H
22BL07G-BCAN7-L
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z01 Br- Ground
2O318 R- Sign light +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z07 Br- Ground
2O318 R- Sign light +
B96 Trailer turn signal controller
B97 Left front sign light
B98 Right front sign light
G22 Take the iron point 1
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1Z01Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z03Br-Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1Z07Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z04Br-Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1Z02Br- Ground
G23 Take the iron point 7
G24 Take the iron point 2
G25 Take the iron point 3
G26 Take the iron point 4
G27 Take the iron point 5
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- eStitch definition
1Z05Br-Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z15 Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- eStitch definition
1Z11Br-Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z06 Br- Ground
1Z26 Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- eStitch definition
1Z10Br-Ground
Z21 Z25
G28 Take the iron point 11
G29 Take the iron point 10
G31 Take the iron point 15
G32 Take the iron point 22
G33 Take the iron. 21
8 Br

12 Br

StitchWire numb- erLine Volta color eg- Stitch definition
1Z21Br -Ground
1Z25Br -Ground
1B208 WLeft rearview mirror - left/down adjust the common end
2B330 WFront sunshade - open
3- -- -
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7P202b RTop cabinet power - +
8B219 W- Profile light +
9P108 RAwning curtain - KL30+
10B207 WLeft rear-view - adjustment to right
11B329 WFront sunshade - closed
12- -- -
13H18 R12V Camera heating +
14B104 W- Ceiling light +
15R105b WRight surround- - sound speaker +
16R106b WRight surround- - sound speaker -
17B325 WSleeper reading - light +
18- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine Volta color eg- Stitch definition
1-- --
2B616W -Front mask switch signal
3-- --
4-- --
5B317fR 1212V power supply V +
6Z01Br -Ground
7O407aR -AGS-KL30
8-- --
9-- --
10TH02Y -ADSCAN1-H
11E251cW -AGS-LIN
12-- --
13-- --
14TL02G -ADSCAN1-L
15-- --
16-- --
17-- --
18-- --
19-- --
20-- --
I_B_BU The floor harness is connected to the front harness
I_B_LR Connect the floor harness to the left ceiling harness

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition 20 R 22 Y 20 R 20 R

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
19B221 RRearview mirror - heating +
20O501 R12V Left screen 12V+
21- -- -
22B214 WAwning curtain - close switch
23B202 WThe awning curtain - opens the switch
24B308a W- Reading light +
25R108b WLeft surround- - sound speaker -
26R107b WLeft surround- - sound speaker +
27O502 R12V Left screen 12V+
28B210 WAdjust left rearview - mirror upward
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
6B306W-Identification lamp 2+
7B305W-Identification lamp 1+
8B317dR12V12V power output
9B203W-Adjust right rearview mirror to the right
10----
11----
12----
13----
14----
15R216W-MIC1+
16R232W-MIC1-
17R215W-MIC2+
18R231W-MIC2-
19B309W-Sunlight rainfall LIN
20 21 22B206 - -W - -- - -Adjust right rearview mirror upward - -
23 24 25 26O502 TL01 TH01 AH01R G Y Y12V - - -Left screen 12V+ GWCANFD1-L GWCANFD1-H HMI Private CAN- H
27AL01G-HMI private CAN-L
28G2ER-Fusioncube B+
29B217W-Right rearview mirror left/down adjust the public end
30----
31----
32----
33O501R12VLeft screen 12V+
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1- -- -
2- -- -
3P102i RRight electronic - rear view mirror KL15+
4B308b W- Reading light +
5B307 WIdentification lamp - 3+
I_B_RR Connect the floor harness to the right ceiling harness

20 R 20 R 20 R 22 Y 22 Y

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
34TL06d GIntelligent driving - CAN-L
35TH06d YIntelligent driving - CAN-H
36- -- -
37H18 R12V Camera heating +
38G01 R- Front camera KL15
39B221 RRearview mirror - heating +
40- -- -
41- -- -
42- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
13- -- -
14- -- -
15- -- -
16- -- -
17- -- -
18- -- -
19- -- -
20- -- -
21- -- -
22- -- -
23- -- -
24- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P107 R- Seat power B+
2B423 WOff seat switch - signal
3- -- -
4G5D RThe ECU is - enabled
5- -- -
6- -- -
7 8 9- - Z03 Br - -- - - Ground - -
10 11B425 W - -- Seat belt signal - -
12- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1L20 RDC/DC2 power - supply
I_B_S Floor wiring harness to seat wiring harness
I1_B_BE Floor harness connected to DCDC positive harness 1
I1_B_C Floor wiring harness to chassis wiring harness 1

16 Br 16 R 14 R 14 R

Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 P4K RRight battery pump - +
2 P4A R- Left battery pump +
3 P4P RMotor water pump - 2
4 P4F RMotor water pump - 1
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
15B524W-Hazard warning switch
16B314W-Block the key work indicator
17B519W-Unlock the lock switch
18U011G-EPB1 linear 2
19U012Y-EPB1 linear 1
20U508Br-Hanging the EPB switch -
21 22R229 P314bR R12V -CDC sends 12V power to wake up the CAR screen CAR screen power
23B810R-supply KL30 Bluetooth power for doorknob
24B809W-Doorknob Bluetooth ID
25----
26R201aW-Ambient Light LIN
27R116bR12VAmbient light 12V power supply
28B424W-Sliding door switch
29U523W-Hang EPB switch+
30P102R-KL15 Power supply +
31R230R12VIPC wakes up power supply 12V+
32BL06aG-BCAN6-L
33BH06aY-BCAN6-H
34----
35----
36----
37P304bR-Bluetooth 、NFC Module B+
38U003W-Main EPB indicator light
39R102aW-Right tweeter -
20 W 20 R 20 W
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 - -- -
2 PH04d Y- PCAN4-H
3 R104a W- Left tweeter -
4 R103a W- Left tweeter +
5 U008 Br- EPB switch -
6 U023 WEPB Switching - power supply
7 U015 W- EPB release switch
8 U014 W- EPB parking switch
9 U603 WHang the EPB - indicator
10 R107a W- Left alto speaker +
11 R108a W- Left alto speaker -
12 P116b RCombination - switch - Shift -KL30
13 PL04d G- PCAN4-L
14 B326 WHazard alarm - switch light
I1_B_IP Floor harness to instrument harness 1
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
40R101a W- Right tweeter +
41R106a WRight squawker/ - surround-sound speaker -
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
3 P4D R- Left battery fan 2+
4 P4M RRight battery fan 2 - +
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 - -- -
2 TTN GEthernet sends - signals -
3 TTP WEthernet sends - signal +
4 - -- -
5 TH09a Y- GWCANFD9-H
6 TRP W - -Ethernet received - signal + - -
7 8 - -- - -
9 TH04 Y 10 TL04 G 11 - - 12 P305b RGWCANFD4-H - GWCANFD4-L - - - IPC screen B+
13 IH01 Y 14 IL01 G- INTCANFD1-H - INTCANFD1-L
15 - -- -
16 TL09a G- GWCANFD9-L
17 TRN GEthernet received - signal -
18 B522 WLeft window lift - switch
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1L21 RDC/DC2 power - supply
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P4E R- Left battery fan 1+
2P4N RRight battery fan 1 - +

42 R105a W - Right squawker/ surround-sound speaker +

I2_B_BE Floor harness connected to DCDC positive harness 2
I2_B_C Floor harness to chassis harness 2
I2_B_IP Floor harness to instrument harness 2

12 R 12 R 20 R

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
19B507 WLeft window drop - switch
20B521 WRight window lift - switch
21B506 WRight window drop - switch
22B520 WMain drive visor lift - switch
23B404 WMain drive shade - lowering switch
24K209 WTemperature - sensor signal in front car
25K135d WFront car - temperature sensor
26K138a RTemperature sensor inside the 12V front car 12V power supply
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
4----
5----
6B430W-Exhaust temperature signal
7B410W-Effluent temperature signal
8B431W-Inlet temperature signal
9B436eBr-sensorily
10B209W-Right charging port motor - Unlock
11B205W-Right charging port motor - lock
12----
13----
14B412W-Low pressure/ temperature sensor
15B413W-Low pressure PT sensor - pressure signal
16 17B432 B433W W- -High pressure/ temperature sensor High pressure PT sensor - pressure signal
18 19B414c P204W R- -Sensor power supply 5V SOV+
20K102W-Former SOV-
21K103W-After SOV-
22----
23PL02G-Battery PCAN2-L
24PH02Y-Battery PCAN2-H
25----
26----
27----
28U109R-EBS KL30-1
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B332c WCharging port - motor - Unlock
2B331c WCharging port - motor - lock
3O325 WTraction seat slip - switch
I3_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 3
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
29U108 R- EBS KL30-2
30- -- -
31- -- -
32- -- -
33H04 WHigh pressure - interlock in from compressor
34E208 WHigh voltage - interlock to VDC
35P205c RCompressor power - supply
36O75 RCar refrigerator - KL30
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
9B317e RClock spring 12V 12V power
10- -- -
11U402 GSteering Angle - internal CAN-L
12U405 YSteering Angle - internal CAN-H
13U412 RSteering Angle - power supply
14U409 BrSteering Angle - ground
15U514 WHang EPB parking - switch
16BL05 G- ESCL-BCAN5-L
17P308 R- HUD-KL30+
18 19P313 R B401 W- IVI screen -KL30 - Wash switch
20 21B434 W B416 Br- Wiper switch Left combination - switch analog
22B415 W- Turn switch signal
23B435 W- Passing switch
24O325 WTraction seat slip - switch
25U515 WHanging EPB - release switch
26- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1- -- -
2B510 WClock spring - horn - switch
3 4 5U511 W U512 W BH05 YExample Hang - EPB Hall 2 - Hang EPB hall 1 - ESCL-BCAN5-H ESCL Power
6 7P316 R R213 R- supply B+ CDC sends 12V 12V power to wake up IVI screen
8B218 W- Backlight +
I3_B_IP Floor harness to instrument harness 3
I4_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 4

20 R 20 W

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1U008Br-EPB switch -
2U023W-Switch +
3U012W-EPB1 is linear 1
4U011W-EPB private CAN-L
5U014W-Parking switch
6U015W-Release switch
7U603W-Hang the EPB indicator
8U511W-Example Hang EPB Hall 2
9B106W-Interwheel lock solenoid valve electrical
10U905W-Left rear axle height signal
11U908W-Right rear axle height signal
12U909W-Front axle height signal
13U003W-Primary EPB indicator
14----
15----
16U508Br-Hanging the EPB switch -
17 18U512 B606W W- -Example Hang EPB Hall 1 Turn to oil tank level sensor signal
19 20U901 U902R W- -ECAS sensor power supply Right rear axle pressure signal
21U903W-Front axle pressure signal
22U906W-Left rear axle pressure signal
23U907Br-ECAS sensor ground
Stitch nWire Line Vo umb- color erltag- Stitch definition e
24- -- -
25U523 WHang up EPB - switch +
26U514 WHang the EPB - parking switch
27B421 WBrake pad wear - alarm signal
28- -- -
29U910 WLeft rear solenoid - valve
30U911 WCentral solenoid - valve
31U913 WRight rear solenoid - valve
32U915 WFront axle solenoid - valve
33U904 WSuspension - solenoid valve power supply
34- -- -
35U515 WSuspending EPB - release switch
36- -- -
I5_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 5
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1U301W-Trailer valve AV valve
2U302W-Trailer valve EV valve
3U303R-Trailer valve grounding
4U304Br-Trailer valve power supply
5U307W-Trailer valve - pressure sensor power supply
6U308W-Trailer valve - Pressure sensor signal
7U309Br-Trailer valve - Pressure sensor grounded
8B614W-Trailer failure light
9R211Br-Low pressure sensor -
10U210W-Front left ABS solenoid valve -AV valve
11U211W-Front left ABS solenoid valve -EV valve
12U212W-Front left ABS solenoid valve ground
13 14U213 U214W W- -Front right ABS solenoid valve -AV valve Front right ABS solenoid valve -EV
15U215W-valve Front right ABS solenoid valve ground
16----
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
17- -- -
18R209 WRear axle pressure - signal
19U202 G- ESC-CAN-L
20U205 Y- ESC-CAN-H
21U206 R- ESC+
22U208 Br- ESC-
23- -- -
24- -- -
25- -- -
26- -- -
27R208 WFront axle pressure - signal
28U401 G1M modulator - CAN-L
29U404 Y1M modulator - CAN-H
30U407 R- 1M modulator +
31U410 Br- 1M modulator -
32U201 G2M modulator - CAN-L
33U204 Y2M modulator - CAN-H
34U203 R- 2M modulator +
35U207 Br- 2M modulator -
36- -- -
I6_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 6
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P4S RMotor Fan 2 Power - supply
2P4H RMotor fan 1 Power - supply
3- -- -
4P4B RMotor Fan 3 Power - supply
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
19E251 WActive Grille - Shutter LIN
20- -- -
21- -- -
22- -- -
23- -- -
24- -- -
25- -- -
26- -- -
27- -- -
28E124 RAcceleration power - 1
29E237 WAcceleration signal - 1
30E275 Br- acceleratedly
31E125 RAcceleration power - 2
32E239 WAcceleration signal - 2
33E236 Br- quickly2
34E157 W- Parking switch 1
35E154 W- Parking switch 2
36H01a WDifferential lock - signal
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1G01a R- KL15-1
2G5Da R- KL15-3
3G2H R- T-GW B+1
4O420 R- T-GW B+2
5- -- -
6- -- -
7G2A R- EBS-KL15A
8 9G2E R O407 R- Main ADCU-B+ - AGS-KL30
10O4153 R- Battery pack -B+
11O4151 R- Battery pack -B+
12- -- -
13- -- -
14- -- -
15- -- -
16- -- -
17- -- -
18- -- -
I7_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 7
I8_B_C Floor wiring harness chassis wiring harness 8

20 R 22 Y

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1----
2AH01Y-HMI Private CAN- H
3AL01G-HMI private CAN-L
4----
5----
6----
7----
8PH03Y-PCAN3-H
9PL03G-PCAN3-L
10----
11----
12----
13----
14----
15----
16----
17----
18----
19----
20BH01Y-BCANFD1-H
21PH04Y-Electric drive CAN4-H
22BH02Y-BCANFD2-H
23----
24K222aY-Air conditioning CAN-H
25TH07Y-GWCANFD7-H
26TH08Y-Chassis CAN8-H
27TH06bY-Intelligent driving CAN-H
28----
29BL01G-BCANFD1-L
30PL04G-Electric drive CAN4-L
31BL02G-BCANFD2-L
32----
33K223aG-Air conditioning CAN-L
34TL07G-GWCANFD7-L
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
35TL08 G-Chassis CAN8-L
36TL06b G-Intelligent driving CAN-L
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1O71 Y-Trailer left turn signal
2O70 G-Trailer right turn signal
3O74 R-Turn signal controller power +
4B215 W-DCDC3 Enable +
5B501 W-DCDC3 fault alarm
6- ---
7- ---
8B216 W-KL15 Power-on and power-off request
9B201 W-KL30 Power-on and power-off request
10- ---
11- ---
12- ---
13- ---
14- ---
15- ---
16- ---
I9_B_C Floor harness to chassis harness 9

20 R 20 R 20 R 20 R

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
17----
18O62R-12V car power supply
19O318R-Position light
20B224W-Right turn signal
21B223W-Left turn signal
22----
23----
24O419R-Horn power supply
25O416R-AVAS power supply
26----
27----
28O301R-Near left light
29O302R-Right low light
30O303R-Left high beam
31O309R-Right high beam
32----
33O306R-Right DRL
34----
35O304R-Left DRL
36O317R-ADS lamp
StitchWire numb- erLine Volta color eg- Stitch definition
GG2GR -TCU-KL30
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1G01 RKL15 Power supply - 1
2G62b REHPS Power - supply -KL30A
StitchWire numb- erLine Volta color eg- Stitch definition
1O301R -Near left light
2O302R -Right low beam
3O303R -Left beam
4O304R -Left DRL
5-- --
6O306R -Right DRL
7-- --
8O308R -IBS-B+
9O309R -Right beam
10B216W -KL15 Power-on and power-off request
11B201W -KL30 Power-on and power-off request
12-- --
13-- --
14-- --
15-- --
16O316R -Reverse lamp
17O317R -ADS lamp
18O318R -lamplet
19-- --
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
AG2A R- EBS-KL15A
B- -- -
CZ50 Br- Ground
DU109 R- EBS-KL30
EG2E R- Main ADCU-B+
FG2F RAuxiliary ADCU-B - +/EVCC/ Trailer EPB-B+

9.2.6 Chassis Wiring Harness

9.2.6.1 Chassis Wiring Harness Terminal Diagram

C1 Chassis electrical box C1
C2 Chassis electrical box C2(black)

H G2H R - T-GW-B+

C3 Chassis electrical box C3
StitchWire numb- erLine Volt color eag- Stitch definition
20O320R -Right brake lamp
21-- --
22O322R -Rear working light
23O323R -Brake emergency solenoid valve KL30+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
14----
15O4151R-Battery pack -B+
16O416R-AVAS-KL30
17----
18O418R-Dryer heating -KL30
19O419R-Horn power supply
20O420R-T-gateway -B+
21O421R-Middle and rear axle MCU-KL30
22----
23 O423 R - VDC-B+
1BL02cG -BCANFD2-L
2BH02cY -BCANFD2-H
3BL02cG -BCANFD2-L
4O404R -Front axle pressure sensor/Rear axle pressure sensor/ Emergency pressure sensor power supply KL30 +
5O405R -Tire pressure
6O406R -Air horn
7O407R -Battery WPTC- KL30+AGS
8O408R -PDU-KL30
9-- --
10-- --
11BL01cG -BCANFD1-L
12BH01cY -BCANFD1-H
13-- --
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
AU108R-EBS KL30-2
B----
C----
DG5DR-KL15 Power supply 3
EG5ER-EPB-B+
F----
G----
H----
C4 Chassis electrical box C4

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

C5 Chassis Electrical box C5(Blue)
StitchWire numb- erLine Volta color eg- Stitch definition
1-- --
2G62aR -EHPS-KL30B
Stitch nWire umb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1Z67Br- Ground signal
2H09WFrom the middle - right to the back right
StitchWire numb- erLine Volta color eg- Stitch definition
1B106W -Solenoid power supply
2Z65Br -Ground
3-- --
4-- --
Stitch nWire umb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1H09WFrom the middle - right to the back right
2H10WFrom back right to - back left
C6 Chassis electrical box C6
C07 Interwheel lock solenoid valve
C08 Right center axle brake pads
C09 Right rear axle brake pads
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U608 WRear axle right - wheel speed sensor ground
2U607 WRear axle right - wheel ABS sensor signal
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U908 WRight rear axle - height signal
2U907e Br- sensorily
3- -- -
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U901b R- Power source
2U907b Br- sensorily
3U902 WRight rear axle - pressure signal
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z68 Br- to
2O318 RPosition light - positive
3B224 WSteering/braking - positive
C10 Rear axle right wheel ABS sensor
C11 Combination lamp-rh rr
C12 Rear axle right height sensor
C13 Right rear axle pressure sensor
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R210 WParking low voltage - alarm signal
2Z68 Br- Ground
3- -- -
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U905 WLeft rear altitude - signal
2U907d Br- sensorily
3- -- -
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U901a R- Power source
2U907a Br- sensorily
3U906 WLeft rear pressure - signal
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z68 Br- to
2O318 RPosition light - positive
3B223 WSteering/braking - positive
C14 Low pressure warning switch
C15 Left rear axle pressure sensor
C16 Rear axle left height sensor
C17 Combination lamp-lh rr
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
8U008Br-EPB switch -
9G01cR-KL15
10----
11U011Br-EPB switch -
12U012Y-EPB private CAN- H
13----
14U014W-Parking switch
15U015W-Release switch
16----
17----
18----
19TH08cY-Chassis CAN8-H
20TL08cG-Chassis CAN8-L
21----
22----
23U023W-Parking switch power supply
24Z67Br-Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U911a WCentral solenoid - valve
2U913 WRight rear solenoid - valve
3U910 WLeft rear solenoid - valve
4U904a WSolenoid power - supply
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1- -- -
2- -- -
3U003 WPrimary EPB - indicator
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1TH08fY-Chassis CAN8-H
2TL08fG-Chassis CAN8-L
C18 Rear axle suspension solenoid valve
C19 EPB

25 G5Eb R - Power B+

C20 CAN resistance -120 Ω
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1U601W-Rear axle left wheel ABS sensor signal
2U602W-Rear axle left wheel speed sensor
3----
4----
5----
6----
7U607W-Rear axle right wheel ABS sensor signal
8U608W-Rear axle right wheel speed sensor ground
9----
10----
11----
12----
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag e- Stitch definition
1U207Br-GND
2U203R-Solenoid power supply
3U204Y-2M modulator CAN-H
4U201G-2M modulator CAN-L
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag e- Stitch definition
1H10W-From back right to back left
2H11W-From back left to center left
C21 Axle modulator 2M-X1
C22 Axle modulator 2M-X2
C23 Left rear axle brake pads
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
9M05WThe rear - displacement signal
10M06WDisplacement - sensor power supply
11M07W- sensorily
12M08WThe rear - displacement signal
13H01bWDifferential lock - feedback signal
14--- -
15--- -
16--- -
17O421bRMCU power supply - KL30
18M01R- Motor drive 2+
19--- -
20Z66BrMCU Power - Supply -
21M02 -Br -- Motor drive 2- - -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U602 WRear axle left - wheel speed sensor
2U601 WRear axle left - wheel ABS sensor signal
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1E146b R- Wake-up call
2- -- -
3PH04f Y- MCU3-CAN-H
4PL04f G- MCU3-CAN-L
5PH04e Y- MCU4-CAN-H
6PL04e G- MCU4-CAN-L
7M03 WSpeed input signal - 2
8M04 WSpeed sensor - power supply
C24 Rear axle left wheel ABS sensor
C25 E-axle rear axle vehicle low voltage port
C26 Left center axle brake pads
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1H11 WFrom back left to - center left
2H32 WFrom left center to - right front
W Stitch nuire Line mb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
13 H01a W-Differential lock feedback signal
14 PH04b Y-TCU-CAN-H
15 PL04b G-TCU-CAN-L
16- ---
17 O421a R-MCU power supply KL30
18 M01 R-Motor drive 2+
19 G2G R-TCU Power supply KL30 MCU Power
20 Z 21 M66 Br 02 Br- -Supply - Motor drive 2-
22 Z65 Br-TCU Power supply -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1E146a R- Wake-up call
2- -- -
3PH04c Y- MCU1-CAN-H
4PL04c G- MCU1-CAN-L
5PH04d Y- MCU2-CAN-H
6PL04d G- MCU2-CAN-L
7M03 WSpeed input signal - 2
8M04 WSpeed sensor - power supply 2
9M05 WThe rear - displacement signal
10M06 WDisplacement - sensor power supply 2
11M07 WDisplacement - sensor ground 2
12M08 WThe rear - displacement signal
W Stitch nuire Line mb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1 BL01a G-BCANFD1-L
2 BH01a Y-BCANFD1-H
3- ---
4- ---
5 O405b G-Power KL30
6 Z66 Br-Ground
C27 E-axle mid axle vehicle low voltage port
C28 Rear tire pressure module
Wire h numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
U208Br-Ground connection
U206R-Power source
U205Y-ESC-CAN-H
U202G-ESC-CAN-L
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U303 RTrailer valve power - supply
2U301 W- Trailer AV valve
3U302 W- Trailer EV valve
4U304 BrTrailer valve - grounding
5U307 WPressure sensor - power supply
6U308 WPressure sensor - signal
7U309 BrPressure sensor - grounding
Wire h numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
Z68Br-Ground
O318cR-Identification light
O317cR-ADS lamp
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1E149 W- Exhaust valve
2Z60 Br- Ground
3E148 W- Regenerative valve
4- -- -
C29 Yaw rate sensor
C30 Left rear marker combination light
C31 Trailer control valve
C32 Dryer - exhaust - regenerative valve
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
C2----
C3----
C4----
D1----
D2----
D3----
D4----
E1E146R-Wake up power
E2----
E3PL03gG-PCAN3-L
E4PH03gY-PCAN3-H
F1----
F2----
F3----
F4----
G1----
G2----
G3----
G4----
H1----
H2----
H3----
H4----
J1----
J2----
J3----
J4----
K1----
K2----
K3----
K4----
L1O408aR-Power KL30
L2O408bR-Power KL30
L3----
L4----
M1Z60Br-Ground
M2Z60Br-Ground
M3----
M4----
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O418 R- Power KL30
2Z60 Br- Ground
3- -- -
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
A1H06 WHigh voltage - interlock in from left unit
A2- -- -
A3- -- -
A4- -- -
B1H052 WHigh voltage - interlock output
B2- -- -
B3- -- -
B4- -- -
C1- -- -
C33 Heater
C34 Power distribution unit
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1O322R- Power source
2Z68Br- Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1E143 W- signal
2Z56 Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1H32WFrom left center to - right front
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1E126 W- signal
2Z56 Br- Ground connection
C36 Work lamp-rr
C37 Trailer brake pads

2 H12 W - From left center to right front

C40 Motor cooling level sensor
C41 Battery cooled level sensor
C42 Front axle pressure sensor
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R211a Br- Ground connection
2R208 W- signal
3O404b RPower supply KL30 - +
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
3TH06b YIntelligent driving - CAN-H
4- -- -
5- -- -
6G2E R- Smart Drive B+
7- -- -
8Z68 Br- Ground
9- -- -
10- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R211b Br- Ground connection
2R209 W- signal
3O404c RPower supply KL30 - +
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z68 Br- Ground
2O318e R- Identification light
3O317e R- ADS lamp
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z68 Br- Ground
2TL06b GIntelligent driving - CAN-L
C43 Rear axle pressure sensor
C45 Left millimeter wave radar
C46 Left center sign combination light
C47 Left charging port cover locks motor
StitchWire L numb- c erine Volta olor eg- Stitch definition
1B332aW -Unlock +
2B331aW -Blocked +
StitchWire Line Vo numb- color erltag- Stitch definition e
1O405c R- Power KL30
2Z56 Br- Ground connection
StitchWire L numb- c erine Volta olor eg- Stitch definition
1Z68Br -Ground
2O318cR -Identification light
3O317cR -ADS lamp
StitchWire Line Vo numb- color erltag- Stitch definition e
1U701 WFront axle left - wheel speed sensor signal
2U702 WFront axle left - wheel speed sensor
3- -- -
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7U707 WFront axle right - wheel speed sensor signal
StitchWire L numb- c erine Volta olor eg- Stitch definition
1B606W -signal
2Z56Br -Ground
C48 Left front sign combination light
C49 Turn to tank level sensor
C50 Tire pressure repeater
C51 Axle modulator 1M-X1
StitchWire Li numb- co erne Voltag lor e- Stitch definition
8U708W -Front axle right wheel speed sensor ground
9-- --
10-- --
11-- --
12-- --
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1Z58Br- Ground
2E155bWFault feedback - signal
3E228aW- PWM signal
4P4PR- Power supply KL15
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1Z58Br- Ground
2E155aWFault feedback - signal
3E228aW- PWM signal
4P4FR- Power supply KL15
StitchWire Li numb- co erne Voltag lor e- Stitch definition
1U410Br -GND
2U407R -Solenoid power supply
3U404Y -1M modulator CAN-H
4U401G -1M modulator CAN-L
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1Z58Br- Ground
2O406R- Power source
C52 Axle modulator 1M-X2
C53 Motor water pump 2
C54 Motor water pump 1
C55 Air horn
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1H12 WFrom left center to - right front
2H13 WFront right to front - left
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U215 W- Ground connection
2U214 W- EV valve
3U213 W- AV valve
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U708 WFront axle right - wheel speed sensor ground
2U707 WFront axle right - wheel speed sensor signal
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z68 Br- Ground
2O318f R- Identification light
3O317f R- ADS lamp
C56 Right front axle brake pads
C57 Front axle right wheel ABS sensor
C58 Front axle right wheel ABS solenoid valve
C59 Right center mark combination light A
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B209 W- Unlock +
2B205 W- Blocked +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z68 Br-Ground
2O318d R-Identification light
3O317d R-ADS lamp
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z68 Br- Ground
2TL06c GIntelligent driving - CAN-L
3TH06c YIntelligent driving - CAN-H
4- -- -
5- -- -
6G2E R- Smart Drive B+
7- -- -
8- -- -
9- -- -
10- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z68 Br-Ground
2O318f R-Identification light
3O317f R-ADS lamp
C60 Right charging port cover locks motor
C62 Right millimeter wave radar
C63 Right center mark combination light B
C64 Right rear sign combination light
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U909 WFront axle height - signal
2U907f Br- sensorily
3- -- -
4 - - - -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1K103 W- Controls -
2P204b R- Power source
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P205c R- Power KL30
2- -- -
3Z57 Br- Ground
4- -- -
5K222a YAir conditioning - CAN-H
6K223a GAir conditioning - CAN-L
7H04 WInterlock out to the - body
8H051 WInterlocking in - slave PDU
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U915 WFront axle solenoid - valve
2U904b WSolenoid power - supply
3- -- -
4U904b WSolenoid power - supply
C65 Front axle height sensor
C66 Front axle suspension solenoid valve
C67 Rear air conditioning SOV
C68 Air conditioning compressor
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B436b Br- sensorily
2B413 W- Pressure signal
3B412 W- Temperature signal
4B414b W- 5V power supply
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1G01d R- Power supply KL15
2TL08d G- Chassis CAN8-L
3TH08d Y- Chassis CAN8-H
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B430 W- Sensor signal
2B436e Br- sensorily
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z59 Br- Ground
2G62 Br- Power KL30
C69 Low pressure/temperature sensor
C70 Compressor exhaust temperature sensor
C71 EHPS

8 - - - -

C72 EHPS
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1K102 W- Controls -
2P204a R- Power source
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U702 WFront axle left - wheel speed sensor
2U701 WFront axle left - wheel speed sensor signal
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U901c R- Power source
2U907c Br- sensorily
3U903 WFront axle pressure - signal
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1H13 WFront right to front - left
2B421 W- Enter BDCU
C73 Front air conditioner SOV
C74 Front axle pressure sensor
C75 Front axle left wheel ABS sensor
C76 Left front axle brake pads
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U212 W- Ground connection
2U211 W- EV valve
3U210 W- AV valve
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B436d Br- sensorily
2B431 WInlet temperature - signal
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P4B RMotor Fan 3 Power - supply
2Z53 Br- Motor grounding
3E158c W- Fault detection
4E250c WPWM speed - regulation
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B436c Br- sensorily
2B410 WEffluent - temperature signal
C77 Front axle left wheel ABS solenoid valve
C80 Outlet water temperature sensor
C81 Inlet water temperature sensor
C82 Motor fan 3
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag e- Stitch definition
1P4SR-Motor power supply KL15
2Z52Br-Motor grounding
3E158bW-Fault detection
4E250bW-PWM speed regulation
StitchWire numb- erLine Voltag color e- Stitch definition
1B436aBr -sensorily
2B433W -Pressure signal
3B432W -Temperature signal
4B414aW -5V power supply
StitchWire numb- erLine Voltag color e- Stitch definition
1P4ER -Left battery fan 1 Power supply
2Z61Br -Left battery fan 1 Ground
3P4DR -Left battery fan 2 Power supply
4Z62Br -Left battery fan 2 Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag e- Stitch definition
1P4HR-Motor power supply KL15
2Z51Br-Motor grounding
3E158aW-Fault detection
4E250aW-PWM speed regulation
C83 Motor fan 2
C84 Motor fan 1
C85 High pressure/temperature sensor
C86 Left thermal management unit 2
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
6Z60Br-Compressor /WPTC controller
7PH03hY-PCAN3-H
8PL03hG-PCAN3-L
9H07W-High pressure interlock in from right unit
10----
11H06W-High voltage interlock out to the PDU
12E150W-Pump feedback signal
13----
14E252W-Left pump PWM signal
15E113W-Fan feedback signal
16E293W-Fan PWM signal
17----
18E255W-Compressor exhaust temperature signal
19E211W-H_P feedback
20----
21----
22E235W-Left low pressure PT sensor pressure signal
23E123R-High pressure/ temperature sensor 5V+
24E258Br-High pressure/ temperature sensor ground
25E218aBr-Compressor exhaust temperature sensor
StitchWire Line V numb- color eroltag- Stitch definition e
1P4N RRight battery fan 1 - Power supply
2Z63 BrRight battery fan 1 - Ground
3P4M RRight battery fan 2 - Power supply
4Z64 BrLeft battery fan 2 - Ground
StitchWire Line V numb- color eroltag- Stitch definition e
1- -- -
2Z60 Br- Left pump ground
3- -- -
4P205a RCompressor power - supply KL30
5O407a RWPTC Power - supply KL30
C87 Right thermal management unit 2
C88 Left thermal management unit 1
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
26P205 RThree-way valve - power supply KL30
27- -- -
28Z60 Br- Ground
29E207 WThree-way valve - PWM signal
30E213 WLeft three-way - valve fault feedback signal
31E323 RLow pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V+
32E358 BrLow pressure/ - temperature sensor ground
33- -- -
34- -- -
35P4A RLeft pump power - supply
36- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
5O407bR-WPTC Power supply KL30
6Z60Br-Compressor /WPTC controller
7PH03iY-PCAN3-H
8PL03iG-PCAN3-L
9E286W-High voltage interlock in from VDC
10----
11H07W-High voltage interlock out to left unit
12E136W-Pump feedback signal
13----
14E274W-Right pump PWM signal
15E140W-Fan feedback signal
16E272W-Fan PWM signal
17----
18E276W-Compressor exhaust temperature signal
19E264W-H_P feedback
20----
21----
22E111W-L_P feedback
23E122R-High pressure/ temperature sensor 5V+
24E238Br-High pressure/ temperature sensor ground
25E218bBr-Compressor exhaust temperature sensor
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1- -- -
2Z60 Br- Right pump ground
3- -- -
4P205b RCompressor power - supply KL30
C89 Right thermal management unit 1
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
26P205R-Three-way valve power supply KL30
27----
28Z60Br-Ground
29E207W-Three-way valve PWM signal
30E284W-Right three-way valve fault feedback signal
31E322R-Low pressure/ temperature sensor 5V+
32E338Br-Low pressure/ temperature sensor ground
33----
34----
35P4KR-Right pump power supply
36----
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
6----
7----
8----
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1O07R12V12V+
2E251dW-LIN
3O308bR-24V+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1O07R12V12V+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z55Br-Ground -
2----
3AL01G-HMI private CAN-L
4AH01Y-HMI Private CAN- H
5G01iR-KL15+
C90 Front millimeter wave radar
C91 Intelligent Battery Sensor
C92 IBS12V power supply
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
94E252W-Left battery pump PWM speed regulation
95----
96 97- E146- R- -- The PDU, TCU, middrive, and rear drive wake up the power supply
98----
99----
100----
101E274W-Right battery pump PWM speed regulation
102----
103----
104E293W-The left battery fan provides PWM speed adjustment
105E272W-Right battery fan PWM speed regulation
106----
107----
108----
109----
110----
111----
112----
113----
114E119W-Left 1/2/3CMU Wake power supply
115E147W-Right 1/2/3CMU+ Wake power supply
116O423cR-Power B+
117Z54Br-Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
82E123 RHigh pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V
83E124 R- Throttle electric
84E323 RLow pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V
85E122 RHigh pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V
86E125 R- Throttle 2 charge
87E322 RLow pressure/ - temperature sensor 5V
88E228 WMotor pump PWM - speed regulation
89E250 WMotor fan PWM - speed regulation
90E286 WHigh pressure - interlock out to right unit
91- -- -
92E207 WThermal management unit - three-way valve PWM signal
93- -- -
C93 VDC-1
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
118 O423b R- Power B+
119 Z54 Br- Ground
120 Z54 Br- Ground
121 O423a R- Power B+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
17----
18E143W-Motor liquid level alarm signal
19----
20E158W-Motor fan fault detection
21E155W-Motor pump fault feedback
22----
23E111W-Right low pressure PT sensor
24E264W-pressure signal Right high pressure PT sensor pressure signal
25----
26----
27PH03Y-PCAN3-H
28PL03G-PCAN3-L
29PH01Y-PCAN1-H
30PL01G-PCAN1-L
31TH07Y-GWCANFD7-H
32TL07G-GWCANFD7-L
33----
34E278W-Right fast charging port temperature check signal 1
35----
36E279W-Temperature check signal 4
37----
38E140W-Right battery fan fault feedback
39R209W-Rear axle pressure signal
40E215W-Temperature detection 2+
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 O423d R- Power B+
2 Z54 Br- Ground
3 O423e R- Power B+
4 Z54 Br- Ground
5 Z54 Br- Ground
6 - -- -
7 E251 W- IBS/AGSLIN cable
8 - -- -
9 PH02 Y- Battery PCAN2-H
10 PL02 G- Battery PCAN2-L
11 - -- -
12 - -- -
13 PH04a Y- PCAN4-H
14 PL04a G- PCAN4-L
15 E150 WLeft battery water - pump fault feedback
16 E213 WLeft thermal management unit - three-way valve fault feedback signal
C94 VDC-2
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
41E255W-Left compressor exhaust temperature sensor signal
42E237W-Throttle 1 signal
43E239W-Throttle 2 signal
44E139W-Thermal runaway signal
45E275Br-Throttle 1-
46----
47----
48E236Br-Throttle 2-
49----
50E258Br-High pressure/ temperature sensor
51E358Br-Low pressure/ temperature sensor
52----
53----
54E276W-Right compressor exhaust temperature sensor signal
55R208W-Front axle pressure signal
56----
57E157W-Parking switch normally closed - low effectiveness
58E154W-Parking switch normally on - highly effective
59G01aR-The KL15+ function is enabled for the VDC
60E211W-High pressure/ temperature sensor
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
61----
62E114W-Left fast charge temperature check 1 signal
63E238Br-High pressure/ temperature sensor ground
64E338Br-Low pressure/ temperature sensor ground
65E218Br-Compressor exhaust temperature sensor/right fast charge temperature check
66----
67E156Br-Left fast charge 1/2 temperature detection ground
68----
69----
70Z54Br-signally
71Z54Br-signally
72E136W-Right battery water pump fault feedback
73E208W-High voltage interlock in
74E284W-Right thermal management unit three-way valve fault feedback signal
75E126W-Battery liquid level alarm signal
76E138W-A+
77E113W-Left battery fan fault feedback
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
78E151W-PP- Connection confirmation signal
79E235W-Left low pressure PT sensor pressure signal
80----
81E128W-PP1
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1G2FR- B+
2--- -
3PL01G- PCAN1-L
4--- -
5M53W- Electronic lock +
6M54W- Electronic lock -
7E138aW- A+
8--- -
9--- -
10M52WCP-PLC - communication signal
11Z50Br- Ground
12--- -
13PH01Y- PCAN1-H
14--- -
15M56WElectronic lock - feedback OUT
16M55WElectronic lock - feedback IN
17--- -
18--- -
19--- -
20Z50Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1O323R-KL30+
2Z600W-Ground
3B614W-Trailer ABS fault signal output
4O64L-12V fault signal input
5----
6----
7----
8----
9----
10----
11----
12----
C95 PLC controller
C96 EVCC controller

20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 R 20 Br 20 Br

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
24Z610 Br- ECU-
25G2F R- Power B+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag e- Stitch definition
1----
2----
3U603W-Hang the EPB indicator
4----
5----
6----
7----
8U508Br-Hanging the EPB switch -
9G5DR-KL15
10----
11U511W-Example Hang EPB Hall 2
12U512W-Example Hang EPB Hall 1
13----
14U514W-Hang the EPB parking switch
15U515W-Suspending EPB release switch
16----
17----
18----
19TH08Y-Chassis CAN8-H
20TL08G-Chassis CAN8-L
21----
22----
23U523W-Hang up EPB switch +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
AB501 W- Clap alarm
B- -- -
C- -- -
D- -- -
E- -- -
F- -- -
G- -- -
HB215 WThe KL30 is - enabled
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O60 R- 12V power output
C97 Trailer EPB
C98 DCDC3 electrical interface
C99 Dcdc3-12 V power output

TL08 TH08

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
21 22M531 W M541 W- Electronic lock + - Electronic lock -
23M55 WElectronic lock - feedback IN
24M56 WElectronic lock - feedback OUT
25- -- -
26- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1- -- -
2M52 WCP-PLC - communication signal
3E151 WPP- Connection - confirmation signal
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7- -- -
8E114 WTemperature - detection 1+
9E156 BrTemperature - detection 1-
10E215 WTemperature - detection 2+
11E156 BrTemperature - detection 2-
12H051 WHigh voltage - interlock input
13- -- -
14H052 WHigh voltage - interlock output
15- -- -
16- -- -
17- -- -
18- -- -
19- -- -
20- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O418 R- Power KL30
2O325 WTraction seat slip - switch
3- -- -
4- -- -
C100 MCS fast charging port
C101 Traction seat slip switch
C102 Trailer cable socket 1

20W 20W 20W 20 W 20 W 20W 20 W 20R 20W

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O64 L- ABS power supply
2Z600 W- Ground
Wire Line Voltag- Stitch numb- Stitch definition color e er
1Z68 Br- Ground
2- -- -
3O316 R- Astern positive
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O73 R- Brake lamp
2- -- -
3O70 G- Right turn lamp
4O68 Br- Tail light
5O66 B- Side marker light
6O71 Y- Left turn signal
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O316 R- Astern positive
2Z68 Br- Ground
3- -- -
4- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z68 Br- Ground
2- -- -
3O316 R- Astern positive
C103 Trailer cable socket 2
C104 Left reverse light
C105 Right reverse lights
C106 The reverse buzzer

20 R 20 R 20 R

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVolta eg- Stitch definition
1M52W-CP1
2E218cBr-T34 Temperature detection signal -
3E278W-Temperature check signal 3
4E279W-Temperature check signal 4
5E128W-PP1
6M532W-Electronic lock 1+
7M542W-Electronic lock 1-
8M55W-Electronic lock 1 feedback IN
9M56W-Electronic lock 1 feedback OUT
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O318 WLicense plate light - +
2Z68 Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVolta eg- Stitch definition
1M531W-Electronic lock +
2M541W-Electronic lock -
1O318 WLicense plate light - +
2Z68 Br- Ground
C107 Left license plate lamp
C108 Right license plate lamp

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

C109 CCS1 Fast charging port

10 - - - -

C110 MCS charging connection

20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z68Br-Light with iron/low pressure alarm sensor
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1M532 W- Electronic lock +
2M542 W- Electronic lock -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z65Br-TCU/ tire pressure/ Middle axle/Rear axle module
1Z66Br-TCU/ tire pressure/ Middle axle/Rear axle module
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1M53 W- Electronic lock +
2M54 W- Electronic lock -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z67Br-EPB/ wear alarm
C111 CCS1 charging connection
C112 Fast charge connector
G01 Light and iron
G02 E-axle iron
G03 EPB takes iron

20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z60 BrDryer/dryer regeneration/ power distribution - unit/thermal management unit/ trailer power supply
1Z600 WThe trailer rides the - iron
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z56Br-Sensor bonding
1Z57Br-BMS/ Fast charge/ Air conditioning compressor ground
1Z610Br-Trailer EPB takes iron
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z58Br-Pump/air horn with iron
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1Z61 Br- Ground
1Z62 Br- Ground
1Z63 Br- Ground
1Z64 Br- Ground
G04 Thermal management - Auxiliary drive iron
G05 Battery fan with iron
G06 BMS- Fast charge iron - Sensor iron
G07 Motor water pump -EHPS iron
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z59Br-EHPS takes iron
1Z51Br-Motor fan 1 Take iron
1Z52Br-Motor fan 2 Take iron
1Z53Br-Motor fan 3 Take iron
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O4153 RBMS Power Supply - B+
2PH02 Y- Battery PCAN2-H
3- -- -
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7PL02 G- Battery PCAN2-L
8- -- -
9- -- -
10- -- -
11- -- -
12- -- -
13- -- -
14PH021 Y- Battery PCAN2-H
15Z57 Br- BMS ground
16E119 W- Wake up power
17E139d WThermal runaway - signal
18- -- -
19PL021 G- Battery PCAN2-L
20- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z50Br-Chassis electrical box with iron
2Z54Br-VDC bonding
3Z55Br-3D millimeter wave radar with iron
G08 Motor fan with iron
G09 VDC bonding
I_C_LP The chassis harness connects to the left battery pack harness
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O4153 RBMS Power Supply - B+
2PH021 Y- Battery PCAN2-H
3- -- -
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7PL021 G- Battery PCAN2-L
8- -- -
9 10- - - -- - - -
11- -- -
12 13 14- - - - - -- - - - - -
15 16Z57 Br E147a W- BMS ground - Wake up power
17E139d WThermal runaway - signal
18- -- -
19- -- -
20- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P4K RRight battery pump - +
2P4A R- Left battery pump +
3P4P RMotor water pump - 2
4P4F RMotor water pump - 1
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P4E R- Left battery fan 1+
2P4N RRight battery fan 1 - +
3P4D R- Left battery fan 2+
4P4M RRight battery fan 2 - +
I_C_RP The chassis harness connects to the right battery pack harness
I1_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 1
I2_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 2
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
16B432W-High pressure/ temperature
17B433W-sensor High pressure PT sensor - pressure signal
18B414cW-Sensor power supply 5V
19P204R-SOV+
20K102W-Former SOV-
21K103W-After SOV-
22----
23PL02G-Battery PCAN2-L
24PH02Y-Battery PCAN2-H
25----
26----
27----
28U109R-EBS KL30-1
29U108R-EBS KL30-2
30----
31----
32----
33H04W-High pressure interlock in from compressor
34E208W-High voltage interlock to VDC
35P205cW-Compressor power supply
36O75R-Car refrigerator KL30
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1B332c WCharging port - motor - Unlock
2B331c WCharging port - motor - lock
3O325 WTraction seat slip - switch
4- -- -
5- -- -
6B430 WExhaust - temperature signal
7B410 WEffluent - temperature signal
8B431 WInlet temperature - signal
9B436e Br- sensorily
10B209 WRight charging port - motor - Unlock
11B205 WRight charging port - motor - lock
12- -- -
13- -- -
14B412 WLow pressure/ - temperature sensor
15B413 WLow pressure PT - sensor - pressure signal
I3_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 3
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
19U901R-ECAS sensor power supply
20U902W-Right rear axle pressure signal
21U903W-Front axle pressure signal Left rear axle
22U906W-pressure signal
23U907Br-ECAS sensor ground
24----
25U523W-Hang up EPB switch +
26U514W-Hang the EPB parking switch
27B421W-Brake pad wear alarm signal
28----
29U910W-Left rear solenoid valve
30U911W-Central solenoid valve
31U913W-Right rear solenoid valve
32U915W-Front axle solenoid valve
33U904W-Suspension solenoid valve power supply
34----
35U515W-Suspending EPB release switch
36----
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U008 Br- EPB switch -
2U023 W- EPB switch +
3U012 Y- EPB1 is linear 1
4U011 G- EPB1 is linear 2
5U014 W- EPB parking switch
6U015 W- EPB release switch
7U603 WHang the EPB - indicator
8U511 WExample Hang - EPB Hall 2
9B106 WInterwheel lock - solenoid valve electrical
10U905 WLeft rear axle - height signal
11U908 WRight rear axle - height signal
12U909 WFront axle height - signal
13U003 WPrimary EPB - indicator
14- -- -
15- -- -
16U508 BrHanging the EPB - switch -
17U512 WExample Hang - EPB Hall 1
18B606 WTurn to oil tank - level sensor signal
I4_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 4

29 U910

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
13U213W-Front right ABS solenoid valve -AV
14U214W-valve Front right ABS solenoid valve -EV valve
15U215W-Front right ABS solenoid valve ground
16----
17----
18R209W-Rear axle pressure signal
19U202G-ESC-CAN-L
20U205Y-ESC-CAN-H
21U206R-ESC+
22U208Br-ESC-
23----
24----
25----
26----
27R208W-Front axle pressure signal
28U401G-1M modulator CAN-L
29U404Y-1M modulator CAN-H
30U407R-1M modulator +
31U410Br-1M modulator -
32U201G-2M modulator CAN-L
33U204Y-2M modulator CAN-H
34U203R-2M modulator +
35U207Br-2M modulator -
36----
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U301 WTrailer valve AV - valve
2U302 WTrailer valve EV - valve
3U303 RTrailer valve - grounding
4U304 BrTrailer valve power - supply
5U307 WTrailer valve - - pressure sensor power supply
6U308 WTrailer valve - - Pressure sensor signal
7U309 BrTrailer valve - - Pressure sensor grounded
8B614 W- Trailer failure light
9R211 BrLow pressure - sensor -
10U210 WFront left ABS - solenoid valve -AV valve
11U211 WFront left ABS - solenoid valve -EV valve
12U212 WFront left ABS - solenoid valve ground
I5_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 5
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
8 9G2E O407R R- -Main ADCU-B+ AGS-KL30
10O4153R-Battery pack -B+
11 12 13O4151 - -R - -- - -Battery pack -B+ - -
14 15- -- -- -- -
16----
17----
18----
19E251W-Active Grille Shutter LIN
20----
21----
22----
23----
24----
25----
26----
27----
28E124R-Acceleration power 1
29 30E237 E275W Br- -Acceleration signal 1 acceleratedly
31E125R-Acceleration power 2
32E239W-Acceleration signal 2
33E236Br-quickly2
34E157W-Parking switch 1
35E154W-Parking switch 2
36H01aW-Differential lock signal
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1P4S RMotor Fan 2 Power - supply
2P4H RMotor fan 1 Power - supply
3- -- -
4P4B RMotor Fan 3 Power - supply
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1G01a R- KL15-1
2G5Da R- KL15-3
3G2H R- T-GW B+1
4O420 R- T-GW B+2
5- -- -
6- -- -
7G2A R- EBS-KL15A
I6_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 6
I7_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 7
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
27 28TH06b Y - -Intelligent driving - CAN-H - -
29BL01 G- BCANFD1-L
30PL04 GElectric drive -
31BL02 GCAN4-L - BCANFD2-L
32- -- -
33K223a GAir conditioning - CAN-L
34TL07 G- GWCANFD7-L
35TL08 G- Chassis CAN8-L
36TL06b GIntelligent driving - CAN-L
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1- -- -
2AH01 YHMI Private CAN- - H
3AL01 G- HMI private CAN-L
4- -- -
5- -- -
6- -- -
7- -- -
8 9PH03 Y PL03 G- PCAN3-H - PCAN3-L
10 11- - - -- - - -
12- -- -
13 14- - - -- - - -
15- -- -
16- -- -
17- -- -
18- -- -
19- -- -
20BH01 Y- BCANFD1-H
21PH04 YElectric drive - CAN4-H
22BH02 Y- BCANFD2-H
23- -- -
24K222a YAir conditioning - CAN-H
25TH07 Y- GWCANFD7-H
26TH08 Y- Chassis CAN8-H
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O71 YTrailer left turn - signal
2O70 GTrailer right turn - signal
3O74 RTurn signal - controller power +
4B215 W- DCDC3 Enable +
5B501 W- DCDC3 fault alarm
6- -- -
7- -- -
I8_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 8
I9_C_B Chassis wiring harness connected to floor wiring harness 9

TL06b TH06b

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
8B216W-KL15 Power-on and power-off request
9B201W-KL30 Power-on and power-off request
10----
11----
12----
13----
14----
15----
16----
17----
18O62R-12V car power supply
19O318R-Position light
20B224W-Right turn signal
21B223W-Left turn signal
22----
23----
24O419R-Horn power supply
25O416R-AVAS power supply
26----
27----
28O301R-Near left light
29O302R-Right low light
30O303R-Left high beam
31O309R-Right high beam
32----
33O306R-Right DRL
34----
35O304R-Left DRL
36O317R-ADS lamp
Wire Line Stitch numb- colo erVoltag- Stitch definition r e
1 Z14 Br- Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z12Br-Ground
Wire Line Stitch numb- colo erVoltag- Stitch definition r e
1 - -- -
2 PH04d Y- PCAN4-H
3 R104a W- Left tweeter -
4 R103a W- Left tweeter +
5 U008 Br- EPB switch -
6 U023 WEPB Switching - power supply
7 U015 W- EPB release switch
8 U014 W- EPB parking switch
9 U603 WHang the EPB - indicator
10 R107a W- Left alto speaker +
11 R108a W- Left alto speaker -
12 P116b RCombination - switch - Shift -KL30
13 PL04d G- PCAN4-L
14 B326 WHazard alarm - switch light
15 B524 WHazard warning - switch
16 B314 WBlock the key work - indicator
17 B519 WUnlock the lock - switch
18 U011 G- EPB1 is linear 2
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z13Br-Ground

9.2.7 Instrument Harness

9.2.7.1 Instrument Harness Terminal Diagram

G14 Take the iron point 12
G15 Take the iron point 13
G16 Take the iron point 14
I1_IP_B Instrument harness to floor harness 1

20 R 20 R 20 R

StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
19U012Y-EPB1 is linear 1
20U508Br-Hanging the EPB switch -
21R229R12VCDC sends 12V power to wake up the CAR screen
22P314bR-CAR screen power supply KL30
23 24B810 B809R W- -Bluetooth power for doorknob Doorknob
25---Bluetooth ID -
26R201aW-Ambient Light LIN
27R116bR12VAmbient light 12V power supply
28B424W-Sliding door switch
29U523W-Hang up EPB switch +
30P102R-KL15 Power supply +
31R230R12VIPC wakes up power supply 12V+
32BL06aG-BCAN6-L
33BH06aY-BCAN6-H
34----
35----
36----
37P304bR-Bluetooth 、NFC Module B+
38U003W-Primary EPB indicator
39R102aW-Right tweeter -
40R101aW-Right tweeter +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
41R106a WRight squawker/ - surround-sound speaker -
42R105a WRight squawker/ - surround-sound speaker +
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1- -- -
2TTN GEthernet sends - signals -
3TTP YEthernet sends - signal +
4- -- -
5TH09a Y- GWCANFD9-H
6TRP YEthernet received - signal +
7- -- -
8- -- -
9TH04 Y- GWCANFD4-H
10TL04 G- GWCANFD4-L
11- -- -
12P305b R- IPC screen B+
13IH01 Y- INTCANFD1-H
14IL01 G- INTCANFD1-L
15- -- -
16TL09a G- GWCANFD9-L
I2_IP_B Instrument harness to floor harness 2
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
17 TRN GEthernet received - signal -
18 B522 WLeft window lift - switch
19 B507 WLeft window drop - switch
20 B521 WRight window lift - switch
21 B506 WRight window drop - switch
22 B520 WMain drive visor lift - switch
23 B404 WMain drive shade - lowering switch
24 K209 WTemperature - sensor signal in front car
25 K135d WFront car - temperature sensor
26 K138a RTemperature sensor inside the 12V front car 12V power supply
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1----
2B510W-Clock spring - horn switch
3U511W-Example Hang EPB Hall 2
4U512W-Example Hang EPB Hall 1
5BH05Y-ESCL-BCAN5-H
6P316R-ESCL Power supply B+
7R213R12VCDC sends 12V power to wake up IVI screen
8B218W-Backlight +
9B317eR12VClock spring 12V power
10----
11U402G-Steering Angle internal CAN-L
12U405Y-Steering Angle internal CAN-H
13U412R-Steering Angle power supply
14U409Br-Steering Angle ground
15U514W-Suspending EPB release switch
16BL05G-ESCL-BCAN5-L
17 18P308 P313R R- -HUD-KL30+ IVI screen -KL30
19 20B401 B434W W- -Wash switch Wiper switch
21B416Br-Left combination switch analog
22B415W-Turn switch signal
23B435W-Passing switch
24O325W-Traction seat slip switch
I3_IP_B Instrument harness to floor harness 3

22 G 20 R 22 Y 20 R

StitchWire L numb- c erine Volt olor eag- Stitch definition
25U515W -Hanging EPB release switch
26-- --
StitchWire numb- erLine Volt color eag- Stitch definition
1P314aR -Power KL30
2-- --
3-- --
4Z13aBr -Ground
5-- --
6-- --
7-- --
StitchWire L numb- c erine Volt olor eag- Stitch definition
1P313aR -IVI screen -KL30
2-- --
3-- --
4Z13fBr -Ground
5-- --
6-- --
7-- --
8R213R 12CDC sends 12V V power to wake up IVI screen
StitchWire numb- erLine Volt color eag- Stitch definition
1P305aR -IPC panel power B +
2-- --
3-- --
4Z13Br -Ground
5TH04Y -GWCANFD4-H
6TL04G -GWCANFD4-L
7-- --
8R230R 12CDC- Wake up V 12V power supply
IP01 IVI screen
IP02 CAR screen

8 R229 R 12V CDC sends 12V power to wake up the CAR screen

IP03 IPC screen

20 R 20 R

StitchWire Line numb- colo erVoltag- r eStitch definition
1R107a W-Left alto speaker +
2R108a W-Left alto speaker -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R103a W- Left tweeter +
2R104a W- Left tweeter -
22 R 22 Br 22 R
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1TH09 Y- GWCANFD9-H
2TL09 G- GWCANFD9-L
StitchWire Line numb- colo erVoltag- r eStitch definition
1P102k R-KL15 Power supply
2Z14c Br-Ground
3- ---
4- ---
5Z14d Br-Ground
6P102j R-KL15 Power supply
IP04 Left alto speaker
IP05 Etc ( electronic toll collection )
IP06 Left tweeter
IP07 CAN resistance A-120 Ω
IP08 OBD interface
StitchWire Li numb- co erne Voltag- lor eStitch definition
1- ---
2- ---
3TRP Y-Ethernet received signal +
4Z13g Br -Ground
5Z13h Br -Ground
6TH09a Y-GWCANFD9-H
7- ---
8- ---
9- ---
10- ---
11TRN G-Ethernet received signal -
12TTP Y-Ethernet sends signal +
13TTN G-Ethernet sends signals -
14TL09a G-GWCANFD9-L
15- ---
16P304a R-B+
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1B522W-Left window lift switch
2B507W-Left window drop switch
3B218cW-Backlight PWM
4Z12gBr-Ground
5B521W-Right window lift switch
6B506W-Right window drop switch
7O325W-Traction seat slip switch
8B404W-Main drive shade lowering switch
9B520W-Main drive visor lift switch
10----
11----
12 13- -- -- -- -
14----
15Z12gBr-Ground
16----
StitchWire Li numb- co erne Voltag- lor eStitch definition
1Z12a Br -Ground
2B424 W-Sliding door switch
3Z12b Br -Ground
4B218e W-Backlight +
IP09 Sliding door switch
IP10 Left center control switch
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1IH01d Y- INTCANFD1-H
2IL01d G- INTCANFD1-L
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1IL01b G- INTCANFD1-L
2P102c R- KL15 Power supply
3P308 R- HUD power KL30
4Z13d Br- Ground
5IH01b Y- INTCANFD1-H
6- -- -
7- -- -
8- -- -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1K138a R12V power supply 12V +
2Z14b Br- Ground
3K209 W- Temperature signal
4K135d W- sensorily
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U402 GSteering Angle - internal CAN-L
2- -- -
3- -- -
4U405 YSteering Angle - internal CAN-H
IP11 CAN resistance B-120 Ω
IP12 Temperature sensor in front car
IP13 HUD
IP14 Steering Angle sensor

20 R

StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
5U412RSteering Angle - power supply
6U409BrSteering Angle - ground
StitchWire Line numb- colorVoltag- Stitch definition e
1er - -- -
2- -- -
3B317e R12V 12V+
4B218a W- backlight
5R201d W- Ambient Light LIN
6Z12e Br- Ground
7- -- -
8- -- -
9- -- -
10- -- -
11B510 W- Horn switch
12- -- -
13Z12f Br- Ground
14- -- -
15- -- -
16- -- -
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1P304bR- Power B+
2--- -
3--- -
4--- -
5BH06aY- BCAN6-H
6BL06aG- BCAN6-L
7Z14fBr- Ground
8--- -
9B809W- Door handle ID
10B810RDoorknob power - supply
11--- -
12--- -
IP15 Bluetooth 、 NFC module
IP16 Clock-spring
IP17 Left combination switch

20 R 20 Br 20 Br

StitchWire Li numb- col erne Voltag- or eStitch definition
1- ---
2- ---
3- ---
4- ---
5B435 W-Passing light/high beam switch
6B401 W-Wash switch
7B434 W-Wiper switch signal
8- ---
9B416 Br -simulatively
10B415 W-Left/right turn switch
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- Stitch definition e
1BH05Y- ESCL-BCAN5-H
2--- -
3P316R- Power B+
4BL05G- ESCL-BCAN5-L
5--- -
6Z14eBr- Ground
20 R
StitchWire Li numb- col erne Voltag- or eStitch definition
1PH04d Y-PCAN4-H
2PL04d G-PCAN4-L
3P116b R-Power KL30
4- ---
5- ---
6- ---
7- ---
8Z12d Br -Ground
9P102a R-Power supply KL15
10- ---
11- ---
12- ---
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- Stitch definition e
1BH05Y- ESCL-BCAN5-H
2BL05G- ESCL-BCAN5-L
IP18 Shift switch
IP19 ESCL
IP20 CAN resistance C-120 Ω

20 Br 22 Y

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
19U514 WMain EPB parking - is always open
20- -- -
21U014 WMain EPB parking -
22- -is always open - -
23- -- -
24U015 WThe primary EPB is - released normally
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1U023 WExample Suspend - the EPB switch +
2U523 WPrimary EPB - switch +
3B218d W- Key backlight +
4U603 WHang the EPB - indicator
5Z12c Br- Key backlight -
6U008 Br- Ground
7U011 W- Master EPB Hall 2
8U012 W- Main EPB Hall 1
9U511 WExample Hang - EPB Hall 2
10U003 WPrimary EPB - indicator
11U512 WExample Hang - EPB Hall 1
12U508 Br- Ground
13B314 W- Lockout light
14B524 WHazard warning - lamps switch message
15B519 WDoor lock switch - letter
16B326 WHazard warning - lamps
17- -- -
18U515 WMain EPB brake is - normally closed
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R116b RAmbient light 12V 12V power supply
2R201a W- Ambient Light LIN
3Z14a Br- Ground
4- -- -
IP21 Right center control switch
IP22 Ambient light 1
IP23 Right tweeter
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R101a W- Right tweeter +
2R102a W- Right tweeter -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1R105a W- Right squawker +
2R106a W- Right squawker -
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1BH06 Y- BCAN6-H
2BL06 G- BCAN6-L
IP24 Right squawker
IP25 CAN resistance D-120 Ω

22 Y 22 G

1PH02gY-Battery PCAN2-H
2PL02gG-Battery PCAN2-L
StitchWire numb- erLine V coloroltag- Stitch definition e
1O415dRBMS Power Supply - B+
2PH02Y- Battery PCAN2-H
3--- -
4--- -
5--- -
6--- -
7PL02G- Battery PCAN2-L
8--- -
9--- -
10--- -
11--- -
12--- -
13--- -
14--- -
15Z57Br- BMS ground
16E147aW- Wake up power
17E139dWThermal runaway - signal
18--- -
19--- -
20--- -

9.2.8 Right Battery Pack Cable Harness

9.2.8.1 Cable Harness Terminal Diagram of the Right Battery Pack

I1_RP_C Right battery pack wiring harness chassis wiring harness 1
RP06 CAN resistance -120 Ω

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

1 O415a R- Power B+
2 E119a W- Wake up power
3 - -- -
4 - -- -
5 E139a WThermal runaway - signal
6 PH02a Y- Battery PCAN2-H
7 Z57 Br- Ground
8 - -- -
9 - -- -
10 - -- -
11 - -- -
12 PL02a G- Battery PCAN2-L
StitchWire numb- erLine Volt color eag- Stitch definition
1O415R -BMS Power Supply B+
2PH02Y -Battery PCAN2-H
3-- --
4-- --
5-- --
6-- --
7PL02G -Battery PCAN2-L
8-- --
9-- --
10-- --
11-- --
12 13- -- - - -- -
14PH021Y -Battery PCAN2-H
15Z57Br -BMS ground
16E119W -Wake up power
17E139dW -Thermal runaway signal
18-- --
19PL021G -Battery PCAN2-L
20-- --
Wire Line Stitch numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1 O415b R- Power B+
2 E119b W- Wake up power

9.2.9 Cable Harness for the Left Battery Pack

9.2.9.1 Cable Harness Terminal Diagram of the Left Battery Pack

I1_LP_C Connect the left battery pack wiring harness to chassis wiring harness 1
LP01 Upper left battery pack 1

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition

LP02 Lower left battery pack 2
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
3----
4----
5E139bW-Thermal runaway signal
6PH02bY-Battery PCAN2-H
7Z57Br-Ground
8----
9----
10----
11Z57Br-Identification ground
12PL02bG-Battery PCAN2-L
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1PH02cY-Battery PCAN2-H
2PH021Y-Battery PCAN2-H
3----
4----
5PL02cG-Battery PCAN2-L
6PL021G-Battery PCAN2-L
7----
8----
LP07 CAN short-circuiter A
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1P107R-Seat power B+
2B423W-Off seat switch signal
3----
4G5DR-The ECU is enabled
5----
6----
7----
8Z35Br-Ground
9----
10B425W-Seat belt signal
11----
12----
13----
14----
15----
16----
17----
18----
19----
20----
21----
22----
23----
24----
1B423W- Off seat switch +
2Z35Br- Off seat switch -
3P107R- Seat ECU+
4Z35Br- Seat ECU-
5G5DR- ECU-KL15
6B425W- Seat belt signal +
7Z35Br- Seat belt signal -
8--- -
9--- -

9.2.10 Seat Wiring Harness

9.2.10.1 Seat Harness Terminal Diagram

I_S_B Seat harness connects to floor harness
S01 Seat

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition 16 R 16 Br 16 R 16Br 20 Br 20Br 20 R

StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1001 R- Power source
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- Stitch definition e
1001 R- Power source

9.2.11 Left Battery Positive Cable Harness

9.2.11.1 Left Battery Positive Harness Terminal Diagram

BE01 Electrical box T1
BE12 Battery positive electrode
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z20Br-Ground
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z20Br-Ground

9.2.12 Cable Harness of the Left Battery Negative Terminal

9.2.12.1 Left Battery Negative Harness Terminal Diagram

BE02 Battery negative electrode
G17 Undercarriage
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Q04BR-Power source
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1Q04BR-Power source

9.2.13 Smart Electrical Box Wiring Harness

9.2.13.1 Wiring Harness Terminal Diagram of the Smart Electrical Box

BE10 Electrical Box T3
BE11 Electrical box T1
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- Stitch definition e
1O04RDCDC1 power - supply
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- Stitch definition e
1L20bRDC/DC2 power - supply
StitchWire numb- erLine Vo colorltag- Stitch definition e
1L20RDC/DC2 power - supply

9.2.14 DC-DC Positive Cable Bundle 1

9.2.14.1 DC-DC Positive Harness 1 Terminal Diagram

BE07 Electrical box T2

Stitch Wire numb- er Line color Voltag- e Stitch definition 1 O04 R - DCDC1 power supply

BE08 DCDC2+
BE09 DCDC1+
I1_BE_B DCDC positive wire harness connects to floor wire harness 1
I2_BE_B DCDC positive wire harness connects to floor wire harness 2
StitchWire numb- erLine colorVoltag- eStitch definition
1L20aR-DC/DC2 power supply
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z22 Br-Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z22 Br-Ground

9.2.15 DC-DC Negative Wire Harness 1

9.2.15.1 DC-DC Negative Harness 1 Terminal Diagram

BE04 DCDC1 negative electrode
G21 Undercarriage
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z22 Br-Ground
StitchWire Line numb- color erVoltag- eStitch definition
1Z22 Br-Ground

9.2.16 DC-DC Negative Wire Harness 2

9.2.16.1 DC-DC Negative Harness 2 Terminal Diagram

BE03 DCDC2 negative electrode
G20 Undercarriage

9.3 Position of Cable Harness and Connector

9.3.1 Top Cover Wiring Harness

9.3.1.1 Cable Harness Layout For the Top Cover

20 W 20 Br

9.3.2 Left Ceiling Harness

9.3.2.1 Cable Harness Layout For the Left Ceiling

16 R 20 R 20 R 20 R 16 R 20 Br

9.3.3 Right Ceiling Harness

9.3.3.1 Right Ceiling Cable Harness Layout Diagram

9.3.4 Bumper Harness

9.3.4.1 Bumper Harness Layout

20 W 20 Br 20 R 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 R

9.3.5 Floor Wiring Harness

9.3.5.1 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram

10 Br 14 R 14 Br 16 R 16 Br 16 R

9.3.5.2 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued

14 Br

9.3.5.3 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 1

20 R 12 R 14 R 12 R 12 R

9.3.5.4 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 2

M8 L22 R 4 M8 Q02A R 6 Q02B R 6 B201 16 20 R 2385337-1(black)-TE Left view 270- Floor 20 R 2326910-4(purple)-TE Oms-floor adapter Z03 12 Br

9.3.5.5 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 3

10 Br 12 Br 20 R 20 Br 20 R 20 R 20 R

9.3.5.6 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 4

12 R 12 R 14 R 14 R 20 R 20 R 20 Br 14 Br

9.3.5.7 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 5

20 W 20 R

9.3.5.8 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 6

20 Br 16 R 16 R 14 R 14 R 2 O4152

9.3.5.9 Floor Cable Harness Layout Diagram Continued 7

20 R 20 R

9.3.6 Chassis Wiring Harness

9.3.6.1 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout

9.3.6.2 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued

B331a B332a Z600 10W Z56 16Br Z61014Br 20W 20W 20W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W

9.3.6.3 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued 1

9.3.6.4 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued 2

20 W

9.3.6.5 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued 3

9.3.6.6 Chassis Wiring Harness Layout Continued 4

29 U910 TL06b TH06b 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 W 20 R 20 Br 20 Br 20 W

9.3.7 Instrument Harness 9.3.7.1 Instrument Wiring Harness Layout

20 R 20 R 20 R 20 R 20 R

9.3.7.2 Instrument Wiring Harness Layout Continued

20 R 20 Br 20 R

9.3.8 Right Battery Pack Cable Harness

9.3.8.1 Cable Harness Layout For the Right Battery Pack

9.3.9 Cable Harness for the Left Battery Pack

9.3.9.1 Cable Harness Layout of the Left Battery Pack

9.3.10 Seat Wiring Harness

9.3.10.1 Seat Cable Harness Layout

16 R 16 Br

16 R
16 Br
20 Br
20 Br 20 R

9.3.11 Left Battery Positive Cable Harness

9.3.11.1 Left Battery Positive Cable Harness Layout

9.3.12 Cable Harness of the Left Battery Negative Terminal

9.3.12.1 Left Battery Negative Wiring Harness Layout

9.3.13 Smart Electrical Box Wiring Harness

9.3.13.1 Wiring Harness Layout of Smart Electrical Box

9.3.14 DC-DC Positive Cable Bundle 1 9.3.14.1 DC-DC Positive Cable Harness 1 Layout

9.3.15 DC-DC Negative Wire Harness 1

9.3.15.1 DC-DC Negative Wire Harness 1 Layout

9.3.16 DC-DC Negative Wire Harness 2

9.3.16.1 DC-DC Negative Cable Harness 2 Layout